Professional Documents
Culture Documents
Revision 4
Service Manual
Product Overvew
Technology
Periodical Service
Parts Replacement and Cleaning
Adjustment
Troubleshooting
Error Code
Service Mode
Installation
1
Appendix
Application
This manual has been issued by Canon Inc. for qualified persons to learn technical theory,
The following paragraph does not apply to any countries where such provisions are
installation, maintenance, and repair of products. This manual covers all localities where the
products are sold. For this reason, there may be information in this manual that does not
apply to your locality.
Trademarks
The product names and company names used in this manual are the registered trademarks
Corrections
This manual may contain technical inaccuracies or typographical errors due to improvements
or changes in products. When changes occur in applicable products or in the contents of this
Copyright
manual, Canon will release technical information as the need arises. In the event of major
This manual is copyrighted with all rights reserved. Under the copyright laws, this manual may
changes in the contents of this manual over a long or short period, Canon will issue a new
not be copied, reproduced or translated into another language, in whole or in part, without the
Caution
Use of this manual should be strictly supervised to avoid disclosure of confidential
information.
Explanation of Symbols
Explanation
Check.
Symbols
Explanation
1. Each chapter contains sections explaining the purpose of specific functions and the
relationship between electrical and mechanical systems with reference to the timing of
operation.
In the diagrams,
represents the path of mechanical drive; where a signal
name accompanies the symbol, the arrow
indicates the direction of the
electric signal.
Check visually.
The expression "turn on the power" means flipping on the power switch, closing the
front door, and closing the delivery unit door, which results in supplying the machine with
power.
2. In the digital circuits, '1' is used to indicate that the voltage level of a given signal is
"High", while '0' is used to indicate "Low". (The voltage value, however, differs from
circuit to circuit.) In addition, the asterisk (*) as in "DRMD*" indicates that the DRMD
signal goes on when '0'.
controller PCB and from the output of the DC controller PCB to the loads.
The descriptions in this Service Manual are subject to change without notice for product
improvement or other purposes, and major changes will be communicated in the form of
Turn on the power.
Blank Page
Contents
Pickup------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 1-8
Name of Parts-------------------------------------------------------------------1-9
Operation----------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-11
0 Safety Precautions
CDRH Act------------------------------------------------------------------------0-2
Laser Safety---------------------------------------------------------------------0-2
Handling of Laser System---------------------------------------------------0-2
Turn power switch ON--------------------------------------------------------0-3
Safety of Toner------------------------------------------------------------------0-3
1 Product Overvew
Product Lineup------------------------------------------------------------------1-2
Option---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-3
Pickup delivery / image reading options----------------------------------------------- 1-3
Function expanding option---------------------------------------------------------------- 1-4
Feature---------------------------------------------------------------------------1-5
Specification---------------------------------------------------------------------1-6
Specification-------------------------------------------------------------------------Weight / Size------------------------------------------------------------------------Productivity (Print speed)--------------------------------------------------------Paper type----------------------------------------------------------------------------
1-6
1-7
1-7
1-8
Service Mode-----------------------------------------------------------------------1-14
Service mode menu------------------------------------------------------------------------1-14
Description display of service mode item---------------------------------------------1-14
Enhancement of I/O information--------------------------------------------------------1-15
Subdivide COPIER > OPTION > BODY items--------------------------------------1-16
Security measure---------------------------------------------------------------------------1-16
Screen display switch (level1 <-> level2)---------------------------------------------1-16
2 Technology
Basic Configuration------------------------------------------------------------2-2
Overview------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 2-5
Features---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-5
Specifications / configuration------------------------------------------------------------- 2-5
HDD--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-9
Boot sequence------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-9
Shutdown sequence-----------------------------------------------------------------------2-10
Controls------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 2-11
Flow of Image Data------------------------------------------------------------------------ 2-11
Security Features (Encryption Key, Certificate, Password Protection)--------2-12
High capacity HDD (Option)-------------------------------------------------------------2-20
Service Operations----------------------------------------------------------------2-29
When Replacing Parts --------------------------------------------------------------------2-29
Consumables--------------------------------------------------------------------------------2-29
Points to note at servicing----------------------------------------------------------------2-29
Overview-----------------------------------------------------------------------------2-30
Overview--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------2-30
Specification---------------------------------------------------------------------------------2-31
Various Controls--------------------------------------------------------------------2-32
Overview--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------2-32
Laser ON / OFF control-------------------------------------------------------------------2-33
Horizontal scanning synchronous control--------------------------------------------2-33
Vertical Scanning Synchronous Control----------------------------------------------2-34
APC (Auto Power Control) control-----------------------------------------------------2-35
Laser scanner motor control-------------------------------------------------------------2-36
BD correction control----------------------------------------------------------------------2-38
Laser shutter control-----------------------------------------------------------------------2-39
Image tilt correction control--------------------------------------------------------------2-40
Service Works----------------------------------------------------------------------2-42
Periodically replaced parts---------------------------------------------------------------2-42
Consumables--------------------------------------------------------------------------------2-42
Periodical service list----------------------------------------------------------------------2-42
Operation at parts replacement---------------------------------------------------------2-42
Points to note at servicing----------------------------------------------------------------2-42
Overview-----------------------------------------------------------------------------2-43
Overview--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------2-43
Specifications--------------------------------------------------------------------------------2-43
Parts configuration-------------------------------------------------------------------------2-44
Print process---------------------------------------------------------------------------------2-44
Controls------------------------------------------------------------------------------2-46
Overview--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------2-46
Pre-exposure--------------------------------------------------------------------------------2-46
Primary charging----------------------------------------------------------------------------2-47
Developing/drum----------------------------------------------------------------------------2-49
Transfer/separation------------------------------------------------------------------------2-55
Drum cleaning-------------------------------------------------------------------------------2-60
Image stabilization control----------------------------------------------------------------2-61
Toner supply assembly--------------------------------------------------------------------2-72
Waste toner feeding assembly----------------------------------------------------------2-75
Other controls--------------------------------------------------------------------------------2-77
Service work------------------------------------------------------------------------2-78
Periodically replaced parts---------------------------------------------------------------2-78
Consumable parts--------------------------------------------------------------------------2-78
List of periodical service works----------------------------------------------------------2-78
Overview-----------------------------------------------------------------------------2-79
Features---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------2-79
Specifications--------------------------------------------------------------------------------2-80
Major parts configuration-----------------------------------------------------------------2-80
Controls------------------------------------------------------------------------------2-82
Fixing temperature control: overview--------------------------------------------------2-82
Standby temperature control------------------------------------------------------------2-82
Print temperature control-----------------------------------------------------------------2-83
Down sequence control-------------------------------------------------------------------2-85
Fixing film edge cooling control---------------------------------------------------------2-87
Detection of fixing assembly-------------------------------------------------------------2-87
Film unit engagement / disengagement control-------------------------------------2-88
Protection features-------------------------------------------------------------------------2-88
Service work------------------------------------------------------------------------2-89
Periodically replaced parts---------------------------------------------------------------2-89
Consumable parts--------------------------------------------------------------------------2-89
List of periodical service works----------------------------------------------------------2-89
When replacing parts----------------------------------------------------------------------2-89
Overview-----------------------------------------------------------------------------2-91
Features---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------2-91
Specification---------------------------------------------------------------------------------2-91
Parts Configuration-------------------------------------------------------------------------2-92
Paper Path-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------2-94
Interval Speed Up--------------------------------------------------------------------------2-95
Various Controls--------------------------------------------------------------------2-96
Overview--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------2-96
2-122
Login by Password Authentication--------------------------------------------------- 2-122
Login by RLS Authentication----------------------------------------------------------- 2-123
Initial Display Languages of SMS---------------------------------------------------- 2-125
MEAP--------------------------------------------------------------------------2-114
Changes---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-114
Overview------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 2-114
SSL Always Enabled--------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-114
Message Display by USB Driver Setting Change-------------------------------- 2-114
Addition of Functions-------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-114
Differences in MEAP Application Data Management when Using New
Functions----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-115
Addition of SMS Functions------------------------------------------------------------- 2-115
Authentication Information Sharing Function-------------------------------------- 2-116
Function Supporting Deep Sleep Mode-------------------------------------------- 2-117
Outline--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-117
SMS------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 2-117
SSO-H Management-------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-118
Outline--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-139
Procedure downloading / removing an invalidated license file---------------- 2-139
Outline--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-141
Limitations------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-172
Service Mode Menu Transmission Function--------------------------------------- 2-172
Outline--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-155
Formatting the HDD/Flash PCB------------------------------------------------------ 2-156
HDD/ Flash PCB replacement procedure------------------------------------------ 2-156
FAQ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-185
Troubleshooting------------------------------------------------------------------ 2-187
Error code and strings---------------------------------------------------------- 2-190
Updater----------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-193
Overview--------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-193
Outline--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-193
Preparation------------------------------------------------------------------ 2-198
Maintenance----------------------------------------------------------------- 2-213
FAQ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2-214
FAQ on Installing Firmware------------------------------------------------------------ 2-214
FAQ on Installing MEAP Application/System Option---------------------------- 2-215
FAQ on General Matters of Updater------------------------------------------------- 2-216
3 Periodical Service
Consumable Parts and Cleaning Parts-----------------------------------3-2
Cleaning Parts------------------------------------------------------------------3-8
Switch---------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-34
PCB-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-37
Conector-----------------------------------------------------------------------------4-43
How to remove------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-84
Cleaning the Vertical Path Sensor and the Lightproof Sheet--------- 4-145
Before cleaning the Vertical Path Sensor and the Lightproof Sheet--------- 4-145
How to Clean------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 4-145
Option------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-165
5 Adjustment
Main Controller-----------------------------------------------------------------5-2
HDD-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------Main controller PCB 1------------------------------------------------------------Main controller PCB 2------------------------------------------------------------DC controller PCB-----------------------------------------------------------------TPM PCB-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
5-2
5-2
5-3
5-3
5-3
5-4
5-4
5-4
5-4
5-4
5-4
6 Troubleshooting
Initial Check---------------------------------------------------------------------6-2
Test Print-------------------------------------------------------------------------6-3
Overview------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 6-3
Steps to select the test print TYPE--------------------------------------------- 6-3
How to use the test print---------------------------------------------------------- 6-4
16 gradations (TYPE=4)------------------------------------------------------------------- 6-4
Full half tone (TYPE=5)-------------------------------------------------------------------- 6-4
Grid (TYPE=6)-------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 6-5
MCYBk horizontal stripe (TYPE=10)--------------------------------------------------- 6-5
64-gradations (TYPE=12)----------------------------------------------------------------- 6-6
Full color 16-gradations (TYPE=14)---------------------------------------------------- 6-6
Troubleshooting items--------------------------------------------------------6-7
The 35-mm uneven image density due to the periodic deflection of the
developing cylinder ------------------------------------------------------------------------- 6-9
Uneven Image Density at 95 mm of Paper Leading Edge ----------------------- 6-9
Missing color due to the laser exposure failure ------------------------------------6-10
Blank area cased by poor secondary transfer -------------------------------------- 6-11
Fixing wrinkle due to deterioration of rib on Fixing Inlet Guide------------------6-12
Soiled image due to the oil attached to the Fixing Separation Guide---------6-13
Operation Error---------------------------------------------------------------------6-14
Noise around the Fixing Film Unit------------------------------------------------------6-14
Cannot close the Process Unit----------------------------------------------------------6-15
Productivity decrease at stack delivery in thin paper (52g/m2 ~ 63g/m2) mode
< Staple Finisher C1/Saddle Stitch Finisher C1>-----------------------------------6-16
Overview-----------------------------------------------------------------------------6-17
Overview of Version Upgrade-----------------------------------------------------------6-17
Writing System Software------------------------------------------------------------------6-18
Download Mode-----------------------------------------------------------------------------6-20
System Software Components----------------------------------------------------------6-21
Note on Download Process--------------------------------------------------------------6-22
Troubleshooting--------------------------------------------------------------------6-52
Error Code: E753-0001-------------------------------------------------------------------6-52
7 Error Code
Overview-------------------------------------------------------------------------7-2
Outline--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 7-2
Outline------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 7-2
Location code--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 7-2
Location code--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 7-2
Points to Note When Clearing MN-CON----------------------------------------------- 7-3
Points to Note When Clearing HDD---------------------------------------------------- 7-3
Measures for E747-------------------------------------------------------------------------- 7-3
Error Code-----------------------------------------------------------------------7-4
Jam Code---------------------------------------------------------------------7-114
8 Service Mode
Overview-------------------------------------------------------------------------8-2
Service Mode Menu---------------------------------------------------------------Service mode item explanations-----------------------------------------------I/O information enhancement---------------------------------------------------Display of Error Code/Alarm Code description-----------------------------COPIER > OPTION > BODY, Item Segmentation-------------------------Security features--------------------------------------------------------------------
8-2
8-2
8-3
8-3
8-4
8-4
COPIER--------------------------------------------------------------------------8-7
DISPLAY------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 8-7
VERSION-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-7
USER------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-25
ACC-STS-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-25
ANALOG--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-27
CST-STS--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-28
HV-STS----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-28
CCD--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-29
DPOT------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-32
DENS------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-35
MISC-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-39
HT-C-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-40
IO--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-55
ADJUST------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-79
ADJ-XY----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-79
CCD--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-80
IMG-REG-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-90
DENS------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-93
BLANK-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-98
V-CONT---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------8-99
PASCAL------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-104
COLOR-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-105
HV-PRI-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-110
HV-TR--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-114
FEED-ADJ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-126
CST-ADJ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 8-131
MISC----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-131
EXP-LED------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 8-134
FUNCTION------------------------------------------------------------------------ 8-135
INSTALL------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-135
CCD------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 8-140
LASER--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-142
DPC------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 8-143
CST------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 8-145
CLEANING--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-145
FIXING-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-146
PANEL--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-147
PART-CHK--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-147
CLEAR-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-149
MISC-R-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-153
MISC-P-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-158
SYSTEM------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 8-159
OPTION---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-161
FNC-SW------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 8-161
DSPLY-SW--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-170
NETWORK--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-174
SOUND-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-182
ENV-SET------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 8-182
CLEANING--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-183
FEED-SW----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-183
IMG-SPD------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 8-184
IMG-RDR----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-186
IMG-MCON--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-187
IMG-DEV------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 8-192
IMG-TR-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-195
IMG-FIX------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-196
CUSTOM----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-201
USER---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-203
CST------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 8-219
ACC------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 8-222
INT-FACE----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-226
LCNS-TR----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-227
TEST-------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-237
PG-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-237
NETWORK--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-239
COUNTER------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-240
TOTAL--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-240
PICK-UP------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 8-241
FEEDER------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 8-241
JAM------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 8-242
MISC----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-242
JOB------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-243
DRBL-1-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-244
DRBL-2-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-247
T-CNTR------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-251
V-CNTR------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-251
V2-CNTR----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-252
LF--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-252
FEEDER---------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-253
DISPLAY--------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-253
ADJUST---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-254
FUNCTION------------------------------------------------------------------------ 8-255
SORTER--------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-258
ADJUST---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-258
FUNCTION------------------------------------------------------------------------ 8-262
OPTION---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-263
BOARD----------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-264
OPTION---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8-264
9 Installation
How to Check this Installation Procedure--------------------------------9-2
Margin Adjustment with Multi Purpose Tray (1st side; mechanical adjustment)-9-30
Margin Adjustment with Multi Purpose Tray (2nd side)---------------------------9-32
Lead-edge Margin Adjustment (1st side)---------------------------------------------9-32
Lead-edge Margin Adjustment (2nd side)--------------------------------------------9-33
Troubleshooting of Network-----------------------------------------------------9-38
Checking Connection of the Network Cable-----------------------------------------9-38
Ping Operation Procedure----------------------------------------------------------------9-38
Checking Network Setting of the Host Machine------------------------------------9-38
Checking Network Function on the Main Controller-------------------------------9-38
Installation Procedure-------------------------------------------------------------9-61
When installing the Keyboard---------------------------------------------------9-63
Points to Note when HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit has been
Installed---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 9-182
Checking the Contents--------------------------------------------------------- 9-182
HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit------------------------------------------------ 9-182
Points to Note when HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit has been
Installed---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 9-202
Checking the Contents--------------------------------------------------------- 9-202
Removable HDD Kit--------------------------------------------------------------------- 9-202
HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit------------------------------------------------ 9-204
Points to Note when HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit has been
Installed---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 9-253
Checking the Contents--------------------------------------------------------- 9-253
Option HDD (250GB)-------------------------------------------------------------------- 9-253
Removable HDD Kit--------------------------------------------------------------------- 9-254
HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit------------------------------------------------ 9-256
Points to Note when HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit has been
Installed---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 9-230
Checking the Contents--------------------------------------------------------- 9-230
Points to Note when HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit has been
Installed---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 9-282
Checking the Contents--------------------------------------------------------- 9-282
Option HDD (80GB)---------------------------------------------------------------------- 9-282
HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit-------------------- 9-283
Installing the System Software Using the SST (Only when installing
HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit)-------------------------------------- 9-303
Checking the Security Version (Only when installing HDD Data
Encryption & Mirroring Kit)----------------------------------------------------- 9-303
Checking the Security Mark (Only when installing HDD Data Encryption
& Mirroring Kit)-------------------------------------------------------------------- 9-303
Setting the Mirroring------------------------------------------------------------- 9-304
Reporting to the System Administrator at the End of the Work (Only
when installing HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit)----------------- 9-304
Execution of Auto Adjust Gradation (Only when installing HDD Data
Encryption & Mirroring Kit)----------------------------------------------------- 9-304
Points to Note when HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit has been
Installed---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 9-305
Checking the Contents--------------------------------------------------------- 9-305
Option HDD (250GB)-------------------------------------------------------------------- 9-305
HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit-------------------- 9-306
Points to Note when HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit has been
Installed---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 9-329
Checking the Contents--------------------------------------------------------- 9-329
Option HDD (80GB)---------------------------------------------------------------------- 9-329
Removable HDD Kit--------------------------------------------------------------------- 9-330
HDD Mirroring Kit HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit----------------------- 9-332
Installing the System Software Using the SST (Only when installing
HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit)-------------------------------------- 9-359
Checking the Security Version (Only when installing HDD Data
Encryption & Mirroring Kit)----------------------------------------------------- 9-359
Checking the Security Mark (Only when installing HDD Data Encryption
& Mirroring Kit)-------------------------------------------------------------------- 9-359
Setting the Mirroring------------------------------------------------------------- 9-360
Reporting to the System Administrator at the End of the Work (Only
when installing HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit)----------------- 9-360
Execution of Auto Adjust Gradation (Only when installing HDD Data
Encryption & Mirroring Kit)----------------------------------------------------- 9-360
Points to Note when HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit has been
Installed---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 9-361
Appendix
Service Tools---------------------------------------------------------------------- II
Special Tools---------------------------------------------------------------------------- II
Solvents and Oils--------------------------------------------------------------------- IV
Adjustment/Maintenance----------------------------------------------------- XXXVII
Adjust Image Quality------------------------------------------------------------------- XXXVII
Adjust Action---------------------------------------------------------------------------- XXXVIII
Maintenance---------------------------------------------------------------------------- XXXVIII
Set Destination-------------------------------------------------------------------XLVIII
Set Destination----------------------------------------------------------------------------XLVIII
Safety Precautions
Act
CDRH
Safety
Laser
of Laser System
Handling
power switch ON
Turn
to Note About
Points
Turning Off the Main
Power Switch
of Toner
Safety
When Handling a
Notes
Lithium Battery
Before it Works
Notes
Serving
imageRUNNER ADVANCE
C5051/5045/5035/5030
Series
CDRH Act
The Center for Devices and Radiological Health of the US Food and Drum Administration put
When servicing the area around the laser assembly, be sure to turn off the main power.
into force regulations concerning laser products on August 2, 1976. These regulations apply
The machine's covers that can reflect laser light are identified by means of a warning label
to laser products manufactured on and after August 1, 1976, and the sale of laser products
(Figure). If you must detach a cover showing the label, be sure to take extra caution during
not certified under the regulations is banned within the Untied States. The label shown here
the work.
indicates compliance with the CDRH regulations, and its attachment is required on all laser
products that are soled in the United States.
CANON INC.
30-2,SHIMOMARUKO,3-CHOME,OHTA-KU,TOKYO,JAPAN
MANUFACTURED:
THIS PRODUCT CONHORMS WITH DHHS RADIATION
PERFORMANCE STANDARD 21CFR CHAPTER 1
SUBCHAPTER J.
F-0-1
F-0-2
Laser Safety
Laser beam radiation may pose a danger to the human body. A laser scanner mounted on the
machine is sealed with the protection housing and external cover to prevent the laser beam
from leaking to the outside. The laser beam never leaks out of the scanner as far as users
operate the machine normally.
Safety of Toner
About Toner
The machine's toner is a non-toxic material made of plastic, iron, and small amounts of dye.
CAUTION:
CAUTION:
Do not turn off the main power switch while the progress bar is indicated, during which
access is made to the HDD. If deprived of power, the HDD can suffer a fault (E602).
The following warnings are given to comply with Safety Principles (EN60950).
CAUTION:
Wenn mit dem falschen Typ ausgewechselt, besteht Explosionsgefahr.
Gebrauchte Batterien gem der Anleitung beseitigen.
Product Overvew
Lineup
Product
Feature
Specifications
of Parts
Name
1-2
Product Lineup
Host machine
T-1-1
Model type
C5051
C5045
C5035
C5030
35 / 35ppm
30 / 30ppm
F-1-1
1-2
1-3
Option
No.
8
9
7
2
17
Brand name
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19 Booklet Finisher-C1
20 Staple Finisher-C1
10
11
16
15
20
12
18
19
14
13
F-1-3
1-3
1-4
No.
6
5
2
1
Voice
Operation
Unit
Voice
Guidance
Unit
Voice
Operation
PCB
24
Voice
Guidance
PCB
23
22
12
13
14
21
9
20
15
16
17
19
18
F-1-4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
Brand name
Voice Operation Kit-C1
Voice Guidance Kit-F1
Removable HDD Kit-AC1
2.5inch/80GB HDD-C1
2.5inch/250GB HDD-D1
Copy Card Reader-C1
Copy Card Reader Attachment-B1
Utility Tray-A1
Multimedia Reader/Writer-A1
USB Device Port-B1
ColorPASS-GX300/PS-GX300
Key Switch Unit-A2
HDD Mirroring Kit-D1
HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit-C1
Expansion Bus-F1
19
20
21
22
23
24
imagePASS-B1
IPSec Board-B2
Wireless LAN Board-B1
Signal Interface Kit-A1
Serial Interface Kit-K1
PCL Printer Kit-AE1
Direct Print Kit (for PDF/XPS)-H1
Barcode Printing Kit-D1
Encrypted Secure Print Software-D1
IMPOSE(Ver2.7) Roman
Universal Send Digital User Signature
Kit-C1
Universal Send Advanced Feature Set-D1
Universal Send Security Feature Set-D1
Remote Operators Software Kit-B1
Remote Operators Software Kit-A3
HOTFOLDER VER.2
HDD Data Erase Kit-A1
Remote Fax Kit-A1
PS Printer Kit-AE1
Secure Watermark-A1
Document Scan Lock Kit-A1
ACCESS MANAGEMENT SYSTEM Kit-B1
Web Access Software-H1
1110
No.
Brand name
14
15
16
17
18
T-1-4
MEMO:
There is a combination restriction when installing No1,2,5 to 6. (Part No5 can be
installed with any of those. Other than No5, only one of them can be installed.)
1-4
1-5
Feature
Features at servicing
Improvement on upgrade operation
Product feature
Product feature
High-speed support
Developing Assembly
ACR control is adopted.
Developing Assembly/Drum
Unit are separated.
Highly-durable drum is
adopted(BK only).
High image quality
Low running cost
Main Controller
Next generation controller
is adopted.
Bk
ITB
Primary Transfer Roller
detaching control is
adopted.
Low running cost
To prevent the communication error due to following factors, new type connector is adopted.
Loose connector / disconnection due to vibration during transportation
Imperfect connection of connector at service operation
F-1-5
1-5
1-6
Specification
Specification
Host machine installation
method
Photosensitive medium
Exposure method
Charging method
Developing method
Transfer method
Separation method
Pickup method
Fixing method
Delivery method
Drum cleaning method
Transfer cleaning method
Toner type
Toner supply method
Toner level detection function
Leading edge image margin
Left edge image margin
Leading edge blank width
Left edge blank width
Warm-up time
First print time
Image gradation
Print resolution
Maximum image guaranteed
area
Maximum printable area
Paper type (cassette)
Desktop type
Phi 30 OPC
Laser exposure
Roller charging
Dry type 2-component jumping development
Intermediate belt transfer
(Primary transfer: roller transfer, secondary transfer: roller transfer)
Curvature separation + static eliminator
Separation retard
On demand fixing (Ceramic nitride heater + Phi 30 elastic film)
Facedown (inner delivery)
Cleaning blade
Cleaning blade
Non-magnetic negative toner
Toner container method
Yes
4.0+1.5/-1.0mm
2.5+/-1.5mm
4.0+1.5/-1.0mm
2.5+/-1.5mm
At power-ON, 38 sec or less
image RUNNER ADVANCE C5051/C5045 Series B/W :4.0sec
Color : 6.5sec
image RUNNER ADVANCE C5035/C5030 Series B/W :5.5sec
Color : 8.9sec
256 gradation
1200 x 1200dpi
300 x 450.5mm
305 x 450.5mm
Thin paper (52 to 63g/m2), Recycled paper (64 to 81g/m2), Color
paper, Pre-Punched paper, Bond paper, Plain paper (64 to 105g/
m2), Heavy paper (106 to 209g/m2), Textured paper, Transparency
film, Tab paper, Envelope
Paper type (multi-purpose tray) Thin paper (52 to 63g/m2), Recycled paper (64 to 81g/m2), Color
paper, Pre-Punched paper, Bond paper, Plain paper (64 to 105g/
m2), Heavy paper (106 to 256g/m2), Textured paper, Tracking
paper, Coater paper,Labels paper, Washi paper,Transparency film,
Tab
1-6
1-7
Weight / Size
Product name
iR ADVANCE C5051/C5045
iR ADVANCE C5035/C5030
Duplex Color Image Reader Unit-B1
Color Image Reader Unit-B1
Color Image Reader Unit-B2
Cassette Feeding Unit-AD1
Paper Deck Unit-B1
Envelope Feeder Attachment-D1
Inner Finisher-A1
Staple Finisher-C1
Booklet Finisher-C1
Buffer Pass Unit-G1
External 2 Hole Puncher-B1
External 2/3 Hole Puncher-B1
Width
(mm)
Depth
(mm)
Height
(mm)
WeightApprox.
(Kg)
620
620
618
620
620
620
372
439
602
545
756
489
107
756
735
735
588
536
564
700
603
307
540
656
656
493
623
656
806
806
251
207
72
251
473
81
234
1071
1071
184
908
1071
153
170
38.8
23
13.7
27.5
37
1.2
13.5
47
76
4
7.2
76
Size
Mode
Paper
basis
Paper type
weight(g/
m2)
Plain paper
1-sided
Thick paper
A3 / LDR
Plain paper
2-sided
Thick paper
52-81
82-105
105-163
164-209
210-256
52-81
82-105
105-163
164-209
210-256
Size
Mode
Plain paper
1-sided
Thick paper
A4 / LTR
Plain paper
2-sided
Thick paper
52-81
82-105
105-163
164-209
210-256
52-81
82-105
105-163
164-209
210-256
Size
Mode
ImageRUNNER ADVANCE
C5051
C5045
MultiMultiCassette purpose Cassette purpose
tray
tray
Color, B/W Color, B/W Color, B/W Color, B/W
51.0
51.0
25.5
20.0
51.0
51.0
25.5
20.0
-
31.0
31.0
15.5
15.5
10.0
31.0
31.0
15.5
15.5
-
45.0
45.0
25.5
20
45.0
45.0
25.5
20
-
25.5
25.5
12.5
10.0
25.5
25.5
12.5
10.0
-
19.5
19.5
9.8
9.8
6.5
19.5
19.5
9.8
9.8
-
25.5
25.5
12.5
10.0
25.5
25.5
12.5
10.0
-
19.5
19.5
9.8
9.8
6.5
19.5
19.5
9.8
9.8
T-1-7
T-1-6
Paper
basis
Paper type
weight(g/
m2)
ImageRUNNER ADVANCE
C5051
C5045
MultiMultiCassette purpose Cassette purpose
tray
tray
Color, B/W Color, B/W Color, B/W Color, B/W
31.0
31.0
15.5
15.5
10.0
31.0
31.0
15.5
15.5
-
Paper
basis
Paper type
weight(g/
m2)
Plain paper
1-sided
Thick paper
A4 / LTR
Plain paper
2-sided
Thick paper
Plain paper
1-sided
Thick paper
A3 / LDR
Plain paper
2-sided
Thick paper
52-81
82-105
105-163
164-209
210-256
52-81
82-105
105-163
164-209
210-256
52-81
82-105
105-163
164-209
210-256
52-81
82-105
105-163
164-209
210-256
ImageRUNNER ADVANCE
C5035
C5030
MultiMultiCassette purpose Cassette purpose
tray
tray
Color, B/W Color, B/W Color, B/W Color, B/W
35.0
35.0
17.0
17.0
35.0
35.0
17.0
17.0
17.5
17.5
8.5
8.5
17.5
17.5
8.5
8.5
-
20.0
20.0
10.0
10.0
10.0
20.0
20.0
10.0
10.0
13.0
13.0
6.5
6.5
6.5
13.0
13.0
6.5
6.5
-
30.0
30.0
17.0
17.0
30.0
30.0
17.0
17.0
17.5
17.5
8.5
8.5
17.5
17.5
8.5
8.5
-
20.0
20.0
10.0
10.0
10.0
20.0
20.0
10.0
10.0
13.0
13.0
6.5
6.5
6.5
13.0
13.0
6.5
6.5
T-1-8
1-7
1-8
Paper type
Pickup
Usable paper types are shown on the next page and later.
Paper type(g/
m2)
182.0 to 209.9
210.0 to 279.2
279.3 to 432.0
432.1 to 487.7
182.0 to 209.9
210.0 to 279.2
279.3 to 432.0
432.1 to 487.7
182.0 to 209.9
210.0 to 279.2
279.3 to 432.0
432.1 to 487.7
182.0 to 209.9
210.0 to 279.2
279.3 to 432.0
432.1 to 487.7
487.8 to 630.0
139.7 to 181.9
182.0 to 210.0
210.1 to 297.0
297.1 to 330.2
139.7 to 330.2
Plain 1 (52 to
81)
Thin, Recycled,
Pre-Punched,
Color
Plain 2 (82 to
105)
Bond
Heavy 1 (106
to 163)
Textured
Heavy 2 (164
to 209)
Labels, Tab
T-1-9
Transparency
Size
A4, LTR
B4, A4R, A5R,
B5, B5R, EXEC,
LGL, LTRR,
STMTR, 16K,
16KR
A3, LDR, EXE,
12No18, 8K
A5, STMT,
OFFICIO,
E-OFFICIO,
B-OFFICIO,
M-OFFICIO,
A-OFFICIO,
A-LTR, A-LTRR,
GLTR-R, GLTR,
GLGL, AFLS,
FLS, Irregular
size 1-1, Irregular
size 1-2, Irregular
size 1-3, Irregular
size 1-4, Irregular
size 2-1, Irregular
size 2-2, Irregular
size 2-3, Irregular
size 2-4, Irregular
size 3-1, Irregular
size 3-2, Irregular
size 3-3, Irregular
size 3-4, Irregular
size 4-1, Irregular
size 4-2, Irregular
size 4-3, Irregular
size 4-4, Irregular
size 5
SRA3, EXEC-R
A4, LTR
MultiCassette Cassette
Cassette Cassette
purpose
Feeding Feeding
1
2
tray
Unit 1
Unit 2
Paper
Deck
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
1-8
1
Paper type(g/
m2)
1-9
Size
MultiCassette Cassette
Cassette Cassette
purpose
Feeding Feeding
1
2
tray
Unit 1
Unit 2
Yes
No
No
No
No
Paper
Deck
Name of Parts
External View
No
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
12
13
11
F-1-6
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
Yes*
No
No
No
No
No
No
T-1-10
DADF
Main Power Switch
Stack Bypass Tray
Paper Drawer4
Paper Drawer3
Paper Drawer2
Paper Drawer1
[8]
[9]
[10]
[11]
[12]
[13]
[14]
Front Cover
Front Upper Cover
Output Tray
Control Panel
Rear Cover
Rear Rower Cover
Breaker
1-9
1-10
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[45]
[44]
[43]
[42]
[41]
[40]
[39]
[38]
[37]
[36]
[35]
[34]
Bk
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
[10]
[11]
[12]
[13]
[14]
[15]
[16]
[17]
[23]
[24]
[25]
[18]
[19]
[20]
[21]
[22]
[23]
[24]
[25]
[26]
[27]
[28]
[29]
[30]
[31]
[32]
[33]
F-1-7
1-10
1-11
Operation
Power Switch
F-1-8
This machine is equipped with the Main Power Switch, Control Panel Power Switch and
Environment Heater Switch.
[1] Main Power Switch
This switch is used to turn OFF / ON the power of host machine.
[2] Control Panel Power Switch
This switch is to shift the machine to power-save mode or to restore it to normal mode.
[3] Environment Heater Switch
Environment Heater Switch is to supply and shut the power to Cassette Heater and
Reader Heater.
1-11
1-12
Main Menu
iR ADVANCE C5051 / 5045 / 5035 / 5030 Series
Control Panel
iR ADVANCE C5051 / 5045 / 5035 / 5030 Series
1
15
14
3
4
Fax / I-Fax
Inbox
9
13
12
11
10
5
F-1-9
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
[10]
[11]
[12]
[13]
[14]
[15]
ID (authentication) Key
Touch Panel Display
Screen Brightness Adjustment Dial
FAX Volume Adjustment Key
Status Check / Stop Key
Custom Menu Key
Main Menu Key
F-1-10
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
Copy
Scan and Send
Scan and Store
Access Stored Files
Fax / I-Fax Inbox
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
Secured Print
Scanner
Set / Regi. Short Cut
Tutorial
1-12
1-13
Copy
Scan and Send
Scan and Store
Access Stored Files
Fax / I-Fax Inbox
----Secured Print
Scanner
Set / Regi. Short Cut
Tutorial
Settings/Registration
Select an item to set
TOP
Preferences
Adjustment/Maintenance
Function Settings
T-1-11
Set Destination
1/1
Management Settings
4
5
OK
Log in
F-1-11
[1]
[2]
[3]
Preferences
Adjustment / Maintenance
Function Settings
[4]
[5]
Set Destination
Management Settings
iR ADVANCE
C5151/5045/5035/5030 Series
Preferences
Adjustment / Maintenance
Set Destination
Function Settings
Management Settings
T-1-12
1-13
1-14
Service Mode
It is possible to browse the usage method of service mode items in service mode.
Following is the changed and added items compared to a conventional machine.
Enables to display the description of initial screen, large category, middle category and small
category.
Select any from initial screen > large category > middle category > small category, and press [i]
(information button) so that the description of selected item (hereinafter called service mode
contents) is displayed.
e.g.) COPIER > DISPLAY > Version screen
TOP screen
1) Press [i]
4) A detailed explanation on the
item will be displayed (usage
scenarios, instructions,
settings range, etc.).
2) Minor item titles
are displayed.
F-1-12
[MODELIST] :
This mode is newly added from this machine.
This mode has the function to browse the usage method of service mode items etc.
New functions described later are available in MODELIST mode.
[MODELIST CLASSIC] :
This is the same mode with a conventional machine.
New functions described later are not available in MODELIST CLASSIC mode.
When [MODELIST] or [MODELIST CLASSIC] is pressed, initial screen of each mode is
displayed.
1-14
1-15
Device classification
This mode is to check the signal input / output status of used electrical parts (sensor / motor /
fan etc.).
Searchability for target electrical parts has been improved in COPIER > I / O.
In addition, it is possible to check the signal input / output status on a screen.
Electrical parts
classification
F-1-14
1-15
1-16
DISPLAY
COPIER
I/O
FEEDER
FEEDER
SORTER
BOARD
DISPLAY
FNC-SW
I/O
DSPLY-SW
ADJUST
NETWORK
FUNCTION
SOUND
OPTION
ENV-SET
TEST
TEST
CLEANING
COUNTER
COUNTER
FEED-SW
SORTER
ADJUST
BOARD
FUNCTION
OPTION
BODY
ING-SPD
ING-RDR
ING-MCON
ING-LSR
ING-DEV
ING-TR
ING-FIX
CUSTOM
F-1-15
With current machines, it is quite difficult to find out the target item since there are large
number of items in COPER > OPTION > BODY (related to host machine specification).
With this machine, all items in BODY are classified into 15 categories by usage to reach a
target item.
Middle
category name
FEED-SW
Noise reduction
Network
Individual measure
SOUND
NETWORK
CUSTOM
Details
Stack performance, motor speed fine-adjustment,
delivery function etc.
Noise related
Network setting, IFAX, SEND, E-RDS etc.
For individual measure
T-1-13
Security measure
To prevent illegal access to service mode, a password can be specified.
Related service mode
COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > PSWD-SW (level 1)
Password type setting when entering the service mode
<Setting range>
0: No password [Default]
1: Service engineer
2: System administrator + Service engineer
Middle
category name
Function switch
FNC-SW
DSPLY-SW
IMG-FIX
IMG-TR
IMG-DEV
IMG-LSR
IMG-RDR
IMG-MCON
IMG-SPD
CLEANING
Environment settings
ENV-SET
Details
When the level 1 screen is displayed and <Level 1> on the upper right screen is pressed, a
screen is switched to level 2 screen.
1-16
1-17
Display
I/O
<VERSION >
Adjust
Function
<1/ 8>
DC-CON
43.44
R-CON
00.52
PANEL
4C.50
FEEDER
44.46
SORTER
54.53
NIB
42.4E
DECK
--.--
MN-CONT
4E.4D
Option
Test
Counter
<LEVEL 1 >
i
Display
I/O
<VERSION >
Adjust
Function
<1/ 2>
LANG-CS
53.43
LANG-DA
41.44
LANG-EL
4C.45
LANG-ES
53.45
LANG-ET
54.45
LANG-FI
49.46
LANG-HU
55.48
LANG-KO
4F.4B
Option
Test
Counter
<LEVEL 2 >
i
F-1-16
1-17
Technology
Configuration
Basic
System
Controller
Exposure System
Laser
Formation System
Image
System
Fixing
Feed System
Pickup
MEAP
RDS
Embedded
2-2
Basic Configuration
Basic sequence
Sequence at Power-On
Functional Configuration
Reader
Main power switch ON
The machine may broadly be divided into the following functional system blocks; document
exposure system block, controller system block, laser exposure system block, image
SREADY
formation system block, fixing system block and pickup/feed system block.
Reader Motor
Scanning Lamp
Backwarding
HP (Shading position)
Controller system
Option
board
F-2-2
Power ON
Fixing
system Fixing
Target temperature
Laser scanner
unit2
Cassette1
Flow of paper
Flow of signal
Laser beam
Transfer
WMUP
Fixing heater:
100 degree C
WMUPR
PSTBY
Fixing heater:
160 degree C(51/45ppm machine)
135 degree C(35/30ppm machine)
Engage
Fixing motor(M21)
Fixing heater(H3)
Pickup
Auto adjustment
Pickup/
feed
system
Cassette2
F-2-1
HP (Shading position)
Printer Unit
Duplexing
feed
DC
controller
Shift shading
Fixing shading
White plate dust
detection control
Shading correction
Gain correction
Offset correction
Delivery
Main
controller
1/2
HDD
Backwarding
HP Sensor
Exposure lamp
CCD
SSTBY
Forwarding
Forwarding
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
2-2
2
Period Definition
2-3
Print sequence
Definition
SREADY
(Scanner Ready)
SSTBY
(Scanner Standby)
WMUP
(Warm-up)
An interval in which the drive system stops, and it ends when the
completion requirements of the fixing assembly startup is fulfilled.
WMUPR
(Warm-up Rotation)
An interval in which the drive system starts, and the bias adjustment
is executed.
PSTBY
(Printer Standby)
Reader
Start Key ON
Reader Motor
SSTBY
SREADY
SCRW
Forwarding Backwarding Backwarding
Scanning Lamp
HP Sensor
Optical unit position
SCFW
SSTBY
Forwarding Forwarding Forwarding
Backwarding Forwarding
Backwarding
ON
HP (Shading)
ON
End of the image
Stream reading position
HP (Shading)
F-2-4
Printer
Start key ON
PSTBY
Target temperature
Fixing motor(M21)
PINTR
LSTR
PSTBY
Fixing heater:
175 degree C(51/45ppm machine)
155 degree C(35/30ppm machine)
disengage
Fixing heater(H3)
Auto adjustment
The following adjustments to work, depending on the status of the product.
[1] Discharge current corrections
[2] Patch sensor correction control
[3] ATR control
[4] Primary transfer ATVC control
[5] Secondary transfer ATVC control
[6] Secondary transfer clearning
[7] D-max control
[8] ARCDAT control
[9] D-Half control
[10] Color displacement correction control
F-2-5
2-3
2
Period Definition
2-4
Definition
SREADY
(Scanner Ready)
An interval in which the shading correction is executed after the Start key
is pressed.
SSTBY
(Scanner Standby)
PSTBY
(Print Standby State)
PRINTR
(Printer Intial Rotation)
An interval between the reception of the print request signal and the state
the image signal is sent.
An interval in which all toner is transferred on the paper, and the paper is
delivered.
LSTR
(Last Rotation)
An interval between the completion of the paper delivery and the stop of
all drives.
T-2-2
2-4
2-5
Controller System
Specifications / configuration
PCBs
Overview
Features
Using a new controller enables high speed PDL processing, high image quality and high
functionality.
F-2-8
Parts name
Main Controller PCB 1
Riser PCB
Main controller PCB 1 controls the entire system. Main controller PCB 2 mainly controls
image processing.
Main controller PCBs 1 and 2 are connected through the riser PCB.
This configuration improves installability / removability of the main controller PCBs.
(Slot-in / out)
F-2-7
2-5
2-6
Memory
BAT1
J2031
DDR2-SDRAM
512 MB + 512 MB
DDR2-SDRAM (M0)
512 MB
J13
J11
J12
BAT1
DDR2-SDRAM (P)
512 MB
F-2-9
Parts name
DDR2-SDRAM (M1)
1 GB
F-2-10
DDR2-SDRAM
Parts name
DDR2-SDRAM (M1)
T-2-4
2-6
2-7
I/F, connector
External I/F
J1002
Bypass I/F
/ open I/F
External I/F
Internal I/F
UI
J1003
Internal I/F
J1010
Mini-USB
J1007
Reader
J3003
Image
analysis I/F
Fan
J1015
LAN
J1017
Flash
PCI
FAX
(1 line)
J17
Riser
J14
J1020
TPM
J1022
USB (D)
J13
Riser
J1019
USB (H)
J1021
J1025
FAX-USB
(2-4 line)
J1026 J1027
CC-VI Coin
J16
F-2-11
No.
Function, specifications
J1000
No.
F-2-12
Function, specifications
Jack No.
J14
J16
J17
J1000
J1010
J3003
Function, specifications
Riser PCB I/F
Mini-USB I/F for 2 to 4-lines FAX
Product name: Advanced G3 2nd Line Fax Board-AE1, Advanced G3 3rd / 4th Line
Fax Board-AE1
FAX-USB I/F for 1-line FAX
Product name: Advanced G3 FAX Board-AE1
Image analysis PCB I/F
Product name: Image Data Analyzer Board-A1
Bypass PCB I/F
Mount the open I/F PCB when using ColorPASS-GX300 / imagePASS-B1
Reader I/F
T-2-7
T-2-6
2-7
2-8
Expansion Bus
PCB
Image
analysis PCB
IPSec PCB
IPSec PCB
F link PCB (main)
Wireless LAN PCB
Name
Voice operation PCB
Voice guidance PCB
Expansion Bus PCB
IPSec PCB
F-2-14
Name
Open I/F PCB
F link PCB (main)
F link PCB (sub)
Image analysis PCB
T-2-8
2-8
2-9
HDD
Boot sequence
The partitions for Advanced Box and the distribution server are added.
User Box (same as the existing machine) area is 23GB and Advanced Box area is 9GB.
Advanced Box area can be increased by installing the high-capacity HDD option.
FSTDEV
TMP_GEN
TMP_PSS
TMP_FAX
APL_SEND
APL_MEAP
APL_GEN
APL_KEEP
APL_LOG
IMG_MNG
PDLDEV
FSTCDEV
THUMDEV
BOOTDEV
CRBDEV
APL_CDS
- Starting IPL, OS
[Flash PCB]
MEAP application
Universal data
MEAP saving data
System log
- Starting application
F-2-15
- Starting BIOS
[Main controller PCB 1]
NOTE :
Due to the high speed startup, the progress bar and the activating PCB are not synchronized.
For this reason, the progress bar cannot be utilized for troubleshooting.
See the following error code list for the troubleshooting.
2-9
2-10
Shutdown sequence
Before turning OFF the main power switch, it is necessary to perform HDD completion
Error description
processing (to prevent damage on the HDD), cooling of the internal printer (to prevent fixed
Error in HDD
Failure in recognizing HDD
Boot partition (BOOTDEV) is not found at startup.
There is no system software for the main CPU.
There is no system software for the sub CPU.
Failure in memory (main controller PCB 1)
Capacity shortage of DDR2-SDRAM (1GB required)
Failure in memory (main controller PCB 2)
Capacity shortage of DDR2-SDRAM (M0, M1) (1GB required)
Capacity shortage of DDR2-SDRAM (M0, M1) (1.5GB required)
Error in board (Flash PCB)
IPL (Initial Program Loader) is not found.
OS is not found.
toner due to high temperature) and exhaust (to prevent smeared image due to chemical
reaction of ozone in the machine and photosensitive drum). This sequential processing is
called shutdown sequence and was executed on the legacy models manually (by holding
down the power supply switch on the Control Panel for a specific duration).
When the main power switch is turned OFF on the main body, Main Controller PCB 1 detects
this operation and then the shutdown sequence starts / executes automatically.
In addition, hardware shutdown sequence exists. If shutdown sequence is not executed
normally due to occurrence of software trouble, the machine is shut down in 110 seconds at a
T-2-10
maximum by the timer in the AC Driver PCB. If it is not shut down within 110 seconds, failure
of the AC Driver PCB is suspected.
.
2-10
2-11
Controls
SEND
Copy
HDD
Reader
To DC Controller
HDD
HDD
writing/reading
Reader
HDD
writing/reading
I/F
Main Controller
PCB 1
Main Controller
PCB 1
Riser PCB
Main Controller
PCB 2
F-2-19
F-2-17
To DC Controller
HDD
FAX
Print
Network
To DC Controller
I/F
HDD
writing/reading
HDD
Extension
processing
raster conversion
Tile
Rendering
I/F
HDD
writing/reading
Main Controller
PCB 1
Riser PCB
Main Controller
PCB 2
Image processing
Color space conversion,
Image 2 level cell,
Image multi level cell,
Image composition,
Resolution conversion,
Image rotation,
Pixel skipping with 7x7 filter
F-2-20
LAN
Controller
Main Controller
PCB 1
Box
Main Controller
PCB 2
Riser PCB
LAN
Controller
Image processing
R
esolution conversion,
I
mage rotation,
JPEG
compression/extension
Data conversion
Tile raster conversion
JPEG encode
Image processing
Resolution
conversion,
Image
rotation,
JPEG
compression/extension
Riser PCB
Main Controller
PCB 2
F-2-18
2-11
2-12
Protection)
This machine provides the two types of TPM settings. See the figure below for the security
Overview
The main controller PCB 1 of the host machine holds a new PCB named TPM PCB. TPM
stands for Trusted Platform Module, which collectively refers to the chip set for generating
and storing encryption keys and computing public key encryption.
TPM PCB
(Temporarily stored in HDD)
TPM PCB
Public Key
Backup Key
for TPM failure
Backup
Common
Key
Backup for
Common Key
Password
Password
SRAM
HDD
F-2-22
F-2-21
When the TPM setting is ON, the TPM key is enabled to secure information with the three
The TPM PCB protects security information (passwords, certificates, and encryption keys)
keys. Therefore, the security information held in each machine is safely protected.
stored in the HDD and SRAM. Note that this PCB does not protect set, registered or stored
The security information in this setting can be accessed by the three keys and multiple
The TPM key embedded in the chip is used to encrypt / decrypt security information. The
Each data is stored in the specified location (enclosed with blue dots in the figure above).
TPM key is protected from illegal access in a virtually perfect manner, thus the security
Since the data in the upper layer are linked to those in the lower layer, security information is
information of the host machine is securely protected even in the following conditions.
When the HDD and / or the main controller PCB is taken out from the host machine and
For the backup purpose, the backup key is temporarily stored also in the HDD to be prepared
installed in the MFP with the different serial number (the model information held in the TPM
for a TPM failure (only for the initial failure after the TPM setting is ON).
This key can be backed up using the USB flash drive. Once backed up, the backup key is
When the system of the host machine is hacked via the network
stored in the SRAM is cleared when the main controller PCB 2 (SRAM) is replaced or after
Management Setting > Data Management > TPM Setting -> ON (OFF by default)
The common key information is stored in the HDD as well as the SRAM. The common key
MN-CON clear. However, the common key stored in the HDD automatically restores that in
the SRAM so that the security information is decodable even after servicing. Note that the
2-12
2-13
security information is not decodable correctly in case the HDD is failed or formatted because
the public key information stored in the HDD is cleared. If this occurs, execute Initialize All
Data / Settings in user mode to set the TPM setting to OFF. This will maintain the password
information in the SRAM even after the password information is initialized.
Backup
Setting / Registration
Printer settings can be exported
Backup of
Common Key
Favorites stored in the web browser (only when the web browser is enabled) (see *3)
Password
Password
SRAM
*1 Each of address books can be exported. If the address book is seen as a part of device
HDD
*2 Among settings in the main menu, only Frequently-used Setting under Scan and
When the TPM setting is OFF, the TPM key is disabled. Thus, the security information is
Under this setting, the security information held in this machine is protected at the level
equivalent to the conventional machines.
The security functionality in this setting is configured by the common key and multiple
2) Select Export from Custom Menu of the Remote UI to back up Custom Menu Setting
Information.
3) Log in to the system as Administrator from User Management of Advanced Box on Remote
UI. Then, execute Export to back up User Information of Advanced Box.
The common key information is stored in the HDD as well as the SRAM. The common
key stored in the SRAM is cleared when the main controller PCB 2 (SRAM) is replaced or
after MN-CON clear. Since the common key stored in the HDD will automatically restore
the common key in the SRAM, the security information is decodable correctly even after
servicing. Unlike the case that the TPM setting is set to ON, the password information stored
in the HDD is initialized when the HDD is replaced or formatted. However, the password
information is maintained in the SRAM.
TPM Setting for Security Information
The security information can be protected with or without TPM by switching between TPM
settings in Setting / Registration mode.
When the TPM setting is ON
The security functionality is enabled in 4 levels (TPM key, public key, common key and
password).
When the TPM setting is OFF
The security functionality is enabled in 2 levels (common key and password).
2-13
2
Works before / after introduction
Execute the following in Setting / Registration mode (TPM setting is OFF by default).
1. Enable the feature
2. Backup the TPM key
3. Restore the TPM key
4. Disable the feature
2-14
1. Enable Functionality
MEMO: Setup of System Management PIN
It is recommended for users (administrators) to set the system management PIN
before installing TPM. The TPM key is backed up after the TPM setting is set to ON.
However, the key backup is permitted only once. Unless the key is properly backed up,
users other than administrators may illegally obtain the backup file. To avoid such risks
effectively, the system management PIN should be set.
1)Set Management Setting > Data Management > TPM Setting to ON.
Setting / Registration
F-2-24
F-2-25
2-14
2-15
3) Click [Password] to enter the password (4-12 digits). Then, enter the password for
The TPM key backup file can be stored only in USB flash drive (supported file system:
confirmation.
FAT32).
Note that this file requires the memory free space of several MBs.
F-2-26
CAUTION:
Ensure to insert only one USB flash drive.
If the backup job is started with 2 or more USB flash drives connected, the message is
shown to notify that the backup is failed.
MEMO:
The USB flash drive holds the TPM key backup files by serial number. Thus, backup
files for multiple machines can be saved in a USB flash drive.
F-2-28
2)Click [Back up TPM Key] in Management Setting > Data Management > TPM Setting.
F-2-27
F-2-29
5) Click [OK] on Backup Completion Screen and remove the USB flash drive.
2-15
2
CAUTION: The following may cause failures in backup.
If any of the following is detected, the backup process is aborted and the message
and the cause for the failure are shown on the screen. Take an appropriate measure to
recover this.
The USB flash drive is not inserted to the machine
2-16
3. Restore of TPM key
Procedure is about the same as the backup work.
Difference between restore work and backup work:
Rebooting is necessary (turn OFF and then ON the main power) after completion of restore
work.
2) Select the following: Management setting > Data management > TPM setting; and
No key is found
F-2-30
2-16
2
CAUTION: The following may cause failures in restoration.
If any of the following is detected, the restoration process is aborted and the message
and the cause for the failure are shown on the screen. Take an appropriate measure for
recovery.
2-17
4. Disable the feature
To set OFF for the TPM setting, execute [Initialize All Data / Settings].
2-17
2
Key pair and server certificate registered in Management Setting (Setting/ Registration) >
[Device Management] > [Certificate Settings]
Steps of data restoration after recovery
The restoration process triggers Setting/ Registration > Management Setting > Data
2-18
Overview of Actions taken against Troubles
Location
with failure
TPM PCB
Management > Import/ Export > Import/ Export Setting/ Registration on the UI.
The data listed below cannot be restored, thus should be set again.
Environment Settings
Paper settings
Display settings in the destination to save
HDD
Main
Controller
PCB 2
(SRAM)
TPM Setting = ON
Initially E746-0031 is
shown on the screen.
When the power is turned
OFF/ON after the TPM
PCB is replaced, E7460032 is shown (only when
the TPM setting is set to
ON).
1.Replace the HDDs.
1. Replace the
Initially E602-xxxx is shown
2.Format the HDD.
HDDs.
(the different extension is
3.Download the system software.
2. Format the HDD. shown depends on cases).
4.See the section of Disabling
3. Download the
After the system software
Functionality to execute Initialize
system software. is reinstalled, E746-0033 is
All Data/ Settings.
4. Restore the
shown.
5.Turn OFF/ON the power. The TPM
password
setting is automatically set to OFF.
information stored
6.Set the TPM setting to ON (the
in the HDD.
public key and the common key
are automatically set).
1. Replace the main controller PCB 2. 1. Replace the main E747-xxxx (the different
2. The common key backed up in the controller PCB 2. extension is shown
HDD will be automatically restored 2. The common
depends on cases).
in the SRAM.
key backed up
3. The TPM setting on the control
in the HDD will
panel is reset to OFF. Manually
be automatically
set the TPM setting to ON (the
restored in the
machine is operated in the TPM
SRAM.
setting ON).
3. Restore the
4. Restore the password information
password
stored in the SRAM (see *1).
information stored
in the SRAM (see
*1).
T-2-11
2-18
2-19
0032
0033
HDD
HDD
HDD
HDD
HDD
HDD
HDD
SRAM
SRAM
SRAM
SRAM
SRAM
SRAM
SRAM
SRAM
SRAM
SRAM
SRAM
SRAM
SRAM
SRAM
Password/
PIN
Password/
PIN
Password/
PIN
Password/
PIN
Certificate/
Secret Key
Certificate/
Secret Key
Others
Function
Name of Data
Backup
Availability
BOX
BOX Password
Yes
BOX
Yes
SEND
Yes
MEAP
SSL,AMS
No
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
2-19
2
Storage
Data Type
Location
SRAM
SRAM
SRAM
SRAM
SRAM
Password/
PIN
Password/
PIN
Password/
PIN
Password/
PIN
Encryption
key
2-20
Function
Name of Data
Backup
Availability
Network
Yes
The HDD capacity mounted on this machine is 80GB as standard. Mounting a 2.5 inch /
Network
Yes
Yes
Others
Others
MIB
250GB HDD-D1 (option) makes 250GB in HDD capacity. High capacity is required in the case
Yes
No
T-2-13
Function
Password/ MEAP
PIN
Password/ Advanced
PIN
BOX
Name of Data
Backup
Availability
No
Yes
T-2-14
FSTDEV
TMP_GEN
TMP_PSS
TMP_FAX
APL_SEND
APL_MEAP
APL_GEN
APL_KEEP
APL_LOG
IMG_MNG
PDLDEV
FSTCDEV
THUMDEV
BOOTDEV
CRBDEV
APL_CDS
Although simple calculation says: 250GB - 80GB = 170GB, it requires 20% of snapshot area
and the data area to be used for internal processing in the system. Therefore, 114GB can be
actually used for text storage area.
2-20
2-21
Overview
downtime due to crash, thus enhancing the reliability as the document server.
Slot.1 (HDD1)
CH B
250GB).
CH A
The mirroring PCB controls the reading / writing timing of HDD data.
The LED PCB indicates HDD operation statuses by LED.
Turn ON the main power
Master (HDD1)
80 GB
Standard
Mirroring PCB
Ch A
Backup (HDD2)
LED PCB
Turn OFF the main power
Ch B
80 GB
Install HDD2
Option
2.5inch/80GB HDD - C1
Master (HDD1)
250 GB
Option
2.5inch/250GB HDD - D1
CH B
CH A
Mirroring PCB
Ch A
Backup (HDD2)
LED PCB
Turn ON the main power
Ch B
250 GB
Start Rebuild
Option
2.5inch/250GB HDD - D1
F-2-33
Complete Rebuild
Time needed:
80 GB HDD --- Approx. 20 minutes
250GB HDD ---Approx. 60 minutes
F-2-34
Rebuild progress is shown as messages on the status line of the control panel.
Copying data to HDD. xx%
2-21
2-22
List of operation status (LED)
MEMO:
This machine can be used even during rebuild process (operation is performed with
HDD1)
The HDD will not be damaged even if turning OFF the power during rebuild process.
Rebuild is resumed once the power is turned ON the next time. This does not apply in
the case of blackout or disconnecting the power code during rebuild process
HDD operation statuses are indicated with 4 LEDs mounted on the LED PCB.
The green LED shows that the operation is normally in progress, while the red LED indicates
any failures.
Ch B
(HDD2)
Ch A
(HDD1)
At writing:
The same data is written to each HDD at
the same timing
Main controller PCB 2
F-2-36
Mirroring PCB
For example, when HDD1 is in access, the green LED on the side of HDD1 (ChA) blinks in a
high speed.
HDD 1 (Ch A)
HDD 2 (Ch B)
Green LED Red LED Green LED Red LED
Status
HDD
1
HDD
2
HDD
1
Normal (standby)
Accessing to HDD1
Accessing to HDD2
HDD1 failed
HDD
2
--A (*1)
-----
------A
----A (*1)
---
---------
---
---
---
Name of
Mode
Mirror mode
is performed properly.
--- / A
--- / A
---
--- / A
---
--- / A
Degrade
mode
Degrade
mode
Rebuild
mode
Halt mode
The LED (red) on the LED PCB is blinking. If only one HDD is faulty, the operation is
--- (*2)
--- (*2)
Halt mode
F-2-35
The ACT LED (green) on the LED PCB is lighted up / blinking if reading / writing to each HDD
HDD2 is faulty
If both two HDDs are faulty, E602 error is shown on the control panel to stop the operation.
T-2-15
A : Lit
2-22
2-23
Description of Modes
Name of Mode
Mirror Mode
Description
Degrade Mode
Mirror Mode
Rebuild Mode
In normal operation
In normal operation
In normal operation
See Overview of
Trouble Recovery
Trouble
Both HDDs
In which HDD?
Either HDD
Degrade Mode
Trouble
Backup HDD
In which HDD?
Master HDD
See Overview of
Trouble Recovery
In normal operation
Degrade Mode
See Overview of
Trouble Recovery
Unable to detect
Master HDD at Start-up
Unable to detect
Master HDD at Start-up
Halt Mode
Halt Mode
Halt Mode
Halt Mode
Mirror Mode
T-2-16
*1: Turn OFF/ ON the power in this mode, the mode returns to the previous mode.
F-2-37
2-23
2-24
Overview of Trouble Recovery
When any trouble occurs in the mirroring system, take the action for recovery appropriate to
each mode.
Mirror Mode
The HDD in trouble can be located by the red LED on the LED PCB.
In case the master HDD cannot be located, turn OFF/ ON the power to check whether the
Trouble
In which HDD?
The firstly blinked green LED (ChA or ChB) in a high speed tells the Master HDD, which is
Either HDD
accessed firstly.
The green LED not lit on a channel tells the location of Backup HDD.
Degrade Mode
Both HDDs
See Overview of
Trouble Recovery
Halt Mode
In which HDD?
Name of
Mode
Master HDD
Backup HDD
Halt Mode
Rebuild Mode
Trouble
Unable to detect
Master HDD
Halt Mode
HDD Status?
Unable to detect
Backup HDD
When successfully
Rebuilt
Degrade Mode
See Overview of
Trouble Recovery
Halt Mode
Mirror Mode
F-2-38
Status
HDD1 HDD2
(ChA) (ChB)
Red
Red
LED LED
--A
-----
---
---
---
T-2-17
A: Lit
*1: This mode shows the message, Need to replace hard disks (contact your service
engineer), on the control panel. In addition, 310006 is indicated in CODE field of Alarm Log
in service mode (COPIER > DISPLAY > ALARM-2).
*2: Never install the HDD used in the other model. The used HDD holds the ID specific to
the firstly-installed machine, thus this machine is unable to recognize it. If done, you need to
reinstall the HDD recognized in this machine.
2-24
2
Points to Note in Servicing concerning Mirroring Functionality
1. The modes other than Mirror Mode indicate troubles, which require swift recovery.
The power can be turned OFF even during Rebuild process. However, it is recommended
not to turn off the power and wait until the mode flows to Mirror Mode. In addition, HDD
removal after power-OFF is guaranteed only in Mirror Mode.
2. The mirroring board controls Master HDD and Backup HDD. This control is performed
based on the HDD serial number and the model serial number instead of slot locations.
If HDDs are replaced in a careless manner during servicing in the field, the Master and
Backup HDDs may be switched.
Ex) When the master HDD is in trouble, the mirroring board automatically recognizes
2-25
Removable HDD (option)
This option enables easier HDD mounting (slot-out/ in) at power-OFF (see *1). In addition, the
HDD slot can be locked.
Potential use case: To enhance information securities in government offices or enterprises
Remove the HDD after business hours to store in a safe box.
Mount the HDD before business hours. Lock the slot during operation.
*1: The following conditions are required to replace HDDs at power-ON.
- Removable HDD is extended
- Either HDD is in trouble
the backup HDD as the master. Thus, the master and backup HDDs are switched
even without changing the slot locations.
If the Master HDD cannot be located, turn OFF/ ON the power to check on which channel
the green LED is lit on the LED PCB.
The firstly-blinked LED (ChA or ChB) shows the Master HDD, which is accessed firstly after
power-on.
3. For users who intend to use the removable and mirroring functionality concurrently, instruct
them not to change the removable HDD location in advance.
Change of HDD locations after power-OFF is allowed as specifications only in Mirror Mode.
Otherwise, HDD removal or change of location is not guaranteed.
4. The following conditions are required to replace HDDs at power-ON.
Removable HDD is extended
F-2-39
CAUTION:
Be sure to use a new HDD when replacing the HDD.
MEMO:
5. Upgrading should be done only in Mirror Mode while mirroring in ongoing. Upgrading in
Degrade or Rebuild mode is basically prohibited. Always prioritize Mirror Mode when you
take any actions.
2-25
2
HDD Encryption/ Mirroring Kit (optional)
This option enables to generate the encryption key inside the encryption board and to encrypt
the whole HDD including the system software. Encryption allows leaks of confidential data,
even when the HDD is stolen, including image data (temporarily generated at Copy or Print
jobs) and user data stored in BOX/ Advanced BOX. In addition, the data written into the two
hard disks are also encrypted when the HDD mirroring functionality is enabled. The following
descriptions focus on the HDD encryption function. See the previous section for the mirroring
functionality.
2-26
Compatibility among Device, Encryption Board and HDD
E602-2000 error may occur if the unmatched authentication information is found between the
controller and the HDD encryption board and the encryption board is mounted.
The device, the encryption board and HDD can be connected in 4 use cases.
The following shows the statuses for each use case.
Case 1: Normally operated
Case 2: HDD-related error occurs because the system on the HDD cannot be read (other
than E602-2000 error)
Case 3: E602-2000 is triggered by failure in mutual authentication
Case 4: Unable to decode properly due to unmatched key for the encryption board
Encryption
The HDD of the host machine holds temporary image data including scanned images or PDL
data as well as user data in BOX and Advanced BOX. Such images or user file information
are saved in the HDD only with system information cleared. Under this condition, the data
or images can be restored by accessing directly to the stolen HDD using the access editor
Correct
controller
Correct
encryption
board
Correct HDD
(Protection property)
two-way authentication
and the like. To counter such threats against securities, data written to the disk should be
always encrypted to protect them from illegal restoration of image data or others. This product
employs an unconventional approach to achieve HDD encryption and mirroring functionality
with the dedicated chipset on a board (Canon MFP Security Chip Version 2.00). Since the two
functions are operated in a HDD, the encryption functionality can be independently enabled.
Correct
controller
Correct HDD
(Protection property)
Encryption
Correct HDD
(Protection property)
Correct HDD
(Protection property)
2-26
2-27
User data
Recovery
cleared
Replace HDDs
cleared
The screen below is shown on the control panel when E602-2000 occurred and the machine
Action
1) Format the HDD
2) Install the system software
1) Replace encryption board
2) Initialize Encryption Board (see *1)
3) Format the HDD
4) Install the system
1) Initialize the encryption board (see *1)
2) Format the HDD
3) Install the system
N/A
MN-CON clear does not clear
authentication information; no work is
required specifically for HDD encryption kit
T-2-18
is started in safe mode using the USB flash memory with system data stored.
The message as shown in the figure below is displayed.
Select 0 when you are ready to initialize the encryption board.
Encryption board
error occurred.
Check connection
of the board.
Initialize
the board.
All data is deleted
at initialization.
[0]=Initialization
[other key]=exit
F-2-42
The figure below shows the final screen in initializing the encryption board.
The message as shown in the figure below is shown on the screen.
started).
2. Format the HDD and reinstall SYSTEM via SST.
When you start the HDD formatting, the message is automatically shown to confirm
whether to initialize the encryption board (Key Clear).
Key Clear will disable accesses to HDD data permanently. Cautions should be taken in Key
Clear execution.
Attention!
Once initialization
is started,you
cannot cancel it.
is that OK?
[2]= Yes
[other keys]=No
F-2-43
Poor board connection also causes this error. Check the board connection to seek error
recovery. Initialization of the encryption board will disable accesses to HDD data permanently.
Cautions should be taken in initialization.
F-2-41
2-27
2-28
Description
Authentication Error
Cause
Detection
Timing
Failure in Encryption
Board
Error in recognition of
the encryption board
Device Error
Failure in the
encryption board
E code
Actions
Detailed
Code
E610
0001
0002
0101
0102
0201
T-2-19
0202
0301
0302
0303
0401
0402
Actions
Ask the user to check the hardware
configuration.
Ask the user to check the hardware
configuration.
2-28
2-29
Service Operations
When Replacing Parts
Parts name
Remedy
Reference
HDD
Consumables
N/A
2-29
2-30
Overview
Imaging Lens
Overview
Reflection Mirror
To realize the high-speed printing, this machine adopts the 2 Laser Scanner Units and the
Laser Driver of each color executes laser scanning with 4-beam.
imageRUNNER ADVANCE C5051 / C5045 employs 4 beam and C5035 / 5030 employs 2
beam.
Imaging Lens
Skew Correction Motor C (M33)
Reflection Mirror
Scanner
Mirror
Imaging Lens
Skew Correction
Motor M (M32)
Laser
Driver
(M)
Bk
Y
Scanner
Mirror
Laser A
Laser B
Laser C
Laser D
Laser
Driver
(Bk)
Laser
Driver
(C)
Scanner
Mirror
Laser Scanner Unit 1
Laser
Driver
(Y)
This machine emits the laser to the image area on the drum negatively-charged.
Reflection
Mirror
Bk
Reflection
Mirror
Imaging
Lens
Imaging
Lens
Reflection
Mirror
Reflection
Mirror
Laser
Driver
(M)
Scanner
Mirror
Laser
Driver
(Y)
Laser
Driver
(Bk)
Scanner
Mirror
Laser
Driver
(C)
F-2-46
Image area
Non-image area
Non-image area
Laser ON
Enlarged view
F-2-45
2-30
2-31
Specification
Item
Description
Wavelength
Laser type
Laser output
Number of laser scanner unit
Number of laser light
775 to 800nm
Red color laser (non-visible light)
10mW
2
imageRUNNER ADVANCE C5051 / C5045: 4 beam for each color
imageRUNNER ADVANCE C5035 / C5030: 2 beam for each color
Resolution
1200dpi
Motor type
Brushless motor
Number of motor rotation
imageRUNNER ADVANCE C5051 / C5045: Approx. 29100rpm
imageRUNNER ADVANCE C5035 / C5030: Approx. 37800rpm
Number of scanner mirror facet 6 facet (phi 40)
Control list
Laser ON / OFF control
Horizontal scanning synchronous control
Vertical scanning synchronous control
APC control
Laser scanner motor control
BD correction control
Laser shutter control
Image tilt correction control
T-2-22
2-31
2-32
Various Controls
DC Controller (UN1)
Overview
Item
Laser ON / OFF control
Horizontal scanning
synchronous control
Vertical scanning synchronous
control
APC control
Laser Scanner Motor Control
BD correction control
Laser shutter control
Image tilt correction control
Operation description
Horizontal scanning
synchronous control
Scanner Motor
Vertical scanning
synchronous control
APC control
Main
Controller
Laser scanner motor control
T-2-23
Scanner Motor
BD correction control
2-32
2-33
Purpose
Purpose
Laser light is turned ON / OFF according to the combination of laser control signals.
Execution timing
Execution timing
Per 1 line
Control detail
Execution time
DC Controller switches the 4 modes (forcible OFF mode, APC mode, Print mode and standby
Approx. 7.5s
Control detail
1) DC Controller forcibly emits the laser diode on M-laser driver PCB by setting the laser
control signal of M -laser to APC mode. Also, DC controller forcibly emits the laser diode of
Laser Driver
PCB
DC Controller (UN1)
Video signal
Scanner mirror
Laser beam
Bk laser driver PCB by setting the Bk laser control signal to APC mode.
2) Concerning the laser beam of M laser, there is a BD sensor (Y, M) on the scanning light
path and the laser bean is emitted to the BD sensor (Y, M). Regarding the laser beam of Bk
laser, there is a BD sensor (C, Bk) on the scanning light path and the laser beam is emitted
F-2-48
Mode
Laser status
OFF
ON
ON / OFF
OFF
Remark
it to the DC controller.
4) DC Controller executes synchronous control based on this signal and sends the standard
BD signal to Main Controller as a horizontal scanning synchronous signal (BD) per 1 line.
5) When Main Controller receives those signals, it outputs the video signal (VDO_Y, VDO_
T-2-24
PINTR
LSTR
PSTBY
LaserA
LaserB
LaserC
LaserD
Mode
name
M, VOD_C, VDO_Bk) to DC Controller. As a result of this, the Laser Driver emits the laser
beam from the specified position for each line.
Image formation
Print
instruction ready timing
PSTBY
Standby
mode
APC mode
Forcible
Standby
mode
OFF mode
F-2-49
2-33
2-34
Vertical Scanning Synchronous Control
Y Laser
Purpose
This is to align the writing start position in vertical scanning direction.
BD Sensor (Y, M)
Execution timing
VDO_M
M Laser Driver
PCB
DC
Controller (UN1)
Main Controller
Y Laser Driver
PCB
M Laser
Per printing
Execution time
VDO_C
BD_CBk
C Laser Driver
PCB
500ms
C Laser
Control detail
1) When DC Controller receives the print instruction, it detects the reference signal.
Based on this signal, it creates the vertical scanning synchronous signal (PVREQ) and
VDO_Bk
Bk Laser Driver
PCB
Bk Laser
2) Main Controller is synchronized with PVREQ signal and sends VDO signal to DC Cotnroller.
3) DC Controller creates the laser drive signal based on VDO signal and sends it to the Laser
F-2-50
Scanner Unit. The Laser Scanner Unit conform the image leading edge with the paper
leading edge by emitting the laser in this timing.
Reference DB
PVREQ
VDO_Y
VDO_M
VDO_C
VDO_Bk
Print
instruction
VDO
DC Controller
(UN1)
Main
Controller2
VDO
Laser
Laser
Laser
Laser
VDO
VDO
2)
VDO
F-2-51
1)
Reference
Signal
3)
F-2-52
2-34
2-35
APC (Auto Power Control) control
Print instruction
Purpose
Reference
signal
Video request signal
(PVREQ)
Video signal
(VDO)
Execution timing
T1
About15ms
Execution time
T2
About15ms
Y
Approx. 2 s
Bk
F-2-53
Control details
1) DC Controller outputs the laser control signal to the Laser Driver IC on the Laser Driver
PCB.
2) APC mode is specified to the Laser Driver IC and it forcibly emits the laser diode of each
color. At the same time, each laser driver IC monitors the laser diode (LD) on the photo
diode (PD) and adjusts the output of laser diode until the light intensity becomes consistent
amount.
2-35
2-36
Laser scanner motor control
Purpose
Y Laser
Y Laser Driver
PCB
PD
LD
Execution timing
At power-ON, per printing
M laser control signal
M Laser
M Laser Driver
PCB
PD
Execution time
LD
Control detail
DC Controller
(UN1)
1) DC Controller forcibly rotates the motors in the two Laser Scanner Units.
2) It detects the speed detection signal (FG1 to 2, BD_YM, BD_CBk) and compares the signal
C laser control signal
C Laser
C Laser Driver
PCB
PD
with the standard signal in DC Controller and then, controls the acceleration signal (ACC1
LD
Bk Laser
Bk Laser Driver
PCB
PD
LD
F-2-54
2-36
2-37
Laser Scanner Unit 1
ACC1
DEC1
Scanner Motor
(Y, M)
FG1
BD_YM
BD Sensor (Y, M)
Y Laser Driver
PCB
DC Controller
(UN1)
Scanner Motor
(C, Bk)
FG2
BD_CBk
Bk Laser Driver
PCB
F-2-55
2-37
2
BD correction control
2-38
START
Purpose
This is to correct the displacement of writing start position of each color laser due to the angle
variation of scanner mirror facet.
Execution timing
At power-ON, per printing
Scanner motor
control finish
(Constant-speed
rotation detection)
BD interval
measurement
Execution time
Within approx. 0.5s or less
Control detail
Constant interval
Constant interval
Constant interval
Narrow interval
BD1
BD1
Writing start position
correction
BD3
BD4
BD3
BD4
BD2
BD2
END
F-2-56
2-38
2-39
Bk Laser Shutter
Bk Shutter Lever
the laser light from emitting to the machine inside when the front cover / right cover is opened.
Color
Shutter Lever
Execution timing
After power-ON
Execution time
Approx. 3s (at power-ON), approx. 1s (when scanner motor is started or cover is opened)
Control detail
While the Laser Scanner Motor is operating, the Laser Shutter is opened. During other period,
the laser shutter is closed.
Bk Shutter Cam
Drive Shaft
Also, the Front Cover Sensor (PS18) or the Right Cover Sensor (PS20) works together and
it stops the output signal of laser driver. At the same time, if the Front Cover or Right Cover is
opened, the Shutter is closed and the laser light path is forcibly blocked.
DC Controller (UN1)
Right Cover Sensor (PS26)
F-2-57
2-39
2-40
For Bk
For color
Close
Shutter
Lever
Execution timing
Sensor
Lever
Shutter Cam
Laser
Shutter
Open
Purpose
This is to prevent the gap of laser emission.
(PS29)
Close
Execution time
Approx. 3 sec
Close
Control detail
1) DC Controller creates the patch pattern of each color on the ITB.
2) DC Controller compares the patch pattern with the standard value backed up in the
DC Controller by reading this patch pattern at the Patch Sensor and detects the color
displacement amount.
Open
3) Based on the foregoing detection result, the laser emission position (tilt degree) of Laser
Open
F-2-58
2-40
2-41
Photosensitive Drum
Imaging Lens
Cam
Skew
Correction
Motor
Arm
Position relation of
imaging lens and arm
Imaging Lens
Before correction
Imaging Lens
Arm Cam
Imaging Lens
Cam
Photosensitive Drum
Cam
Arm
Skew
Correction
Motor
Arm
Position relation of
imaging lens and arm
Imaging Lens
After correction
Arm Cam
F-2-59
Imaging Lens
Cam
Skew
Correction
Motor
Scanner Mirror
Reflection
Mirror
Arm
F-2-60
2-41
2-42
Service Works
Periodically replaced parts
There is no periodically replaced part.
Consumables
No.
Parts Name
Parts Number
Qty
Estimated Life
FL2-9476
150k
T-2-25
Dust-blocking glass
cleaning tool
F-2-61
2-42
2-43
Specifications
Item
Photosensitive Material
Drum
O/D of drum
Cleaning
Process speed
Overview
Overview
Image formation system of this machine uses the magnetic 2-component jumping developing
method for developing and the intermediate transfer method for transfer to create toner
Drum heater
image.
Developing
assembly
To increase life of the image formation unit, this machine uses the primary transfer
disengagement method as a new technology.
Following shows major improved points compared to the previous iRC3880/2880 series.
Purpose :
Lower running cost
Improved life of drum unit
Improved life of developing assembly
Improved productivity
Primary
charging
Improved points :
Separating developing assembly from drum unit
Introducing Bk drum (highly-durable type)
Introducing ACR (Auto Carrier Refresh) technology
Separating the laser scanner unit into 2 units
(4-beam for each laser driver) (see Note)
Secondary transfer
inner roller
ITB belt
Post-secondary
transfer static eliminator
Secondary transfer
outer roller
ITB unit
Y
Toner
container
Bk
Patch sensor
Developing
assembly
Laser
Laser
Laser
Laser
Developing
cylinder
Charging Photosensitive
drum
roller
drum unit
Laser scanner unit 1
Note :
4-beam for iR ADVANCE 5051/5045, 2-beam for iR ADVANCE 5035/5030
Developing cylinder
Developing method
Toner
Toner level detection
O/D of cylinder
Charging method
O/D of roller
Cleaning
Toner amount (the life value
is based on A4 size with 5%
image ratio)
Function/Method
OPC
30mm
Cleaning blade
imageRUNNER ADVANCE C5051=246mm/s,
imageRUNNER ADVANCE C5045=215mm/s,
imageRUNNER ADVANCE C5035/5030=160mm/s
Mounted with Bk drum as a standard.
Assigned as an option for color drums.
1pc (single developing)
Dry, 2-component jumping
Non-magnetic negative toner
Not available
20mm
Roller charging
14mm
Brush roller
imageRUNNER ADVANCE C5051/5045
Bk: approx. 940g (Life: approx. 40k)
Color: approx. 590g (Life: approx. 30k)
imageRUNNER ADVANCE C5035/5030
Not Available
Available
2-43
2-44
Parts configuration
Print process
Major Parts
Delivery
Toner container
M
Y
Toner supply
assembly
Bk
Transfer block
Transfer
assembly
9. ITB cleaning
ITB
5. Primary transfer
Bk
5. Primary transfer
5. Primary transfer
5. Primary transfer
7. Separation
6. Secondary transfer
4. Developing
Developing block
Fixing block
8. Fixing
Developing assembly
+ Drum unit
F-2-63
2. Primary charging
Static latent image
formation block
Drum
cleaning
block
C
Photosensitive
drum
Bk
Photosensitive
drum
Registration
Pickup
Flow of print paper
Rotating direction of ITB, photosensitive drum
F-2-64
Overview
Static latent
1 Pre-exposure
image
formation block 2 Primary charging
Developing
block
Transfer block
Fixing block
ITB cleaning
block
Drum cleaning 10 Drum cleaning
block
2-44
2-45
Bias Types
There are the following 8 types biases used on this machine.
Bias name
Bias type
DC
AC
DC
DC
AC
DC
DC
DC
Bias value
(Reference value)
Approx. 600V
Approx. 1.5kVpp
Approx. -1.3kV
Approx. -400V
Approx. 1.6kVpp
Approx. 1.5kV
Approx. 3kV
Approx. -1.0kV
Application destination
Primary Charging Roller
Toner Blocking Terminal Plate
Developing Cylinder
Primary Transfer Roller
Secondary Transfer Outer Roller
T-2-28
Aforementioned biases are created by 3 HVT and are supplied to the loads used in the
printing process.
Developing Developing Developing Developing
subhigh
subhigh
subhigh
subhigh
voltage
voltage
voltage
voltage
PCB Y
PCB M
PCB C
PCB Bk
(UN43)
(UN44)
(UN45)
(UN46)
Photosensitive
drum
Toner-blocking
electrode plate
Developing
cylinder
Secondary
transfer
Secondary outer roller
transfer
inner roller
Primary
transfer
roller
Y
Y
Primary
charging
roller
M
M
C
C
Bk
Bk
Developing AC
monitoring signal
Primary transfer DC
Developing AC+DC
Charging AC+DC
HVT2
(UN17)
monitoring signal
Secondary transfer DC
HVT3
(UN18)
Charging AC+DC
Developing AC+DC
HVT1
(UN16)
DC controller
(UN1)
F-2-65
2-45
2-46
Controls
Pre-exposure
Pre-exposure control
Overview
Pre-exposure
Pre-exposure control
Primary charging
Primary charging bias control
Discharge current control
Primary charging cleaning control
Developing/drum
Developing bias control
ACR (Auto Carrier Refresh) control
Toner-blocking bias control
Drum (presence) detection
New/old detection of drum unit
Drum life detection
Drum heater control
Drum Drum rotation speed control
Transfer/separation
Primary transfer disengagement control
Primary transfer bias control
Secondary transfer bias control
ITB displacement correction control
ITB cleaning control
Secondary transfer outer roller cleaning
control
Drum cleaning
Drum cleaning control
Removing residual potential on the photosensitive drum before executing the primary
Toner supply
Toner cap automatic opening control
Toner level detection/toner supply control
one at the front of the main unit, and the other at the rear of the main unit.
Pre-exposure LED (rear)
(UN24 / 26 /28 / 30)
Light guide
Photosensitive drum
DC controller
(UN1)
F-2-66
2-46
2-47
Primary charging
Overview
The primary charging bias (AC+DC negative), generated by HVT1/2 PCB, is applied to the
This machine uses the roller charging method for primary transfer.
To prevent image fault (white spot/missing image) caused by residual toner, the cleaning
Cleaning brush
roller
Drum
cleaner
HVT1 /2(UN16/17)
AC + DC negative
Photosensitive
drum
Primary charging
roller
F-2-67
2-47
2-48
Primary charging cleaning control
Execution time
Within 1 second
This machine may not be able to collect residual toner on the drum because this machine
uses fine-grain toner, which possibly results in image fault (white spot/missing image) due to
To prevent this symptom, the cleaning brush roller is added to forcibly remove residual toner
2) Optimal primary charging current value is determined according to the result of the
The drive of the brush roller is engaged with the primary charging roller.
3) The primary charging AC bias is determined to apply to the primary charging roller
Primary charging AC
Current monitoring signal
Bk
Photosensitive
drum
Drum
cleaner
HVT1
(UN16)
DC controller
(UN1)
Primary charging AC
HVT2
(UN17)
Cleaning brush
roller
Primary charging
roller
F-2-70
2-48
2-49
Developing/drum
Developing overview
photosensitive drum
Toner-blocking
electrode plate
Control description
Developing
cylinder
The developing bias (AC, DC negative) generated by HVT1/2 (UN16/17) is applied to the
developing cylinder
Developing DC bias: bias for generating potential difference from the photosensitive drum
Bias value is determined based on detection result of the drum film thickness
HVT1/2(UN16/17)
Developing motor M5 M8
AC+DC
Developing
cylinder
ATR sensor
(TS5 TS8)
Toner feeding screw A
Waste toner delivery
discharge outlet
F-2-71
Parts name
Developing assembly
Developing cylinder
Toner feeding screw A/B
Toner-blocking electrode
plate
Function
To develop toner fed from the hopper unit on the photosensitive drum
To develop toner in the developing assembly on the photosensitive drum
To stir developer (toner and carrier) in the toner container to supply to
the developing cylinder
To apply DC bias to the electrode plate to increase retention strength of
toner on the developing cylinder
T-2-30
Drive configuration
Parts name
M5 to M8
Developing motor
TS5 to TS8 ATR sensor
F-2-72
Function
To rotate the developing cylinder and the toner feeding screw
To detect the ratio of developer (toner + carrier) in the developing
assembly
T-2-31
2-49
2-50
This machine introduced a method to supply developer (toner + carrier) to improve life (longer
This control prevents scattering of toner on the developing cylinder due to deterioration of the
developing assembly.
This is a control to supply developer to the developing assembly and also discharge
Developing AC bias which has been generated by HVT1 (UN16) is generated to be negative
This control prevents deterioration of carrier, which had been occurred due to reuse of
The generated bias is applied to the toner-blocking electrode plate. This improves retention
The Toner Feed Screw A & B drive when the Developing Motor (M5 to 8) drives so that the
DC controller(UN1)
developer will be exhausted. The developer is supplied at the right time based on the ATR
control result.
Flow of toner
HVT1/2 (UN16/17)
Return screw
Toner discharge outlet
Return screw
2-50
2-51
Drum overview
Drive configuration
Drum motor
Photosensitive drum
M1 M4
Pre-exposure LED
light guide
Photosensitive drum
F-2-75
Parts name
Parts name
Function
Drum unit
To create toner image by the toner from the developing cylinder after the
static latent image has been created on the photosensitive drum.
Light guide
To expose pre-exposure LED light on the photosensitive drum
Photosensitive drum
To create toner image on the photosensitive drum
Primary charging roller To make the surface of photosensitive drum to be evenly-charged potential
Charging cleaning
To remove residual toner on the primary charging roller
brush roller
Drum cleaning blade To remove residual toner on the photosensitive drum
Waste toner screw
To feed residual toner
Function
M1 to M4
Drum motor
To rotate the photosensitive drum, the waste toner screw
UN31 to UN38 Drum rotation sensor 1/2 To detect rotation of the photosensitive drum
T-2-33
T-2-32
2-51
2-52
Execution timing
Detection timing
Detection description
Detection description
In case that current monitor value is less than the specified value (1mA): no Drum Unit
In case that current monitor value is the specified value (1mA) or more: Drum Unit present
Execution timing
Within 1 second
1) The main unit checks presence of the fuse attached to each drum (the fuse detection signal
2) If there is a fuse, the main unit clears the drum film thickness detection data of the
is monitored)
Operation of the main unit is stopped while No drum unit is shown on the control panel.
Primary charging AC
Current monitoring signal
Bk
Drum unit
HVT1
(UN16)
DC controller
(UN1)
Primary charging AC
DC controller
(UN1)
HVT2
(UN17)
+24V
SRAM
(IC2)
Fuse
F-2-78
2-52
2
MEMO:
Fuse cut operation is executed when the power is turned ON after a new Drum Unit is
installed.
Thus, if replacing a Drum Unit to another one (new one) to identify a cause of failure at
a field, fuse is blown and the drum thickness data is cleared.
As a result, even though the original Drum Unit is installed to the host machine again,
the host machine identifies it as like-new one and correct print image may not be output.
With consideration to above matter, do not use a new Drum Unit when identifying a
cause of failure.
2-53
Drum life detection
To detect life of the Photosensitive Drum.
The life data is stored in the SRAM (IC2) of the DC Controller.
The drum life value can be checked from the service mode.
Target drum
Detection items
Data storage
location
Color drum
(YMC)
Bk drum
Reference service
mode
Drum counter life
display
(COPIER > DISPLAY
> MISC > YDRM-LF,
M-DRM-LF, C-DRM-LF)
Drum counter life
display
(COPIER > DISPLAY >
MISC > KDRM-LF)
Unit
% (To be
counted up
at every 7%)
% (To be
counted up
at every 1%)
T-2-34
CAUTION: The life data varies according to the image type, paper type, use
environment, etc.
For this reason, the value written in the service mode (drum counter life display) is for
reference, so this is not the accurate value.
2-53
2-54
The drum heater is attached below the photosensitive drum to keep stabilized charging and
This control is performed to keep a uniform drum rotation speed in order to increase accuracy
This heater works only when the main power switch is turned OFF while the environment
switch is turned ON.
Execution timing
1) The drum rotates, driven by the drum motors (M1 to M4).
2) There is an encoder on the drum shaft, of which rotation is monitored by the two sensors (Y:
Photosensitive
drum
Photosensitive drum
Drum heater
F-2-79
DC controller (UN1)
F-2-80
2-54
2-55
Transfer/separation
Drive configuration
Overview
ITB motor
Drive roller
(steering roller)
ITB scraper
ITB Cleaning
blade
Drive roller
(steering roller)
Waste toner
feeding screw
Tension roller
M13
Post-secondary transfer
static eliminator
Primary transfer
auxiliary roller
Primary transfer Secondary transfer
Primary transfer
outer roller
Primary transfer
Primary transfer
roller
roller
roller
roller
(Bk)
(M)
(C)
(Y)
Waste toner
feeding screw
ITB cleaning
blade
Primary
transfer
auxiliary roller
Tension roller
Primary transfer
roller(Y)
F-2-81
Function
ITB unit
ITB (Intermediate Transfer Belt)
Primary transfer roller
Primary Transfer Auxiliary Roller
Static eliminator
ITB scraper
Tension roller
Cleaning blade
Waste toner feeding screw
Secondary transfer unit
Secondary transfer outer roller
Static eliminator
T-2-35
ITB steering
position sensor(PS24)
ITB displacement
sensor 1 to 4 (PS25 28)
Primary transfer
disengagement sensor(PS23)
ITB scraper Idol roller
Primary transfer
disengagement sensor(PS22)
Secondary transfer
outer roller
Primary transfer
roller(C)
Patch sensor
Primary transfer
Primary transfer
(Front/Center/Rear)
roller(M)
roller(Bk)
(UN47 / UN48 / UN49)
M15 Primary transfer disengagement motor
F-2-82
Parts name
M13
M14
ITB motor
ITB displacement
control motor
M15
Primary transfer
disengagement motor
PS24
ITB steering position
sensor
PS22
Primary Transfer
Pressure Sensor
PS23
Primary Transfer
Disengage Sensor
PS25 to 28 ITB displacement
sensor
UN47 to 48 Patch Sensor (front/
rear)
UN49
Patch Sensor (center)
UN54
ITB HP sensor
Function
To rotate the ITB and the waste toner screw
To move the drive roller (steering roller)
To make the tension roller and the primary transfer roller (Y/M/C)
engaged/disengaged
To detect position of the drive roller (steering roller)
To detect whether the Tension Roller and Primary Transfer
Roller (Y/M/C) are pressurized condition.
To detect whether the Tension Roller and the Primary Transfer
Roller (Y/M/C) is disengaged condition.
To detect position of the ITB
To detect color displacement level (amount)
To detect patch density for image stabilization control (D-max,
D-half, etc.) and to detect the color displacement amount
To detect home position of the ITB
T-2-36
2-55
2-56
Execution timing
Roller to be engaged: when making color prints (If 2 and more sheets of Bk continues
Support arm
within a job at Color + Bk mix printing, disengage the Primary Transfer Roller when printing
color)
Cam
Drive shaft
Control description
1) Drive of the primary transfer disengagement motor (M15) rotates the cam.
Primary transfer
roller(M)
2) Rotation of the cam moves the support arm up/down, which separates (disengages) the
color primary transfer roller from the ITB.
3) Position of the primary transfer roller is detected by the primary transfer disengagement
sensor (PS22/23).
Primary transfer
disengagement
motor(M15)
Primary transfer
roller(Y)
MEMO:
ITB
Support arm
Primary transfer
disengagement
sensor (PS22)
Primary transfer
disengagement
sensor(PS23)
Drive shaft
Primary transfer
roller(C)
F-2-83
2-56
2-57
The primary transfer bias (DC), which has been generated by HVT2 (UN17), is applied to the
The secondary transfer bias (DC), which has been generated by HVY3 (UN18), is applied to
Bias value is determined by the measurement value of environment sensor 2 (UN50) and the
paper type.
DC controller(UN1)
DC controller(UN1)
HVT2 (UN17)
DC
DC
DC
HVT3 (UN18)
DC
Drive roller
(steering roller)
DC
Primary transfer
roller(M)
Primary transfer
roller(C)
Primary transfer
roller(Bk)
F-2-85
F-2-84
2-57
2-58
This control prevents damage on the ITB due to displacement of the ITB.
Execution timing
When the ITB is rotated
Control description
MEMO:
Following table shows detection result of the ITB displacement sensor and operation of
the main unit.
1) The ITB displacement sensors (PS25 to 28) detect displacement of the ITB.
2) Drive of the ITB displacement control motor (M14) rotates the cam.
The cam position is detected by the steering position sensor (PS24).
3) Rotation of the cam moves the drive shaft up/down to tilt the steering roller.
4) Tilt of the steering roller generates tension difference of the ITB to move the ITB to the front
or rear.
Drive shaft
Cam
Reference position
ITB displacement
sensor2(PS26)
ITB displacement
sensor1(PS25)
Drive roller
(steering roller)
ITB
ITB displacement
sensor3(PS27)
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
The ON state of the sensors above indicates that the light is blocked
ITB displacement
sensor4(PS28)
Sensor flag
Support arm
F-2-86
2-58
2-59
To prevent soil on the back of the sheet caused by soil on the secondary transfer outer roller
Control description
Execution timing
2) Scraped toner is fed to the waste toner case by the waste toner feeding screw.
2) At the post-rotation
3) After executing image stabilization control (creating patch image on the ITB)
ITB motor
M13
Control description
The secondary transfer bias (see Note 1), which has been generated by HVT3 (UN18), is
applied to the secondary transfer outer roller.
Residual toner on the secondary transfer outer roller is attached to the ITB, and then collected
by the ITB cleaning unit.
Caution:
Waste toner
feeding screw
Drive roller
(steering roller)
F-2-87
Waste toner
feeding screw
Cleaning bias2
Drive roller
(steering roller)
Secondary transfer
outer roller
F-2-88
2-59
2-60
Drum cleaning
Separation
Paper is separated from the ITB due to papers elastic force.
In the case of thin paper which has low elastic force, the static eliminator reduces potential on
the back surface of paper. This reduces electrostatic adsorption of paper so that thin paper is
separated from the ITB more easily.
Post-secondary transfer
static eliminator
Secondary transfer
inner roller
Overview
To clean residual toner on the photosensitive drum
Residual toner on the drum is scraped by the drum cleaning blade.
Then, rotation of the waste toner screw feeds the residual toner to the waste toner case.
Photosensitive drum
Secondary transfer
outer roller
F-2-89
MEMO:
On this machine, by reducing the diameter of Secondary Transfer Inner Roller, contact
surface of the paper with the ITB is reduced. This prevents the thin paper from sticking
onto the ITB.
2-60
2-61
Main controller 2
ATR control
PASCAL control
Toner
Toner
Toner
Toner
C
Bk
Patch sensor
(Front/Center/Rear)
(UN47 / UN48 / UN49) Color displacement
correction control
D-half control
D-max control
Drum film thickness
detection
ARCDAT control
F-2-91
Control timing
Execution items for image stabilization control differ according to the environment or the
condition of image-formation parts.
Following shows the control items to be executed by each sequence as well as the downtime
(estimation).
2-61
2-62
Control types
Color displacement
correction control
D-Half control
ARCDAT control
D-Max control
Secondary transfer
cleaning
Secondary transfer
ATVC
At normal condition
H/H environment
At recovery
Sleep is less than 8 hours
from sleep
Sleep is 8 hours or more
Sleep is 8 hours or more (in H/H
environment)
At pre-rotation At normal condition
At environment change
Per total of 500 sheets
At sheet
During printing per total of 100 sheets
interval
During printing per total of 250 sheets
During printing per total of 700 sheets
During printing per total of 360 sheets
(model A) or total of 240 sheets (Model B)
During printing per total image ratio 2000%
At postAfter printing per total of 25 sheets
rotation
After printing per total of 125 sheets
After printing per total of 180 sheets (model
A) or total of 120 sheets (model B)
After printing per total image ratio 800%
After printing per total of 1000 sheets
After printing per total of 5000 sheets
Drum thickness
detection
At power ON
Discharge current
correction
Execution condition
Execution
timing
T-2-38
2-62
2-63
D-max control
This control determines optimal developing DC bias, primary charging DC bias, laser power
output.
Execution timing
1) When the power is turned ON.
Execution timing
Control description
3) Power ON (High temperature and humidity)and corrects the each color developing DC
1) The drum count value is calculated by the monitor signal of the primary charging AC bias.
bias, primary charging DC bias, laser power output to realize the target density.
2) The count value calculated in step 1) above is added to the drum count value that has been
kept in SRAM.
Detection details
3) The latest count value determined in step 2) above is classified to be one of the 10 levels
as the drum film thickness detection data.
4) The determined data is compared to the existing drum film thickness detection data kept in
ITB
the other area in SRAM. If there is any difference between both data, the newly-determined
data is overwritten on SRAM as the latest drum film thickness detection data. If there is no
difference in both data, the newly-determined data is not overwritten, but disposed.
DC controller
(UN1)
SRAM(IC2)
Drum count
data
Bk
Monitor signal
Primary charging
AC bias
drive signal
HVT1
(UN16)
Drum film
thickness data
Y
C
F-2-92
MEMO:
Bk Drum for highly-durable type, the drum is no shave.
Therefore, Bk drum is not the thickness detection.
The result of drum thickness detection is reflected to the following data.
Developing bias
Primary transfer bias
ATR patch detection result
Laser output
Photosensitive
drum
Primary charging
roller
Developing
cylinder
Primary
charging roller
Developing DC bias
Photosensitive
drum
HVT1(UN16)
Patch sensor
(Center)
(UN49)
HVT2
(UN17)
Laser scanner
unit 1/2
Patch image date
D-max control
DC controller(UN1)
F-2-93
2-63
2-64
PASCAL control
Start
DC controller(UN1)
Density characteristics of the patch pattern made by test print is scanned by the reader to
create the image density correction table. Using this table corrects image gradation density
characteristics, which vary according to the environmental change or deterioration of
Patch sensor(Center)(UN49)
(Y)D-max correction table
Density
Y10
Target
Y2
Y1
Y3
photosensitive drum.
Main Controller 2
Patch scanning
PASCAL
1st Sheet
(D-maxPASCAL)
ITB
DC Controller (UN1)
PG
PS49
DC controller(UN1)
Vdc
Target
Density
PG
Paper
Vdc
2nd4th Sheet
(Gradation
PASCAL)
DC controller(UN1)
Developing DC bias,
Primary charging DC bias,
Laser Power output is determined
Reader
LUT
PG
Paper
F-2-94
Standard data
for D-half
PG
Target
density value
Standard data
for ARCDAT
PS49
Patch Sensor (Center)
PG
Target
density value
- 10 Patch
- 3 Screen x 4 color
PS49
- 3 Patch
- 3 Screen x 4 color
Execution timing
When executing calibration (during execution of [Auto gradation correction > Full
correction] in User Mode)
Control description
1) When the specified conditions are satisfied, the main controller prints 4 types of memorized
test prints (patch pattern).
2) Set the test print on the reader.
3) The reader scans gradation density of patch pattern from the test prints.
4) Main controller 2 creates the image gradation density correction table from the gradation
density data scanned by the reader.
2-64
2-65
MEMO:
This control creates 4 types of patch patterns as follows:
Start
Main controller2
Output of patch pattern data
DC controller(UN1)
Patch pattern is created
Reader
Patch image date
Printer
PASCAL control
Printed test patterns
are scanned by the reader
F-2-96
Y63Y64
Patch sensor(Center)(UN49)
Patch scanning
DC controller(UN1)
Density dataD-CON
Ideal gradation
Y2 characteristics
Y1
0
100
Main controller2
PASCAL correction table is
created(Y,M,C,Bk)
Data outputM-CON
100
Density dataD-CON
Ideal gradation
characteristics
Actual gradation
characteristics
100
Data outputM-CON
F-2-97
2-65
2
D-half control
2-66
4) The Main Controller 2 executes the gradation correction to realize the ideal halftone image
Execution timing
standard data for ARCDAT according to the measurement result of UN49. (refer to MEMO.)
Also, this control creates the standard patch used at ARCDAT control and stores the
ITB
Video data
DC controller(UN1)
Density data
D-half Control
Main controller2
F-2-98
2-66
2-67
Correction value calculation flow for ARCDAT control
Start
Start
Main controller2
DC controller(UN1)
DC controller(UN1)
example)Reference
data for
ARCDAT of copy pattern
100
Y9 Y10
Patch scanning
DC controller(UN1)
Density dataD-CON
Y2 Ideal gradation
characteristics
Y1
100
Main controller2
100
DC controller(UN1)
Output of density data (INT)
INT
40
20
10
Data outputV-CON
100
Patch scanning
Patch sensor(Center)(UN49)
Density data(D-CON)
Actual gradation
characteristics
Patch sensor(center)(UN49)
40
100
Data output(D-CON)
Main controller2
Saved as reference
data for ARCDAT
F-2-100
Ideal gradation
characteristics
Density dataD-CON
Actual gradation
characteristics
100
Data outputV-CON
F-2-99
MEMO:
Following 4 types of patch patterns are created on this control.
2-67
2-68
ARCDAT control
ITB
This control obtains ideal gradation characteristics while reducing down time
Execution timing
1) When replacing a drum unit or developing assembly
2) At post-rotation every time the total reaches 25 prints (when continuously making prints,
printing is interrupted for every 100 prints to execute this control)
Control details
1) DC Controller creates the patch pattern of each color (Y, M, C, Bk) on the ITB.
(3 patterns per each color, total 12 patterns)
2) DC Controller measures the patch pattern with the Patch Sensor (center) (UN49) and
returns the result to the Main Controller 2.
Patch sensor
(center)
(UN49)
3) The Main Controller 2 compares the actual measured data with the backed up standard
data for ARCDAT control. Difference after comparison is reflected to D-half result as offset
value.
Video data
Main controller2
F-2-101
2-68
2-69
Color displacement correction control
Start
This control corrects uneven exposure of the laser scanner unit or color displacement caused
by uneven rotation of the drum or ITB
DC controller(UN1)
ITB belt
Main controller2
Density data(D-CON)
40
20
Registration sensor
(rear)
(UN48)
Patch sensor
(Center)
(UN49)
SIN
10
40
Data output(D-CON)
Main controller2
Offset value (alpha) determination
(i.e., difference between SIN and INT)
Patch sensor
(front)
(UN47)
Main controller2
Density data(D-CON)
Current gradation
characteristics
100
DC controller(UN1)
F-2-103
Inclusion of result in
D-half correction table
60 Gradation characteristics
after correction
40
20
40
Data output(V-CON)
F-2-102
2-69
2-70
ATR control
Control detail
1) DC Controller creates the patch pattern of each color on the ITB.
This control supplies developer to the developing assembly to keep ideal ratio of developer in
2) DC Controller compares those patterns with the standard value backed up in the DC
Controller by reading the patch sensor (front, center, rear) (UN47 to 49) and detects the
color displacement amount.
3) Based on the detected result as above, the DC Controller executes correction depending
on the color displace amount.
Control type
Correction in Write-start
main scanning correction
direction
Correction
of overall
magnification ratio
Correction of odd
magnification ratio
Correction in
sub scanning
direction
Write-start
correction
Correction of
skewed image
Timing to start
During During
print print
At
for
for
power every every
ON
360
100
prints prints
in total in total
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
In the case of post-rotation every time the total reaches 150 prints or continuous print, the job
is interrupted when the total reaches 250 prints to execute this control (patch sensor)
Control description
Control description
Developer is supplied to the drum unit while the supplying amount of the developer for
each color is calculated by the above-mentioned start timing. The DC controller determines
supplying amount of toner by 3 types of data as follows.
Toner feeding
screw
Developing assembly
CL2~CL5
Developing cylinder
DC controller(UN1)
Developing assembly toner supply Count
ATR sensor Result
Patch sensor Result
Toner feeding
screwA/B
ATR sensor
(TS5TS8)
Patch sensor
(center)(UN49)
F-2-104
2-70
2
Related Error Codes
E020-001x: Error in patch sensor of developing assembly (at initial state) (more than the upper
limit)
E020-002x: Error in patch sensor of developing assembly (at initial state) (less than the lower
limit)
E020-010x: Error in patch sensor (more than the upper limit)
E020-020x: Error in patch sensor (less than the lower limit)
E020-0x90: Error in ATR sensor (less than the lower limit)
E020-0x91: Error in ATR sensor (more than the upper limit)
E020-0xB0: Error in developer ratio when making prints (less than the lower limit)
E020-0xB1: Error in developer ration when making prints (more than the upper limit)
x indicates the target color (1=Y, 2=M, 3=C, 4=Bk)
2-71
ATVC control
This control prevents transfer failure due to environmental change or deterioration of the
primary transfer roller or the secondary transfer roller
Primary transfer ATVC
Execution timing
1) When the power is turned ON
2) When replacing with a new drum unit
3) At recovery from sleep mode
4) At post-rotation after the total reaches 500 prints
5) When the environment is changed
Catuion:
The total print is counted separately between the color mode and the Bk mode. This
control is executed when the counter of either mode reaches the specified number.
Control description
1) Monitoring current value of the primary transfer DC bias is detected
2) Optimal primary charging current value is determined based on the temperature/
humidity data of Environment sensor 1.
3) The primary transfer DC bias is determined to apply to the primary transfer roller
2-71
2-72
Toner supply assembly
Overview
Cap drive
link holder
Cap release
holder
Control description
Toner container
Secondary transfer
outer roller
Current monitoring
signal
Secondary transfer
DC Bias
Primary transfer
roller
Hopper unit
DC controller(UN1)
Environment
sensor1
(UN22)
Developing assembly
Environment
sensor2
(UN50)
F-2-105
Parts name
Toner supply drive unit
Cap drive link holder
Cap release holder
Hopper unit
Toner stirring plate A, B
Toner supply screw
Function
To supply toner in the toner container to the hopper unit
To open/close the toner cap and rotate the toner container
To release the toner cap
To supply toner in the hopper unit to the developing assembly
To stir toner in the hopper unit
To supply toner in the hopper unit to the developing assembly
T-2-40
2-72
2-73
MEMO:
Following shows detection result of toner cap position sensor and the operational
relationship with the main unit.
Cap drive
link holder Toner cap
Released
In motion(released sealed)
Sealed
In motion(sealed released)
Toner container
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
M9~M12
F-2-107
Toner container
CCW
Execution timing
When replacing a toner container
Control description (e.g.: release of toner cap)
1) Toner cap position sensor 1 and 2 (PS5 to 12) detect the state of toner cap.
2) Operation of the toner container drive motors (M9 to 12) moves the cap drive link holder
and the cap release holder to the right (toner container side).
3) The toner cap is secured with the cap drive link holder.
<Hold the toner cap>
4) Operation of the toner container drive motors (M9 to 12) moves the cap drive link holder to
the left. <Release the toner cap>
Related Error Codes
E025-0100: Error in lock of toner container drive motor (Y)
E025-0200: Error in lock of toner container drive motor (M)
E025-0300: Error in lock of toner container drive motor (C)
E025-0400: Error in lock of toner container drive motor (Bk)
E025-0110: Error in timeout of toner cap position sensor (for Y toner container)
E025-0210: Error in timeout of toner cap position sensor (for M toner container)
E025-0310: Error in timeout of toner cap position sensor (for C toner container)
E025-0410: Error in timeout of toner cap position sensor (for Bk toner container)
ATR control
Piezo sensor
(TS1 TS4)
Hopper unit
Toner supply
Developing motor
clutch
CL2~CL5
M5~M8
Developing assembly
Toner feeding
screw
F-2-108
2-73
2-74
Description
Supply to
hopper
To supply developer in
the toner container to
the hopper unit
Supply to
To supply developer in
developing the hopper unit to the
assembly developing assembly
The following table shows the transition of toner level (Toner Container, Hopper Unit)
Timing to supply
Toner Container
T-2-42
10% remaing
0% remaing
100% remaing
100% remaing
Empty toner
0% remaing
*1: If the output result of piezo sensors TS1 to 4 keeps L despite drive of M9 to 12, make M9
to 12 driven for 2 seconds and then stopped for 2 seconds and repeat this procedure up to
20 times.
Hopper Unit
0% remaing
F-2-109
Detection timing
Detecting to
(location)
Developing
Assembly
supply count
*2
Message
(machine
operation)
Please prepare
a toner container
(continuous print
is available)
Whether Toner
Container can
be removed
Supplementary explanation:
Disabled
Cover. Then, the machine starts the toner supply operation and judges that the container
When replacing to a new Toner Container after "empty toner warning 2", this machine
recognizes that the container was replaced by opening and closing the Toner Replacement
was replaced to a new one from the Piezo Sensor detection result in the Hopper Unit. (When
replacing to a new Toner Container, the detection result of Piezo Sensor is changed from L to
H.)
Enabled
Enabled
T-2-43
2-74
2-75
Overview
ITB cleaner
unit
To feed waste toner of the drum cleaning unit and the ITB cleaning unit to the waste toner
case
ITB cleaner unit
ITB unit
ITB unit
Drum
unit
Drum unit
Waste
toner
stirring
M26 plate
motor
Waste toner
screw1
Developing
assembly
Waste toner
feeding screw
UN21
Waste toner
Waste toner case
Waste toner
case sensor
[There is not
waste toner case : Sensor ON]
Waste toner
DC controller
(UN1)
Developing
assembly
Waste
toner
case
detect
signal
[There is
waste toner case : Sensor OFF]
Parts name
Waste toner feeding unit
Waste toner feeding screw
Waste toner case
Waste toner screw 1, 2
Function
To feed waste toner in each unit to the waste toner case
To feed waste toner from the drum cleaning unit
To keep waste toner
To stir toner in the waste toner case
T-2-44
F-2-111
Detection
description
Waste toner full level
warning (approx. 7%
until the waste toner
level is full)
Waste toner full level
warning (approx. 0%
until the waste toner
level is full)
Detection timing
Detection
source
Message
(operation of main unit)
Waste toner
full level
sensor
Developing
Assembly
toner supply
count
T-2-45
2-75
2-76
In order to prevent the toner leakage at removal of Waste Toner Case, the Shutter is
prepared.
This Shutter has a mechanical mechanism, so when the Waste Toner Case is installed/
removed, the Shutter is opened/closed.
Waste Toner Ejection Mouth Shutter of the main body is linked with the Waste Toner Case
Shutter, so when the Waste Toner Case is installed/removed, this Ejection Mouth Shutter is
Execution timing
1) When the power is turned ON
2) When the front cover is open
Detection description
The waste toner case sensor (UN21) detects the presence of waste toner case.
ON: there is a waste toner case
OFF: there is no waste toner case (user message is displayed)
ITB cleaner
unit
ITB unit
Drum
unit
Waste
toner
stirring
M26 plate
motor
DC controller
(UN1)
Developing
assembly
Waste toner
screw1
Waste toner
feeding screw
UN21
Waste toner
Waste toner case
[There is not
waste toner case : Sensor ON]
Waste toner
case sensor
Waste
toner
case
detect
signal
[There is
waste toner case : Sensor OFF]
F-2-112
2-76
2-77
Other controls
Special control
Following sequences are assigned as special sequence with this machine
ITB cleaning blade
Solid black band
ITB
ITB
ITB
F-2-113
2-77
2-78
Service work
Periodically replaced parts
Not applicable
Consumable parts
No.
Parts name
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
ITB
Primary transfer roller
Secondary transfer inner roller
Secondary transfer outer roller
ITB cleaning blade
Transfer separation guide unit
Developing assembly (Y)
1
4
1
1
1
1
1
500k
500k
500k
500k
150k
500k
500k
FM3-8978
FM3-8979
FM3-8939
FM3-8973
FM3-8974
FM3-8975
FM3-8976
FC6-9817
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
500k
500k
500k
500k
500k
500k
500k
100k
Remarks
imageRUNNER ADVANCE
C5051/5045
imageRUNNER ADVANCE
C5035/5030
T-2-46
Parts name
Execution timing
50k
50k
50k
Work
Remarks
Cleaning
Cleaning
Inspection
T-2-47
2-78
2-79
Fixing System
1. Saving energy
Fast warm-up reduces standby electric power thanks to low heat capacity.
Overview
2. High speed
51ppm is enabled by introducing a new toner and the film capable of high heat transfer.
Features
This machine introduces the on-demand fixing method.
Separation guide
3. Supported media
Feeding 52g/m2 paper is available due to the modification of film path and Separation
Fixing film
Inner delivery
roller
Fixing heater
Pressure roller
Fixing inlet guide
F-2-114
2-79
2-80
Specifications
Item
Fixing method
Fixing speed
Heater
Control temperature
Temperature
detection
Protection feature
On-demand fixing
51 / 45ppm 246 mm/s (1/1-speed, plain paper)
machine
123 mm/s (1/2-speed, thick paper)
82 mm/s (1/3-speed, coated paper, transparency)
35 / 30ppm 160 mm/s (1/1-speed, plain paper)
machine
80 mm/s (1/2-speed, thick paper, coated paper, transparency)
Ceramic heater
Individual drive of Main Heater (heat-generation distribution:
high in center) / Sub Heater (heat-generation distribution: high in
edges).
Purpose: to control temperature rise at the edge
Target temperature at printing (plain paper 1 (64 to 81 g/m2))
51 / 45 ppm machine: 169~180 deg C
35 / 30 ppm machine: 150~163 deg C
By the main thermistors (2pc) and the sub thermistors (2pc)
Thermistors
To block power supply to the fixing heater when a failure is
detected
Temperature fuse
Rated operation temperature: 228 +0/-6 deg C
Pressure roller
Film unit
F-2-115
Shutter HP sensor
(PS31)
Main
thermistor 1
(TH1)
Fixing heater
(H1)
T-2-48
Main
thermistor 2
(TH1)
Fixing pressure
sensor (PS30)
Inner delivery
sensor (PS37)
Sub thermistor 2
(TH1)
Shutter position sensor
(PS32)
Temperature fuse
(TP1)
Main thermistor 2
(TH1)
Main thermistor 1
(TH1)
Sub thermistor 1
(TH1)
F-2-116
2-80
2-81
Shutter
Fixing cooling fan (front)
(FM5)
M27
Shutter motor
Shutter position sensor(PS32)
Shutter HP sensor
(PS31)
Fixing cooling fan (rear)
(FM6)
F-2-117
Parts name
Function / method
---
Film unit
---
Pressure roller
Applying heat and pressure makes the toner image on paper fixed
(fused).
H1
Fixing heater
Ceramic heater
TH1
Main thermistor 1
2-81
2-82
Controls
Fixing
temperature
STBY
Fixing
temperature
STBY
INTR
Flying start
control
temperature
Startup
(warm-up
rotation)
control
temperature
PRNT
During-print
control
temperature
INTR
PRNT
Flaying start
control
temperature
Sheet-t
o-sheet
control
temperature
15 sec
Time
Command for
flying start
Command for
print start
Command for
flying start
F-2-119
F-2-118
Time
2-82
2
Related Service Mode
(Lv.2) COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX> FLYING
(To enable/disable Flying start (pre-mature start)
2-83
Print temperature control
Fixing
temperature
<Setting value>
0: Enable Flying start [default]
1: Disable Flying start
STBY
INTR
Startup
(warm-up
rotation)
control
temperature
PRNT
During print
control
temperature
Sheet-to
-sheet
control
temperature
Time
Command for
Flying start
Command for
print start
F-2-120
2-83
2-84
If the distance between sheets is longer than usual*1, temperature between sheets is
reduced to prevent temperature rise.
Temperature between sheets = target temperature during printing (30 to 50 deg C)*2
*1:At down sequence
st
nd
Between the 1 side and the 2 side when making 2-sided print
When controls are executed (ATR control, registration control, ATVC control)
*2:To be determined according to the elapsed time since the last control of fixing temperature
(including standby control) and fixing temperature at the start of warm-up control
Model
Paper type
() : paper weight g / m2
Speed
1 / 1-speed
246 mm /
sec.
1 / 2-speed
123 mm /
sec.
1 / 3-speed
82 mm /
sec.
1 / 1-speed
160 mm /
sec.
1 / 2-speed
80 mm /
sec.
51
25.5
20
16
148~164
181~197
51
51
25.5
25.5
20
20
16
16
181~197
40
20
17
14
162~179
25.5
12.5
10
166~179
20
10
7.5
149
165
160
170~172
159
150~163
20
17
17
17
17
35
10
8.5
8.5
8.5
8.5
17.5
8
7.5
7.5
7.5
7.5
15
7.5
5.5
5.5
5.5
5.5
12
135~153
165~185
35
35
17.5
17.5
15
15
12
12
165
160~172
150~167
17
17
17
8.5
8.5
8.5
7.5
7.5
7.5
5.5
5.5
5.5
155~170
17
8.5
7.5
5.5
170
159
149
17
17
17
8.5
8.5
8.5
7.5
7.5
7.5
5.5
5.5
5.5
T-2-50
2-84
2
Related Service Mode
2-85
Down sequence control
Down sequence when feeding small size paper
Purpose:
Starting conditions:
<Setting value>
-2:
-1:
0:
+1:
+2:
-10 deg C
-5 deg C
0 deg C [default]
+5 deg C
+10 deg C
Target
Print
temperature speed
(deg C)
(ppm)
165~180
144~164
175~192
175~192
158~179
162~179
145~149
176~180
163~179
181~185
155~159
146~163
131~153
161~185
176~180
163~179
146~167
151-170
12~4
9~3
6~2
12~4
6~2
181~185
155~159
145~149
T-2-51
2-85
2-86
Starting conditions:
Setting for down sequence start temperature when feeding small size paper
(250~260 deg C) when switching to the paper which has longer width than the
preceding paper.
<Setting value>
-3:
-2:
-1:
0:
+1:
+2:
+3:
Operation:
-15 deg C
-10 deg C
-5 deg C
0 deg C [Default]
+5 deg C
+10 deg C
+15 deg C
Pickup of the succeeding paper and power distribution to the heater are stopped as
well.
Completion conditions:
This down sequence is completed if any of the following conditions is satisfied:
When the detected temperature of sub thermistor 1 or 2 reaches the specified
temperature or less.
When the specified period of time*1 has passed since the preceding paper went
through the fixing nip.
*1: Specified period of time differs whether the fan has cooled the preceding paper or not.
If the preceding paper is A4R or larger and A3 or smaller (the fan has cooled the
Purpose:
paper)
This down sequence prevents temperature rise of non-feeding area: there can be
15 seconds
possible fixing offset or wrinkle of the succeeding paper due to increased temperature
of non-feeding area of the preceding paper when continuously making prints or
If the preceding paper is smaller than A4R (the fan has not cooled the paper)
30 seconds
Non-feeding area
Film
A4R
A4
Non-feeding area
F-2-121
2-86
2-87
Temperature at the edge of the film is increased when continuously making prints. Excessive
The thermistor connection signal, which is input to the DC controller, detects presence of
temperature rise can deteriorate the film. When small size paper (A4R or shorter size in width
fixing assembly at warm-up rotation (when the power is turned ON, the cover is open).
An error code E004-0000 is displayed to stop the operation if no fixing assembly is detected.
When making prints with paper that is A4R or longer and A3 or shorter in width direction while
the film temperature exceeds the specified temperature (sub thermistor 1,2), the fan attached
near the fixing assembly sends air and cools the film to control temperature rise. Unlike down
sequence, this control will not reduce the through-put because this control is executed while
Signal
Thermistor connection signal (THRM_CNNT)
Detection result
High: No fixing assembly is found.
Low: There is a fixing assembly.
T-2-52
printing is continued.
Shutter
M27
Shutter motor
Shutter position sensor (PS32)
Shutter HP sensor
(PS31)
Fixing cooling fan (rear)
(FM6)
Shutter HP sensor
(PS31)
Shutter
Direction of movement
M27
Shutter motor
A4-RLTR-R B4 EXE 8K LTRA4
F-2-122
There is a shutter at the air vent, which moves (opens) in 7 levels according to the size of
feeding paper. This feature enables to send air to optimal area on the film.
2-87
2-88
Protection features
To prevent deformation of the fixing film / pressure roller caused by heat and pressure when
the drive of pressure roller is stopped, and also to improve jam recovering performance, the
film unit is disengaged from the pressure roller under the following conditions:
Fixing pressure sensor (PS30)
Sensor flag
Fixing Motor
Fixing Motor
M21
M21
Cam
Sensor flag
Film unit
Film unit
Pressure
plate
Pressure
plate
Engaged
Pressure roller
Disengaged
Pressure roller
F-2-123
Code
Description
Error
Clear
2-88
2-89
Service work
Parts name
1 Film unit
2 Pressure roller
3 Fixing bearing
FM3-5949
FM3-5950
FM3-5951
FC8-4906
XG9-0172
Parts
number
Qty
Estimated
life (print)
Remarks
FC8-4906
XG9-0172
1
1
300,000
300,000
Consumable parts
Parts
number
Parts name
Estimated life
Qty
(print)
Counter
(DRBL-2)
300,000
FX-UP-FR N.A. *
1
2
300,000
300,000
FX-LW-RL N.A. *1
FX-LW-BR N.A.
Remarks
100V
120V
230V
Bearing
Pressure Roller
Bearing
2-89
2-90
Edge
145 mm
Center
Feeding direction
145 mm
Edge
F-2-125
If measured value is out of the specified range, reinstall the replaced parts (film unit or
pressure roller) and then measure the nip width again.
MEMO:
Fixing nip width cannot be adjusted in the field
2-90
2
Pickup Feed System
2-91
Specification
Item
Overview
Features
Improvement of productivity (33 sheets / min 51 sheets / min)
The number of circulation sheets is changed to 5 in 1 set at 2-sided feeding. As a
result, although the motor speed is slowed down reducing the motor loads and noise,
productivity is improved.
Increase of supported paper size and types for printing
The curve of feed path is made gentler and the curl occurrence is reduced by
changing the fixing temperature depending on the paper grammage. As a result, it is
realized to feed the paper with 52g / m2 to 256g / m2.
Auto paper size identification in cassette
By using the 2 size switches and the guide plate, auto size identification is realized.
Users do not have to configure the size setting.
Increase of Multi-Purpose Tray pickup capacity (50 sheets 100 sheets)
Simple retard method is applied for the pickup method. The tray is lifted up and down
at paper pickup, so stack capacity of the tray is increased from 50 sheets to 100
sheets.
Description
2-91
2-92
Parts Configuration
Roller Layout Drawing
[1] [2]
[3]
[23]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
[10]
[11]
[12]
Reverse Roller
Second Delivery Roller
Third Delivery Roller
Duplex Inlet Roller
Duplex Feed Upper Roller
Duplex Feed Lower Roller
Multi-Purpose Tray Pickup / Feed Roller
Multi-Purpose Tray Separation Roller
Vertical Path Roller 2
Cassette 2 Feed Roller
Cassette 2 Separation Roller
Cassette 2 Pickup Roller
[13]
[14]
[15]
[16]
[17]
[18]
[19]
[20]
[21]
[22]
[23]
[4]
[22]
[21]
[5]
[20]
[19]
[18]
[17]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[16]
[15]
[9]
[10]
[11]
[14] [13]
[12]
F-2-126
2-92
2-93
PS33
PS34
PS35
PS36
PS37
PS38
PS39
PS40
PS41
PS42
PS43
PS44
PS45
PS47
[PS39]
[PS45]
[PS42]
[PS44]
[PS40]
[PS43]
[PS41]
[PS37]
Registration sensor
Fixing Inlet Sensor
Fixing Loop Sensor 1
Fixing Loop Sensor 2
Inner Delivery Sensor
Duplex Paper Sensor
Reverse Sensor
Duplex Inlet Sensor
First Delivery Sensor
Second Delivery Sensor
Third Delivery Sensor
First Delivery Tray Full Sensor
Second Delivery Tray Full Sensor
Multi-Purpose Tray Paper Presence Sensor
PS49
PS50
PS51
PS52
PS53
PS54
PS55
PS56
UN51
UN53
SW6
SW7
SW8
SW9
[PS34][PS35] [PS36]
[UN52]
[PS38]
[PS47]
[PS33]
[UN51]
[UN53]
[SW7]
[PS49]
[PS52] [PS51]
[PS55]
[SW6]
[SW9]
[PS50]
[PS54][PS53]
[PS56]
[SW8]
F-2-127
2-93
2-94
Paper Path
SL6
SL7
R40
Reverse mouth
Third delivery
M25
Second delivery
First delivery
M23
Meandering
is reduced
SL5
M22
M20
Multi-purpose
tray pickup
M21
R40
M19
CL1
M18
SL4
Cassette 1 pickup
SL2
M16
SL3
Cassette 2 pickup
M17
F-2-128
M16
M17
M18
M19
M20
M21
M22
M23
M24
M25
SL2
SL3
SL5
SL6
SL7
CL1
Side deck
pickup
To support the heavy paper feeding, the feed path at Duplex Feed Assembly is made a gentle
curve and damage on the paper is reduced.
2-94
2-95
Interval Speed Up
Reverse sensor [PS39]
246mm/sec
(C5051,C5045) 400mm/sec
(C5035,C5030) 300mm/sec
(C5051,C5045) 340mm/sec
(C5035,C5030) 300mm/sec
Delivery speed up position
Inner delivery sensor [PS37]
Duplex paper
sensor [PS38]
Duplex re-pickup position
Registration position
Cassette 2 pre-registration
sensor [PS56]
Pre-registration position
Pre-registration
position
F-2-130
2-95
2-96
Various Controls
Overview
Parts Configuration
Cassette 1 Pre-registration sensor
Duplex / Delivery
Assembly
Cassette 1
paper presence sensor
Cassette 2
Pre-registration sensor
Cassette 1 feed roller
Cassette 1
detachment roller
Cassette 1
paper level sensor A
Cassette 1
paper level sensor B
Fixing / Registration A ssembly
Multi-Purpose Pickup
Assembly
Pickup assembly
Cassette 2
Cassette 2
Idler gear
paper level sensor B pickup solenoid
Cassette 2
paper level sensor A
Cassette 2
detachment roller
Cassette 2
paper presence sensor
F-2-132
Cassette Pickup
Assembly
F-2-131
Area
Detection, Control
F-2-133
2-96
2-97
Drive Configuration
Detection
Vertical path Roller1
Pickup Roller1
Feed Roller1
Detachment Roller1
Lifter
SL2
M16
Pickup Roller2
Feed Roller2
Detachment Roller2
Lifter
SL3
Paper
M17
F-2-134
M16
M17
SL2
SL3
OFFOFF
If the paper is approx. half
Paper
OFFON
If the paper is a little
Paper
Cassette paper level sensor A
ON ON
If the paper is absent
F-2-135
2-97
2
Display Remaining Level
100% to approx. 50% of capacity
Approx. 50% of capacity to
approx. 50 sheets
Approx. 50 sheets or less
No paper
2-98
Sensor
A
OFF
Sensor
B
OFF
Paper Presence
Sensor
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
-
ON
-
OFF
ON
Cassette size
switch A
Rear detection
rink
Rear guide plate
F-2-136
Cassette size
switch B
be used. However, size should be found manually on the check screen for the combination of
Detection dial
F-2-137
2-98
2-99
Width
B5
EXEC
16K
A5-R
A4
STMT-R
LTR
B5-R
LTR-R
A4-R
LGL
B4
8K
A3
LDR
12x18
257
267
270
148.5
297
139.7
279.4
182
215.9
210
215.9
257
270
297
279.4
304.8
Length
182
184
195
210
210
215.9
215.9
257
279.4
297
355.6
364
390
420
431.8
457.2
1
0
0
0
ON
0
ON
0
ON
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Width detection
2
3
ON
ON
ON
0
ON
0
ON
0
0
0
0
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
0
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
0
ON
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
0
ON
0
ON
ON
ON
0
0
0
Length detection
2
3
0
0
0
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
0
ON
ON
ON
ON
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
ON
0
ON
0
ON
ON
ON
ON
0
4
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
ON
ON
0
ON
0
ON
ON
ON
ON
T-2-58
Basis weight/name
Overall
Overall
Overall
Overall
T-2-60
Basis weight/name
Envelope
Overall
Washi
Overall
Caution
Let out the air of envelope and disperse the glued tabs
Since there are size variations, non-image area appears in
case of full copy. Handle this by free size setting.
T-2-61
Also, the cassette presence is detected when the size switch is pushed. (If no switch is
pushed, it is determined as no cassette.)
2) Enable detection and display of Chinese paper (K size paper: 8K and 16K).
moisture absorption) and paper trimming state when setting the paper.
Paper type
Carbonless paper
Transparency
Labels
Tub paper
Pre-punched paper
OK Prince Joshitsu
Canon Europe Canon Recycled 80
(Vision Classic White)
Canon Europe Canon High Grade
(Mondi Business Paper)
Canon Digital Office Colour
(Stora Enso MultiCopy Special Colour Laser)
Main area
JPN
EUR
EUR
EUR
T-2-59
2-99
2-100
Pre-Registration Control
Service mode
To correct the feed variation at pickup and to perform the stabilized paper feed, pre-
COPIER > OPTION > CST > CSTX-UY > Setting number
When the paper leading edge is detected at the Pre-Registration Sensor (at Vertical Path
Sensor on cassette 1 only) on each cassette, the machine determines whether to stop the
Size category
pre-registration or not.
Size category
U1
U2
U3
U4
Size
FLSC, A-FLS, OFI, E-OFI, A-LTRR, A-LGL, G-LGL, A-OFI, M-OFI, FA4, FB4
K-LGLR, G-LTRR
K-LGL, A-LTR, G-LTR
B-OFI
T-2-62
Setting No.
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
36
37
42
43
Size
K-LGL
K-LGLR
FLSC
A-FLS
OFI
E-OFI
B-OFI
A-LTR
A-LTRR
G-LTR
G-LTRR
A-LGL
G-LGL
A-OFI
M-OFI
FA4
FB4
T-2-63
2-100
2-101
Drive Configuration
Overview
Parts Configuration
Multi-purpose
pickup clutch (CL1)
Multi-purpose tray
Multi-purpose
size sensor (UN52)
Multi-purpose
motor (M18)
Multi-purpose
motor
M18
CL1
Multi-purpose tray
lifting solenoid
SL4
Multi-purpose
pickup clutch
Multi-purpose tray
lifting solenoid (SL4)
Multi-Purpose Tray
Detachment Roller
Multi-purpose pickup / feed roller
F-2-139
Detection
Multi-purpose
paper sensor (PS47)
When the paper absence is detected, if there is the same size & same type paper exists in
other cassette, auto cassette change is executed.
Paper Size Detection
The paper width is detected according to output value from the variable resistor that works in
conjunction with the side guide. Since the length cannot be detected, users have to specify
the setting.
2-101
2-102
Registration Control
OHP Detection
Overview
As the countermeasure for when the paper other than transparency film is fed in transparency
mode, OHP sensor is used as white paper detection to identify whether the fed paper is
transparency or not. However, since this is not used to identify the transparency for CLC, jam
will occur when CLC paper is fed.
Registration motor(M19)
Registration Control
To make the paper straight-enter the transfer assembly, registration control is executed.
After the paper passes through the Registration Sensor, the drive of the Pickup Motor (MultiPurpose Tray Pickup Motor, Duplex Pickup Motor) is turned OFF to stop the paper by the
distance from the Registration Sensor to the Registration Roller with arch amount added.
To reduce the noise when the paper enters the Registration Roller, speed is decreased by
Registration roller
Registration sensor
(PS33)
Moreover, the paper may be late for the image. In such case only, the speed is changed by
Cassette 1 pre-registration
sensor(PS55)
To always feed the paper to the Fixing Unit in optimal status, this control is to monitor the
paper slack (arch) condition and to switch the feed speed at the Fixing Motor according to the
status.
This is executed between the Secondary Transfer Unit and the Fixing Unit. When the
F-2-140
Pressure Roller of the Fixing Unit expands with heat, circumference of roller is also increased.
Thus, even though the number of rotation is consistent, the feed speed at the fixing side is
faster than the feed speed at the secondary transfer side. To fix this, change the speed of the
Fixing Motor according to the arch condition using the Fixing Arch Sensor 1&2.
2-102
2-103
Duplex / Delivery Assembly
Overview
SL7
Third delivery roller
M25
M23
F-2-142
M20
M23
M24
M25
SL5
SL6
SL7
F-2-141
2-103
2-104
Duplex Control
After that, feed operation is performed by 340mm / sec on imageRUNNER ADVANCE C5051
/ C5045 (300mm / sec on imageRUNNER ADVANCE C5035 / C5030).The paper fed to the
duplex path is transferred to the duplex re-pickup position unless there is paper on the path
at the downstream side. If there is paper on the downstream path, it is delivered from the
reverse path or it stops at the duplex upstream.
In case of output to the First / Second Delivery Mouth, 5-sheet circulation is used for small
size (LTR or smaller); however, 3-sheet circulation is used for large size (larger than A4R).
This is because 2 sheets of paper cannot wait on the duplex feed path.
In case of output to third delivery mouth, 3-sheet circulation is used for middle size (A4R
42.4mm
or smaller); however, 1-sheet circulation is used for large size (larger then A4R) since the
succeeding paper enters the reverse path before the preceding paper goes through the
reverse path and jam will occur.
Following is the each duplex reverse position and the number of sheet circulation by size.
Small size (LTR or smaller)
Middle size (A4R or smaller)
Large size (larger than A4R)
Third Delivery
5
3
3
3
3
1
T-2-64
Compared to the conventional model (imageRUNNER C3380), feed speed at the duplex feed
assembly is slowed down. This is to get the precise feed, to reduce the noise and the motor
loads. However, by changing the circulation algorism, the speed is accelerated when printing
a number of sheets and 51 sheets / min speed is achieved.
50mm
Duplex wait position
F-2-143
Since the curve of duplex path shape gets steeper at the leading end, as duplex wait position
gets closer to the registration, curl tends to occur frequently. For the paper smaller than A3,
the duplex wait position is 50mm away from the Registration Sensor toward upstream in due
consideration with the productivity. In case of A3 paper or larger, the sheet interval is wide
enough to satisfy the productivity, so the position which avoids curl occurrence and is 85mm
away from the Registration Sensor on the upstream side is to be the duplex wait position.
2-104
2-105
JAM Detection
At the cassette pickup assembly, since the feed speed is increased, detection cannot catch
up with it. Thus, delay and stationary jam detection are not executed at the Cassette 1 PreRegistration Sensor. Instead of it, the Vertical Path Sensor executes the delay and stationary
jam detection. Since the residual jam should be detected on each cassette, the Cassette 1
Pre-Registration Sensor detects it. Because the Vertical Path Sensor is too close and it is
unnecessary to execute detection, the Vertical Path Sensor does not execute residual jam
detection.
Sensor
85mm
Jam
code
Name
XX01
XX02
XX13
XX05
XX06
XX07
XX08
XX09
XX0A
XX0B
XX0C
XX0D
XX
02: Stationary 03: Residual
01: Delay jam
jam
jam
Code C5051 C5035 C5051 C5035 C5051 C5035
/
/
/
/
/
/
C5045 C5030 C5045 C5030 C5045 C5030
PS55
PS56
UN53
PS33
PS34
PS37
PS41
PS42
PS39
PS43
PS40
PS38
N
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
T-2-65
Y: Detected
N: Not detected
2-105
2-106
Service Works
Periodically replacement parts
N/A
Consumables
No.
1
2
3
4
5
Parts Name
Cassette Feed Roller
Cassette Detachment Roller
Multi-Purpose Feed Roller
Multi-Purpose Tray Detachment
Roller
Pickup Assembly Idler Gear
Parts
Number of used Replacement
Remarks
Number
part
timing
FC6-7083
FC6-6661
FB1-8581
DC6-6661
2
2
1
1
120K
120K
120K
120K
FU3-0280
120K
For
Chinese
model only
T-2-66
Periodical service
No.
Parts Name
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
Registration roller
Pre-registration guide
Transparency sensor
Fixing delivery guide
Post-fixing roller
Fixing delivery roller
First delivery roller
Second delivery roller
Third delivery roller
Duplex feed upper roller
Duplex feed lower roller
Vertical path sensor
Lightproof sheet
Execution
timing
Work
Remarks
50k
50k
50k
50k
50k
50k
50k
50k
50k
50k
50k
150k
150k
Cleaning
Cleaning
Cleaning
Cleaning
Cleaning
Cleaning
Cleaning
Cleaning
Cleaning
Inspection
Inspection
Cleaning
Cleaning
T-2-67
2-106
2-107
Fan
Overview
Various Controls
Fan Layout
Software Counter
Delivery position
1 Host machine First delivery tray
Second delivery tray
Third delivery tray
2 In case finisher is installed.
Print mode
1-side / 2nd side of 1-sided
1st side of 2-sided
Count-up timing
First Delivery Sensor (PS41)
Second Delivery Sensor (PS42)
Third Delivery Sensor (PS43)
Finisher Delivery Sensor
T-2-68
Fixing cooling
fan (rear)(FM6)
Secondary transfer
exhaust fan(FM8)
Fixing cooling fan (front)(FM5)
Process cartridge fan (rear)(FM4)
F-2-145
2-107
2
No.
2-108
Name
Function
FM1
FM2
FM3
FM4
FM5
FM6
FM7
FM8
FM9
FM10
FM11
FM12
FM13
FM14
Delivery Fan 2
Process Cartridge Fan (front)
Controller Fan 1
Controller Fan 2
Controller Fan 3
HDD Cooling Fan
Error code
E805-0000
E805-0001
E804
E807-0000
Air Flow
Air flow around the Main Controller and the Power Supply
E806-0000
E806-0002
E806-0001
E807-0001
T-2-69
Toner Filter is installed at the Ventilation Hole of the Process Cartridge Fan (rear) (FM4).
F-2-146
2-108
2-109
F-2-147
F-2-148
2-109
2-110
2-speed control
Among the fans installed in this machine, the Power Cooling Fan (FM3) and the Delivery Fan
1 (FM7) perform the 2-speed control. Rotation speed is switched when the Voltage switching
3VR
Fan name
Process Cartridge Fan
(front)
Process Cartridge Fan
(rear)
Fixing Exhaust Fan 1
Pre
Initial
Stand Copy/pint
Post
Jam
rotation rotation by
rotation error
12sided sided
Fixing heater
TP
3VR
AC
interlock
switch
Right
switch
Main
controller
PCB 1
All-night 3VR
power PCB
Main switch
Operation Sequence
12VA2
12VA1
12VB1
12V
power
supply
PCB
24V
power
supply
PCB 2
AC driver PCB
3VR
Front Right
switch switch
24VA
Relay PCB
12VC
Leakage breaker
Controller Fan 2
Controller Fan 3
HDD Cooling Fan
Controller Control
Controller Control
Reader heater
Controller Fan 1
Drum heater
Cassette heater
Delivery Fan 2
Deck heater
Secondary Transfer
Exhaust Fan
Delivery Fan 1
24VC
24V
power
supply
PCB 1
Main
controller
PCB 2
24VA
5VB
24VA
Laser
driver
PCB
12VB1
5VA
3VA
HVT 1 PCB
HVT 2 PCB
HVT 3 PCB
24VB1
Drum driver
PCB
24VB2
Cassette feed
driver PCB
24VB3
Pickup feed
driver PCB
Option
Reader
Controller
PCB
Control
panel
F-2-150
Controller Control
Controller Control
: Full speed
: Half speed
F-2-149
2-110
2-111
24V
Printer
12V
Reader
Controller
PCB
Reader / ADFUnit
Motor
Fan
Sensor
24V
6V
4.5V
CMOS PCB
Reader
24V
LED Lamp
Unit
24V
6V
4.5V
CMOS PCB
DADF
24V
LED Lamp
Unit
24V
5V
Staple FinisherC1
Built-in wiring
Connector inside the cover is used for the connection with DADF Unit and the 2-Cassette
Pedestal. External Cable is used for the connection with the Side Paper Deck and the
Finisher.
2-111
2-112
Job end
Sleep Standby
or
Sleep1
Backlight is
turned off.
Job submission
Deep Sleep
F-2-153
* When options are installed, the machine does not enter Sleep Standby but enters Sleep1
mode.
Standby
In this mode, the machine is either operating or ready to start operation immediately and all
power is supplied.
Sleep Standby or Sleep1
Control panel is turned OFF.
Power supply other than the control panel is the same with Standby mode.
Deep Sleep
3V for all-night power PCB is only supplied.
Print job is submitted : The machine moves to Sleep Standby or Sleep1 mode.
Control panel power switch is pressed : The machine moves to Standby mode..
2-112
2-113
Service Operations
When Replacing Parts
N/A
Consumables
No.
1
Parts Name
Toner filter
Parts number
FC6-9817
Qty
1
Execution timing
Remark
100k(B / W)
25k(CL)
T-2-70
2-113
2-114
MEAP
Addition of Functions
3 functions
Changes
For the built-in applications in iR-ADV models, 3 functions (services) were added.
These functions support the platform which was reinforced in terms of management. In detail,
Overview
information which the MEAP applications manage respectively (setting information, user
Functions and specifications which were added in Ver.50.xx or later firmware are introduced
here.
setting information, a bunch of keys, and log) can be managed effectively and collectively.
These 3 functions are shown below.
1 MEAP User Preference Service (MEAP Spec Ver 56)
Management service of customized information for each user which MEAP application
Although SSL setting of the device is disabled, SSL is always enabled when accessing to
retains
SMS.
Due to this specification change, URL for accessing to SMS was changed as follows.
Old URL
New URL
Note:
Registration method of application data to each service and its usage method are
disclosed in MEAP SDK V.4.3.
However, as for the authentication log only, they are disclosed in MEAP Login SDK V.3.1.
Management service of the application data which was stored in each service is provided.
iW EMC Plug-in(DAM Plug-in) RUI SMS
F-2-154
2-114
2-115
Due to the foregoing additional 3 functions, functions for MEAP application were added to
By using the 3 functions which were newly added, MEAP applications can be managed
collectively as follows. (Only for MEAP applications which support new functions)
App1
Dedicated management tool
App2
Dedicated management tool
App1
MEAP applications setting information management function which the application data can
(App1 format)
Pref data
(App1 format)
App2
Log data
(App1 format)
SMS.
Config data
Device
Config data
(App2 format)
Pref data
(App2 format)
Log data
(App2 format)
F-2-155
Log management function which the MEAP application log can be downloaded and/or deleted
App1
Configuration
management service
was added.
App2
Preference
management service
Device
Log
management service
Config data
Preference data
Log data
(common format)
(common format)
(common format)
Platform
F-2-156
F-2-158
2-115
2-116
Persistent Credential
Comparison of functions
Volatile Credential
Registered information Character strings and arbitrary Java
object
Lifetime Registration
F-2-159
Deletion
Encryption of
Credential data
Store (Save) to
Persistent Credential
Character strings only User ID/
Password/Domain/Arbitrary character
strings
At any timing registered by
application
Can be used until deletion by
application or management tool.
Data retained on the HDD is
encrypted.
HDD in the device
T-2-71
Service mode
For the reason of security, if not preferring to use Volatile Credential, it can be disabled using
the service mode. (Persistent Credential cannot be disabled.)
Service switch can be found in the following.
[SERVICE MODE] LEVEL1 > [COPIER] > [Option] > [FNC-SW] > [UA-OFFSW]
Setting value: 0 = Enabled, 1 = Disabled
There are 2 types for authentication information sharing: Volatile Credential which the
registered information is discarded at logout or shutdown of the device, and Persistent
Credential which the registered information is not discarded even at logout.
Volatile Credential
Volatile Credential is used when sharing the authentication information between applications
which log in (authenticate) to the same security domain.
Credential is registered using a login application, so the application which accesses to the
security domain used for authentication by login application can use the Credential.
F-2-160
2-116
2
Function Supporting Deep Sleep Mode
Once the device shifted to the deep sleep mode, the USB device could not be controlled
after recovery from the deep sleep mode. For this reason, it was necessary to control the
application not to shift to the deep sleep mode.
With this function, the USB device control is enabled after recovery from the deep sleep mode
as in the case when the USB device is inserted and removed (occurrence of disconnection/
connection event) at recovery from the deep sleep mode.
In addition, this function enables the USB device control after shifting to the deep sleep mode,
so the application needs to perform reconnection processing.
2-117
This function can be used with the device which MEAP Specifications Ver.54 is supported.
CAUTION:
For the following operations in the combined environment of Windows XP and Internet
Explorer 6, Java 2 Runtime Environment Standard Edition 1.5 or later is required.
User registration / edit in SSO-H local device
Use of remote login in SSO-H.
SMS
The following system environments are required in order to enable SMS access.
Operating System
Supported browser
Windows XP Professional
Windows 7
Mac OS X 10.3
Safari 1.3.2
Mac OS X 10.4
Safari 2.0.4
Mac OS X 10.5
Safari 3.1.2
Mac OS X 10.6
Safari 4.0.3
T-2-72
2-117
2
SSO-H Management
When using SSO-H for the login service, required system environments are different in
domain authentication or local device authentication.
See the following for system requirements in each of authentication methods:
Note:
2-118
System environments for administrator and ordinary user
Operating System
Java Runtime
Environment
Supported browser
Windows 7
Mac OS X v10.3
Safari 1.3.2
Mac OS X v10.4
Safari 2.0.4
Mac OS X v10.5
Safari 3.1.2
Mac OS X v10.6
Safari 4.0.3
T-2-73
System environments for administrator and ordinary user (when using IPv6 communication)
Operating System
Supported browser
required.
The following Windows servers are installed under Active Directory, and DNS server for
Windows 7
In order to use domain authentication in SSO-H, the following system environments are
name resolution.
T-2-74
2-118
2-119
Local Device Authentication Management
Note:
Visit the URL of Sun Microsystems (US) to learn how to obtain Java Runtime
Environment.
Accesses via IPv6 communication from a client computer require Java 2 Runtime
Environment Standard Edition 1.5 and later.
Use User Logon Name (Windows 2000 or older) registered in Active Directory as the
user name for domain authentication.
For domain authentication, set a user name only with 1-byte alphanumeric characters
and symbols of - (hyphen), _ (underbar), and % (percent). iR device will reject login with a
user name including a forbidden character.
For domain authentication, the time setting should be synchronized between Active
Directory server and the device (as well as the PC to be logged in). If the time is different
for 5 minutes or more, a login error is triggered in domain authentication (the setting of
allowable time difference can be changed).
A domain authentication manager should be registered when domain authentication is
used. If not registered, setting or management is disabled for some applications. How to
register the manager depends on system environments.
- When not using imageWARE/iW Accounting Manager, a user belonging to Canon
Peripheral Admins group on Active Directory will be authorized as the domain
authentication manager. Follow Active Directory Operation Manual to create Canon
Peripheral Admins group before registering the manager.
For user registration / edit in Local Authentication, following system requirements must be
satisfied.
System environments for administrator and ordinary user
Operating System
Supported browser
Windows 7
Mac OS X v10.3
Safari 1.3.2
Mac OS X v10.4
Safari 2.0.4
Mac OS X v10.5
Safari 3.1.2
Mac OS X v10.6
Safari 4.0.3
T-2-76
Application
System environments for administrator and ordinary user (when using IPv6 communication)
53
88
389
Communication with directory service using LDAP (default is 389, may be changed to
any port on LDAP service side)
Operating System
T-2-75
Supported browser
Windows 7
T-2-77
Note:
Visit the URL of Sun Microsystems (US) to learn how to obtain Java Runtime
Environment.
Accesses via IPv6 communication from a client computer require Java 2 Runtime
Environment Standard Edition 1.5 and later.
2-119
2-120
Note:
In iR-ADV series, the System Manager ID and the System PIN are configured by
default, so Network and the items that follow are grayed out and cannot be selected.
Return to the top screen, press Login button at the lower left of the screen, login as
the system manager, and configure the settings.
The default setting for the System Manager ID is 7654321, and the password is
7654321.
1) Press [Settings/Registration] button, select [Preferences] > [Network] > [TCP/IP Settings] >
[Use HTTP] and press [On] button.
F-2-162
Note:
When using SSL, press [Settings/ Registration] button, select [Management
Settings]>[License / Other] > [MEAP Settings] > [SSL Settings] and press [On] button.
(This setting is applied to SSL setting on RUI. Vice versa, [On] set for SSL on RUI is
also applied to the touch panel.)
When [Use SSL] is set to On, the message dialog, [The Default Key is not set. Check
the Key and Certificate List settings in Certificate Setting.], is shown. Press [OK] button
for this message.
F-2-161
F-2-163
2-120
2
CAUTION:
The setting [ Use HTTP ] is not actually enabled/disabled until you have restarted the
device.
You cannot make a connection through a proxy server. If a proxy server is in use,
enter the IP address of the MEAP device in the Exceptions field for the browser.
Open Internet Options dialog of Internet Explorer and select Connections tab, LAN
Settings button, Use a proxy server option, and Advanced button of Proxy server
group. Proxy Settings dialog will opens. The Exceptions field is in the dialog. As
network settings vary among environments, consult the network administrator.
2-121
Login to SMS
Outline
SMS login may be done by entering a password for authentication, or by authentication via
the Remote Login Service (RLS) login window (RLS authentication). Settings can be changed
to allow either only one of these methods or both of them.
SMS login window (password auth) RLS login window (user name/ password auth)
If Cookie and JavaScript are not enabled in the Web browser, you will not be able to
use SMS.
To type text using the Web browser, use the characters compatible with the MEAP
devices touch panel display. The MEAP device may not properly recognize some
characters.
When [Use SSL] is made available, it is necessary to set the key and the certificate
necessary for the SSL communication. Set the key and the certificate by SSL with
[SSL Settings] that exists in [Preferences] > [Network] > [TCP/IP Settings] > [SSL
Settings] on the iR device.
F-2-164
Login method
Authentication
method
Password
authentication
Password
authentication
RLS login
SSO-H
Users registered as
administrators with SSO-H
T-2-78
Note:
If Default Authentication is selected as the device authentication method, RLS
Authentication is not selectable as SMS Login method. Also, if RLS Authentication is
selected, the device authentication method (Default Authentication, SDL, SSO) cannot
be changed.
2-121
2
Key Pair and Server Certificate when Using Encrypted SSL
Communication
SSL Connection for SMS
SMS is always SSL-connected, so it is required to set a key pair and server certificate as the
Default Key. When deleting [Default Key] (pre-installed key pair and server certificate) from
the Default Key, SMS cannot be accessed.
2-122
Login by Password Authentication
In the SMS login window, enter the password for authentication. Only one password can be
registered with SMS. The login procedures are as follows.
1) Access SMS from the browser of a PC on the same network as the MEAP device. The
URL is as follows.
URL: https://<MEAP Device IP address>:8443/sms/
Ex.) https://172.16.188.240:8443/sms/
Note:
To encrypt the password information input when logging in, SSL of the login screen was
made effective. However, it is redirected to new URL (effective SSL) even when accessing
with URL (non-SSL) before.
Note:
The default password is MeapSmsLogin. (The password is case-sensitive.) When
you want to change the display original language, change in the box in the right of the
screen.
This setting is not affect by the setting of the language of the device.
F-2-165
2-122
2-123
2) If the wrong password is entered, the following window is displayed. The user's system
administrator may have changed the password, so confirm the password with the system
administrator. Note that there is no special password for service.
To encrypt the password information input when logging in, SSL of the login screen was
made effective. However, it is redirected to new URL (effective SSL) even when accessing
with URL (non-SSL) before.
F-2-166
F-2-167
Note:
When the device authentication method used is domain authentication, enter the user
name, password and login destination registered with Active Directory and then click Log
In.
If the authentication method used is local device authentication, enter the user name,
password and login destination registered in the device and click Log In. - When using
SDL as the login service, enter the user information registered in the device, as per local
device authentication.
The user information is set as below for local device authentication by default. Both are
case sensitive.
- User Name: Administrator
- Password: password
2-123
2-124
Note:
CAUTION:
In case that the login method to a device is set to SSO-H, if you log in SMS with RLS
authentication, no selection is displayed although it is the screen to change the login
method.
F-2-169
This is the specification to prevent the inconsistent setting which enables to stop SMS
Installer Service (Password Authentication) by changing the login method to Default
Authentication.
When you want to change the login method to a device, log in the SMS with the
password authentication.
F-2-168
2-124
2-125
Outline
The SMS login method settings are done by setting the login Start/ Stop via the other login
The initial display language at the time of accessing SMS depends on the setting.
In former SMS, the language setting of "initial setting/registration (user mode)" was used.
However, when the language setting is other than English or Japanese, it displays in English.
After changed, it will be as follows.
method. In other words, the password authentication Start/ Stop setting is done by first
logging in with RLS authentication, and the RLS authentication Start/ Stop setting is done by
first logging in with password authentication. The Start/ Stop combinations of the two login
methods are as follows.
Start
Logged in by RLS
authentication.
No
Refer to the setting of the
Accept-Language header,
which a browser sends out.
Yes
Setting unavailable
T-2-79
English or Japanese
Language
priority setting of a
browser
Refer to the setting of a language
Except English or Japanese
displaying in registration/initial
setting [Additional Function].
English or Japanese
Display setting
CAUTION:
If only login via RLS is programmed, login may be disabled for the following reasons.
Authentication server is down
Network problem, no communication with authentication server
of a device
Display in the
language configured.
F-2-170
2. If only domain authentication is active, launch in MEAP safe mode from the device
service mode.
After launching in MEAP safe mode, the Default Authentication will become active, and
you will be able to login to SMS with password authentication. After logging into SMS,
set the password authentication login to ON (active) and restore the device from MEAP
safe mode to normal mode. Until the problem blocking authentication is resolved, log
into SMS with password authentication.
Initial display language is set by the language setting (value of portalLang storing in Cookie)
selected by the remote UI screen. When the setting is other than English or Japanese,
Selection of display language is performed in a similar way with the SMS Installer Service
(Password Authentication) mentioned above.
2-125
2-126
3) Click [Start] or [Stop] button shown in Status field of SMS Installer Service (Password
The procedures for changing the password authentication Start/ stop settings are as follows.
1) Access SMS by RLS Authentication from the PC browser on the same network as the
MEAP device.
URL: https://<IP address of MEAP device>:8443/sms/rls/
Ex.) https://172.16.188.240:8443/sms/rls
Login screen (In case authentication method is SSO-H)
F-2-173
4) Logout once and login again to check to see that the setting is applied properly.
When clicking [Stop] to change the status to [Start], another password authentication login
screen is firstly shown. When trying to access the password authentication screen after
clicking [Start] to change the status to [Stop], the user is automatically redirected to RLS
F-2-171
authentication screen.
Password authentication started screen and Password authentication stopped screen
F-2-174
F-2-172
2-126
2-127
3) Click on [Start] or [Stop] button shown on Status field of SMS Installer Service (Remote
The procedures for changing the RLS authentication Start/ Stop settings are as follows.
1) In order to make a setting for Login by RLS Authentication, you need to Login by Password
Authentication.
URL: https://<IP address of MEAP device>:8443/sms/rls/
Ex.) https://172.16.188.240:8443/sms/rls
Login screen by Password Authentication
F-2-177
4) Log out and then log in again and access via the RLS authentication login window.
When RLS authentication is set to [Start], another RLS login screen is firstly shown. When
accessing to RLS status screen with the setting of [Stop], the user will be redirected to the
password authentication screen.
F-2-175
F-2-178
F-2-176
2-127
2-128
CAUTION:
In case that the login method to a device is set to SSO-H, if you log in SMS with RLS
authentication, no selection is displayed although it is the screen to change the login
method.
F-2-179
This is the specification to prevent the inconsistent setting which enables to stop SMS
Installer Service (Password Authentication) by changing the login method to Default
Authentication.
When you want to change the login method to a device, log in the SMS with the
password authentication.
been designed so that an application will not be able to start up if there is a shortage of
memory for any of the foregoing items (i.e., memory, thread, socket, file descriptor).
Follow the steps below to check the remaining memory:
1) Log in to SMS.
2) Click [MEAP Application Management].
3) Check [Resource Information] for information of the whole device resources.
Amount Used
Remaining
Percent Used
2-128
2-129
F-2-180
Note:
Older iR models show resource information required in each application in List of
Application page (corresponding to MEAP Application Management page of this model).
When checking the resource information of each application in this model, click on the
application name in MEAP Application Management page.
F-2-182
4) Check to see that the status of the MEAP application in question is either [Started] or
[Stopped.]
F-2-181
F-2-183
2-129
2-130
MEAP Specifications
This screen allows users to check MEAP-Contents versions, MEAP Specifications for the
MEAP Specifications is one of the information required to judge whether MEAP applications
can be operated or not. With MEAP Specifications, you can prevent an application that uses
a specific function of device from being installed onto the device that does not have the
CAUTION:
function.
About Name
MEAP Specification is shown as 'MEAP Specifications' in the screen to check the version
on the side of device that supports MEAP (counter confirmation button) and MEAP
1) Log in to SMS.
platform (SMS). On the other hand, in the manifest file of MEAP application, it is shown as
Mechanism
MEAP platform judges whether MEAP applications can be operated on it using on the 2
information below:
Device Specification ID
MEAP Specifications
Device Specification ID shows information such as the original functions of MFP (including
print, scan, and copy), and one that differs by model such as maximum copy number,
thus each model has a different ID. (It is easy to determine the IDs for this reason.) MEAP
application declares 1 or more Device Specification ID required for its execution. Declaration
of multiple Device Specification IDs means that the application is operable in all the models
declared. Upon installation of MEAP application in (using) SMS or MEAP Enterprise Service
F-2-184
2-130
2-131
MEAP platform machine. The machine which doesn't support the version declared by the
Ver
Description
1
2
5
6
7
Remarks
Ver.37.xx or later
5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13, 14, 15, 17, 18, 19,
25, 26, 27, 29, 30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35,
36, 37, 38, 39, 40, 41, 42, 44, 45, 46
Ver.38.xx or later
5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13, 14, 15, 17, 18, 19,
25, 26, 27, 29, 30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35,
36, 37, 38, 39, 40, 41, 42, 44, 45, 46,
49
iR-ADV C9075
iR-ADV C9070
iR-ADV C9065
iR-ADV C9060
iR-ADV C7065
iR-ADV C7055
iR-ADV 6075
iR-ADV 6065
iR-ADV 6055
iR-ADV 8105 PRO
iR-ADV 8095 PRO
iR-ADV 8085 PRO
iR-ADV C2030
iR-ADV C2025
iR-ADV C2020
Ver.50.xx or later
5,6,7,9,10,11,13,14,15,17,18,19,25,26,
27,29,30,31,32,33,34,35,36,37,38,39,4
0,41,42,44,45,46,47,49,50,51,52,53,54,
55,56,57,58,59
5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13, 14, 15, 17, 18, Ver.37.xx or later
19, 25, 26, 27, 29, 30, 31, 32, 33,
5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13, 14, 15, 17, 18, 19,
34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 39, 40, 41, 42,
25, 26, 27, 29, 30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35,
44, 45
36, 37, 38, 39, 40, 41, 42, 44, 45, 46
Ver.38.xx or later
5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13, 14, 15, 17, 18, 19,
25, 26, 27, 29, 30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35,
36, 37, 38, 39, 40, 41, 42, 44, 45, 46,
49
5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13, 14, 15, 17, 18,
19, 25, 26, 27, 29, 30, 31, 32, 33,
34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 39, 40, 41, 44,
45, 46, 49
5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13, 14, 15, 17, 18,
19, 25, 26, 27, 29, 30, 31, 32, 33,
34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 39, 40, 41, 44,
45, 46, 49
5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11, 13, 14, 15, 17, 18,
19, 25, 26, 27, 29, 30, 31, 32, 33,
34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 39, 40, 41, 42,
44, 45, 46, 47, 48, 49
9
10
11
13
14
15
17
18
19
25
26
27
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
44
T-2-80
45
46
47
48
2-131
2
Ver
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
2-132
Description
Reserved
SecurityOptionalPackage
IMI function expansion of iR-ADV C5051 series (Ver.50.xx or later) or later
(iR-ADV C5051 series (Ver.50.xx or later)) Addition of registered API to enable SSL
communication setting (On/Off) for each URL
Disclosure of registration/deletion function to/from Quick Menu
Function to notify an event to the application at recovery from the sleep mode.
System account release function
MEAP User Preference Service
MEAP Application Configuration Service
MEAP Application Log Service
Authentication information sharing function
Outline
Information about an application installed in the device is called MEAP application system
information. This information should be obtained for reporting troubles because multiple
information items can be collectively confirmed.
The following sections describe the details of information items. Each item is shown or printed
by application.
T-2-81
Note:
The system information shown on the screen and the system information printed in the
MEAP devices user mode are exactly the same.
F-2-185
2-132
2-133
MEAP system information can be printed out with iR device for confirmation.
Application Name
It is the name (bundle-name) declared in a statement within the application program. It may
not necessarily be identical to the name of the program.
Application Version
It is the version of the application (bundle-version) declared in a statement within the
F-2-186
Note:
MEAP system information was printed out in PDL format conventionally. However,
the information has been printed out in text format instead of PDL format, enabling iR
devices without PDL installation to print out information (iR C3220 and later).
application program.
Status
It indicates the status of the application in question; specifically, Installed: the application has
been installed.
Active: the application is being in use. Resolved: the application is at rest.
Installed On
It indicates the date on which the application was installed.
Vendor
It is the name of the vendor that developed the application, and is the name (bundle-vendor)
declared in a statement within the application program.
2-133
2
License Status
It indicates the status of the license; specifically, None: no license is needed.
Not Installed: no license has been installed.
Installed: the appropriate license has been installed. Invalid: the license has been invalidated.
Overlimt: the license has been used beyond its permitted limit.
2-134
Installing an Application
Resource
When 1 MEAP application operates, the resource volume allocated to each device is as
follows (loaded resource list). Since the following value is an estimate, when installing the
MEAP applications, it needs to check the available resource of SMS.
Since the indication of SMS resource volume fluctuates by the login service (authentication
It indicates the date after which the license expires. If the status of the license is 'none', this
function) and configuration (future model), which the user selected, it may show a bigger
It indicates the limit imposed on individual counter readings. If the status of the license is
Product Name
HDD/
Flash PCB
Memory
Thread
Socket
File
Description
1024MB
128MB
256
256
256
Counter Value
1024MB
128MB
256
256
256
It is the current counter reading of a specific counter. If the status of the license is 'none', this
1024MB
128MB
256
256
256
iR-ADV C2030/
C2025/ C2020 Series
1024MB
128MB
256
256
256
Flash model
220MB
32MB
162
128
128
HDD model
1024MB
128MB
256
256
It indicates the maximum amount of memory that the application uses. It is the amount
(maximum memory usage) declared in a statement within the application program, and is
expressed in kilobytes.
Registered Service
It is a list of services that have been registered by the application with the MEAP framework.
Some services may not have printable data.
256
T-2-82
Note:
As for memory, check the available resource when starting up the application. For other
resources other than memory, check them when installing.
Some applications call for a specific set of conditions for installation. For details, see the
Users Guide that comes with the individual applications.
Maximum installable application is up to 20 even if the remaining resource is adequate.
(However, the Send function consumes 1, it must be 19 in practice.) Authentication
application is not included in this number.
The MEAP application, which can be started simultaneously, is up to 19. (Authentication
application is not included in this number.)
CAUTION:
To install an application, the user needs to use the following URL when accessing the
license control system to obtain a license file. In doing so, he/she needs to register the
license access number of the application and the serial number of the device.
http://www.canon.com/meap/
2-134
2-135
CAUTION:
1) Long on to SMS.
You will not be able to install the application without using the appropriate license.
Be sure to select its license file.
If you are adding a license to an existing application, see Chapter 0, Adding a
License File. in this manual.
If you are updating an existing application, stop the application; then, install the new
application or its license file. You will not be able to update an application while it is
running.
5) Check the contents of the Confirm page; then, click [OK] button.
F-2-187
F-2-189
6) Some applications show a screen to indicate the terms of agreement. Read the terms, and
click [OK].
7) Check the message "Installing...Please wait." appears, beginning the installation.
F-2-188
F-2-190
2-135
2-136
8) Upon installation completed, click [To MEAP Application Management] button shown on
the screen to view MEAP Application Management page.
F-2-191
Note:
To use the application that you have just installed, you must make sure that the
application status is Started.
Note:
The license file is provided in text file format, enabling to view in a text editor. The
application ID and device serial number shown in the file allow users to confirm which
device to install with the license file.
Note that any changes added to the license file may disable installation. Cares should
be taken when confirming the contents of the license file.
Sample file
F-2-193
License File ID
Application ID
Serial Number
Validated Period
Counter informations
F-2-192
2-136
2-137
4) Click [ Browse ] button, and select the license file you want to install.
Management ] button.
F-2-195
F-2-196
6) Check the content of the confirmation page, and click [OK] button
2-137
2-138
1) Stop the application you want to uninstall on MEAP Application Management page.
F-2-198
F-2-199
F-2-197
2-138
2-139
Outline
You must remove the invalidated license file before uninstalling an application. If reinstallation
is a possibility, you may download the license file to a PC for storage. To download or delete
a license file, first disable it.
WARNING:
Once you have removed an invalidated license file, you will no longer be able to
download it form the MEAP device.
F-2-200
5) Click [Yes].
F-2-201
F-2-202
2-139
2-140
F-2-203
F-2-205
F-2-206
WARNING:
F-2-204
6) When you have selected [Download] button, specify where you want to store the file by
following the instructions on the screen.
Without the license file, an application cannot be reinstalled even to the MEAP de-vice
that the application had been installed last time. Download and save the license file
before deleting the application.
2-140
2
Reusable license
Outline
2-141
When reinstalling, Disable License file should be downloaded (see Chapter 0, Disabling a
When the device is replaced due to lease up or trouble, it is possible to continue using the
License File . and see Chapter 0, Downloading / Removing an Invalidated License File. in
this manual) or a license for reinstallation should be obtained from LMS, before reinstallation.
engineers are responsible for license transfer as this task requires the SMS hidden page (not
open to users).
To increase convenience of users, only application with unlimited validity date and application
counter (e.g. Portal Service, SDL, SSO) has been made to be able to install as many times
as needed by the same license file. This kind of license is called 'Reusable license'.
F-2-207
2) Move to the download page of license forwarded for the device as sender (https:// IP
address of device: 8443/sms/ForwardLicense).
F-2-208
2-141
2-142
5) The window to confirm whether to create a transfer licence will be displayed. Click [OK].
F-2-211
6) Icon of license file for forwarding is displayed in the box of license file downloading. Click
[Download].
F-2-209
F-2-212
F-2-210
2-142
2-143
11) Since this downloaded transfer license is the file only to prove the license invalidation,
it cannot be used for installation to the other device as it is. Send the transfer license to
the service support contact of your nearest sales company to request issuance of the new
license for installation in the new device.
Note:
When requesting issuance of license for forwarding, inform the sales company of the
name of product name and serial No. of the device as sender, and of the name of
product name and serial No. of the forwarding destination.
12) Install application using the license for forwarding issued by the sales company.
F-2-213
F-2-214
9) After downloading the license file for forwarding, click [Delete] to display the confirmation
screen and click [Yes] to delete the file (in consideration of breakage of license for
forwarding, deleting disabled license can be executed after all steps have been completed).
F-2-215
2-143
2-144
Uninstalling an Application
F-2-217
4) Check the application name to be uninstalled shown on the screen to click [Yes] button.
Upon [Yes] button clicked, uninstallation process is started.
F-2-216
Dimmed [Uninstall] button shows that the selected application cannot be removed.
If the application you are uninstalling is associated with another application, a
message will appear to indicate that the package exported by the application will no
loner be available. Uninstalling such an application may also disable its associated
applications.
1) Log in to SMS to click [MEAP Application Management] on the menu.
2) [MEAP Application Management] page is shown.
F-2-218
2-144
2
Login Service
About Login Service
The login service is started up to authenticate the user when MEAP-enabled iR device is
booted up. Login service changes and install/ uninstall are carried out from the 'System
Management' page. The pre-install applications and those provided on the accessory CD
are as follows. Default Authentication is used as the default at the time of shipment from the
factory.
2-145
Default Authentication overview
This login service is selected when the department ID management is enabled or no
authentication function is set. Set the department ID management to [ON] on Setting /
Registration (Additional Functions mode) of this device and register 7-digit ID and PIN by
department. This setting restricts the use of this device only to users keying the registered
ID and PIN. Department IDs/ and PINs can be registered on the touch panel of this device or
Remote UI.
This is a merger of the existing SDL and SSO login services and has the following features.
Both the domain authentication and local device authentication login services can be used.
There is no need to have a separate SA server.
Login is not via SA, so SSO-H refers directly to DNS for authentication.
Kerberos and NTML protocols are supported.
The following three authentication methods may be selected from.
Domain authentication
Local device authentication
Domain authentication + local authentication
CAUTION:
The system configuration is different from previous SSO, so individual management
is required.
Data porting of user information that was being used with the earlier SSO local
device authentication and SDL can be done by exporting/ importing. However,
application settings information cannot be ported.
To use the SEND function when the setting is for SSO-H, when sending email, mail
addresses need to be programmed against each user. If they are not, email cannot
be sent. Note, however, that when sending i-Fax, the mail addresses set in the device
are used.
This device does not support SDL, conventional SSO and Security Agent. In addition
these are not packaged in Administrators CD.
2-145
2
Authentication methods of SSO-H
2-146
Differences from conventional SSO
Domain B
SSO-H can use multiple authentication methods, and the user can toggle between them
from a Web browser. (Refer to the MEAP Authentication System Settings Guide 'User
Domain C
DC
Domain B
DC
DC
DC
CAUTION:
Domain C
DC
DC
Domain authentication
This is a form of user authentication which operates in collaboration with the domain controller
on the Active Directory environment network and, as soon as the iR device is logged into,
carries out authentication of the domain on the network. In addition to users belonging to
the domain that includes the iR device, users belonging to domains that have a reliable
relationship with the domain (multi-domain) can also be authenticated. The domain name of
the login destination can be selected by the users themselves upon login.
The function makes use of options iW EMC Accounting Management Plig-in to enable
analysis and management of the iR device usage status.
The protocol used is as follows.
Kerberos:LLS/RLS/ILS
SA
Device
Domain A
Device
Domain A
SSO
SSO-H
F-2-219
Domain B
Domain Controller
( Active Directory )
Domain Controller
( Active Directory )
Domain A User
iR Device
Domain B User
F-2-220
2-146
2
CAUTION:
To run domain authentication and Department ID management at the same time,
the options Net Spot Accountant, iW Accounting Manager or iW EMC Accounting
Management Plug-in are required. If domain authentication is selected as the
authentication method without linkage to these systems, login will be disabled and
Department ID management will not come ON. If Department ID management
cannot be turned ON when using domain authentication and login is disabled, switch
the login service to Default Authentication and turn Department ID management
OFF.
2-147
System Manager Linkage (automatic ID allocation to System
Managers)
SSO provided the automated function conventionally on Security Agent (hereinafter SA) to
authenticate System Manager by allocating IDs set on SA to domain authentication managers
(users belonging to Canon Peripheral Admins group). However, SSO-H does not support this
function.
With SSO-H, access to Active Directory within site can be prioritized or restricted, so there
In local device authentication the card reader for the option control card cannot be
used.
If there is no Active Directory within the same site, or if connection fails, there will be an
is a setting called 'Access Mode in Sites'. Sites programmed in Active Directory comprise
multiple subnets. In this mode, SSO-H uses site information to access the same site as the
device, or the subnet Active Directory.
The SSO-H default setting is with the site internal access mode OFF.
Access Active Directory within same site only.
authentication error.
Access another site if Active Directory within the same site cannot be located.
If there is no Active Directory within the same site, or if connection fails, an Active Directory
2-147
2-148
Settings for access mode in sites
Note:
The Active Directory subnet is assumed to be the same subnet as the device sub-net.
In the Active Directory addresses, the Active Directories of the same site are listed.
Active Directories of the same subnet as the device are listed first.
If there is no Active Directory with the same subnet as the device, Active Directories
belonging to different subnets than the device are listed.
The Active Directories within the same site are accessed in order. Note, however, that
where there are multiple Active Directories within the same site, access to those Active
Directories will be in the order in which the address list was obtained.
If there is no Active Directory within the same site, if access outside of the site is
programmed, Active Directories outside of the site will be accessed in the order in which
the address list was obtained.
Switching between site internal access mode/ non site internal access mode, as well as
detailed mode settings, are done via DMS or iWEMC.
Site internal access mode settings window (DMS)
specified. In other words, if there is no site list, which site's Active Directory is accessed
depends upon the order of the Active Directory addresses returned by DNS. Therefore, when
acquiring the site list, LDAP may access the Active Di rectory of a different site. Therefore, in
such cases, it is sometimes necessary to access across sites or subnets, which means that
DNS Server A
records:
AD 192.168.1.2
AD 172.24.12.2
AD 172.24.35.2
AD 211.111.1.30
SSO-Tokyo 172.24.12.80
SSO-Osaka 192.168.1.90
SSO-Hakata 211.111.1.3
LDAP protocol needs to have continuity across sites (subnets) (normally, LDAP is port No.
Site information, once it has been acquired, is cached within the device. The life settings of
2.Get Active
Directory list
N
WA3. Access Active
Site:Tokyo::
172.24.12.0/24
172.24.35.0/24
Repllic
ation
Site:Osaka::
192.168.1.0/24
Site:Hakata::
211.111.1.0/24
Directory of same
subnet
389). Further, if connection with Active Directory fails when acquiring site information, another
Active Directory will be accessed.
4.Access Active
Directory of same
site
DC-Tokyo/DNS
172.24.12.2
n
In SSO-H, the Active Directory to be accessed when acquiring the site list cannot be
Domain X
io
the site list will be acquired again from Active Directory upon the next login.
at
authentication by Active Directory should fail, an authentication error will be generated and
lic
pl
Active Directory. In order to obtain the site list from the Active Directory, Active Directory
F-2-221
Re
After booting up, upon the first login by LLS or ILS/ RLS, the site list is obtained from the
DC-Osaka/DNS
172.168.1.2
Site:Tokyo
172.12.12.0/24
172.24.35.0/24
DC-Hakata/DNS
211.111.1.30
the cache can be set so that site information in the cache is updated upon the first login after
the device boots up, or so that the cache is not updated once acquired.
Site:Osaka
192.168.1.0/24
SSO-Tokyo
192.168.1.90
SSO-Tokyo
Site:Hakata
211.111.1.0/24
211.111.1.3
F-2-222
2-148
2
1) SSO-Tokyo acquires site lists from Active Directories.
Note, however, that the Active Directories accessed in order to acquire site lists are in the
order in which they were returned by DNS, so there is no guarantee that the same Active
Directory will be accessed as in the initial settings (upon device settings or changes to NW
settings, etc.).
[Site subnet list]
Site: Tokyo: = 172.24.12.0/24, 172.24.35.0/24
Site: Osaka: = 192.168.1.0/24
Site: Hakata: = 211.111.1.0/24
As a result, since SSO-Tokyo is 172.24.12.80, the subnet is 172.24.12.0/24, and is judged
as belonging to site Tokyo.
2-149
Specification of SSO-H
Item
Up to 5000
Supported device
IPv6
3584/33
Availability of Department
Management Linkage
Site access
Supported
2) The DNS server obtains its Active Directory list from the primary or secondary DNS, as set
in the device.
[Active Directory]
172.24.12.2, 172.24.35.2, 192.168.1.2, 211.111.1.30
3) Of the Active Directories in 2), above, the ones that belong to the same site (Tokyo) are
172.24.12.2 and 172.24.35.2.
Specification
T-2-83
Of these, the Active Directory that is the same subnet as SS-Tokyo is 172.24.12.2.
SSO/SDL handling
Conventional SSO and SDL are not packaged in Administrator's CD of this model. In addition,
4) If access fails at step 3), above, the other Active Directory of the same site, 172.24.35.2,
this model does not support older versions of SSO or SDL released in the past.
will be accessed.
5) If access fails at step 4), above, also, SSO-Osaka and SSO-Hakata will be accessed (the
order will depend on the order of the Active Directories in DNS). Note, however, that this is
an optional operation.
Environment confirmation
Refer to the section of Checking the Operating Environment of this manual for system
requirements needed in each login service.
2-149
2-150
3) When login service application you have selected turns to Start after Restart, restart the
device.
F-2-225
CAUTION:
F-2-223
In case that the login method to a device is set to SSO-H, if you log in SMS with RLS
authentication, no selection is displayed although it is the screen to change the login
method.
2) A page will appear showing the various selections you can make for the login service. Click
[SWITCH] button for the login service to be used.
F-2-226
F-2-224
This is the specification to prevent the inconsistent setting which enables to stop SMS
Installer Service (Password Authentication) by changing the login method to Default
Authentication.
When you want to change the login method to a device, log in the SMS with the
password authentication.
2-150
2-151
Outline
When a user forgets the password to log in to SMS, initialize it to the default value of
MeapSmsLogin using the switch license for initializing passwords. Follow the steps below:
Outline
When replacing the Flash PCB of Flash model or when replacing or formatting the hard disk
of HDD model, the data in the MEAP application area needs to be temporarily saved to your
PC.
This chapter describes information on backing up the data in the MEAP application area and
2) Click [Login] button leaving Password field blank or entering incorrect password. The
Return to install Password Settings area appears. Click [Browse..] button and select the
switch license file prepared in advance.
needs to be reinstalled and reconfigured when replacing the Flash PCB of Flash model or
when replacing or formatting the hard disk of HDD model.
In that case, a license for reinstallation needs to be downloaded and the customer data and
configuration information need to be recovered, and these procedures pose heavy burdens
on the service technician.
The area used for the MEAP application can be easily saved/recovered by using the backup
function of SST (Service Support Tool).
This greatly reduces the work burden on the service technician.
Please note that the application cannot be illegally copied because the backup data can be
recovered only when the iR device has the same serial number.
Note:
Only HDD can be formatted.
WARNING:
F-2-227
3) When you click [Initialize] button, the confirmation message appears. Click [OK] button.
Then Login page opens. Enter the default password 'MeapSmsLogin' to log in. The
password is case-sensitive.
Note:
If you click [Cancel] button, the Login page opens without initializing the password.
You must not perform any other work (including checking operation) until the HDD/ the
Flash PCB has been backed up. This arrangement is to prevent a mismatch of MEAP
counter readings and the HDD/ the Flash PCB contents, and any fault in operation
arising as the result of failure to observe this will not be covered by the guarantee of
operation.
Note:
The application that is installed with a reusable license can be reinstalled by using the
same license.
2-151
2-152
In the case of iR-ADV C2030/C2020, there are HDD model provided with a Flash PCB and
MEAP applications.
The System files are stored in the Flash PCB in both models, but the location where the
Setup data generated by MEAP applications (Note that image data stored in BOX will not
Flash PCB
SMS password
Flash PCB
User
User Area
Area
User
User Area
Area
User
User Area
Area
HDD
In the case of iR-ADV devices, menus are implemented as MEAP application. Therefore the
following items can be also backed up (stored as Meapbackup.bin).
Setting items of each menu in the main menu ( Copy, Scan and Send, Fax, Scan and
The procedures for backing up and restoring the MEAP application area are the same with
conventional devices.
Wallpaper settings
When an HDD is added to Flash model, most of the data on the MEAP application area on
the user area that exists on the Flash PCB is automatically copied to the HDD. It is therefore
Flash PCB
User
User Area
Area
System
System Area
Area
User
User Area
Area
Flash PCB
Add
Add HDD
HDD
User
User Area
Area
HDD
F-2-229
2-152
2-153
recommended to export the user information just in case. For local device user information
imageRUNNER ADVANCE
series other than iR-ADV
C2030/C2020 series
System
backup, go to User Management page of SSO-H site and export the data. (The SSO-H
SST
Already supported
since the 1st
version.
Already supported
since the 1st
version.
Already supported
since the 1st
version.
2) SST Version
Version 4.2.x or later. An earlier version will not permit the use of the function. If needed,
upgrade the SST.
3) Space for backup
To back up the HDD/ the Flash PCB of the iR, the PC must have approx 1024MB of free
space at maximum. Sizes of backup files depend on actual data capacities to be backed
up.
Note:
The backup data of Flash model cannot be recovered in HDD model.
Also, the backup data of HDD model cannot be recovered in Flash model.
Press [2] and [8] buttons at the same time on the control panel and turn on the main power
switch to start the device in Download Mode. Note that SST backup function is enabled
only in Download Mode.
3) Connecting the main unit to the PC to start SST
Connect the main unit to the PC with SST installed using the crossing cable and the like to
start SST on the PC.
2-153
2-154
When starting SST, select the target device type as Single and click [Start] button.
Upon the backup data transferred to the PC, enter an appropriate file name and click [OK]
to save the backup data on the PC.
F-2-232
When the file is successfully saved, click [OK] button, and then click [Return to Menu]
button.
F-2-230
F-2-233
F-2-231
2-154
2-155
Outline
If the Flash PCB or the HDD is broken or does not function correctly due to failure of the
system (excluding the MEAP application), it needs to be formatted or replaced.
When the Flash PCB is replaced or when the HDD is formatted or replaced, the files of the
MEAP application stored in it will be lost, so make a backup of the MEAP application area
according to Procedure for backing up the MEAP application area using SST if possible. If a
backup cannot be made, the MEAP application and the license files need to be reinstalled.
As for the MEAP counter information, it will not be lost because it is backed up just like the
conventional counter.
If a backup cannot be made, a special license file (a license file for installation with the
expiration date carried over from the current counter value) is required to reinstall the MEAP
application. This special license file is treated as a service tool and cannot be obtained by a
general user.
F-2-234
3) Transferring Data
When the data is successfully transferred, click the [OK] button shown on the screen. To
continue other jobs, click [Return to Menu] button.
In order to obtain a special license file, a service technician needs to contact a person in
charge of support of a sales company.
When contacting the person in charge of support, the service technician also needs to
provide the serial number of the device and the name of the MEAP application installed.
In the support departments of regional headquarters of Canon, all license files of the
applications that have been issued are filed according to device serial numbers, enabling you
to obtain a series of license files through a single screen as long as you can identify the serial
number of the device in question.
F-2-235
4) Turn off and on the main power switch of the device to gain access in SMS to check that
Note:
The application that is installed with a reusable license can be reinstalled by using the
same license.
2-155
2-156
Outline
The procedure for replacing the HDD or the Flash PCB differs according to whether the HDD
or the Flash PCB functions normally or not.
Contents files of a target product to SST. (Make sure the compatibility of the each file
version.)
The Flash PCB is not formatted in service work. If there is a problem in the system, solve the
problem by performing a remedy according to the error code or replacing the Flash PCB.
Please note that only minimum system files are installed in a Flash PCB supplied as a service
part. It is therefore necessary to install (download) the system files using the SST/USB
memory when replacing the Flash PCB.
3 Formatting HDD
Format the HDD referring to Formatting the HDD if you replace the HDD.
4) Installing the system files
Use SST or USB memory drive and install(download) the System file complete set when
you replace Flash PCB.
5 Reinstalling the MEAP application
When the device has started normally, obtain the jar files of the MEAP applications from the
user, and install them using the license files for reinstallation.
Installation method is the same as normal installation.
6) Importing user information
As necessary, make login service selections and import user information.
2-156
2
Note:
When you replace the HDD without uninstalling MEAP applications, make sure to
reinstall the previously installed applications. Unless reinstalling them, MEAP counter
will not be released and the message The number of applications that can be installed
has exceeded the limit. Try to install this application after uninstalling other applications.
is displayed so that the installation of new applications may not be accepted. If you
want to install new applications in this case, once reinstall the applications in-stalled
before formatting and uninstall unnecessary applications.
2-157
down the equipment will not start up on their own. Make use of safe mode when restoring
the system software as when MEAP applications or services cause a fault as the result of a
or the Flash PCB, so it is not necessary to prepare the special licenses for reinstallation.
conflict or wrong sequence of registration/use. You can access to SMS in this condition so
the trouble.
Back up the MEAP application area of the device according to the procedure for backing up
the MEAP application area using SST.
2) Replacing the drive
Prepare the necessary service parts of the HDD/Flash PCB, and replace the drive.
3 Formatting HDD
Format the HDD referring to Formatting the HDD if you replace the HDD.
4) Installing the system files
Use SST or USB memory drive and install(download) the System file complete set when
you replace Flash PCB.
5) Restorering the backup file
Restore the backup data referring to the Procedures to Restore Backup Data.
that you can take necessary measures, for example, you can stop application that may cause
If default authentication has been selected, the mode of authentication remains valid;
otherwise, the message "The login service must be set again with SMS" ap pears. Change
the login service as necessary.
2-157
2-158
4) Press the 1 key on the control panel keypad to change the setting to '1'; then, click [OK]
button.
F-2-236
3) Press
or
[MEAPSAFE] button.
F-2-238
5) Check that the notation MPSF has appeared in the upper left corner of the screen; then,
restart the device.
F-2-237
F-2-239
2-158
2-159
Outline
For the ports in which the MEAP application uses, the default is 8000 for the port on HTTP
Note:
If accessed to SMS in MEAP SAFE mode, the device started mode is shown on the title
bar of the browser.
server, and 8443 for the port on HTTPS server. In the case that these ports have already
By changing the following ports to use, however, the MEAP application can be used as well
used by the customer who is to introduce this application, the MEAP application cannot use
the HTTP (or HTTPS) server(s).
as the existing system.
HTTP server
Setting value is 0 through 65535 [the value at factory shipment/after clearing RAM: 8000]
Note:
Do not use port number 8080 when PS print server unit is connected. If the port
is used, you can not see the page for RUI of the device with MEAP authentication
application. (port 8080 is reserved for redirecting from PS print server unit to device.)
HTTPS server
Setting value is 0 through 65535 [the value at factory shipment/after clearing RAM: 8443]
Note:
As for port on HTTPS server, it only applies to the device that supports SSL function.
F-2-240
2-159
2-160
4) Press the port number to specify on the control panel (the numerical value input in the field
1) Startup level 2 of [SERVICE MODE] . The start procedure of [SERVICE MODE] level 2 is
as follows.
1. Press [Settings /Registration] button n control panel.
2. Press [2] button and [8] button at the same time on control panel.
3. Press [Settings /Registration] button.
4. [SERVICE MODE] screen is displayed.
5. 5. Press [Mode List] or [Mode List Classic] button.
6. Press [Settings /Registration] button.
7. Press [2] button.
2) Press [COPIER] >[Option] > [NETWORK] buttons.
F-2-243
5) Check to see that it is reflected in setting field, and turn off the main power, and then,
restart the device.
F-2-241
3) Press
or
button.
F-2-244
F-2-242
2-160
2-161
4) Press the port number to specify on the control panel (the numerical value input in the field
1) Startup level 2 of [SERVICE MODE] . The start procedure of [SERVICE MODE] level2 is
as follows.
1. Press [Settings /Registration] button n control panel.
2. Press [2] button and [8] button at the same time on control panel.
3. Press [Settings /Registration] button.
4. [SERVICE MODE] screen is displayed.
5. 5. Press [Mode List] or [Mode List Classic] button.
6. Press [Settings /Registration] button.
7. Press [2] button.
2) Press [COPIER] >[Option] > [NETWORK] buttons.
F-2-246
5) Check to see that it is reflected in setting field, and turn off the main power, and then,
3) Press
or
button.
F-2-247
F-2-245
2-161
2-162
Operating mode
Conventional USB
settings [Use MEAP
keyboard enabled MEAP
driver as USB input
application
device]
USB Driver
Two types of USB drivers
While the USB driver that can be used in iR series is only the USB driver designed exclusively
for MEAP application (hereinafter referred to as MEAP driver), not only MEAP driver but
also USB system driver (hereinafter referred to as system driver) can be used in iR-ADV
series.
System driver and MEAP driver cannot be used together. When either of them is used, the
ON
* MEAP driver
(conventional
compatibility mode)
OFF (*default)
* Native driver
Software keyboard
application
(System Driver/
MEAP Driver)
System driver
supported MEAP
application
Note:
When any settings changes are made, the device must be restarted.
Setting the USB driver for each USB device (MEAP driver preference
registration)
If it is set to use the system driver, the conventional applications that support the MEAP
restarted.
The registration will be disabled when an application is stopped and device is
restarted.
2-162
2-163
Specifications for the use of USB keyboards
Note:
You can display/check the used driver setting at USB device report print described
below regardless of whether it is registered from a manifest file or is registered from
API.
Characters that could be entered on the software keyboard displayed on the conventional
control panel can be entered using a USB connected keyboard.
When the software keyboard window is displayed, characters can be entered from the USB
keyboard (in-line entry not possible).
Availability for MEAP application of the USB device A (either HID keyboard or Mass Storage)
plugged to iR device
USB Setting
Registration
[Use MEAP
Native System driver
status of USB
driver for USB application supported
device A
application
input device]
Not registered
Registered
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
YES
NO
NO
NO
MEAP application
System driver
Application with
not supported/
VID/PID declared
conventional
in Manifest for x
application
YES
NO
NO
NO
NO
YES
YES
YES
When the software keyboard window is not displayed, entered characters will not be
remembered.
The characters, which can be entered from a USB keyboard, is only a character, which can
be entered from the software keyboard.
Even if characters are entered from the USB keyboard, the software keyboard window will
not change (the corresponding key does not invert or change color).
Input from the USB keyboard can be accepted at the same time as input from the software
keyboard or numeric keys.
Since the device supports Plug and Play, the USB keyboard can be disconnected/
YES
YES
connected freely. However, do not disconnect and connect during in deep sleep (when
T-2-86
in sleep with setting "low" at "the power consumption in sleep"). It is out of an operation
guarantee to disconnect and connect the USB keyboard in deep sleep.
When USB device is attached to iR device, iR devices do not shift to deep sleep mode.
Keyboard layout changes according to the keyboard layout settings in the Settings/
Availability for MEAP applications of USB devices B and C (either HID keyboard or Mass
Registration screen. In addition, function keys and ten keys which are not displayed in the
Not
registered
Not used
B
(Native driver to C
be used)
To be used
B
YES
YES
YES
YES
NO
NO
NO
NO
YES
C
Not used
B
(Native driver to C
be used)
To be used
B
C
NO
NO
YES
NO
NO
YES
YES
YES
NO
YES
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
YES
YES
YES
YES
software keyboard cannot be used. (Keyboard which the operation check was conducted
is 84-key Keyboard, but this does not mean that the operation of all 84-key Keyboards is
guaranteed.)
Note:
The factory shipment default setting is to enable the use of native (main unit
functionality) USB keyboards. Therefore, in order to use MEAP application keyboards,
[Use MEAP driver for USB input device] under [System management settings (initial
settings/ registration)] needs to be set to ON (factory shipment setting is OFF).
Operations change as described below in accordance with ON/ OFF settings.
ON: when using MEAP application keyboard
OFF: when using native (main unit functionality) keyboard (factory shipment default)
T-2-87
2-163
2-164
When any trouble occurs regarding USB driver settings and it is necessary to reset the setting
information, you can reset the MEAP driver preference registration by using service mode.
F-2-251
3) Press
or
F-2-252
F-2-250
2-164
2
3) Press
2-165
or
button.
********************************
*** USB Device report print ***
********************************
USB device information
F-2-253
Vendor ID
VID=04A9
VID=1234
VID=4321
PID=2680
PID=5678
PID=8765
Product ID
F-2-254
F-2-256
5) When [OK] is shown on the status field, the status print is output. Check the contents of the
print.
2-165
2-166
P : Product
Product information of USB devices is shown. Vendor ID and Product ID can be recognized
here.
Connecting device
HID
S : String
Storage
The character string embedded in a USB device is shown. A manufacture name and a
FAX
C : Configure
The configuration information of a USB device is shown. * mark is to know whether it is
active.
I : Interface
Yes
Available
Yes
Not available
No
IrDA
Not available
Yes
Not available
Yes
IC Card Reader
Not available
Yes
Not available
No
Hub
Internal Hub*
Not available
No
External Hub
Available
Yes
T-2-89
* USB Device Port-B1 Hub for device ports installed at the introduction
Report printing
Available
The interface information of a USB device is shown. Interface class and the driver to handle
can be recognized.
User installation
Content
Display the information of the application or a USB device, which preferentially registered with
usbhid
It is displayed when the USB system driver is assigned to the input device
connected.
usb-storage
It is displayed when storage devices (USB memory storage etc.) are connected.
irda-usb IrDA
hub
gpusb
It is displayed when the USB driver only for MEAP application is assigned to the
input device connected.
gpusbex
It is displayed when a USB device, which specific vendor ID/ Product ID are
preferentially registered using a manifest and MEAP API, is connected and the
USB driver only for MEAP application is assigned.
MEAP application.
By seeing this information, it can check which Application ID of the MEAP application is in the
status using a specific USB device.
AppID : Application ID
VID : Vendor ID
PID : Product ID
T-2-88
E:Endpoint
The Endpoint information of a USB device is shown.
2-166
2-167
Reference material
Glossary
Terms & Acronyms
Application
Application ID
Code Sign
CPCA
(Common Peripheral
Controlling
Architecture)
CPCA Java CL
(Class Library)
CPCA Java Class Library. A Java class library, which is used to control a
device.
Default Authentication The login service used when the department ID control is used but other
-Department ID
authentication controls are not used. When the Department ID control is
Management
turned on, the login dialog prompts the users to enter the department ID
and password. The dialog appears the initial screen of both the control
panel on the MEAP device and Remote UI
Device Specification
ID
Esplet
(Esplet Type
Application)
File Description
HID class
iR Native application
ISV
(Independent
Software Vendor)
J2ME
Java 2 Platform Micro Edition. One of Java Platforms licensed by Sun
(Java2 Platform Micro Microsystems, Inc. It is applied for MEAP. Other devices such as cellular
Edition)
phones and PDA.
J2RE
(Java 2 Runtime
Environment)
Java
JavaScript
Java VM
JAVA Virtual Machine. The Java byte code interpreter. The Virtual Machine
(Java Virtual Machine) acts as an interpreter for processing the byte code using the native
instruction set.
License Access
Number
A number issued for accessing license file. The Licensing server requires
entries of application ID, expiration date/times information, and the number
of access numbers, to issue license access numbers
Licensae File
LMS
The license is required for installing a MEAP application in a MEAPenabled
(License Management iR device. LMS is the server issuing [License Files] as well as license
System)
access numbers.
Login Service
MEAP (Multifunction
Multifunctional Embedded Application Platform. Provides an environment
Embedded Application for executing application programs on a peripheral device. Uses the Java
Platform)
platform (J2ME - Java 2 platform Micro Edition) to run Java application for
MEAP.
MEAP Contents
2-167
2
Terms & Acronyms
2-168
Definitions and Explanations
MEAP Specifications MEAP Spec Version, the term used for the SDK. The version number that
(MEAP Spec Version) shows the APIs of the MEAP platform other than CPCA, such as network
and security. The version number is not assigned for each device model.
MEAP Application Runs on MEAP platform. Consists of application files
(*.jar) and the license file (*.lic).
SDK
(Software
Development Kit)
The kit containing information and tools required for software development.
Service
MEAP-enabled iR
device
MFP
(Multi Function
Peripheral)
Multi Function Peripheral. Peripheral device that supports more than one
function, such as digital copier, printer, scanner, and fax.
Servlet
(Servlet Type
Application)
OSGi
(Open Service
Gateway Initiative)
Portal Service
The web portal to gain access to a MEAP-enabled device. This service has
been integrated in Remote UI top page in iR ADVANCE series.
Protocol
Proxy Server
SMS
The web-base service to provide user interfaces for application life cycle
(Service Management management.
Service)
Socket
Thread
URL
(Uniform Resource
Locator)
The method to denote Web page locations on Internet and the like. For
instance, a URL on the Web is denoted as [http://www.w3.org/default. html].
[http] at the beginning means that an address following this is in a web
page on the Internet.
USB
The general-purpose driver that control the behavior of the device, there
are HID class driver, Mass Storage class driver and so on.
T-2-90
Redistribution module A built-in module of an application created with SDK. Applications without
this module cannot work on MEAP platform.
2-168
2-169
1: display
Setting range, item
0: hide 1: display
Setting Procedure
As for the screens for jam and no-toner, the warning screen (animation) can be displayed
by pressing the followings: [Device Screen] > [Recovery Procedure]
As for the screen for door opening, the warning screen cannot be displayed because
there is no display for [[Device Screen] > [Recovery Procedure]
Default value
1: No activation of warning display
or
(arrow) button.
Setting Procedure
1) Press [Settings /Registration] button n control panel.
2) Press [2] button and [8] button at the same time on control panel.
3) Press [Settings /Registration] button.
4) [SERVICE MODE] screen is displayed.
5) Press [Mode List] or [Mode List Classic] button.
6) Press [Settings /Registration] button.
7) Press [2] button.
8) Press [COPIER] button.
9) Press [Option] button.
10) Press [DSPLY-SW] button.
11) Press
or
(arrow) button.
2-169
2-170
Setting Procedure
1) Press [Settings /Registration] button n control panel.
2) Press [2] button and [8] button at the same time on control panel.
3) Press [Settings /Registration] button.
4) [SERVICE MODE] screen is displayed.
5) Press [Mode List] or [Mode List Classic] button.
6) Press [Settings /Registration] button.
7) Press [2] button.3) Press [COPIER] button.
8) Press [Option] button.
9) Press [DSPLY-SW] button.
10) Press
or
(arrow) button.
2-170
2-171
Embedded RDS
Product Overview
Overview
Embedded RDS (hereafter, referred to as E-RDS, which stands for EMBEDDED-RDS)
is a network module embedded with a customers device and enables e-Maintenance/
imageWARE Remote (Remote Diagnosis System), which can collect and transmit status
changes, counter values, error logs, and consumable information such as the toner low/ out
of the device to a remote maintenance server called UGW (Universal Gateway Server) via
Internet.
Major Functions
Service Call Button
If a user touches Service call button when corrupt image, paper jam, or/ and other problems
has occurred, E-RDS generates an alarm and notifies it to UGW.
Moreover, E-RDS also notifies cancellation and the completion of the request
Service Browser
Service browser is a web browsing functionality only for service persons in charge, and is
Parts counter
To grasp a device of which service browser has been enabled, E-RDS sends browser
Mode counter
Firmware info
When the service browser is enabled in the condition where it had been disabled (OFF)
Environment log
Alarm log
E-RDS sends the target service mode menu data to UGW in the following cases:
Since high confidentiality is required for the information shown above, it performs
communication between a device and the UGW using HTTPS/ SOAP protocol.
Transmission timing
When the following alarm is detected.
Internet
Proxy Server
DNS Server
Device
Firewall
UGW
Intranet
Transmitting data
COPIER
Display
Error retry
ANALOG
No
HV-STS
CCD
DPOT
DENS
FIXING
SENSOR
MISC
HT-C
HV-TR
P-PASCAL
2-171
2-172
Transmission timing
Transmitting data
Display
COPIER
COPIER
Adjust
Limitations
Error retry
ANALOG
No
HV-STS
CCD
DPOT
DENS
FIXING
SENSOR
MISC
HT-C
HV-TR
P-PASCAL
Yes
Display
transmission occurred
ANALOG Yes
HV-STS
CCD
DPOT
DENS
FIXING
SENSOR
MISC
HT-C
HV-TR
P-PASCAL
2) When an alarm/ service call error occurred continuously AND when time correction/ change
was performed to the device main unit during the target log transmission processing, a link
number may be applied to the old log although it should be applied to the new log.
3) Transmission of the data of changes made in service mode menu settings is not performed
instantly, but performed when a specified period of 60 minutes elapse after the change of
service mode menu settings is detected or when a communication test is performed at the
time of power-on. (There is a time lag.)
Adjust
T-2-91
4) When service mode menu settings ([COPIER] > [Adjust]) are made, transmission is
performed even when no change is made in the target data to be transmitted.
Transmission of service mode data is also performed when changes are made in the
NOTE:
Target transmission data are only the items under LEVEL1 and 2 in the service mode.
service mode setting value not subject to transmission (items other than Level 1, 2) or
when settlement of a value is performed without changing the setting value.
.
2-172
2
Service cautions
1) After performing the following service actions, it is necessary to perform initializing E-RDS
settings (ERDS-DAT) and communication test (COM-TEST).
Failure to do so will result that the counter transmitting value to the UGW may become
unusual.
System upgrade
HDD format and system installation
RAM clear of MNCON PCB SRAM Board :
[SERVICE MODE] > [COPIER] > [Function] > [CLEAR] > [MN-CON]
2-173
E-RDS Setup
Confirmation and preparation in advance
To monitor a device with e-Maintenance/ imageWARE Remote, the following settings are
required.
(1) Advance confirmation
Confirm with the UGW administrator that the device to be monitored with e-Maintenance/
imageWARE Remote is registered in the UGW.
Also, after replacing the main controller board, all settings must be reprogrammed.
(2) Advance preparations
2) The following settings in service mode must not be change unless there are specific
instructions to do so. Changing these values will cause error in communication with UGW.
Set port number of UGW
[SERVICE MODE] > [COPIER] > [Function] > [INSTALL] > [RGW-PORT]
Default : 443
URL setting of UGW
[SERVICE MODE] > [COPIER] > [Function] > [INSTALL] > [RGW-ADR]
Default : https://a01.ugwdevice.net/ugw/agentif010
Interview the users system administrator in advance to find out the following information
about the network.
Information item 1
IP address settings
Automatic setting : DHCP, RARP, BOOTP
Manual setting : IP address, subnet mask and gateway address to be set
Information item 2
Is there a DNS server in use?
If there is a DNS server in use, find out the following.
Primary DNS server address
Secondary DNS server address
Information item 3
Is there a proxy server?
If there is a proxy server in use, find out the following.
Proxy server address
Port No. for proxy server
Information item 4
Is proxy server authentication required?
If proxy server authentication is required, find out the following.
User name and password required for proxy authentication
2-173
2-174
3. When DNS settings and proxy settings are not made, touch the [Close] button to
Based on the results of the information obtained in (2) Advance preparations, make the
F-2-260
3) DNS Settings
F-2-258
1. Select [TCP/IP Settings] from breadcrumbs of the left columns, and then Touch it.
F-2-261
2. Touch the [TCP/IP Settings] > [DNS Settings] > [DNS Server Address Settings]
buttons.
F-2-259
2-174
2-175
3. Set the DNS server address based on the result obtained in (2) Advance preparations
- Information item 2 and touch the [OK] button.
4) Proxy Settings
1. Select [TCP/IP Settings] from breadcrumbs of the left columns, and then Touch it.
F-2-264
4. When proxy settings are not made, touch the [Close] button to reboot the device.
3. Set the proxy server based on the result obtained in (2) Advance preparations Information item 3.
a) Use Proxy to [On].
b) Enter the server address.
c) Enter port Number (Validation: 1 to 65,535).
a)
b)
c)
d)
F-2-263
F-2-265
2-175
2-176
e) Set the following items based on the result obtained in (2) Advance preparations
- Information item 4.
Set Use Proxy Authentication to [On].
Enter User name and Password, and touch the [OK] button.
F-2-268
CAUTION:
When changes are made to the above-mentioned network settings, be sure to reboot
the device.
F-2-267
2-176
2-177
SCALL-SW
([Lv.1] COPIER > Option > USER)
Description
E-RDS
Set use/ no use of Embedded-RDS function
([Lv.1] COPIER > Function > INSTALL) 0: Function not used / 1: Function used
e-Maintenance/ imageWARE Remote system to send
device information, counter data, error statuses to the
UGW.
Note that the operation (such as global click counter, error
information, etc.) can be restricted with the server settings.
Default : 0 (Function not used)
RGW-ADR
URL setting of UGW
([Lv.1] COPIER > Function > INSTALL) Max 128 characters
Default : https://a01.ugwdevice.net/ugw/agentif01
RGW-PORT
Set port number of UGW
([Lv.1] COPIER > Function > INSTALL) Validation : 1 to 65535
Default : 443
COM-TEST
Execution of a communication test with UGW / Display of
([Lv.1] COPIER > Function > INSTALL) the result
Perform Communication test with UGW and set "OK!" or
"NG!" as the result.
COM-LOG
Display of detailed information about a communication error
([Lv.1] COPIER > Function > INSTALL) with UGW
Error information of a connection failure with UGW is
displayed.
Error occurrence date and time, error code, and detailed
error information are displayed.
Max 30 latest loggings retained
Max 128 characters for Error information.
ERDS-DAT
Initialization of E-RDS SRAM data
([Lv.1] COPIER > Function > CLEAR) SRAM data of E-RDS is initialized and returned to the
factory setting value at shipment.
CA-KEY
Initialization of CA certificate
([Lv.2] COPIER > Function > CLEAR) When the power is turned OFF/ ON after execution, the CA
certificate in the factory setting is automatically installed.
SCALLCMP
([Lv.1] COPIER > Option > USER)
Description
Display/ hide of Service Call button
0: Hide / 1: Display
To set whether to display or hide the Service Call button on
the Control Panel.
Default : 0 (Hide)
Set of service call completion notice
When this item is set, service call completion is notified
to UGW and the service call status retained internally is
cleared.
Default : 0
T-2-93
Description
BRWS-ACT
Execution of activation/ inactivation of service browsing
([Lv.1] COPIER > Function > INSTALL) Browsing info is sent to UGW when OFF (BRWS-ACT=0) is
changed to ACTIVE.
Setting result is displayed as "OK!" or "NG!".
BRWS-STS
Display of Service Browser use status
([Lv.1] COPIER > Display > USER)
0: OFF / 1: Active / 2: Suspend
The status is changed from 0 to 1, from 1 to 2, and from 2
to 1 by execution of BRWS-ACT.
Default : 0 (OFF)
T-2-94
NOTE:
Generally, once service browsing is enabled, it cannot be disabled again.
To disable service browsing, clear SRAM.
T-2-92
2-177
2-178
2. Select [COPIER] > [Function] > [CLEAR] > [ERDS-DAT] and touch the [OK] button.
NOTE:
This operation initializes the E-RDS settings to factory setting values.
For the setting values to be initialized, see the section of Initializing E-RDS settings.
F-2-270
F-2-269
NOTE:
button at the center of the lower side of
When [Mode List] is selected, touching the
the screen displays explanation of each item or detailed operation guide.In case of [Mode
List Classic], this button is not appeared.
2-178
2-179
3. Perform installation or deletion of the CA certificate if necessary, and reboot the device.
OK! is displayed if the CA certificate is initialized. When NG! is displayed, see the
Deletion of the CA certificate: When the following operation is performed, the CA certificate
F-2-272
F-2-271
F-2-273
2-179
2-180
6. Touch the numeric button [1] on the control panel (the setting value is changed to 1) and
touch the [OK] button. (The data is reflected to the setting value field.)
NOTE:
This initiates the communication test between the device and the UGW.
NOTE:
This operation enables the communication function with UGW.
F-2-274
F-2-275
CAUTION:
The following settings i.e. RGW-PORT and RGW-ADR in Service mode must not be
change unless there are specific instructions to do so.
If the communication is successful, OK! is displayed. If NG! (failed) appears, refer to the
Troubleshooting and repeat until OK! is displayed.
F-2-276
NOTE:
The communication results with UGW can be distinguished by referring to the COMLOG. By performing the communication test with UGW, E-RDS acquires schedule
information and starts monitoring and meter reads operation.
2-180
2-181
NOTE:
When the function is enabled, the [Service Call] button is displayed on the bottom of the
counter check screen (displayed by touching the counter check button).
F-2-277
3. Touch the numeric button [1] on the control panel (the setting value is changed to 1) and
touch the [OK] button. (The data is reflected to the setting value field.)
F-2-278
F-2-279
2-181
2-182
3. Touch the numeric button [1] on the control panel (the setting value is changed to 1) and
touch the [OK] button. (The data is reflected to the setting value field.)
NOTE:
E-RDS generates an alarm of service call completion at this timing, and sends the
alarm to UGW.
F-2-282
F-2-280
CAUTION:
When a service call has been already requested, another service call cannot be sent.
The previous service call needs to be canceled, or a service person needs to perform
processing for service call completion.
3. Select the request details and touch the [Request] button.
NOTE:
E-RDS generates an alarm of service call request at this timing, and sends the alarm to
UGW.
F-2-281
F-2-283
2-182
2-183
Steps to Service Browser settings
1. Touch the [Counter Check] button on the control panel to display the counter check screen,
and touch the [Service Call] button.
F-2-284
2. Touch the [Cancel] button, and touch the [Yes] button in the check screen.
NOTE:
E-RDS generates an alarm of service call cancellation at this timing, and sends the
alarm to UGW.
F-2-286
If the connection is established with UGW successfully, OK! is displayed. When NG! is
displayed, perform the steps referring to Troubleshooting until connection is established
with UGW.
F-2-285
F-2-287
2-183
2-184
Initializing E-RDS settings
Initialization procedure
1. Start [Service Mode] at Level 1.
For the procedures, see Steps to E-RDS settings - step 1..
2. Select [COPIER] > [Function] > [CLEAR] > [ERDS-DAT] and then touch [OK].
F-2-288
5. When the above-shown setting values are enabled, [Service Browser] is displayed in the
Service Mode screen.
F-2-290
In case of replacing the CA certificate file, even if initialization of E-RDS is executed, the
status is not returned to the factory default.
When installing the certificate file other than the factory default CA certificate file, it is
required to delete the certificate file after E-RDS initialization and install the factory
default CA certificate file.
For detailed procedures, see "Steps to E-RDS settings - step 3.".
2-184
2
FAQ
No.1
Q: In what case does a communication test with UGW fail?
A: The following cases can be considered in the becoming NG! case.
1. Name resolution was failed due to an incorrect host name or DNS server has been
2-185
In the case that the device is rebooted while the retry information is specified, however,
another browser information is obtained to be sent.
NOTE:
The retry data will be sent at interval of 5*n minutes. (n: retries, 5, 10, 15 minutesup
to 30 minutes)
halted.
2. Network cable is blocked off.
3. Proxy server settings is not correct.
No.4
Q: How many log-data can be stored?
A: Up to 30 log data can be saved. The data size of error information is maximum 128
No.2
Q: I want to know the interval of data transmitting from E-RDS to the UGW, and what data
size is sent to the UGW?
A: The schedule of data transmitting, the start time are determined by settings in the UGW
side. The timing is once per 16 hours by default, and counter data volume could be maximum
250 bytes.
characters.
No.5
Q: Although Microsoft ISA as a proxy server is introduced, the authentication check is failed.
Can E-RDS adopt with Microsoft ISA?
A: E-RDS must comply with Basic while Integrated authentication is used for Microsoft
ISA (as default); therefore, authentication with E-RDS is available if you change the setting to
No.3
Q: Does error-retry carry out at the time of a communication error with the UGW?
A: Retry of SOAP communication is performed as follows.
In the case of an error in SOAP communication (i.e. a trouble at UGW side) at transmission
of the alarm code list and the service mode counter (postAlert) due to change of device
status, the data failed in transmission equivalent to 3 retries is to be stored in the HDD. In
the case of anther transmission error (the 4th error), the oldest data of the stored data is
deleted and the newly-generated retry data is stored in the HDD.
In the case of SOAP transmission errors as described below, the unsent (and remaining)
data is sent again depending on the storage status of CPCA data:
At transmission of a jam log and service mode counter (postJamLog) when the jam
log was obtained from the device.
At transmission of a service call log and service mode counter (postServiceCallLog)
when the service log was obtained from the device.
At transmission of an alarm log and service mode counter (postAlarmLog) when the
alarm log was obtained from the device.
In the case of a SOAP transmission error at transmission of a service mode menu list
(postServiceModeMenu) due to change of the setting value in the service mode menu, the
2-185
2-186
No.8
Transmission timing
Q: How does E-RDS operate while the device is placed in the sleep mode?
A: While being in Real Deep Sleep, and if data to be sent is in E-RDS, the system wakes up
asleep, then starts to send the data to the UGW. The system also waits for completion of data
transmission and let the device to shift to asleep status again.
However, transition time to the Real Deep Sleep depends on the device, and the transition to
sleep wont be done if the next data transmission will be done within 10 minutes.
No.9
Q: Is E-RDS compatible with Section counter (Department counter)?
A: No, E-RDS does not support Section counter.
Detailed procedure
Transmission
information
Error occurs
T-2-95
No.10
Q: Is there any setting to be made on the device side to enable the service mode menu
transmission function? Moreover, what is Service mode menu set as the object of
transmission?
A: No steps peculiar to Transmitting Service mode menu. As for the data that applies to
transmission of the service mode, see the Service mode menu Transmission.
No.12
Q: Can I make another service call request when I have already requested a service call?
A: No, you cannot make another service call request if you have already made a service call
request.
Touch the [Cancel] button to cancel the service call which youd made. Or the service
technician performs a service call request completion process.
No.11
Q: What service browser data is transmitted to UGW by E-RDS in what timing?
A: The service browser data to be transmitted and the transmission timing are shown below.
Transmission timing
Detailed procedure
Transmission
information
Error occurs
No.13
Q: Is the Requesting status cancelled when the device is rebooted?
A: The requesting status is not cancelled even if the device is rebooted. The information of
the notified service call request (the time that the request was made, the service call request
description) is also retained during the Requesting status.
No.14
Q: Some part of information seems to be suppressed as screens passes: Settings/
Registration > Preferences > Network > TCP/ IP Settings, when the device is connected
with a PS server unit. How the authentication information such as CA certificate is dealt
A: Although the devices been connected with the PS server unit, the data of the
e-Maintenance/ imageWARE Remote system is able to pass through to the PS server unit.
Therefore the e-Maintenance/ imageWARE Remote system functions normally even if the
PS server unit is connected.The screen of IP Address settings is disabled though, the item
related to authentication can be enabled.
2-186
2-187
Troubleshooting
No.1
Symptom: A communication test (COM-TEST) results NG!
Cause: Initial settings or network conditions is incomplete.
Remedy 1: Check and take actions mentioned below.
1) Check network connections
Is the status indicator LED for the HUB port to which the main unit is connected ON?
YES: Proceed to Step 2).
NO: Check that the network cable is properly connected.
2) Confirm loop back address
Select [Settings/Registration (User Mode)] > [Preferences] > [Network] > [TCP/IP Settings]
F-2-292
> [IPv4 Settings] > [PING Command], enter 127.0.0.1, and touch the [Start] button.
3) Confirmation from another PC connected to same network.
Request the user to ping the main unit from a PC connected to same network.
Does the main unit respond?
YES: Proceed to Step 4).
NO: Confirm the details of the main units IP address and subnet mask settings.
4) Confirm DNS connection
(a) Select [Settings/Registration (User Mode)] > [Preferences] > [Network] > [TCP/IP
Settings] > [DNS Settings] > [DNS Server Address Settings], write down the primary
and secondary addresses of the DNS server, and touch the [Cancel] button.
F-2-291
Does the screen display Response from the host.? (See the next figure.)
YES: Proceed to Step 3).
NO: There is a possibility that the main units network settings are wrong. Check the
details of the IPv4 settings once more.
F-2-293
2-187
2-188
(b) Select [TCP/IP Settings] from breadcrumbs of the left columns, and then Touch it.
F-2-294
(c) Select [TCP/IP Settings] > [IPv4 Settings] > [PING Command], enter the primary DNS
server noted down in step a) as the IP address, and touch the [Start] button.
Does the screen display Response from the host.?
YES: Proceed to Remedy 2.
NO: Enter the secondary DNS server noted down in step a) as the IP address,
and then touch Start.
Does the screen display Response from the host.?
YES: Proceed to Remedy 2.
NO: There is a possibility that the DNS server address is wrong. Reconfirm the
address with the users system administrator.
F-2-295
NOTE:
Only the initial part of error information is displayed in the communication log list screen.
* is added to the top of the error text in the case of an error in communication test (method
name: getConfiguration or communicationTest) only.
2-188
2-189
3) When each line is selected, the communication log detailed screen is displayed as shown
in the figure below. (Example: No. 05)
No.3
Symptom: Registration information of an E-RDS is once deleted from the UGW server, and is
re-registered after that. If a communication test is not performed, then device information
on the UGW becomes invalid.
Causes: When registration of the E-RDS is deleted from the UGW, the status will be changed
to that the communication test has not completed because related information has lost from
a database.
So, device information will also become invalid if that condition will be left for seven days
without performing the communication test.
Remedy: Perform a communication test before becoming the invalidity state.
No.4
Symptom: There was a log, indicating Device is not ready, try later in error details of COMLOG list.
F-2-296
NOTE:
A detailed description of the error appears below 'Information'. (Max 128 characters)
Touch the [OK] button to return to the log screen.
4) When a message is displayed, take an appropriate action referring to Error code and
strings.
No.2
Symptom: A communication test results NG! even if network setting is set properly.
Causes: The network environment is inappropriate, or RGW-ADR or RGW-PORT settings for
E-RDS have been changed.
Remedy: The following points should be checked.
1) Check network conditions such as proxy server settings and so on.
2) Check the E-RDS setting values.
Check the communication log from COM-LOG.
Check whether RGW-ADR or RGW-PORT settings has changed. If RGW-ADR or RGW-
PORT settings has changed, restore initial values. For initial values, see E-RDS setting
items.
2-189
2-190
No.7
Symptom: I cannot make a service call request.
Cause: There has been already a service call request.
The following error information is output in the communication error log details display screen.
Touch the [Cancel] button to cancel the service call request that has been made.
A service technician performs a complete processing for the service call request that has
been made.
NOTE:
* is added to the top of the error text in the case of an error in communication test
(method name: getConfiguration or communicationTest) only.
No.8
Symptom: Initializing the CA certificate (CA-KEY) results in NG!
Cause: Initialization process of the CA certificate has completed abnormally.
Remedy: Initialize the HDD.
No.
1
2
4
5
Code
Error strings
Cause
Remedy
Clear E-RDS
2-190
2
No.
Code
2-191
Error strings
Cause
8300 0306
10 8xxx 0004
11
8xxx 0201
8xxx 0202
8xxx 0203
8xxx 0204
8xxx 0206
Remedy
No.
Code
Error strings
Cause
Communication attempted
without confirming network
connection, just after booting
up a device in which the
network preparations are not
ready.
26 8xxx 201E
27 8xxx 2028
28 8xxx 2029
Remedy
Check the network
connection, as per the initial
procedures described in the
troubleshooting.
Perform a communication test
(COM-TEST) about 60 seconds
later, after turn on the device.
Try again after a period of time.
Check detailed error code
(Hexadecimal) and [Error
details in UGW] from UGW
displayed after the message.
Check the network
connection, as per the initial
procedures described in the
troubleshooting.
Check that the value of URL of
UGW (RGW-ADR) is https://
a01.ugwdevice.net/ugw/
agentif010.
Check proxy server address
and re-enter as needed.
2-191
2
No.
Code
2-192
Error strings
Cause
Remedy
2-192
2-193
Updater
Overview
Outline
Updater provides functions that enable network communication with Content Delivery System
V1.0 (hereinafter CDS) to install firmware, MEAP applications and system options.
UGW
1) Set up customers,
device types, distribution
schedule and the
command for download
Firmware Installation
Sales Company
/ Partner
UGW Operator
Updater function enables users to distribute firmware through CDS via Internet. Particularly
on e-Maintenance/UGW (called NETEYE in Japan)-enabled devices, firmware can be
2) Notify distribution
information to CDS.
e-RDS
4) Download
firmware
Updater
CDS
Firmware Upload
Firmware
Canon Inc.
devices.
Installing Firmware
With link to Updater, service technicians provide firmware install services in the following 3
methods.
Distribution Method
a. UGW-linked Download / Update
(Full-remote update)
b. UGW-linked Download
(Remote Distribution / Update)
c. Manual Download / Update
(On-site Update via Service mode)
Download
Downloadable Firmware Versions
Update
Previous
Current
Newer
Commanded
Timing
Ver
Ver
Ver
by:
UGW
Auto
No
Yes
Yes*1
UGW
Manual
Yes
Yes
Yes
Local UI
Auto
Manual
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes*1
Yes
UGW
1) Set up customers,
device types, distribution
schedule and the
command for download
Sales Company
/ Partner
UGW Operator
2) Notify distribution
information to CDS.
e-RDS
4) Download
firmware
T-2-97
Updater
imageRUNNER
ADVANCE
CDS
Firmware
Firmware Upload
Canon Inc.
2-193
2-194
service technician can gain access to CDS from User mode to install a MEAP application
or a system option.
Installing MEAP Application
firmware. This allows service technicians to update the firmware as needed on the
customer site even without PCs.
LAN
1) Manually execute
Updater.
Firmware
Firmware Upload
5) Manuals, etc.
LAN
NOTE:
External network here means the network connecting the device to CDS via Internet.
NOTE:
Users are able to gain firmware distribution in the following 4 methods by introducing
CDS. See User Manual for detailed information.
Local UI
Remote UI
Update
Timing
Auto
Manual
Auto
Manual
Remote UI
Local UI
Auto
No
No
No
No
No
Specific version only
(Obtain it separately)
No
MEAP
Application
Manual
Upload
3) Create LF
1) Enter LAN
Canon Inc.
Application
F-2-299
Manual download/
update via Local UI
Manual download/
upload via Remote UI
Special download/
upload via Remote UI
Periodical update via
Local UI
2) License
Authentication
CDS
2) Firmware distribution
Download
Distribution Method Commanded
by
LMS
Canon Inc.
User
Service
Technician
LAN
CDS
Updater
imageRUNNER
ADVANCE
Sales
Company
imageRUNNER
ADVANCE
4) Transmit MEAP
Application/LF
Yes *1
Yes *1
Yes *1
Yes *1
Sales
Company
5) Manuals, etc.
User
LAN
Yes *1
LAN
2) License
Authentication
CDS
1) Enter LAN
LMS
Application
3) Create LF
Manual
Upload
Canon Inc.
4) Transmit LF
imageRUNNER
ADVANCE
2-194
2-195
System Configuration
List of Functions
License
Access No.
Manual
Readme
LMS
Application/License
Updater
MEAP application
Manual
Internet
User
Dealer
Firmware
eRDS
Sales
Company
CDS
Application
Firmware
Business
Group
Firmware
UGW
Service
Technician
QA
Canon Inc.
F-2-302
MEAP application/
system option
System
Management
Internal system
error notification
Function
Checking firmware compatibility
Checking special firmware
Checking latest firmware
version
Registering/deleting firmware
distribution schedule
Confirming and downloading
firmware
Updating downloaded firmware
Cancelling downloaded
firmware
Acquiring firmware distribution
information registered from
UGW
Notifying firmware version
information
Periodical update
Inquiring license for MEAP
application/system option
Installing MEAP application /
system option
Settings
Testing communications
Displaying update logs
Displaying system logs
Notifying internal system error
occurrence to distribution server
Service
Mode
User
Mode
Remote
UI
UGWlinked
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
T-2-98
*Functioning supports periodical update with a device after firmware version V50.00.
2-195
2-196
Distribution Flow
: User operation
Application
Market Release
License Access
Number Acquisition
(packaged with the
product)
: User operation
Firmware
Market Release
d
b
c
Distribution
Setting to UGW
(UGW-linked)*1
Firmware acquisition
License Key
Acquisition
(from LMS)
*2
Automatic download
Scheduled download
Apply (Update)
Via User mode
(Local UI)
Apply (Update)
Via User mode
(Remote UI)
License File
Acquisition
(from LMS)
Install
Via User mode
(Local UI)
Install distributed
application
Via User mode
(Remote UI)
System Option
Install
Via User mode
(Local UI)
System Option
Manual Install
Via User mode
(Remote UI)
MEAP Application
Manual Install
Via User mode
(Remote UI)
F-2-304
Automatic update
Apply (Update)
Via Service mode
(Local UI)
Scheduled update
F-2-303
2-196
2
Limitations and Cautions
Limitations
Changing Date/Time on Device
When a user changes the date/time setting on the device (including change of the setting
according to daylight saving time), the firmware distribution may not be performed as
2-197
Job/Function
type
COPY
PRINT
FAX
I-FAX Receipt
scheduled.
But there is not the problem if it is time adjustment of several minutes with NTP servers.
Report Print
SEND
Receiving
Wait for EOJ
(end of job)
Wait for EOJ
Cancel
processing to
trigger update *
-
Printing
Queued print
jobs
Queued send
jobs
Cancel
Cancel
processing to processing to
trigger update * trigger update *
Cautions
Sending
T-2-99
*The data are guaranteed even if cut off in the middle of a job.It becomes the recovery object
after the device reboot and carry out send / reception again.
Even during transfer, Pull SCAN job processing is cancelled soon after scanning is
Firmware update is cancelled if the jobs are not completed within 10 minutes. If this occurs,
Users logged in SMS (Service Management Service) are unable to use Update functions
completed.
the error code, 8x001106, will be returned (different numbers will be shown for x depending
Follow the shutdown sequence to reboot the device after the firmware is updated.
Firmware update is executed if the jobs stated above are not in the queue.
Upon the following operations done, Updater functions are suspended from Remote UI for
certain duration.
When a user exits Web browser without clicking [Portal] or [Log Out] button in the setting of
Remote Login Service via SMS
When a user exits Web browser without clicking [Portal] button in the setting of not to use
Remote Login Service via SMS.
When a user exits Web browser without clicking [Log out from SMS] or [To Remote UI]
button.
Wait for EOJ (end of job) Function
Firmware update will be triggered only after the following jobs are completed.
This is the Updater-specific specification.
Caution:
The following firmware versions do not support Wait for EOJ Function.
2-197
2-198
Preparation
Overview of Preparation
HQ should be changed before obtaining firmware distributed from CDS. Unless the setting is
changed properly, the desired firmware may not be able to be selected.
Installation
Method
UGW-linked
Download and
Update
UGW-linked
Download
Manual
Download and
Update
Manual
Download and
Update via
Local UI
Manual
Download and
Update via
Remote UI
Special
Download and
Update via
Remote UI
Scheduled
update
Enabling
Setting
[Update
Sales
Network Enabling
Firmware]
Companys Settings UGW Link
Button of User
HQ
Mode
Market
Enabling
[Manual
Update]
Button of
User Mode
(Remote UI)
Enabling
[Scheduled
Update]
Canada
Latin America
Hong Kong
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
NOTE:
The list below shows the setting of Sales Companys HQ for CDS-CTS by market.
Check and adhere to the appropriate setting for your market.
<List of Sales Companys HQ and the settings for CDS-CTL>
Japan = JP
USA = US
Singapore = SG
Europe = NL
Korea = KR
China = CN
Hong Kong = HK
Australia = AU
Canada = CA
Latin America= LA
T-2-100
Network Settings
LMS-linked Installation
LMA-linked installation via Local UI
LMS-linked installation via Remote UI
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
T-2-101
2-198
2
Network Settings
Connecting to External Network
The method of connecting to external network is similar to a normal network connection
method. Refer to user manual of the device for details.
2-199
Confirming URL Setting of Distribution Server
This section describes how to confirm the URL setting of the distribution server.
1. Start [Service Mode] at Level 1.
1). Press [Setting/Registration (User Mode)] button on the control panel.
2). Press [2] and [8] buttons at a time on the control panel.
NOTE:
See User Manual for how to connect the device to the external network.
Before using UGW link or User mode, see the sections below to prepare as required.
Enabling UGW Link
Enabling [Update Firmware] Button of User Mode
Enabling [Install Application/Options] Button of User Mode
NOTE:
External Network here means the network connecting the device to CDS via Internet.
F-2-305
2-199
2-200
F-2-306
6. Press [OK] to set the entered items. Now the URL of the distribution server is successfully
set.
F-2-307
2-200
2-201
Communication Test
This section describes how to check if the communication is normally done to the distribution
server and/or the file server.
1. Start [Service Mode] at Level 1.
1). Press [Setting/Registration (User Mode)] button on the control panel.
2). Press [2] and [8] buttons at a time on the control panel.
3). Press [Setting/Registration (User Mode)] button on the control panel.
4). [Service Mode] screen is shown.
2. Press [Updater] button.
F-2-310
F-2-309
F-2-311
2-201
2-202
Enabling UGW Link
When installing the firmware in the method of UGW-linked Download and Update or UGWlinked Download, the following should be set before actually using UGW link.
Service Technician
Setting of Device
Service Mode
(Level 1)
Setting of UGW
WebPortal
NOTE:
F-2-312
Obtain the download file information for communication test from the distribution server
(to execute the communication test to the distribution server).
Using the download file information for communication test, the contents for test are
downloaded from the file server (for the communication test to the file server).
6. Upon the communication test completed, the communication test result screen is shown.
Press [OK] button to exit this operation.
F-2-313
2-202
2-203
To allow users to install firmware using Updater, the setting of firmware installation should be
To allow users to install applications using Updater, the setting of application installation
Service
Technician
User Mode screen for Updater when the setting is not enabled (CDS-FIRM(0)):
F-2-314
User Mode screen for Updater when the setting is enabled (CDS-FIRM(1)):
F-2-315
Service
Technician
User Mode screen of Updater when the setting is not enabled (CDS-MEAP(0)):
F-2-316
F-2-317
2-203
2-204
Remote UI screen of Updater when the setting is not enabled (LOCLFIRM (0)):
F-2-318
F-2-319
F-2-321
2-204
2-205
F-2-322
F-2-323
2-205
2-206
Various Setting
Setting URL of Distribution Server
This section describes how to set URL of the distribution server.
1. Start [Service Mode] at Level 1.
1). Press [Setting/Registration (User Mode)] button on the control panel.
2). Press [2] and [8] buttons at a time on the control panel.
3). Press [Setting/Registration (User Mode)] button on the control panel.
4). [Service Mode] screen is shown.
2. Press [Updater] button.
3. Press [Software Management Settings] button.
F-2-325
5. Press [Delivery Server URL] to show the virtual keypad. Enter the URL.
F-2-326
2-206
2-207
F-2-328
F-2-327
F-2-329
[Log Level]:
Select one of 5 levels ranging from [0] to [4].
See the table below for logs output in each level.
Log Level
0
1
2
3
4
Trace
Information
Yes
Yes
Yes
Log Output
Important Message Ordinary Error
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
System Error
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
T-2-103
2-207
2-208
Displaying Logs
NOTE:
This list shows the contents of the Log Output.
Log Output
Trace
Information
Important Message
Ordinary Error
System Error
Description
Detailed logs for debug
Logs related to operations done on the system
Update logs output by firmware type
Installation logs by MEAP application
Logs related to enabled functions by system option
Logs for ordinary errors
Logs for internal system errors
Update Logs
This section describes how to confirm System Option/MEAP Application Installation Logs and
Firmware Update Logs.
1. Start [Service Mode] at Level 1.
1). Press [Setting/Registration (User Mode)] button on the control panel.
2). Press [2] and [8] buttons at a time on the control panel.
3). Press [Setting/Registration (User Mode)] button on the control panel.
4). [Service Mode] screen is shown.
6. Press [OK] button to set the selected log level. Now the log level is successfully set.
F-2-330
2-208
2-209
6. System Option/MEAP Application Installation Logs and Firmware Update Logs are shown.
Press [OK] button to exit this operation.
F-2-331
F-2-333
F-2-332
2-209
2-210
System Logs
F-2-335
F-2-334
F-2-336
2-210
2-211
Communication Test
This section describes how to check if the communication is normally done to the distribution
server and/or the file server.
1. Start [Service Mode] at Level 1.
1). Press [Setting/Registration (User Mode)] button on the control panel.
2). Press [2] and [8] buttons at a time on the control panel.
3). Press [Setting/Registration (User Mode)] button on the control panel.
4). [Service Mode] screen is shown.
2. Press [Updater] button.
3. Press [Software Management Settings] button.
F-2-337
NOTE:
See the section of "Debug Logs" under Version Upgrade via CDS, Version Upgrade
of Chapter 6 Troubleshooting of this manual for more detailed information.
F-2-338
2-211
2-212
6. Upon the communication test completed, the communication test result screen is shown.
Press [OK] button to exit this operation.
F-2-341
F-2-339
F-2-340
Obtain the download file information for communication test from the distribution server (to
execute the communication test to the distribution server).
Using the download file information for communication test, the contents for test are
downloaded from the file server (for the communication test to the file server).
2-212
2
Maintenance
Upgrading Updater
The firmware installed in the device should be also upgraded when upgrading Updater. See
2-213
How to Replace Controller Boards
The steps are different depending on which of 2 controller boards are to be replaced.
Main Controller Board PCB 1
No steps follow.
the section of Version upgrade , Chapter 6 Troubleshooting of this manual for how to
update firmware.
The setting information and logs (update logs/system logs) are inherited in the upgraded
The network and service mode setting should be set again after initialization. See
version.
Since Updater is a MEAP application, its contents can be temporarily saved in the MEAP
All settings should be set again because no data are inherited. See "Preparation" in chapter 2
application storage area on PC via SST during formatting or replacing HDD. See MEAP
NOTE:
When formatting or replacing HDD, distribution schedule, downloaded firmware (not
updated yet) and logs (update/system logs) will be deleted.
2-213
2-214
FAQ
No.4
Q: In the course of UGW-linked download, what will happen if the user downloads the
firmware before the service technician update the firmware downloaded with UGW-linked
download before?
No.1
This is because only one downloaded firmware can be held on the device.
The firmware downloaded in the method of Service mode-linked download and UGWlinked download can be checked/deleted from User mode, but cannot be updated, so it
Downgrade Possibility
No
Yes
Yes
No
No.5
Q: What happens if the user registers another distribution schedule when the distribution
T-2-104
No.2
Q: When installing firmware, does it take less time in manual download and update
compared to update via SST?
A: It depends on the number of devices to update firmware.
schedule. This is because only one distribution schedule can be held. Any existing
distribution schedule is deleted and the newly registered distribution schedule is made
valid.
When updating the firmware on a device, it takes more time in manual download and
update compared to update via SST (It depend on network environment.).
No.6
As for the time to update firmware to multiple devices, manual download and update
takes less time compared to update via SST because updating the firmware to multiple
A: Any individual response edition of firmware can be installed in all the methods provided by
service technicians. Before installing the individual response edition, ensure to obtain the
ID and password separately.
No.3
Q: How can we confirm that the firmware is properly updated after UGW-linked download
and update done?
A: You can confirm this in E-mail or the Device List on UGW-linked screen.
E-mail to notify firmware update will be sent from CDS server to the addresses set as
No.7
Q: If the device is down during firmware update, can the device be started using the older
firmware version?
A: No, it is impossible to start the device using older versions. If this occurs, the service
technician in charge should reinstall the firmware via SST. See Troubleshooting on
On UGW-linked screen, search the device of your interest on [Select Device] screen to find
2-214
2-215
FAQ on Installing MEAP Application/System Option
No.9
Q: Can we cancel the operation during firmware download?
No.1
Q: What happens if a MEAP application is installed in the system with insufficient HDD free
space?
A: An error message is shown. Upon starting installation, the MEAP application checks the
required space against free space to judge installation availability.
No.2
Q: Can we cancel the operation during installation of MEAP application?
A: Yes: [Cancel] button is shown.
No.3
Q: Is the device automatically restarted after the system option is enabled?
A: The device is not automatically restarted. Users should restart the device manually.
F-2-342
No.10
Q: E-mail is sent to users to notify update completion. Can service technicians also receive
such a notification?
A: Yes. The notification E-mail is also set for the service technician in charge if the user enters
his/her E-mail address at the time of firmware distribution setting.
Multiple E-mail addresses can be entered in the field.Delimit each E-mail address with ,
(comma) or ; (semicolon) when you enter multiple E-mail addresses in the field.
No.11
Q: How long does the firmware update take?
A: Approx. 30 min. However, this does not include the download time. Download time relies
on the network environment.
2-215
2-216
No.2
Q: How can operations using Updater be masked on the users' side?
No.1
A: See the table below for preparation required in each installation method.
For updating firmware
Installation
Method
UGW-linked
Download and
Update
UGW-linked
Download
Manual
Download and
Update
Manual
Download and
Update via
Local UI
Manual
Download and
Update via
Remote UI
Special
Download and
Update via
Remote UI
Periodical
update
Enabling
Enabling
Setting
Enabling
[Update
[Manual
Sales
Network
UGW
Firmware] Update] Button
Companys Settings
Link
Button of User of User Mode
HQ
Mode
(Remote UI)
Periodical
update
validation
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No.3
Q: Can the communication be cancelled during the communication test?
A: Yes. During the communication test, Cancel button is displayed.
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
T-2-105
Network Settings
LMS-linked Installation
LMA-linked installation via Local UI
LMS-linked installation via Remote UI
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
T-2-106
2-216
Periodical Service
Parts and Cleaning Parts
Consumable
3-2
FC8-4402
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
Process Unit
13
14
15
16
Image Formation
System
Fixing System
DV-UNT-Y
DV-UNT-M
DV-UNT-C
DV-UNT-K
DV-UNT-Y
DV-UNT-M
DV-UNT-C
DV-UNT-K
TR-ROLC
TR-ROLK
DRBL-1
DRBL-1
DRBL-1
DRBL-1
DRBL-1
DRBL-1
DRBL-1
DRBL-1
DRBL-1
DRBL-1
FC8-4402
FM3-8893
FC8-4400
DRBL-1
DRBL-1
DRBL-1
2TR-ROLL
T/S-UNIT
TR-BLT
Patch sensor
FK2-7316
FM3-6018
FM3-5949
FM3-5950
FM3-5951
FC8-4906
XG9-0172
FC8-5043
FC8-5046
DRBL-1
DRBL-1
DRBL-1
DRBL-1
DRBL-1
PRDC-1
T-CLN-BD
FX-UNIT
FX-UNIT
FX-UNIT
FX-LW-RL
FX-LW-BR
Reference
Remark
FM3-5926
FM3-5941
FM3-5942
FM3-5943
FM3-5973
FM3-5974
FM3-5967
FM3-5968
FC8-4401
FC8-4401
Adjustment (Yes/No)
Dust-blocking glass
Dust-blocking glass cleaning pad
Developing unit (Y)
Developing unit (M)
Developing unit (C)
Developing unit (Bk)
Developing unit (Y)
Developing unit (M)
Developing unit (C)
Developing unit (Bk)
Primary transfer roller (Color)
Primary transfer roller (Bk)
Body
Counter
500K
300K
150K
120K
100K
50K
20K
Number
At installation
Part No
Part Name
Category
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Interval
For 100V
For 120V
For 230V
3-2
3-3
32
FU3-0280
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
RH7-7129
-
FC6-9817
FM3-5945
Pickup/
Feeding System
Filter
-
FK2-6470
C1-FD-RL
C2-FD-RL
C1-SP-RL
C2-SP-RL
M-PU-RL
M-SP-RL
DRBL-1
TN-FIL1
DRBL-1
WSR-TNR
Reference
DRBL-1
DRBL-1
DRBL-1
DRBL-1
DRBL-1
DRBL-1
Remark
Adjustment (Yes/No)
Counter
500K
300K
150K
120K
100K
50K
FC6-7083
FC6-7083
FC6-6661
FC6-6661
FB1-8581
FC6-6661
20K
Number
At installation
Part No
Part Name
26
27
28
29
30
31
49
Category
No.
Interval
3-3
3-4
Toner filter
F-3-1
3-4
3-5
Developing unit(Bk)
Developing unit(C)
Developing unit(M)
Developing unit(Y)
ITB
Secondary transfer outer roller
F-3-2
3-5
3-6
Fixing bearing
Roller pressure
Fixing bearing
Film unit(100V)
(120V)
(230V)
F-3-3
3-6
3-7
Multi-Purpose Tray
Feed Roller
Multi-Purpose Tray
Separation Roller
Cassette feeding 1 roller
Pickup idler gear
Cassette feeding 2 roller
F-3-4
3-7
3-8
Cleaning Parts
[1]
[2]
[3]
[19]
[4]
[5]
[18]
[17]
[6]
[16]
[15]
[7]
[14]
[8]
[9]
[10]
[13]
[13]
[13]
[13]
[12]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
[10]
[11]
[12]
[13]
[14]
[15]
[16]
[17]
[18]
[19]
[11]
3-8
Main
Exposure System
Laser
Formation System
Image
System
Fixing
Feed System
Pickup
Option
4-2
List of Parts
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
List of Cover
[21]
[1]
[20]
[2]
[19]
[3]
[18]
[4]
[5]
[17]
[6]
[16]
[7]
[15]
[8]
Name
Reader right retaining cover
Reader front cover
Control panel under cover
Control panel upper cover
Control panel side cover 1
Control panel side cover 2
Front right cover
Front upper cover
Toner replacement cover
Front cover
Left grip cover
Left duct cover
Left lower cover
Left upper cover
Inner bottom cover
Reader left cover
Reader left retaining cover
DF base left cover
Jamp base cover
Reader cable cover
DF base right cover
[14]
Refarence
T-4-1
[9]
[11]
[10]
[13]
[12]
[11]
F-4-1
4-2
4-3
[51]
[50]
[49]
[22]
[48]
[23]
[47]
[24]
[46]
[25]
[45]
[44]
[26]
[43]
[42]
[27]
[41]
[40]
[28]
[39]
[29]
[38]
[37]
[36]
[30]
[35]
[31]
[34]
[33]
[32]
F-4-2
No.
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
Name
Reader rear cover
Reader rear under cover
Left rear sub cover
Left rear cover
Rear cover
Rear lower cover
Filter cover
Right rear cover 1
Conector cover
Right rear cover 2
Heater switch cover
Right rear cover 3
Right lower sub cover 2
Right lower sub cover 3
Right lower cover
casset right upper sub cover 2
Right lower sub cover 1
Casset grip
casset right upper cover 2
casset right upper sub cover 1
casset right upper sub cover 3
Right front cover 3
Stack bypass tray sub cover
Right front cover 2
Stack bypass tray
Right front cover 1
Grip
Right output frame cover
Right upper cover
Reader right cover
Refarence
T-4-2
4-3
4-4
[53]Output frame
[56]Output stopper
[55]Output tray
F-4-3
No.
[52]
[53]
[54]
[55]
[56]
[57]
[58]
[59]
[60]
[61]
Name
Inner output cover
Output frame
Output tray guide
Output tray
Output stopper
Inner rear cover 3
Inner rear cover 2
Inner rear cover 1
Inner right cover
Inner output sensor cover
Refarence
FC8-5363
FC8-4144
FC8-4766
FC8-4917
FC8-4145
FC8-4915
FC8-4916
T-4-3
4-4
4-5
Control Panel
Hopper Unit
F-4-4
4-5
4-6
Developing unit(Bk)
Developing unit(C)
Developing unit(M)
Developing unit(Y)
ITB
Secondary transfer outer roller
4-6
4-7
ITB Unit
Toner container[Bk]
ITB Cleaning Unit
Toner container[C]
Toner container[M]
Toner container[Y]
Drum Unit[Bk]
Developing Assembly[Bk]
Drum Unit[C]
Developing Assembly[C]
Drum Unit[M]
Developing Assembly[M]
Drum Unit[Y]
Developing Assembly[Y]
Process Unit
F-4-6
4-7
4-8
No.
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
[10]
[11]
[12]
[13]
[14]
[15]
[16]
[17]
[18]
[19]
[20]
[21]
[22]
[23]
[24]
[25]
[26]
[27]
[28]
[29]
[30]
[31]
[32]
[33]
[34]
Name
Control Panel
Recycle toner container
Hopper Unit
Toner container(Y)
Toner container(M)
Toner container(C)
Toner container(Bk)
ITB Unit
ITB Cleaning Unit
Drum Unit (Y)
Drum Unit (M)
Drum Unit (C)
Drum Unit (Bk)
Developing Assembly (Y) (C5051/C5045)
Developing Assembly (M) (C5051/C5045)
Developing Assembly (C) (C5051/C5045)
Developing Assembly (Bk) (C5051/C5045)
Developing Assembly (Y) (C5035/C5030)
Developing Assembly (M) (C5035/C5030)
Developing Assembly (C) (C5035/C5030)
Developing Assembly (Bk) (C5035/C5030)
Process Unit
Laser Scanner Unit (C5051/C5045)
Laser Scanner Unit (C5035/C5030)
Second and Third Delivery Unit
Multi-purpose Delivery Unit
First Delivery Unit
Right Door Unit
Fixing Assembly
Cassette 1 Pickup Unit
Cassette 2 Pickup Unit
Cassette 1
Cassette 2
Main Drive Unit
Refarence
FM3-8977
FM3-8978
FM3-8979
FM3-8939
FM3-8973
FM3-8974
FM3-8975
FM3-8976
NPN
FM3-5420
FM3-5425
FM3-5999
FM3-6013
FM3-5977
FM3-6006
NPN
FM3-5935
FM3-9230
NPN
NPN
NPN
T-4-4
4-8
4-9
Clutch / Solenoid
Cassette 2 pickup
solenoid (SL3)
F-4-8
No.
SL2
SL3
SL5
SL6
SL7
Name
Cassette 1 pickup solenoid
Cassette 2 pickup solenoid
First delivery flapper solenoid
Second delivery flapper solenoid
Third delivery flapper solenoid
Main Unit
Cassette Pickup Unit
Cassette Pickup Unit
Second and Third Delivery Unit
Second and Third Delivery Unit
Second and Third Delivery Unit
Refarence
T-4-5
4-9
4-10
Multi-purpose
pickup clutch (CL1)
Multi-purpose tray
lifting solenoid (SL4)
Registration shutter
solenoid (SL1)
F-4-9
No.
CL1
SL1
SL4
Name
Multi-purpose pickup clutch
Registration shutter solenoid
Multi-purpose tray lifting solenoid
Main Unit
Device Parts (rear)
Device Parts (rear)
Device Parts (rear)
Refarence
T-4-6
4-10
4-11
F-4-10
No.
CL2
CL3
CL4
CL5
Name
Toner supply clutch (Y)
Toner supply clutch (M)
Toner supply clutch (C)
Toner supply clutch (Bk)
Main Unit
Main Drive Unit
Main Drive Unit
Main Drive Unit
Main Drive Unit
Refarence
T-4-7
4-11
4-12
Motor
Registration
motor (M19)
Multi-purpose
motor (M18)
Cassette 1 pickup
motor (M16)
Cassette 2 pickup
motor (M17)
F-4-11
4-12
4
No.
M9
M10
M11
M12
M16
M17
M18
M19
M20
4-13
Name
Toner container motor (Y)
Toner container motor (M
Toner container motor (C)
Toner container motor (Bk)
Cassette 1 pickup motor
Cassette 2 pickup motor
Multi-purpose motor
Registration motor
Duplex feed motor
Main Unit
Device parts (rear)
Device parts (rear)
Device parts (rear)
Device parts (rear)
Device parts (rear)
Device parts (rear)
Device parts (rear)
Device parts (rear)
Device parts (rear)
Refarence
T-4-8
4-13
4-14
Laser shutter
motor (M28)
F-4-12
No.
M21
M22
M27
M28
Name
Fixing motor
Fixing delivery motor
Shutter motor
Laser shutter motor
Main Unit
Device parts (center)
Device parts (center)
Device parts (center)
Device parts (center)
Refarence
T-4-9
4-14
4-15
Primary transfer separation motor (M15)
Reverse roller
motor (M24)
First & Second
delivery motor (M23)
ITB displacement
control motor (M14)
ITB motor (M13)
F-4-13
4-15
4-16
No.
M13
M14
M15
M23
M24
M25
M26
M29
M30
M31
M32
M33
M34
Name
ITB motor
ITB displacement control motor
Primary transfer separation motor
First & Second delivery motor
Reverse roller motor
Third delivery motor
Recycle toner stirring motor
Scanner motor (YM)
Scanner motor (CBk)
Image skew correction motor (Y)
Image skew correction motor (M
Image skew correction motor (C)
Image skew correction motor (Bk)
Main Unit
ITB Unit
ITB Unit
ITB Unit
Second and Third Delivery Unit
Second and Third Delivery Unit
Second and Third Delivery Unit
Process Unit
Laser Scanner Unit
Laser Scanner Unit
Laser Scanner Unit
Laser Scanner Unit
Laser Scanner Unit
Laser Scanner Unit
Refarence
T-4-10
4-16
4-17
Developing
motor (Bk) (M8)
Developing
motor (C) (M7)
Developing
motor (M) (M6)
Developing
motor (Y) (M5)
F-4-14
4-17
4-18
No.
M1
M2
M3
M4
M5
M6
M7
M8
Name
Drum motor (Y)
Drum motor (M)
Drum motor (C)
Drum motor (Bk)
Developing motor (Y)
Developing motor (M)
Developing motor (C)
Developing motor (Bk)
Main Unit
Main Drive Unit
Main Drive Unit
Main Drive Unit
Main Drive Unit
Main Drive Unit
Main Drive Unit
Main Drive Unit
Main Drive Unit
Refarence
T-4-11
4-18
4-19
Fan
F-4-15
4-19
4-20
Process cartridge
fan (rear) (FM4)
Fixing cooling
fan (rear) (FM6)
Fixing cooling
fan (front) (FM5)
Secondary transfer
exhaust fan (FM8)
Process cartridge
fan (front) (FM10)
F-4-16
4-20
4-21
Controller
fan 3 (FM13)
Controller
fan 1 (FM11)
Controller
fan 2 (FM12)
HDD cooling fan (FM14)
Power supply
cooling fan (FM3)
F-4-17
No.
Name
FM1
FM2
FM3
Main Unit
Device parts (rear)
Device parts (rear)
Electric
Refarence
4-21
4
FM4
FM5
FM6
FM7
FM8
FM9
FM10
FM11
FM12
FM13
FM14
4-22
Process cartridge fan (rear)
Fixing cooling fan (front)
Fixing cooling fan (rear)
Delivery fan 1
Secondary transfer exhaust fan
Delivery fan 2
Process cartridge fan (front)
Controller fan 1
Controller fan 2
Controller fan 3
HDD cooling fan
FK2-0360
FK2-3679
FK2-3679
FK2-7362
FK2-7290
FK2-7291
FK2-3679
FK2-8372
FK2-8372
FK2-8372
FK2-7363
T-4-12
4-22
4-23
Sensor
Second delivery
tray full sensor (PS45)
ITB displacement
sensor 3 (PS27)
ITB displacement
sensor 1 (PS25)
ITB displacement
sensor 4 (PS28)
ITB displacement
sensor 2 (PS26)
F-4-18
4-23
4
No.
PS22
PS23
PS24
PS25
PS26
PS27
PS28
PS30
PS31
PS32
PS37
PS39
PS40
PS42
PS43
PS45
Name
Primary transfer detachment sensor 1
Primary transfer detachment sensor 2
ITB steering sensor
ITB displacement sensor 1
ITB displacement sensor 2
ITB displacement sensor 3
ITB displacement sensor 4
Fixing pressure sensor
Shutter HP sensor
Shutter position sensor
Inner delivery sensor
Reverse sensor
Duplex inlet sensor
Second delivery sensor
Third delivery sensor
Second delivery tray full sensor
4-24
Main Unit
ITB Unit
ITB Unit
ITB Unit
ITB Unit
ITB Unit
ITB Unit
ITB Unit
Fixing Assembly
Fixing Assembly
Fixing Assembly
Fixing Assembly
Second and Third Delivery Unit
Second and Third Delivery Unit
Second and Third Delivery Unit
Second and Third Delivery Unit
Second and Third Delivery Unit
Refarence
T-4-13
4-24
4-25
[1]
[16]
[12]
[13]
[14]
[15]
[2]
[11]
[3]
[10]
[4]
[9]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[5]
New/old detection
fuse (Bk) (UN59)
New/old detection
fuse (C) (UN58)
New/old detection
fuse (M) (UN57)
New/old detection
fuse (Y) (UN56)
4-25
4
INDEX No.
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
[10]
[11]
[12]
[13]
[14]
[15]
[16]
No.
TS5
TS6
TS7
TS8
UN31
UN32
UN33
UN34
UN35
UN36
UN37
UN38
UN56
UN57
UN58
UN59
4-26
No.
PS8
TS4
PS4
TS3
PS3
TS2
PS2
PS1
TS1
PS5
PS9
PS10
PS6
PS11
PS7
PS12
Name
Toner container cam HP sensor (Bk)
Piezo sensor (Bk)
Toner supply sensor (Bk)
Piezo sensor (C)
Toner supply sensor (C)
Piezo sensor (M)
Toner supply sensor (M)
Toner supply sensor (Y)
Piezo sensor (Y)
Toner container cam HP sensor (Y)
Toner cap position sensor (Y)
Toner cap position sensor (M)
Toner container cam HP sensor (M)
Toner cap position sensor (C)
Toner container cam HP sensor (C)
Toner cap position sensor (Bk)
Name
Main Unit
Hopper Unit
Hopper Unit
Hopper Unit
Hopper Unit
Hopper Unit
Hopper Unit
Hopper Unit
Hopper Unit
Hopper Unit
Hopper Unit
Hopper Unit
Hopper Unit
Hopper Unit
Hopper Unit
Hopper Unit
Hopper Unit
Main Unit
Developing Assembly
Developing Assembly
Developing Assembly
Developing Assembly
Main Drive Unit
Main Drive Unit
Main Drive Unit
Main Drive Unit
Main Drive Unit
Main Drive Unit
Main Drive Unit
Main Drive Unit
Drum Unit
Drum Unit
Drum Unit
Drum Unit
Refarence
Refarence
T-4-14
FM3-7944
FM3-7944
FM3-7944
FM3-7944
FM3-7944
FM3-7944
FM3-7944
FM3-7944
T-4-15
4-26
4-27
Right door sensor (PS20)
Second & third delivery
door sensor (PS21)
Transparency
sensor (UN51)
Registration
sensor (PS33)
Environment
sensor 1 (UN22)
Laser shutter
sensor (PS29)
4-27
4
No.
PS13
PS14
PS15
PS16
PS17
PS18
PS20
PS21
PS29
PS33
PS35
PS36
PS41
PS44
UN22
UN47
UN48
UN49
UN50
UN51
UN53
4-28
Name
Toner container inner cover sensor (Y)
Toner container inner cover sensor (M)
Toner container inner cover sensor (C)
Toner container inner cover sensor (Bk)
Toner container outer cover sensor
Front door sensor
Right door sensor
Second & third delivery door sensor
Laser shutter sensor
Registration sensor
Fixing arch sensor 1
Fixing arch sensor 2
First delivery sensor
First delivery tray full sensor
Environment sensor 1
Patch sensor (front)
Patch sensor (rear)
Patch sensor (center)
Environment sensor 2
Transparency sensor
Vertical path sensor
Main Unit
Device Parts(front)
Device Parts(front)
Device Parts(front)
Device Parts(front)
Device Parts(front)
Device Parts(front)
Device Parts(center)
Device Parts(center)
Device Parts(center)
Device Parts(center)
2-side Unit
2-side Unit
Device Parts(center)
Device Parts(center)
Device Parts(center)
Device Parts(center)
Device Parts(center)
Device Parts(center)
Electric
Device Parts(center)
Device Parts(center)
Refarence
T-4-16
4-28
4-29
Multi-purpose size
sensor (UN52)
Multi-purpose paper
sensor (PS47)
4-29
4
No.
PS19
PS38
PS47
PS49
PS50
PS51
PS52
PS53
PS54
PS55
PS56
UN52
Name
Right lower door sensor
Duplex paper sensor
Multi-purpose paper sensor
Cassette 1 paper sensor
Cassette 2 paper sensor
Cassette 1 paper level sensor A
Cassette 1 paper level sensor B
Cassette 2 paper level sensor A
Cassette 2 paper level sensor B
Cassette 1 pre-registration sensor
Cassette 2 pre-registration sensor
Multi-purpose size sensor
4-30
Main Unit
2-side Unit
2-side Unit
Multi-purpose Delivery Unit
Cassette Pickup Unit
Cassette Pickup Unit
Cassette Pickup Unit
Cassette Pickup Unit
Cassette Pickup Unit
Cassette Pickup Unit
Cassette Pickup Unit
Cassette Pickup Unit
Multi-purpose Delivery Unit
Refarence
T-4-17
4-30
4-31
Heater / Other
Fixing heater (H1)
F-4-22
4-31
4-32
Speaker (SP1)
Leakage breaker
(ELCB1)
F-4-23
4-32
4
No.
ELCB1
H1
H2
SP1
TH1
TH1
TH1
TH1
TP1
4-33
Name
Leakage breaker
Fixing heater
Drum heater (Bk)
Speaker
Main thermistor 2
Main thermistor 1
Sub thermistor 1
Sub thermistor 2
Temperature fuse
Main Unit
Electric
Fixing Assembly
Process Unit
Electric
Fixing Assembly
Fixing Assembly
Fixing Assembly
Fixing Assembly
Fixing Assembly
Refarence
T-4-18
4-33
4-34
Switch
AC interlock
switch (SW5)
Cassette 1 size
switch B (SW7)
DC interlock
switch 1 (SW3)
Cassette 1 size
switch A (SW6)
DC interlock
switch 2 (SW4)
Cassette 2 size switch B (SW9)
Cassette 2 size switch A (SW8)
F-4-24
4-34
4-35
Environment
switch (SW2)
F-4-25
4-35
4
No.
SW1
SW2
SW3
SW4
SW5
SW6
SW7
SW8
SW9
4-36
Name
Main power supply switch
Environment switch
DC interlock switch 1
DC interlock switch 2
AC interlock switch
Cassette 1 size switch A
Cassette 1 size switch B
Cassette 2 size switch A
Cassette 2 size switch B
Main Unit
Electric
Electric
Device Parts (front)
Device Parts (front)
Device Parts (rear)
Cassette
Cassette
Cassette
Cassette
Refarence
T-4-19
4-36
4-37
PCB
Hub PCB
CPU PCB
Volume PCB
F-4-26
4-37
4
No.
C5051/C5045
UN12
UN13
UN14
UN15
C5035/C5030
UN12
UN13
UN14
UN15
UN39
UN40
UN41
UN42
4-38
Name
Main Unit
FM3-5420
FM3-5420
FM3-5420
FM3-5420
FM3-5425
FM3-5425
FM3-5425
FM3-5425
FM3-7948
FM3-7948
FM3-7948
FM3-7948
Refarence
T-4-20
4-38
4-39
Developing sub bias PCB (Bk) (UN46)
Developing sub bias PCB (C) (UN45)
Bk pre-exposure LED
PCB (front) (UN29)
4-39
4
No.
UN19
UN20
UN21
UN23
UN24
UN25
UN26
UN27
UN28
UN29
UN30
UN43
UN44
UN45
UN46
4-40
Name
Drum unit new/old detection PCB
Process unit relay PCB
Recycle toner sensor PCB
Y pre-exposure LED PCB (front)
Y pre-exposure LED PCB (rear)
M pre-exposure LED PCB (front)
M pre-exposure LED PCB (rear)
C pre-exposure LED PCB (front)
C pre-exposure LED PCB (rear)
Bk pre-exposure LED PCB (front)
Bk pre-exposure LED PCB (rear)
Developing sub bias PCB (Y)
Developing sub bias PCB (M)
Developing sub bias PCB (C)
Developing sub bias PCB (Bk)
Main Unit
Process Unit
Process Unit
Process Unit
Process Unit
Process Unit
Process Unit
Process Unit
Process Unit
Process Unit
Process Unit
Process Unit
Developing Assembly
Developing Assembly
Developing Assembly
Developing Assembly
Refarence
T-4-21
4-40
4-41
HDD
Riser PCB
DC controller
PCB (UN1)
Cassette feed
driver PCB (UN3)
Pickup feed
driver PCB (UN2)
AC driver
PCB (UN6)
AC sub driver
PCB (UN7)
All-night
power PCB (UN9)
12V power
supply PCB (UN11)
24V power
supply PCB 1 (UN8)
F-4-28
4-41
4-42
No.
UN1
UN2
UN3
UN4
UN5
UN6
Name
DC controller PCB
Pickup feed driver PCB
Cassette feed driver PCB
Drum driver PCB
Relay PCB
AC driver PCB
Electric
Electric
Electric
Electric
Electric
Electric
Main Unit
UN7
UN8
UN9
Electric
Electric
Electric
UN10
UN11
UN16
UN17
UN18
-
Electric
Electric
Electric
Electric
Electric
Electric
HDD
Riser PCB
Main controller PCB 2
Electric
Electric
Electric
Refarence
T-4-22
4-42
4-43
Conector
24
23
10
22
25
25
9
2
26
17
25
25
13
4
12
16
8
6
19
28
31
18
27
14
30
29
20
21
11
F-4-29
4-43
4-44
KeyNo.
J No.
Symbol
Parts Name
1
2
3
3
3
4
5
5
6
7
7
8
8
9
9
9
9
9
9
10
10
10
10
J102
J103
J104
J104
J104
J106
J107
J107
J109
J110
J110
J111
J111
J112
J112
J112
J112
J112
J112
J114
J114
J114
J114
UN1
UN1
UN1
UN1
UN1
UN1
UN1
UN1
UN1
UN1
UN1
UN1
UN1
UN1
UN1
UN1
UN1
UN1
UN1
UN1
UN1
UN1
UN1
DC controller PCB
DC controller PCB
DC controller PCB
DC controller PCB
DC controller PCB
DC controller PCB
DC controller PCB
DC controller PCB
DC controller PCB
DC controller PCB
DC controller PCB
DC controller PCB
DC controller PCB
DC controller PCB
DC controller PCB
DC controller PCB
DC controller PCB
DC controller PCB
DC controller PCB
DC controller PCB
DC controller PCB
DC controller PCB
DC controller PCB
Intermediate Connector
J5076
J5076
J5066
J5044
J5044
J5026
J5026
J5026
J5026
J5026
J5036
J5036
J5036
J5036
J5036
J5075
J5075
J5075
J5075
J5012
J5012
J5012
J5012
KeyNo.
J No.
Symbol
Parts Name
11
12
13
14
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
25
25
25
26
27
28
29
30
J822
J202
J1300
J810
J3002
J231
J201
J311
J313
J654
J653
J656
J655
J5061
J42
J42
J42
J42
J657
J863
J864
J853
J854
UN2
UN22
UN50
UN3
UN2
UN4
UN4
UN16
UN16
UN17
UN17
SW1
TH1
TH1
TH1
TH1
UN18
UN14
UN15
UN12
UN13
ECO-ID
Pickup feed driver PCB
Environment sensor 1
Environment sensor 2
Cassette feeding Unit-AD1
Cassette feed driver PCB
Pickup feed driver PCB
Drum driver PCB
Drum driver PCB
HVT 1 PCB
HVT 1 PCB
HVT 2 PCB
HVT 2 PCB
Main power supply switch
Main thermistor 1
Main thermistor 2
Sub thermistor 1
Sub thermistor 2
HVT 3 PCB
Laser driver PCB (Bk)
Laser driver PCB (C)
Laser driver PCB (M)
Laser driver PCB (Y)
T-4-23
4-44
4-45
34
33
35
19
24
21
20
31
32
15
16
14
1
3
30
11
13
12
6
5
10
4
9
25
18
17
F-4-30
4-45
4-46
KeyNo.
J No.
Symbol
Parts Name
1
1
2
2
3
4
5
5
5
6
7
8
8
9
9
10
11
11
12
12
12
J118
J118
J119
J119
J121
J122
J123
J123
J123
J124
J125
J126
J126
J127
J127
J132
J136
J136
J138
J138
J138
UN1
UN1
UN1
UN1
UN1
UN1
UN1
UN1
UN1
UN1
UN1
UN1
UN1
UN1
UN1
UN1
UN1
UN1
UN1
UN1
UN1
DC controller PCB
DC controller PCB
DC controller PCB
DC controller PCB
DC controller PCB
DC controller PCB
DC controller PCB
DC controller PCB
DC controller PCB
DC controller PCB
DC controller PCB
DC controller PCB
DC controller PCB
DC controller PCB
DC controller PCB
DC controller PCB
DC controller PCB
DC controller PCB
DC controller PCB
DC controller PCB
DC controller PCB
Intermediate Connector
J825
J825
J823
J823
J5028
J5028
J5028
J5045
J5071
J5071
J5037
J5053
J5053
J5031
J5031
J5031
J5068
J5068
J5068
KeyNo.
J No.
Symbol
Parts Name
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
24
25
30
31
32
33
34
35
J102
J203
J102
J203
J401
J402
J6087
J6086
J6085
J6084
J203
J815
J816
J809
J813
J5042
J2111
J2111
J6140
J6141
J6142
UN13
UN12
UN15
UN14
UN5
UN5
PS34
PS36
PS35
M21
UN2
SW3
SW4
M25
M24
M23
4-46
4-47
20
26
6
24
19
25
21
23
22
11
28
31
29
27
17
13
16
12
10 18
14
15
3
2
F-4-31
4-47
4-48
KeyNo.
J No.
Symbol
Parts Name
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
5
5
5
5
J204
J204
J204
J204
J204
J204
J205
J205
J205
J205
J205
J207
J207
J207
J210
J210
J210
J210
J210
J210
J210
J210
J212
J212
J212
J212
UN2
UN2
UN2
UN2
UN2
UN2
UN2
UN2
UN2
UN2
UN2
UN2
UN2
UN2
UN2
UN2
UN2
UN2
UN2
UN2
UN2
UN2
UN2
UN2
UN2
UN2
Intermediate Connector
J5003
J5003
J5003
J5003
J5003
J5003
J5050
J5050
J5050
J5050
J5050
J5048
J5048
J5048
J5032
J5032
J5032
J5032
J5032
J5032
J5032
J5032
J5028
J5028
J5028
J5028
J5109
J5110
J5051
J5051
J5051
J5051
J5051
J5046
J5046
J5046
J5108
J5097
J5097
J5106
J5106
J5106
J5054
J5099
J5099
J755
J755
J755
J755
J755
J5083
J5083
J601
J601
KeyNo.
J No.
Symbol
Parts Name
6
7
8
9
11
12
10
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
31
J6058
J6091
J6088
J6099
J6070
J6062
J900
J901
J600
J6111
J6110
J6108
J6107
J6106
J6076
J6075
J6074
J6073
J6065
J6089
J6090
J6092
J6077
J6081
J6171
J5100
M22
PS44
PS41
PS21
FM9
UN19
UN19
UN20
M26
UN21
UN49
UN48
UN47
PS40
PS43
SL7
SL6
SL5
PS42
PS39
PS45
PS38
UN52
PS47
PS19
4-48
4-49
14
13
12
33
10
11
20
32
31
26
17
30
34
24
18
15
19
21
7
9
22
23
16
29
27
25
F-4-32
4-49
4-50
KeyNo.
J No.
Symbol
Parts Name
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
3
3
4
4
4
4
5
5
5
5
5
5
6
6
6
6
6
J213
J213
J213
J213
J213
J213
J213
J213
J214
J214
J214
J215
J215
J216
J216
J216
J216
J217
J217
J217
J217
J217
J217
J218
J218
J218
J218
J218
UN2
UN2
UN2
UN2
UN2
UN2
UN2
UN2
UN2
UN2
UN2
UN2
UN2
UN2
UN2
UN2
UN2
UN2
UN2
UN2
UN2
UN2
UN2
UN2
UN2
UN2
UN2
UN2
Intermediate Connector
J5086
J5086
J5086
J6056
J6057
J5049
J5049
J5049
J5036
J5036
J5036
J5038
J5055
J5055
J5055
J5055
J5055
J5055
J5034
J5034
J5034
J5034
J5034
J5075
J5075
J5075
J5075
J5041
J5056
J5057
J5058
J5114
J5012
J5012
J5012
J5012
J5060
J5060
KeyNo.
J No.
Symbol
Parts Name
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
29
30
31
32
33
34
J6082
J6083
J6072
J6157
J6158
J6066
J6067
J5004
J6060
J6123
J6097
J6155
J6156
J6103
J6102
J6104
J6101
J5059
J6093
J6064
J6095
J6096
J6094
J6071
J6069
J6068
J6061
J6059
CL1
M18
SL4
M19
M20
FM1
FM2
PS20
M28
FM10
PS29
M16
M17
PS31
PS32
PS30
PS37
UN51
SL1
PS33
PS18
UN53
FM8
FM6
FM5
FM7
M27
4-50
4-51
16
19
25
23
24
22 21
13
17
14
15
20
10
11
12
4
5
F-4-33
4-51
4-52
KeyNo.
J No.
Symbol
Parts Name
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
J234
J234
J234
J234
J235
J235
J235
J235
J235
J235
J235
J235
J235
J235
J237
J237
J237
J237
J237
J237
J237
J237
UN3
UN3
UN3
UN3
UN3
UN3
UN3
UN3
UN3
UN3
UN3
UN3
UN3
UN3
UN3
UN3
UN3
UN3
UN3
UN3
UN3
UN3
Intermediate Connector
J5073
J5073
J5074
J5074
J5040
J5040
J5040
J5040
J5040
J5040
J5040
J5040
J5040
J5040
J5011
J5011
J5011
J5011
J5011
J5011
J5011
J5011
J5065
J5065
J5065
J5065
J5065
J5064
J5064
J5064
J5064
J5064
J5052
J5052
J5052
J5052
J5052
J5052
J5052
J5052
J5062
J5062
J5062
J5062
KeyNo.
J No.
Symbol
Parts Name
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
J6127
J6128
J6125
J6126
J6138
J6137
J6136
J6135
J6134
J6133
J6132
J6131
J6130
J6129
J5067
J6032
J6031
J6030
J6029
J6028
J6027
J6026
SW9
SW8
SW7
SW6
SL3
PS56
PS54
PS53
PS50
SL2
PS55
PS52
PS51
PS49
PS23
PS22
PS28
PS27
PS26
PS25
PS24
4-52
4-53
43
44
45
42
41
40
37
39
14
38
34
15
36
35
16
33
27
26
30
25
24
28
23
31
10
22
21
7
9
11
29
12
13
17
32
18
19
3
6
20
4
F-4-34
4-53
4-54
KeyNo.
J No.
Symbol
Parts Name
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
5
6
6
6
7
7
7
7
7
8
8
8
8
9
9
9
9
J303
J303
J303
J303
J304
J304
J304
J305
J305
J305
J305
J306
J306
J306
J306
J306
J306
J306
J306
J307
J308
J308
J308
J309
J309
J309
J309
J309
J310
J310
J310
J310
J312
J312
J312
J312
UN4
UN4
UN4
UN4
UN4
UN4
UN4
UN4
UN4
UN4
UN4
UN4
UN4
UN4
UN4
UN4
UN4
UN4
UN4
UN4
UN4
UN4
UN4
UN4
UN4
UN4
UN4
UN4
UN4
UN4
UN4
UN4
UN4
UN4
UN4
UN4
Intermediate Connector
J5078
J5078
J5078
J5027
J5027
J5027
J5070
J5070
J5070
J5079
J5079
J5079
J5079
J5079
J5015
J5018
J5021
J5024
J1180
J1181
J1182
J1184
J5029
J5029
J5029
J5029
J5029
J5016
J5019
J5022
J5025
J5030
J5030
J5030
J5030
KeyNo.
J No.
Symbol
Parts Name
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
J6008
J6007
J6006
J6005
J6004
J6003
J6025
J6011
J6012
J6013
J6015
J6024
J6023
J6022
J6021
J6020
J6019
J6018
J6017
J6010
J6009
J6014
J6016
J6053
J6052
J6050
J6048
J6046
J5017
J5020
J5023
J5035
J2
J5
J4
J3
CL5
CL4
CL3
CL2
M15
M14
M13
M8
M7
M6
M5
UN31
UN32
UN33
UN34
UN35
UN36
UN37
UN38
M1
M4
M3
M2
PS13
PS14
PS15
PS16
PS17
UN39
UN40
UN41
UN42
M9
M12
M11
M10
4-54
4-55
31
23
18
24
11
16
12
19
1
34
10
21
3
20
15
32
22
14
30
F-4-35
4-55
4-56
KeyNo.
J No.
Symbol
Parts Name
1
2
34
3
5
6
7
7
8
8
8
9
10
10
10
11
11
12
J411
J412
J426
J413
J422
J423
J424
J424
J425
J425
J425
J427
J428
J428
J428
J432
J432
J451
UN5
UN5
UN5
UN5
UN5
UN5
UN5
UN5
UN5
UN5
UN5
UN5
UN5
UN5
UN5
UN5
UN5
UN5
Relay PCB
Relay PCB
Relay PCB
Relay PCB
Relay PCB
Relay PCB
Relay PCB
Relay PCB
Relay PCB
Relay PCB
Relay PCB
Relay PCB
Relay PCB
Relay PCB
Relay PCB
Relay PCB
Relay PCB
Relay PCB
Intermediate Connector
J5043
J5081
J5080
KeyNo.
J No.
Symbol
Parts Name
14
15
16
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
30
31
32
J835
J834
J5101
J691
J129
J211
J301
J302
J650
J651
J652
J802
J804
J805
J803
J6122
J6124
J662
UN11
UN10
UN9
UN1
UN2
UN4
UN4
UN16
UN17
UN18
FM3
FM4
UN8
4-56
4-57
22
21
26
25
32
12
29
13
18
14
19
10
15
2
1
32
30
20
11
27
31
F-4-36
4-57
4-58
KeyNo.
J No.
Symbol
Parts Name
1
2
2
3
4
4
5
6
7
32
8
9
10
10
11
12
13
14
15
15
J1001
J1002
J1002
J1003
J1004
J1004
J1005
J1006
J1007
J1008
J1009
J1010
J1011
J1011
J1012
J2001
J2002
J2003
J1022
J1022
UN6
UN6
UN6
UN6
UN6
UN6
UN6
SW5
SW5
UN6
UN6
UN6
UN6
UN6
UN6
UN6
UN6
UN6
UN6
UN6
UN7
UN7
AC driver PCB
AC driver PCB
AC driver PCB
AC driver PCB
AC driver PCB
AC driver PCB
AC driver PCB
AC interlock switch
AC interlock switch
AC driver PCB
AC driver PCB
AC driver PCB
AC driver PCB
AC driver PCB
AC driver PCB
AC driver PCB
AC driver PCB
AC driver PCB
AC driver PCB
AC driver PCB
AC sub driver PCB
AC sub driver PCB
Intermediate Connector
J5006
J5087
J5012
J5007
J5006
J5006
J5087
J5010
J5012
J5007
J5038
J5077
J5077
KeyNo.
J No.
Symbol
Parts Name
18
19
20
21
22
32
25
26
27
29
30
31
J866
J833
J1021
J1020
J681
J5013
J5014
J5005
J5102
J5088
J5039
J431
J5002
J2020
J1102
J1101
SW5
UN7
UN7
UN9
H1
H1
TP1
SW1
H4
SW2
H3
H2
UN5
UN7
UN10
UN11
AC in cable
GND
GND
AC interlock switch
AC sub driver PCB
AC sub driver PCB
All-night power PCB
Fixing heater
Fixing heater
Temperature fuse
Main power supply switch
Cassette heater
Cassette Feeding Unit-AD1
Environment switch
Reader controll PCB
Drum heater (YMC)
Drum heater (Bk)
Cassette heater unit-31/32
Relay PCB
AC sub driver PCB
24V power supply PCB2
12V power supply PCB
T-4-30
4-58
4-59
13
14
12
10
9
5
8
2
11
4
F-4-37
KeyNo.
J No.
Symbol
Parts Name
1
2
2
3
4
5
5
6
J202
J204
J204
J205
J202
J204
J204
J205
UN12
UN12
UN12
UN12
UN14
UN14
UN14
UN14
Intermediate Connector
KeyNo.
J No.
Symbol
Parts Name
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
J103
J6159
J6160
J6161
J103
J6166
J6165
J6167
UN13
M32
M31
M29
UN15
M33
M34
M30
4-59
4-60
21
20
17
16
14
13
12
11
10
15
18
19
22
F-4-38
KeyNo.
J No.
Symbol
Parts Name
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
6
6
7
8
9
9
10
J902
J902
J903
J903
J904
J904
J905
J905
J601
J602
J602
J603
J604
J605
J605
J606
UN19
UN19
UN19
UN19
UN19
UN19
UN19
UN19
UN20
UN20
UN20
UN20
UN20
UN20
UN20
UN20
Intermediate Connector
J5093
J5094
J5095
J5096
KeyNo.
J No.
Symbol
Parts Name
11
11
12
12
13
13
14
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
J6114
J5093
J6116
J5094
J6118
J5095
J6120
J5096
J6115
J6147
J6148
J6117
J6119
J6149
J6150
J6121
TS5
UN43
TS6
UN44
TS7
UN45
TS8
UN46
UN23
UN24
UN26
UN25
UN27
UN28
UN30
UN29
4-60
4-61
18
17
14
13
10
9
6
5
4
2
20
3
16
12
8
19
15
11
F-4-39
KeyNo.
J No.
Symbol
Parts Name
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
4
4
4
4
J658
J658
J658
J658
J659
J659
J659
J659
J660
J660
J660
J660
J661
J661
J661
J661
UN39
UN39
UN39
UN39
UN40
UN40
UN40
UN40
UN41
UN41
UN41
UN41
UN42
UN42
UN42
UN42
Intermediate Connector
KeyNo.
J No.
Symbol
Parts Name
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
J6154
J6035
J6034
J6033
J6151
J6038
J6037
J6036
J6152
J6041
J6040
J6039
J6153
J6044
J6043
J6042
PS5
PS9
PS1
TS1
PS6
PS10
PS2
TS2
PS7
PS11
PS3
TS3
PS8
PS12
PS4
TS4
4-61
4
8
11
41
6
7
5
10
17
42
13
12
1
40
14
15
34
30
33
29
4-62
39
38
21
26
19
27
25
43
16
46
45
44
37
18
31
36
50
35
32
49
23
28
48
47
20
22
24
F-4-40
4-62
4-63
KeyNo.
J No.
Symbol
Parts Name
1
2
3
4
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
12
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
J1020
J1004
J1000
J1002
J1002
J1018
J1015
J1017
J1003
J1019
J1021
J1007
J1027
J1027
J1027
J1026
J1006
J1013
J1025
J1022
J11
J12
J13
J14
J16
J17
J18
J1000
J1010
J1010
J3003
JJ1xxx
J102
J104
J105
J107
J108
J109
J110
J111
Intermediate Connector
KeyNo.
J No.
Symbol
Parts Name
37
38
39
-
J103
J101
J6174
-
FM13
UN1
FM11
FM12
FM14
-
Flash PCB
DDR2-SDRAM (M1)
DDR2-SDRAM (M0)
Voice Operation (Option A)
Voice Guidance (Option B)
USB(D)
Controller fan 3
Ethernet
Operation part
Riser PCB
USB(H)
Device Port Hub (Option)
Card Reader IF kit Card Reader(Option A)
RS Conv (USA only)(Option B)
CC-VI I/F cable (TBD) (Option)
USB-FLASH (no use)
POSTPONE I/F (dealer only)
YON-RISER(PCI-Bridge) (option)
TPM
DDR2-SDRAM (M1)
DDR2-SDRAM (M0)
DDR2 DIMM (P)
Riser PCB
G3 FAX BOX (Option)
G3 FAX BOX (Option)
FRAM Counter
Image data analyzer PCB
Bypass PCB
EFI controller (option)
Reader controll PCB
Debug SRAM (debug only)
DC controller PCB
HDD
HDD
Controller fan 1
Controller fan 2
HDD cooling fan
SATA-Op
T-4-34
4-63
4-64
10
12
13
8
1
9
2
14
F-4-41
KeyNo.
J No.
Symbol
Parts Name
1
2
2
3
4
5
6
7
J1002
J1003
J1003
J1006
J1007
J1008
J1009
J4002
CPU PCB
CPU PCB
CPU PCB
CPU PCB
CPU PCB
CPU PCB
CPU PCB
Sub key PCB
Intermediate Connector
KeyNo.
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
J No.
Symbol
Parts Name
J4001
J9001
J2002
J1
J3002
J3001
J5001
Relay PCB
Sub key PCB
Inverter PCB
Hub PCB
LCD
Ten key PCB
Ten key PCB
Volume PCB
T-4-35
4-64
4-65
Main Controller
3) Remove the signal cable and the power cable from the HDD.
x2
How to remove
Signal cable
F-4-44
4) Insert the signal cable and the power cable into the hole of the Controller Box.
F-4-42
F-4-45
F-4-43
4-65
4-66
2 screws
4 screws
1 grounding plate
4 spacers
4 vibration-prevention dumpers
x2
HDD
x4
HDD fixing plate
Spacers
F-4-46
Vibration-prevention dumpers
F-4-48
Caution:
x2
At installation, install the grounding plate inside the [A] part of HDD Fixing Plate.
F-4-47
[A]
Grouding Plate
[A]
Grouding Plate
F-4-49
4-66
4-67
2) Remove the USB cable and the control panel communication cable.
Control panel
communication cable
USB cable
x2
x3
F-4-52
x2
Claw
F-4-50
How to remove
1) If the Reader is installed, remove the Reader Power Cable.
Grips
2 connectors
F-4-53
2 wire saddles
1 cable guide
x2
x2
Cable guide
Wire saddles
F-4-54
Connectors
F-4-51
MEMO:
If option PCB is installed, remove it.
4-67
4-68
Caution:
At installation, lift the grip, insert the Main Controller PCB 1 until it stops, then tilt the
grip and install it with 2 screws.
x2
2 screws
5 claws
Rubber cap
x2
Grips
Claws
x5
F-4-55
MEMO:
If the Reader Unit is installed, handle the reader power cable from the connector side,
make the cable slack in the upper area and install it.
x2
Rubber cap
F-4-57
x2
Cable guide
Wire saddles
Connectors
F-4-56
MEMO:
Make sure that the Main Controller PCB 1 is fixed to the device.
F-4-58
4-68
4-69
MEMO:
When the option PCB is installed, remove it.
1 screw
1 hook
Caution:
Hook
At installation, avoid the harness, hold the grip in raised condition, put the Main
Controller PCB 2 all the way in, tilt the grip, and install it.
x2
How to remove
F-4-59
Grip
MEMO:
Make sure that the Main Controller PCB 2 is fixed to the device.
F-4-60
x2
Grip
F-4-61
4-69
4-70
How to open
1) When the Reader is installed, remove the reader power cable.
2 connectors
2 wire saddles
1 cable guide
x2
2 screws
1 claw
x2
x2
Cable guide
Wire saddles
Connectors
F-4-63
Rubber caps
2 screws
x2
Rear cover
F-4-62
F-4-64
4-70
4-71
2-2) When the FAX Unit is installed, avoid the harness and open the Controller Box and the
FAX Unit.
3 screws
MEMO:
When replacing the DC Controller PCB, execute the following Service Mode to backup
the DC Controller PCB SRAM.
Execute COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM > DSRAMBUP (LEVEL2).
After ACTIVE is displayed for approx. 2 minutes, OK! is displayed.
After the above execution is completed, turn OFF the main power supply.
x3
F-4-65
3) Close the Controller Box while pressing the cable with afinger. Check that the cable is
stored when closeing the box.
How to remove
1) Remove the DC Controller PCB
28 connectors
7 screws
Cable
x28
x7
F-4-67
F-4-66
4-71
4-72
Caution:
There is a connector on the backside of the DC Controller PCB. When removing the DC
Controller PCB, be careful about the connecter.
Connector
2) Turn ON the main power supply and restore the DC Controller PCB SRAM.
Execute COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM > DSRAMRES (LEVEL2).
After the above execution, ACTIVE is displayed for approx. 2 minutes, then OK! is
displayed. Restoration is completed now.
F-4-68
x6
x5
Harness guides
F-4-69
4-72
4-73
How to remove
2 screws
1 screw
2 claws
2 hooks
x2
Claw
x2
Screw
Claw
Hook
F-4-71
Hook
1 wire saddle
2 screws
Wire saddle
x2
F-4-70
x2
Connector
Connector
Finisher laffice
connector unit
Screws
F-4-72
4-73
4-74
3 screws
Connectors
x3
x3
How to remove
1) Remove all the connector on the PCB and remove the AC Driver.
Screw
Screw
6 wire saddles
Screw
F-4-73
Wire saddles
15 connectors
5 wire saddles
Screw
AC Driver
x6
Connectors
x15
x13
12 Connectors
Screw
x3
x5
13 Connectors
Wire saddles
Screw
F-4-75
Wire saddles
Connector
Main power unit
Wire saddles
F-4-74
4-74
4-75
How to remove
1) Pull out the Control Panel and remove the mold.
Control panel
Mold
F-4-78
1 screw
Seal
Cover
x2
Stopper
F-4-79
F-4-77
4-75
4-76
x2
x2
Connector
Wire saddles
F-4-80
4-76
4-77
How to remove
F-4-81
How to Clean
F-4-83
1) Take out the Dust-blocking Cleaning Tool and clean the Dust-blocking Glass from the 4
Dust-blocking glass
cleaning tool
F-4-84
F-4-82
4-77
4-78
(If it is not aligned, adjust the arrow of lever to the triangle mark.)
Open the Front Cover, Right Lower Cover and Right Upper Cover.
Triangle mark
Triangle mark
F-4-87
F-4-85
2) Turn the ITB Pressure Release Lever in the right direction until the protrusion of grip is
aligned with the triangle mark on the plate to release the pressure.
2 screws (loosen)
Caution:
When installing the ITB Cover, be sure to push it to the left. If the pushing is
insufficient, the plate is not inserted to the slit of the ITB Cover, which may cause the
damage of the sensor.
Caution:
Before operating the ITB Pressure Release Lever, check that the Right Lower Cover is
open.
4-78
4-79
Caution:
When pulling out the ITB Unit, it may drop because it does not click at stop position if
pulled out while lifting it. Thus, be careful of pulling it out.
x2
F-4-90
F-4-89
4) Pull out the ITB Unit up to the stop label position flatly.
2 screws
Caution:
When pulling out the ITB Unit, be sure not to lower the ITB Pressure Release Lever
below the position where clicky sense is felt. If the ITB Unit is pulled out while the lever
is lowered, the ITB is scraped by the Plate and this may cause to make scratches on
the ITB surface.
x2
Stop label position
ITB pressure
release lever
F-4-91
Click position
Not to lower the ITB Pressure Releace Lever
below the position where clicky sense is felt.
4-79
4-80
5) Hold the ITB Unit as show in the below figure, and remove in the direction of the arrow
x4
F-4-92
Caution:
When installing the ITB Unit, align the ITB Unit with the 2 positions at the lead edge of
rail.
Rails
F-4-94
2) Hold the front and rear of Process Unit and remove it flatly.
ITB unit
F-4-93
F-4-95
4-80
4-81
3) Place the paper onto the Process Unit to protect the Drum Unit from the light.
How to remove
Paper
Caution:
When Replacing the Laser Scanner Unit
When removing the Laser Scanner Unit, be sure to check the serial numbers affixed on
both units and installation position of the units before operation.
Before installing the units, be sure to see the foregoing serial numbers and install each
unit to the original position.
If the unit is installed reversely, the image displacement might occur.
F-4-96
Memo:
This procedure describes the removal of Bk,C Laser Scanner Unit. Go through the
same procedure for removing the M,Y Laser Scanner Unit.
F-4-97
Screw
F-4-98
4-81
4-82
1 screw
2 screws
1 claw
x2
F-4-101
F-4-99
Memo:
When removing the Laser Scanner Unit 1 (Y/M laser),
3) Remove the Left Upper Cover.
Fixing spring
5 rubber caps
5 screws
Screw
F-4-102
3 hooks
4 connectors
5 claws
Left upper cover
Connectors
x5
x5
x3
Claws
x2
x2
Claws
F-4-103
Rubber caps
F-4-100
4-82
4-83
Caution:
Since the Laser Scanner Unit needs adjustment, do not disassemble it.
Caution:
At installation, push the protrusion of Laser Scanner Unit into the hole of rear plate and
adjust the front boss with the plate hole and install it.
Protrusion
Hole
Protrusion
Boss
Caution:
At installation, pass the harness through the Sheet Guide and install it.
Sheet guide
Sheet guide
4-83
4-84
Open the Front Cover, Right Lower Cover and Right Upper Cover
How to remove
1) Remove the Toner Filter Cover.
1 claw
Claw
F-4-106
Toner filter
Fan protection plate
F-4-107
CAUTION:
Do not touch the ITB surface.
F-4-105
When installing the ITB Cover, be sure to push it to the left. If the pushing is
insufficient, the plate is not inserted to the slit of the ITB Cover, which may cause the
damage of the sensor.
4-84
4-85
How to remove
1) Check that the arrow of ITB Sub Pressure Release Lever is aligned with the triangle mark.
(If it is not aligned, adjust the arrow of lever to the triangle mark.)
Triangle mark
x2
Triangle mark
F-4-110
CAUTION:
F-4-108
2) Turn the ITB Pressure Release Lever in the arrow direction until the protrusion of grip is
aligned with the triangle mark on the plate to release the pressure.
When pulling out the ITB Unit, be sure not to lower the ITB Pressure Release Lever
below the position where clicky sense is felt. If the ITB Unit is pulled out while the lever
is lowered, the ITB is scraped by the Plate and this may cause to make scratches on
the ITB surface.
ITB pressure
release lever
Click position
Not to lower the ITB Pressure Releace Lever
below the position where clicky sense is felt.
CAUTION:
Before operating the ITB Pressure Release Lever, check that the Right Lower Cover is
open.
4-85
4-86
5) Hold the ITB Unit as show in the below figure, and remove in the direction of the arrow
CAUTION:
When pulling out the ITB Unit, it may drop because it does not click at stop position if
pulled out while lifting it. Thus, be careful of pulling it out.
F-4-112
4) Pull out the ITB Unit up to the stop label position flatly.
CAUTION:
2 screws
When installing the ITB Unit, align the ITB Unit with the 2 positions at the lead edge of
rail.
x2
Rails
F-4-111
ITB unit
6) To execute the ITB Equilibrium Position Detection, make the main body in standby state.
7) Execute the ITB Equilibrium Position Detection Service Mode (COPIER>FUNCTION>MISCP>ITB-INIT) (Level 1). This service mode will take approx. 2 to 3 minutes.
4-86
4-87
Open the Front Cover, Right Lower Cover and Right Upper Cover
Open the Front Cover, Right Lower Cover and Right Upper Cover
How to Clean
1) While pushing the shutter, clean the surface of Patch Sensor with a cotton swab moistened
with water and tightly wrung by wiping it in one direction. After cleaning, make sure that
there is no toner contamination on the sensor surface..
How to remove
1) Release the hook and remove the Shutter of the sensor.
2 Claws
CAUTION:
Shutter
Do not use the alcohol since it melts the sensor window and causes while turbidity.
CAUTION:
Do not dry-wipe it since the sensor window is charged and attracts the toner.
Claw
Patch sensor
Hook
F-4-114
4-87
4-88
2)Remove the Pre-secondary Transfer Guide. Be sure not to put too much force on the Presecondary Transfer Guide when removing it.
4) Remove the Wire Saddle, Reuse band, and Edge Saddle to make the Sensor Assembly
moving freely.
2 screws
2 Wire Saddles
1 Reuse Band
1 Edge Saddle
Secondary Transfer Guide
Grounding Cable
Edge Saddle
Wire Saddle
Reuse Band
F-4-115
F-4-117
4 bosses
Boss
F-4-116
Connector
F-4-118
MEMO:
When replace the Patch Senosor (center),Initialization of Patch sensor (center) is
necessary
COPIER > OPTION > IMG-MCON > P-ALPHA Input Patch Sensor alpha value
4-88
4-89
How to remove
CAUTION:
When removing/installing it, do not contact the ITB Cleaning Unit to the ITB.
F-4-120
3) To execute the ITB Equilibrium Position Detection, make the main body in standby state.
4) Execute the ITB Equilibrium Position Detection Service Mode (COPIER>FUNCTION>MISCP>ITB-INIT) (Level 1). This service mode will take approx. 2 to 3 minutes.
1) Hold the left and right grip and remove the ITB Cleaning Unit in the direction of the arrow.
2 screws
x2
F-4-119
4-89
4-90
Open the Front Cover, Right Lower Cover and Right Upper Cover
How to Install
CAUTION:
How to remove
1) Remove the ITB Cleaning Blade Unit and put it on the paper.
1 screw
F-4-121
MEMO:
Hold the screw area of 2 screws on the ITB Cleaning Blade Unit so that it is easy to
remove.
1) Insert an A4 size paper between the Blade Unit installation position of the ITB Cleaning
Unit and the sheet.
Paper
Sheet
F-4-122
4-90
4-91
2) Check that the Blade Alignment Plate is installed, and then install the ITB Cleaning Blade
Unit.At this time, be sure to move the paper inserted in step 1 toward the direction shown in
3) While paying attention not to bend the Protection Sheet, lift the sheet using a screwdriver.
After that, check that the sheet that is being lifted is above the pad.
the figure to prevent the sheet from flipping before the installation.
F-4-123
Paper
Sheet
F-4-124
F-4-125
4-91
4-92
4) After installing the ITB Cleaning Unit to the ITB Unit, apply tospearl on the whole area
indicated in the figure below.
D-CON: Ver.18.01
Open the Front Cover, Right Lower Cover and Right Upper Cover
Remove the ITB Cover
Remove the ITB Unit
Remove the ITB Cleaning Unit
CAUTION:
Do not tough the surface of ITB. (If needed, hold the ITB within 10mm from both edge
of the belt.)
F-4-126
How to remove
CAUTION:
When applying tospearl, be careful not to scatter it on inside of the ITB, the Drive Roller
and the Secondary Transfer Inner Roller.
If it is scattered on inside of the ITB, the Drive Roller or the Secondary Transfer Inner
Roller, wipe it with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol while rotating the motor by
hand. At this time, turn the motor counterclockwise and do not turn it clockwise.
5) To execute the ITB Equilibrium Position Detection, make the main body in standby state.
6) Execute the ITB Equilibrium Position Detection Service Mode (COPIER>FUNCTION>MISCP>ITB-INIT) (Level 1). This service mode will take approx. 2 to 3 minutes.
F-4-127
4-92
4-93
3 wire saddles
CAUTION:
1 edge saddle
Make sure that it is removed from the front and rear hooks.
Make sure to align the claw of the ITB Cover with the cut-off of protection sheet.
x4
2 claws
x2
F-4-128
Hooks
ITB cover
Claw
Claws
F-4-130
F-4-129
MEMO:
Place the ITB cover upside down on the place where the ITB Unit will be stood.
4-93
4-94
9) Insert papers as shown in the figure to prevent the ITB getting damage by the plate when
removing the ITB.
MEMO:
To lock the pressure, pull out the pin while holding the ITB Unit with hand.
1 screw
F-4-133
10)Hold the ITB within 10mm from the edge and remove it upward.
F-4-131
10mm
8) Bend the Secondary Transfer Inner Roller Unit by 90 degree and reinstall it with the pin
removed in step 7).
10mm
F-4-134
F-4-132
4-94
4
CAUTION: Do not touch the surface of ITB Drive Roller, Secondary Transfer Inner
Roller and Primary Transfer Roller as it may cause the image failure.
4-95
How to remove
CAUTION:
Do not touch the surface of Drive Roller, Secondary Transfer Inner Roller and Primary
Transfer Roller as it may cause the image failure.
CAUTION: When replacing ITB with a new one, affix the label to the specific position
near the Waste Toner Ejection Mouth of the ITB Cleaning Unit after the ITB Unit is
installed.
When affixing the new label, be sure to remove the old label and replace with the new
one on the same position.
4-95
4-96
1) Pull out the pin, make the Secondary Transfer Inner Roller Unit straight and install the
3) While holding the front bushing, pinch the claw and remove the Disengagement/
removed pin.
Engagement Arm.
Bushing
Stopper
F-4-137
F-4-135
2) Remove the ITB Unit from the ITB Cover and place it onto the paper in the position where
the roller is placed upside.
2 claws
ITB unit
x2
Bushing
Spring
Claws
ITB cover
Paper
F-4-136
F-4-138
MEMO:
There is no particular direction for the Primary Transfer Roller installation.
4-96
4-97
CAUTION:
Wind paper on the Primary Transfer Roller (Bk) and without touching the surface of the
roller.
Do not touch the roller surface.
How to remove
Paper
MEMO:
This procedure describes the steps for Primary Transfer Roller (C). Go through the
same procedure for M and Y.
CAUTION:
CAUTION:
Hold the stopper with finger lightly after installation to check that the claw is surely
installed.
Do not touch the surface of Drive Roller, Secondary Transfer Inner Roller and Primary
Transfer Roller as it may cause the image failure.
5) To execute the ITB Equilibrium Position Detection, make the main body in standby state.
6) Execute the ITB Equilibrium Position Detection Service Mode (COPIER>FUNCTION>MISCP>ITB-INIT) (Level 1). This service mode will take approx. 2 to 3 minutes.
4-97
4-98
1) Pull out the pin, make the Secondary Transfer Inner Roller Unit straight and install the
4) While holding the front bushing, pinch the claw and remove the Disengagement/
removed pin.
Engagement Arm.
Disengagement/
engagement arm
Claw
Boss
Bushing
F-4-142
F-4-139
5) While holding the bushing, remove the stopper from the boss.
2) Remove the ITB Unit from the ITB Cover and place it onto the paper.
2 claws
Boss
ITB unit
Stopper
x2
Claws
Bushing
ITB cover
Paper
F-4-140
3) Turn the ITB Sub Pressure Release Lever to make the Primary Transfer Roller (C,M,Y)
lifted.
F-4-143
4-98
4-99
Bushing
CAUTION:
Spring
After installing the Primary Transfer Roller (C,M,Y), turn the ITB Sub Pressure Release
Lever to make sure that the Primary Transfer Roller (C,M,Y) moves up and down.
After checking, be sure to make the Primary Transfer Roller (C,M,Y) lowered position.
Primary transfer roller (C) Primary transfer roller (M)
F-4-144
MEMO:
There is no particular direction for the Primary Transfer Roller installation.
ITB sub pressure release lever
CAUTION:
Wind paper on the Primary Transfer Roller (C) and without touching the surface of the
roller.
Do not touch the roller surface.
7) To execute the ITB Equilibrium Position Detection, make the main body in standby state.
8) Execute the ITB Equilibrium Position Detection Service Mode (COPIER>FUNCTION>MISCP>ITB-INIT) (Level 1). This service mode will take approx. 2 to 3 minutes.
Paper
4-99
4-100
1) Pull out the pin, make the Secondary Transfer Inner Roller Unit straight and install the
removed pin.
Open the Front Cover, Right Lower Cover and Right Upper Cover
Remove the ITB Cover
Remove the ITB Unit
Remove the ITB Cleaning Unit
How to remove
CAUTION:
Do not touch the surface of Drive Roller, Secondary Transfer Inner Roller and Primary
Transfer Roller as it may cause the image failure.
F-4-146
2) Remove the ITB Unit from the ITB Cover and place it onto the paper in the position where
the roller side faces up.
2 claws
ITB unit
x2
Claws
F-4-145
ITB cover
Paper
F-4-147
4-100
4-101
3) Remove the Grounding Plate and the Secondary Transfer Bearing Holder.
CAUTION:
1 screw
Be careful of the installation direction when installing the Secondary Transfer Inner
Roller.
Grounding plate
Secondary transfer
bearing holder
F-4-148
5) To execute the ITB Equilibrium Position Detection, make the main body in standby state.
6) Execute the ITB Equilibrium Position Detection Service Mode (COPIER>FUNCTION>MISCP>ITB-INIT) (Level 1). This service mode will take approx. 2 to 3 minutes.
F-4-149
4-101
4-102
4) Remove the pin, and move the Secondary Transfer Inner Roller Unit toward the [2] direction
to take up the slack of the belt.
How to reinstall
1) Check that the ITB Sub Pressure Release Lever is in the below position.
F-4-152
5) Put the ITB under the Belt Retainer Sheet, bring the ITB Displacement Sensor Flag into
contact with the ITB edge, and then, align the marking line with the position of the ITB.
Marking Line
x2
ITB cover
F-4-153
Claw
Claws
F-4-151
3) Place papers on the ITB Cover to prevent bending of the ITB because pressure is applied
to a point when installing the ITB.
4-102
4-103
7) Remove the ITB Unit from the ITB Cover and install it to the plate.
CAUTION:
When installing the ITB, be sure that the Plastic Film on the ITB Unit is inside of the
ITB.
2 claws
x2
F-4-155
6) Return the Secondary Transfer Inner Roller Unit to straight, and then install the pin
removed
1 screw
F-4-156
F-4-154
4-103
4-104
9) Push the ITB Pressure Release Lever and install the Bush Slider to the boss.
1 stop ring
CAUTION:
Make sure that the shaft is fixed to the fixing member.
F-4-157
CAUTION:
Make sure that there is no gap between the ITB Pressure Release Lever and the Plate.
CAUTION:
Make sure that the hook is fixed to the plate.
space
4-104
4-105
CAUTION:
CAUTION:
When replacing ITB with a new one, after installing the ITB Cleaning Unit to the ITB
Unit, apply tospearl on the whole area indicated in the figure below.
When replacing ITB with a new one, affix the label to the specific position near the
Waste Toner Ejection Mouth of the ITB Cleaning Unit after the ITB Unit is installed.
When affixing the new label, be sure to remove the old label and replace with the new
one on the same position.
When applying tospearl, be careful not to scatter it on inside of the ITB, the Drive Roller
and the Secondary Transfer Inner Roller.
If it is scattered on inside of the ITB, the Drive Roller or the Secondary Transfer Inner
Roller, wipe it with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol while rotating the motor by
hand. At this time, turn the motor counterclockwise and do not turn it clockwise.
4-105
4-106
Open the Front Cover, Right Lower Cover and Right Upper Cover
Remove the ITB Cover
How to remove
How to remove
1) Make sure that the arrow of ITB Sub Pressure Release Lever is aligned with the triangle
mark of the plate.
(If it is not aligned, align the arrow of lever with the triangle mark of plate.)
Triangle mark
Triangle mark
F-4-158
F-4-160
F-4-159
CAUTION:
Do not tilt the Recycle Toner Bottle.
(Because it may cause misdetection on the Full Detection Sensor.)
4-106
4-107
2) Turn the ITB Pressure Release Lever in the right direction and release the pressure.
4) Place the paper onto the Process Unit to protect the Drum Unit from the light.
CAUTION:
Paper
When releasing the pressure of ITB Pressure Release Lever, make sure that the
protrusion of grip is aligned with the triangle mark of plate.
F-4-163
x2
F-4-162
4-107
4-108
3) Place the paper onto the Process Unit to protect the Drum Unit from the light.
Paper
How to remove
CAUTION:
When installing/removing the Process Unit, do not remove the Recycle Toner Bottle.
F-4-166
x4
F-4-167
F-4-164
2) Hold the front and rear of Process Unit and remove it flatly.
NOTE:
When installing the Process Unit, if the Dustproof Shutter is opened and blocks to install
the unit, turn ON and then OFF the power. Be sure to check that the Dustproof Shutter
is closed before installation.
F-4-165
4-108
4-109
3) Install the right and left rails and the Process Unit with 4 stepped screws.
x4
Open the Front Cover, Right Lower Cover and Right Upper Cover
Remove the ITB Cover
Pull out the Process Unit
Remove the Process Unit
How to reinstall
1) Pull out the 2 rails of Process Unit from the host machine.
F-4-170
CAUTION:
Make sure that there is no gap [A] between the host machine and the Process Unit and
fix it with the screw.
F-4-168
2) Align the 4 protrusions of Process Unit with the positioning pin of rail and install it.
Protrusions of process unit
[A]
[A]
F-4-171
Positioning pins
Positioning pins
F-4-169
4-109
4-110
4) Slowly take the Process Unit back to the host machine and fix it with 2 screws.
5) Turn the ITB Pressure Release Lever in the left direction to apply the pressure.
CAUTION:
When applying the pressure of ITB Pressure Release Lever, make sure that the
protrusion of grip is aligned with the lower triangle mark of plate.
x2
F-4-172
CAUTION:
After closing the Process Unit, hold the edge of each Drum Unit from above as
described below. If the Drum Unit is not secured, it may cause the color displacement.
F-4-174
F-4-173
F-4-175
4-110
4-111
CAUTION:
When removing the Drum Unit, do not pull it out from one handle.
Open the Front Cover, Right Lower Cover and Right Upper Cover
Remove the ITB Cover
Pull out the Process Unit
How to remove
CAUTION:
Do not touch the drum surface.
1)Hold the grip with both hands, press the Drum Unit against the Developing Assembly and
pull it out vertically.
F-4-177
Grips
F-4-176
4-111
4-112
CAUTION:
When installing it at an angle, the shutter may be damaged. Thus, make sure to install it
from directly above.
Open the Front Cover, Right Lower Cover and Right Upper Cover
Remove the ITB Cover
Pull out the Process Unit
Remove the Drum Unit
How to reinstall
CAUTION:
Do not touch the drum surface.
1) Hold the grip and install it from the top vertically.
F-4-179
2) Align the guide of Process Unit with the guide of Drum Unit and install the Drum Unit.
Guide of
drum unit
Guide of
process unit
Guide of
drum unit
Grips
F-4-178
CAUTION:
Since the rail may be broken, make sure that the shutter is surely slid on the rail.
Shutter
Shutter
Rail
Rail
F-4-181
4-112
4-113
MEMO:
When installing the Drum Unit (Bk) to the host machine, perform the following
procedures.
2-2) While the paper is set, install the Drum Unit (Bk) to the host machine.
Drum Unit (BK)
2-1) Place the half fold paper included in the packaging box on the Developing Assembly
(Bk).Be sure to set the edge of half fold paper over the Toner Collecting Sheet of the
Developing Assembly.
2-3) Hold the folded portion and pull this paper out to the direction F-4-183
of arrow
3) Hold the grip part (8 places) with finger lightly and make sure that the Drum Unit is securely
installed.
F-4-184
4-113
4-114
How to remove
MEMO:
This procedure describes the removal of Bk Developing Assembly. Go through the
same procedure for removing the Y,M,C Developing Assembly.
F-4-186
3) While pulling out the stopper, remove the Developing Assembly upward.
Developing assembly
Stopper
CAUTION:
When installing/removing it, do not touch the Developing Sleeve.
CAUTION:
When installing/removing the Developing Assembly, be sure to remove the Recycle
Toner Bottle.
1) Remove the harness from the 2 harness guides and remove the connector.
x2
F-4-187
CAUTION:
Make sure to insert the 2 pins of stopper into the 2 holes of Developing Assembly and
install it.
Harness
Harness guides
Connector
F-4-185
F-4-188
4-114
4
MEMO :
Initialization of Developing Assembly (toner ratio and patch) is necessary and it differs
depending on the color.
If 4 colors are replaced simultaneously, execute INISET-4.
COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > INISET-Y Initialization of Y Developing Assembly
(toner ratio and patch)
COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > INISET-M Initialization of M Developing Assembly
(toner ratio and patch)
COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > INISET-C Initialization of C Developing Assembly
(toner ratio and patch)
COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > INISET-K Initialization of Bk Developing Assembly
(toner ratio and patch)
COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > INISET-4 Initialization of 4-colors Developing
Assembly (toner ratio and patch)
4-115
How to install
1) Install the Developing Assembly to the Process Unit in the reverse procedure of Removing
the Developing Assembly.
2) While holding the Developing Assembly with one hand, pull out the developing seal straight
up with other hand.
Perform this procedure for each color.
F-4-189
4-115
4-116
CAUTION:
CAUTION:
When removing the Seal on the Developing Assembly, be sure to lift it slowly and
vertically. If lifting it in an oblique direction, the Seal on the Developing Assembly is
stressed, and may cause tear of the seal
If the Seal on the Developing Assembly is torn, remove the torn seal by pulling the end
of it in the direction of the arrow. At that time, be careful not to leave the torn sheet in
the Developing Assembly.
Rear side
Seal
Seal
Front side
F-4-190
F-4-191
3) By following installing the Drum Unit, install the each color Drum Unit.
4) Be sure to hold the upper side of each Developing Assembly when removing the seal.
Otherwise the cover will be off from its position.
F-4-192
4-116
4
MEMO :
Initialization of Developing Assembly (toner ratio and patch) is necessary and it differs
depending on the color.
If 4 colors are replaced simultaneously, execute INISET-4.
COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > INISET-Y Initialization of Y Developing Assembly
(toner ratio and patch)
COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > INISET-M Initialization of M Developing Assembly
(toner ratio and patch)
COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > INISET-C Initialization of C Developing Assembly
(toner ratio and patch)
COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > INISET-K Initialization of Bk Developing Assembly
(toner ratio and patch)
COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > INISET-4 Initialization of 4-colors Developing
Assembly (toner ratio and patch)
4-117
How to remove
CAUTION:
Do not touch the surface of Secondary Transfer Outer Roller.
F-4-193
1) Place the paper to put the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller Unit.
2) Remove the rear stopper.
1 claw
F-4-194
4-117
4-118
3) Pinch the claws on both sides of bearing holder and remove the Secondary Transfer Outer
Roller Unit.
4 claws
2 bearings
x4
Bearing
Bearing holder
Bearing
Bearing holder
F-4-195
Secondary transfer
outer roller
F-4-197
Spring
Bushing
Secondary transfer
separation guide unit
F-4-196
4-118
4-119
2) Fit the protrusion with the groove of the guide and install the bushing.
3) Install the spring onto both side of protrusion.
Spring
How to remove
Protrusion
F-4-199
CAUTION:
Do not touch the surface of Secondary Transfer Outer Roller.
1) Fit the side with longer shaft to the hole of Secondary Transfer Separation Guide Unit and
install the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller.
Shorter shaft
Longer shaft
Hole
F-4-198
CAUTION:
After installing the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller, make sure that the bearing holder
can rotate.
4-119
4-120
CAUTION:
Make sure that the spring on the Duplex Unit side is not skewed.
x3
F-4-200
4) Fit the spring on the Duplex Unit to the protrusion on the bearing holder of Secondary
Transfer Outer Roller Unit and install it one after other.
Claw
F-4-202
x2
F-4-201
Claws
x5
Rubber cap
F-4-203
4-120
4-121
1 connector
3 rubber caps
3 screws
1 claw
x2
Rubber caps
Claw
F-4-204
Rear cover
1 hook
F-4-206
Hook
x2
Left rear sub cover
x2
Cable guide
F-4-205
Wire saddles
Connectors
F-4-207
4-121
4-122
How to remove
MEMO:
This procedure describes the procedure of Toner Bottle (Bk). Go through the same
procedure for Toner Bottle (C,M,Y).
x2
2-2) When the FAX Unit is installed, avoid the harness and open the Controller Box and
the FAX Unit.
3 screws
x3
F-4-210
F-4-209
F-4-211
4-122
4-123
F-4-212
CAUTION:
At installation, make sure to insert the Toner Container all the way in and close the
small cover.
F-4-214
x6
x5
Harness guides
F-4-215
4-123
4-124
How to remove
2 screws
5 rubber caps
2 claws
5 screws
2 hooks
x5
x2
Claw
x2
Claw
Hook
Rubber caps
F-4-217
2) When the FAX Unit is installed, open the Controller Box and the FAX Unit while avoiding
Hook
the harness.
3 screws
x3
Harness
F-4-216
F-4-218
4-124
4-125
2 screws
2 screws
HVT PCB
x2
x2
F-4-221
F-4-219
6) Pull out the harness of Laser Scanner and make a space by hooking the claw of harness
guide.
3 screws
1 edge saddle
1 claw
x3
Harness
Edge saddle
Claw
F-4-222
4-125
4-126
9) Remove all the red connectors from the Drum Driver PCB.
2 screws
10 connectors
1 connector
10 wire saddles
1 claw
Wire saddles
Wire saddles
x10
Claw
Connectors
Wire saddles
x10
x2
Connectors
Wire saddle
Wire saddles
Connector
Connectors
Fan duct
F-4-225
F-4-223
2 connectors
8 connectors
6 screws
Connectors
Connectors
x2
x8
x6
Connectors
F-4-224
F-4-226
4-126
4-127
1 screw (P tight)
1 screw (RS)
How to remove
1) Remove the Front Right Cover.
1 rubber cap
1 screw (remove)
x2
1 screw (loosen)
Loosen
Rubber cap
Front right cover
F-4-227
F-4-229
4-127
4-128
x4
Connector
F-4-230
Wire saddle
F-4-233
F-4-231
F-4-232
4-128
4-129
CAUTION:
If it is placed sideways, toner may scatter inside the Hopper and it may cause the
operation failure. Thus, stand and put the Hopper Unit on the paper.
How to remove
1) Remove the Toner Tray.
1 screw (M4 binding)
Paper
F-4-236
CAUTION:
When installing the Hopper, align the cut-off [A] part of Bottle Fixing Ring with the Bottle
Fixing Arm [B] and install it to the host machine.
F-4-234
x2
x3
[A]
Hopper Unit
[B]
F-4-237
Wire saddle
Duct sheet
F-4-235
4-129
4-130
CAUTION:
When installing the Toner Tray, align the Rod Lever with the Toner Cover Open/Close
Rod Lever and install it.
Toner cover Open/Close rod lever
Rod lever
How to remove
1) Remove the Toner Tray.
1 screw (M4 binding)
F-4-238
CAUTION:
When installing the removed Toner Container, be sure not to shake it.
CAUTION:
When the Main Drive Unit is removed simultaneously, make sure to install the Main
Drive Unit first and then, the Hopper Unit in order. Otherwise, toner supply failure may
occur.
F-4-239
CAUTION:
When replacing the Developing Assembly, make sure to initialize before installing the
Toner Container
COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > INISET-M
If install the Toner Container before initialization, T/D ratio cannot set the right value.
5 claws
Crows
x5
x5
Crow
Crows
F-4-240
4-130
4-131
CAUTION:
2 screws
If it is placed sideways, toner may scatter inside the Hopper and it may cause the
operation failure. Thus, stand and put the Hopper Unit on the paper.
x2
F-4-241
Paper
5 screws (RS)
F-4-243
Hopper Unit
x3
Connector
Wire saddle
x2
CAUTION:
When installing the Hopper, align the cut-off [A] part of Bottle Fixing Ring with the Bottle
Fixing Arm [B] and install it to the host machine.
Duct sheet
F-4-242
[A]
[B]
F-4-244
4-131
4-132
CAUTION:
When installing the Toner Tray, align the Rod Lever with the Toner Cover Open/Close
Rod Lever and install it.
Toner cover Open/Close rod lever
Rod lever
How to remove
1) Remove the Reverse Tray.
2) Remove the Inside Rear Cover 1 & 2.
3 caps
3 screws (RS)
F-4-245
x3
CAUTION:
When installing the removed Toner Container, be sure not to shake it.
CAUTION:
When the Main Drive Unit is removed simultaneously, make sure to install the Main
Drive Unit first and then, the Hopper Unit in order. Otherwise, toner supply failure may
occur.
CAUTION:
When replacing the Developing Assembly, make sure to initialize before installing the
Toner Container
COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > INISET-Y
If install the Toner Container before initialization, T/D ratio cannot set the right value.
2 screws (RS)
x2
F-4-247
4-132
4-133
3 screws (RS)
x3
F-4-251
F-4-248
2 screws (P tight)
1 connector
1 wire saddle
5 screws (RS)
x2
Hopper Unit
x3
x2
Connector
Wire saddle
Duct sheet
F-4-249
F-4-252
x4
F-4-250
4-133
4-134
CAUTION:
CAUTION:
If the Hopper Unit is placed sideways, toner may scatter inside the Hopper and it may
cause the operation failure. Thus, stand and put the Hopper Unit on the paper.
When installing the Toner Tray, align the Rod Lever with the Toner Cover Open/Close
Rod Lever and install it.
Toner cover Open/Close rod lever
Rod lever
F-4-255
Paper
F-4-253
CAUTION:
When installing the removed Toner Container, be sure not to shake it.
CAUTION:
When installing the Hopper, align the cut-off [A] part of Bottle Fixing Ring with the Bottle
Fixing Arm [B] and install it to the host machine.
CAUTION:
When the Main Drive Unit is removed simultaneously, make sure to install the Main
Drive Unit first and then, the Hopper Unit in order. Otherwise, toner supply failure may
occur.
CAUTION:
When replacing the Developing Assembly, make sure to initialize before installing the
Toner Container
[A]
[B]
F-4-254
4-134
4-135
x2
How to remove
1) Remove the Harness from the Fixing Guide.
F-4-258
Harness
1 wire saddle
6 screws (RS)
3 fixing guides
Guide
x4
F-4-256
x2
Connector
Wire saddle
x3
Fixed guide
x3
F-4-257
4-135
4-136
CAUTION:
CAUTION:
If the Hopper Unit is placed sideways, toner may scatter inside the Hopper and it may
cause the operation failure. Thus, stand and put the Hopper Unit on the paper.
When installing the Toner Tray, align the Rod Lever with the Toner Cover Open/Close
Rod Lever and install it.
Toner cover Open/Close rod lever
Rod lever
F-4-262
Paper
F-4-260
CAUTION:
When installing the removed Toner Container, be sure not to shake it.
CAUTION:
When installing the Hopper, align the cut-off [A] part of Bottle Fixing Ring with the Bottle
Fixing Arm [B] and install it to the host machine.
CAUTION:
When the Main Drive Unit is removed simultaneously, make sure to install the Main
Drive Unit first and then, the Hopper Unit in order. Otherwise, toner supply failure may
occur.
CAUTION:
When replacing the Developing Assembly, make sure to initialize before installing the
Toner Container
[A]
[B]
F-4-261
4-136
4-137
Fixing System
Tabs
F-4-265
F-4-263
How to Remove
1) Open the Fixing Rail and loosen the 4 screws.
Loosen
the screws
F-4-266
Loosen
the screws
Caution:
Be sure to insert the Fixing Assembly until it stops at the time of installation.
In case of the faulty installation of the Fixing Assembly, either E009 or noise may occur.
Fixing Rail
4-137
4-138
x4
How to Remove
MEMO:
When installing/removing it, do not touch the Film Unit and Pressure Roller.
1) Change the direction of the Fixing Assembly. (Place it in the position where the Drawer
F-4-268
4) Turn the pressure gear with hand and make the Pressure Roller engaged condition.
Pressure roller
engaged condition
6 harness guides
Drawer connector
Connectors
Harness
x3
x8
Harness guides
F-4-269
Harness guides
F-4-267
4-138
4-139
7) Remove the harness from the harness guide and remove the Film Unit.
2 screws
x2
F-4-272
6) Remove the left and right Fixing Plates and the Terminal Plate.
2 leaf springs
3 screws
x3
Fixing Plates
Terminal Plate
F-4-273
F-4-271
4-139
4-140
How to Clean
How to Clean
1) Clean the Fixing Separation Guide with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol.
F-4-274
1) Clean the Shutter Cover with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol.
F-4-275
4-140
4-141
Caution:
At installation, install it after fitting the 3 hooks to the notches.
How to Remove
F-4-277
MEMO:
When installing/removing it, do not touch the Pressure Roller.
2) When installing/removing it, to prevent the Pressure Roller from being damaged, insert the
paper (approx. 5mm) under the Fixing Delivery Lower Guide to make a space between the
1 claw
1 screw
3 hooks
Space
Inner delivery
guide
Paper
About 5mm
thickness
Pressure roller
F-4-278
Hooks
Hook
Claw
4-141
4-142
3) Lift the right side and remove the Pressure Roller Unit.
Caution:
When keeping the Fixing Assembly for long periods, turn the pressure gear and make
the Pressure Roller disengaged condition.
Pressure roller
disengaged condition
F-4-279
4) Remove the Pressure Roller and the 2 Pressure Roller Bearings from the Pressure Roller
Unit.
F-4-281
2 bearing holders
1 E-ring
1 gear
Gear
Pressure roller
Bearing bearing
holder
E-ring
Bearing
holder
Roller unit
Pressure roller
bearing
F-4-280
4-142
4-143
How to Clean
1) Clean the Feed Contact Point Guide with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol.
F-4-284
F-4-282
How to Clean
1) Clean the Transfer Guide with the lint-free paper moistened with alcohol.
Secondary transfer guide
F-4-283
4-143
4-144
How to Clean
How to Clean
1) Clean the Feed Contact Point Guide with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol.
1) Clean the inside of Pre-registration Guide Assembly with lint-free paper moistened with
alcohol.
Secondary Transfer Guide
Registration roller
F-4-285
2) Clean the Outer Registration Roller with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol while
rotating it.
F-4-287
2) Clean the outside of Pre-registration Guide Assembly with lint-free paper moistened with
alcohol.
Pre-registration Guide
Assembly
Registration roller
F-4-286
F-4-288
4-144
4-145
Sheet
How to Clean
1) Clean the Transparency Sensor with lint-free paper moistened with water in one direction.
How to Clean
1) Clean the Vertical Path Sensor with dry lint-free paper.
Transparency sensor
F-4-289
F-4-291
F-4-290
Lightproof Sheet
F-4-292
4-145
4-146
How to Clean
How to Clean
2) Clean the inside of Fixing Delivery Guide Assembly with lint-free paper moistened with
2) Clean the Post-fixing Roller 1 with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol while rotating it.
alcohol.
Post-fixing roller
3) Clean the Post-fixing Roller 2 with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol while rotating it.
3) Clean the outside of Fixing Delivery Guide Assembly with lint-free paper moistened with
alcohol.
Post-fixing roller
F-4-296
F-4-294
4-146
4-147
How to Clean
How to Clean
2) Clean the Fixing Delivery Roller 1 with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol while rotating
2) Clean the Duplex Feed Upper Roller, Wheel with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol
the gear.
F-4-297
F-4-299
3) Clean the Fixing Delivery Roller 2 with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol while rotating
it.
F-4-298
4-147
4-148
How to Clean
How to Clean
1) Clean the First, Second and Third Delivery Rollers with lint-free paper moistened with
2) Clean the Duplex Feed Lower Roller, Wheel with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol
alcohol.
F-4-303
F-4-301
F-4-304
F-4-302
4-148
4-149
How to remove
F-4-305
1 screw (loosen)
Loosen
Rubber cap
Front right cover
F-4-306
F-4-308
F-4-307
4-149
4-150
2) Remove the Reverse Trail Edge Guide and the Inner Delivery Cover.
1 screw
4 screws
2 hooks
Second and third delivery unit
x4
x2
F-4-311
Caution:
F-4-309
After installing the Second and Third Delivery Unit, make sure that the Sensor Flag in 1
place works normally.
x3
Wire saddles
x2
Second delivery
sensor
Connectors
F-4-312
F-4-310
4-150
4-151
1 stepped screw
x3
How to remove
1) Remove the Right Upper Cover Latch.
2 screws
2) Remove the Right Lower Cover Latch.
2 screws
F-4-315
Caution:
x4
At installation, align the First Delivery Sensor and the Sensor Flag and install it.
Sensor flag
3) Open the Fixing Assembly and remove the Fixing Gear Cover.
Sensor flag
1 screw
Fixing gear cover
Fixing assembly
F-4-314
4-151
4-152
Caution:
After installing the First Delivery Unit, make sure that the 2 Sensor Flags work normally.
Sensor flag
How to remove
First delivery sensor
F-4-317
Claw
F-4-318
4-152
4-153
Caution:
2 connectors
When removing the Duplex Unit, note that the Right Door Rotation Hinge and the spring
are easily disassembled.
1 screw
1 wire saddle
Connectors
x
Right door
rotation hinge
Spring
Wire saddle
Grounding wire
F-4-319
F-4-320
4-153
4-154
3) Tilt the shaft, pull the Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Roller and remove it.
Shaft
How to remove
1) Remove the Both Angle Guide.
2 screws
F-4-324
x2
Caution:
At installation, be sure to fit the Split Pin into the Multi-purpose Tray Pickup Roller.
Multi-purpose tray pickup roller
Split pin
F-4-322
F-4-325
Stop rings
Gear
Bushing
F-4-323
4-154
4-155
How to remove
1) Remove the Front Feed Guide and Middle Feed Guide.
Multi-purpose tray
separation roller
2 screws
Claw
3 claws
MEMO:
Lift the Front and Middle Feed Guides, push them into the rear, and pull them out
toward front.
F-4-327
x2
Multi-purpose tray
separation roller
Claws
Protrusion
Limiter
x3
Front feed guide
Claws
F-4-326
4-155
4-156
x3
Claws
Bearing part
F-4-328
Sensor flag
4-156
4-157
How to remove
MEMO:
This procedure describes the removing step of cassette 1 Pickup Roller. Go through the
same procedure for the Pickup Roller of cassette 2.
How to remove
Caution:
MEMO:
This procedure describes the removing steps of cassette 1 Feed Roller. Go through the
same procedure for the Feed Roller of cassette 2.
Do not touch the surface of Pickup Roller and the Separation Roller.
Caution:
1 pin
Do not touch the surface of Pickup Roller and the Separation Roller.
1 tab
F-4-329
F-4-330
4-157
4-158
How to remove
MEMO:
This procedure describes the removing procedure of cassette 1 Separation Roller. Go
through the same procedure for the Separation Roller of cassette 2.
Caution:
How to remove
MEMO:
This procedure describes the removing procedure of cassette 1 Pickup Assembly Idler
Gear. Go through the same procedure for the Pickup Assembly Idler Gear of cassette 2.
Do not touch the surface of Pickup Roller and the Separation Roller.
Caution:
Do not touch the surface of Pickup Roller and the Separation Roller.
1 tab
1 tab
F-4-331
F-4-332
4-158
4-159
2-1) When the Cassette Pedestal is installed, remove the Right Front Cover 3.
1 screw
How to remove
1) When the side paper deck is installed, remove the side paper deck, remove the Deck
Connect Cover.
2-2) When the Cassette Pedestal is not installed, remove the Right Lower Sub Cover 1 and
the Right Front Cover 3.
1 screw
Right front cover 3
Right lower sub cover 1
Claw
3
F-4-333
F-4-335
4-159
4-160
3) Open the Cassette Right Upper Cover and the Cassette Right Lower Cover.
4) Open the Right Upper Cover and the Right Lower Cover.
Arm
Stop ring
Stop ring
Arm
F-4-339
8) Remove the wire from the host machine and remove the Right Lower Cover.
F-4-336
Claw
x4
Right rear cover 3
Right lower cover
Claws
Claw
F-4-340
F-4-337
Connector
F-4-338
4-160
4-161
1 edge saddle
2 connectors
Connectors
How to remove
x2
1)Lift the lever and remove the Right Front Inner Cover.
x2
2 screws
x2
Wire saddle
Edge saddle
F-4-343
4) Hold the Pickup Guide and remove the Cassette 1 Pickup Unit.
Lever
Pickup guide
F-4-341
2)Remove the Right Lower Sub Cover 2 and remove the Right Rear Inner Cover.
x5
2 screws
Right rear inner cover
x2
x2
F-4-344
4-161
4-162
Lower guide
Arm
F-4-347
4) Align it with D-cut and remove the Cassette Right Upper Cover.
1-2)When the Cassette Pedestal is not installed, remove the Right Lower Sub Cover 1.
1 claw
Claw
F-4-346
4-162
4-163
How to remove
1) Remove the Right Lower Sub Cover 2 and remove the Right Rear Inner Cover.
4 screws
2 screws
x4
x2
x2
Cassette 2 pickup unit
Right lower sub cover 2
F-4-351
Claws
F-4-349
x2
x2
Wire saddle
Edge saddle
F-4-350
4-163
4-164
How to remove
MEMO:
This procedure describes the removing steps of Cassette 1 Size Detection Unit. Go
through the same procedure for Cassette 2 Size Detection Unit.
When removing the Cassette 1 Size Detection Unit, make sure to remove the Cassette 1
Pickup Unit.
When removing the Cassette 2 Size Detection Unit, make sure to remove the Cassette 2
Pickup Unit.
x2
Connector
4-164
4-165
Option
Wire saddle
F-4-355
MEMO:
There is no wire saddle in case of Duplex Color Image Reader Unit-B1.
F-4-353
x4
2 screws
x2
F-4-356
F-4-354
4-165
4-166
Caution:
1 edge saddle
In case of Color Image Reader Unit-B1/B2, record the position of scale of ADF mounting
screw.
2 connectors
x2
F-4-359
F-4-357
MEMO:
After removing the cable, close the edge saddle.
x2
MEMO:
Remove the flat cable in case of Duplex Color Image Reader Unit-B1.
1 reuse band
1 edge saddle
1 harness retainer
3 connectors
F-4-360
x3
x3
F-4-358
4-166
4-167
5-2) In case of Duplex Color Image Reader Unit-B1, remove the 4 screws.
Caution:
Be careful not to damage the Reader Communication Cable Guide when
x4
placing it.
F-4-361
Caution:
Be sure not to get scratches on the White Sheet on the removed ADF.
F-4-363
MEMO:
At installation, install it in the recorded scale position of ADF mounting screw.
F-4-362
4-167
4-168
Height Adjustment
position where the sheet of the stream reading glass is fully covered.
Sheet
Reading position
Paper
Protrusion
CAUTION:
Do not set it in the position where the original read position is covered by the paper.
Height adjustment roll
3) Pull out the paper in the direction of the arrow and check that there is resistance.
F-4-366
4-168
4-169
Reading position
Adjustment procedure
1) Rotate the fixing screw on top of the left hinge to adjust it.
To remove the space on the front: rotate it clockwise (black arrow direction)
Reading position
To remove the space on the rear or both sides: rotate it counterclockwise (white arrow
direction)
Blanking cover
Fixing screw
F-4-367
CAUTION:
Do not set it in the position where the original read position is covered by the paper.
F-4-369
2) Check the height again and make sure that the height is appropriate.
F-4-368
4-169
4-170
MEMO:
There are 2 adjustment methods; for front side reading (reader side scanner unit) and
for back side reading (DADF side scanner unit).
Rubber cover
Feed direction
F-4-370
Fixing nut
Knurled screw
F-4-371
4-170
4-171
How to remove
an adjustment.
MEMO:
When removing the ADF Unit and the Reader Unit from the host machine, make sure
to remove the ADF Unit first and then, remove the Reader Unit since the accuracy of
scanner systems may be deteriorated.
Claws
x2
x2
Feed direction
F-4-372
5) Adjust the position of the guide that supports the scanner unit.
If A is less than 90 deg, move the guide to right direction (black arrow direction).
If A is more than 90 deg, move the guide to left direction (white arrow direction).
Adjusting screw
F-4-374
Guide
x2
F-4-373
F-4-375
4-171
4-172
2 claws
2 screws
1 screw (flat-head; M4x6) (for Duplex Color Image Reader Unit-B1 only)
2 rubber caps
flat-head : M4x6
Claws
x3
x2
x2
Rubber caps
F-4-378
F-4-376
5)Move the Control Panel Base Cover in the direction of the arrow.
1 screw
F-4-379
x2
x2
4-172
4-173
12) Remove the Fixing Hook C and the Reader Fixing Hook A.
2 connectors
2 wire saddles
Protrusion
1 cable guide
Protrusion
x2
x2
Cable guide
Protrusion
Reader fixing hook A
Fixing hook C
Wire saddles
F-4-383
Connectors
F-4-381
10) Open the Right Upper Cover and the Right Lower Cover.
x2
F-4-385
4-173
4-174
Caution:
Make sure to lift the Reader Unit with 2 people or more. And also, lift it flatly.
Make sure to place the Reader Unit on the flat surface with preventing the impact
on it.
When placing the Reader Unit, be careful not to get a finger and a cable get caught.
F-4-386
(Front View)
(Back View)
F-4-388
F-4-387
4-174
Adjustment
Controller
Main
Formation System
Image
Feed System
Pickup
5
Main Controller
HDD
How to Replace Refer to Removing the HDD.
the Parts
Before
1) Backup of the set/registered data
Replacing
Use the Remote UI.
Management Settings > Data Management > Import/Export
Target data:
Address List
Forwarding Settings
Settings/Registration
Web Access Favorites
Printer Settings
Paper Information
2) Printing the set/registered data
Use the service mode.
(Lv.1) COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-P > USER-PRT
List of the set/registered data which cannot be backed up is printed."
Aftter Replacing 1) HDD format
1-1) Start with the safe mode. (While pressing 2 and 8 keys simultaneously,
turn ON the main power switch.)
1-2) Use SST to format all partitions.
2) Downloading system software
2-1) Use SST to download the system software (System, LANG, RUI and
others).
3) Initializing the key, certificate and CA certificate
(Lv.2) COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEAR > CA-KEY
4) Turning OFF and ON the main power switch
5) Restoring the backup data
Use the Remote UI.
Management Settings > Data Management > Import/Export
6) Resetting/registering the data
While referring to the list of set/registered data which was printed before
replacement, reset/register the data.
7) When the user generates and adds the encryption key, certificate and/or CA
certificate, request the user to generate them again.
8) Executing Auto Adjust Gradation (Full Adjust) Settings/Registration mode:
Adjustment/Maintenance > Adjust Image Quality > Auto Adjust Gradation
5-2
When using
the Card
Reader and
imageWARE
Accounting
Manager
Points to Note
when Using
the System
Softwareinstalled HDD
1) Go to COPIER > FUNCTION> INSTALL > CARD and enter the numerical value
of the leading card which is used for Department ID.
Then, press OK button. (e.g.: If No.1 to No.1000 cards are used for
Department ID, enter 1 of the leading card.)
2) After turning OFF and ON the main power switch, perform the following
operations from Settings/Registration mode.
In Management Settings > User Management > Department ID Management >
Page Totals, be sure that ID00000001 to ID00001000 are created.
Set the following: Preferences > Network > TCP / IP Settings > IPv4 Settings>IP
Address Settings > IP Address, Gateway Address, Subnet Mask
In Management Settings > User Management> System Manager Information
Settings> System Manager ID and System PIN, register any number for them.
Then, turn OFF and ON the main power switch.
If System Manager ID and System PIN are not registered, card registration
to device cannot be executed for the imageWARE Accounting Manager setting
operation.
3) Download the card ID from imageWARE Accounting Manager to the Main Body
again.
4) After downloading is completed, go to Management Settings > User
Management > Department ID Management > Page Totals. Be sure that only
the downloaded card ID is displayed.
5) Print using the user card registered from imageWARE Accounting Manager.
Be sure that the card information used for the target devices of imageWARE
Accounting Manager is collected.
Points to Note when Using the System Software-installed HDD When using the
HDD which was installed the system software of the other machine (different serial
number), be sure to format the HDD after the installation.
If the HDD is not formatted, the operation cannot be guaranteed.
When using the HDD which was installed the system software of the other
machine (different serial number), be sure to format the HDD after the installation.
If the HDDis not formatted, the operation cannot be guaranteed.
T-5-1
5-2
5-3
TPM PCB
How to Replace Refer to Security Function (Encryption Key, Certificate and Protection of
the Parts
Password)
T-5-5
T-5-3
DC controller PCB
How to Replace Refer to Removing the DC Controller PCB.
the Parts
Before
Backup of DC Controller PCB SRAM
Replacing
COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM > DSRAMBUP (LEVEL2)
ACTIVE is displayed and then OK! is displayed about 2 minutes later.
Turn OFF the main power when the above work is complete.
5-3
5-4
ITB
Developing Assembly
Adjustment
procedure
Patch sensor
How to Replace Refer to Removing the Patch Sensor (Front/Center/Rear).
the Parts
Adjustment
Initialization of Patch sensor is necessary
procedure
COPIER > OPTION > IMG-MCON > P-ALPHA Input Patch Sensor alpha value
T-5-7
ITB Unit
How to Replace Refer to Removing the ITB Unit.
the Parts
Adjustment
After replacement, execute the user mode (Settings/Registration > Adjustment/
procedure
Maintenance > Adjust Image Quality > Auto Adjust Gradation).
In case that the ITB Unit was removed, install the ITB Unit and execute the ITB
equilibrium position detection in service mode.
COPIER>FUNCTION>MISC-P>ITB-INIT <Level1>
This service mode will take approx. 2 to 3 minutes.
Remove the ITB Unit when replacing the following parts.
ITB Cleaning Unit
ITB
Primary Transfer Roller
Secondary Transfer Inner Roller
Hopper Unit
How to Replace Refer to Removing the Hopper (M/Y/C/Bk).
the Parts
Adjustment
When installing the removed Toner Container, do not shake it.
Procedure
When removing the Main Drive Unit simultaneously, install the Main Drive Unit and
Hopper Unit in that order.
Toner supply failure may occur.
In case that the Developing Assembly is replaced simultaneously, execute the
following service mode to initialize the Developing Assembly before installing the
Toner Container.
COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > INISET-X (X: Color changed)
If the Toner Container is installed first, TD ratio of the Developing Assembly cannot
be set to a correct value.
T-5-11
T-5-8
5-4
5-5
Size category
Size category
U1
U2
U3
U4
Size
FLSC, A-FLS, OFI, E-OFI, A-LTRR, A-LGL, G-LGL, A-OFI, M-OFI, FA4, FB4
K-LGLR, G-LTRR
K-LGL, A-LTR, G-LTR
B-OFI
T-5-12
Setting No.
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
36
37
42
43
Size
K-LGL
K-LGLR
FLSC
A-FLS
OFI
E-OFI
B-OFI
A-LTR
A-LTRR
G-LTR
G-LTRR
A-LGL
G-LGL
A-OFI
M-OFI
FA4
FB4
T-5-13
5-5
Troubleshooting
Check
Initial
Print
Test
items
Troubleshooting
Upgrade
Version
6-2
Initial Check
Initial check items list
Item
Site Environment
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Detail
Check
6-2
6-3
Test Print
Overview
This machine have the following test print TYPE and you can judge the image failure that is checked as Yes in the following image check items with each test print.
If the image failure occurred on normal output does not reappear on the test print, it may be caused by the PDL input or reader side.
Items
PG
TYPE
TYPE Pattern
Gradation
0
1to3
4
5
6
7to9
10
Yes
Fogging
Transfer
Fault
Black line
White line
(Color line)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Uneven
Density
Yes
Uneven
Density
at the Front /
Rea
Right
Angle
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Color
displacement,
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Straight
Lines
Yes
Yes
Yes
Originator
6-3
6-4
Check method
Gradation
Fogging
White line
Uneven density at
front & rear
Assumed cause
Failure of Drum Unit (end of life)
Failure of Laser Scanner Unit
Failure of Drum Unit (end of life)
Failure of Laser Scanner Unit
Failure of Developing Assembly
Failure of Photosensitive Drum (approx. 94mm)
Failure of Developing Cylinder (approx. 63mm)
T-6-3
F-6-1
Black line
(color line)
White line
F-6-2
Uneven pitch
Uneven density
Check method
Assumed cause
Check that the transfer failure does not appear on entire image. Failure of ITB (scratch, dirt)
Failure of Primary Transfer Roller (scratch, dirt)
Failure of Secondary Transfer Roller (scratch, dirt)
Check that black line does not appear on entire image.
Scratch on Photosensitive Drum
Dirt on Primary Charging Roller
Check that white line does not appear on entire image.
Failure of ITB Unit
Failure of Secondary Transfer Outer Roller
Dirt on laser light path
Check that uneven pitch does not appear on entire image.
Failure of Photosensitive Drum (approx. 94mm)
Failure of Developing Cylinder (approx. 94mm)
Check that uneven density does not appear on entire image.
Dirt on Dustproof Glass
Deterioration of ITB
T-6-4
6-4
6-5
Grid (TYPE=6)
This test print is for mainly checking the color displacement, right angle accuracy and straight line accuracy.
Check items
Uneven density
Check method
Assumed cause
F-6-3
4.0+1.5/-1.0mm
Check items
Uneven density
Check method
Assumed cause
2.5 +1.5mm/-1.5mm
F-6-4
6-5
6-6
64-gradations (TYPE=12)
This test print is for mainly checking the gradations of YMCBk single color at one time.
Check item
Check method
Gradation
Fogging
White line
Assumed cause
Failure of Drum Unit (end of life)
Failure of Laser Scanner Unit
Failure of Drum Unit (end of life)
Failure of Laser Scanner Unit
Failure of Developing Assembly
T-6-7
F-6-5
Check method
Fogging
Gray balance
Assumed cause
Failure of Drum Unit (end of life)
Failure of Laser Scanner Unit
Failure of Drum Unit (end of life)
Failure of Laser Scanner Unit
Failure of Drum Unit (end of life)
T-6-8
White
White
F-6-6
6-6
6-7
Troubleshooting items
Image Faults
Image fogging due to the electrostatic charge failure
Item
Operation failure
Reference
6-7
6-8
6-9
6-9
6-10
6-11
6-12
6-13
[Occurrence area]
F-6-7
[Cause]
When the solid image of Y color is copied under the high temperature and high humidity
environment, uneven discharge may occur between the Primary Charging Roller and the
drum. As a result, there is a possibility that a mottled image may occur on other colors than Y.
[Occurrence condition]
In case that the drum unit is under the high temperature and high humidity environment at an
initial state
[Remedy]
Please perform the following procedures.
6-7
6
In Case that Paper Setting for the Poor Image is "Plain Paper"
6-8
35-mm pitch ghost due to toner deterioration
In Case that Paper Setting for the Poor Image is "Heavy Paper"
1) Target current setting of discharge current control (COPIER>ADJUST>HV-PRI>DIS-TGM2/
TGC2/TGK2) <Level2>
The setting value of the applicable service mode is set to "+2." If not improved, the setting
value is set to +4.
2) Adjustment of electrostatic charge AC current (COPIER>ADJUST>HV-PRI>OFSTACM2/
OFSTACC2/OFSTACK2) <Level1>
The setting value of the applicable service mode is set to "+2." The setting value is set to +4,
If not improved.
[Occurrence area]
F-6-8
Developing cylinder
[Cause]
In case that the image pattern, which has extreme shading differences, is copied under the
high temperature and high humidity environment, the deterioration toner of a previous image
may adhere on a developing cylinder. For this reason, the inversion residual image (negative
ghost) of the previous image may occur in the next image.
[Occurrence condition]
In case that the image pattern with extreme shading differences is copied (the halftone image
was copied immediately after the solid image)
[Remedy]
1) Targeted value setting of ATR control (COPIER>ADJUST>DENS>P-TG-Y/M/C/K) <Level2>
The applicable service mode setting value for the color, which the poor image has occurred,
is set to "-1."
2) After cycling the power of the main unit, copy 8 A3 solid images.
As a result, if the image on the 8th sheet is checked and a defect is not improved, please
move on to the following step.
3) Lower the setting value of the applicable service mode by 1 step.
4) After cycling the power of the main unit, copy 8 A3 solid images.
5) Check the image on the 8th sheet.
6) If a poor image is not improved, repeat Step 3)-5).
6-8
6-9
About 95mm
[Occurrence area]
F-6-10
Fixing Unit
[Cause]
Usually, the paper, which passed the Fixing Unit, is fed to the Inner Feed Roller along with
About 35mm
[Occurrence area]
the separation guide. However, when thin paper is used, since the elasticity of the paper is
F-6-9
low, there is a possibility that the paper may be pulled by the roller if the paper leading edge
Developing cylinder
[Cause]
As a result, since the paper, which met the separation guide, comes floating, the nip angle of
In case that the durable advanced Developing Assembly is used under the high temperature
and high humidity environment, the slight periodic deflection on the developing cylinder may
occur. As a result, since the gap between the developing cylinder and the drum becomes
uneven, the uneven image density in a cycle of 35 mm due to a developing failure may occur.
[Occurrence condition]
In case that the durable advanced Developing Assembly is used under the high temperature
and high humidity environment.
This phenomenon tends to occur, when a solid image or a halftone image is copied.
For this reason, a density change may occur at around 95 mm from the image leading edge.
[Occurrence condition]
In case that the solid image is copied on the thin paper under the high temperature and high
humidity environment
[Remedy]
Please perform the following steps.
In case that the Paper Setting for the Poor Image is "Thin Paper"
[Remedy]
<Level2>
VPP) <Level2>
Set the setting value of the applicable service mode to "-1." If not improved, set the setting
The applicable service mode setting value is set to "-1." If a defect is not improved, check the
value to "-2."
images with lowering the setting value one step by one step.
6-9
6-10
In case that the Paper Setting for the Poor Image is "Plain Paper 1"
Setting of the ITOP temperature in the plain paper 1 (COPIER>OPTION>IMG-FIX>FX-S-TMP)
<Level2>
Set the setting value of the applicable service mode to "-1." If not improved, set the setting
value to "-2."
[Remedy]
When installing the Drum Unit (Bk) to the host machine, perform the following procedures.
1)Pull out the Process Unit.
2)Remove a dummy Drum or Drum Unit.
3)Place the half fold paper on the Developing Assembly (Bk).
Paper
deteriorate.
F-6-12
4) While the paper is set, install the Drum Unit (Bk) to the host machine.
Drum Unit (BK)
[Occurrence area]
F-6-11
Developing Assembly
[Cause]
If pushing the drum unit to the Developing Assembly in installation, there is a possibility to
catch the Mylar sheet of the Developing Assembly downward.
As a result, since an optical path is shut when the laser for the applicable color is irradiated,
the image may become light.
[Occurrence condition]
The installation failure of the drum unit
F-6-13
6-10
6-11
5) Hold the folded portion and pull this paper out to the direction of upper.
Paper
[Occurrence area]
F-6-14
F-6-15
6-11
6-12
Set the setting value of the applicable service mode to "+10" after checking the sub-item
name corresponding to XXXX from the following table. If not improved, please increase the
Environmental
Classification
Plane Paper1
64 ~ 82g
Plane Paper2
83 ~ 105g
Thin Paper
52 ~ 64g
Recycled Paper
Heavy paper 1
106 ~ 163g
Heavy paper 2
164 ~ 209g
Heavy paper 3
210 ~ 256g
Postcard
Envelope
Transparency
2TR-N1
2TR-N12
2TR-N13
2TR-HN1
2TR-HN12
2TR-HN13
2TR-T1
2TR-T12
2TR-T13
2TR-R1
2TR-R12
2TR-R13
2TR-H1
2TR-H12
2TR-H13
2TR-SH1
2TR-SH12
2TR-SH13
2TR-UH1
2TR-UH12
2TR-UH13
2TR-P1
2TR-P12
2TR-P13
2TR-E1
2TR-E12
2TR-E13
2TR-O1
2TR-O12
2TR-O13
2TR-N2
2TR-N22
2TR-N23
2TR-HN2
2TR-HN22
2TR-HN23
2TR-T2
2TR-T22
2TR-T23
2TR-R2
2TR-R22
2TR-R23
2TR-H2
2TR-H22
2TR-H23
2TR-SH2
2TR-SH22
2TR-SH23
2TR-UH2
2TR-UH22
2TR-UH23
2TR-P2
2TR-P22
2TR-P23
2TR-E2
2TR-E22
2TR-E23
-
[Location]
F-6-16
T-6-10
6-12
6-13
Soiled image due to the oil attached to the Fixing Separation
Guide
120mm
[Location]
F-6-18
At that time, when making 2-sided solid print with 2-colors, curled leading edge of paper on
2nd side may contact with the Delivery Flapper.
Thus, movement of this paper changes and it may touch the leading edge of Fixing
Separation Guide. As a result, oil attached to the leading edge of guide may appear on the
image.
[Condition]
With using the Fixing Assembly that is used over a prolonged period, when making 2-sided
solid print with 2-colors.
[Field Remedy]
Dry wipe the leading edge of Fixing Separation Guide with ling-free paper.
6-13
6-14
Operation Error
Noise around the Fixing Film Unit
[Location]
Fixing Film Unit
[Cause]
Separation Guide
Because the grease inside the Fixing Film deteriorates due to prolonged use, sliding
Cleaning Area
performance between the Fixing Film and the heater surface may be decreased.
As a result, the Fixing Film contacts with the heater surface when it rotates and noise may be
generated.
[Field Remedy]
By pushing the Fixing Film area, grease inside the film circulates and sliding performance will
be improved.
F-6-19
F-6-20
6-14
6-15
3) While pushing the Fixing Film area with lint-free paper, move it right and left 2 times.
F-6-21
[Occurrence Condition]
If the main power switch is turned OFF just after the copy operation (approx. within 5
seconds) or if the power plug is disconnected without turning OFF the main power switch.
[Field Remedy]
Process Unit can be installed to the host machine by strongly pushing it.
However, if the Unit is installed to the host machine with brute force, it may damage other
parts. Thus, be sure to follow the below operation procedure.
1) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch. (Laser Shutter is closed automatically.)
2) While the Process Unit remains pulled out, make sure that the Laser Shutter is surely
closed. At this time, do not put your hands inside the machine.
3) Turn OFF the main power switch and install the Process Unit to the host machine.
6-15
6-16
6-16
6-17
Version upgrade
Overview
Overview of Version Upgrade
The system software version is upgraded in 2 steps, downloading and writing the new version of the system software.
SST
System Software
System CD
System Software
Host Machine
Download mode
Normal mode
/(Safe mode)
Copy the
System Software
Write the
system software
Restart
Automatically restarted
USB menu
USB memory
storage device
System Software
Temporary Memory Space
CDS
System Software
Updater
F-6-22
6-17
6-18
F-6-23
When the system software is successfully written, the machine is automatically restarted to activate the downloaded system software.
If any error occurs during the writing process, the error code, E753-0001, is shown.
The name of the system software component is shown to the left of the error log message, version up..error. Check the name if the software is for the option not attached to the machine. If so,
turn OFF / ON the machine to recover the error (see Troubleshooting for details).
6-18
6-19
Log
version up...
error massage
Error
massage
F-6-24
6-19
6-20
Download Mode
When the version is upgraded via SST or with the USB memory storage device storage device, start the machine in Download mode. This machine has the following 2 Download modes similarly with
other iR-series models.
Normal mode(recommend):
Start from Copier > FUNCTION > SYSTEM > Download.
Conventionally, the main power switch of this machine was turned ON while pressing 1 and 7 keys. However, the procedure above automatically assigns a static IP address and enables the
download same as before.
You can obtain the version information and avoid unnecessary download and errors.
MEMO :
When entering Download mode, be sure to go into Service mode after all items of main menu have been displayed.
This machine reads the version information of system software when it starts. You must start Download mode after the version information has been obtained.
Safe mode:
Press 2 and 8 keys simultaneously on the numeric keypad when turning on the power.
In Safe mode, only SYSTEM, MEAPCONT, LANGUAGE, RUI, and SDICT are obtained among the version information. Other version information including DCON and RCON cannot be obtained in
this mode. This may cause the following symptoms when downloading the system software.
The existing system software components are also overwritten. Thus, time may be extended to download / write the software.
The message is not shown even when the current operation triggers version downgrade.
The system software may be downloaded even for the option not attached to the host machine. This triggers E753-0001.
To avoid these symptoms, download the system software in Normal mode except when you are unable enter Service mode.
6-20
6-21
Host Machine
Main Controller
MEAP Controller
Language Module
OCR Libraly
Remote UI Contents
RUI portal
Mobile print
UI-BOX
UI-COPY
UI-Intro
UI-SEND
Voice Synthesis Dictionary
Voice Recognition Dictionary
Paper Type Information File
Service Mode Contents
Printer Controller
WebDAV Contents
Resources for Web Browser
Reader Controller(2-sided Single Pass)
Reader Controller(2-sided Double Pass)
Fax Board Boot Program Super G3 Fax Board AE1
Fax Board Main Program Super G3 Fax Board AE1
Box Checker
Key/Certificatefor Encrypted Communication
Staple Finisher C1/Saddle Finisher Controller
Stitch Finisher C1
Saddle Controller
External 2-hole Puncher B1 Punch Controller
Inner Finisher A1
Finisher Controller
Display on SST
Registered name
Name of system
of product
software
iAC5051
iAXXXX
FIN_C1
EXP_B1
IFN_A1
SYSTEM
MEAPCON
LANGUAGE
SDICT
RUI
RPTL
MOBPR
BOX
COPY
INTRO
SEND
TTS
ASR
MEDIA
SMCNT
DCON
WEBDAV
BROWSER
RCOND
RCONS
G3CCB
G3CCM
BCT
KEY
FIN_CON
SDL_CON
EXP_CON
FIN_CON
Remarks
This machine holds the increased number of system software components compared to conventional iR machines to meet vastly extended functionality.
The Image Reader for this machine consists of 2-sided Single Pass and 2-sided Double Pass, requiring specific system software for each.
The name of the system software for the 2-sided Single Pass Image Reader (Duplex Color Image Reader Unit B1): RCOND
The name of the system software for the 2-sided Double Pass Image Reader (Color Image Reader Unit B1): RCONS
The finisher for this machine supports version upgrade via the host machine in any of the above-mentioned methods, i.e., via SST, USB memory storage device storage device or CDS. Note that the
External 2-hole Puncher B1 does not support version upgrade via the host machine. To upgrade versions, connect the option with the PC using the downloader PCB to download the system software
via SST.
6-21
6-22
Option
Staple Finisher C1/Saddle Stitch Finisher C1
Inner Finisher A1
Super G3FAX Board AE1
Super G3FAX Board AE1
6-22
6
Version Upgrade via SST
6-23
Downloading System Software
System software is saved in the temporary storage area on HDD after downloaded with SST.
Overview
The system software can be downloaded either of the two modes below via SST.
Assist mode (recommended)
Restart the machine after download so that it will be written to the system area, and the flash
ROM.
After the writing has been completed normally, this machine automatically restarts with the
Single mode
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
The new versions of the system software for attached option types are automatically
searched.
HDD
The accessories attached to the host machine are automatically recognized to download
System
Software
System
Software
Temporary
memory space
This machine holds a number of system software components that mutually interacts
during operation. Behaviors of such system software should be confirmed when these are
downloaded as the set. Thus, Assist mode is basically recommended to download the system
software for this machine.
2) OFF/ON
Automatically restarted
MEMO :
Use Single mode only when any of the following conditions is met.
When downloading some the system software components, i.e. DCON, RCON or options.
When reloading the system software after HDD is formatted.
HDD
System
Software
Temporary
memory space
System
memory area
4) OFF/ON
Automatically restarted
FLASH
ROM
F-6-25
6-23
6-24
5) Select the drive where the system CD is set and click Search button.
System CD to SST
Copy the system software stored in the system CD to SST.
MEMO:
The system software is compressed if the file size exceeds the CD memory capacity.
If the above is the case, decompress the file before copying it to SST.
Preparation
Requirements:
PC with SST Ver.4.22 or later installed
The system CD for this machine
Steps to copy the system software
1) Start the PC
F-6-27
Uncheck the box(es) for unnecessary folder(s) and/or system software and click Copy
button.
F-6-26
F-6-28
6-24
6-25
7) The message is shown when the system software is successfully copied. Click OK button.
Connection
The following IP address is automatically set for this machine at start-up in Download mode.
IP address:172.16.1.100
Subnet mask:255.255.255.0
When the PC with SST installed is connected to this machine, change the PC network
address to the following.
IP address:172.16.1.160
Subnet mask:255.255.255.0
Default gateway: arbitrary
Caution:
F-6-29
If the PC has the connection to the network, the settings changed to the abovementioned may cause network failures due to redundant IP addresses, etc. Ensure that
the PC is disconnected from the network when you change the PC network settings.
Alternatively use the cross cable to connect the PC to this machine.
Preparation
Requirements
PC with SST Ver. 4.22 or later installed and the system software for this machine is stored
Cross cable
10Base-T : Category 3 or 5
100Base-T : Category 5
1000Base-T : Enhanced Category 5 (CAT5e) or later
Caution:
Disconnect USB memory storage device storage devices if connected.
Communication to SST is disabled in this machine if any USB memory storage device
storage device is recognized. SST and the USB memory storage device storage device
cannot be used concurrently.
6-25
6-26
4) Check the IP address of the PC.
Go to Start menu to select Program > Accessory > Command Prompt.
Type IPCONFIG and press [Return] to see the network settings of the PC.
If any discrepancies from the description in the figure below are found, change the network
settings of the PC.
F-6-31
Caution:
IP address172.16.1.160
Subnet mask255.255.255.0
IP address172.16.1.100
Subnet mask255.255.255.0
Cross cable
10Base-TCategory 3, 5 or later
100Base-TXCategory 5 or later
1000Base-TX Category 5 (CAT5e) or later
The network settings are not shown with IPCONFIG if the PC is disconnected from
the network. To check the settings, connect the PC to this machine at power-on by the
cross cable.
F-6-30
Steps
1) Use the cross cable to connect the machine to the PC with SST installed.
2) Turn on the main power switch of this machine.
3) Enter Service mode to start the machine in Download mode.
Select COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM > DOWNLOAD and press [OK].
6-26
6-27
MEMO:
If the PC in Assist mode is connected to the machine in Safe mode,when click Start
botton, the following message is shown.
Click Next button to restart the machine. Enter Service mode upon the main menu
displayed and start Normal mode as Download mode.
F-6-32
If the upgraded set of the system software is stored in SST, the new set is automatically
selected.
MEMO:
If no upgrade is stored, the existing system software set is unchanged. At any rate, any
versions of the system software can be downloaded by manual selection.
F-6-33
When download is completed, the machine is automatically restarted to initiate the writing
process.The machine may repeat restarting several times depending on option configuration.
Upon the system software written, the machine is restarted again and the main menu is
displayed.
6-27
6-28
Downloading System Software (Single mode)
The following is the sample steps to download DCON (the other components of the system
Skip the existing versions and confirm whether to download downgraded versions
Upgraded versions are downloaded without message.
Skip download of the existing versions.
Confirm whether to download downgraded versions.
Confirm whether to download the existing versions / downgraded versions
Upgraded versions are downloaded without message.
Confirm whether to download and overwrite the existing versions.
Confirm whether to download downgraded versions.
Overwrite all versions
Regardless of version upgrade or downgrade, all versions of the system software are
downloaded without message.
By default, Skip the existing versions and confirm whether to download downgraded
versions is selected.
5) Click"Next"button.
F-6-35
F-6-34
6-28
6-29
MEMO:
The following device information is shown at the right top of SST screen.
IP address
Model name
Download mode
Skip the existing versions and confirm whether to download downgraded versions
Upgraded versions are downloaded without message.
Skip download of the existing versions.
Confirm whether to download downgraded versions.
Confirm whether to download the existing versions / downgraded versions
Upgraded versions are downloaded without message.
Confirm whether to download and overwrite the existing versions.
Confirm whether to download downgraded versions.
Overwrite all versions.
Regardless of version upgrade or downgrade, all versions of the system software are
downloaded without message.
By default, Skip the existing versions and confirm whether to download downgraded
F-6-37
F-6-36
6-29
6
MEMO:
If it is before restarting the machine, the downloaded system software can be deleted
not written on HDD or Flash ROM.
1) Click Clear button.
6-30
6) Click Shutdown / Restart button.
Clear button
F-6-38
F-6-39
3) ClickOKbutton.
6-30
6
Formatting HDD
6-31
When executing format BOOTDEV
Overview
This machine probides the following two types of HDD Formatting.
When HDD set as the service parts (the new HDD) is mounted
When clearing the system software and data completely from HDD and reloading the
system software.
Once Format ALL is executed in your machine, all the user data and MEAP applications
held in HDD will be cleared. Ensure to gain an agreement from the user before formatting.
Automatically restart
Automatically restart
Writing process
Writing process
Automatically restart
Automatically restart
F-6-40
6-31
6-32
MEMO:
With SSTv4.22, due to sharing the simple mode processing with the existing models,
the following screen is displayed.
As for the iR ADVANCE series models (or this machine), the procedure displayed on
the screen is not necessary; thus, click the Next button to go on to the next screen.
Automatically restart
Automatically restart
Automatically restart
Writing process
Writing process
Automatically restart
Automatically restart
F-6-42
Automatically restart
Automatically restart
Start in the new version
of the system software
F-6-41
6-32
6-33
Steps of Formatting
1) Enter Download mode. (Enter Safe mode when you mount the new HDD or when the
machine is unable to start normally due to HDD failures, etc.)
2) Connect the PC to the machine to start SST.
3) Select the model to be connected and single. Check the network settings and click Start
button.
F-6-45
F-6-43
4) ClickFormat HDDbutton
F-6-46
HDD is formatted.
F-6-44
6-33
6-34
7) Download the system software in any Download mode (Assist mode recommended). See
the steps to download the system software for details.
Replacing HDDs
Connect to SST
F-6-47
Caution:
After HDD is formatted, ensure to download the system software. If the system software
is not downloaded, E602 error is triggered at power-on.
6-34
6-35
When the new HDD is mounted, the machine cannot be started in the normal procedure.
Start the machine in Safe mode as Download mode. When gaining connection to SST, the
message is shown to confirm if the new HDD is mounted.
Backup
Overview
At the time of replacing controller PCBs, the backup function enables to save data held in the
PCB to migrate them to the new PCB.
Backup via SST
Backup data
Backup data RAM
MEAP applications
For investigation in Dev
Backup RAM holds the data from Backup RAM of the Main Controller PCB 2.
(Because setting data of service mode for the parts counter and the Main Controller are
stored, be sure to back up the data when replacing the Main Controller PCB and the DC
Controller PCB.)
MeapBack holds MEAP applications and their data stored in HDD
F-6-49
Click "Yes" and the message is shown, confirming whether to format HDD.
Service mode
COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM RSRAMBUP (Backup)
COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM RSRAMRES (Restore)
COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM DSRAMBUP (Backup)
COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM DSRAMRES (Restore)
T-6-13
MEMO:
Before replacing the Reader Controller PCBs, back up the data from Service mode.
The backup data can be restored from Service mode when the PCBs are replaced. This
enables to maintain the setting data including Service mode stored in the old Reader
Controller PCB.
F-6-50
Click Initialize button to initialize HDD (Format ALL). Follow the steps described in Format
ALL section to download the system software.
Before replacing the DC controller PCBs, back up the data from Service mode. The
backup data can be restored from Service mode when the PCBs are replaced. This
enables to maintain the setting data including Service mode stored in the old Controller
PCB.
Before replacing the Main Controller PCB 2, upload SramImg.bin. By downloading
SramImg.bin after replacement, the new Main Controller PCB 2 inherits the data
including Service mode stored in the old PCB
6-35
6-36
Caution:
3) Select the model to be connected and Single. Check the network settings and click Start.
The backup data can be downloaded only on the machine from which the data were
uploaded.
This machine does not use SramRCON and SramDcon
Upload/Download
MeapBack
F-6-52
/ SramImg.bin
Meapback.bin
Main controller
F-6-51
F-6-53
6-36
6-37
Steps to Download Data
Caution:
The backup data can be downloaded to the machine from which the data were
uploaded
F-6-54
6) Enter the file name to be saved and comments when necessary. Click Save button.
F-6-56
F-6-55
7) Click OK button.
6-37
6-38
PC
F-6-57
System software
USB memory
storage device
SST
F-6-58
System software
Downloading the
system software
HDD
Flash ROM
F-6-59
When downloading the system software, enter any of Download modes below.
Normal mode (recommended)
Select COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM > Download in Service mode and press [OK].
Safe mode (only when any system error occurs or the machine is unable to start normally;
turn ON the main power switch by pressing 2 and 8 keys simultaneously on the numeric
keypad)
6-38
6-39
Copying System Software
System CD to SST
Right after download from the USB memory storage device storage device, the system
MEMO:
The system software is compressed if the file size exceeds the CD memory capacity.
If the above is the case, decompress the file before copying it to SST.
Preparation
Requirements:
System
Software
HDD
System
Software
3) Start SST.
Temporary
memory space
2) OFF/ON
Automatically restarted
3) The system software is written
<<<<< download shell >>>>>
[ SYSTEM JPja-m ] - - - - Upgrading complete
[ SYSTEM ZZ ] - - - - - - - Upgrading complete
[ SYSTEM JPja-w ] - - - - Upgrading complete
[ SYSTEM ZZ ] - - - - - - - Upgrading complete
[ FONT F ] - - - - - - - - - - Upgrading complete
[ FONT G ] - - - - - - - - - - Upgrading complete
+++ Switch OFF the power then ON. +++
HDD
System
Software
Temporary
memory space
System
memory area
4) OFF/ON
Automatically restarted
FLASH
ROM
F-6-61
F-6-60
6-39
6-40
5) Select the drive where the system CD is set and click Search button.
F-6-62
6) The list of the system software components stored in the system CD is shown on the
7) The message is shown when the system software is copied. Click OK button.
F-6-64
screen.
Uncheck the box(es) of unnecessary folder(s) and/or system software component(s) and
click Copy button.
F-6-63
6-40
6
SST to USB memory Storage Device
6-41
4) Click the USB icon shown in "Select the target" Screen.
Copy the system software stored in SST to the USB memory storage device storage device.
Preparation
Requirements:
PC with SST Ver. 4.22 or later installed
USB memory storage device (*)
Requirements for USB memory storage device:
Interface: USB 1.1 or later (USB 2.0 is recommended)
Memory capacity: 1GB or more is recommended (the total file size of the system software
is approx. 500MB).
Format: FAT (FAT 16), FAT32 (NTFS and HFS are not supported). The memory is formatted
in a partition (multiple partitions are not supported)
Unavailable USB memory: memory that is protected by a password or the encryption
technology.
F-6-65
5) Select the drive (removable disk) where the USB memory storage device storage device is
inserted.
F-6-66
6-41
6-42
MEMO:
When the accessory configuration is known for the machine where the system software
is to be downloaded, uncheck the boxes of unnecessary accessories. E753-0001 is
triggered if the software for an unnecessary accessory is downloaded. (If this occurred,
turn OFF/ON the power to recover the error.)
8) Click OK when the system software is successfully copied in the USB memory storage
device storage device.
F-6-67
MEMO:
The signs shown in the field of Firmware registration static indicate the following:
Y: Stored in SST
N: Not stored in SST
7) Click Start button.
Start copying the system software to the USB memory storage device storage device.
F-6-69
F-6-68
6-42
6-43
Connection
Caution:
This machine does not communicate with SST once it recognizes a USB memory
storage device; therefore, SST and a USB memory storage device cannot be used at
the same time.
Preparation
Item to prepare: a USB memory storage device, which the system software for this machine
is stored.
Procedure
1) If a cross cable is connected to this machine, remove the cross cable.
2) Connect the USB memory storage device to the USB port.
[Reset]: Shutdown
F-6-71
Caution:
Depending on the manufacturer or the model, this machine may not recognize the USB
memory storage device.
USB memory
This machine retries the detection of a USB memory storage device for up to 60
seconds after power-ON. The above menu is not displayed if the recognition of a USB
memory storage device is failed within the time period.
In such a case, use another USB memory storage device.
USB port
F-6-70
6-43
6-44
Menu/Function Overview
MEMO:
The following download method is recommended to execute normal download of the
system software (any download work other than downloading after replacing/formatting
the HDD):
Download mode --- Normal mode
Download menu --- [1]: Upgrade (Auto)
[Reset]: Shutdown
F-6-72
If the machine fails to be started, replace the HDD and then download the system
software.
[1]: Upgrade(Auto)
To download/write the system software (automatic)
[2]: Upgrade (w Confirmation)
To download the system software (confirmation)
[3]: Upgrade (Overwrite all)
To download the system software (overwriting)
[4]: Format HDD
6-44
6
Downloading/Writing System Software (Automatic)
[1]: Upgrade (Auto)
The version is compared between the host machine/option and the system software in the
USB memory storage device to download only the system software with newer version in the
USB memory storage device to the temporary storage area of the HDD.
In safe mode, only the following system software can retrieve the version information (the
version is compared).
SYSTEM, LANGUAGE, RUI, MERAPCONT, SDICT
For the Host Machine that cannot retrieve the version information, the system software is to
be downloaded.
For the system software of the option that is not connected, it is handled as follows:
<In the case of startup in normal mode (Recommended)>
When Download Mode Version (to be displayed on the initial screen when starting the
download mode) is before 00.36
All the system software including the one of the non-connecting option is to be
downloaded as well (E753 is displayed).
6-45
3) Press the key on the Control Panel.
[1] -> [0]: To execute downloading/Any key other than [0] key: To return to the menu screen.
When Download Mode Version (to be displayed on the initial screen when starting the
download mode) is 00.36:
For the Finisher that is not connected, the system software is not to be downloaded.
G3CCB/G3CCM is to be downloaded even if Super G3FAX Board AE1 is not
installed (E753 is displayed).
When Download Mode Version (to be displayed on the initial screen when starting the
download mode) is 00.40 or later:
For the option that is not connected, the system software is not to be downloaded.
<In the case of startup in safe mode>
All the system software including the one of the non-connecting option is to be downloaded
as well (E753 is displayed).
F-6-75
Once downloading is complete, this machine is automatically restarted to start writing to the
HDD system area/flash ROM.
The screen shows the countdown once writing process is properly complete.
Operation procedure
1) Enter download mode.
2) Connect the USB memory storage device to the USB port.
6-45
6-46
Downloading System Software (Confirmation)
[2]: Upgrade (w Confirmation)
The version is compared between the host machine/option and the system software in the
USB memory storage device to download the system software with newer version in the USB
memory storage device to the temporary storage area of the HDD.
When the system software version in the USB memory storage device is the same or older, a
confirmation message is displayed on the Control Panel so that the user can select whether
to overwrite or not.
In safe mode, only the following system software can retrieve the version information (the
version is compared).
SYSTEM, LANGUAGE, RUI, MERAPCONT, SDICT
F-6-76
For the Host Machine that cannot retrieve the version information, the system software is to
be downloaded.
For the system software of the option that is not connected, it is handled as follows:
<In the case of startup in normal mode (Recommended)>
When Download Mode Version (to be displayed on the initial screen when starting the
download mode) is before 00.36:
Caution:
After HDD formatting and downloading, this machine takes a long time (for writing the
software).
This machine, in some cases, stays in standby screen up to 10 min during writing. At
this time, do not turn off the main power switch.
All the system software including the one of the non-connecting option is to be
downloaded as well (E753 is displayed).
When Download Mode Version (to be displayed on the initial screen when starting the
download mode) is 00.36:
For the Finisher that is not connected, the system software is not to be downloaded.
G3CCB/G3CCM is to be downloaded even if Super G3FAX Board AE1 is not
installed (E753 is displayed).
When Download Mode Version (to be displayed on the initial screen when starting the
download mode) is 00.40 or later:
For the option that is not connected, the system software is not to be downloaded.
<In the case of startup in safe mode>
All the system software including the one of the non-connecting option is to be downloaded
as well (E753 is displayed).
Unlike menu [1], this machine is not automatically started despite completion of downloading.
By manually turning OFF/ON the power, the system software is written at the time of startup.
In this case, starting the machine in safe mode deletes the downloaded system software
saved in the temporary storage area; therefore, do not press the numeric keys (2 + 8), but
execute normal startup to execute writing.
6-46
6-47
Operation procedure
1) Enter download mode.
2) Connect the USB memory storage device to the USB port.
3) Press the key on the Control Panel.
[2] -> [0]: To execute downloading/Any key other than [0] key: To return to the menu screen.
F-6-79
F-6-78
6-47
6-48
Caution:
In overwriting download mode of the USB memory storage device, all the system
software stored in the USB memory storage device is downloaded as well. Therefore,
be sure to keep the following in mind: If the USB memory storage device includes the
system software of non-connecting option, E753-0001 is displayed when the writing
process is completed.
In the case of an error in downloading of the non-connecting option, the machine can
be recovered by turning OFF/ON the power.
To prevent such error, uncheck the applicable system software so that the system
software of the non-connecting option is not downloaded when downloading the system
software from SST to USB.
Once downloading is complete, a message is displayed to encourage pressing the Reset
Operation procedure
key.
F-6-81
5) Once the message on the touch panel disappears, turn OFF the Main Power Switch.
6) Remove the USB memory storage device.
7) After checking that the LED is turned OFF at the lower right on the Control Panel, turn ON
F-6-80
6-48
6
Formatting HDD
6-49
When executing format BOOTDEV
In the case of installing the HDD provided as a service part (a new HDD).
In the case of cleaning the entire software and data in the HDD to reinstall the system
software.
All the user data and MEAP application in the HDD is deleted when executing Format ALL
with the machine in use; therefore, be sure to obtain agreement from the user to execute
Automatically restart
Automatically restart
Writing process
Writing process
Automatically restart
Automatically restart
Format ALL.
F-6-82
6-49
6-50
[1] -> [0]: To execute formatting BOOTDEV/Any key other than [0]: To return to the menu
Operation procedure
[2] -> [0]: To execute formatting the entire HDD/Any key other than [0]: To return to the
screen.
menu screen.
F-6-84
6-50
6-51
Backup
Other Menu
[5]: Backup
Caution:
Do not use this function because this mode is for R&D review.
Operation procedure
1) Enter download mode.
2) Connect the USB memory storage device to the USB port.
Operation procedure
1) After downloading by menu [2] or [3], press the Reset key to execute shutdown
sequence, and then turn OFF the main power once the screen display disappears.
2) Start the machine in safe mode (while pressing 2 + 8 keys at the same time, turn ON the
Main Power Switch).
If the system software is stored in the HDD temporary storage area when starting the
machine in safe mode, the system software is deleted. In such a case, the following message
is displayed on the touch panel.
All downloaded file is deleted.
3) Turn OFF the Main Power Switch.
4) Remove the USB memory storage device.
Download Menu 2
F-6-85
6-51
6
Troubleshooting
6-52
Upgrading by SST
Be sure to use Assist mode as a general rule because the system software of the non-
Cause
In the case of an error during writing process of the system software or in the case of writing
the system software of the option that is not installed, an error is determined to display E7530001.
installed.
In the case of downloading the Finishers system software, make the download mode of
the Host Machine in normal mode and connect to SST, and then download just the system
software of the Finisher with the version information displayed at the right side of the SST
screen.
Remedy
The result of writing process is displayed at the upper side of E753-0001 error display.
Be sure to check the system software with the error (error or NG) displayed.
In the case that Super G3FAX Board AE1 is not installed or in the case of download mode
in safe mode, G3CCB/G3CCM is not displayed on the list of downloadable system software.
In the case of the following display, E753-0001 is displayed unless the supported option is
installed.
[G3CCB], [G3CCM]: Super G3FAX Board AE1
[FIN_C1] Staple Finisher C1, Saddle Stitch Finisher C1
[IFN_A1] Inner Finisher A1
When the option with the software that causes the error fails to be installed, the machine is
recovered by turning OFF/ON the power.
Press the Reset key to execute shutdown, and then turn OFF the Main Power Switch once
the touch panel display disappears. Turn ON the Main Power Switch when the power lamp at
the lower right on the Control Panel is turned OFF.
Caution:
When downloading both FIN_C1-FIN_CON and FIN_C1-SDL_CON system software to
the Host Machine that connects Staple Finisher C1, both result in errors and E753 is
displayed.
In such a case, writing result on the touch panel displays double [FIN_C1].
When downloading just FIN_C1-SDL_CON to the Host Machine that connects Staple
Finisher C1, it results in an error and E753 is displayed.
In such a case, writing result on the touch panel displays a single [FIN_C1].
Be sure to download just FIN_C1-FIN_CON to Staple Finisher C1.
For the software of the following options, take care of downloading because downloading to
the Host Machine without any connecting option can cause improper display of E753-0001.
Super G3FAX Board AE1
iAC5051-G3CCB
iAC5051-G3CCM
Staple Finisher C1
FIN_C1-FIN_CON
MEMO:
Image Reader has 2 types of system software: RCOND and RCONS.
Downloading both RCOND and RCONS results in writing of only the system software
that complies with the Image Reader installed in the Host Machine. When downloading
the system software that does not comply with the Image Reader installed in the Host
Machine, it results in skipping of writing process (it will not be an error).
6-52
6
Upgrading by USB memory storage device
Depending on the version of the download module, the condition for improper display differs.
To check the version of download module:
When starting the download mode, the version is displayed as Download Mode
Version on the initial screen.
When selecting [9]: Other Menu in the download menu (USB), the version is displayed
as MiniBootable Version.
When the USB memory storage device stores the system software of the option that is not
6-53
In the case of startup in normal mode to select [3]: Upgrade (Overwrite all) in the USB
menu:
All the system software stored in the USB memory storage device is definitely to
be downloaded (E753 is displayed).
In the case of startup in safe mode to select [1]: Upgrade (Auto), [2]: Upgrade (w
Confirmation) or [3]: Upgrade (Overwrite all) in the USB menu:
All the system software stored in the USB memory storage device is definitely to
be downloaded (E753 is displayed).
6-53
6-54
: User operation
Firmware
Market Release
b
c
Distribution
Setting to UGW
(UGW-linked)*1
Firmware acquisition
*2
Automatic download
Automatic update
Scheduled download
Apply (Update)
Via Service mode
(Local UI)
Scheduled update
Apply (Update)
Via User mode
(Local UI)
Apply (Update)
Via User mode
(Remote UI)
Without connection to
external network
F-6-86
*2: Functioning supports periodical update with a device after firmware version V50.00.
NOTE:
See User Manual of the device for how to connect the device to the external network.
When needed, perform the communication test before actual download to check if the
communication with the distribution server is normal.
6-54
6-55
Preparation
Overview of Preparation
HQ should be changed before obtaining firmware distributed from CDS. Unless the setting is
Installation
Method
UGW-linked
Download and
Update
UGW-linked
Download
Manual
Download and
Update
Manual
Download and
Update via
Local UI
Manual
Download and
Update via
Remote UI
Special
Download and
Update via
Remote UI
Scheduled
Update
Enabling
Enabling
Setting
Enabling
[Update
[Manual
Enabling
Sales
Network
UGW
Firmware]
Update] Button [Scheduled
Companys Settings
Link
Button of User of User Mode
Update]
HQ
Mode
(Remote UI)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Market
Canada
Latin America
Hong Kong
NOTE:
The list below shows the setting of Sales Companys HQ for CDS-CTS by market.
Check and adhere to the appropriate setting for your market.
<List of Sales Companys HQ and the settings for CDS-CTL>
Japan = JP
USA = US
Singapore = SG
Europe = NL
Korea = KR
China = CN
Hong Kong = HK
Australia = AU
Canada = CA
Latin America= LA
T-6-14
Network Settings
LMS-linked Installation
LMA-linked installation via Local UI
LMS-linked installation via Remote UI
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
T-6-15
6-55
6
Network Settings
6-56
2. Confirming URL Setting of Distribution Server
This section describes how to confirm the URL setting of the distribution server.
NOTE:
See User Manual for how to connect the device to the external network.
Before using UGW link or User mode, see the sections below to prepare as required.
Enabling UGW Link
Enabling [Update Firmware] Button of User Mode
Enabling [Install Application/Options] Button of User Mode
NOTE:
External Network here means the network connecting the device to CDS via Internet.
F-6-87
6-56
6-57
F-6-88
6. Press [OK] to set the entered items. Now the URL of the distribution server is successfully
set.
F-6-89
6-57
6-58
3. Communication Test
This section describes how to check if the communication is normally done to the distribution
server and/or the file server.
1. Start [Service Mode] at Level 1.
1). Press [Setting/Registration (User Mode)] button on the control panel.
2). Press [2] and [8] buttons at a time on the control panel.
3). Press [Setting/Registration (User Mode)] button on the control panel.
4). [Service Mode] screen is shown.
2. Press [Updater] button.
F-6-92
F-6-91
6-58
6-59
6. Upon the communication test completed, the communication test result screen is shown.
Press [OK] button to exit this operation.
F-6-93
F-6-95
F-6-94
Obtain the download file information for communication test from the distribution server
(to execute the communication test to the distribution server).
Using the download file information for communication test, the contents for test are
downloaded from the file server (for the communication test to the file server).
6-59
6-60
Service Technician
Setting of Device
Service Mode
(Level 1)
Setting of UGW
WebPortal
NOTE:
6-60
6-61
STEP 1
STEP 1
STEP 2
Scheduling
via UGW
Scheduling
via UGW
Update using
Updater
F-6-96
F-6-97
The firmware distribution schedule to the certain device should be set on UGW.
The firmware distribution schedule to the certain device should be set on UGW.
See UGW-linked Download in Operation Manual of CDS V1.0 (for Firmware Distribution) for
details.
The device checks the schedule concerned every 12 hours on UGW. This allows the device
to register the firmware distribution setting, enabling automatic firmware download and
update.
CAUTION:
[Devices without Wait for EOJ (end of job) Function]
Firmware update will delete print jobs in the queue. Ensure to notify users of this
before you start updating. It is recommended to perform firmware update during nonbusiness hours.
[Devices with Wait for EOJ Function]
Firmware update will not be triggered when any of the following jobs remains in the
queue.
-Print
-Scan
-Fax (except I-FAX; this function is enabled for I-FAX only during Print/Scan operation)
NOTE:
The firmware downloaded by scheduling via UGW can be checked/deleted from User
mode, but cannot be updated. If a user download the other firmware, the firmware
downloaded with "UGW-linked Download" is overwritten.
See Chapter 1 Limitations and Cautions of this manual for more detailed information.
NOTE:
To contacts registered for E-mail notification on UGW, the E-mail is sent from UGW
upon completing firmware update.
6-61
6-62
F-6-98
F-6-100
F-6-99
6-62
6-63
CAUTION:
[Devices without Wait for EOJ (end of job) Function]
Firmware update will delete print jobs in the queue. Ensure to notify users of this
before you start updating. It is recommended to perform firmware update during nonbusiness hours.
[Devices with Wait for EOJ Function]
Firmware update will not be triggered when any of the following jobs remains in the
queue.
-Print
-Scan
-Fax (except I-FAX; this function is enabled for I-FAX only during Print/Scan operation)
See Chapter 1 Limitations and Cautions of this manual for more detailed information.
F-6-101
6. The firmware is applied to the device. The device is automatically restarted when the
firmware is successfully applied.
NOTE:
To contacts registered for E-mail notification on UGW, the E-mail is sent from UGW
upon completing firmware update.
6-63
6-64
Mode)
The figure below shows the operational flow of Manual Download and Update.
STEP 1
STEP 2
Download using
Updater
Update using
Updater
F-6-102
F-6-104
To update to the individual response edition, press [Special Firmware] and go to Step 5.
F-6-105
F-6-103
6-64
6-65
5. [Special Firmware] screen is shown as below. Enter the fields and press [OK] button.
6. [New Firmware] screen is shown as below. Check the contents and press [Next] button.
F-6-106
F-6-107
[Retrieval ID]:
[Version]:
[Password]:
[Applicable Firmware]:
Select the firmware applicable to the device from the dropdown list.
[Additional Languages]:
More than 1 language can be selected, and it is possible to add another language when
upgrading the firmware.
Up to 8 languages can be added, including Japanese and English. The languages already
registered in the device are always selected, and SST is used to delete an unnecessary
language from the device.
[Release Note]:
If any release note is published, the contents are shown here.
NOTE:
To update to the individual response edition, the firmware corresponding to the ID and
password that you input is displayed.in [Applicable Firmware]..
6-65
6-66
7. [Delivery Settings] screen is shown as below. Enter the fields and press [OK] button.
[E-mail]:
E-mails concerning update statuses are sent from the device to the contact registered here.
Enter the E-mail address of the service technician in charge.
Enter 1-byte alphanumeric or symbols up to 64 characters.
[Comments]:
Enter the comment in 1-byte alphanumeric or symbols up to 128 characters.
Enter the comment to be automatically included in E-mail. Model Name in the comment will
be helpful to identify the device relevant to the E-mail.
NOTE:
[Timing to Apply]
For firmware versions with no remote update permission, [Auto] cannot be selected in
[Timing to Apply]
[Updated Module Only]
For firmware versions with difference-only delivery disabled, only [OFF] can be
F-6-108
[Delivery Time]:
Press either [Now] or [Set Time] button.
[Now]:
The firmware is downloaded immediately after distribution schedule is set.
[Set Time]:
Be sure to specify the date (within 30 days) and time. The firmware is downloaded on
the specified date and time.
Enter the date and time using the numeric keypad in the format of yyyy/mm/dd
hh:mm:ss
[Timing to Apply]:
Press either [Auto] or [Manual] button.
[Auto]:
The firmware is applied automatically upon firmware downloaded.
[Manual]:
The firmware is automatically downloaded. Go to [Apply Firmware] to set up for
updating the downloaded firmware.
[Updated Module Only]:
Press either [On] or [Off] button.
[On]:
Only difference between the current and new firmware is downloaded.
[Off]:
The firmware to be applied is wholly downloaded.
6-66
6-67
8. Confirm Export Criteria screen is shown as below. Check the contents and press [Accept]
When Distribution Time and Timing to Apply of Distribution Setting are set to [Now] and
[Manual], respectively:
button.
Confirm the firmware and press [OK] button. Now STEP 1 is successfully completed.
F-6-109
F-6-111
F-6-112
F-6-110
6-67
6-68
The firmware downloaded to the device can be updated using Updater functions.
When Timing to Apply is set to [Auto] in Distribution Setting in STEP 1, the firmware is
updated automatically. Only when Timing to Apply is set to [Manual], follow the steps below to
update the firmware.
1. Start [Service Mode] at Level 1.
1). Press [Setting/Registration (User mode)] button on the control panel.
2). Press [2] and [8] buttons at a time on the control panel.
3). Press [Setting/Registration (User mode)] button on the control panel.
4). [Service Mode] screen is shown.
2. Press [Updater] button.
F-6-114
F-6-113
F-6-115
6-68
6-69
CAUTION:
[Devices without Wait for EOJ (end of job) Function]
Firmware update will delete print jobs in the queue. Ensure to notify users of this
before you start updating. It is recommended to perform firmware update during nonbusiness hours.
[Devices with Wait for EOJ Function]
F-6-116
6. The firmware is applied to the device. The device is automatically restarted when the
firmware is successfully applied.
Firmware update will not be triggered when any of the following jobs remains in the
queue.
-Print
-Scan
-Fax (except I-FAX; this function is enabled for I-FAX only during Print/Scan operation)
See Chapter 1 Limitations and Cautions of this manual for more detailed information.
6-69
6-70
This section describes how to delete firmware distribution schedule set by Updater.
1. Start [Service Mode] at Level 1.
1). Press [Setting/Registration (User Mode)] button on the control panel.
2). Press [2] and [8] button at a time on the control panel.
3). Press [Setting/Registration (User Mode)] button on the control panel.
4). [Service Mode] screen is shown.
2. Press [Updater] button.
3. Press [Update Firmware] button.
F-6-118
5. Confirm the contents of the distribution schedule and press [Yes] button.
F-6-117
F-6-119
6. Confirm the result of deletion shown on the screen and press [OK] button. Now the
firmware distribution schedule is successfully deleted.
6-70
6-71
F-6-121
F-6-120
F-6-122
6. The firmware is applied to the device. The device is automatically restarted when the
firmware is successfully applied.
7. When the device is restarted, confirm the version of the firmware.
1). Press [Check Counter Key] button on the control panel.
2). Press [Check Device Configuration] button.
6-71
6
3). Confirm if the updated firmware version corresponds to [Controller Version].
Now the firmware is successfully updated in the method.
6-72
Deleting Downloaded Firmware
This section describes how to delete the downloaded firmware using Updater.
1. Start [Service Mode] at Level 1.
1). Press [Setting/Registration (User Mode)] button on the control panel.
2). Press [2] and [8] button at a time on the control panel.
3). Press [Setting/Registration (User Mode)] button on the control panel.
4). [Service Mode] screen is shown.
2. Press [Updater] button.
3. Press [Update Firmware] button.
F-6-123
6-72
6-73
F-6-124
F-6-125
6. Confirm the result of deletion and press [OK] button. Now the downloaded firmware is
successfully deleted.
6-73
6-74
No.1
No.3
Symptom: Firmware update is aborted during operation using Updater functions and the
Cause: The power went off due to blackout and the like.
Action: Service technicians should follow the steps below via SST.
1. Press [2] and [8] buttons at a time to start the device.
1) Turn on the power and hold down [2] and [8] buttons at a time on the control panel.
2) [Download Mode] is shown on Local UI.
If the operation above does not trigger the download mode, BOOT (Flash Memory,
service parts) should be replaced (takes up to 1 minute for rewriting).
If the operation above successfully triggers the download mode, go to the next steps
below.
2. Via SST, format the HDD of BOOT Dev only.
F-6-126
Cause: You try to download firmware from User mode.You can download only the latest
version of firmware from User mode.
Symptom: Firmware has not been downloaded according to the distribution schedule.
Cause: Other firmware distribution schedule is set.Since only 1 distribution schedule is held,
the registered schedule may be overridden by the new firmware distribution schedule.
Action: Once the schedule is overridden, the firmware cannot be downloaded. Distribution
<User Mode>
<Service Mode>
Cause: At the scheduled distribution date and time, the firmware registered was not found on
CDS.
Action: Distribution should be rescheduled for the firmware.
Cause: After distribution is scheduled, device is updated to other version of firmware via SST.
(Status of the firmware in the device is changed.)
Action: Distribution should be rescheduled for the firmware.
Cause: The power of the device was off at scheduled date and time.
F-6-127
F-6-128
No.2
6-74
6
No.5
Symptom: The firmware presumed to be downloaded to the device cannot be found.
Cause: Since only 1 firmware can be held on the device, the firmware previously downloaded
was overridden by the newly downloaded one.
Action: Retry the firmware download.
6-75
Information required for Reports
Information required for Service Technicians to Obtain on Site
Update Logs
System Logs (Log Level: 4)
Information to Report
Symptom occurred
Location of the device
Date and Time that symptom occurred
Steps taken for reproduction
Firmware / Application you tried to install
Occurrence frequency
Model dependency (if the same symptom occurred in other models)
Dependency on firmware/MEAP application/system option
Conditions of symptom occurrence
Model
Firmware version installed on the device
List of MEAP applications installed on the device
Network setting information of the device
Service mode setting information
Setting of device service mode COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL > CDS-CTL
(Level 1)
COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > CDS-UGW
COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > CDS-FIRM
COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > CDS-MEAP
COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > LOCLFIRM
* As many as the items listed above should be obtained on site. More information provided
will be helpful for investigation.
6-75
6-76
Debug Logs
NOTE:
See Setting Log Level in chapter 3 for details of changing Log Level
4. If the value of CDS-MEAP or CDS-FIRM was changed in the service mode, return to the
1. Check that the CDS-MEAP or CDS-FIRM is enabled in the service mode. If they are not
enabled, change the value to 1 and then restart the device.
original value and then restart the device to enable this setting.
Obtaining the log files is completed.
F-6-129
6-76
6-77
Error Messages
Error messages displayed in LUI on a device are shown below. As to error codes, see the next list.
No.
Messages
Timing of display
Cause
Remedy
6-77
6
No.
Messages
10
Timing of display
6-78
Cause
Remedy
Check the network environment of the device, and re-execute the job.
If it recurs, obtain the log etc. (Refer to Version Upgrade via CDS under Version
Upgradeof Chapter 6 Troubleshooting of this manual.) and contact Support Div. of the
sales company.
Set proxy and restart the communication test.
If it recurs, obtain the log etc. (Refer to Version Upgrade via CDS under Version
Upgradeof Chapter 6 Troubleshooting of this manual.) and contact Support Div. of the
sales company.
The access to the network is limited.
Set the user environment to make the access to the following domain available.
https://device.cdsknn.net/
http://cdsknn.net.edgesuite.net/
If it recurs, obtain the log etc. (Refer to Version Upgrade via CDS under Version
Upgradeof Chapter 6 Troubleshooting of this manual.) and contact Support Div. of the
sales company.
Delivery server stopped.
Contact Field Support Group in the sale company.
After confirmation that the delivery server has been restored, restart the communication
test.
If it recurs, obtain the log etc. (Refer to Version Upgrade via CDS under Version
Upgradeof Chapter 6 Troubleshooting of this manual.) and contact Support Div. of the
sales company again.
Delivery Server : Connect Due to no return of data for the communication test, Check the network environment of the device and re-execute the job.
OK
time-out (in HTTP communication, no response
If it recurs, obtain the log etc. (Refer to Version Upgrade via CDS under Version
File Server : Retrieve
for 1min) occurred. After that, retried but failed to Upgradeof Chapter 6 Troubleshooting of this manual.) and contact Support Div. of the
Failed
connect to server.
sales company.
The network cable was disconnected during data Reconnect the network cable and then restart the communication test.
Error Code: [XXXX]
download in the communication test.
If it recurs, obtain the log etc. (Refer to Version Upgrade via CDS under Version
Upgradeof Chapter 6 Troubleshooting of this manual.) and contact Support Div. of the
sales company.
The file server stopped during data download in the Contact the sales company's Support Department.
communication test.
After confirmation that the delivery server has been restored, restart the communication
test.
If it recurs, obtain the log etc. (Refer to Version Upgrade via CDS under Version
Upgradeof Chapter 6 Troubleshooting of this manual.) and contact Support Div. of the
sales company again.
Hash value in the communication test file is
Check the network environment and re-execute the job.
incorrect.
If it recurs, obtain the log etc. (Refer to Version Upgrade via CDS under Version
Upgradeof Chapter 6 Troubleshooting of this manual.) and contact Support Div. of the
sales company.
6-78
6
No.
11
Messages
An error occurred.
Error Code: [xxx]
Timing of display
6-79
Cause
communication test, etc. The max value (space/file) was exceeded and new
(main screen)
log was not accepted.
Normally an old log file is deleted before the max
value (space/file) is exceeded, but error may occur
due to other element (e.g. I/O error).
Remedy
If it recurs, obtain the log etc. (Refer to Version Upgrade via CDS under Version
Upgradeof Chapter 6 Troubleshooting of this manual.) and contact Support Div. of the
sales company.
Notice of version
Failed to acquire version information of device
Re-execute the job.
information (main screen) due to no CDS registration of firmware version of If it recurs, obtain the log etc. (Refer to Version Upgrade via CDS under Version
device.
Upgradeof Chapter 6 Troubleshooting of this manual.) and contact Support Div. of the
sales company.
At the time of notifying version information, failed to Check if the network environment is correct to solve the cause of the error occurrence.
connect to the delivery server.
If the network environment of the device is correct, obtain the log etc. (Refer to Version
No return of notifying version information
Upgrade via CDS under Version Upgradeof Chapter 6 Troubleshooting of this
manual.) and contact Support Div. of the sales company.
Network cable was disconnected during notice of Re-connect the network cable and re-execute the job.
version information.
If it recurs, obtain the log etc. (Refer to Version Upgrade via CDS under Version
Upgradeof Chapter 6 Troubleshooting of this manual.) and contact Support Div. of the
sales company.
Failed to send notice of version information since Re-execute the job.
the main power was turned OFF and then ON
If it recurs, obtain the log etc. (Refer to Version Upgrade via CDS under Version
during the sending.
Upgradeof Chapter 6 Troubleshooting of this manual.) and contact Support Div. of the
sales company.
Server stopped at the time of sending notice of
Check the network environment of the device and re-execute the job.
version information.
If it recurs, obtain the log etc. (Refer to Version Upgrade via CDS under Version
Upgradeof Chapter 6 Troubleshooting of this manual.) and contact Support Div. of the
sales company.
An internal error occurred at the time of sending
Obtain the log etc. (Refer to Version Upgrade via CDS under Version Upgradeof
notice of version information.
Chapter 6 Troubleshooting of this manual.) and contact Support Div. of the sales
company.
6-79
6
No.
11
Messages
An error occurred.
Error Code: [xxx]
Timing of display
Immediate download
(error dialogue)
6-80
Cause
Remedy
UGW linkage was turned ON when eRDS was OFF.For a device using eRDS, turn ON the eRDS. For a device not using eRDS, turn OFF the
UGW linkage.
If it recurs, obtain the log etc. (Refer to Version Upgrade via CDS under Version
Upgradeof Chapter 6 Troubleshooting of this manual.) and contact Support Div. of the
sales company.
An internal error occurred at the time of acquiring Re-execute the job.
delivery information.
If it recurs, obtain the log etc. (Refer to Version Upgrade via CDS under Version
Upgradeof Chapter 6 Troubleshooting of this manual.) and contact Support Div. of the
sales company.
An internal error occurred at the time of acquiring Re-execute the job.
applicable firmware information.
If it recurs, obtain the log etc. (Refer to Version Upgrade via CDS under Version
Upgradeof Chapter 6 Troubleshooting of this manual.) and contact Support Div. of the
sales company.
An internal error occurred at the time of sending
Re-execute the job.
approval information.
If it recurs, obtain the log etc. (Refer to Version Upgrade via CDS under Version
Upgradeof Chapter 6 Troubleshooting of this manual.) and contact Support Div. of the
sales company.
An internal error occurred at the time of delivery
Re-execute the job.
order
If it recurs, obtain the log etc. (Refer to Version Upgrade via CDS under Version
Upgradeof Chapter 6 Troubleshooting of this manual.) and contact Support Div. of the
sales company.
An internal error occurred at the time of requesting Re-execute the job.
firmware delivery information.
If it recurs, obtain the log etc. (Refer to Version Upgrade via CDS under Version
Upgradeof Chapter 6 Troubleshooting of this manual.) and contact Support Div. of the
sales company.
During the download, all space in the storage disk After adding vacant space of the storage disk, re-execute the job.
was occupied. (DiskFull)
If it recurs, obtain the log etc. (Refer to Version Upgrade via CDS under Version
Upgradeof Chapter 6 Troubleshooting of this manual.) and contact Support Div. of the
sales company.
At the end of receipt, an internal error occurred.
Re-execute the job.
If it recurs, obtain the log etc. (Refer to Version Upgrade via CDS under Version
Upgradeof Chapter 6 Troubleshooting of this manual.) and contact Support Div. of the
sales company.
At the update start, an internal error occurred.
Re-execute the job.
If it recurs, obtain the log etc. (Refer to Version Upgrade via CDS under Version
Upgradeof Chapter 6 Troubleshooting of this manual.) and contact Support Div. of the
sales company
At the update start, an internal error occurred.
Re-execute the job.
If it recurs, obtain the log etc. (Refer to Version Upgrade via CDS under Version
Upgradeof Chapter 6 Troubleshooting of this manual.) and contact Support Div. of the
sales company.
At the time of notifying cancellation, an internal
Re-execute the job.
error occurred.
If it recurs, obtain the log etc. (Refer to Version Upgrade via CDS under Version
Upgradeof Chapter 6 Troubleshooting of this manual.) and contact Support Div. of the
sales company.
6-80
6
No.
12
Messages
Timing of display
Immediate download
(main screen)
Manual update (main
screen)
Automatic update (main
screen)
6-81
Cause
Remedy
Conduct a communication test to analyze the cause of the error. After solving the cause,
resend the order from the eRDS.
If it recurs, obtain the log etc. (Refer to Version Upgrade via CDS under Version
Upgradeof Chapter 6 Troubleshooting of this manual.) and contact Support Div. of the
sales company.
Delivery server stopped.
Contact the sales company's Support Department.
After confirming restoration of the delivery server, re-execute the job.
If it recurs, obtain the log etc. (Refer to Version Upgrade via CDS under Version
Upgradeof Chapter 6 Troubleshooting of this manual.) and contact Support Div. of the
sales company.
Scheduled date and time acquired from the delivery Do the delivery setting from UGW again.
server was before current time (15 or more min had If it recurs, obtain the log etc. (Refer to Version Upgrade via CDS under Version
passed.)
Upgradeof Chapter 6 Troubleshooting of this manual.) and contact Support Div. of the
sales company.
Scheduled data and time acquired from the delivery Do the delivery setting from UGW again.
server did not exist.
If it recurs, obtain the log etc. (Refer to Version Upgrade via CDS under Version
Upgradeof Chapter 6 Troubleshooting of this manual.) and contact Support Div. of the
sales company.
At the time of immediate download, turned OFF and Re-execute the job.
then ON the power of device main body.
If it recurs, obtain the log etc. (Refer to Version Upgrade via CDS under Version
Upgradeof Chapter 6 Troubleshooting of this manual.) and contact Support Div. of the
sales company.
Updated version was different from the ordered
Re-execute the job.
version.
If it recurs, obtain the log etc. (Refer to Version Upgrade via CDS under Version
Upgradeof Chapter 6 Troubleshooting of this manual.) and contact Support Div. of the
sales company.
After the update, failed to connect to the delivery
Check the network environment and re-execute the job.
server.
If it recurs, obtain the log etc. (Refer to Version Upgrade via CDS under Version
Upgradeof Chapter 6 Troubleshooting of this manual.) and contact Support Div. of the
sales company.
After the update, delivery server stopped.
Contact the sales company's Support Department. After confirming restoration of the
delivery server, re-execute the job.
If it recurs, obtain the log etc. (Refer to Version Upgrade via CDS under Version
Upgradeof Chapter 6 Troubleshooting of this manual.) and contact Support Div. of the
sales company.
After the update, the network cable was
Re-connect the network cable and re-execute the job.
disconnected.
If it recurs, obtain the log etc. (Refer to Version Upgrade via CDS under Version
Upgradeof Chapter 6 Troubleshooting of this manual.) and contact Support Div. of the
sales company.
After the update, server returned an error.
Obtain the log etc. (Refer to Version Upgrade via CDS under Version Upgradeof
Chapter 6 Troubleshooting of this manual.) and contact Support Div. of the sales
company.
After the update, an internal error occurred.
If it recurs, obtain the log etc. (Refer to Version Upgrade via CDS under Version
Upgradeof Chapter 6 Troubleshooting of this manual.) and contact Support Div. of the
sales company.
6-81
6
No.
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Messages
Delivery Error
Error Code: [xxx]
Timing of display
6-82
Cause
Remedy
Conduct a communication test to analyze the cause of the error. After solving the cause,
resend the order from the eRDS.
If it recurs, obtain the log etc. (Refer to Version Upgrade via CDS under Version
Upgradeof Chapter 6 Troubleshooting of this manual.) and contact Support Div. of the
sales company.
The delivery server stopped.
Contact the sales company's Support Department. After confirming restoration of the
delivery server, re-execute the job.
If it recurs, obtain the log etc. (Refer to Version Upgrade via CDS under Version
Upgradeof Chapter 6 Troubleshooting of this manual.) and contact Support Div. of the
sales company.
The scheduled data and time acquired from delivery Do the delivery setting from UGW again.
server does not exist.
If it recurs, obtain the log etc. (Refer to Version Upgrade via CDS under Version
Upgradeof Chapter 6 Troubleshooting of this manual.) and contact Support Div. of the
sales company.
Delivery Error
UGW linkage (Update
The scheduled date and time acquired from delivery Do the delivery setting from UGW again.
Delivery Time
Firmware screen)
server was before current time (15 or more min had If it recurs, obtain the log etc. (Refer to Version Upgrade via CDS under Version
Delivery Firmware Label
passed).
Upgradeof Chapter 6 Troubleshooting of this manual.) and contact Support Div. of the
Delivery Firmware version
sales company.
Immediate download
At the time of immediate download, turned OFF and Re-execute the job.
Error Code: [ xxx ]
(Update Firmware screen) then ON the power of device main body.
If it recurs, obtain the log etc. (Refer to Version Upgrade via CDS under Version
Upgradeof Chapter 6 Troubleshooting of this manual.) and contact Support Div. of the
sales company.
Applicable firmware is not registered. On-site (error dialogue) At the user site, no latest firmware exists.
This means the current firmware is the latest, so this error has no impact.
But when the latest firmware to be retrieved must exist e.g. released new firmware
information has been notified, contact Field Support Group in the sales company.
No applicable firmware exists on CDS, so the
Contact the sales company's Support Department.
service person can't select any applicable firmware.
Restart failed.
Manual update (error
An error occurred at the time of the device restart. After turning OFF and then ON the main power of the device, re-execute the job.
Turn the main power OFF and ON.
dialogue)
If it recurs, obtain the log etc. (Refer to Version Upgrade via CDS under Version
Upgradeof Chapter 6 Troubleshooting of this manual.) and contact Support Div. of the
sales company.
Automatic update (error An error occurred at the time of the device restart. After turning OFF and then ON the main power of the device, re-execute the job.
dialogue)
If it recurs, obtain the log etc. (Refer to Version Upgrade via CDS under Version
Upgradeof Chapter 6 Troubleshooting of this manual.) and contact Support Div. of the
sales company.
Specify [E-Mail Address] with up to 64 At the time of periodical The specified E-mail address exceeded 64
Specify E-mail address within 64 characters.
characters.
update setting
characters.
The following characters cannot be
At the time of periodical The E-mail address was including the characters Do not specify E-mail address with characters which cannot be used.
used for the [E-Mail Address]:
update setting
which could not be used.
,:;()[]<>\
Specify [Comments] with up to 128
At the time of periodical Comments exceeded 128 characters.
Specify comments within 128 characters.
characters.
update setting
The [Delivery Server URL] is incorrect. In setting with the deliver The specified deliver server URL is wrong.
Enter the right URL(https://device.c-cdsknn.net/cds_soap/updaterif)
server URL.
T-6-17
6-82
6-83
Error Codes
Error Codes displayed on LUI in a device and how to read them.
8 4014206
Code
Value
Error
0
1
2
3
4
5
Not dened.
CDS server
Updater
UGW
Service person
IT administrator (User)
xx
Method
Contents
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
000-
Category code
Error Code
The error code list is shown below. Remedy are error codes of "-", and for all the error codes out of the list, contact Field Suppot Group in the sales company.
Error Code (hex number)
The first The second The 3rd - 4th The 5th digit The 6 - 8th digits
digit Error
digit
digits Method Category
Description
field
Operator
category
code
code
Error
0
1
Not defined.
CDS server
x
x
Description
Remedy
Cause of error
CDS
UP CDS file Network
delivery DATER server
server
6-83
6-84
0
0
Operation
0
0
0
0
0
0
3
4
0
0
0
0
A
B
I/O
0
Description
Remedy
In an data entry item, the value is set against the regulations (E.g. the set value is other than "Operator: 4. Service person,
5. User")
No applicable delivery information exists
Inconsistency between the current firmware component
in the data entry item and delivery information (E.g. the
conditions for automatic update are not met. The settings of
a mandatory additional set are invalid)
In a notice of delivery-allowed information, an install-set was
release to the market, but the market release was stopped
during the delivery
No mail template file exists
The device serial number in the data entry item differs from
that in delivery information
User is selected as Operator in the data entry items and the
retrieval type is other than the latest
The retrieval type in the data entry item is special and
registration ID and individual Password are not set (*
Operator did not enter registration ID and individual
Password)
The retrieval type in the data entry item is special and
Operator is not Service person
As to the device serial number in the data entry items, there
is no applicable device code product
The retrieval type in the data entry items is special and
there are no basic-set applicable to the registration ID and
Password (* When wrong registration ID or Password was
entered by an operator)
The delivery status is Applying
No approval information exists about EULA or the export
criteria when the delivery is determined
The delivery status is Distributing/Distributed/Applying/
Finished/Failed
The delivery status is Distributing/Distributed/Applying/
Finished/Failed
The delivery status is New/Waiting to Distribute/Distributed/
Applying/Finished/Failed
The delivery code is other than Distributing.
(Firmware delivery)
The delivery status is New/Waiting to Distribute/Distributing/
Applying/Finished/Failed
The delivery status is Distributing/Distributed/Applying/
Finished/Failed
Device is "Not applicable to CDS"
(Firmware delivery)
Cause of error
CDS
UP CDS file Network
delivery DATER server
server
-
6-84
6-85
2~5
0
0
0
0
2
3
0
0
0
0
0
0
7
8
9
Description
Remedy
The specified license access number has been deauthorized The package product of the entered license access number doesn't include MEAP application/System Option
The sales company for the MEAP application isn't identical with the sale company for the package product
The number of licenses to be issued will exceed the limit
number allowed to register
As for System Option for the same function, the license keys were issued more than the defined number of times for the
same device serial number
No device product exists applicable to the optional product No product exists applicable to the device serial number
The product of the entered license access number cannot
be used with this device because the settings of the sales
company are incorrect
No product linked to the license access number is registered in CDS for delivery
Although the product linked to the license access number is registered in CDS for delivery, the delivery is stopped now
No existence of optional product applicable to the device
serial number.
The license access number has been registered for another device
For the device product applicable to the device serial
number, no available software (MEAP application, System
Option) exists
LMS system error
-
Not defined
Unknown error
Processing exclusively
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
2
3
4
1
1
0
0
5
6
I/O
1
x
2
x
3
0
Device
x
x
1
Cause of error
CDS
UP CDS file Network
delivery DATER server
server
-
6-85
6-86
Description
1
x
x
An internal error in CPCA
2
x
x
An internal error in IMI
3
x
x
An internal error in SMS
4
x
x
An internal error in NLM
SOAP communication
1
0
1
The processing thread stopped
1
0
2
Processing SOAP communication now
1
0
3
The function type is not matched
1
0
4
An invalid SOAP response error
2
0
1
An internal error about application information
2
0
2
config.xml is NOT FOUND
2
0
3
type.xml is NOT FOUND
2
0
4
An error in binding type.xml
2
0
5
An error in creating a service tab
2
0
6
A runtime error in performing the web method
2
0
7
An unknown host error in performing the web method
3
0
1
The delivery server is stopped
3
0
2
An error occurrence in the delivery server
HTTP communication
1
0
1
Specified Hash Algorithm is unknown
2
0
1
Invalid HTTP request
2
0
2
Failed to connect to the server
Remedy
Cause of error
CDS
UP CDS file Network
delivery DATER server
server
-
6-86
6-87
Description
Remedy
1
0
3
No notice of start from the eRDS
1
0
4
Error of socket reading
1
0
5
Socket communication time-out
Other internal codes
0
0
2
One of installation, start or authorization failed
(When installation or authorization failed, it is regarded as an
error) *
0
3
x
An internal error in processing the installation
1
x
x
An error by using invalid API
2
x
x
An internal error in SMS
3
0
1
No existence of delivery ID
3
0
2
Invalid delivery ID
3
0
3
The updated firmware information is not identical with the
firmware information after activation of the Updater
3
0
4
The process of firmware download is incomplete
3
0
5
The update process is incomplete
3
0
6
The installment process is incomplete
4
0
1
Failed to retrieve delivery information
5
0
1
Failed to execute the delivery process
5
0
2
The scheduled delivery was not executed within the defined Scheduled deliveries not executed
period of time
within the defined period of time are
abandoned, so register a scheduled
delivery again.
When setting the date and time of the
scheduled delivery, be sure to designate
a time when the device is ON
Cause of error
CDS
UP CDS file Network
delivery DATER server
server
-
T-6-18
6-87
6
Controller Self Diagnosis
6-88
Overview
Two types of error diagnosis tools are installed in this machine, and stored in the locations
Introduction
Operation of the (2 types of) error diagnosis tools added to the main body and remedy for
shown below.
errors are described. These tools can reduce time to determine cause of errors occurred in
field and improve the accuracy of specifying error locations.
This manual can be applied when the main body is placed in the following conditions.
The main body does not boot. (In such a case that the Control Panel is not displayed or the
progress bar does not work, etc.)
An error is suspected to have occurred in the Main Controller PCB 1/2 and other related
PCBs (child PCBs such as SDRAM or TPM mounted in the Main Controller PCB 1/2).
PCBs and units diagnosed by each tool are as follow:
F-6-130
Boot System Error Diagnosis Tool covers the components shown in the red frame (solid line)
Main Controller PCB 2 side <Main Controller PCB 2, SDRAM (M0*, M1), SDRAM (P),
Memory PCB, Open I/F PCB (option)>
in the figure. Controller System Error Diagnosis Tool covers the components shown in the
blue frame (dotted line).
This tool automatically checks the Control Panel, Main Controller PCB 1, All-night Power
Supply, and Non-all-night Power Supply, and notifies the result by the number of light-out and
blinking interval of the lamp on the Control Panel.
This tool is installed in the ROM of Main Controller PCB 1.
Therefore, regardless the version of MN-CNT, this tool can be used even when an error
occurs in child PCBs or when the Controller System Error Diagnosis Tool cannot be booted.
6-88
6-89
This tool automatically checks the Main Controller PCB 1/2, child PCBs mounted on the Main
Controller PCB 1/2, and HDD, and display the result on the Control Panel.
J2032
J2031
BAT1
Therefore, this tool cannot be used when an error occurred in HDD or HDD cannot be
accessed.
DDR2-SDRAM
512 MB + 512 MB
Layout Drawing
Layout Drawing of PCBs Subject to Diagnosis
F-6-132
F-6-131
6-89
6-90
Basic Flowchart
DDR2-SDRAM (M1)
1 GB
No
Yes
BAT1
J12
No
DDR2-SDRAM (P)
512 MB
F-6-133
Yes
No
Yes
Take an ac tion appropriate f or
the error.
F-6-134
6-90
6-91
Operation
Prerequisite
Make sure that the version of MN-Cont of the main body is Ver.30.30 or later.
When the version is old (older than Ver.30.30), although Controller System Error Diagnosis
Tool (BCT) (see Memo) is downloaded, it cannot be installed and is discarded.
Boot Method
1) Turn ON the Main Power Supply Switch while pressing the Control Panel Power Supply
Switch.
Therefore, if the version of MN-Cont of the main body is old (older than Ver.30.30), update the
version to Ver.30.30 or later using SST (Service Support Tool) or USB memory, and enter the
SST download mode again to install BCT.
Caution:
When upgrading of system software, HDD format, or BootDev format is performed, BCT
is simultaneously installed with other system software if the MN-Cont version is new
(Ver.30.30 or later).
In other words, when the MN-Cont version is new (Ver.30.30 or later), it is not necessary
to install BCT again.
However, installation of BCT via CDS is not supported by the current version. (It will be
supported in the future.)
NOTE:
BCT stands for Box Checker Test.
When BCT is installed on the main body, version of the installed module can be
checked using service mode (COPIER>DISPLAY>VERSION>BCT).
F-6-135
6-91
6-92
2) Right after the Main Power Supply Lamp lights up once, it lights out instantly, and diagnosis
starts.
The Main Power Supply Lamp repeats high-speed blinking after completion of a check in
(When the Main Power Supply Lamp lights out, you can release your finger from the Control
Panel Switch.)
For example, when an error is detected in Check 2, the Main Power Supply Lamp lights out
twice and repeats high-speed blinking (ON/OFF in 0.3 seconds interval).
When an error is detected, be sure to count the number of times the Main Power Supply
Lamp lights out.
For detailed results, see Error Diagnosis.
F-6-136
Diagnosis Time
Diagnosis is completed in approx. 1 minuites.
F-6-138
*1: When an error is detected, there is a possibility that the Main Power Supply Lamp may
not perform high-speed blinking but perform other operation (continuous light-up, light-out). In
this case, remove and then install the 2 SDRAMs on the Main Controller PCB 1.
If the error is not resolved, execute the remedy of the Check No. which is not completed
After completion of the diagnosis, this machine executes normal boot sequence.
F-6-137
6-92
6-93
Controller System Error Diagnosis
Error Diagnosis
<Boot System Error Diagnosis Table>
Boot Method
1) Turn ON the Main Power Supply Switch while pressing the numeric keys 2 and 4
simultaneously.
F-6-140
Board
Board
F-6-141
F-6-139
This tool does not perform a boot check for the Flash Memory PCB.
6-93
6-94
2) Keep pressing the numeric keys (for approx. 20 seconds) until the following screen
appears on the Control Panel.
Diagnosis Time
Diagnosis is completed in approx. 3 minutes.
The result is displayed on the Control Panel.
<When the diagnosis result is normal>
F-6-142
NOTE:
When this tool is not installed correctly, the following regular screen is displayed.
In this case, perform the following remedy.
Turn OFF the Main Power Supply Switch again, and execute step 1 and 2 shown
above.
If this tool still does not boot, it means that BCT is deleted. So, install BCT.
If BCT is not installed correctly, --.-- is displayed in Service
Mode (COPIER>DISPLAY>VERSION>BCT) in the main body.
F-6-144
F-6-145
F-6-143
6-94
6-95
F-6-146
Test Name
SN-1 IASDRAM
SN-2 SM
BUS IA
DIMM1
SN-3 SM
BUS IA
DIMM2
Check an error
between the
Main Controller
PCB 1 and
SDRAM on the
Main Controller
PCB 1
Check an
SM bus error
in SDRAM
(outside) on the
Main Controller
PCB 1
Check an SM
bus error in
SDRAM (inside)
on the Main
Controller PCB
1
Assumed Error
Location
Main Controller
PCB 1
SDRAM on Main
Controller PCB 1
Main Controller
PCB 1
SDRAM (outside)
on Main Controller
PCB 1
Remedy
Error Code
Main Controller
PCB 1
PCI Expansion
PCB
Main Controller
PCB 2
SDRAM (M1) on
Main Controller
PCB 2
SN-6 SM
BUS SOC
DIMM2
Main Controller
PCB 1
PCI Expansion
PCB
Main Controller
PCB 2
SDRAM (M0) on
Main Controller
PCB 2
Check an SM
bus error in the
Main Controller
PCB 1 and
SDRAM (M0)
on the Main
Controller PCB
2
Error Code
Remedy
Main Controller
PCB 1
Assumed Error
Location
SN-4 SM
Check an SM
BUS IA Clock bus error in
Gen
Clock Generator
on the Main
Controller PCB
1
SN-5 SM
Check an SM
BUS SOC
bus error in the
DIMM1
Main Controller
PCB 1 and
SDRAM (M1)
on the Main
Controller PCB
2
Description
SN-7 PCI
Config
Maestro
Check a PCI
bus error in the
Main Controller
PCB 1 and the
Main Controller
PCB 2
Supplementary Information:
If SDRAM (M0) on the Main
Controller PCB 2 is not installed,
[no] is displayed for the diagnosis
result.
1. Check the connection of the
Main Controller PCB 1, and the
Main Controller PCB 2.
2. Replace the Main Controller
PCB 1.
3. Replace the Main Controller
PCB 2.
Main Controller
PCB 1
PCI Expansion
PCB
Main Controller
PCB 2
SDRAM (M0/M1)
on Main Controller
PCB 2
SN-8 PCI
Check a LAN
Main Controller
1. Replace the Main Controller
Config LANC chip error on the PCB 1
PCB 1.
Main Controller
PCB 1
6-95
6
Test Name
SN-9 PCI
Config PCIBridge
Description
Check a PCI
bus error
between the
Main Controller
PCB 1 and the
PCI Expansion
PCB
Assumed Error
Location
Main Controller
PCB 1
PCI Expansion
PCB
Main Controller
PCB 1
Main Controller
PCB 1
Main Controller
PCB 1
Main Controller
PCB 1
TPM PCB
6-96
Remedy
Error Code
1. Check the installation between the Main Controller PCB 1 and PCI
Expansion PCB.
2. Replace PCI Expansion PCB.
3. Replace the Main Controller
PCB 1.
Supplementary Information: If
the PCI Expansion PCB is not
installed, [no] is displayed for the
diagnosis result.
1. Replace the Main Controller
PCB 1.
E746
Test Name
SN-15
Check failure
FLASH ROM of CPU ROM
(IC60) on the
Main Controller
PCB 2
SN-16
Check an error
P-SDRAM
between the
Main Controller
PCB 2 and
SDRAM (P)
on the Main
Controller PCB
2
SN-17
Check failure of
R-SDRAM
Rchip SDRAM
on the Main
Controller PCB
2
SN-18
Check failure of
S-SDRAM
Schip SDRAM
on the Main
Controller PCB
2
SN-19
Check failure of
O-SDRAM
Ochip SDRAM
on the Open I/F
PCB
SN-20 GU
BUS
Main Controller
PCB 2
SDRAM (M0/M1)
on Main Controller
PCB 2
Description
Check a
GUBUS error
on the Main
Controller PCB
2
Assumed Error
Location
Remedy
Error Code
Main Controller
PCB 2
Main Controller
PCB 2
SDRAM (P)
Open I/F PCB
Main Controller
PCB 2
Open I/F PCB
E747
E748
Main Controller
PCB 2
E747
E748
E732
Main Controller
PCB 2
Open I/F PCB
E747
E748
Main Controller
PCB 2
Open I/F PCB
Bypass PCB
Supplementary Information: If
the Open I/F PCB is not installed,
[no] is displayed for the diagnosis
result.
1. Check the installation of the
E747
Open I/F PCB or the Bypass I/F
E748
PCB on the Main Controller PCB 2.
2. Replace the Open I/F PCB or
the Bypass I/F PCB on the Main
Controller PCB 2.
3. Replace the Main Controller
PCB 2.
6-96
6
Test Name
Description
Assumed Error
Location
6-97
Remedy
Error Code
E355
Main Controller
PCB 2
Main Controller
PCB 2
Main Controller
PCB 2
PCI Expansion
PCB
HDD Cable
HDD
E246
E350
E355
T-6-19
Restrictions
<Boot System Error Diagnosis>
If an error cannot be resolved by executing remedy according to the error diagnosis table
described above, consider boot failure of the main power supply and take appropriate
actions.
6-97
Error Code
Overview
Code
Error
Code
Jam
Code
Alarm
7-2
Overview
Location code
When jam occurs, pickup location is indicated with the following pickup position code.
Outline
Pickup position
Outline
This chapter describes various codes which are displayed when a failure occurs on the
product. These are classified into 3 codes as follows.
Code type
Explanation
Reference
Error code
Jam code
Alarm code This code is displayed when a function of the machine is malfunctioned.
T-7-1
An error code is shown in 7-digit [E000XXX] on the display on the operation panel. However,
[000] in 2 to 4 digit is not used. Thus, an error code is described as [EXXX] using 5 to 7 digit
in the service manual. (e.g.: E012 = E000012)
Location code
Error code, jam code, and alarm code include the location information.
Location information is displayed as 2-digit numbers as follows.
Device
JAM
ERR
ALARM
01
04
02
00
05
04
00
05
02
05
61,62
Inner Finisher-A1
02
05
02
05
65
T-7-2
7-2
7-3
7-3
7-4
Error Code
E001
0000
0001
05
05
Item
0003
05
Description
Title
Abnormal high temperature in Main Thermistor 1, 2
Description Main Thermistor 1, 2 (TH1) detects 260 deg C or more for 0.2
sec.
Remedy
1. Go through the following: DISPLAY > ANALOG >
FIX-C, or DISPLAY > ANALOG > FIX-E; if its less than
260 deg C, go through the following to clear the error:
COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR; and then turn OFF/ON
the power.
It its 260 deg C or more, do not turn on the power before
replacing the Film Unit.
2. Replace the Film Unit.
3. Replace the Fixing Assembly.
4. Replace the DC Controller PCB (UN1).
NOTE: After performing the above remedy work, go through
the following to clear the error: COPIER > FUNCTION >
CLEAR > ERR
Title
Abnormal high temperature in Sub Thermistor 1, 2
Description Sub Thermistor 1, 2 (TH1) detects 275 deg C or more for 0.2
sec.
Remedy
1. Go through the following: DISPLAY > ANALOG > FIX-E2
or DISPLAY > ANALOG > FIX-E3; if its less than 275 deg
C, go through the following to clear the error: COPIER >
FUNCTION > CLEAR > ERR; and then turn OFF and then
ON the power.
If its 275 deg C or more, do not turn on the power before
replacing the Film Unit.
2. Replace the Film Unit
3. Replace the Fixing Assembly
4. Go through the following to check drive of FM5 and FM6:
COPIER > FUNCTION > PART-CHK > FAN; if not working
properly, replace the fan.
5. Replace the DC Controller PCB (UN1)
E003
0000
05
Item
Description
Title
High temperature error detected by hardware
Description Hardware detects abnormal high temperature of the
Thermistor (Main Thermistor 1: 264 deg C, Main Thermistor
2: 265 deg C, Sub Thermistor 1, 2: 280 deg C) for 400 msec
consecutively.
Remedy
1. If the detected temperature of the Thermistor is less than
the abnormal high temperature specified for Thermistor,
go through the following to clear the error: COPIER >
FUNCTION > CLEAR > ERR; and then turn OFF and then
ON the power.
If its at abnormally high temperature, do not turn on the
power before replacing the Film Unit.
2. Replace the Film Unit
3. Replace the Fixing Assembly
4. Go through the following to check drive of FM5 and
FM6: COPIER > FUNCTION > PART-CHK > FAN; if the not
working properly, replace the fan.
5. Replace the DC Controller PCB (UN1)
NOTE: After performing the above remedy work, go through
the following to clear the error: COPIER > FUNCTION >
CLEAR > ERR
Title
Error detected when the Heater is ON
Description After the Heater was turned ON, Main Thermistor 2, Sub
Thermistor 1 or Sub Thermistor 2 detects 20 deg C or more
and 50 deg C or less for 3 sec.
Remedy
1. Go through the following to clear the error: COPIER >
FUNCTION > CLEAR > ERR; and then turn OFF and then
ON the power.
2. Check connection of the Connectors (Thermistor
Connector and AC Connector).
3. Replace the Film Unit
4. Replace the Fixing Assembly
5. Replace the DC Controller PCB (UN1)
NOTE: After performing the above remedy work, go through
the following to clear the error: COPIER > FUNCTION >
CLEAR > ERR
7-4
7
Ecode Detail Location
Code
E003
E003
E003
0001
0002
0004
05
05
05
Item
7-5
Description
Title
Abnormal detection during paper feeding
Description During print control, Sub Thermistor detects 70 deg C or less
from the target temperature for 5 sec.
Remedy
1. Go through the following to clear the error: COPIER >
FUNCTION > CLEAR > ERR; and then turn OFF and then
ON the power.
2. Replace the Film Unit
3. Replace the Fixing Assembly
4. Replace the DC Controller PCB (UN1)
NOTE: After performing the above remedy work, go through
the following to clear the error: COPIER > FUNCTION >
CLEAR > ERR
Title
Abnormal low temperature when the Heater is ON
(disconnection detected)
Description After the Heater was turned ON, any of the Thermistors
detects 20 deg C or less for 3 sec.
Remedy
1. Go through the following to clear the error: COPIER >
FUNCTION > CLEAR > ERR; and then turn OFF and then
ON the power.
2. Check connection of the Connectors (Thermistor
Connector and AC Connector).
3. Replace the Film Unit
4. Replace the Fixing Assembly
5. Replace the DC Controller PCB (UN1)
NOTE: After performing the above remedy work, go through
the following to clear the error: COPIER > FUNCTION >
CLEAR > ERR
Title
Timeout at start-up
Description After the start-up control was started, the start-up control is
not completed although 60 sec has passed.
Remedy
1. Check connection of the Connectors (Thermistor
Connector and AC Connector).
2. Replace the Film Unit
3. Replace the Fixing Assembly
4. Replace the DC Controller PCB (UN1)
NOTE: After performing the above remedy work, go through
the following to clear the error: COPIER > FUNCTION >
CLEAR > ERR
0000
05
E004
0001
05
E009
0000
05
Item
Description
Title
Thermistor disconnection detection error
Description Signal name, FUSER_CNCTX, detects disconnection for
500 msec or longer.
Remedy
1. Check if the Fixing Assembly is installed.
2. Check connection of the connectors in Fixing Assembly.
3. Check connection of DC Controller PCB (UN1) Connector.
4. Replace the Film Unit.
5. Replace the Fixing Assembly.
6. Replace the DC Controller PCB (UN1).
Title
Error in detection of welding with fixing relay
Description Welding of fixing relay on the AC Driver PCB
Remedy
1. Replace the AC Driver PCB (replacement is necessary
due to welding of the relay).
Other fixing-related error occurs (highly possible of E001)
2. Perform the remedy for the error occurred.
Title
Error in engagement
Description Failed to detect ON with the Fixing Pressure Sensor
although 3 sec has passed.
Remedy
If it occurs at the time of the Fixing Assembly replacement, it
is highly possible that the installation of the Fixing Assembly
is insufficient. Therefore, remove and then reinstall the Fixing
Assembly first.
1. Turn OFF and then ON the power.
2. Remove the Fixing Assembly and then install the Fixing
Assembly (to reinstall)
3. Go through the following to move M22: COPIER >
FUNCTION > PART-CHK > MTR
If the Motor works properly
4-1. Replace the Fixing Assembly
5-1. Replace the DC Controller PCB (UN1)
If the Motor does not work properly
Mechanical failure.
4-2. Check if the Gear is damaged.
5-2. Replace the Motor.
7-5
7
Ecode Detail Location
Code
E009
0001
05
Item
7-6
Description
Title
Error in disengagement
Description Failed to detect OFF with the Fixing Pressure Sensor
although 3 sec has passed.
Remedy
If it occurs at the time of the Fixing Assembly replacement, it
is highly possible that the installation of the Fixing Assembly
is insufficient. Therefore, remove and then reinstall the Fixing
Assembly first.
0201
05
E012
0301
05
E012
0401
05
E012
0101
05
Item
Description
Title
Faulty signal with M Drum Rotation Sensor 1 and 2
Description Faulty signal with M Drum Rotation Sensor 1 and 2
Remedy
1. Check connection of Drum Rotation Sensor 1 and 2
(UN33, UN34)
2. Check that the Drum Rotation Sensor Wheel is properly
installed.
3. Check connection of the Drum Driver PCB (UN4).
4. Manually turn the Rotor of the Drum Motor
counterclockwise and check that the Drum Rotation Sensor
Wheel rotates. -> If the wheel does not rotate, replace the
Drum Drive Unit.
5. Take out the Drum Rotation Sensor to clean the Sensor
and the Wheel.
6. Replace the Drum Rotation Sensor.
7. Replace the Drum Driver PCB (UN4)
Title
Faulty signal with C Drum Rotation Sensor 1 and 2
Description Faulty signal with C Drum Rotation Sensor 1 and 2
Remedy
1. Check connection of Drum Rotation Sensor 1 and 2
(UN35, UN36)
2. Check that the Drum Rotation Sensor Wheel is properly
installed.
3. Check connection of the Drum Driver PCB (UN4).
4. Manually turn the Rotor of the Drum Motor
counterclockwise and check that the Drum Rotation Sensor
Wheel rotates. -> If the wheel does not rotate, replace the
Drum Drive Unit.
5. Take out the Drum Rotation Sensor to clean the Sensor
and the Wheel.
6. Replace the Drum Rotation Sensor.
7. Replace the Drum Driver PCB (UN4)
Title
Faulty signal with Bk Drum Rotation Sensor 1 and 2
Description Faulty signal with Bk Drum Rotation Sensor 1 and 2
Remedy
1. Check connection of Drum Rotation Sensor 1 and 2
(UN37, UN38)
2. Check that the Drum Rotation Sensor Wheel is properly
installed.
3. Check connection of the Drum Driver PCB (UN4).
4. Manually turn the Rotor of the Drum Motor
counterclockwise and check that the Drum Rotation Sensor
Wheel rotates. -> If the wheel does not rotate, replace the
Drum Drive Unit.
5. Take out the Drum Rotation Sensor to clean the Sensor
and the Wheel.
6. Replace the Drum Rotation Sensor.
7. Replace the Drum Driver PCB (UN4)
7-6
7
Ecode Detail Location
Code
E012
0102
05
E012
0202
05
E012
E012
E012
0302
0402
0103
05
05
05
Item
7-7
Description
Title
Faulty signal with Y Drum Rotation Sensor 1
Description No detection with the signal for 80msec or more
Remedy
1. Check connection of Drum Rotation Sensor 1.
2. Take out Drum Rotation Sensor 1 (UN31) to clean the
Sensor.
3. Replace Drum Rotation Sensor 1.
4. Check if the harness of the Drum Rotation Sensor is faulty
(replace the harness if its disconnected).
5. Replace the Drum Driver PCB (UN4)
Title
Faulty signal with M Drum Rotation Sensor 1
Description No detection with the signal for 80msec or more
Remedy
1. Check connection of Drum Rotation Sensor 1.
2. Take out Drum Rotation Sensor 1 (UN33) to clean the
Sensor.
3. Replace Drum Rotation Sensor 1.
4. Check if the harness of the Drum Rotation Sensor is faulty
(replace the harness if its disconnected).
5. Replace the Drum Driver PCB (UN4)
Title
Faulty signal with C Drum Rotation Sensor 1
Description No detection with the signal for 80msec or more
Remedy
1. Check connection of Drum Rotation Sensor 1.
2. Take out Drum Rotation Sensor 1 (UN35) to clean the
Sensor.
3. Replace Drum Rotation Sensor 1.
4. Check if the harness of the Drum Rotation Sensor is faulty
(replace the harness if its disconnected).
5. Replace the Drum Driver PCB (UN4)
Title
Faulty signal with Bk Drum Rotation Sensor 1
Description No detection with the signal for 80msec or more
Remedy
1. Check connection of Drum Rotation Sensor 1.
2. Take out Drum Rotation Sensor 1 (UN37) to clean the
Sensor.
3. Replace Drum Rotation Sensor 1.
4. Check if the harness of the Drum Rotation Sensor is faulty
(replace the harness if its disconnected).
5. Replace the Drum Driver PCB (UN4)
Title
Faulty signal with Y Drum Rotation Sensor 2
Description No detection with the signal for 80msec or more
Remedy
1. Check connection of Drum Rotation Sensor 2 (UN32).
2. Take out Drum Rotation Sensor 2 to clean the Sensor.
3. Replace Drum Rotation Sensor 2.
4. Check if the harness of the Drum Rotation Sensor is faulty
(replace the harness if its disconnected).
5. Replace the Drum Driver PCB (UN4)
0203
05
E012
0303
05
E012
0403
05
E012
0104
05
E012
0204
05
E012
0304
05
Item
Description
Title
Faulty signal with M Drum Rotation Sensor 2
Description No detection with the signal for 80msec or more
Remedy
1. Check connection of Drum Rotation Sensor 2 (UN34).
2. Take out Drum Rotation Sensor 2 to clean the Sensor.
3. Replace Drum Rotation Sensor 2.
4. Check if the harness of the Drum Rotation Sensor is faulty
(replace the harness if its disconnected).
5. Replace the Drum Driver PCB (UN4)
Title
Faulty signal with C Drum Rotation Sensor 2
Description No detection with the signal for 80msec or more
Remedy
1. Check connection of Drum Rotation Sensor 2 (UN36).
2. Take out Drum Rotation Sensor 2 to clean the Sensor.
3. Replace Drum Rotation Sensor 2.
4. Check if the harness of the Drum Rotation Sensor is faulty
(replace the harness if its disconnected).
5. Replace the Drum Driver PCB (UN4)
Title
Faulty signal with Bk Drum Rotation Sensor 2
Description No detection with the signal for 80msec or more
Remedy
1. Check connection of Drum Rotation Sensor 2 (UN38).
2. Take out Drum Rotation Sensor 2 to clean the Sensor.
3. Replace Drum Rotation Sensor 2.
4. Check if the harness of the Drum Rotation Sensor is faulty
(replace the harness if its disconnected).
5. Replace the Drum Driver PCB (UN4)
Title
Failure in Y Drum Rotation Sensor Wheel
Description Failure is detected with the Y Drum Rotation Sensor Wheel
Remedy
1. Take out the Drum Rotation Sensor to clean the Sensor
(UN31, UN32) and the Wheel.
2. Replace the Drum Rotation Sensor Wheel.
3. Replace the Drum Rotation Sensor.
4. Replace the Drum Driver PCB (UN4)
Title
Failure in M Drum Rotation Sensor Wheel
Description Failure is detected with the M Drum Rotation Sensor Wheel
Remedy
1. Take out the Drum Rotation Sensor to clean the Sensor
(UN33, UN34) and the Wheel.
2. Replace the Drum Rotation Sensor Wheel.
3. Replace the Drum Rotation Sensor.
4. Replace the Drum Driver PCB (UN4)
Title
Failure in C Drum Rotation Sensor Wheel
Description Failure is detected with the C Drum Rotation Sensor Wheel
Remedy
1. Take out the Drum Rotation Sensor to clean the Sensor
(UN35, UN36) and the Wheel.
2. Replace the Drum Rotation Sensor Wheel.
3. Replace the Drum Rotation Sensor.
4. Replace the Drum Driver PCB (UN4)
7-7
7
Ecode Detail Location
Code
E012
0404
05
E012
0105
05
E012
0205
05
E012
0305
05
E012
0405
05
Item
7-8
Description
Title
Failure in Bk Drum Rotation Sensor Wheel
Description Failure is detected with the Bk Drum Rotation Sensor Wheel
Remedy
1. Take out the Drum Rotation Sensor to clean the Sensor
(UN37, UN38) and the Wheel.
2. Replace the Drum Rotation Sensor Wheel.
3. Replace the Drum Rotation Sensor.
4. Replace the Drum Driver PCB (UN4)
Title
Failure in Y Drum Motor Control
Description Unstable rotation of the Y Drum Motor
Remedy
1. Check if the Drum is installed.
2. Take out the Drum Rotation Sensor (UN31, UN32) to
clean the Sensor and the Wheel.
3. Remove the Process Unit and then install (reinstall) the
Process Unit.
4. Replace the Drum Unit.
5. Replace the Drum Driver PCB (UN4)
Title
Failure in M Drum Motor Control
Description Unstable rotation of the M Drum Motor
Remedy
1. Check if the Drum is installed.
2. Take out the Drum Rotation Sensor (UN33, UN34) to
clean the Sensor and the Wheel.
3. Remove the Process Unit and then install (reinstall) the
Process Unit.
4. Replace the Drum Unit.
5. Replace the Drum Driver PCB (UN4)
Title
Failure in C Drum Motor Control
Description Unstable rotation of the C Drum Motor
Remedy
1. Check if the Drum is installed.
2. Take out the Drum Rotation Sensor (UN35, UN36) to
clean the Sensor and the Wheel.
3. Remove the Process Unit and then install (reinstall) the
Process Unit.
4. Replace the Drum Unit.
5. Replace the Drum Driver PCB (UN4)
Title
Failure in Bk Drum Motor Control
Description Unstable rotation of the Bk Drum Motor
Remedy
1. Check if the Drum is installed.
2. Take out the Drum Rotation Sensor (UN37, UN38) to
clean the Sensor and the Wheel.
3. Remove the Process Unit and then install (reinstall) the
Process Unit.
4. Replace the Drum Unit.
5. Replace the Drum Driver PCB (UN4)
0106
05
E012
0206
05
E012
0306
05
E012
0406
05
Item
Description
Title
Failure in rotation of Y Drum Motor
Description The Y Drum Motor is not rotating at the specified speed/is
stopped.
Remedy
1. Check connection of the connector with the Drum Motor
(M1)
2. Check connection of the connector with Drum Driver PCB
(UN4).
3. Check the ITB (to see if the ITB is displaced/damaged.
Refer to E075 if the ITB is displaced).
4. Replace the ITB Cleaning Blade.
5. Replace the Drum Driver PCB (UN4)
Title
Failure in rotation of M Drum Motor
Description The M Drum Motor is not rotating at the specified speed/is
stopped.
Remedy
1. Check connection of the connector with the Drum Motor
(M2)
2. Check connection of the connector with Drum Driver PCB
(UN4).
3. Check the ITB (to see if the ITB is displaced/damaged.
Refer to E075 if the ITB is displaced).
4. Replace the ITB Cleaning Blade.
5. Replace the Drum Driver PCB (UN4)
Title
Failure in rotation of C Drum Motor
Description The C Drum Motor is not rotating at the specified speed/is
stopped.
Remedy
1. Check connection of the connector with the Drum Motor
(M3)
2. Check connection of the connector with Drum Driver PCB
(UN4).
3. Check the ITB (to see if the ITB is displaced/damaged.
Refer to E075 if the ITB is displaced).
4. Replace the ITB Cleaning Blade.
5. Replace the Drum Driver PCB (UN4)
Title
Failure in rotation of Bk Drum Motor
Description The Bk Drum Motor is not rotating at the specified speed/is
stopped.
Remedy
1. Check connection of the connector with the Drum Motor
(M4)
2. Check connection of the connector with Drum Driver PCB
(UN4).
3. Check the ITB (to see if the ITB is displaced/damaged.
Refer to E075 if the ITB is displaced).
4. Replace the ITB Cleaning Blade.
5. Replace the Drum Driver PCB (UN4)
7-8
7
Ecode Detail Location
Code
E012
1000
05
E012
1001
05
E012
2000
05
E012
E012
E012
3000
3001
3002
05
05
05
Item
7-9
Description
Title
Failure in rotation when ITB Motor is driven.
Description The ITB Motor is not rotating at the specified speed/is
stopped.
Remedy
1. Check connection of the connector with the ITB Motor
(M13).
2. Check connection of the connector with the ITB Unit.
3. Check connection of the connector with the Drum Driver
PCB (UN4).
4. Check the ITB (to see if the ITB is displaced or damaged.
Refer to E075 if the ITB is displaced).
5. Replace the ITB Cleaning Blade.
6. Replace the Drum Driver PCB (UN4)
Title
Failure is detected before ITB motor is driven.
Description LOCK signal is detected Low before the ITB Motor is driven.
Remedy
1. Check the cable connected to the ITB Motor.
2. Check the cable connected to the Drum Driver PCB (UN4).
Title
Failure in rotation of Drum Motors (in all colors) and ITB
Motor
Description Faulty rotation with all of the Motors at the same time (based
on the assumption that all of the motors fail to rotate)
Remedy
1. Check the connector on the Drum Driver PCB (UN4).
2. Check the connector on the Relay Board (UN5).
3. Check the Interlock Switch.
4. Check the Drum Driver Harness.
Title
Failure in Drum Rotation Sensors (in all colors)
Description The Drum Rotation Sensors are faulty (in all colors) at the
same time.
Remedy
1. Check the connector on the Drum Driver PCB (UN4).
2. FU3 is disconnected on the Drum Driver PCB (UN4) ->
Check the harness & replace the Drum Driver PCB (UN4).
Title
Failure in control of Drum Motors in all colors
Description Controls of the Drum Motors (in all colors) are faulty at the
same time.
Remedy
Check the Process Unit (to see if its properly installed).
Check the Drum Unit (to see if its properly installed).
Title
Failure in rotation of Drum Motor (in all colors)
(M1,M2,M3,M4)
Description All of the Drum Motors are not rotating at the specified
speed/are stopped.
Remedy
Check the connector on the Drum Driver PCB (UN4).
0001
05
E014
0001
05
E020
0011
05
E020
0012
05
Item
Description
Title
Error in Recycle Toner Stirring Motor
Description The motor failed to rotate at the specified speed.
Remedy
1. Check disconnection of the Recycle Toner Stirring Motor
(M14)
2. Check toner level in the Recycle Toner container (replace
the Recycle Toner container if the toner level is too much).
3. Replace the Recycle Toner Stirring Motor.
4. Replace the Pickup Feed Driver PCB (UN2).
5. Replace the DC Controller PCB (UN1).
Title
Error in Fixing Motor
Description The motor failed to rotate at the specified speed.
Remedy
1. Check the Fixing Assembly.
2. Remove and then install the Fixing Assembly.
3. Replace the Fixing Assembly.
4. Replace the Fixing Motor.
5. Replace the DC Controller PCB (UN1).
Title
Error in Y Developing Assembly
Description Patch level is higher than the target upper limit although the
patch level was minimized at the time of patch initialization.
Remedy
Go through the following: DISPLAY > P-LED-DA; perform
cleaning first If P-LED-DA is 3F or more.
1. Check installation of the Developing Assembly and the
Drum.
2. Clean the Patch Sensor (UN47,UN48,UN49) Window.
3. Replace the Patch Sensor.
4. Replace the Drum.
Title
Error in M Developing Assembly
Description Patch level is higher than the target upper limit although the
patch level was minimized at the time of patch initialization.
Remedy
Go through the following: DISPLAY > P-LED-DA; perform
cleaning first If P-LED-DA is 3F or more.
1. Check installation of the Developing Assembly and the
Drum.
2. Clean the Patch Sensor (UN47,UN48,UN49) Window.
3. Replace the Patch Sensor.
4. Replace the Drum.
7-9
7
Ecode Detail Location
Code
E020
E020
E020
0013
0014
0021
05
05
05
Item
7-10
Description
Title
Error in C Developing Assembly
Description Patch level is higher than the target upper limit although the
patch level was minimized at the time of patch initialization.
Remedy
Go through the following: DISPLAY > P-LED-DA; perform
cleaning first If P-LED-DA is 3F or more.
1. Check installation of the Developing Assembly and the
Drum.
2. Clean the Patch Sensor (UN47,UN48,UN49) Window.
3. Replace the Patch Sensor.
4. Replace the Drum.
Title
Error in Bk Developing Assembly
Description Patch level is higher than the target upper limit although the
patch level was minimized at the time of patch initialization.
Remedy
Go through the following: DISPLAY > P-LED-DA; perform
cleaning first If P-LED-DA is 3F or more.
1. Check installation of the Developing Assembly and the
Drum.
2. Clean the Patch Sensor (UN47,UN48,UN49) Window.
3. Replace the Patch Sensor.
4. Replace the Drum.
Title
Error in Y Developing Assembly
Description Patch level is lower than the target lower limit although the
patch level was maximized at the time of patch initialization.
Remedy
Go through the following: DISPLAY > P-LED-DA; perform
cleaning first if P-LED-DA is 3F or more.
If the Patch Sensor (UN47, UN48,UN49) value shows 1-digit,
check that the Developing Assembly is installed, and then
perform remedy from 3.
1. Check installation of the Developing Assembly and the
Drum.
2. Clean the Patch Sensor Window.
3. Replace the Patch Sensor.
4. Replace the Drum.
E020
E020
0022
0023
0024
05
05
05
Item
Description
Title
Error in M Developing Assembly
Description Patch level is lower than the target lower limit although the
patch level was maximized at the time of patch initialization.
Remedy
Go through the following: DISPLAY > P-LED-DA; perform
cleaning first if P-LED-DA is 3F or more.
If the Patch Sensor (UN47, UN48,UN49) value shows 1-digit,
check that the Developing Assembly is installed, and then
perform remedy from 3.
1. Check installation of the Developing Assembly and the
Drum.
2. Clean the Patch Sensor Window.
3. Replace the Patch Sensor.
4. Replace the Drum.
Title
Error in C Developing Assembly
Description Patch level is lower than the target lower limit although the
patch level was maximized at the time of patch initialization.
Remedy
Go through the following: DISPLAY > P-LED-DA; perform
cleaning first if P-LED-DA is 3F or more.
If the Patch Sensor (UN47, UN48,UN49) value shows 1-digit,
check that the Developing Assembly is installed, and then
perform remedy from 3.
1. Check installation of the Developing Assembly and the
Drum.
2. Clean the Patch Sensor Window.
3. Replace the Patch Sensor.
4. Replace the Drum.
Title
Error in Bk Developing Assembly
Description Patch level is lower than the target lower limit although the
patch level was maximized at the time of patch initialization.
Remedy
Go through the following: DISPLAY > P-LED-DA; perform
cleaning first if P-LED-DA is 3F or more.
If the Patch Sensor (UN47, UN48,UN49) value shows 1-digit,
check that the Developing Assembly is installed, and then
perform remedy from 3.
1. Check installation of the Developing Assembly and the
Drum.
2. Clean the Patch Sensor Window.
3. Replace the Patch Sensor.
4. Replace the Drum.
7-10
7
Ecode Detail Location
Code
E020
E020
E020
0081
0101
0102
05
05
05
Item
7-11
Description
Title
Error in ITB background light intensity
Description At ITB background correction, average value of the detected
light intensity is 120 or less.
When it occurs twice in a row, error is displayed.
Remedy
This error tends to occur when the Patch Sensor window
is not opened sufficiency due to damage on the Patch
Detection Shutter.
Especially, when LV.2 > DISPLAY > DENS > P-LED-DA is
3F, check if the Patch Detection Shutter is damaged or the
Patch Sensor window is soiled.
E020
E020
E020
0103
0104
0201
05
05
05
Item
Description
Title
Error in C Developing Assembly
Description The value is higher than the upper limit for the patch.
Remedy
Go through the following: DISPLAY > P-LED-DA; perform
cleaning first If P-LED-DA is 3F or more.
1. Check installation of the Developing Assembly and the
Drum.
2. Clean the Patch Sensor (UN47,UN48,UN49) Window.
3. Check if the patch sensor is disconnected.
4. Replace the Patch Sensor.
5. Replace the Drum.
Title
Error in Bk Developing Assembly
Description The value is higher than the upper limit for the patch.
Remedy
Go through the following: DISPLAY > P-LED-DA; perform
cleaning first If P-LED-DA is 3F or more.
1. Check installation of the Developing Assembly and the
Drum.
2. Clean the Patch Sensor (UN47,UN48,UN49) Window.
3. Check if the patch sensor is disconnected.
4. Replace the Patch Sensor.
5. Replace the Drum.
Title
Error in Y Developing Assembly
Description The value is lower than the lower limit for the patch.
Remedy
Go through the following: DISPLAY > P-LED-DA; perform
cleaning first if P-LED-DA is 3F or more.
If the Patch Sensor (UN47,UN48,UN49) value shows 1-digit,
perform remedy from 3.
If the supply area of the Developing Assembly is badly
soiled, toner can be leaked.
1. Check installation of the Developing Assembly and the
Drum.
2. Clean the Patch Sensor Window.
3. Check if the patch sensor is disconnected.
4. Replace the Patch Sensor.
5. Replace the Drum.
6. Check toner leak from the Toner Buffer Unit.
7. Check toner level in the Toner Container.
8. Check short-circuit of the harness of the Toner Supply
Sensor (PS1).
7-11
7
Ecode Detail Location
Code
E020
E020
0202
0203
05
05
Item
7-12
Description
Title
Error in M Developing Assembly
Description The value is lower than the lower limit for the patch.
Remedy
Go through the following: DISPLAY > P-LED-DA; perform
cleaning first if P-LED-DA is 3F or more.
If the Patch Sensor (UN47,UN48,UN49) value shows 1-digit,
perform remedy from 3.
If the supply area of the Developing Assembly is badly
soiled, toner can be leaked.
1. Check installation of the Developing Assembly and the
Drum.
2. Clean the Patch Sensor Window.
3. Check if the patch sensor is disconnected.
4. Replace the Patch Sensor.
5. Replace the Drum.
6. Check toner leak from the Toner Buffer Unit.
7. Check toner level in the Toner Container.
8. Check short-circuit of the harness of the Toner Supply
Sensor (PS2).
Title
Error in C Developing Assembly
Description The value is lower than the lower limit for the patch.
Remedy
Go through the following: DISPLAY > P-LED-DA; perform
cleaning first if P-LED-DA is 3F or more.
If the Patch Sensor (UN47,UN48,UN49) value shows 1-digit,
perform remedy from 3.
If the supply area of the Developing Assembly is badly
soiled, toner can be leaked.
1. Check installation of the Developing Assembly and the
Drum.
2. Clean the Patch Sensor Window.
3. Check if the patch sensor is disconnected.
4. Replace the Patch Sensor.
5. Replace the Drum.
6. Check toner leak from the Toner Buffer Unit.
7. Check toner level in the Toner Container.
8. Check short-circuit of the harness of the Toner Supply
Sensor (PS3).
E020
0204
0130
05
05
Item
Title
Error in Bk Developing Assembly
Description The value is lower than the lower limit for the patch.
Remedy
Go through the following: DISPLAY > P-LED-DA; perform
cleaning first if P-LED-DA is 3F or more.
If the Patch Sensor (UN47,UN48,UN49) value shows 1-digit,
perform remedy from 3.
If the supply area of the Developing Assembly is badly
soiled, toner can be leaked.
Title
Description
Remedy
E020
0131
05
Title
Description
Remedy
E020
0140
05
Title
Description
Remedy
E020
0141
05
Title
Description
Remedy
Description
7-12
7
Ecode Detail Location
Code
E020
0190
05
E020
0191
05
E020
E020
E020
01B0
01B1
0230
05
05
05
Item
7-13
Description
Title
Error in Y Developing Assembly
Description Error in signal lower limit with ATR sampling detected value
Remedy
1. Check if the ATR Sensor Connector is disconnected.
2. Check short-circuit of the ATR Sensor (TS5) Harness.
3. Replace the Developing Assembly.
Title
Error in Y Developing Assembly
Description Error in signal upper limit with ATR sampling detected value
Remedy
1. Check toner leak from the Toner Buffer Unit.
2. Check toner level in the Toner Container.
3. Replace the Developing Assembly.
4. Check short-circuit of the harness with the Toner Buffer
Supply Sensor (PS1).
Title
Error in Y Developing Assembly
Description Error in upper limit with T/D ratio at the time of print
sequence
(Large amount of toner in the Developing Assembly)
Remedy
Go through the following: DISPLAY > DENS > DENS-Y; if
DENS-Y is slightly higher than 5.0%, output 10 sheets of
solid image with the color causing the error (to reduce T/
D ratio). See the Service Mode again to see if the problem
is improved. Remedy is complete if its improved. If not,
perform the following remedy work.
1. Check if the ATR Sensor (TS5) Connector is disconnected.
2. Check short-circuit of the ATR Sensor Harness.
3. Replace the Developing Assembly.
Title
Error in Y Developing Assembly
Description Error in lower limit with T/D ratio at the time of print sequence
(Small amount of toner in the Developing Assembly)
Remedy
1. Output 10 sheets of white (blank) sheets (to increase T/D
ratio).
2. Check toner leak from the Toner Buffer Unit.
3. Check toner level in the Toner Container.
4. Replace the Developing Assembly.
5. Check short-circuit of the harness of the Toner supply
sensor (PS1).
Title
Error in M Developing Assembly
Description The average of ATR reference value is more than the
specified value at the time of ATR initialization.
Remedy
1. Check short-circuit of the ATR Sensor (TS6) Harness.
2. Replace the Developing Assembly.
0231
05
E020
0240
05
E020
0241
05
E020
0290
05
E020
0291
05
E020
02B0
05
Item
Description
Title
Error in M Developing Assembly
Description The average of ATR reference value is less than the
specified value at the time of ATR initialization.
Remedy
1. Check if the ATR Sensor (TS6) Connector is properly
connected.
2. Check short-circuit of the ATR Sensor Harness.
3. Replace the Developing Assembly.
Title
Error in M Developing Assembly
Description Unable to adjust the control voltage at the time of ATR
initialization: less than the specified value (3.2V).
Remedy
1. Check if the ATR Sensor (TS6) Connector is properly
connected.
2. Check short-circuit of the ATR Sensor Harness.
3. Replace the Developing Assembly.
Title
Error in M Developing Assembly
Description Unable to adjust the control voltage at the time of ATR
initialization: exceeds the specified value (6.8V).
Remedy
1. Check short-circuit of the ATR Sensor (TS6) Harness.
2. Replace the Developing Assembly.
Title
Error in M Developing Assembly
Description Error in signal lower limit with ATR sampling detected value
Remedy
1. Check if the ATR Sensor Connector is disconnected.
2. Check short-circuit of the ATR Sensor (TS6) Harness.
3. Replace the Developing Assembly.
Title
Error in M Developing Assembly
Description Error in signal upper limit with ATR sampling detected value
Remedy
1. Check toner leak from the Toner Buffer Unit.
2. Check toner level in the Toner Container.
3. Replace the Developing Assembly.
4. Check short-circuit of the harness with the Toner Buffer
Supply Sensor (PS2).
Title
Error in M Developing Assembly
Description Error in upper limit with T/D ratio at the time of print
sequence
(Large amount of toner in the Developing Assembly)
Remedy
Go through the following: DISPLAY > DENS > DENS-M; if
DENS-M is slightly higher than 5.0%, output 10 sheets of
solid image with the color causing the error (to reduce T/
D ratio). See the Service Mode again to see if the problem
is improved. Remedy is complete if its improved. If not,
perform the following remedy work.
1. Check if the ATR Sensor (TS6) Connector is disconnected.
2. Check short-circuit of the ATR Sensor Harness.
3. Replace the Developing Assembly.
7-13
7
Ecode Detail Location
Code
E020
02B1
05
E020
0330
05
E020
E020
E020
E020
E020
0331
0340
0341
0390
0391
05
05
05
05
05
Item
7-14
Description
Title
Error in M Developing Assembly
Description Error in lower limit with T/D ratio at the time of print sequence
(Small amount of toner in the Developing Assembly)
Remedy
1. Output 10 sheets of white (blank) sheets (to increase T/D
ratio).
2. Check toner leak from the Toner Buffer Unit.
3. Check toner level in the Toner Container.
4. Replace the Developing Assembly.
5. Check short-circuit of the harness of the Toner supply
sensor (PS2).
Title
Error in C Developing Assembly
Description The average of ATR reference value is more than the
specified value at the time of ATR initialization.
Remedy
1. Check short-circuit of the ATR Sensor (TS7) Harness.
2. Replace the Developing Assembly.
Title
Error in C Developing Assembly
Description The average of ATR reference value is less than the
specified value at the time of ATR initialization.
Remedy
1. Check if the ATR Sensor (TS7) Connector is properly
connected.
2. Check short-circuit of the ATR Sensor Harness.
3. Replace the Developing Assembly.
Title
Error in C Developing Assembly
Description Unable to adjust the control voltage at the time of ATR
initialization: less than the specified value (3.2V).
Remedy
1. Check if the ATR Sensor (TS7) Connector is properly
connected.
2. Check short-circuit of the ATR Sensor Harness.
3. Replace the Developing Assembly.
Title
Error in C Developing Assembly
Description Unable to adjust the control voltage at the time of ATR
initialization: exceeds the specified value (6.8V).
Remedy
1. Check short-circuit of the ATR Sensor (TS7) Harness.
2. Replace the Developing Assembly.
Title
Error in C Developing Assembly
Description Error in signal lower limit with ATR sampling detected value
Remedy
1. Check if the ATR Sensor Connector is disconnected.
2. Check short-circuit of the ATR Sensor (TS7) Harness.
3. Replace the Developing Assembly.
Title
Error in C Developing Assembly
Description Error in signal upper limit with ATR sampling detected value
Remedy
1. Check toner leak from the Toner Buffer Unit.
2. Check toner level in the Toner Container.
3. Replace the Developing Assembly.
4. Check short-circuit of the harness with the Toner Buffer
Supply Sensor (PS3).
E020
03B0
03B1
05
05
Item
Title
Error in C Developing Assembly
Description Error in upper limit with T/D ratio at the time of print
sequence
(Large amount of toner in the Developing Assembly)
Remedy
Go through the following: DISPLAY > DENS > DENS-C; if
DENS-C is slightly higher than 5.0%, output 10 sheets of
solid image with the color causing the error (to reduce T/
D ratio). See the Service Mode again to see if the problem
is improved. Remedy is complete if its improved. If not,
perform the following remedy work.
Title
Description
Remedy
E020
0430
05
Title
Description
Remedy
E020
0431
05
Title
Description
Remedy
E020
0440
05
Description
Title
Description
Remedy
7-14
7
Ecode Detail Location
Code
E020
0441
05
E020
0490
05
E020
0491
05
E020
E020
04B0
04B1
05
05
Item
7-15
Description
Title
Error in Bk Developing Assembly
Description Unable to adjust the control voltage at the time of ATR
initialization: exceeds the specified value (6.8V).
Remedy
1. Check short-circuit of the ATR Sensor (TS8) Harness.
2. Replace the Developing Assembly.
Title
Error in Bk Developing Assembly
Description Error in signal lower limit with ATR sampling detected value
Remedy
1. Check if the ATR Sensor Connector is disconnected.
2. Check short-circuit of the ATR Sensor (TS8) Harness.
3. Replace the Developing Assembly.
Title
Error in Bk Developing Assembly
Description Error in signal upper limit with ATR sampling detected value
Remedy
1. Check toner leak from the Toner Buffer Unit.
2. Check toner level in the Toner Container.
3. Replace the Developing Assembly.
4. Check short-circuit of the harness with the Toner Buffer
Supply Sensor (PS4).
Title
Error in Bk Developing Assembly
Description Error in upper limit with T/D ratio at the time of print
sequence
(Large amount of toner in the Developing Assembly)
Remedy
Go through the following: DISPLAY > DENS > DENS-K; if
DENS-K is slightly higher than 5.0%, output 10 sheets of
solid image with the color causing the error (to reduce T/
D ratio). See the Service Mode again to see if the problem
is improved. Remedy is complete if its improved. If not,
perform the following remedy work.
1. Check if the ATR Sensor (TS8) Connector is disconnected.
2. Check short-circuit of the ATR Sensor Harness.
3. Replace the Developing Assembly.
Title
Error in Bk Developing Assembly
Description Error in lower limit with T/D ratio at the time of print sequence
(Small amount of toner in the Developing Assembly)
Remedy
1. Output 10 sheets of white (blank) sheets (to increase T/D
ratio).
2. Check toner leak from the Toner Buffer Unit.
3. Check toner level in the Toner Container.
4. Replace the Developing Assembly.
5. Check short-circuit of the harness of the Toner supply
sensor (PS4).
0100
05
E021
0200
05
E021
0300
05
Item
Description
Title
Error in Y Developing Motor
Description The motor failed to rotate at the specified speed.
Remedy
1. Check the load applied to the Developing Assembly (turn
the gear with your hand to check if the load is appropriate. If
the load is too much, replace the Developing Assembly).
2. Select the following in Service Mode: COPIER >
FUNCTION > PART-CHK > MTR; and turn M5 to check
the drive of the Developing Motor. If its not rotating
properly, check the harness (to see if the harness is caught,
disconnected or physically removed).
3.(If the above measures do not solve the problem,) replace
the Drum Driver PCB (UN4).
Title
Error in M Developing Motor
Description The motor failed to rotate at the specified speed.
Remedy
1. Check the load applied to the Developing Assembly (turn
the gear with your hand to check if the load is appropriate. If
the load is too much, replace the Developing Assembly).
2. Select the following in Service Mode: COPIER >
FUNCTION > PART-CHK > MTR; and turn M6 to check
the drive of the Developing Motor. If its not rotating
properly, check the harness (to see if the harness is caught,
disconnected or physically removed).
3.(If the above measures do not solve the problem,) replace
the Drum Driver PCB (UN4).
Title
Error in C Developing Motor
Description The motor failed to rotate at the specified speed.
Remedy
1. Check the load applied to the Developing Assembly (turn
the gear with your hand to check if the load is appropriate. If
the load is too much, replace the Developing Assembly).
2. Select the following in Service Mode: COPIER >
FUNCTION > PART-CHK > MTR; and turn M7 to check
the drive of the Developing Motor. If its not rotating
properly, check the harness (to see if the harness is caught,
disconnected or physically removed).
3.(If the above measures do not solve the problem,) replace
the Drum Driver PCB (UN4).
7-15
7
Ecode Detail Location
Code
E021
0400
05
E025
0100
05
Item
7-16
Description
Title
Error in Bk Developing Motor
Description The motor failed to rotate at the specified speed.
Remedy
1. Check the load applied to the Developing Assembly (turn
the gear with your hand to check if the load is appropriate. If
the load is too much, replace the Developing Assembly).
2. Select the following in Service Mode: COPIER >
FUNCTION > PART-CHK > MTR; and turn M8 to check
the drive of the Developing Motor. If its not rotating
properly, check the harness (to see if the harness is caught,
disconnected or physically removed).
3.(If the above measures do not solve the problem,) replace
the Drum Driver PCB (UN4).
Title
Error in lock of the Y Toner Container Motor
Description The Y Toner Container Motor is detected to be locked / lock
detection.
Remedy
1. Use the attached tool to manually rotate the Main Drive
Unit to check the operation (by comparing with other color,
etc.)
If the manual rotating operation results in NG, perform the
following because its due to mechanical overload.
If there is no problem, go to step 5.
2. Remove the Delivery Tray to check the position of the
projection attached at the back of the gear in the Hopper
Assembly. Compare with the gear that works properly. If the
position of the projection is displaced, check the following.
Check the lever to open/close the Toner Small Cover (to see
if the operation is smooth, no damage with the lever, the
lever works OK (no wrong move to up/down). If the lever is
faulty, replace the lever.
3. Remove the Main Drive Unit to check the unit (to see
damage, etc.)
If its results in NG, replace the Main Drive Unit.
4. Manually turn the gear on the cam in the hopper unit to
check the rotation.
If its results in NG, replace the Set-on Hopper Unit.
5.(If the above measures do not solve the problem) Replace
the Toner Container Motor (M9).
Replace the Drum Driver PCB (UN4).
0110
05
E025
0120
05
Item
Description
Title
7-16
7
Ecode Detail Location
Code
E025
0200
05
Item
7-17
Description
Title
Error in lock of the M Toner Container Motor
Description The M Toner Container Motor is detected to be locked / lock
detection.
Remedy
1. Use the attached tool to manually rotate the Main Drive
Unit to check the operation (by comparing with other color,
etc.)
If the manual rotating operation results in NG, perform the
following because its due to mechanical overload.
If there is no problem, go to step 5.
2. Remove the Delivery Tray to check the position of the
projection attached at the back of the gear in the Hopper
Assembly. Compare with the gear that works properly. If the
position of the projection is displaced, check the following.
Check the lever to open/close the Toner Small Cover (to see
if the operation is smooth, no damage with the lever, the
lever works OK (no wrong move to up/down). If the lever is
faulty, replace the lever.
3. Remove the Main Drive Unit to check the unit (to see
damage, etc.)
If its results in NG, replace the Main Drive Unit.
4. Manually turn the gear on the cam in the hopper unit to
check the rotation.
If its results in NG, replace the Set-on Hopper Unit.
5.(If the above measures do not solve the problem) Replace
the Toner Container Motor (M10).
Replace the Drum Driver PCB (UN4).
0210
05
E025
0220
05
Item
Description
Title
7-17
7
Ecode Detail Location
Code
E025
0300
05
Item
7-18
Description
Title
Error in lock of the C Toner Container Motor
Description The C Toner Container Motor is detected to be locked / lock
detection.
Remedy
1. Use the attached tool to manually rotate the Main Drive
Unit to check the operation (by comparing with other color,
etc.)
If the manual rotating operation results in NG, perform the
following because its due to mechanical overload.
If there is no problem, go to step 5.
2. Remove the Delivery Tray to check the position of the
projection attached at the back of the gear in the Hopper
Assembly. Compare with the gear that works properly. If the
position of the projection is displaced, check the following.
Check the lever to open/close the Toner Small Cover (to see
if the operation is smooth, no damage with the lever, the
lever works OK (no wrong move to up/down). If the lever is
faulty, replace the lever.
3. Remove the Main Drive Unit to check the unit (to see
damage, etc.)
If its results in NG, replace the Main Drive Unit.
4. Manually turn the gear on the cam in the hopper unit to
check the rotation.
If its results in NG, replace the Set-on Hopper Unit.
5.(If the above measures do not solve the problem) Replace
the Toner Container Motor (M11).
Replace the Drum Driver PCB (UN4).
0310
05
E025
0320
05
Item
Description
Title
7-18
7
Ecode Detail Location
Code
E025
0400
05
Item
7-19
Description
Title
Error in lock of the Bk Toner Container Motor
Description The Bk Toner Container Motor is detected to be locked / lock
detection.
Remedy
1. Use the attached tool to manually rotate the Main Drive
Unit to check the operation (by comparing with other color,
etc.)
If the manual rotating operation results in NG, perform the
following because its due to mechanical overload.
If there is no problem, go to step 5.
2. Remove the Delivery Tray to check the position of the
projection attached at the back of the gear in the Hopper
Assembly. Compare with the gear that works properly. If the
position of the projection is displaced, check the following.
Check the lever to open/close the Toner Small Cover (to see
if the operation is smooth, no damage with the lever, the
lever works OK (no wrong move to up/down). If the lever is
faulty, replace the lever.
3. Remove the Main Drive Unit to check the unit (to see
damage, etc.)
If its results in NG, replace the Main Drive Unit.
4. Manually turn the gear on the cam in the hopper unit to
check the rotation.
If its results in NG, replace the Set-on Hopper Unit.
5.(If the above measures do not solve the problem) Replace
the Toner Container Motor (M12).
Replace the Drum Driver PCB (UN4).
0410
05
E025
0420
05
Item
Description
Title
7-19
7
Ecode Detail Location
Code
E025
01A0
05
Item
7-20
Description
Title
Error in Y Toner Container Cam HP Sensor (PS5)
Description Unable to detect the change in sensor status (ON -> OFF)
when the Set-on Unit opens the Toner Container so that
open and close status cannot be judged correctly.
Remedy
[1] Identify the cause of the error whether it is due to
mechanical problem to open and close the Toner Container
or electrical problem at the sensor side.
1. Check if the Toner Container Cam HP Sensor is soiled
and the installation of the sensor.
2. Use the attached tool to manually rotate the Set-on Drive
to check that the output value of the sensor is switched in
service mode.
It is difficult to check the screen while rotating the Set-on
Drive. Thus, rotate it a little and check the screen. If the
value is not changed, rotate it a little again and check the
operation.
Service mode I/O
Toner Container Cam HP Sensor (Y) PS5: COPIER/IO/
O-SENSOR/P024 bit4
3. If the Set-on Drive Unit side fails to rotate, check the drive.
(Damage of gear, etc.)
If it is due to damage of the drive system, replace the Seton Drive Unit.
4. If the Set-on Unit side fails to rotate while the Drive
Unit rotates, remove the Hopper Unit to check the rotating
operation.
If it does not rotate, replace the Hopper Unit.
01B0
05
Item
Description
Title
Error in Y Toner Container Cam HP Sensor (PS5)
Description Unable to detect the change in sensor status (OFF -> ON)
when the Set-on Unit closes the Toner Container so that
open and close status cannot be judged correctly.
Remedy
"[1] Identify the cause of the error whether it is due to
mechanical problem to open and close the Toner Container
or electrical problem at the sensor side.
1. Check the installation of the Toner Container Cam HP
Sensor.
2. Use the attached tool to manually rotate the Set-on Drive
to check that the output value of the sensor is switched in
service mode.
It is difficult to check the screen while rotating the Set-on
Drive. Thus, rotate it a little and check the screen. If the
value is not changed, rotate it a little again and check the
operation.
Service mode I/O
Toner Container Cam HP Sensor (Y) PS5: COPIER/IO/
O-SENSOR/P024 bit4
2. If the Set-on Drive Unit side fails to rotate, check the drive.
(Damage of gear, etc.)
If it is due to damage of the drive system, replace the Seton Drive Unit.
4. If the Set-on Unit side fails to rotate while the Drive
Unit rotates, remove the Hopper Unit to check the rotating
operation.
If it does not rotate, replace the Hopper Unit.
7-20
7
Ecode Detail Location
Code
E025
01C0
05
Item
7-21
Description
Title
Error in Cover Sensor (PS13) in Y Toner Container
Description When removing the Toner Container, opening of Small
Covers cannot be detected.
Remedy
[1] Check open/close detection area around the Inner Door.
1. Check that the Inner Door can be opened/closed normally.
(Damage of the Inner Door, or slide of shaft area)
2. Check if the sensor is soiled and the installation of it.
Item
Description
NOTE: After performing the remedy work, perform the
following operation check regardless the cause of the error.
Go through the following to clear the error:
COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR; then, turn OFF and
then ON the power.
In user mode, perform the toner replacement operation (from
toner removal to reset/recovery) at least once, and check
that the replacement operation can be performed normally.
7-21
7
Ecode Detail Location
Code
E025
02A0
05
Item
7-22
Description
Title
Error in M Toner Container Cam HP Sensor (PS6)
Description Unable to detect the change in sensor status (ON -> OFF)
when the Set-on Unit opens the Toner Container so that
open and close status cannot be judged correctly.
Remedy
[1] Identify the cause of the error whether it is due to
mechanical problem to open and close the Toner Container
or electrical problem at the sensor side.
1. Check if the Toner Container Cam HP Sensor is soiled
and the installation of the sensor.
2. Use the attached tool to manually rotate the Set-on Drive
to check that the output value of the sensor is switched in
service mode.
It is difficult to check the screen while rotating the Set-on
Drive. Thus, rotate it a little and check the screen. If the
value is not changed, rotate it a little again and check the
operation.
Service mode I/O
Toner Container Cam HP Sensor (M) PS6: COPIER/IO/
O-SENSOR/P024 bit5
3. If the Set-on Drive Unit side fails to rotate, check the drive.
(Damage of gear, etc.)
If it is due to damage of the drive system, replace the Seton Drive Unit.
4. If the Set-on Unit side fails to rotate while the Drive
Unit rotates, remove the Hopper Unit to check the rotating
operation.
If it does not rotate, replace the Hopper Unit.
02B0
05
Item
Description
Title
Error in M Toner Container Cam HP Sensor (PS6)
Description Unable to detect the change in sensor status (OFF -> ON)
when the Set-on Unit closes the Toner Container so that
open and close status cannot be judged correctly.
Remedy
[1] Identify the cause of the error whether it is due to
mechanical problem to open and close the Toner Container
or electrical problem at the sensor side.
1. Check the installation of the Toner Container Cam HP
Sensor.
2. Use the attached tool to manually rotate the Set-on Drive
to check that the output value of the sensor is switched in
service mode.
It is difficult to check the screen while rotating the Set-on
Drive. Thus, rotate it a little and check the screen. If the
value is not changed, rotate it a little again and check the
operation.
Service mode I/O
Toner Container Cam HP Sensor (M) PS6: COPIER/IO/
O-SENSOR/P024 bit5
3. If the Set-on Drive Unit side fails to rotate, check the drive.
(Damage of gear, etc.)
If it is due to damage of the drive system, replace the Seton Drive Unit.
4. If the Set-on Unit side fails to rotate while the Drive
Unit rotates, remove the Hopper Unit to check the rotating
operation.
If it does not rotate, replace the Hopper Unit.
7-22
7
Ecode Detail Location
Code
E025
02C0
05
Item
7-23
Description
Title
Error in Cover Sensor (PS14) in M Toner Container
Description When removing the Toner Container, opening of Small
Covers cannot be detected.
Remedy
[1] Check open/close detection area around the Inner Door.
1. Check that the Inner Door can be opened/closed normally.
(Damage of the Inner Door, or slide of shaft area)
2. Check if the sensor is soiled and the installation of it.
Item
Description
NOTE: After performing the remedy work, perform the
following operation check regardless the cause of the error.
Go through the following to clear the error:
COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR; then, turn OFF and
then ON the power.
In user mode, perform the toner replacement operation (from
toner removal to reset/recovery) at least once, and check
that the replacement operation can be performed normally.
7-23
7
Ecode Detail Location
Code
E025
03A0
05
Item
7-24
Description
Title
Error in C Toner Container Cam HP Sensor (PS7)
Description Unable to detect the change in sensor status (ON -> OFF)
when the Set-on Unit opens the Toner Container so that
open and close status cannot be judged correctly.
Remedy
[1] Identify the cause of the error whether it is due to
mechanical problem to open and close the Toner Container
or electrical problem at the sensor side.
1. Check if the Toner Container Cam HP Sensor is soiled
and the installation of the sensor.
2. Use the attached tool to manually rotate the Set-on Drive
to check that the output value of the sensor is switched in
service mode.
It is difficult to check the screen while rotating the Set-on
Drive. Thus, rotate it a little and check the screen. If the
value is not changed, rotate it a little again and check the
operation.
Service mode I/O
Toner Container Cam HP Sensor (C) PS7: COPIER/IO/
O-SENSOR/P024 bit6
3. If the Set-on Drive Unit side fails to rotate, check the drive.
(Damage of gear, etc.)
If it is due to damage of the drive system, replace the Seton Drive Unit.
4. If the Set-on Unit side fails to rotate while the Drive
Unit rotates, remove the Hopper Unit to check the rotating
operation.
If it does not rotate, replace the Hopper Unit.
03B0
05
Item
Description
Title
Error in C Toner Container Cam HP Sensor (PS7)
Description Unable to detect the change in sensor status (OFF -> ON)
when the Set-on Unit closes the Toner Container so that
open and close status cannot be judged correctly.
Remedy
[1] Identify the cause of the error whether it is due to
mechanical problem to open and close the Toner Container
or electrical problem at the sensor side.
1. Check the installation of the Toner Container Cam HP
Sensor.
2. Use the attached tool to manually rotate the Set-on Drive
to check that the output value of the sensor is switched in
service mode.
It is difficult to check the screen while rotating the Set-on
Drive. Thus, rotate it a little and check the screen. If the
value is not changed, rotate it a little again and check the
operation.
Service mode I/O
Toner Container Cam HP Sensor (C) PS7: COPIER/IO/
O-SENSOR/P024 bit6
3. If the Set-on Drive Unit side fails to rotate, check the drive.
(Damage of gear, etc.)
If it is due to damage of the drive system, replace the Seton Drive Unit.
4. If the Set-on Unit side fails to rotate while the Drive
Unit rotates, remove the Hopper Unit to check the rotating
operation.
If it does not rotate, replace the Hopper Unit.
7-24
7
Ecode Detail Location
Code
E025
03C0
05
Item
7-25
Description
Title
Error in Cover Sensor (PS15) in C Toner Container
Description When removing the Toner Container, opening of Small
Covers cannot be detected.
Remedy
[1] Check open/close detection area around the Inner Door.
1. Check that the Inner Door can be opened/closed normally.
(Damage of the Inner Door, or slide of shaft area)
2. Check if the sensor is soiled and the installation of it.
Item
Description
NOTE: After performing the remedy work, perform the
following operation check regardless the cause of the error.
Go through the following to clear the error:
COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR; then, turn OFF and
then ON the power.
In user mode, perform the toner replacement operation (from
toner removal to reset/recovery) at least once, and check
that the replacement operation can be performed normally.
7-25
7
Ecode Detail Location
Code
E025
04A0
05
Item
7-26
Description
Title
Error in Bk Toner Container Cam HP Sensor (PS8)
Description Unable to detect the change in sensor status (ON -> OFF)
when the Set-on Unit opens the Toner Container so that
open and close status cannot be judged correctly.
Remedy
[1] Identify the cause of the error whether it is due to
mechanical problem to open and close the Toner Container
or electrical problem at the sensor side.
1. Check if the Toner Container Cam HP Sensor is soiled
and the installation of the sensor.
2. Use the attached tool to manually rotate the Set-on Drive
to check that the output value of the sensor is switched in
service mode.
It is difficult to check the screen while rotating the Set-on
Drive. Thus, rotate it a little and check the screen. If the
value is not changed, rotate it a little again and check the
operation.
Service mode I/O
Toner Container Cam HP Sensor (Bk) PS8: COPIER/IO/
O-SENSOR/P024 bit7
3. If the Set-on Drive Unit side fails to rotate, check the drive.
(Damage of gear, etc.)
If it is due to damage of the drive system, replace the Set-on
Drive Unit.
4. If the Set-on Unit side fails to rotate while the Drive
Unit rotates, remove the Hopper Unit to check the rotating
operation.
If it does not rotate, replace the Hopper Unit.
04B0
05
Item
Description
Title
Error in Bk Toner Container Cam HP Sensor (PS8)
Description Unable to detect the change in sensor status (OFF -> ON)
when the Set-on Unit closes the Toner Container so that
open and close status cannot be judged correctly.
Remedy
[1] Identify the cause of the error whether it is due to
mechanical problem to open and close the Toner Container
or electrical problem at the sensor side.
1. Check the installation of the Toner Container Cam HP
Sensor.
2. Use the attached tool to manually rotate the Set-on Drive
to check that the output value of the sensor is switched in
service mode.
It is difficult to check the screen while rotating the Set-on
Drive. Thus, rotate it a little and check the screen. If the
value is not changed, rotate it a little again and check the
operation.
Service mode I/O
Toner Container Cam HP Sensor (Bk) PS8: COPIER/IO/
O-SENSOR/P024 bit7
3. If the Set-on Drive Unit side fails to rotate, check the drive.
(Damage of gear, etc.)
If it is due to damage of the drive system, replace the Seton Drive Unit.
4. If the Set-on Unit side fails to rotate while the Drive
Unit rotates, remove the Hopper Unit to check the rotating
operation.
If it does not rotate, replace the Hopper Unit.
7-26
7
Ecode Detail Location
Code
E025
04C0
05
Item
7-27
Description
Title
Error in Cover Sensor (PS16) in Bk Toner Container
Description When removing the Toner Container, opening of Small
Covers cannot be detected.
Remedy
[1] Check open/close detection area around the Inner Door.
1. Check that the Inner Door can be opened/closed normally.
(Damage of the Inner Door, or slide of shaft area)
2. Check if the sensor is soiled and the installation of it.
[2] In the case that the Inner Door opens/closes normally
and there is no problem with the installation of the sensor,
identify the cause of the error whether it is due to mechanical
problem of the link area to open the Inner Door or electrical
problem at the sensor side.
3. Check that the output value of the sensor is switched
correctly in service mode when opening and closing the
Inner Door manually.
Service mode I/O
Toner Container Inner Cover Sensor (Bk) PS16: COPIER/IO/
O-SENSOR/P024 bit11
[3] In the case that the sensor signal changes correctly, it is
highly possible that mechanical problem of the link area to
open the Inner Door is the cause of the error.
2. Use the attached tool to manually rotate the Set-on Drive
to check that the Inner Door is opened (be sure to open the
Outer Door beforehand). If the Inner Door is not opened by
manually rotating the Set-on Drive, mechanical damage is
suspected so replace the part which does not operate.
(Order from upstream of the drive: Set-on Drive Unit -> Seton Hopper Unit -> Bottle Base Unit -> Bottle Front Inner
Door Unit)
E027
0100
05
Item
Description
[4] In the case that the sensor signal does not change
correctly, it is highly possible that electrical problem of the
sensor which detects opening/closing of the Inner Door is
the cause of the error.
5. Check the Sensor Harness (to see if the Harness is
caught, disconnected or physically removed, *including the
Relay Connector).
6. Replace the sensor which has been checked in step 5.
7. (If the measures above do not solve the problem) Replace
the Drum Driver PCB (UN4).
7-27
7
Ecode Detail Location
Code
E027
0200
05
E027
0300
05
Item
7-28
Description
Title
Error in supply with M Developing Assembly
Description Failure in detection about the changes of ON => OFF =>
ON with the sensor which detects a full rotation of the supply
screw within the specified period of time.
Remedy
1. Check the damage of the Developing Coupling.
If its damaged, replace the Developing Assembly.
2. Check the damage of the coupling (with the Developing
Assembly) at the Host Machine side.
If its damaged, remove the Main Drive Unit to replace the
coupling.
3. Turn the motor as a single unit while the Drum/Developing
Assembly is removed to check rotation of the Main Drive
Unit.
If it does not rotate, replace the Motor.
If the above measures do not solve the problem, replace the
Drum Driver PCB (UN4).
If there still remains the problem, replace the Main Drive
Unit.
4. Remove the Hopper Unit and manually turn the Supply
Input Gear to check rotation.
If its results in NG, replace the Hopper Unit.
Title
Error in supply with C Developing Assembly
Description Failure in detection about the changes of ON => OFF =>
ON with the sensor which detects a full rotation of the supply
screw within the specified period of time.
Remedy
1. Check the damage of the Developing Coupling.
If its damaged, replace the Developing Assembly.
2. Check the damage of the coupling (with the Developing
Assembly) at the Host Machine side.
If its damaged, remove the Main Drive Unit to replace the
coupling.
3. Turn the motor as a single unit while the Drum/Developing
Assembly is removed to check rotation of the Main Drive
Unit.
If it does not rotate, replace the Motor.
If the above measures do not solve the problem, replace the
Drum Driver PCB (UN4).
If there still remains the problem, replace the Main Drive
Unit.
4. Remove the Hopper Unit and manually turn the Supply
Input Gear to check rotation.
If its results in NG, replace the Hopper Unit.
0400
05
E032
0001
05
E045
0000
05
E061
0001
05
Item
Description
Title
Error in supply with Bk Developing Assembly
Description Failure in detection about the changes of ON => OFF =>
ON with the sensor which detects a full rotation of the supply
screw within the specified period of time.
Remedy
1. Check the damage of the Developing Coupling.
If its damaged, replace the Developing Assembly.
2. Check the damage of the coupling (with the Developing
Assembly) at the Host Machine side.
If its damaged, remove the Main Drive Unit to replace the
coupling.
3. Turn the motor as a single unit while the Drum/Developing
Assembly is removed to check rotation of the Main Drive
Unit.
If it does not rotate, replace the Motor.
If the above measures do not solve the problem, replace the
Drum Driver PCB (UN4).
If there still remains the problem, replace the Main Drive
Unit.
4. Remove the Hopper Unit and manually turn the Supply
Input Gear to check rotation.
If its results in NG, replace the Hopper Unit.
Title
ASSIST Counter failed to work
Description Detection of short-circuit with the Count Pulse Signal
Remedy
Check the cable (to see if its disconnected)
Title
Error in Transparency Sensor
Description When the power is ON or the door is closed, the light failed
to be back although there is no paper.
Remedy
1. Check installation or soil of the Transparency Sensor
(UN51) and the prism.
2. Check the Sensor Harness (to see if the harness is
caught, disconnected or physically removed).
3. Replace the Transparency Sensor.
4. Replace the Pickup Feed Driver PCB (UN2).
Title
Abnormal current run to the Y Drum (small current level or
no drum is found)
Description Abnormal current run to the Y Drum (small current level or
no drum is found)
Remedy
1. Check installation of the Drum Unit.
2. Check if there is failure in grounding contact at the Drum
Unit side (such as loosened screw which secures the plate
at the contact point).
3. Check if there is failure in grounding contact with the Drum
at Process Unit side.
4. Replace the Drum Unit.
5. Replace the Pre-exposure LED PCB (UN23,UN24).
7-28
7
Ecode Detail Location
Code
E061
E061
E061
00E0
00F0
00F1
05
05
05
Item
7-29
Description
Title
0101
05
E061
01E0
05
E061
01F0
05
Item
Description
Title
7-29
7
Ecode Detail Location
Code
E061
01F1
05
E061
0201
05
E061
02E0
05
Item
7-30
Description
Title
02F0
05
E061
02F1
05
E061
0301
05
Item
Description
Title
7-30
7
Ecode Detail Location
Code
E061
E061
E061
03E0
03F0
03F1
05
05
05
Item
7-31
Description
Title
0001
05
E074
0002
05
E074
0003
05
E075
0002
05
E075
0003
05
Item
Description
Title
Error in disengagement operation
Description Primary Transfer Detachment Sensor 1 failed to be detected
for 2 sec at the time of disengagement operation
Remedy
1. Check connection of the connector with the ITB Unit.
2. Replace the ITB Unit.
Title
Error in engagement operation
Description Primary Transfer Detachment Sensor 2 failed to be detected
for 2 sec at the time of engagement operation
Remedy
1. Check connection of the connector with the ITB Unit.
2. Replace the ITB Unit.
Title
Error in Sensor
Description Both Primary Transfer Detachment Sensor 1 and 2
(PS22,PS23) are detected at the time of engagement/
disengagement operation
Remedy
1. Check connection of the connector with the ITB Unit.
2. Replace the ITB Unit.
Title
Timeout error in searching ITB steering HP
Description Unable to detect change (Low -> High or High -> Low) of ITB
Steering Sensor Signal although 10 sec has passed.
Remedy
1. Check disconnection of the ITB Connector.
2. Check disconnection with the ITB (including the inside of
the ITB Unit).
3. Replace the ITB Unit.
4. Replace the DC Controller PCB (UN1).
Title
Error in full displacement of ITB (rear)
Description ITB Displacement Sensor detects full displacement position
at the rear.
Remedy
1. Clear displacement of the ITB (procedures are written
below).
2. Replace the ITB Unit.
a). Place paper and take out the ITB unit.
b). lift the front left side up (where the cleaner and the motor
are located) and hold the ITB Unit as if to twist it.
c). Turn the Motor counterclockwise as it to make 2 to 3
round of the ITB.
d).As the ITB is getting closer to the center, fit the marking
line with the edge of the ITB.
MEMO
This symptom likely to occur if the machine is NOT installed
on the level (the left-rear is higher). Check if the machine is
installed on the level.
If this problem still occurs, replace the ITB Unit.
7-31
7
Ecode Detail Location
Code
E075
0004
05
E075
0005
05
E075
0103
05
Item
7-32
Description
Title
Error in combination of ITB Displacement Sensors
Description Failed to determine position due to combination of the ITB
Displacement Sensors (PS25 - PS28) (faulty sensor)
Remedy
1. Check disconnection of the ITB Connector.
2. Check disconnection with the ITB (including the inside of
the ITB Unit).
3. Replace the ITB Unit.
4. Replace the DC Controller PCB (UN1).
Title
Error/failure in searching ITB steering HP
Description Failed to detect correct HP position although the change (Low
-> High or High -> Low) of the ITB Steering Sensor Signal
can be detected (execute retry twice)
Remedy
1. Check disconnection of the ITB Connector.
2. Check disconnection with the ITB (including the inside of
the ITB Unit).
3. Replace the ITB Unit.
4. Replace the DC Controller PCB (UN1).
Title
Error in full displacement of ITB (front)
Description ITB Displacement Sensor detects full displacement position
at the front.
Remedy
1. Clear displacement of the ITB (procedures are written
below)
2. Replace the ITB Unit.
0300
05
E100
B000
05
E102
0101
05
E102
0301
05
E110
0100
05
E110
0300
05
E100
0100
05
MEMO
This symptom likely to occur if the machine is NOT installed
on the level (the left-front is higher). Check if the machine is
installed on the level.
If this problem still occurs, replace the ITB Unit.
Title
BD error of YM-side Scanner
Description Failure in detection of BD signal even though the specified
period of time has passed when Laser Scanner Unit 1 (YM
laser) is started or making prints.
Remedy
1. Turn OFF and then ON the power.
2. Check the connector of Laser Scanner Unit 1
3. Replace Laser Scanner Unit 1.
Item
Description
Title
BD error of CBk-side Scanner
Description Failure in detection of BD signal even though the specified
period of time has passed when Laser Scanner Unit 2 (CBk
laser) is started or making prints.
Remedy
1. Turn OFF and then ON the power.
2. Check the connector of Laser Scanner Unit 2.
3. Replace Laser Scanner Unit 2.
Title
BD cycle error
Description When the BD cycle count value is not within the specified
range.
Remedy
1. Turn OFF and then ON the power.
2. Check connection of harness on the Laser Scanner Unit.
3. Replace the Laser Scanner Unit.
4. Replace the DC Controller PCB (UN1).
5. Replace the harness.
Title
Faulty EEPROM of YM-side Scanner
Description In the case of an error in reading EEPROM in the Laser
Driver (YM) or in the case of a wrong Laser Scanner Unit
which does not match with the Host Machine.
Remedy
1. Turn OFF and then ON the power.
2. Check the connector of the Laser Scanner Unit 1
3. Replace the Laser Scanner Unit 1.
Title
Faulty EEPROM of CBk-side Scanner
Description In the case of an error in reading EEPROM of the Laser
Driver (CBk), in the case of failure in reading the correct
information (laser, etc.) from EEPROM, or in the case of a
wrong Laser Scanner which does not match with the Host
Machine.
Remedy
1. Turn OFF and then ON the power.
2. Check the connector of Laser Scanner Unit 2.
3. Replace Laser Scanner Unit 2.
Title
Error in Polygon Motor of YM-side Scanner (BD lock failed)
Description In the case of failure in detecting FG signal although the
specified period of time has passed after the Scanner Motor
of Laser Scanner Unit 1 (YM laser) was started.
Remedy
1. Check the connector of Laser Scanner Unit 1.
2. Replace Laser Scanner Unit 1.
Title
Error in Polygon Motor of CBk-side Scanner (BD lock failed)
Description In the case of failure in detecting FG signal although the
specified period of time has passed after the Scanner Motor
of Laser Scanner Unit 2 (CBk laser) was started.
Remedy
1. Check the connector of Laser Scanner Unit 2.
2. Replace Laser Scanner Unit 2.
7-32
7
Ecode Detail Location
Code
E110
0101
05
Item
Title
Description
Remedy
E110
0301
05
Title
Description
Remedy
E112
E112
0000
0001
05
05
Title
Description
Remedy
Title
Description
Remedy
E112
0002
05
Title
Description
Remedy
7-33
Description
0X01
05
Item
Title
Description
Remedy
E197
0X00
05
Title
Description
Remedy
E197
0X01
05
Title
Description
Remedy
E197
0X02
05
Title
Description
Remedy
E197
0X03
05
Title
Description
Remedy
E197
0X80
05
Title
Description
Remedy
Description
Error in IMG2 (In X, 0 to 2 is applied. Each one shows IC on
the DC Controller.)
Failure of LSI timing adjustment circuit on the DC Controller
PCB.
1. Turn OFF and then ON the power.
2. Replace the DC Controller PCB (UN2).
Error in communication of HOB DMA mode (In X, 0 to 2 is
applied. Each one shows IC on the DC Controller.)
Communication failure between CPU and LSI on the DC
Controller.
1. Turn OFF and then ON the power.
2. Replace the DC Controller PCB (UN1).
Error in communication of HOB single-shot mode (In X, 0 to
2 is applied. Each one shows IC on the DC Controller.)
Communication failure between CPU and LSI on the DC
Controller PCB (UN1).
1. Turn OFF and then ON the power.
2. Replace the DC Controller PCB (UN1).
Error in communication of HOB single-shot mode (In X, 0 to
2 is applied. Each one shows IC on the DC Controller.)
Communication failure between CPU and LSI on the DC
Controller PCB (UN1).
1. Turn OFF and then ON the power.
2. Replace the DC Controller PCB (UN1).
Timeout error in HOB single-shot mode (In X, 0 to 2 is
applied. Each one shows IC on the DC Controller.)
Communication failure between CPU and LSI on the DC
Controller PCB (UN1).
1. Turn OFF and then ON the power.
2. Replace the DC Controller PCB (UN1).
Timeout error in EHOB transmission-waiting (In X, 0 to 2 is
applied. Each one shows IC on the DC Controller.)
Communication failure between the DC Controller PCB (UN1)
and Laser Scanner Unit.
1. Turn OFF and then ON the power.
2. Check connection of harness on the target color side (YM/
CK).
3. Replace the DC Controller PCB (UN1).
4. Replace the Laser Scanner Unit.
5. Replace the harness on the target color side (YM/CK).
7-33
7
Ecode Detail Location
Code
E197
0X81
05
E197
0XA0
05
E197
0XB0
05
Item
7-34
Description
Title
7-34
7
Ecode Detail Location
Code
E202
0001
04
E202
0002
04
E202
0101
04
Item
7-35
Description
Title
Scanner HP error
Description Scanner Unit error when moving to the left side for HP
check operation
Remedy
1. Turn OFF and then ON the power.
2.Check the drive of Scanner Motor. (Open the DF Unit to
check the operation of Motor.)
3. Check the flag position of Scanner Home Position Sensor
and Scanner Unit.
4.Replace the Reader Controller PCB.
Title
Scanner HP error
Description Scanner Unit error when moving to the right side for HP
check operation
Remedy
1. Turn OFF and then ON the power.
2. Check the drive of Scanner Motor. (Open the DF Unit to
check the operation of Motor.)
3. Check the flag position of Scanner Home Position Sensor
and Scanner Unit.
4. Replace the Reader Controller PCB.
Title
Glass HP error
* This error occurs on Duplex Color Image Reader Unit-B1
only.
Description Glass error when moving to the left side for HP check
operation
E227
0001
04
E227
0002
04
E227
0003
04
E227
0004
04
Remedy
E202
0102
04
Item
Description
Title
Power supply (24V) error
Description 24V port error when the power is turned ON
Remedy
1. Turn OFF and then ON the power.
2. Check the connection between Reader and Printer, and
check that the Cable is not open-circuit.
3. Check the 24V port of the Reader Controller PCB and DF
Driver PCB.
4. Check the power supply and Relay PCB on the Printer
side.
5. Replace the Reader Controller PCB and DF Driver PCB.
Title
Power supply (24V) error
Description 24V port error when a job is started
Remedy
1. Turn OFF and then ON the power.
2. Check the connection between Reader and Printer, and
check that the Cable is not open-circuit.
3. Check the 24V port of the Reader Controller PCB and DF
Driver PCB.
4. Check the power supply and Relay PCB on the Printer
side.
5. Replace the Reader Controller PCB and DF Driver PCB.
Title
Power supply (24V) error
Description 24V port error when a job is ended
Remedy
1. Turn OFF and then ON the power.
2. Check the connection between Reader and Printer, and
check that the Cable is not open-circuit.
3. Check the 24V port of the Reader Controller PCB and DF
Driver PCB.
4. Check the power supply and Relay PCB on the Printer
side.
5. Replace the Reader Controller PCB and DF Driver PCB.
Title
Power supply (24V) error
Description 24V port error when loading
Remedy
1. Turn OFF and then ON the power.
2. Check the connection between Reader and Printer, and
check that the Cable is not open-circuit.
3. Check the 24V port of the Reader Controller PCB and DF
Driver PCB.
4. Check the power supply and Relay PCB on the Printer
side.
5. Replace the Reader Controller PCB and DF Driver PCB.
7-35
7
Ecode Detail Location
Code
E227
E227
E227
E240
E240
0101
0102
0103
0000
0001
04
04
04
05
05
Item
7-36
Description
Title
Power supply (24V) error
Description 24V port error when the power of DF Unit is turned ON
Remedy
1. Turn OFF and then ON the power.
2. Check the connection between Reader and Printer, and
check that the Cable is not open-circuit.
3. Check the 24V port of the Reader Controller PCB and DF
Driver PCB.
4. Check the power supply and Relay PCB on the Printer
side.
5. Replace the Reader Controller PCB and DF Driver PCB.
Title
Power supply (24V) error
Description 24V port error when a job is started in the DF Unit
Remedy
1. Turn OFF and then ON the power.
2. Check the connection between Reader and Printer, and
check that the Cable is not open-circuit.
3. Check the 24V port of the Reader Controller PCB and DF
Driver PCB.
4. Check the power supply and Relay PCB on the Printer
side.
5. Replace the Reader Controller PCB and DF Driver PCB.
Title
Power supply (24V) error
Description 24V port error when a job is ended in the DF Unit
Remedy
1. Turn OFF and then ON the power.
2. Check the connection between Reader and Printer, and
check that the Cable is not open-circuit.
3. Check the 24V port of the Reader Controller PCB and DF
Driver PCB.
4. Check the power supply and Relay PCB on the Printer
side.
5. Replace the Reader Controller PCB and DF Driver PCB.
Title
Error in communication data
Description When communication data error between the controller and
DC Controller PCB is detected.
Remedy
Check connection of the connector.
Check connection of the Sub PCB in the Controller Box.
Check connection and replace the DC Controller PCB (UN1)/
Main Controller PCB.
Title
3 minutes has passed since the status remained to be
waiting for pickup request
Description No response after 3 minutes has passed since the pickup
request from the Main Controller to the DC Controller during
printing.
Remedy
Check connection of the connector.
Check connection of the Sub PCB in the Controller Box.
Check connection and replace the DC Controller PCB (UN1)/
Main Controller PCB 1.
0002
05
Item
Title
Description
Remedy
E240
0003
05
Title
Description
Remedy
E240
0004
05
Title
Description
Remedy
E240
0005
05
Title
Description
Remedy
E246
0001
05
E246
0002
05
E246
0003
05
E246
0005
05
E247
0001
05
Title
Description
Remedy
Title
Description
Remedy
Title
Description
Remedy
Title
Description
Remedy
Title
Description
Remedy
Description
3 minutes has passed since the status remained to be
waiting for image output request
No response after 3 minutes has passed since the image
output request from the Main Controller to the DC Controller
during printing.
Check connection of the connector.
Check connection of the Sub PCB in the Controller Box.
Check connection and replace the DC Controller PCB (UN1)/
Main Controller PCB 1.
Keep on rotating after the jam (engine bug)
Engine keeps rotating when jam occurs.
Check connection of the connector.
Check connection of the Sub PCB in the Controller Box.
Check connection and replace the DC Controller PCB (UN1)/
Main Controller PCB 1.
Error in controller communication
No response after 1.5 minutes has passed since the print
request from the Main Controller to the DC Controller.
Check connection of the connector.
Check connection of the Sub PCB in the Controller Box.
Check connection and replace the DC Controller PCB (UN1)/
Main Controller PCB 1.
Timeout error in Dhalf request
No response after 1.5 minutes has passed since the auto
adjustment request from the Main Controller to the DC
Controller.
Check connection of the connector.
Check connection of the Sub PCB in the Controller Box.
Check connection and replace the DC Controller PCB (UN1)/
Main Controller PCB 1.
System error
System error
Contact the service company office
System error
System error
Contact the service company office
System error
System error
Contact the service company office
System error
System error
Contact the service company office
System error
System error
Contact the service company office
7-36
7
Ecode Detail Location
Code
E248
0001
04
E248
0002
04
E248
0003
04
E270
0001
04
E270
0002
04
Item
7-37
Description
Title
EEPROM error
Description Failure of power-on at EEPROM for the reader controller
PCB (PCB1)
Remedy
1. Turn OFF and then ON the power.
2. Check the connection between Reader and Printer, and
check that the Cable is not open-circuit.
3. Replace the Reader Controller PCB.
Title
EEPROM error
Description Failure of writing at EEPROM for the reader controller PCB
(PCB1)
Remedy
1. Turn OFF and then ON the power.
2. Check the connection between Reader and Printer, and
check that the Cable is not open-circuit.
3. Replace the Reader Controller PCB.
Title
EEPROM error
Description Failure of reading after writing at EEPROM for the reader
controller PCB (PCB1)
Remedy
1. Turn OFF and then ON the power.
2. Check the connection between Reader and Printer, and
check that the Cable is not open-circuit.
3. Replace the Reader Controller PCB.
Title
Scanner Unit (Paper Front) VSYNC signal error
Description Due to the VSYNC error in the Scanner Unit PCB (Paper
Front) which communicates with Reader Controller PCB,
VSYNC signal is not sent appropriately, so the image error
occurs or the operation stops abnormally.
Remedy
1. Turn OFF and then ON the power.
2. Check the connection between Reader Controller PCB
and Scanner Unit PCB (Paper Front), and check that the
Cable is not open-circuit.
3. Check the connection between Reader and Printer, and
check that the Cable is not open-circuit.
4. Replace the Reader Controller PCB.
5. Replace the Scanner Unit (Paper Front).
Title
DDI HSYNC error
Description Due to the DDI hardware HSYNC signal error, VSYNC
signal is not sent appropriately, so the image error occurs or
the operation stops abnormally.
Remedy
1. Turn OFF and then ON the power.
2. Check the connection between Reader and Printer, and
check that the Cable is not open-circuit.
3. Replace the DDI-S Cable between Reader and Printer.
4. Replace the Reader Controller PCB.
0101
04
E280
0001
04
E280
0101
04
Item
Description
Title
7-37
7
Ecode Detail Location
Code
E302
E302
0001
0101
04
04
E350
0000
05
E350
0001
05
E350
0002
05
E350
0003
05
Item
7-38
Description
Title
Error in paper face shading
Description Error in shading RAM access
The shading value is out of the specified range.
Remedy
1. Check that the LED of the Scanner Unit (Paper Front) is
lit.
2. Check the connection between Scanner Unit (Paper
Front) and LED, and check that the Cable is not opencircuit.
3. Check the connection between Reader Controller PCB
and Scanner Unit PCB (Paper Front), and check that the
Cable is not open-circuit.
4. Check the condition of Shading White Plate of the Stream
Read Glass (Paper Front) (scratches, dust, soil, etc.).
5. Check if Scanner Unit (Paper Front) detects HP correctly.
(If it does not detect correctly, the Scanner Unit reaches to
the end when DF is opened.)
6. Replace the Scanner Unit (Paper Front).
7. Replace the Reader Controller PCB.
Title
Error in paper back shading
Description Error in shading RAM access
The shading value is out of the specified range.
Remedy
1. Check that the LED of the Scanner Unit (Paper Back) is
lit.
2. Check the connection between Scanner Unit (Paper
Back) and LED, and check that the Cable is not open-circuit.
3. Check the connection between Reader Controller PCB
and Scanner Unit PCB (Paper Back), and check that the
Cable is not open-circuit.
4. Check the condition of Shading White Plate of the
Scanner Glass (Paper Back) (scratches, dust, soil, etc.).
5. Check if Scanner Unit (Paper Back) detects HP correctly.
6. Replace the Scanner Unit (Paper Back).
7. Replace the Reader Controller PCB.
Title
System error
Description System error
Remedy
Contact the service company office
Title
System error
Description System error
Remedy
Contact the service company office
Title
System error
Description System error
Remedy
Contact the service company office
Title
System error
Description System error
Remedy
Contact the service company office
3000
05
E351
0000
00
E354
0001
05
E354
0002
05
E355
0001
05
E355
0002
05
E355
0003
05
E355
0004
05
E400
0001
04
Item
Description
Title
Description
Remedy
Title
Description
Remedy
System error
System error
Contact the service company office
Main Controller PCB 2 communication error
Main Controller PCB 2 communication error.
1. Disconnect and then connect the connector of the Main
Controller PCB 2.
2. Replace the Main Controller PCB 2.
System error
System error
Contact the service company office
System error
System error
Contact the service company office
System error
System error
Contact the service company office
System error
System error
Contact the service company office
System error
System error
Contact the service company office
System error
System error
Contact the service company office
Communication error between Reader Controller PCB and
DF Unit
Communication checksum error between Reader Controller
PCB and DF Unit
1. Turn OFF and then ON the power.
2. Check the connection between Reader Controller PCB
and DF Driver PCB (Signal Cable and Power Supply Cable),
and check that the Cables are not open-circuit.
3. Replace the Cable between Reader Controller PCB and
DF Driver PCB.
4. Replace the Reader Controller PCB.
5. Replace the DF Driver PCB.
Title
Description
Remedy
Title
Description
Remedy
Title
Description
Remedy
Title
Description
Remedy
Title
Description
Remedy
Title
Description
Remedy
Title
Description
Remedy
7-38
7
Ecode Detail Location
Code
E400
0002
04
Item
Title
Description
Remedy
E401
E401
E407
0001
0002
0001
04
04
04
Title
Description
Remedy
Title
Description
Remedy
Title
Description
Remedy
7-39
Description
0002
04
E413
0001
04
E413
0002
04
E413
0011
04
Item
Description
Title
Tray Lifter Motor error
Description Paper Face Detection Sensor when Lifter is being lifted
does not become ON within specified time.
Remedy
1. Check that after Lifter is lifted fully, it is located in the
correct position. (Check the engagement with the Gear.)
2. Check the Tray Lifter Motor, and also check whether
shifting operation is performed normally.
3. Check the connection between Paper Face Detection
Sensor and DF Driver PCB, and check that the Cable is not
open-circuit.
4. Replace the DF Driver PCB.
5. Replace the Tray Lifter Motor.
Title
DF Disengagement Motor error
Description Lead Roller 1 disengagement error
Remedy
1. Open the ADF Front Cover, and then check the operation
of active Disengagement Motor.
2. Check the physical position of Disengaging HP Sensor
and its flag.
3. Check that the Cable of Disengaging HP Sensor is not
open-circuit.
4. Replace the DF Driver PCB.
Title
DF Disengagement Motor error
Description Lead Roller 1 disengagement error
Remedy
1. Open the ADF Front Cover, and then check the operation
of active Disengagement Motor.
2. Check the physical position of Disengaging HP Sensor
and its flag.
3. Check that the Cable of Disengaging HP Sensor is not
open-circuit.
4. Replace the DF Driver PCB.
Title
DF Disengagement Motor error
Description Lead Roller 2 disengagement error
Remedy
1. Open the ADF Front Cover, and then check the operation
of active Disengagement Motor.
2. Check the physical position of Disengaging HP Sensor
and its flag.
3. Check that the Cable of Disengaging HP Sensor is not
open-circuit.
4. Replace the DF Driver PCB.
7-39
7
Ecode Detail Location
Code
E413
0012
04
E423
0001
04
E423
0002
04
E490
0001
04
E500
0000
05
E503
0002
05
Item
7-40
Description
Title
DF Disengagement Motor error
Description Lead Roller 2 disengagement error
Remedy
1. Open the ADF Front Cover, and then check the operation
of active Disengagement Motor.
2. Check the physical position of Disengaging HP Sensor
and its flag.
3. Check that the Cable of Disengaging HP Sensor is not
open-circuit.
4. Replace the DF Driver PCB.
Title
DF Unit SDRAM error
* This error occurs on Duplex Color Image Reader Unit-B1
only.
Description SDRAM access error
Remedy
1. Turn OFF and then ON the power.
2. Check the connection between Reader and Controller,
and check that the Cable is not open-circuit.
3. Replace the Reader Controller PCB.
Title
DF Unit SDRAM error
* This error occurs on Duplex Color Image Reader Unit-B1
only.
Description SDRAM Verify error
Remedy
1. Turn OFF and then ON the power.
2. Check the connection between Reader and Controller,
and check that the Cable is not open-circuit.
3. Replace the Reader Controller PCB.
Title
Different DF model
Description Installed DF is not the supported DF.
Remedy
1. Using the service mode, check if the installed DF model
is the same model which was set in the service mode.
2. Check the connection between Reader Controller PCB
and DF Driver PCB, and check that the Cable is not opencircuit.
3. Replace the DF Driver PCB.
4. Replace the Reader Controller PCB.
Title
Communication error
Description Communication between the controller of the connected
device and the Finisher Controller is suspended.
Remedy
1. The finisher controller PCB is faulty.
2. The host machine DC Controller PCB (UN1) is faulty.
Title
Communication error
Description Communication between the Saddle Controller and the
Finisher Controller is suspended.
Remedy
1. The wiring between the finisher controller PCB and
saddle controller PCB is faulty.
2. The finisher controller PCB is faulty.
3. The saddle stitcher controller PCB is faulty.
0003
05
E503
0004
05
E505
0001
05
E505
0002
05
E514
8001
05
E514
8002
05
Item
Description
Title
Communication error
Description Communication between the Punch Controller and the
Finisher Controller is suspended.
Remedy
1. The wiring between the finisher controller PCB and host
machine DC Controller PCB (UN1) is faulty.
2. The punch controller PCB is faulty.
3. The finisher controller PCB is faulty.
4. The host machine DC Controller PCB (UN1) is faulty.
Title
Communication error
Description The communication with the inserter or the folder is
interrupted.
Remedy
1. The wiring between the finisher controller PCB and host
machine controller PCB is faulty.
2. The finisher controller PCB is faulty.
3. The host machine controller PCB is faulty.
Title
EEPROM error
Description The checksum for the EEPROM data has an error.
Remedy
1. Failure of Finisher Controller PCB.
Title
EEPROM error
Description The checksum for the EEPROM data has an error.
Remedy
1. An error is detected in the check sum value in EEPROM
data on the Punch Controller.
Title
Rear end assist home position error
Description The stapler does not leave the rear end assist home
position when the rear end assist motor has been driven for
3 seconds.
Remedy
1. The rear end assist home position sensor (PI109) is
faulty.
2. The wiring between the finisher controller PCB and rear
end assist motor is faulty.
3. The end assist mechanism is faulty.
4. The rear end assist motor (M109) is faulty.
5. The finisher controller PCB is faulty.
Title
Rear end assist home position error
Description The stapler does not return to the rear end assist home
position when the rear end assist motor has been driven for
3 seconds.
Remedy
1. The rear end assist home position sensor (PI109) is
faulty.
2. The wiring between the finisher controller PCB and rear
end assist motor is faulty.
3. The end assist mechanism is faulty.
4. The rear end assist motor (M109) is faulty.
5. The finisher controller PCB is faulty.
7-40
7
Ecode Detail Location
Code
E519
8001
05
E519
0002
05
E520
0001
05
E520
0002
05
Item
7-41
Description
Title
Gear change home position error
Description The gear change home position sensor does not turn OFF
when the gear change motor has been driven for 387
pulses.
Remedy
1. The gear change home position sensor (PI117) is faulty.
2. The wiring between the finisher controller PCB and gear
change motor is faulty.
3. The gear change mechanism is faulty.
4. The gear change motor (M110) is faulty.
5. The finisher controller PCB is faulty.
Title
Gear change home position error
Description The gear change home position sensor does not turn ON
when the gear change motor has been driven for 387
pulses.
Remedy
1. The gear change home position sensor (PI117) is faulty.
2. The wiring between the finisher controller PCB and gear
change motor is faulty.
3. The gear change mechanism is faulty.
4. The gear change motor (M110) is faulty.
5. The finisher controller PCB is faulty.
Title
Shift Motor fails to move from HP
Description At initial rotation, when the Motor rotates for specified period
of time and cannot move from HP, it is detected as an error
if the same symptom occurs again after the first retry.
Remedy
1. Check if the Motor (M4) Connector is physically removed.
2. Check if the Motor failure occurs.
3. Check if the Shift Roller HP Sensor (S2) Connector is
physically removed.
4. Check if the Shift Roller HP Sensor (S2) failure occurs.
Title
Shift Motor fails to return to HP
Description At initial rotation, when the Motor rotates for specified period
of time and cannot return to HP, it is detected as an error if
the same symptom occurs again after the first retry.
Remedy
1. Check if the Motor (M4) Connector is physically removed.
2. Check if the Motor failure occurs.
3. Check if the Shift Roller HP Sensor (S2) Connector is
physically removed.
4. Check if the Shift Roller HP Sensor (S2) failure occurs.
8001
05
E530
8002
05
E531
0001
05
E531
0002
05
Item
Description
Title
Front aligning plate home position error
Description The aligning plate does not leave the aligningplate front
home position sensor when thealignment plate front motor
has been driven for 4 seconds.
Remedy
1. The front aligning plate home position sensor (PI106) is
faulty.
2. The wiring between the finisher controller PCB and front
aligning plate motor is faulty.
3. The front aligning plate is faulty.
4. The front aligning plate motor (M103) is faulty.
5. The finisher controller PCB is faulty.
Title
Front aligning plate home position error
Description The aligning plate does not return to aligning plate front
home position sensor when the alignment plate front motor
has been driven for 4 seconds.
Remedy
1. The front aligning plate home position sensor (PI106) is
faulty.
2. The wiring between the finisher controller PCB and front
aligning plate motor is faulty.
3. The front aligning plate is faulty.
4. The front aligning plate motor (M103) is faulty.
5. The finisher controller PCB is faulty.
Title
Stapler Motor fails to move from HP
Description At initial rotation, when the Motor rotates for specified period
of time and cannot move from HP, it is detected as an error
if the same symptom occurs again after the first retry.
Remedy
1. Check if the Motor (M10) Connector is physically
removed.
2. Check if the Motor failure occurs.
3. Check if the Stapler HP Sensor (S18) Connector is
physically removed.
4. Check if the Stapler HP Sensor (S18) failure occurs.
Title
Stapler Motor fails to return to HP
Description At initial rotation, when the Motor rotates for specified period
of time and cannot return to HP, it is detected as an error if
the same symptom occurs again after the first retry.
Remedy
1. Check if the Motor (M10) Connector is physically
removed.
2. Check if the Motor failure occurs.
3. Check if the Stapler HP Sensor (S18) Connector is
physically removed.
4. Check if the Stapler HP Sensor (S18) failure occurs.
7-41
7
Ecode Detail Location
Code
E531
8001
05
E531
8002
05
E532
E532
E532
0001
0002
8001
05
05
05
Item
7-42
Description
Title
Staple home position error
Description Stapler fails to move from the staple home position although
the Staple Motor is driven for a specified period of time.
Remedy
1. The wiring between the finisher controller PCB and
stapler is faulty.
2. The stapler is faulty.
3. The finisher controller PCB is faulty.
Title
Staple home position error
Description Stapler fails to move from the staple home position although
the Staple Motor is driven for a specified period of time.
Remedy
1. The wiring between the finisher controller PCB and
stapler is faulty.
2. The stapler is faulty.
3. The finisher controller PCB is faulty.
Title
STP Move Motor fails to move from HP
Description At initial rotation, when the Motor rotates for specified period
of time and cannot move from HP, it is detected as an error
if the same symptom occurs again after the first retry.
Remedy
1. Check if the Motor (M1) Connector is physically removed.
2. Check if the Motor failure occurs.
3. Check if the Stapler Move HP Sensor (S10) Connector is
physically removed.
4. Check if the Stapler Move HP Sensor (S10) failure
occurs.
Title
STP Move Motor fails to return to HP
Description At initial rotation, when the Motor rotates for specified period
of time and cannot return to HP, it is detected as an error if
the same symptom occurs again after the first retry.
Remedy
1. Check if the Motor (M1) Connector is physically removed.
2. Check if the Motor failure occurs.
3. Check if the Stapler Move HP Sensor (S10) Connector is
physically removed.
4. Check if the Stapler Move HP Sensor (S10) failure
occurs.
Title
Stapler shift home position error
Description The stapler does not leave the stapler shifthome position
when the stapler shift motor hasbeen driven for 5 seconds.
Remedy
1. The stapler drive home position sensor (PI110) is faulty.
2. The wiring between the finisher controller PCB and
stapler shift motor is faulty.
3. The stapler shift base is faulty.
4. The stapler shift motor (M105) is faulty.
5. The finisher controller PCB is faulty.
8002
05
E535
8001
05
E535
8002
05
E537
8001
05
Item
Description
Title
Stapler shift home position error
Description The stapler does not return to the stapler shift home position
when the stapler shift motor has been driven for 20 seconds.
Remedy
1. The stapler drive home position sensor (PI110) is faulty.
2. The wiring between the finisher controller PCB and
stapler shift motor is faulty.
3. The stapler shift base is faulty.
4. The stapler shift motor (M105) is faulty.
5. The finisher controller PCB is faulty.
Title
Swing home position error
Description The stapler does not leave the swing home position when
the swing motor has been driven for 3 seconds.
Remedy
1. The swing home position sensor (PI105) is faulty.
2. The wiring between the finisher controller PCB and swing
motor is faulty.
3. The swing mechanism is faulty.
4. The swing motor (M106) is faulty.
5. The finisher controller PCB is faulty.
Title
Swing home position error
Description The stapler does not return to the swing home position
when the swing motor has bee driven for 3 seconds.
Remedy
1. The swing home position sensor (PI105) is faulty.
2. The wiring between the finisher controller PCB and swing
motor is faulty.
3. The swing mechanism is faulty.
4. The swing motor (M106) is faulty.
5. The finisher controller PCB is faulty.
Title
Rear aligning plate home position error
Description The aligning plate does not leave the aligning plate rear
home position sensor when the alignment plate rear motor
has been driven for 4 seconds.
Remedy
1. The aligning plate rear home position sensor (PI107) is
faulty.
2. The wiring between the finisher controller PCB and
aligning plate rear motor is faulty.
3. The rear aligning plate is faulty.
4. The rear aligning plate motor (M104) is faulty.
5. The finisher controller PCB is faulty.
7-42
7
Ecode Detail Location
Code
E537
8002
05
E540
0001
05
E540
E540
0002
8001
05
05
Item
7-43
Description
Title
Rear aligning plate home position error
Description The aligning plate does not return to aligning plate rear
home position sensor when the alignment plate rear motor
has been driven for 4 seconds.
Remedy
1. The aligning plate rear home position sensor (PI107) is
faulty.
2. The wiring between the finisher controller PCB and
aligning plate rear motor is faulty.
3. The rear aligning plate is faulty.
4. The rear aligning plate motor (M104) is faulty.
5. The finisher controller PCB is faulty.
Title
Tray Lift Motor timeout error
Description Unable to complete the operation even after the specified
period of time during initial rotation. When the Motor
remains in the same area for the specified period of time
and the same symptom occurs again after the first retry, it is
detected as an error.
Remedy
1. Check if the Motor (M11) Connector is physically
removed.
2. Check if the Motor failure occurs.
3. Check if the Stack Tray Clock Sensor (S14) Connector is
physically removed.
4. Check if the Stack Tray Clock Sensor (S14) failure
occurs.
Title
Tray Lift Motor clock error
Description At initial rotation, when the Tray Lift Motor rotates and clock
input is not detected within the specified period of time, it is
detected as an error if the same symptom occurs again after
the first retry.
Remedy
1. Check if the Motor (M11) Connector is physically
removed.
2. Check if the Motor failure occurs.
3. Check if the Stack Tray Clock Sensor (S14) Connector is
physically removed.
4. Check if the Stack Tray Clock Sensor (S14) failure
occurs.
Title
Tray 1 time out error
Description If the tray does not return to home position when the tray 1
shift motor is driven for 25 seconds.
If the tray does not move to other area when tray 1 shift
motor is driven for 5 seconds.
Remedy
1. The tray 1 shift area sensor PCB is faulty.
2. The wiring between the finisher controller PCB and tray 1
shift motor is faulty.
3. The tray up/down mechanism is faulty.
4. The tray 1 shift motor (M107) is faulty.
5. The finisher controller PCB is faulty.
8002
05
E540
8003
05
E540
8004
05
E540
8005
05
Item
Description
Title
Tray 1 shift area error
Description The dangerous area is reached before the tray 1 paper
surface sensor detects paper surface during the paper
surface detection operation.
A discontinuous area is detected during tray operation.
Remedy
1. The tray 1 shift area sensor PCB is faulty.
2. The wiring between the finisher controller PCB and tray 1
shift motor is faulty.
3. The tray up/down mechanism is faulty.
4. The tray 1 shift motor (M107) is faulty.
5. The finisher controller PCB is faulty.
Title
Swing guide switch/Staple safety switch error
Description The swing guide switch or staple safety switch is activated
while the tray is operating.
Remedy
1. The tray 1 shift area sensor PCB is faulty.
2. The wiring between the finisher controller PCB and tray 1
shift motor is faulty.
3. The tray up/down mechanism is faulty.
4. The tray 1 shift motor (M107) is faulty.
5. The finisher controller PCB is faulty.
Title
The tray 1 shift motor clock error
Description The FG input cannot be detected when the tray 1 shift motor
has been driven for 0.2 second.
Remedy
1. The tray 1 shift area sensor PCB is faulty.
2. The wiring between the finisher controller PCB and tray 1
shift motor is faulty.
3. The tray up/down mechanism is faulty.
4. The tray 1 shift motor (M107) is faulty.
5. The finisher controller PCB is faulty.
Title
The tray 1 shift motor speed error
Description The lock detection signal turns OFF 150 ms after the lock
detection signal turned ON.
Remedy
1. The tray 1 shift area sensor PCB is faulty.
2. The wiring between the finisher controller PCB and tray 1
shift motor is faulty.
3. The tray up/down mechanism is faulty.
4. The tray 1 shift motor (M107) is faulty.
5. The finisher controller PCB is faulty.
7-43
7
Ecode Detail Location
Code
E540
8006
05
E540
8007
05
E542
E542
0001
0002
05
05
Item
7-44
Description
Title
The tray 1 shift motor acceleration error
Description The lock detection signal does not turn ON when the tray 1
shift motor has been driven for 1 second.
Remedy
1. The tray 1 shift area sensor PCB is faulty.
2. The wiring between the finisher controller PCB and tray 1
shift motor is faulty.
3. The tray up/down mechanism is faulty.
4. The tray 1 shift motor (M107) is faulty.
5. The finisher controller PCB is faulty.
Title
The tray 1 shift motor error
Description The lock detection signal does not turn OFF when the tray 1
shift motor is at a stop.
Remedy
1. The tray 1 shift area sensor PCB is faulty.
2. The wiring between the finisher controller PCB and tray 1
shift motor is faulty.
3. The tray up/down mechanism is faulty.
4. The tray 1 shift motor (M107) is faulty.
5. The finisher controller PCB is faulty.
Title
Additional Tray Lift Motor timeout error
Description Unable to complete the operation even after the specified
period of time during initial rotation. When the Motor
remains in the same area for the specified period of time
and the same symptom occurs again after the first retry, it is
detected as an error.
Remedy
1. Check if the Motor (M12) Connector is physically
removed.
2. Check if the Motor failure occurs.
3. Check if the Additional Tray Clock Sensor (S23)
Connector is physically removed.
4. Check if the Additional Tray Clock Sensor (S23) failure
occurs.
Title
Additional Tray Lift Motor clock error
Description At initial rotation, when the Tray Lift Motor rotates and clock
signal is not detected within the specified period of time, it is
detected as an error if the same symptom occurs again after
the first retry.
Remedy
1. Check if the Motor (M12) Connector is physically
removed.
2. Check if the Motor failure occurs.
3. Check if the Additional Tray Clock Sensor (S23)
Connector is physically removed.
4. Check if the Additional Tray Clock Sensor (S23) failure
occurs.
8001
05
E542
8002
05
E542
8004
05
E542
8005
05
Item
Description
Title
Tray 1 time out error
Description If the tray does not return to home position when the tray 1
shift motor is driven for 25 seconds.
If the tray does not move to other area when tray 2 shift
motor is driven for 5 seconds.
Remedy
1. The Tray 2 shift area sensor PCB is faulty.
2. The wiring between the finisher controller PCB and tray 2
shift motor is faulty.
3. The tray up/down mechanism is faulty.
4. The Tray 2 shift motor (M105) is faulty.
5. The finisher controller PCB is faulty.
Title
Tray 2 shift area error
Description The upper limit area is reached before the tray 2 paper
surface sensor 1 detects the paper surface during paper
surface detection operation.
A discontinuous area is detected during tray operation.
During evacuation operation, arrival at the area beyond the
tray 2 paper surface sensor 2 is detected before this sensor
detects paper surface.
Remedy
1. The tray 2 shift area sensor PCB is faulty.
2. The wiring between the finisher controller PCB and tray 2
shift motor is faulty.
3. The tray up/down mechanism is faulty.
4. The tray 2 shift motor (M105) is faulty.
5. The finisher controller PCB is faulty.
Title
The tray 2 shift motor clock error
Description The FG input cannot be detected when the tray 2 shift motor
has been driven for 0.2 second.
Remedy
1. The Tray 2 shift area sensor PCB is faulty.
2. The wiring between the finisher controller PCB and tray 2
shift motor is faulty.
3. The tray up/down mechanism is faulty.
4. The Tray 2 shift motor (M105) is faulty.
5. The finisher controller PCB is faulty.
Title
The tray 2 shift motor speed error
Description The lock detection signal turns OFF 150 ms after the lock
detection signal turned ON.
Remedy
1. The tray 2 shift area sensor PCB is faulty.
2. The wiring between the finisher controller PCB and tray 2
shift motor is faulty.
3. The tray up/down mechanism is faulty.
4. The tray 2 shift motor (M105) is faulty.
5. The finisher controller PCB is faulty.
7-44
7
Ecode Detail Location
Code
E542
E542
E567
E567
8006
8007
0001
0002
05
05
05
05
Item
7-45
Description
Title
The tray 2 shift motor acceleration error
Description The lock detection signal does not turn ON when the tray 2
shift motor has been driven for 1 second.
Remedy
1. The tray 2 shift area sensor PCB is faulty.
2. The wiring between the finisher controller PCB and tray 2
shift motor is faulty.
3. The tray up/down mechanism is faulty.
4. The tray 2 shift motor (M105) is faulty.
5. The finisher controller PCB is faulty.
Title
The tray 2 shift motor error
Description The lock detection signal does not turn OFF when the tray 2
shift motor is at a stop.
Remedy
1. The tray 2 shift area sensor PCB is faulty.
2. The wiring between the finisher controller PCB and tray 2
shift motor is faulty.
3. The tray up/down mechanism is faulty.
4. The tray 2 shift motor (M105) is faulty.
5. The finisher controller PCB is faulty.
Title
Shift Roller Release Motor fails to move from HP
Description At initial rotation, when the Motor rotates for specified period
of time and cannot move from HP, it is detected as an error
if the same symptom occurs again after the first retry.
Remedy
1. Check if the Motor (M5) Connector is physically removed.
2. Check if the Motor failure occurs.
3. Check if the Shift Roller Release Sensor (S3) Connector
is physically removed.
4. Check if the Shift Roller Release Sensor (S3) failure
occurs.
Title
Shift Roller Release Motor fails to return to HP
Description At initial rotation, when the Motor rotates for specified period
of time and cannot return to HP, it is detected as an error if
the same symptom occurs again after the first retry.
Remedy
1. Check if the Motor (M5) Connector is physically removed.
2. Check if the Motor failure occurs.
3. Check if the Shift Roller Release Sensor (S3) Connector
is physically removed.
4. Check if the Shift Roller Release Sensor (S3) failure
occurs.
0001
05
Item
Title
Description
Remedy
E56F
0002
05
Title
Description
Remedy
E571
0001
05
Title
Description
Remedy
E571
0002
05
Title
Description
Remedy
Description
Entrance Roller Release/Stopper HP Motor fails to move
from HP
At initial rotation, when the Motor rotates for specified period
of time and cannot move from HP, it is detected as an error
if the same symptom occurs again after the first retry.
1. Check if the Motor (M6) Connector is physically removed.
2. Check if the Motor failure occurs.
3. Check if the Entrance Roller Release/Stopper HP Sensor
(S5) Connector is physically removed.
4. Check if the Entrance Roller Release/Stopper HP Sensor
(S5) failure occurs.
Entrance Roller Release/Stopper HP Motor fails to return to
HP
At initial rotation, when the Motor rotates for specified period
of time and cannot return to HP, it is detected as an error if
the same symptom occurs again after the first retry.
1. Check if the Motor (M6) Connector is physically removed.
2. Check if the Motor failure occurs.
3. Check if the Entrance Roller Release/Stopper HP Sensor
(S5) Connector is physically removed.
4. Check if the Entrance Roller Release/Stopper HP Sensor
(S5) failure occurs.
Gripper Open/Close Motor fails to move from HP
At initial rotation, when the Motor rotates for specified period
of time and cannot move from HP, it is detected as an error
if the same symptom occurs again after the first retry.
1. Check if the Motor (M7) Connector is physically removed.
2. Check if the Motor failure occurs.
3. Check if the Gripper Arm HP Sensor (S13) Connector is
physically removed.
4. Check if the Gripper Unit HP Sensor (S7) failure occurs.
Gripper Open/Close Motor fails to return to HP
At initial rotation, when the Motor rotates for specified period
of time and cannot return to HP, it is detected as an error if
the same symptom occurs again after the first retry.
1. Check if the Motor (M7) Connector is physically removed.
2. Check if the Motor failure occurs.
3. Check if the Gripper Arm HP Sensor (S13) Connector is
physically removed.
4. Check if the Gripper Unit HP Sensor (S7) failure occurs.
7-45
7
Ecode Detail Location
Code
E575
0001
05
E575
0002
05
E584
E584
8001
0002
05
05
Item
7-46
Description
Title
Gripper Unit Move Motor fails to move from HP
Description At initial rotation, when the Motor rotates for specified period
of time and cannot move from HP, it is detected as an error
if the same symptom occurs again after the first retry.
Remedy
1. Check if the Motor (M2) Connector is physically removed.
2. Check if the Motor failure occurs.
3. Check if the Gripper Unit HP Sensor (S7) Connector is
physically removed.
4. Check if the Gripper Unit HP Sensor (S7) failure occurs.
Title
Gripper Unit Move Motor fails to return to HP
Description At initial rotation, when the Motor rotates for specified period
of time and cannot return to HP, it is detected as an error if
the same symptom occurs again after the first retry.
Assumed 1. Check if the Motor (M2) Connector is physically removed.
cause
2. Check if the Motor failure occurs.
3. Check if the Gripper Unit HP Sensor (S7) Connector is
physically removed.
4. Check if the Gripper Unit HP Sensor (S7) failure occurs.
Title
Shutter home position error
Description The stapler does not leave the shutter home position when
the stack ejection motor has been driven for 30 seconds.
Remedy
1. The shutter home position sensor (PI113) is faulty.
2. The wiring between the finisher controller PCB and stack
ejection motor, and between the finisher controller PCB and
shutter clutch is faulty.
3. The shutter mechanism is faulty.
4. The stack ejection motor (M102), shutter clutch (CL101),
ang stack ejection lower roller clutch (CL102) is faulty.
5. The finisher controller PCB is faulty.
Title
Shutter home position error
Description The stapler does not return to the shutter home position
when the stack ejection motor has been driven for 3
seconds.
Remedy
1. The shutter home position sensor (PI113) is faulty.
2. The wiring between the finisher controller PCB and stack
ejection motor, and between the finisher controller PCB and
shutter clutch is faulty.
3. The shutter mechanism is faulty.
4. The stack ejection motor (M102), shutter clutch (CL101),
ang stack ejection lower roller clutch (CL102) is faulty.
5. The finisher controller PCB is faulty.
8001
05
E590
8002
05
E591
8001
05
E591
8002
05
Item
Description
Title
Punch home position error
Description The puncher does not detect the punch home position
sensor when the puncher motor has been driven for 20
msec.
Remedy
1. The punch home position sensor (PI63) and punch motor
clock sensor (PI62) is faulty.
2. The wiring between the punch controller PCB and sensor
is faulty.
3. The punch mechanism is faulty.
4. The punch controller PCB is faulty.
5. The finisher controller PCB is faulty.
Title
Punch home position error
Description After the motor has been stopped at time of punch motor
initialization, the puncher does not detect punch home
position sensor.
Remedy
1. The punch home position sensor (PI63) and punch motor
clock sensor (PI62) is faulty.
2. The wiring between the punch controller PCB and sensor
is faulty.
3. The punch mechanism is faulty.
4. The punch controller PCB is faulty.
5. The finisher controller PCB is faulty.
Title
Scrap full detection error
Description The voltage of the light received is 3.0 V or less even when
the light emitting duty of the scrap full detector sensor has
been increased to 66% or more.
Remedy
1. The wiring between the scrap full detector PCB and
punch controller PCB is faulty.
2. The scrap full detector PCB is faulty.
3. The punch controller PCB is faulty.
4. The finisher controller PCB is faulty.
Title
Scrap full detection error
Description The voltage of the light received is 2.0 V or more even when
the light emitting duty of the scrap full detector sensor has
been decreased to 0%.
Remedy
1. The scrap full detector PCB is faulty.
2. The punch controller PCB is faulty.
3. The finisher controller PCB is faulty.
7-46
7
Ecode Detail Location
Code
E592
8001
05
E592
8002
05
E592
8003
05
E592
8004
05
E592
8005
05
Item
7-47
Description
Title
Trailing edge sensor error
Description The voltage of the light received is 3.0 V or less even
when the light emitting duty of the trailing edge sensor
(LED5,PTR5) has been increased to 66% or more.
Remedy
1. The wiring between the LED PCB/photosensor PCB and
punch controller PCB is faulty.
2. The LED PCB and photosensor PCB is faulty.
3. The punch controller PCB is faulty.
4. The finisher controller PCB is faulty.
Title
Trailing edge sensor error
Description The voltage of the light received is 2.0 V or more even when
the light emitting duty of the trailing edge sensor has been
decreased to 0%.
Remedy
1. The LED PCB and photosensor PCB is faulty.
2. The punch controller PCB is faulty.
3. The finisher controller PCB is faulty.
Title
Horizontal registration sensor 1 error
Description The voltage of the light received is 2.5 V or less even when
the light emitting duty of the horizontal registration sensor 1
(LED1,PTR1) has been increased to 66% or more.
Remedy
1. The wiring between the LED PCB/photosensor PCB and
punch controller PCB is faulty.
2. The LED PCB and photosensor PCB is faulty.
3. The punch controller PCB is faulty.
4. The finisher controller PCB is faulty.
Title
Horizontal registration sensor 1 error
Description The voltage of the light received is 2.0 V or more even when
the light emitting duty of the horizontal registration sensor 1
(LED1,PTR1) has been decreased to 0%.
Remedy
1. The LED PCB and photosensor PCB is faulty.
2. The punch controller PCB is faulty.
3. The finisher controller PCB is faulty.
Title
Horizontal registration sensor 2 error
Description The voltage of the light received is 2.5 V or less even when
the light emitting duty of the horizontal registration sensor 2
(LED2,PTR2) has been increased to 66% or more.
Remedy
1. The wiring between the LED PCB/photosensor PCB and
punch controller PCB is faulty.
2. The LED PCB and photosensor PCB is faulty.
3. The punch controller PCB is faulty.
4. The finisher controller PCB is faulty.
8006
05
E592
8007
05
E592
8008
05
E592
8009
05
E592
800A
05
Item
Description
Title
Horizontal registration sensor 2 error
Description The voltage of the light received is 2.0 V or more even when
the light emitting duty of the horizontal registration sensor 2
(LED2,PTR2) has been decreased to 0%.
Remedy
1. The LED PCB and photosensor PCB is faulty.
2. The punch controller PCB is faulty.
3. The finisher controller PCB is faulty.
Title
Horizontal registration sensor 3 error
Description The voltage of the light received is 2.5 V or less even when
the light emitting duty of the horizontal registration sensor 3
(LED3,PTR3) has been increased to 66% or more.
Remedy
1. The wiring between the LED PCB/photosensor PCB and
punch controller PCB is faulty.
2. The LED PCB and photosensor PCB is faulty.
3. The punch controller PCB is faulty.
4. The finisher controller PCB is faulty.
Title
Horizontal registration sensor 3 error
Description The voltage of the light received is 2.0 V or more even when
the light emitting duty of the horizontal registration sensor 3
(LED3,PTR3) has been decreased to 0%.
Remedy
1. The LED PCB and photosensor PCB is faulty.
2. The punch controller PCB is faulty.
3. The finisher controller PCB is faulty.
Title
Horizontal registration sensor 4 error
Description The voltage of the light received is 2.5 V or less even when
the light emitting duty of the horizontal registration sensor 4
(LED4,PTR4) has been increased to 66% or more.
Remedy
1. The wiring between the LED PCB/photosensor PCB and
punch controller PCB is faulty.
2. The LED PCB and photosensor PCB is faulty.
3. The punch controller PCB is faulty.
4. The finisher controller PCB is faulty.
Title
Horizontal registration sensor 4 error
Description The voltage of the light received is 2.0 V or more even when
the light emitting duty of the horizontal registration sensor 4
(LED4,PTR4) has been decreased to 0%.
Remedy
1. The LED PCB and photosensor PCB is faulty.
2. The punch controller PCB is faulty.
3. The finisher controller PCB is faulty.
7-47
7
Ecode Detail Location
Code
E593
E593
E5F0
E5F0
8001
8002
8001
8002
05
05
05
05
Item
7-48
Description
Title
Horizontal registration home position error
Description At time of horizontal registration motor initialization, the
punch slide unit does not leave the horizontal home position
sensor even when it has been driven for 9 mm.
Remedy
1. The horizontal registration home position (PI61) is faulty.
2. The wiring between the punch controller PCB and sensor
is faulty.
3. The horizontal registration mechanism is faulty.
4. The horizontal registration motor (M62) is faulty.
5. The punch controller PCB is faulty.
6. The finisher controller PCB is faulty.
Title
Horizontal registration home position error
Description At time of horizontal registration motor initialization, the
punch slide unit does not return to the horizontal registration
home position sensor even when the unit has been driven
for 37 mm.
Remedy
1. The horizontal registration home position (PI61) is faulty.
2. The wiring between the punch controller PCB and sensor
is faulty.
3. The horizontal registration mechanism is faulty.
4. The horizontal registration motor (M62) is faulty.
5. The punch controller PCB is faulty.
6. The finisher controller PCB is faulty.
Title
Paper positioning plate home position error
Description The paper positioning plate home positio sensor does not
turn ON when the paper positioning plate motor has been
driven for 1500 pulses.
Remedy
1. The paper positioning plate home position sensor (PI7) is
faulty.
2. The positioning plate drive mechanism is faulty.
3. The paper positioning plate motor (M4) is faulty.
4. The saddle stitcher controller PCB is faulty.
Title
Paper positioning plate home position error
Description The paper positioning plate home position sensor does not
turn OFF when the paper positioning plate motor has been
driven for 300 pulses.
Remedy
1. The paper positioning plate home position sensor (PI7) is
faulty.
2. The positioning plate drive mechanism is faulty.
3. The paper positioning plate motor (M4) is faulty.
4. The saddle stitcher controller PCB is faulty.
8001
05
E5F1
8002
05
E5F2
8001
05
E5F2
8002
05
E5F3
8001
05
E5F3
8002
05
Item
Description
Title
Paper folding motor lock error
Description The feed speed of the paper fold roller reaches 5 mm/sec or
less.
Remedy
1. The paper folding motor clock sensor (PI4) and paper
folding home position sensor (PI21. is faulty.
2. The paper folding roller drive mechanism is faulty.
3. The paper folding motor (M2) is faulty.
4. The saddle stitcher controller PCB is faulty.
Title
Paper positioning plate home position error
Description The status of Paper Fold Home Position Sensor does
not change although the Paper Fold Motor is driven for a
specified period of time.
Remedy
1. The paper folding motor clock sensor (PI4) and paper
folding home position sensor (PI21) is faulty.
2. The paper folding roller drive mechanism is faulty.
3. The paper folding motor (M2) is faulty.
4. The saddle stitcher controller PCB is faulty.
Title
Guide home position error
Description The guide home position sensor does not turn ON when the
guide motor has been driven for 700 pulses.
Remedy
1. The guide home position sensor (PI13) is faulty.
2. The guide plate drive mechanism is faulty.
3. The guide Motor (M3) is faulty.
4. The saddle stitcher controller PCB is faulty.
Title
Guide home position error
Description The guide home position sensor does not turn OFF when
the guide motor has been driven for 50 pulses.
Remedy
1. The guide home position sensor (PI13) is faulty.
2. The guide plate drive mechanism is faulty.
3. The guide Motor (M3) is faulty.
4. The saddle stitcher controller PCB is faulty.
Title
Aligning plate home position error
Description The aligning plate home position sensor does not turn ON
when the aligning plate motor has been driven for 500
pulses.
Remedy
1. The aligning plate home position sensor (PI5) is faulty.
2. The aligning plate drive mechanism is faulty.
3. The aligning motor (M5) is faulty.
4. The saddle stitcher controller PCB is faulty.
Title
Aligning plate home position error
Description The aligning plate home position sensor does not turn OFF
when the aligning plate motor has been driven for 50 pulses.
Remedy
1. The aligning plate home position sensor (PI5) is faulty.
2. The aligning plate drive mechanism is faulty.
3. The aligning motor (M5) is faulty.
4. The saddle stitcher controller PCB is faulty.
7-48
7
Ecode Detail Location
Code
E5F4
8001
05
E5F4
8002
05
E5F5
8001
05
E5F5
8002
05
E5F6
8001
05
E5F6
8002
05
Item
7-49
Description
Title
Stitcher (rear) home position error
Description The stitching home position sensor does not turn ON when
the stitch motor (rear) has been driven backward for 0.5 sec.
Remedy
1. The stitcher home position sensor (rear) (SW5) is faulty.
2. The stitcher (rear) is faulty.
3. The saddle stitcher controller PCB is faulty.
Title
Stitcher (rear) home position error
Description The stitching home position sensor does not turn OFF when
the stitch motor (rear) has been driven forward for 0.5 sec.
Remedy
1. The stitcher home position sensor (rear) (SW5) is faulty.
2. The stitcher (rear) is faulty.
3. The saddle stitcher controller PCB is faulty.
Title
Stitcher (front) home position error
Description The stitching home position sensor does not turn ON when
the stitch motor (front) has been driven forward for 0.5 sec.
Remedy
1. The stitcher home position sensor (front) (SW7) is faulty.
2. The stitcher (front) is faulty.
3. The saddle stitcher controller PCB is faulty.
Title
Stitcher (front) home position error
Description The stitching home position sensor does not turn OFF when
the stitch motor (front) has been driven backward for 0.5
sec.
Remedy
1. The stitcher home position sensor (front) (SW7) is faulty.
2. The stitcher (front) is faulty.
3. The saddle stitcher controller PCB is faulty.
Title
Paper pushing plate home position error
Description The paper pushing plate home position sensor does not turn
ON when the paper pushing plate motor has been driven for
0.5 sec.
Remedy
1. The paper pushing plate home position sensor (PI14),
paper pushing plate top position sensor (PI15), and paper
pushing plate motor clock sensor (PI1) is faulty.
2. The paper pushing plate drive mechanism is faulty.
3. The paper pushing plate motor (M8) is faulty.
4. The saddle stitcher controller PCB is faulty.
Title
Paper pushing plate home position error
Description The paper pushing plate home position sensor does not turn
OFF when the paper pushing plate motor has been driven
for 150 ms.
Remedy
1. The paper pushing plate home position sensor (PI14),
paper pushing plate top position sensor (PI15), and paper
pushing plate motor clock sensor (PI1) is faulty.
2. The paper pushing plate drive mechanism is faulty.
3. The paper pushing plate motor (M8) is faulty.
4. The saddle stitcher controller PCB is faulty.
8003
05
E5F6
8004
05
E5F6
8005
05
Item
Description
Title
Paper pushing plate motor clock error
Description The number of pulses detected by the paper pushing plate
motor clock sensor is 6 pulses or less.
Remedy
1. The paper pushing plate home position sensor (PI14),
paper pushing plate top position sensor (PI15), and paper
pushing plate motor clock sensor (PI1) is faulty.
2. The paper pushing plate drive mechanism is faulty.
3. The paper pushing plate motor (M8) is faulty.
4. The saddle stitcher controller PCB is faulty.
Title
Pushing position error
Description The paper pushing plate leading edge position sensor does
not turn ON when the paper pushing plate motor has been
driven for 0.1 sec.
Remedy
1. The paper pushing plate home position sensor (PI14),
paper pushing plate top position sensor (PI15), and paper
pushing plate motor clock sensor (PI1) is faulty.
2. The paper pushing plate drive mechanism is faulty.
3. The paper pushing plate motor (M8) is faulty.
4. The saddle stitcher controller PCB is faulty.
Title
Pushing position error
Description The paper pushing plate leading edge position sensor does
not turn OFF when the paper pushing plate motor has been
driven for 0.5 sec.
Remedy
1. The paper pushing plate home position sensor (PI14),
paper pushing plate top position sensor (PI15), and paper
pushing plate motor clock sensor (PI1) is faulty.
2. The paper pushing plate drive mechanism is faulty.
3. The paper pushing plate motor (M8) is faulty.
4. The saddle stitcher controller PCB is faulty.
T-7-5
7-49
7
Ecode Detail Location
Code
E602
0001
00
E602
0002
00
E602
0003
00
Item
7-50
Description
Title
Error in HDD
Description HDD failed to be recognized. Startup partition (BOOTDEV)
failed to be found at startup.
Remedy
1. Turn OFF the main switch and check connection of HDD
cable, and then turn ON the main switch.
2. Be sure that HDD spins stably (no problem in drive sound)
and 5V/12V power is supplied when the main power is turned
ON.
3. If the above measures do not solve the problem, replace
the HDD and reinstall the system. If there still remains the
problem, replace the Main Controller PCB 1.
Title
Error in HDD
Description There is no system for the main CPU
Remedy
1. Start in Safe Mode, then perform overall format using SST
or USB momory and reinstall the system, and then turn OFF
and then ON the Main Switch.(Prepare the USB memory
which system software was registered. Insert the USB
memory to the equipment. Execute [3]: Upgrade (Overwrite
All) in the main menu.)
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, it can be
caused by failure with HDD; therefore, replace the HDD and
reinstall the system.
Title
Error in HDD
Description WriteAbort was detected with BootDevice
Remedy
1. Execute detection and recovery of WriteAbortSector
<In the case of display of B/W E-code>
1-1. Perform the following steps because Service Mode is
not available.
1-2. Turn OFF the power. Then, while pressing 1+9 keys,
turn ON the power. WriteAbortSector recovery routine is
automatically started which makes the screen black.
1-3. After a while, progress is displayed because the process
takes time (40 to 50 min.). The process is complete when
the screen turns white.
<In the case of official display of wrench-mark>
1-1. Set as follows: CHK-TYPE=0; and execute HD-CHECK
(40 to 50 min.), and then turn OFF and then ON the main
switch.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, start up
in Safe Mode to perform overall format using SST or USB
memory and reinstall the system, and then turn OFF and
then ON the main switch.
3. If no improvement is found despite the above measures,
it can be caused by failure with HDD; therefore, replace the
HDD and reinstall the system.
0006
00
E602
0007
00
E602
0009
00
E602
0012
00
Item
Description
Title
Error in HDD
Description There is no system for the sub CPU
Remedy
Reinstall the system software. For details, see Chapter 6:
Upgrading.
For your reference, the method using USB memory is
described below.
1. Prepare the USB memory which system software was
registered.
2. Execute the following service mode:
COPIER>FUNCTION>SYSTEM>DOWNLOAD to enter the
download mode. (When it is not operated normally, start the
safe mode.)
3. Insert the USB memory to the equipment.
4. Execute [3]: Upgrade (Overwrite All) in the main menu. (Be
sure to download SYSTEM, LANGUAGE and RUI.)
5. System software is downloaded and the machine restarts
automatically. At this time, if the machine restarts with the
safe mode, E753 might occurs. Check the log. In case of the
system software of the options which are not connected, turn
OFF and then ON the power supply to restore. (For details,
see the description for E753.)
If the measures above do not solve the problem, replace the
HDD and download the system software with the foregoing
method.
Title
Error in HDD
Description There is no ICCProfile
Remedy
1. Start up in Safe Mode and reinstall the system using SST;
and then turn OFF and then ON the main power switch.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, it can be
caused by failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD
and reinstall the system.
Title
Error in HDD
Description There is no Font file in /BOOTDEV/BOOT
Remedy
1. Start up in Safe Mode and reinstall the system using SST;
and then turn OFF and then ON the main power switch.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, it can be
caused by failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD
and reinstall the system.
Title
Error in HDD
Description There is no file in which the Web browser refers to
Remedy
1. Start up in Safe Mode and reinstall the Web browser using
SST, and then turn OFF and then ON the main power switch.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, it can be
caused by failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD
and reinstall the system.
7-50
7
Ecode Detail Location
Code
E602
0100
00
E602
0101
00
E602
E602
0102
0103
00
00
Item
7-51
Description
Title
Error in HDD
Description Failure in contact with HDD
Remedy
1. Check the cable and power connector.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, start
in Safe Mode to perform overall format using SST or USB
memory and reinstall the system, and then turn OFF and
then ON the Main Power Switch.
3. If there still remains the problem, it can be caused by
failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall
the system.
Title
Error in HDD
Description Failure in contact with HDD
Remedy
1. Check the cable and power connector.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, start
in Safe Mode to perform overall format using SST or USB
memory and reinstall the system, and then turn OFF and
then ON the Main Power Switch.
3. If there still remains the problem, it can be caused by
failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall
the system.
Title
Error in HDD
Description Failure in contact with HDD
Remedy
1. Check the cable and power connector.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, start
in Safe Mode to perform overall format using SST or USB
memory and reinstall the system, and then turn OFF and
then ON the Main Power Switch.
3. If there still remains the problem, it can be caused by
failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall
the system.
Title
Error in HDD
Description WriteAbort (at startup)
Remedy
1. Enter the applicable CHK-TYPE=1 in the partition to
execute HDD-CHECK (duration: several minutes to several
dozen minutes); and then turn OFF and then ON the power.
2. If the above measures failed to recover the system, enter
the applicable CHK-TYPE=1 in the partition to execute HDDCLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the main switch.
0104
00
E602
0105
00
E602
0110
00
E602
0112
00
Item
Description
Title
Error in HDD
Description Failure in contact with HDD
Remedy
1. Check the cable and power connector.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, start
in Safe Mode to perform overall format using SST or USB
memory and reinstall the system, and then turn OFF and
then ON the Main Power Switch.
3. If there still remains the problem, it can be caused by
failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall
the system.
Title
Error in HDD
Description Error in file system
Remedy
1. Enter the applicable CHK-TYPE=1 in the partition to
execute HDD-CLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the
Main Switch.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, it can be
caused by failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD
and reinstall the system.
Title
Error in HDD
Description System error or Packet data error
Remedy
Its due to data corruption or software bug.
1. Start in Safe Mode to perform overall format with SST and
reinstall the system, and then turn OFF and then ON the
Main Power Switch.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, it can be
caused by failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD
and reinstall the system.
Title
Error in HDD
Description System error or Packet data error
Remedy
Its due to data corruption or software bug.
1. Start in Safe Mode to perform overall format with SST and
reinstall the system, and then turn OFF and then ON the
Main Power Switch.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, it can be
caused by failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD
and reinstall the system.
7-51
7
Ecode Detail Location
Code
E602
0113
00
E602
0114
00
E602
0122
00
E602
0123
00
Item
7-52
Description
Title
Error in HDD
Description WriteAbort
Remedy
The document data (such as BOX on the HDD) can be
damaged.
1. Enter the applicable CHK-TYPE=1 in the partition to
perform HDD-CHECK (duration: several minutes to several
dozens of minutes), and then turn OFF and then ON the
power.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, enter the
applicable CHK-TYPE=1 in the partition to execute HDDCLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the Main Power
Switch.
(Use SST to perform reformat/reinstallation in the case of the
following: BOOTDEV, BOOTDEV2 and APL_SEND)
3. If there still remains the problem, it can be caused by
failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall
the system.
Title
Error in HDD
Description System error or Packet data error
Remedy
Its due to data corruption or software bug.
1. Start in Safe Mode to perform overall format with SST and
reinstall the system, and then turn OFF and then ON the
Main Power Switch.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, it can be
caused by failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD
and reinstall the system.
Title
Error in HDD
Description System error or Packet data error
Remedy
Its due to data corruption or software bug.
1. Start in Safe Mode to perform overall format with SST and
reinstall the system, and then turn OFF and then ON the
Main Power Switch.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, it can be
caused by failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD
and reinstall the system.
Title
Error in HDD
Description System error or Packet data error
Remedy
Its due to data corruption or software bug.
1. Start in Safe Mode to perform overall format with SST and
reinstall the system, and then turn OFF and then ON the
Main Power Switch.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, it can be
caused by failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD
and reinstall the system.
0124
00
E602
0125
00
E602
0200
00
E602
0201
00
Item
Description
Title
Error in HDD
Description System error or Packet data error
Remedy
Its due to data corruption or software bug.
1. Start in Safe Mode to perform overall format with SST and
reinstall the system, and then turn OFF and then ON the
Main Power Switch.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, it can be
caused by failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD
and reinstall the system.
Title
Error in HDD
Description WriteAbort
Remedy
The document data (such as BOX on the HDD) can be
damaged.
1. Enter the applicable CHK-TYPE=1 in the partition to
perform HDD-CHECK (duration: several minutes to several
dozens of minutes), and then turn OFF and then ON the
power.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, enter the
applicable CHK-TYPE=1 in the partition to execute HDDCLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the Main Power
Switch.
(Use SST to perform reformat/reinstallation in the case of the
following: BOOTDEV, BOOTDEV2 and APL_SEND)
3. If there still remains the problem, it can be caused by
failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall
the system.
Title
Error in HDD
Description Failure in contact with HDD
Remedy
1. Check the cable and power connector.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, start
in Safe Mode to perform overall format using SST or USB
memory and reinstall the system, and then turn OFF and
then ON the Main Power Switch.
3. If there still remains the problem, it can be caused by
failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall
the system.
Title
Error in HDD
Description Failure in contact with HDD
Remedy
1. Check the cable and power connector.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, start
in Safe Mode to perform overall format using SST or USB
memory and reinstall the system, and then turn OFF and
then ON the Main Power Switch.
3. If there still remains the problem, it can be caused by
failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall
the system.
7-52
7
Ecode Detail Location
Code
E602
0202
00
E602
0203
00
E602
0204
00
E602
0205
00
E602
0210
00
Item
7-53
Description
Title
Error in HDD
Description Failure in contact with HDD
Remedy
1. Check the cable and power connector.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, start
in Safe Mode to perform overall format using SST or USB
memory and reinstall the system, and then turn OFF and
then ON the Main Power Switch.
3. If there still remains the problem, it can be caused by
failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall
the system.
Title
Error in HDD
Description WriteAbort (at startup)
Remedy
1. Enter the applicable CHK-TYPE=1 in the partition to
execute HDD-CHECK (duration: several minutes to several
dozen minutes); and then turn OFF and then ON the power.
2. If the above measures failed to recover the system, enter
the applicable CHK-TYPE=1 in the partition to execute HDDCLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the main switch.
Title
Error in HDD
Description Failure in contact with HDD
Remedy
1. Check the cable and power connector.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, start
in Safe Mode to perform overall format using SST or USB
memory and reinstall the system, and then turn OFF and
then ON the Main Power Switch.
3. If there still remains the problem, it can be caused by
failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall
the system.
Title
Error in HDD
Description Error in file system
Remedy
1. Enter the applicable CHK-TYPE=1 in the partition to
execute HDD-CLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the
Main Switch.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, it can be
caused by failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD
and reinstall the system.
Title
Error in HDD
Description System error or Packet data error
Remedy
Its due to data corruption or software bug.
1. Start in Safe Mode to perform overall format with SST and
reinstall the system, and then turn OFF and then ON the
Main Power Switch.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, it can be
caused by failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD
and reinstall the system.
0212
00
E602
0213
00
E602
0214
00
E602
0222
00
Item
Description
Title
Error in HDD
Description System error or Packet data error
Remedy
Its due to data corruption or software bug.
1. Start in Safe Mode to perform overall format with SST and
reinstall the system, and then turn OFF and then ON the
Main Power Switch.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, it can be
caused by failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD
and reinstall the system.
Title
Error in HDD
Description WriteAbort
Remedy
The document data (such as BOX on the HDD) can be
damaged.
1. Enter the applicable CHK-TYPE=1 in the partition to
perform HDD-CHECK (duration: several minutes to several
dozens of minutes), and then turn OFF and then ON the
power.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, enter the
applicable CHK-TYPE=1 in the partition to execute HDDCLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the Main Power
Switch.
(Use SST to perform reformat/reinstallation in the case of the
following: BOOTDEV, BOOTDEV2 and APL_SEND)
3. If there still remains the problem, it can be caused by
failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall
the system.
Title
Error in HDD
Description System error or Packet data error
Remedy
Its due to data corruption or software bug.
1. Start in Safe Mode to perform overall format with SST and
reinstall the system, and then turn OFF and then ON the
Main Power Switch.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, it can be
caused by failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD
and reinstall the system.
Title
Error in HDD
Description System error or Packet data error
Remedy
Its due to data corruption or software bug.
1. Start in Safe Mode to perform overall format with SST and
reinstall the system, and then turn OFF and then ON the
Main Power Switch.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, it can be
caused by failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD
and reinstall the system.
7-53
7
Ecode Detail Location
Code
E602
0223
00
E602
0224
00
E602
0225
00
E602
0300
00
Item
7-54
Description
Title
Error in HDD
Description System error or Packet data error
Remedy
Its due to data corruption or software bug.
1. Start in Safe Mode to perform overall format with SST and
reinstall the system, and then turn OFF and then ON the
Main Power Switch.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, it can be
caused by failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD
and reinstall the system.
Title
Error in HDD
Description System error or Packet data error
Remedy
Its due to data corruption or software bug.
1. Start in Safe Mode to perform overall format with SST and
reinstall the system, and then turn OFF and then ON the
Main Power Switch.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, it can be
caused by failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD
and reinstall the system.
Title
Error in HDD
Description WriteAbort
Remedy
The document data (such as BOX on the HDD) can be
damaged.
1. Enter the applicable CHK-TYPE=1 in the partition to
perform HDD-CHECK (duration: several minutes to several
dozens of minutes), and then turn OFF and then ON the
power.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, enter the
applicable CHK-TYPE=1 in the partition to execute HDDCLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the Main Power
Switch.
(Use SST to perform reformat/reinstallation in the case of the
following: BOOTDEV, BOOTDEV2 and APL_SEND)
3. If there still remains the problem, it can be caused by
failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall
the system.
Title
Error in HDD
Description Failure in contact with HDD
Remedy
1. Check the cable and power connector.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, start
in Safe Mode to perform overall format using SST or USB
memory and reinstall the system, and then turn OFF and
then ON the Main Power Switch.
3. If there still remains the problem, it can be caused by
failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall
the system.
0301
00
E602
0302
00
E602
0303
00
E602
0304
00
E602
0305
00
Item
Description
Title
Error in HDD
Description Failure in contact with HDD
Remedy
1. Check the cable and power connector.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, start
in Safe Mode to perform overall format using SST or USB
memory and reinstall the system, and then turn OFF and
then ON the Main Power Switch.
3. If there still remains the problem, it can be caused by
failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall
the system.
Title
Error in HDD
Description Failure in contact with HDD
Remedy
1. Check the cable and power connector.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, start
in Safe Mode to perform overall format using SST or USB
memory and reinstall the system, and then turn OFF and
then ON the Main Power Switch.
3. If there still remains the problem, it can be caused by
failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall
the system.
Title
Error in HDD
Description WriteAbort (at startup)
Remedy
1. Enter the applicable CHK-TYPE=1 in the partition to
execute HDD-CHECK (duration: several minutes to several
dozen minutes); and then turn OFF and then ON the power.
2. If the above measures failed to recover the system, enter
the applicable CHK-TYPE=1 in the partition to execute HDDCLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the main switch.
Title
Error in HDD
Description Failure in contact with HDD
Remedy
1. Check the cable and power connector.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, start
in Safe Mode to perform overall format using SST or USB
memory and reinstall the system, and then turn OFF and
then ON the Main Power Switch.
3. If there still remains the problem, it can be caused by
failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall
the system.
Title
Error in HDD
Description Error in file system
Remedy
1. Enter the applicable CHK-TYPE=1 in the partition to
execute HDD-CLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the
Main Switch.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, it can be
caused by failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD
and reinstall the system.
7-54
7
Ecode Detail Location
Code
E602
0310
00
E602
0312
00
E602
0313
00
E602
0314
00
Item
7-55
Description
Title
Error in HDD
Description System error or Packet data error
Remedy
Its due to data corruption or software bug.
1. Start in Safe Mode to perform overall format with SST and
reinstall the system, and then turn OFF and then ON the
Main Power Switch.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, it can be
caused by failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD
and reinstall the system.
Title
Error in HDD
Description System error or Packet data error
Remedy
Its due to data corruption or software bug.
1. Start in Safe Mode to perform overall format with SST and
reinstall the system, and then turn OFF and then ON the
Main Power Switch.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, it can be
caused by failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD
and reinstall the system.
Title
Error in HDD
Description WriteAbort
Remedy
The document data (such as BOX on the HDD) can be
damaged.
1. Enter the applicable CHK-TYPE=1 in the partition to
perform HDD-CHECK (duration: several minutes to several
dozens of minutes), and then turn OFF and then ON the
power.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, enter the
applicable CHK-TYPE=1 in the partition to execute HDDCLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the Main Power
Switch.
(Use SST to perform reformat/reinstallation in the case of the
following: BOOTDEV, BOOTDEV2 and APL_SEND)
3. If there still remains the problem, it can be caused by
failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall
the system.
Title
Error in HDD
Description System error or Packet data error
Remedy
Its due to data corruption or software bug.
1. Start in Safe Mode to perform overall format with SST and
reinstall the system, and then turn OFF and then ON the
Main Power Switch.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, it can be
caused by failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD
and reinstall the system.
0322
00
E602
0323
00
E602
0324
00
E602
0325
00
Item
Description
Title
Error in HDD
Description System error or Packet data error
Remedy
Its due to data corruption or software bug.
1. Start in Safe Mode to perform overall format with SST and
reinstall the system, and then turn OFF and then ON the
Main Power Switch.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, it can be
caused by failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD
and reinstall the system.
Title
Error in HDD
Description System error or Packet data error
Remedy
Its due to data corruption or software bug.
1. Start in Safe Mode to perform overall format with SST and
reinstall the system, and then turn OFF and then ON the
Main Power Switch.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, it can be
caused by failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD
and reinstall the system.
Title
Error in HDD
Description System error or Packet data error
Remedy
Its due to data corruption or software bug.
1. Start in Safe Mode to perform overall format with SST and
reinstall the system, and then turn OFF and then ON the
Main Power Switch.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, it can be
caused by failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD
and reinstall the system.
Title
Error in HDD
Description WriteAbort
Remedy
The document data (such as BOX on the HDD) can be
damaged.
1. Enter the applicable CHK-TYPE=1 in the partition to
perform HDD-CHECK (duration: several minutes to several
dozens of minutes), and then turn OFF and then ON the
power.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, enter the
applicable CHK-TYPE=1 in the partition to execute HDDCLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the Main Power
Switch.
(Use SST to perform reformat/reinstallation in the case of the
following: BOOTDEV, BOOTDEV2 and APL_SEND)
3. If there still remains the problem, it can be caused by
failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall
the system.
7-55
7
Ecode Detail Location
Code
E602
0400
00
E602
0401
00
E602
E602
0402
0403
00
00
Item
7-56
Description
Title
Error in HDD
Description Failure in contact with HDD
Remedy
1. Check the cable and power connector.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, start
in Safe Mode to perform overall format using SST or USB
memory and reinstall the system, and then turn OFF and
then ON the Main Power Switch.
3. If there still remains the problem, it can be caused by
failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall
the system.
Title
Error in HDD
Description Failure in contact with HDD
Remedy
1. Check the cable and power connector.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, start
in Safe Mode to perform overall format using SST or USB
memory and reinstall the system, and then turn OFF and
then ON the Main Power Switch.
3. If there still remains the problem, it can be caused by
failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall
the system.
Title
Error in HDD
Description Failure in contact with HDD
Remedy
1. Check the cable and power connector.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, start
in Safe Mode to perform overall format using SST or USB
memory and reinstall the system, and then turn OFF and
then ON the Main Power Switch.
3. If there still remains the problem, it can be caused by
failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall
the system.
Title
Error in HDD
Description WriteAbort (at startup)
Remedy
1. Enter the applicable CHK-TYPE=1 in the partition to
execute HDD-CHECK (duration: several minutes to several
dozen minutes); and then turn OFF and then ON the power.
2. If the above measures failed to recover the system, enter
the applicable CHK-TYPE=1 in the partition to execute HDDCLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the main switch.
0404
00
E602
0405
00
E602
0410
00
E602
0412
00
Item
Description
Title
Error in HDD
Description Failure in contact with HDD
Remedy
1. Check the cable and power connector.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, start
in Safe Mode to perform overall format using SST or USB
memory and reinstall the system, and then turn OFF and
then ON the Main Power Switch.
3. If there still remains the problem, it can be caused by
failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall
the system.
Title
Error in HDD
Description Error in file system
Remedy
1. Enter the applicable CHK-TYPE=1 in the partition to
execute HDD-CLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the
Main Switch.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, it can be
caused by failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD
and reinstall the system.
Title
Error in HDD
Description System error or Packet data error
Remedy
Its due to data corruption or software bug.
1. Start in Safe Mode to perform overall format with SST and
reinstall the system, and then turn OFF and then ON the
Main Power Switch.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, it can be
caused by failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD
and reinstall the system.
Title
Error in HDD
Description System error or Packet data error
Remedy
Its due to data corruption or software bug.
1. Start in Safe Mode to perform overall format with SST and
reinstall the system, and then turn OFF and then ON the
Main Power Switch.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, it can be
caused by failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD
and reinstall the system.
7-56
7
Ecode Detail Location
Code
E602
0413
00
E602
0414
00
E602
0422
00
E602
0423
00
Item
7-57
Description
Title
Error in HDD
Description WriteAbort
Remedy
The document data (such as BOX on the HDD) can be
damaged.
1. Enter the applicable CHK-TYPE=1 in the partition to
perform HDD-CHECK (duration: several minutes to several
dozens of minutes), and then turn OFF and then ON the
power.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, enter the
applicable CHK-TYPE=1 in the partition to execute HDDCLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the Main Power
Switch.
(Use SST to perform reformat/reinstallation in the case of the
following: BOOTDEV, BOOTDEV2 and APL_SEND)
3. If there still remains the problem, it can be caused by
failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall
the system.
Title
Error in HDD
Description System error or Packet data error
Remedy
Its due to data corruption or software bug.
1. Start in Safe Mode to perform overall format with SST and
reinstall the system, and then turn OFF and then ON the
Main Power Switch.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, it can be
caused by failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD
and reinstall the system.
Title
Error in HDD
Description System error or Packet data error
Remedy
Its due to data corruption or software bug.
1. Start in Safe Mode to perform overall format with SST and
reinstall the system, and then turn OFF and then ON the
Main Power Switch.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, it can be
caused by failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD
and reinstall the system.
Title
Error in HDD
Description System error or Packet data error
Remedy
Its due to data corruption or software bug.
1. Start in Safe Mode to perform overall format with SST and
reinstall the system, and then turn OFF and then ON the
Main Power Switch.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, it can be
caused by failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD
and reinstall the system.
0424
00
E602
0425
00
E602
0500
00
E602
0501
00
Item
Description
Title
Error in HDD
Description System error or Packet data error
Remedy
Its due to data corruption or software bug.
1. Start in Safe Mode to perform overall format with SST and
reinstall the system, and then turn OFF and then ON the
Main Power Switch.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, it can be
caused by failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD
and reinstall the system.
Title
Error in HDD
Description WriteAbort
Remedy
The document data (such as BOX on the HDD) can be
damaged.
1. Enter the applicable CHK-TYPE=1 in the partition to
perform HDD-CHECK (duration: several minutes to several
dozens of minutes), and then turn OFF and then ON the
power.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, enter the
applicable CHK-TYPE=1 in the partition to execute HDDCLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the Main Power
Switch.
(Use SST to perform reformat/reinstallation in the case of the
following: BOOTDEV, BOOTDEV2 and APL_SEND)
3. If there still remains the problem, it can be caused by
failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall
the system.
Title
Error in HDD
Description Failure in contact with HDD
Remedy
1. Check the cable and power connector.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, start
in Safe Mode to perform overall format using SST or USB
memory and reinstall the system, and then turn OFF and
then ON the Main Power Switch.
3. If there still remains the problem, it can be caused by
failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall
the system.
Title
Error in HDD
Description Failure in contact with HDD
Remedy
1. Check the cable and power connector.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, start
in Safe Mode to perform overall format using SST or USB
memory and reinstall the system, and then turn OFF and
then ON the Main Power Switch.
3. If there still remains the problem, it can be caused by
failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall
the system.
7-57
7
Ecode Detail Location
Code
E602
0502
00
E602
0503
00
E602
0504
00
E602
0505
00
E602
0510
00
Item
7-58
Description
Title
Error in HDD
Description Failure in contact with HDD
Remedy
1. Check the cable and power connector.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, start
in Safe Mode to perform overall format using SST or USB
memory and reinstall the system, and then turn OFF and
then ON the Main Power Switch.
3. If there still remains the problem, it can be caused by
failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall
the system.
Title
Error in HDD
Description WriteAbort (at startup)
Remedy
1. Enter the applicable CHK-TYPE=2 in the partition to
execute HDD-CHECK (duration: several minutes to several
dozen minutes); and then turn OFF and then ON the power.
2. If the above measures failed to recover the system, enter
the applicable CHK-TYPE=2 in the partition to execute HDDCLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the main switch.
Title
Error in HDD
Description Failure in contact with HDD
Remedy
1. Check the cable and power connector.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, start
in Safe Mode to perform overall format using SST or USB
memory and reinstall the system, and then turn OFF and
then ON the Main Power Switch.
3. If there still remains the problem, it can be caused by
failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall
the system.
Title
Error in HDD
Description Error in file system
Remedy
1. Enter the applicable CHK-TYPE=2 in the partition to
execute HDD-CLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the
Main Switch.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, it can be
caused by failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD
and reinstall the system.
Title
Error in HDD
Description System error or Packet data error
Remedy
Its due to data corruption or software bug.
1. Start in Safe Mode to perform overall format with SST and
reinstall the system, and then turn OFF and then ON the
Main Power Switch.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, it can be
caused by failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD
and reinstall the system.
0512
00
E602
0513
00
E602
0514
00
E602
0522
00
Item
Description
Title
Error in HDD
Description System error or Packet data error
Remedy
Its due to data corruption or software bug.
1. Start in Safe Mode to perform overall format with SST and
reinstall the system, and then turn OFF and then ON the
Main Power Switch.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, it can be
caused by failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD
and reinstall the system.
Title
Error in HDD
Description WriteAbort
Remedy
The document data (such as BOX on the HDD) can be
damaged.
1. Enter the applicable CHK-TYPE=2 in the partition to
perform HDD-CHECK (duration: several minutes to several
dozens of minutes), and then turn OFF and then ON the
power.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, enter the
applicable CHK-TYPE=2 in the partition to execute HDDCLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the Main Power
Switch.
(Use SST to perform reformat/reinstallation in the case of the
following: BOOTDEV, BOOTDEV2 and APL_SEND)
3. If there still remains the problem, it can be caused by
failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall
the system.
Title
Error in HDD
Description System error or Packet data error
Remedy
Its due to data corruption or software bug.
1. Start in Safe Mode to perform overall format with SST and
reinstall the system, and then turn OFF and then ON the
Main Power Switch.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, it can be
caused by failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD
and reinstall the system.
Title
Error in HDD
Description System error or Packet data error
Remedy
Its due to data corruption or software bug.
1. Start in Safe Mode to perform overall format with SST and
reinstall the system, and then turn OFF and then ON the
Main Power Switch.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, it can be
caused by failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD
and reinstall the system.
7-58
7
Ecode Detail Location
Code
E602
0523
00
E602
0524
00
E602
0525
00
E602
0600
00
Item
7-59
Description
Title
Error in HDD
Description System error or Packet data error
Remedy
Its due to data corruption or software bug.
1. Start in Safe Mode to perform overall format with SST and
reinstall the system, and then turn OFF and then ON the
Main Power Switch.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, it can be
caused by failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD
and reinstall the system.
Title
Error in HDD
Description System error or Packet data error
Remedy
Its due to data corruption or software bug.
1. Start in Safe Mode to perform overall format with SST and
reinstall the system, and then turn OFF and then ON the
Main Power Switch.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, it can be
caused by failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD
and reinstall the system.
Title
Error in HDD
Description WriteAbort
Remedy
The document data (such as BOX on the HDD) can be
damaged.
1. Enter the applicable CHK-TYPE=2 in the partition to
perform HDD-CHECK (duration: several minutes to several
dozens of minutes), and then turn OFF and then ON the
power.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, enter the
applicable CHK-TYPE=2 in the partition to execute HDDCLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the Main Power
Switch.
(Use SST to perform reformat/reinstallation in the case of the
following: BOOTDEV, BOOTDEV2 and APL_SEND)
3. If there still remains the problem, it can be caused by
failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall
the system.
Title
Error in HDD
Description Failure in contact with HDD
Remedy
1. Check the cable and power connector.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, start
in Safe Mode to perform overall format using SST or USB
memory and reinstall the system, and then turn OFF and
then ON the Main Power Switch.
3. If there still remains the problem, it can be caused by
failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall
the system.
0601
00
E602
0602
00
E602
0603
00
E602
0604
00
E602
0605
00
Item
Description
Title
Error in HDD
Description Failure in contact with HDD
Remedy
1. Check the cable and power connector.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, start
in Safe Mode to perform overall format using SST or USB
memory and reinstall the system, and then turn OFF and
then ON the Main Power Switch.
3. If there still remains the problem, it can be caused by
failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall
the system.
Title
Error in HDD
Description Failure in contact with HDD
Remedy
1. Check the cable and power connector.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, start
in Safe Mode to perform overall format using SST or USB
memory and reinstall the system, and then turn OFF and
then ON the Main Power Switch.
3. If there still remains the problem, it can be caused by
failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall
the system.
Title
Error in HDD
Description WriteAbort (at startup)
Remedy
1. Enter the applicable CHK-TYPE=2 in the partition to
execute HDD-CHECK (duration: several minutes to several
dozen minutes); and then turn OFF and then ON the power.
2. If the above measures failed to recover the system, enter
the applicable CHK-TYPE=2 in the partition to execute HDDCLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the main switch.
Title
Error in HDD
Description Failure in contact with HDD
Remedy
1. Check the cable and power connector.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, start
in Safe Mode to perform overall format using SST or USB
memory and reinstall the system, and then turn OFF and
then ON the Main Power Switch.
3. If there still remains the problem, it can be caused by
failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall
the system.
Title
Error in HDD
Description Error in file system
Remedy
1. Enter the applicable CHK-TYPE=2 in the partition to
execute HDD-CLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the
Main Switch.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, it can be
caused by failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD
and reinstall the system.
7-59
7
Ecode Detail Location
Code
E602
0610
00
E602
0612
00
E602
0613
00
E602
0614
00
Item
7-60
Description
Title
Error in HDD
Description System error or Packet data error
Remedy
Its due to data corruption or software bug.
1. Start in Safe Mode to perform overall format with SST and
reinstall the system, and then turn OFF and then ON the
Main Power Switch.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, it can be
caused by failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD
and reinstall the system.
Title
Error in HDD
Description System error or Packet data error
Remedy
Its due to data corruption or software bug.
1. Start in Safe Mode to perform overall format with SST and
reinstall the system, and then turn OFF and then ON the
Main Power Switch.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, it can be
caused by failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD
and reinstall the system.
Title
Error in HDD
Description WriteAbort
Remedy
The document data (such as BOX on the HDD) can be
damaged.
1. Enter the applicable CHK-TYPE=2 in the partition to
perform HDD-CHECK (duration: several minutes to several
dozens of minutes), and then turn OFF and then ON the
power.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, enter the
applicable CHK-TYPE=2 in the partition to execute HDDCLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the Main Power
Switch.
(Use SST to perform reformat/reinstallation in the case of the
following: BOOTDEV, BOOTDEV2 and APL_SEND)
3. If there still remains the problem, it can be caused by
failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall
the system.
Title
Error in HDD
Description System error or Packet data error
Remedy
Its due to data corruption or software bug.
1. Start in Safe Mode to perform overall format with SST and
reinstall the system, and then turn OFF and then ON the
Main Power Switch.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, it can be
caused by failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD
and reinstall the system.
0622
00
E602
0623
00
E602
0624
00
E602
0625
00
Item
Description
Title
Error in HDD
Description System error or Packet data error
Remedy
Its due to data corruption or software bug.
1. Start in Safe Mode to perform overall format with SST and
reinstall the system, and then turn OFF and then ON the
Main Power Switch.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, it can be
caused by failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD
and reinstall the system.
Title
Error in HDD
Description System error or Packet data error
Remedy
Its due to data corruption or software bug.
1. Start in Safe Mode to perform overall format with SST and
reinstall the system, and then turn OFF and then ON the
Main Power Switch.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, it can be
caused by failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD
and reinstall the system.
Title
Error in HDD
Description System error or Packet data error
Remedy
Its due to data corruption or software bug.
1. Start in Safe Mode to perform overall format with SST and
reinstall the system, and then turn OFF and then ON the
Main Power Switch.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, it can be
caused by failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD
and reinstall the system.
Title
Error in HDD
Description WriteAbort
Remedy
The document data (such as BOX on the HDD) can be
damaged.
1. Enter the applicable CHK-TYPE=2 in the partition to
perform HDD-CHECK (duration: several minutes to several
dozens of minutes), and then turn OFF and then ON the
power.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, enter the
applicable CHK-TYPE=2 in the partition to execute HDDCLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the Main Power
Switch.
(Use SST to perform reformat/reinstallation in the case of the
following: BOOTDEV, BOOTDEV2 and APL_SEND)
3. If there still remains the problem, it can be caused by
failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall
the system.
7-60
7
Ecode Detail Location
Code
E602
0700
00
E602
0701
00
E602
E602
0702
0703
00
00
Item
7-61
Description
Title
Error in HDD
Description Failure in contact with HDD
Remedy
1. Check the cable and power connector.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, start
in Safe Mode to perform overall format using SST or USB
memory and reinstall the system, and then turn OFF and
then ON the Main Power Switch.
3. If there still remains the problem, it can be caused by
failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall
the system.
Title
Error in HDD
Description Failure in contact with HDD
Remedy
1. Check the cable and power connector.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, start
in Safe Mode to perform overall format using SST or USB
memory and reinstall the system, and then turn OFF and
then ON the Main Power Switch.
3. If there still remains the problem, it can be caused by
failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall
the system.
Title
Error in HDD
Description Failure in contact with HDD
Remedy
1. Check the cable and power connector.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, start
in Safe Mode to perform overall format using SST or USB
memory and reinstall the system, and then turn OFF and
then ON the Main Power Switch.
3. If there still remains the problem, it can be caused by
failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall
the system.
Title
Error in HDD
Description WriteAbort (at startup)
Remedy
1. Enter the applicable CHK-TYPE=2 in the partition to
execute HDD-CHECK (duration: several minutes to several
dozen minutes); and then turn OFF and then ON the power.
2. If the above measures failed to recover the system, enter
the applicable CHK-TYPE=2 in the partition to execute HDDCLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the main switch.
0704
00
E602
0705
00
E602
0710
00
E602
0712
00
Item
Description
Title
Error in HDD
Description Failure in contact with HDD
Remedy
1. Check the cable and power connector.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, start
in Safe Mode to perform overall format using SST or USB
memory and reinstall the system, and then turn OFF and
then ON the Main Power Switch.
3. If there still remains the problem, it can be caused by
failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall
the system.
Title
Error in HDD
Description Error in file system
Remedy
1. Enter the applicable CHK-TYPE=2 in the partition to
execute HDD-CLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the
Main Switch.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, it can be
caused by failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD
and reinstall the system.
Title
Error in HDD
Description System error or Packet data error
Remedy
Its due to data corruption or software bug.
1. Start in Safe Mode to perform overall format with SST and
reinstall the system, and then turn OFF and then ON the
Main Power Switch.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, it can be
caused by failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD
and reinstall the system.
Title
Error in HDD
Description System error or Packet data error
Remedy
Its due to data corruption or software bug.
1. Start in Safe Mode to perform overall format with SST and
reinstall the system, and then turn OFF and then ON the
Main Power Switch.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, it can be
caused by failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD
and reinstall the system.
7-61
7
Ecode Detail Location
Code
E602
0713
00
E602
0714
00
E602
0722
00
E602
0723
00
Item
7-62
Description
Title
Error in HDD
Description WriteAbort
Remedy
The document data (such as BOX on the HDD) can be
damaged.
1. Enter the applicable CHK-TYPE=2 in the partition to
perform HDD-CHECK (duration: several minutes to several
dozens of minutes), and then turn OFF and then ON the
power.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, enter the
applicable CHK-TYPE=2 in the partition to execute HDDCLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the Main Power
Switch.
(Use SST to perform reformat/reinstallation in the case of the
following: BOOTDEV, BOOTDEV2 and APL_SEND)
3. If there still remains the problem, it can be caused by
failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall
the system.
Title
Error in HDD
Description System error or Packet data error
Remedy
Its due to data corruption or software bug.
1. Start in Safe Mode to perform overall format with SST and
reinstall the system, and then turn OFF and then ON the
Main Power Switch.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, it can be
caused by failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD
and reinstall the system.
Title
Error in HDD
Description System error or Packet data error
Remedy
Its due to data corruption or software bug.
1. Start in Safe Mode to perform overall format with SST and
reinstall the system, and then turn OFF and then ON the
Main Power Switch.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, it can be
caused by failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD
and reinstall the system.
Title
Error in HDD
Description System error or Packet data error
Remedy
Its due to data corruption or software bug.
1. Start in Safe Mode to perform overall format with SST and
reinstall the system, and then turn OFF and then ON the
Main Power Switch.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, it can be
caused by failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD
and reinstall the system.
0724
00
E602
0725
00
E602
0800
00
E602
0801
00
Item
Description
Title
Error in HDD
Description System error or Packet data error
Remedy
Its due to data corruption or software bug.
1. Start in Safe Mode to perform overall format with SST and
reinstall the system, and then turn OFF and then ON the
Main Power Switch.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, it can be
caused by failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD
and reinstall the system.
Title
Error in HDD
Description WriteAbort
Remedy
The document data (such as BOX on the HDD) can be
damaged.
1. Enter the applicable CHK-TYPE=2 in the partition to
perform HDD-CHECK (duration: several minutes to several
dozens of minutes), and then turn OFF and then ON the
power.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, enter the
applicable CHK-TYPE=2 in the partition to execute HDDCLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the Main Power
Switch.
(Use SST to perform reformat/reinstallation in the case of the
following: BOOTDEV, BOOTDEV2 and APL_SEND)
3. If there still remains the problem, it can be caused by
failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall
the system.
Title
Error in HDD
Description Failure in contact with HDD
Remedy
1. Check the cable and power connector.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, start
in Safe Mode to perform overall format using SST or USB
memory and reinstall the system, and then turn OFF and
then ON the Main Power Switch.
3. If there still remains the problem, it can be caused by
failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall
the system.
Title
Error in HDD
Description Failure in contact with HDD
Remedy
1. Check the cable and power connector.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, start
in Safe Mode to perform overall format using SST or USB
memory and reinstall the system, and then turn OFF and
then ON the Main Power Switch.
3. If there still remains the problem, it can be caused by
failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall
the system.
7-62
7
Ecode Detail Location
Code
E602
0802
00
E602
0803
00
E602
0804
00
E602
0805
00
E602
0810
00
Item
7-63
Description
Title
Error in HDD
Description Failure in contact with HDD
Remedy
1. Check the cable and power connector.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, start
in Safe Mode to perform overall format using SST or USB
memory and reinstall the system, and then turn OFF and
then ON the Main Power Switch.
3. If there still remains the problem, it can be caused by
failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall
the system.
Title
Error in HDD
Description WriteAbort (at startup)
Remedy
1. Enter the applicable CHK-TYPE=2 in the partition to
execute HDD-CHECK (duration: several minutes to several
dozen minutes); and then turn OFF and then ON the power.
2. If the above measures failed to recover the system, enter
the applicable CHK-TYPE=2 in the partition to execute HDDCLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the main switch.
Title
Error in HDD
Description Failure in contact with HDD
Remedy
1. Check the cable and power connector.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, start
in Safe Mode to perform overall format using SST or USB
memory and reinstall the system, and then turn OFF and
then ON the Main Power Switch.
3. If there still remains the problem, it can be caused by
failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall
the system.
Title
Error in HDD
Description Error in file system
Remedy
1. Enter the applicable CHK-TYPE=2 in the partition to
execute HDD-CLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the
Main Switch.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, it can be
caused by failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD
and reinstall the system.
Title
Error in HDD
Description System error or Packet data error
Remedy
Its due to data corruption or software bug.
1. Start in Safe Mode to perform overall format with SST and
reinstall the system, and then turn OFF and then ON the
Main Power Switch.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, it can be
caused by failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD
and reinstall the system.
0812
00
E602
0813
00
E602
0814
00
E602
0822
00
Item
Description
Title
Error in HDD
Description System error or Packet data error
Remedy
Its due to data corruption or software bug.
1. Start in Safe Mode to perform overall format with SST and
reinstall the system, and then turn OFF and then ON the
Main Power Switch.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, it can be
caused by failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD
and reinstall the system.
Title
Error in HDD
Description WriteAbort
Remedy
The document data (such as BOX on the HDD) can be
damaged.
1. Enter the applicable CHK-TYPE=2 in the partition to
perform HDD-CHECK (duration: several minutes to several
dozens of minutes), and then turn OFF and then ON the
power.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, enter the
applicable CHK-TYPE=2 in the partition to execute HDDCLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the Main Power
Switch.
(Use SST to perform reformat/reinstallation in the case of the
following: BOOTDEV, BOOTDEV2 and APL_SEND)
3. If there still remains the problem, it can be caused by
failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall
the system.
Title
Error in HDD
Description System error or Packet data error
Remedy
Its due to data corruption or software bug.
1. Start in Safe Mode to perform overall format with SST and
reinstall the system, and then turn OFF and then ON the
Main Power Switch.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, it can be
caused by failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD
and reinstall the system.
Title
Error in HDD
Description System error or Packet data error
Remedy
Its due to data corruption or software bug.
1. Start in Safe Mode to perform overall format with SST and
reinstall the system, and then turn OFF and then ON the
Main Power Switch.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, it can be
caused by failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD
and reinstall the system.
7-63
7
Ecode Detail Location
Code
E602
0823
00
E602
0824
00
E602
0825
00
E602
0900
00
Item
7-64
Description
Title
Error in HDD
Description System error or Packet data error
Remedy
Its due to data corruption or software bug.
1. Start in Safe Mode to perform overall format with SST and
reinstall the system, and then turn OFF and then ON the
Main Power Switch.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, it can be
caused by failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD
and reinstall the system.
Title
Error in HDD
Description System error or Packet data error
Remedy
Its due to data corruption or software bug.
1. Start in Safe Mode to perform overall format with SST and
reinstall the system, and then turn OFF and then ON the
Main Power Switch.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, it can be
caused by failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD
and reinstall the system.
Title
Error in HDD
Description WriteAbort
Remedy
The document data (such as BOX on the HDD) can be
damaged.
1. Enter the applicable CHK-TYPE=2 in the partition to
perform HDD-CHECK (duration: several minutes to several
dozens of minutes), and then turn OFF and then ON the
power.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, enter the
applicable CHK-TYPE=2 in the partition to execute HDDCLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the Main Power
Switch.
(Use SST to perform reformat/reinstallation in the case of the
following: BOOTDEV, BOOTDEV2 and APL_SEND)
3. If there still remains the problem, it can be caused by
failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall
the system.
Title
Error in HDD
Description Failure in contact with HDD
Remedy
1. Check the cable and power connector.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, start
in Safe Mode to perform overall format using SST or USB
memory and reinstall the system, and then turn OFF and
then ON the Main Power Switch.
3. If there still remains the problem, it can be caused by
failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall
the system.
0901
00
E602
0902
00
E602
0903
00
E602
0904
00
E602
0905
00
Item
Description
Title
Error in HDD
Description Failure in contact with HDD
Remedy
1. Check the cable and power connector.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, start
in Safe Mode to perform overall format using SST or USB
memory and reinstall the system, and then turn OFF and
then ON the Main Power Switch.
3. If there still remains the problem, it can be caused by
failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall
the system.
Title
Error in HDD
Description Failure in contact with HDD
Remedy
1. Check the cable and power connector.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, start
in Safe Mode to perform overall format using SST or USB
memory and reinstall the system, and then turn OFF and
then ON the Main Power Switch.
3. If there still remains the problem, it can be caused by
failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall
the system.
Title
Error in HDD
Description WriteAbort (at startup)
Remedy
1. Enter the applicable CHK-TYPE=3 in the partition to
execute HDD-CHECK (duration: several minutes to several
dozen minutes); and then turn OFF and then ON the power.
2. If the above measures failed to recover the system, enter
the applicable CHK-TYPE=3 in the partition to execute HDDCLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the main switch.
Title
Error in HDD
Description Failure in contact with HDD
Remedy
1. Check the cable and power connector.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, start
in Safe Mode to perform overall format using SST or USB
memory and reinstall the system, and then turn OFF and
then ON the Main Power Switch.
3. If there still remains the problem, it can be caused by
failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall
the system.
Title
Error in HDD
Description Error in file system
Remedy
1. Enter the applicable CHK-TYPE=3 in the partition to
execute HDD-CLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the
Main Switch.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, it can be
caused by failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD
and reinstall the system.
7-64
7
Ecode Detail Location
Code
E602
0910
00
E602
0912
00
E602
0913
00
E602
0914
00
Item
7-65
Description
Title
Error in HDD
Description System error or Packet data error
Remedy
Its due to data corruption or software bug.
1. Start in Safe Mode to perform overall format with SST and
reinstall the system, and then turn OFF and then ON the
Main Power Switch.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, it can be
caused by failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD
and reinstall the system.
Title
Error in HDD
Description System error or Packet data error
Remedy
Its due to data corruption or software bug.
1. Start in Safe Mode to perform overall format with SST and
reinstall the system, and then turn OFF and then ON the
Main Power Switch.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, it can be
caused by failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD
and reinstall the system.
Title
Error in HDD
Description WriteAbort
Remedy
The document data (such as BOX on the HDD) can be
damaged.
1. Enter the applicable CHK-TYPE=3 in the partition to
perform HDD-CHECK (duration: several minutes to several
dozens of minutes), and then turn OFF and then ON the
power.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, enter the
applicable CHK-TYPE=3 in the partition to execute HDDCLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the Main Power
Switch.
(Use SST to perform reformat/reinstallation in the case of the
following: BOOTDEV, BOOTDEV2 and APL_SEND)
3. If there still remains the problem, it can be caused by
failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall
the system.
Title
Error in HDD
Description System error or Packet data error
Remedy
Its due to data corruption or software bug.
1. Start in Safe Mode to perform overall format with SST and
reinstall the system, and then turn OFF and then ON the
Main Power Switch.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, it can be
caused by failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD
and reinstall the system.
0922
00
E602
0923
00
E602
0924
00
E602
0925
00
Item
Description
Title
Error in HDD
Description System error or Packet data error
Remedy
Its due to data corruption or software bug.
1. Start in Safe Mode to perform overall format with SST and
reinstall the system, and then turn OFF and then ON the
Main Power Switch.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, it can be
caused by failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD
and reinstall the system.
Title
Error in HDD
Description System error or Packet data error
Remedy
Its due to data corruption or software bug.
1. Start in Safe Mode to perform overall format with SST and
reinstall the system, and then turn OFF and then ON the
Main Power Switch.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, it can be
caused by failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD
and reinstall the system.
Title
Error in HDD
Description System error or Packet data error
Remedy
Its due to data corruption or software bug.
1. Start in Safe Mode to perform overall format with SST and
reinstall the system, and then turn OFF and then ON the
Main Power Switch.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, it can be
caused by failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD
and reinstall the system.
Title
Error in HDD
Description WriteAbort
Remedy
The document data (such as BOX on the HDD) can be
damaged.
1. Enter the applicable CHK-TYPE=3 in the partition to
perform HDD-CHECK (duration: several minutes to several
dozens of minutes), and then turn OFF and then ON the
power.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, enter the
applicable CHK-TYPE=3 in the partition to execute HDDCLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the Main Power
Switch.
(Use SST to perform reformat/reinstallation in the case of the
following: BOOTDEV, BOOTDEV2 and APL_SEND)
3. If there still remains the problem, it can be caused by
failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall
the system.
7-65
7
Ecode Detail Location
Code
E602
1000
00
E602
1001
00
E602
1002
00
E602
1003
00
Item
7-66
Description
Title
Error in HDD
Description Failure in contact with HDD
Remedy
1. Check the cable and power connector.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, start
in Safe Mode to perform overall format using SST or USB
memory and reinstall the system, and then turn OFF and
then ON the Main Power Switch.
3. If there still remains the problem, it can be caused by
failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall
the system.
Title
Error in HDD
Description Failure in contact with HDD
Remedy
1. Check the cable and power connector.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, start
in Safe Mode to perform overall format using SST or USB
memory and reinstall the system, and then turn OFF and
then ON the Main Power Switch.
3. If there still remains the problem, it can be caused by
failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall
the system.
Title
Error in HDD
Description Failure in contact with HDD
Remedy
1. Check the cable and power connector.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, start
in Safe Mode to perform overall format using SST or USB
memory and reinstall the system, and then turn OFF and
then ON the Main Power Switch.
3. If there still remains the problem, it can be caused by
failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall
the system.
Title
Error in HDD
Description WriteAbort (at startup)
Remedy
Recovery in Boot partition is available only through SST in
Safe Mode.
1. Set as follows: CHK-TYPE=4 = 0; and execute HDDCHECK (duration: several dozen minutes), and then turn
OFF and then ON the power.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, get in
Download Mode to perform overall format using SST or USB
memory and reinstall the system, and then turn OFF and
then ON the Main Power Switch.
1004
00
E602
1005
00
E602
1010
00
E602
1012
00
Item
Description
Title
Error in HDD
Description Failure in contact with HDD
Remedy
1. Check the cable and power connector.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, start
in Safe Mode to perform overall format using SST or USB
memory and reinstall the system, and then turn OFF and
then ON the Main Power Switch.
3. If there still remains the problem, it can be caused by
failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall
the system.
Title
Error in HDD
Description Error in file system
Remedy
Recovery in Boot Partition is available only through SST in
Safe Mode.
1. Start in Safe Mode to perform overall format using SST or
USB memory and reinstall the system, and then turn OFF
and then ON the Main Power Switch.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, it can be
caused by failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD
and reinstall the system.
Title
Error in HDD
Description System error or Packet data error
Remedy
Its due to data corruption or software bug.
1. Start in Safe Mode to perform overall format with SST and
reinstall the system, and then turn OFF and then ON the
Main Power Switch.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, it can be
caused by failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD
and reinstall the system.
Title
Error in HDD
Description System error or Packet data error
Remedy
Its due to data corruption or software bug.
1. Start in Safe Mode to perform overall format with SST and
reinstall the system, and then turn OFF and then ON the
Main Power Switch.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, it can be
caused by failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD
and reinstall the system.
7-66
7
Ecode Detail Location
Code
E602
1013
00
E602
1014
00
E602
1022
00
E602
1023
00
Item
7-67
Description
Title
Error in HDD
Description WriteAbort
Remedy
The document data (such as BOX on the HDD) can be
damaged.
1. Enter the applicable CHK-TYPE=4 in the partition to
perform HDD-CHECK (duration: several minutes to several
dozens of minutes), and then turn OFF and then ON the
power.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, enter the
applicable CHK-TYPE=4 in the partition to execute HDDCLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the Main Power
Switch.
(Use SST to perform reformat/reinstallation in the case of the
following: BOOTDEV, BOOTDEV2 and APL_SEND)
3. If there still remains the problem, it can be caused by
failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall
the system.
Title
Error in HDD
Description System error or Packet data error
Remedy
Its due to data corruption or software bug.
1. Start in Safe Mode to perform overall format with SST and
reinstall the system, and then turn OFF and then ON the
Main Power Switch.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, it can be
caused by failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD
and reinstall the system.
Title
Error in HDD
Description System error or Packet data error
Remedy
Its due to data corruption or software bug.
1. Start in Safe Mode to perform overall format with SST and
reinstall the system, and then turn OFF and then ON the
Main Power Switch.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, it can be
caused by failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD
and reinstall the system.
Title
Error in HDD
Description System error or Packet data error
Remedy
Its due to data corruption or software bug.
1. Start in Safe Mode to perform overall format with SST and
reinstall the system, and then turn OFF and then ON the
Main Power Switch.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, it can be
caused by failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD
and reinstall the system.
1024
00
E602
1025
00
E602
1100
00
E602
1101
00
Item
Description
Title
Error in HDD
Description System error or Packet data error
Remedy
Its due to data corruption or software bug.
1. Start in Safe Mode to perform overall format with SST and
reinstall the system, and then turn OFF and then ON the
Main Power Switch.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, it can be
caused by failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD
and reinstall the system.
Title
Error in HDD
Description WriteAbort
Remedy
The document data (such as BOX on the HDD) can be
damaged.
1. Enter the applicable CHK-TYPE=4 in the partition to
perform HDD-CHECK (duration: several minutes to several
dozens of minutes), and then turn OFF and then ON the
power.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, enter the
applicable CHK-TYPE=4 in the partition to execute HDDCLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the Main Power
Switch.
(Use SST to perform reformat/reinstallation in the case of the
following: BOOTDEV, BOOTDEV2 and APL_SEND)
3. If there still remains the problem, it can be caused by
failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall
the system.
Title
Error in HDD
Description Failure in contact with HDD
Remedy
1. Check the cable and power connector.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, start
in Safe Mode to perform overall format using SST or USB
memory and reinstall the system, and then turn OFF and
then ON the Main Power Switch.
3. If there still remains the problem, it can be caused by
failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall
the system.
Title
Error in HDD
Description Failure in contact with HDD
Remedy
1. Check the cable and power connector.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, start
in Safe Mode to perform overall format using SST or USB
memory and reinstall the system, and then turn OFF and
then ON the Main Power Switch.
3. If there still remains the problem, it can be caused by
failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall
the system.
7-67
7
Ecode Detail Location
Code
E602
1102
00
E602
1103
00
E602
1104
00
E602
1105
00
E602
1110
00
Item
7-68
Description
Title
Error in HDD
Description Failure in contact with HDD
Remedy
1. Check the cable and power connector.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, start
in Safe Mode to perform overall format using SST or USB
memory and reinstall the system, and then turn OFF and
then ON the Main Power Switch.
3. If there still remains the problem, it can be caused by
failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall
the system.
Title
Error in HDD
Description WriteAbort (at startup)
Remedy
1. Enter the applicable CHK-TYPE=5 in the partition to
execute HDD-CHECK (duration: several minutes to several
dozen minutes); and then turn OFF and then ON the power.
2. If the above measures failed to recover the system, enter
the applicable CHK-TYPE=5 in the partition to execute HDDCLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the main switch.
Title
Error in HDD
Description Failure in contact with HDD
Remedy
1. Check the cable and power connector.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, start
in Safe Mode to perform overall format using SST or USB
memory and reinstall the system, and then turn OFF and
then ON the Main Power Switch.
3. If there still remains the problem, it can be caused by
failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall
the system.
Title
Error in HDD
Description Error in file system
Remedy
1. Enter the applicable CHK-TYPE=5 in the partition to
execute HDD-CLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the
Main Switch.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, it can be
caused by failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD
and reinstall the system.
Title
Error in HDD
Description System error or Packet data error
Remedy
Its due to data corruption or software bug.
1. Start in Safe Mode to perform overall format with SST and
reinstall the system, and then turn OFF and then ON the
Main Power Switch.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, it can be
caused by failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD
and reinstall the system.
1112
00
E602
1113
00
E602
1114
00
E602
1122
00
Item
Description
Title
Error in HDD
Description System error or Packet data error
Remedy
Its due to data corruption or software bug.
1. Start in Safe Mode to perform overall format with SST and
reinstall the system, and then turn OFF and then ON the
Main Power Switch.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, it can be
caused by failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD
and reinstall the system.
Title
Error in HDD
Description WriteAbort
Remedy
The document data (such as BOX on the HDD) can be
damaged.
1. Enter the applicable CHK-TYPE=5 in the partition to
perform HDD-CHECK (duration: several minutes to several
dozens of minutes), and then turn OFF and then ON the
power.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, enter the
applicable CHK-TYPE=5 in the partition to execute HDDCLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the Main Power
Switch.
(Use SST to perform reformat/reinstallation in the case of the
following: BOOTDEV, BOOTDEV2 and APL_SEND)
3. If there still remains the problem, it can be caused by
failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall
the system.
Title
Error in HDD
Description System error or Packet data error
Remedy
Its due to data corruption or software bug.
1. Start in Safe Mode to perform overall format with SST and
reinstall the system, and then turn OFF and then ON the
Main Power Switch.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, it can be
caused by failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD
and reinstall the system.
Title
Error in HDD
Description System error or Packet data error
Remedy
Its due to data corruption or software bug.
1. Start in Safe Mode to perform overall format with SST and
reinstall the system, and then turn OFF and then ON the
Main Power Switch.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, it can be
caused by failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD
and reinstall the system.
7-68
7
Ecode Detail Location
Code
E602
1123
00
E602
1124
00
E602
1125
00
E602
1200
00
Item
7-69
Description
Title
Error in HDD
Description System error or Packet data error
Remedy
Its due to data corruption or software bug.
1. Start in Safe Mode to perform overall format with SST and
reinstall the system, and then turn OFF and then ON the
Main Power Switch.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, it can be
caused by failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD
and reinstall the system.
Title
Error in HDD
Description System error or Packet data error
Remedy
Its due to data corruption or software bug.
1. Start in Safe Mode to perform overall format with SST and
reinstall the system, and then turn OFF and then ON the
Main Power Switch.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, it can be
caused by failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD
and reinstall the system.
Title
Error in HDD
Description WriteAbort
Remedy
The document data (such as BOX on the HDD) can be
damaged.
1. Enter the applicable CHK-TYPE=5 in the partition to
perform HDD-CHECK (duration: several minutes to several
dozens of minutes), and then turn OFF and then ON the
power.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, enter the
applicable CHK-TYPE=5 in the partition to execute HDDCLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the Main Power
Switch.
(Use SST to perform reformat/reinstallation in the case of the
following: BOOTDEV, BOOTDEV2 and APL_SEND)
3. If there still remains the problem, it can be caused by
failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall
the system.
Title
Error in HDD
Description Failure in contact with HDD
Remedy
1. Check the cable and power connector.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, start
in Safe Mode to perform overall format using SST or USB
memory and reinstall the system, and then turn OFF and
then ON the Main Power Switch.
3. If there still remains the problem, it can be caused by
failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall
the system.
1201
00
E602
1202
00
E602
1203
00
E602
1204
00
Item
Description
Title
Error in HDD
Description Failure in contact with HDD
Remedy
1. Check the cable and power connector.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, start
in Safe Mode to perform overall format using SST or USB
memory and reinstall the system, and then turn OFF and
then ON the Main Power Switch.
3. If there still remains the problem, it can be caused by
failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall
the system.
Title
Error in HDD
Description Failure in contact with HDD
Remedy
1. Check the cable and power connector.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, start
in Safe Mode to perform overall format using SST or USB
memory and reinstall the system, and then turn OFF and
then ON the Main Power Switch.
3. If there still remains the problem, it can be caused by
failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall
the system.
Title
Error in HDD
Description WriteAbort (at startup)
Remedy
1. If possible, ask the customer to retrieve the data in the
Address Book from the remote UI.
2. Enter the applicable CHK-TYPE=6 in the partition to
execute HDD-CHECK (duration: several minutes to several
dozen minutes), and then turn OFF and then ON the power.
3. If the above measure failed to recover the system, get in
Download Mode to perform overall format using SST or USB
memory and reinstall the system, and then turn OFF and
then ON the main power switch.
Title
Error in HDD
Description Failure in contact with HDD
Remedy
1. Check the cable and power connector.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, start
in Safe Mode to perform overall format using SST or USB
memory and reinstall the system, and then turn OFF and
then ON the Main Power Switch.
3. If there still remains the problem, it can be caused by
failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall
the system.
7-69
7
Ecode Detail Location
Code
E602
1205
00
E602
1210
00
E602
1212
00
E602
1213
00
Item
7-70
Description
Title
Error in HDD
Description Error in file system
Remedy
1. Enter the applicable CHK-TYPE=6 in the partition to
execute HDD-CLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the
Main Switch.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, it can be
caused by failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD
and reinstall the system.
Title
Error in HDD
Description System error or Packet data error
Remedy
Its due to data corruption or software bug.
1. Start in Safe Mode to perform overall format with SST and
reinstall the system, and then turn OFF and then ON the
Main Power Switch.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, it can be
caused by failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD
and reinstall the system.
Title
Error in HDD
Description System error or Packet data error
Remedy
Its due to data corruption or software bug.
1. Start in Safe Mode to perform overall format with SST and
reinstall the system, and then turn OFF and then ON the
Main Power Switch.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, it can be
caused by failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD
and reinstall the system.
Title
Error in HDD
Description WriteAbort
Remedy
The document data (such as BOX on the HDD) can be
damaged.
1. Enter the applicable CHK-TYPE=6 in the partition to
perform HDD-CHECK (duration: several minutes to several
dozens of minutes), and then turn OFF and then ON the
power.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, enter the
applicable CHK-TYPE=6 in the partition to execute HDDCLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the Main Power
Switch.
(Use SST to perform reformat/reinstallation in the case of the
following: BOOTDEV, BOOTDEV2 and APL_SEND)
3. If there still remains the problem, it can be caused by
failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall
the system.
1214
00
E602
1222
00
E602
1223
00
E602
1224
00
Item
Description
Title
Error in HDD
Description System error or Packet data error
Remedy
Its due to data corruption or software bug.
1. Start in Safe Mode to perform overall format with SST and
reinstall the system, and then turn OFF and then ON the
Main Power Switch.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, it can be
caused by failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD
and reinstall the system.
Title
Error in HDD
Description System error or Packet data error
Remedy
Its due to data corruption or software bug.
1. Start in Safe Mode to perform overall format with SST and
reinstall the system, and then turn OFF and then ON the
Main Power Switch.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, it can be
caused by failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD
and reinstall the system.
Title
Error in HDD
Description System error or Packet data error
Remedy
Its due to data corruption or software bug.
1. Start in Safe Mode to perform overall format with SST and
reinstall the system, and then turn OFF and then ON the
Main Power Switch.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, it can be
caused by failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD
and reinstall the system.
Title
Error in HDD
Description System error or Packet data error
Remedy
Its due to data corruption or software bug.
1. Start in Safe Mode to perform overall format with SST and
reinstall the system, and then turn OFF and then ON the
Main Power Switch.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, it can be
caused by failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD
and reinstall the system.
7-70
7
Ecode Detail Location
Code
E602
E602
E602
E602
1225
1300
1301
1302
00
00
00
00
Item
7-71
Description
Title
Error in HDD
Description WriteAbort
Remedy
The document data (such as BOX on the HDD) can be
damaged.
1. Enter the applicable CHK-TYPE=6 in the partition to
perform HDD-CHECK (duration: several minutes to several
dozens of minutes), and then turn OFF and then ON the
power.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, enter the
applicable CHK-TYPE=6 in the partition to execute HDDCLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the Main Power
Switch.
(Use SST to perform reformat/reinstallation in the case of the
following: BOOTDEV, BOOTDEV2 and APL_SEND)
3. If there still remains the problem, it can be caused by
failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall
the system.
Title
Error in HDD
Description Failure in contact with HDD
Remedy
1. Check the cable and power connector.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, start
in Safe Mode to perform overall format using SST or USB
memory and reinstall the system, and then turn OFF and
then ON the Main Power Switch.
3. If there still remains the problem, it can be caused by
failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall
the system.
Title
Error in HDD
Description Failure in contact with HDD
Remedy
1. Check the cable and power connector.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, start
in Safe Mode to perform overall format using SST or USB
memory and reinstall the system, and then turn OFF and
then ON the Main Power Switch.
3. If there still remains the problem, it can be caused by
failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall
the system.
Title
Error in HDD
Description Failure in contact with HDD
Remedy
1. Check the cable and power connector.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, start
in Safe Mode to perform overall format using SST or USB
memory and reinstall the system, and then turn OFF and
then ON the Main Power Switch.
3. If there still remains the problem, it can be caused by
failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall
the system.
1303
00
E602
1304
00
E602
1305
00
E602
1310
00
Item
Description
Title
Error in HDD
Description WriteAbort (at startup)
Remedy
Recovery in Boot partition is available only through SST in
Safe Mode.
1. Set as follows: CHK-TYPE=7 = 0; and execute HDDCHECK (duration: several dozen minutes), and then turn
OFF and then ON the power.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, get in
Download Mode to perform overall format using SST or USB
memory and reinstall the system, and then turn OFF and
then ON the Main Power Switch.
Title
Error in HDD
Description Failure in contact with HDD
Remedy
1. Check the cable and power connector.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, start
in Safe Mode to perform overall format using SST or USB
memory and reinstall the system, and then turn OFF and
then ON the Main Power Switch.
3. If there still remains the problem, it can be caused by
failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall
the system.
Title
Error in HDD
Description Error in file system
Remedy
Recovery in Boot Partition is available only through SST in
Safe Mode.
1. Start in Safe Mode to perform overall format using SST or
USB memory and reinstall the system, and then turn OFF
and then ON the Main Power Switch.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, it can be
caused by failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD
and reinstall the system.
Title
Error in HDD
Description System error or Packet data error
Remedy
Its due to data corruption or software bug.
1. Start in Safe Mode to perform overall format with SST and
reinstall the system, and then turn OFF and then ON the
Main Power Switch.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, it can be
caused by failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD
and reinstall the system.
7-71
7
Ecode Detail Location
Code
E602
1312
00
E602
1313
00
E602
1314
00
E602
1322
00
Item
7-72
Description
Title
Error in HDD
Description System error or Packet data error
Remedy
Its due to data corruption or software bug.
1. Start in Safe Mode to perform overall format with SST and
reinstall the system, and then turn OFF and then ON the
Main Power Switch.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, it can be
caused by failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD
and reinstall the system.
Title
Error in HDD
Description WriteAbort
Remedy
The document data (such as BOX on the HDD) can be
damaged.
1. Enter the applicable CHK-TYPE=7 in the partition to
perform HDD-CHECK (duration: several minutes to several
dozens of minutes), and then turn OFF and then ON the
power.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, enter the
applicable CHK-TYPE=7 in the partition to execute HDDCLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the Main Power
Switch.
(Use SST to perform reformat/reinstallation in the case of the
following: BOOTDEV, BOOTDEV2 and APL_SEND)
3. If there still remains the problem, it can be caused by
failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall
the system.
Title
Error in HDD
Description System error or Packet data error
Remedy
Its due to data corruption or software bug.
1. Start in Safe Mode to perform overall format with SST and
reinstall the system, and then turn OFF and then ON the
Main Power Switch.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, it can be
caused by failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD
and reinstall the system.
Title
Error in HDD
Description System error or Packet data error
Remedy
Its due to data corruption or software bug.
1. Start in Safe Mode to perform overall format with SST and
reinstall the system, and then turn OFF and then ON the
Main Power Switch.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, it can be
caused by failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD
and reinstall the system.
1323
00
E602
1324
00
E602
1325
00
E602
1400
00
Item
Description
Title
Error in HDD
Description System error or Packet data error
Remedy
Its due to data corruption or software bug.
1. Start in Safe Mode to perform overall format with SST and
reinstall the system, and then turn OFF and then ON the
Main Power Switch.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, it can be
caused by failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD
and reinstall the system.
Title
Error in HDD
Description System error or Packet data error
Remedy
Its due to data corruption or software bug.
1. Start in Safe Mode to perform overall format with SST and
reinstall the system, and then turn OFF and then ON the
Main Power Switch.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, it can be
caused by failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD
and reinstall the system.
Title
Error in HDD
Description WriteAbort
Remedy
The document data (such as BOX on the HDD) can be
damaged.
1. Enter the applicable CHK-TYPE=7 in the partition to
perform HDD-CHECK (duration: several minutes to several
dozens of minutes), and then turn OFF and then ON the
power.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, enter the
applicable CHK-TYPE=7 in the partition to execute HDDCLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the Main Power
Switch.
(Use SST to perform reformat/reinstallation in the case of the
following: BOOTDEV, BOOTDEV2 and APL_SEND)
3. If there still remains the problem, it can be caused by
failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall
the system.
Title
Error in HDD
Description Failure in contact with HDD
Remedy
1. Check the cable and power connector.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, start
in Safe Mode to perform overall format using SST or USB
memory and reinstall the system, and then turn OFF and
then ON the Main Power Switch.
3. If there still remains the problem, it can be caused by
failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall
the system.
7-72
7
Ecode Detail Location
Code
E602
1401
00
E602
1402
00
E602
1403
00
E602
1404
00
E602
1405
00
Item
7-73
Description
Title
Error in HDD
Description Failure in contact with HDD
Remedy
1. Check the cable and power connector.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, start
in Safe Mode to perform overall format using SST or USB
memory and reinstall the system, and then turn OFF and
then ON the Main Power Switch.
3. If there still remains the problem, it can be caused by
failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall
the system.
Title
Error in HDD
Description Failure in contact with HDD
Remedy
1. Check the cable and power connector.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, start
in Safe Mode to perform overall format using SST or USB
memory and reinstall the system, and then turn OFF and
then ON the Main Power Switch.
3. If there still remains the problem, it can be caused by
failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall
the system.
Title
Error in HDD
Description WriteAbort (at startup)
Remedy
1. Enter the applicable CHK-TYPE=8 in the partition to
execute HDD-CHECK (duration: several minutes to several
dozen minutes); and then turn OFF and then ON the power.
2. If the above measures failed to recover the system, enter
the applicable CHK-TYPE=8 in the partition to execute HDDCLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the main switch.
Title
Error in HDD
Description Failure in contact with HDD
Remedy
1. Check the cable and power connector.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, start
in Safe Mode to perform overall format using SST or USB
memory and reinstall the system, and then turn OFF and
then ON the Main Power Switch.
3. If there still remains the problem, it can be caused by
failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall
the system.
Title
Error in HDD
Description Error in file system
Remedy
1. Enter the applicable CHK-TYPE=8 in the partition to
execute HDD-CLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the
Main Switch.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, it can be
caused by failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD
and reinstall the system.
1410
00
E602
1412
00
E602
1413
00
E602
1414
00
Item
Description
Title
Error in HDD
Description System error or Packet data error
Remedy
Its due to data corruption or software bug.
1. Start in Safe Mode to perform overall format with SST and
reinstall the system, and then turn OFF and then ON the
Main Power Switch.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, it can be
caused by failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD
and reinstall the system.
Title
Error in HDD
Description System error or Packet data error
Remedy
Its due to data corruption or software bug.
1. Start in Safe Mode to perform overall format with SST and
reinstall the system, and then turn OFF and then ON the
Main Power Switch.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, it can be
caused by failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD
and reinstall the system.
Title
Error in HDD
Description WriteAbort
Remedy
The document data (such as BOX on the HDD) can be
damaged.
1. Enter the applicable CHK-TYPE=8 in the partition to
perform HDD-CHECK (duration: several minutes to several
dozens of minutes), and then turn OFF and then ON the
power.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, enter the
applicable CHK-TYPE=8 in the partition to execute HDDCLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the Main Power
Switch.
(Use SST to perform reformat/reinstallation in the case of the
following: BOOTDEV, BOOTDEV2 and APL_SEND)
3. If there still remains the problem, it can be caused by
failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall
the system.
Title
Error in HDD
Description System error or Packet data error
Remedy
Its due to data corruption or software bug.
1. Start in Safe Mode to perform overall format with SST and
reinstall the system, and then turn OFF and then ON the
Main Power Switch.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, it can be
caused by failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD
and reinstall the system.
7-73
7
Ecode Detail Location
Code
E602
1422
00
E602
1423
00
E602
1424
00
E602
1425
00
Item
7-74
Description
Title
Error in HDD
Description System error or Packet data error
Remedy
Its due to data corruption or software bug.
1. Start in Safe Mode to perform overall format with SST and
reinstall the system, and then turn OFF and then ON the
Main Power Switch.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, it can be
caused by failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD
and reinstall the system.
Title
Error in HDD
Description System error or Packet data error
Remedy
Its due to data corruption or software bug.
1. Start in Safe Mode to perform overall format with SST and
reinstall the system, and then turn OFF and then ON the
Main Power Switch.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, it can be
caused by failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD
and reinstall the system.
Title
Error in HDD
Description System error or Packet data error
Remedy
Its due to data corruption or software bug.
1. Start in Safe Mode to perform overall format with SST and
reinstall the system, and then turn OFF and then ON the
Main Power Switch.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, it can be
caused by failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD
and reinstall the system.
Title
Error in HDD
Description WriteAbort
Remedy
The document data (such as BOX on the HDD) can be
damaged.
1. Enter the applicable CHK-TYPE=8 in the partition to
perform HDD-CHECK (duration: several minutes to several
dozens of minutes), and then turn OFF and then ON the
power.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, enter the
applicable CHK-TYPE=8 in the partition to execute HDDCLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the Main Power
Switch.
(Use SST to perform reformat/reinstallation in the case of the
following: BOOTDEV, BOOTDEV2 and APL_SEND)
3. If there still remains the problem, it can be caused by
failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall
the system.
1500
00
E602
1501
00
E602
1502
00
E602
1503
00
Item
Description
Title
Error in HDD
Description Failure in contact with HDD
Remedy
1. Check the cable and power connector.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, start
in Safe Mode to perform overall format using SST or USB
memory and reinstall the system, and then turn OFF and
then ON the Main Power Switch.
3. If there still remains the problem, it can be caused by
failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall
the system.
Title
Error in HDD
Description Failure in contact with HDD
Remedy
1. Check the cable and power connector.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, start
in Safe Mode to perform overall format using SST or USB
memory and reinstall the system, and then turn OFF and
then ON the Main Power Switch.
3. If there still remains the problem, it can be caused by
failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall
the system.
Title
Error in HDD
Description Failure in contact with HDD
Remedy
1. Check the cable and power connector.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, start
in Safe Mode to perform overall format using SST or USB
memory and reinstall the system, and then turn OFF and
then ON the Main Power Switch.
3. If there still remains the problem, it can be caused by
failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall
the system.
Title
Error in HDD
Description WriteAbort (at startup)
Remedy
1. Enter the applicable CHK-TYPE=9 in the partition to
execute HDD-CHECK (duration: several minutes to several
dozen minutes); and then turn OFF and then ON the power.
2. If the above measures failed to recover the system, enter
the applicable CHK-TYPE=9 in the partition to execute HDDCLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the main switch.
7-74
7
Ecode Detail Location
Code
E602
1504
00
E602
1505
00
E602
1510
00
E602
1512
00
Item
7-75
Description
Title
Error in HDD
Description Failure in contact with HDD
Remedy
1. Check the cable and power connector.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, start
in Safe Mode to perform overall format using SST or USB
memory and reinstall the system, and then turn OFF and
then ON the Main Power Switch.
3. If there still remains the problem, it can be caused by
failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall
the system.
Title
Error in HDD
Description Error in file system
Remedy
1. Enter the applicable CHK-TYPE=9 in the partition to
execute HDD-CLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the
Main Switch.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, it can be
caused by failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD
and reinstall the system.
Title
Error in HDD
Description System error or Packet data error
Remedy
Its due to data corruption or software bug.
1. Start in Safe Mode to perform overall format with SST and
reinstall the system, and then turn OFF and then ON the
Main Power Switch.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, it can be
caused by failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD
and reinstall the system.
Title
Error in HDD
Description System error or Packet data error
Remedy
Its due to data corruption or software bug.
1. Start in Safe Mode to perform overall format with SST and
reinstall the system, and then turn OFF and then ON the
Main Power Switch.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, it can be
caused by failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD
and reinstall the system.
1513
00
E602
1514
00
E602
1522
00
E602
1523
00
Item
Description
Title
Error in HDD
Description WriteAbort
Remedy
The document data (such as BOX on the HDD) can be
damaged.
1. Enter the applicable CHK-TYPE=9 in the partition to
perform HDD-CHECK (duration: several minutes to several
dozens of minutes), and then turn OFF and then ON the
power.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, enter the
applicable CHK-TYPE=9 in the partition to execute HDDCLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the Main Power
Switch.
(Use SST to perform reformat/reinstallation in the case of the
following: BOOTDEV, BOOTDEV2 and APL_SEND)
3. If there still remains the problem, it can be caused by
failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall
the system.
Title
Error in HDD
Description System error or Packet data error
Remedy
Its due to data corruption or software bug.
1. Start in Safe Mode to perform overall format with SST and
reinstall the system, and then turn OFF and then ON the
Main Power Switch.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, it can be
caused by failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD
and reinstall the system.
Title
Error in HDD
Description System error or Packet data error
Remedy
Its due to data corruption or software bug.
1. Start in Safe Mode to perform overall format with SST and
reinstall the system, and then turn OFF and then ON the
Main Power Switch.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, it can be
caused by failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD
and reinstall the system.
Title
Error in HDD
Description System error or Packet data error
Remedy
Its due to data corruption or software bug.
1. Start in Safe Mode to perform overall format with SST and
reinstall the system, and then turn OFF and then ON the
Main Power Switch.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, it can be
caused by failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD
and reinstall the system.
7-75
7
Ecode Detail Location
Code
E602
1524
00
E602
1525
00
E602
E602
1600
1601
00
00
Item
7-76
Description
Title
Error in HDD
Description System error or Packet data error
Remedy
Its due to data corruption or software bug.
1. Start in Safe Mode to perform overall format with SST and
reinstall the system, and then turn OFF and then ON the
Main Power Switch.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, it can be
caused by failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD
and reinstall the system.
Title
Error in HDD
Description WriteAbort
Remedy
The document data (such as BOX on the HDD) can be
damaged.
1. Enter the applicable CHK-TYPE=9 in the partition to
perform HDD-CHECK (duration: several minutes to several
dozens of minutes), and then turn OFF and then ON the
power.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, enter the
applicable CHK-TYPE=9 in the partition to execute HDDCLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the Main Power
Switch.
(Use SST to perform reformat/reinstallation in the case of the
following: BOOTDEV, BOOTDEV2 and APL_SEND)
3. If there still remains the problem, it can be caused by
failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall
the system.
Title
Error in HDD
Description Failure in contact with HDD
Remedy
1. Check the cable and power connector.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, start
in Safe Mode to perform overall format using SST or USB
memory and reinstall the system, and then turn OFF and
then ON the Main Power Switch.
3. If there still remains the problem, it can be caused by
failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall
the system.
Title
Error in HDD
Description Failure in contact with HDD
Remedy
1. Check the cable and power connector.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, start
in Safe Mode to perform overall format using SST or USB
memory and reinstall the system, and then turn OFF and
then ON the Main Power Switch.
3. If there still remains the problem, it can be caused by
failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall
the system.
1602
00
E602
1603
00
E602
1604
00
E602
1605
00
E602
1610
00
Item
Description
Title
Error in HDD
Description Failure in contact with HDD
Remedy
1. Check the cable and power connector.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, start
in Safe Mode to perform overall format using SST or USB
memory and reinstall the system, and then turn OFF and
then ON the Main Power Switch.
3. If there still remains the problem, it can be caused by
failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall
the system.
Title
Error in HDD
Description WriteAbort (at startup)
Remedy
1. Enter the applicable CHK-TYPE=10 in the partition to
execute HDD-CHECK (duration: several minutes to several
dozen minutes); and then turn OFF and then ON the power.
2. If the above measures failed to recover the system, enter
the applicable CHK-TYPE=10 in the partition to execute
HDD-CLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the main
switch.
Title
Error in HDD
Description Failure in contact with HDD
Remedy
1. Check the cable and power connector.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, start
in Safe Mode to perform overall format using SST or USB
memory and reinstall the system, and then turn OFF and
then ON the Main Power Switch.
3. If there still remains the problem, it can be caused by
failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall
the system.
Title
Error in HDD
Description Error in file system
Remedy
1. Enter the applicable CHK-TYPE=10 in the partition to
execute HDD-CLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the
Main Switch.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, it can be
caused by failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD
and reinstall the system.
Title
Error in HDD
Description System error or Packet data error
Remedy
Its due to data corruption or software bug.
1. Start in Safe Mode to perform overall format with SST and
reinstall the system, and then turn OFF and then ON the
Main Power Switch.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, it can be
caused by failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD
and reinstall the system.
7-76
7
Ecode Detail Location
Code
E602
1612
00
E602
1613
00
E602
1614
00
E602
1622
00
Item
7-77
Description
Title
Error in HDD
Description System error or Packet data error
Remedy
Its due to data corruption or software bug.
1. Start in Safe Mode to perform overall format with SST and
reinstall the system, and then turn OFF and then ON the
Main Power Switch.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, it can be
caused by failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD
and reinstall the system.
Title
Error in HDD
Description WriteAbort
Remedy
The document data (such as BOX on the HDD) can be
damaged.
1. Enter the applicable CHK-TYPE=10 in the partition to
perform HDD-CHECK (duration: several minutes to several
dozens of minutes), and then turn OFF and then ON the
power.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, enter the
applicable CHK-TYPE=10 in the partition to execute HDDCLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the Main Power
Switch.
(Use SST to perform reformat/reinstallation in the case of the
following: BOOTDEV, BOOTDEV2 and APL_SEND)
3. If there still remains the problem, it can be caused by
failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall
the system.
Title
Error in HDD
Description System error or Packet data error
Remedy
Its due to data corruption or software bug.
1. Start in Safe Mode to perform overall format with SST and
reinstall the system, and then turn OFF and then ON the
Main Power Switch.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, it can be
caused by failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD
and reinstall the system.
Title
Error in HDD
Description System error or Packet data error
Remedy
Its due to data corruption or software bug.
1. Start in Safe Mode to perform overall format with SST and
reinstall the system, and then turn OFF and then ON the
Main Power Switch.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, it can be
caused by failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD
and reinstall the system.
1623
00
E602
1624
00
E602
1625
00
Item
Description
Title
Error in HDD
Description System error or Packet data error
Remedy
Its due to data corruption or software bug.
1. Start in Safe Mode to perform overall format with SST and
reinstall the system, and then turn OFF and then ON the
Main Power Switch.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, it can be
caused by failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD
and reinstall the system.
Title
Error in HDD
Description System error or Packet data error
Remedy
Its due to data corruption or software bug.
1. Start in Safe Mode to perform overall format with SST and
reinstall the system, and then turn OFF and then ON the
Main Power Switch.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, it can be
caused by failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD
and reinstall the system.
Title
Error in HDD
Description WriteAbort
Remedy
The document data (such as BOX on the HDD) can be
damaged.
1. Enter the applicable CHK-TYPE=10 in the partition to
perform HDD-CHECK (duration: several minutes to several
dozens of minutes), and then turn OFF and then ON the
power.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, enter the
applicable CHK-TYPE=10 in the partition to execute HDDCLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the Main Power
Switch.
(Use SST to perform reformat/reinstallation in the case of the
following: BOOTDEV, BOOTDEV2 and APL_SEND)
3. If there still remains the problem, it can be caused by
failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall
the system.
7-77
7
Ecode Detail Location
Code
E602
2000
00
E602
2001
00
E602
2002
00
E602
4000
00
Item
7-78
Description
Title
Error in HDD Encryption Board
Description Authentication error between the host machine and the
Encryption Board.
Remedy
1. After checking connection of the Encryption Board,
disconnect and connect the connector and, turn OFF and
then ON the power.
2. Execute the key clear procedure.
* Key clear: system recovery procedure
1. Execute the key clear procedure with SST.
--> As a result, the disk becomes unformatted disk. Thus, it is
necessary to execute step 2.
--> E602-0001 will be indicated if activating the machine with
the unformatted disk.
2. Execute HDD format and system reinstallation with SST.
Title
Error in HDD Encryption Board
Description Mismatch in the Encryption Board operation.
Remedy
1. Execute the key clear procedure.
Title
Error in HDD Encryption Board
Description Failure of the Encryption Board.
Remedy
1. After checking connection of the Encryption Board,
disconnect and connect the connector and, turn OFF and
then ON the power.
2. Execute the key clear procedure.
3. After replacing the Encryption Board, execute HDD format
and system reinstallation with SST.
4. Replace the LAN-BARSAC Board --> replace the Main
Controller PCB 1.
Title
Error in HDD
Description Unable to mount the Linux system.
Remedy
1. Check the cable and the power connector.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, start
in Safe Mode to perform overall format using SST or USB
memory and reinstall the system, and then turn OFF and
then ON the Main Power Switch.
3. If there still remains the problem, it can be caused by
failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall
the system.
4001
00
E602
FF00
00
E602
FF01
00
E602
FF02
00
Item
Description
Title
Error in HDD
Description No Linux system start script.
Remedy
1. Check the cable and the power connector.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, start
in Safe Mode to perform overall format using SST or USB
memory and reinstall the system, and then turn OFF and
then ON the Main Power Switch.
3. If there still remains the problem, it can be caused by
failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall
the system.
Title
Error in HDD
Description Failure in contact with HDD
Remedy
1. Check the cable and power connector.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, start
in Safe Mode to perform overall format using SST or USB
memory and reinstall the system, and then turn OFF and
then ON the Main Power Switch.
3. If there still remains the problem, it can be caused by
failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall
the system.
Title
Error in HDD
Description Failure in contact with HDD
Remedy
1. Check the cable and power connector.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, start
in Safe Mode to perform overall format using SST or USB
memory and reinstall the system, and then turn OFF and
then ON the Main Power Switch.
3. If there still remains the problem, it can be caused by
failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall
the system.
Title
Error in HDD
Description Failure in contact with HDD
Remedy
1. Check the cable and power connector.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, start
in Safe Mode to perform overall format using SST or USB
memory and reinstall the system, and then turn OFF and
then ON the Main Power Switch.
3. If there still remains the problem, it can be caused by
failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall
the system.
7-78
7
Ecode Detail Location
Code
E602
FF03
00
E602
FF04
00
E602
FF05
00
E602
FF10
00
E602
FF11
00
Item
7-79
Description
Title
Error in HDD
Description WriteAbort (at startup)
Remedy
1. Set as follows: CHK-TYPE=3 = 0; and execute HDDCHECK (duration: several dozen minutes), and then turn
OFF and then ON the power.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, execute
HDD-CLEAR with CHK-TYPE=3 = 1, 2, 3, 5, and then turn
OFF and then ON the power.
Title
Error in HDD
Description Failure in contact with HDD
Remedy
1. Check the cable and power connector.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, start
in Safe Mode to perform overall format using SST or USB
memory and reinstall the system, and then turn OFF and
then ON the Main Power Switch.
3. If there still remains the problem, it can be caused by
failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall
the system.
Title
Error in HDD
Description Error in file system
Remedy
This is the error which usually does not occur.
1. Execute HDD-CLEAR with CHK-TYPE=3 = 1, 2, 3, 5, and
then turn OFF and then ON the power.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, it can be
caused by failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD
and reinstall the system.
Title
Error in HDD
Description System error or Packet data error
Remedy
Its due to data corruption or software bug.
1. Start in Safe Mode to perform overall format with SST and
reinstall the system, and then turn OFF and then ON the
Main Power Switch.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, it can be
caused by failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD
and reinstall the system.
Title
Error in HDD
Description Failure in HDD connection
Remedy
This is the error which usually does not occur in Read/Write
level.
1. Check the cable and power connector.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, it can be
caused by failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD
and reinstall the system.
FF12
00
E602
FF13
00
E602
FF14
00
E602
FF21
00
Item
Description
Title
Error in HDD
Description System error or Packet data error
Remedy
Its due to data corruption or software bug.
1. Start in Safe Mode to perform overall format with SST and
reinstall the system, and then turn OFF and then ON the
Main Power Switch.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, it can be
caused by failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD
and reinstall the system.
Title
Error in HDD
Description WriteAbort
Remedy
The document data (such as BOX on the HDD) can be
damaged.
1. Enter the applicable CHK-TYPE=3 in the partition to
perform HDD-CHECK (duration: several minutes to several
dozens of minutes), and then turn OFF and then ON the
power.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, enter the
applicable CHK-TYPE=3 in the partition to execute HDDCLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the Main Power
Switch.
(Use SST to perform reformat/reinstallation in the case of the
following: BOOTDEV, BOOTDEV2 and APL_SEND)
3. If there still remains the problem, it can be caused by
failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall
the system.
Title
Error in HDD
Description System error or Packet data error
Remedy
Its due to data corruption or software bug.
1. Start in Safe Mode to perform overall format with SST and
reinstall the system, and then turn OFF and then ON the
Main Power Switch.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, it can be
caused by failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD
and reinstall the system.
Title
Error in HDD
Description Failure in HDD connection
Remedy
This is the error which usually does not occur in Read/Write
level.
1. Check the cable and power connector.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, it can be
caused by failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD
and reinstall the system.
7-79
7
Ecode Detail Location
Code
E602
E602
FF22
FF23
00
00
E602
FF24
00
E602
FF25
00
Item
7-80
Description
Title
Error in HDD
Description System error or Packet data error
Remedy
Its due to data corruption or software bug.
1. Start in Safe Mode to perform overall format with SST and
reinstall the system, and then turn OFF and then ON the
Main Power Switch.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, it can be
caused by failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD
and reinstall the system.
Title
Error in HDD
Description System error or Packet data error
Remedy
Its due to data corruption or software bug.
1. Start in Safe Mode to perform overall format with SST and
reinstall the system, and then turn OFF and then ON the
Main Power Switch.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, it can be
caused by failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD
and reinstall the system.
Title
Error in HDD
Description System error or Packet data error
Remedy
Its due to data corruption or software bug.
1. Start in Safe Mode to perform overall format with SST and
reinstall the system, and then turn OFF and then ON the
Main Power Switch.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, it can be
caused by failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD
and reinstall the system.
Title
Error in HDD
Description WriteAbort
Remedy
The document data (such as BOX on the HDD) can be
damaged.
1. Enter the applicable CHK-TYPE=3 in the partition to
perform HDD-CHECK (duration: several minutes to several
dozens of minutes), and then turn OFF and then ON the
power.
2. If the above measures do not solve the problem, enter the
applicable CHK-TYPE=3 in the partition to execute HDDCLEAR, and then turn OFF and then ON the Main Power
Switch.
(Use SST to perform reformat/reinstallation in the case of the
following: BOOTDEV, BOOTDEV2 and APL_SEND)
3. If there still remains the problem, it can be caused by
failure with the HDD; therefore, replace the HDD and reinstall
the system.
Item
Description
E604
0512
00
Title
Faulty/insufficient image memory (Main Controller PCB1)
Description No necessary memory at Main Controller PCB 1
Remedy
Make the Memory capacity at Main Controller PCB 1 as
indicated by 0512.
E604
1024
00
Title
Faulty/insufficient image memory (Main Controller PCB1)
Description No necessary memory at Main Controller PCB 1
Remedy
Make the Memory capacity at Main Controller PCB 1 as
indicated by 1024.
E604
1536
00
Title
Faulty/insufficient image memory (Main Controller PCB1)
Description No necessary memory at Main Controller PCB 1
Remedy
Make the Memory capacity at Main Controller PCB 1 as
indicated by 1536.
7-80
7
Ecode Detail Location
Code
E611
0000
00
Item
7-81
Description
Title
Description
c. When the System of the main body is ver. 22.01 or earlier,
or when it cannot be upgraded immediately.
c-1. Execute service mode > COPIER > FUNCTION >
CLEAR > MN-CON.
c-2. Execute service mode > COPIER > FUNCTION >
SYSTEM > CHK-TYPE > 1 > OK > HD-CLEAR.
Before executing this service mode, inform users that all
images in the Inbox will be deleted and get approval from
them.
c-3. Execute service mode > COPIER > FUNCTION >
SYSTEM > CHK-TYPE > 2 > OK > HD-CLEAR
c-4. Turn OFF and then ON the main power switch.
Item
E613
0512
00
E613
1024
00
E613
1536
00
7-81
7
Ecode Detail Location
Code
E674
E674
E674
E674
0001
0004
0008
00
00
00
000C 00
Item
7-82
Description
Title
Failure in communication of FAX board
Description Error is detected for specified number of times in
communication with FAX board.
Remedy
Note: Main Controller PCB in the sentence refers to Main
Controller PCB 2 for 1-line Fax Board or Main Controller 1
for 2-/3-/4-line Fax Board.
1. Check connection between the FAX board and the Main
controller PCB.
2. Replace the Fax board.
3. Replace the Main controller PCB.
Title
Failure in communication of FAX board
Description Failure in access of the modem IC which is used with
OnBoardFax
Remedy
Note: Main Controller PCB in the sentence refers to Main
Controller PCB 2 for 1-line Fax Board or Main Controller 1
for 2-/3-/4-line Fax Board.
1. Check connection between the FAX board and the Main
controller PCB.
2. Replace the Fax board.
3. Replace the Main controller PCB.
Title
Failure in communication of FAX board
Description Failure in access of the port IC that is be used with
OnBoardFax
Remedy
Note: Main Controller PCB in the sentence refers to Main
Controller PCB 2 for 1-line Fax Board or Main Controller 1
for 2-/3-/4-line Fax Board.
1. Check connection between the FAX board and the Main
controller PCB.
2. Replace the Fax board.
3. Replace the Main controller PCB.
Title
Failure in communication of FAX board
Description Failure is detected in access of the modem IC and port IC
that are used with OnBoardFax
Remedy
Note: Main Controller PCB in the sentence refers to Main
Controller PCB 2 for 1-line Fax Board or Main Controller 1
for 2-/3-/4-line Fax Board.
1. Check connection between the FAX board and the Main
controller PCB.
2. Replace the Fax board.
3. Replace the Main controller PCB.
0010
00
E674
0011
00
E674
0030
00
E677
0003
00
E677
0010
00
E677
0080
00
Item
Description
Title
Failure in communication of FAX board
Description Failure in opening of the timer device to be used with
OnBoard Fax
Remedy
Note: Main Controller PCB in the sentence refers to Main
Controller PCB 2 for 1-line Fax Board or Main Controller 1
for 2-/3-/4-line Fax Board.
Replace the Main controller PCB.
Title
Failure in communication of FAX board
Description Failure in starting of the timer device which is used with
OnBoardFax
Remedy
Note: Main Controller PCB in the sentence refers to Main
Controller PCB 2 for 1-line Fax Board or Main Controller 1
for 2-/3-/4-line Fax Board.
Replace the Main controller PCB.
Title
Failure in communication of FAX board
Description Error in checksum of USB-FAX MAINROM
Remedy
Get in the download mode from the Service Mode when the
power is turned ON and execute downloading of USBFAX
MAINROM.
Title
Failure in Print Server
Description Error is detected at the Mother Board check when print
server is started.
Remedy
1. Check connection of the cable and turn OFF and then ON
the power.
2. Reinstall the Print Server(For details, refer to Service
Manual image PASS-A1_B1.)
Title
Failure in Print Server
Description Failure was detected in operation of the CPU fan on the print
server.
Remedy
1. Replace the board of the print server.
2. Reinstall the Print Server
Title
Failure in Print Server
Description Error is detected at the Mother Board check when print
server is started.
Remedy
1. Check the cable connection and turn OFF and then ON
the power.
2. Reenter the job.
3. Reinstall the print server.
T-7-6
7-82
7
Ecode Detail Location
Code
E710
0001
05
E711
0001
05
E711
0002
05
E713
0001
05
E713
0002
05
E713
0004
05
E713
0008
05
E713
0010
05
E713
0011
05
E713
0020
05
E713
0021
05
E713
0022
05
Item
7-83
Description
Title
Error in initialization of IPC (Ctrl)
Description Failed to be at ready status within 3 sec after IPC chip has
been started.
Remedy
Check the connection between DC Controller PCB and
Finisher, and check that the Cable is not open-circuit.
Title
Error in register of IPC (Ctrl)
Description Set 4 errors within 1.5 sec in register IPC chip.
Remedy
Check the cable.
Title
Error in IPC communication
Description Initial communication error with the Finisher
Remedy
Check the connector connected to the Finisher.
Title
Error in IPC communication
Description When receiving retransmission request for 3 times in a row.
Remedy
Check the connector connected to the Finisher.
Title
Error in IPC communication
Description When detecting CRC error at transmission.
Remedy
Check the connector connected to the Finisher.
Title
Error in IPC communication
Description When not receiving data for more than specified time
Remedy
Check the connector connected to the Finisher.
Title
Error in IPC communication
Description When checksum of the received data is not correct.
Remedy
Check the connector connected to the Finisher.
Title
Error in UFDI communication
Description Neither ACK nor NAK is returned for specified times in a
row.
Remedy
Check the connector connected to the Finisher.
Title
Error in UFDI communication
Description NAK is returned for specified times in a row.
Remedy
Check the connector connected to the Finisher.
Title
UFDI communication error
Description BCC of the reception data is invalid for specified number of
times in a row.
Remedy
Check the connection of the Connector with Finisher.
Title
Error in UFDI communication
Description Timeout before the completion of reception for specified
times in a row.
Remedy
Check the connector connected to the Finisher.
Title
Error in UFDI communication
Description Undefined error for specified times in a row at reception.
Remedy
Check the connector connected to the Finisher.
E719
E719
0001
0002
0003
00
00
00
Item
Description
Title
Error in Coin Vendor.
Description Error in starting of the CoinVendor
- The Coin Vendor, which should have been connected
before the power was turned OFF, is not connected when
the power is turned ON.
Remedy
Check the connection between charging management
equipment and machine, and check that the Cable is not
open-circuit.
Clear the error while the charging management equipment
is connected to operate and when switching to the operation
without charging management equipment.
(To prevent the misuse by removing the charging
management equipment, this error code is displayed.)
Title
Error in Coin Vendor.
Description Error in IPC when CoinVendor is running.
- In the case of disconnection of IPC or an error in which
IPC communication failed to be recovered.
- When disconnection of the pickup delivery signal is
detected.
- When illegal connection is detected (short-circuit with Tx
and Rx of IPC)
Remedy
Check the connection between charging management
equipment and machine, and check that the Cable is not
open-circuit.
Clear the error while the charging management equipment
is connected to operate and when switching to the operation
without charging management equipment.
(To prevent the misuse by removing the charging
management equipment, this error code is displayed.)
Title
Error in Coin Vendor.
Description - In the case of communication error with the coin vendor
while obtaining the unit price at start-up.
Remedy
Check the connection between charging management
equipment and machine, and check that the Cable is not
open-circuit.
Clear the error while the charging management equipment
is connected to operate and when switching to the operation
without charging management equipment.
(To prevent the misuse by removing the charging
management equipment, this error code is displayed.)
7-83
7
Ecode Detail Location
Code
E719
E719
E719
E719
0011
0012
0031
0032
00
00
00
00
Item
7-84
Description
Title
Error in Coin Vendor.
Description Error in starting of NewCardReader
- NewCardReader, which should have been connected
before the power was turned OFF, is not connected when
the power is turned ON.
Remedy
Check the connection between charging management
equipment and machine, and check that the Cable is not
open-circuit.
Clear the error while the charging management equipment
is connected to operate and when switching to the operation
without charging management equipment.
(To prevent the misuse by removing the charging
management equipment, this error code is displayed.)
Title
Error in Coin Vendor.
Description Error in IPC when NewCardReader is running.
- In the case of disconnection of IPC or an error in which
IPC communication failed to be recovered.
Remedy
Check the connection between charging management
equipment and machine, and check that the Cable is not
open-circuit.
Clear the error while the charging management equipment
is connected to operate and when switching to the operation
without charging management equipment.
(To prevent the misuse by removing the charging
management equipment, this error code is displayed.)
Title
Error in serial communication at the start of the New Card
Reader
Description Failure in communication with the serial New Card Reader
at start-up.
Remedy
- Check if the cable of the serial New Card Reader is
disconnected.
- Take out the serial New Card Reader.
- COPIER > Function > CLEAR > CARD
- COPIER > Function > CLEAR > ERR
Title
Error in serial communication at the start of the New Card
Reader
Description Communication failed in the middle of the operation
although communication with the serial New Card Reader
was successful at start-up.
Remedy
- Check if the cable of the serial New Card Reader is
disconnected.
1001
00
E730
100A
00
E730
A006
00
E730
A007
00
E730
B013
00
E730
C000
00
E730
C001
00
E731
3000
00
Item
Description
Title
Error in PDL software
Description Initialization error.
Remedy
1. Execute the PDL reset process.
2. Turn OFF and then ON the power.
Title
Error in PDL software
Description Fatal system error occurs.
Remedy
1. Execute the PDL reset process.
2. Turn OFF and then ON the power.
Title
Error in PDL communication
Description PDL fails to respond. No response from PDL due to
Controller firmware, not installed, etc.
Remedy
1. Execute the PDL reset process.
2. Turn OFF and then ON the power.
3. Check the connection of Main Controller PCB 2.
4. Reinstall the controller firmware.
5. Replace the Main Controller PCB 1.
Title
Mismatch in PDL version
Description Mismatch of version between the control software of the
host machine and PDL control software.
Remedy
Execute overall system format and installation.
Title
Error in PDL embedded font
Description Font data is corrupted.
Remedy
1. Turn OFF and then ON the power.
2. Reinstall the system.
3. Execute overall system format and installation.
Title
Error in initialization
Description An error, such as memory acquisition failure, occurs at
initialization.
Remedy
Execute overall system format and installation.
Replace the Main Controller PCB1.
Title
Error in HDD access
Description An error occurs at HDD access.
Remedy
Execute overall system format and installation.
Replace the HDD.
Replace the Main Controller PCB 2.
Replace the Main Controller PCB 1.
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB 2
Description Unable to recognize the SURF Board.
Remedy
1. Check the connection of the Main Controller PCB 2.
2. Replace the Main Controller PCB 2.
3. Replace the Main Controller PCB 1.
7-84
7
Ecode Detail Location
Code
E731
3001
00
E731
3002
00
E731
3015
00
E732
0001
00
E732
9999
00
E733
0000
00
E733
0001
00
E740
E740
0002
0003
00
00
Item
7-85
Description
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB 2
Description Failure of SURF initialization.
Remedy
1. Check the connection of the Main Controller PCB 2.
2. Replace the Main Controller PCB 2.
3. Replace the Main Controller PCB 1.
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB 2
Description Failure of SURF initialization.
Remedy
1. Check the connection of the Main Controller PCB 2.
2. Replace the Main Controller PCB 2.
3. Replace the Main Controller PCB 1.
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB 2
Description Video data is not transmitted to CL1-G even though there is
no problem in the software.
Remedy
1. Turn OFF and then ON the power.
2. Replace the Main Controller PCB 2.
3. Replace the Main Controller PCB 1.
Title
Error in scanner communication
Description Error in DDI-S communication
Remedy
1. Check the connector connecting to the Scanner.
2. Check the power of the Scanner ->whether to perform
initialization at start-up?
3. Replace the Rcon, the Scanner Board or the Main
controller PCB 2.
Title
Error in scanner communication
Description When a Scanner is detected for the first time from the
Printer Model (not an error).
Remedy
1. Turn OFF and then ON the power.
Title
Error in printer communication
Description Communication with the printer failed at start-up.
Remedy
1.Check the connector connecting to the Printer.
2. Check the power of the Printer -> whether to perform
initialization at start-up?
3. Replace the Dcon or the Main controller PCB 2.
Title
Error in printer communication
Description Error in DDI-P communication
Remedy
1.Check the connector connecting to the Printer.
2. Check the power of the Printer -> whether to perform
initialization at start-up?
3. Replace the Dcon or the Main Controller PCB 2.
Title
Failure in Ethernet Board
Description Incorrect MAC address
Remedy
1 Replace the LAN card.
Title
Failure in Ethernet Board
Description Incorrect MAC address
Remedy
1Replace the LAN card.
0000
00
E743
0003
00
E743
0004
00
E744
0001
00
E744
0002
00
E744
0003
00
Item
Description
Title
DDI communication error
Description SCI error occurrence, reception data NG, reception timeout,
SEQ timeout error
Remedy
1. Turn OFF and then ON the power.
2. Check the connection of the Cable between Reader and
Controller.
3. Check the voltage (+24V and +12V) on the Reader
Controller PCB.
4. Replace the DDI-S Cable.
5. Replace the Reader Controller PCB.
6. Replace the Main Controller PCB 2.
Title
DDI communication error
Description SCI error occurrence, reception data NG, reception timeout,
SEQ timeout error
Remedy
1. Turn OFF and then ON the power.
2. Check the connection of the Cable between Reader and
Controller.
3. Check the voltage (+24V and +12V) on the Reader
Controller PCB.
4. Replace the DDI-S Cable.
5. Replace the Reader Controller PCB.
6. Replace the Main Controller PCB 2.
Title
DDI communication error
Description SCI error occurrence, reception data NG, reception timeout,
SEQ timeout error
Remedy
1. Turn OFF and then ON the power.
2. Check the connection of the Cable between Reader and
Controller.
3. Check the voltage (+24V and +12V) on the Reader
Controller PCB.
4. Replace the DDI-S Cable.
5. Replace the Reader Controller PCB.
6. Replace the Main Controller PCB 2.
Title
Failure in language file
Description Mismatched version between the HDD and the Bootable
Remedy
Reinstall the correct language file using SST or USB
memory reinstall the entire software.
Title
Failure in language file
Description Oversized language file in HDD
Remedy
Format the HDD and reinstall the software because there
can be more than necessary language files.
Title
Failure in language file
Description Unable to find the language which should be switched and
described in Config.txt in the HDD.
Remedy
Reinstall the software.
7-85
7
7-86
Ecode Detail Location
Code
E744
0004
00
E744
2000
00
E744
4000
00
Item
Description
Title
Description
Remedy
Title
Description
Remedy
Title
Description
Remedy
E746
0011
00
E746
0021
00
E746
0022
00
0023
00
E746
0024
00
E746
0031
00
E746
0032
00
Item
Description
Title
Error in engine ID of SoftID
Description No response from Image Analysis Board (PCB used for
PCAM)
Remedy
1. Check to see if the Option Board is properly inserted.
2. Turn OFF and then ON the power.
3. If the above measure does not solve the problem, replace
the Option Board.
4. Remove the Image Analysis Board and go to the
following service mode: COPIER>OPTION>LCNS-TR>STJBLK (Lv2). Change the value of ST-JBLK from 1 to 0, and
turn OFF and then ON the main power.
Title
Error in engine ID of SoftID
Description Failure in behavior of Image Analysis Board (PCB used for
PCAM)
Remedy
1. Turn OFF and then ON the power.
2. If the above measure does not solve the problem, replace
the Option Board.
3. Remove the Image Analysis Board and go to the
following service mode: COPIER>OPTION>LCNS-TR>STJBLK (Lv2). Change the value of ST-JBLK from 1 to 0, and
turn OFF and then ON the main power.
Title
Error in engine ID of SoftID
Description Error in hardware
Remedy
Replace the TPM chip.
Title
Error in engine ID of SoftID
Description Mismatched data in TPM
Remedy
Format the system.
Format the HDD using SST or USB memory, and
download the system software. For details, see Chapter
6: Upgrading. For your reference, the method using USB
memory is described below.
1. Prepare the USB memory which system software was
registered.
2. Execute the following service mode:
COPIER>FUNCTION>SYSTEM>DOWNLOAD to enter the
download mode.
3. Insert the USB memory to the equipment.
4. Execute [4]: Format HDD in the main menu.
5. After formatting is completed, the machine reboots
automatically and starts with the download mode.
6. Execute [1]: Upgrade (Auto) in the main menu.
7. System software is downloaded and the machine restarts
automatically.
7-86
7
Ecode Detail Location
Code
E746
0033
00
Item
7-87
Description
Title
Error in engine ID of SoftID
Description Error that can be recovered
Remedy
When the TPM key was backed up, it can be restored.
1. Connect the USB memory which stores the TPM key.
2. Go to Management Settings > Data Management > TPM
Settings, and then click Restore TPM Key.
3. Enter the password set at backup operation.
4. When the restoration completion screen is displayed,
click OK. Remove the USB memory, and turn OFF and
then ON the main power.
When the TPM key was not backed up:
Formatting the system is required.
E746
0034
00
E747
1201
00
E747
3F00
00
E747
7F00
00
E747
9F00
00
E747
BF00
00
E747
DF00
00
Title
TPM auto recovery error
Description The error occurs when clearing HDD while TPM setting is
ON.
Remedy
It is recovered by turning OFF and then ON the power.
Title
PDL rendering error
Description Image processing IC error.
Remedy
1. Turn OFF and then ON the power (Send the data to Inc.
because the error code will be displayed again if printing the
data with which the error was displayed.)
2. Replace the Main Controller PCB 2.
Title
Undetected error of the Image Process Chip P
Description Undetected error of the Image Process Chip P
Remedy
Replace the Main Controller PCB 2
Title
Undetected error of the Image Process Chip R
Description Undetected error of the Image Process Chip R
Remedy
Replace the Main Controller PCB 2
Title
Detection shows that Sub Board O failed to be installed
Description Detection shows that Sub Board O failed to be installed
Remedy
Check contact of the Sub Board O and the cable, or replace
-> Replace the Main Controller PCB 2
Title
Detection shows that Sub Board O failed to be installed
Description Detection shows that Sub Board O failed to be installed
Remedy
Check contact of the Sub Board O and the cable, or replace
-> Replace the Main Controller PCB 2
Title
Undetected error of Image Process Chip S
Description Undetected error of Image Process Chip S
Remedy
Check contact of ScanI/F cable --> Replace
-> Replace the Main Controller PCB 2
FF00
00
E747
FF01
00
E747
0000
00
E747
001E
00
E747
011B
00
Item
Description
Title
A wrong Sub Board was detected
Description A wrong Sub Board was detected
Remedy
Check contact of ScanI/F cable --> Replace
Check contact of the Sub Board O and the cable -->
Replace
Replace the Main Controller PCB 2
Title
Connection failure with DDR-SDRAM (P)/inappropriate
memory size
Description Connection failure with DDR-SDRAM (P)/inappropriate
memory size
Remedy
Replace the DDR-SDRAM (P)
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
7-87
7
Ecode Detail Location
Code
E747
011A
00
E747
0119
00
E747
021B
00
E747
021A
00
E747
0219
00
Item
7-88
Description
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
031B
00
E747
031A
00
E747
0319
00
E747
041B
00
E747
041A
00
Item
Description
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
7-88
7
Ecode Detail Location
Code
E747
0419
00
E747
051D
00
E747
051C
00
E747
051B
00
E747
061B
00
Item
7-89
Description
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
061A
00
E747
0619
00
E747
0618
00
E747
071B
00
E747
071A
00
Item
Description
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
7-89
7
Ecode Detail Location
Code
E747
0719
00
E747
0718
00
E747
081B
00
E747
081A
00
E747
0819
00
Item
7-90
Description
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
0818
00
E747
091B
00
E747
091A
00
E747
0919
00
E747
0918
00
Item
Description
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
7-90
7
Ecode Detail Location
Code
E747
0A1B
00
E747
0A1A
00
E747
0A19
00
E747
0A18
00
E747
0B1B
00
Item
7-91
Description
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
0B1A
00
E747
0B19
00
E747
0B18
00
E747
0C1B
00
E747
0C1A
00
Item
Description
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
7-91
7
Ecode Detail Location
Code
E747
0C19
00
E747
0C18
00
E747
0D17
00
E747
0E17
00
E747
0E0F
00
Item
7-92
Description
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
0E0E
00
E747
0E0D
00
E747
0E0B
00
E747
0E09
00
E747
0E08
00
Item
Description
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
7-92
7
Ecode Detail Location
Code
E747
0E07
00
E747
0E06
00
E747
0E05
00
E747
0F1B
00
E747
0F19
00
Item
7-93
Description
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
0F18
00
E747
0F17
00
E747
0F0F
00
E747
101B
00
E747
101A
00
Item
Description
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
7-93
7
Ecode Detail Location
Code
E747
1019
00
E747
1018
00
E747
1017
00
E747
100F
00
E747
1117
00
Item
7-94
Description
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
110E
00
E747
110D
00
E747
1217
00
E747
1208
00
E747
1207
00
Item
Description
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
7-94
7
Ecode Detail Location
Code
E747
1206
00
E747
1205
00
E747
1204
00
E747
1203
00
E747
1202
00
Item
7-95
Description
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
1200
00
E747
2000
00
E747
221F
00
E747
221C
00
E747
221B
00
Item
Description
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
7-95
7
Ecode Detail Location
Code
E747
2218
00
E747
2217
00
E747
221E
00
E747
221D
00
E747
221C
00
Item
7-96
Description
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
221B
00
E747
221A
00
E747
2219
00
E747
2218
00
E747
2217
00
Item
Description
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
7-96
7
Ecode Detail Location
Code
E747
2216
00
E747
2215
00
E747
2214
00
E747
2213
00
E747
2212
00
Item
7-97
Description
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
3619
00
E747
3618
00
E747
3717
00
E747
3716
00
E747
3715
00
Item
Description
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
7-97
7
Ecode Detail Location
Code
E747
381F
00
E747
381B
00
E747
3906
00
E747
3902
00
E747
3901
00
Item
7-98
Description
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
3A06
00
E747
3A02
00
E747
3A01
00
E747
3C00
00
E747
3D00
00
Item
Description
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
7-98
7
Ecode Detail Location
Code
E747
3F01
00
E747
3F02
00
E747
3F03
00
E747
3F04
00
E747
3F05
00
Item
7-99
Description
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
3F06
00
E747
3F07
00
E747
4000
00
E747
421F
00
E747
421E
00
Item
Description
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
7-99
7
Ecode Detail Location
Code
E747
421D
00
E747
421C
00
E747
421B
00
E747
421A
00
E747
4219
00
Item
7-100
Description
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
4218
00
E747
4217
00
E747
4216
00
E747
4215
00
E747
4214
00
Item
Description
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
7-100
7
Ecode Detail Location
Code
E747
4213
00
E747
4212
00
E747
5619
00
E747
5618
00
E747
5717
00
Item
7-101
Description
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
5716
00
E747
5715
00
E747
581F
00
E747
581B
00
E747
5906
00
Item
Description
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
7-101
7
Ecode Detail Location
Code
E747
5902
00
E747
5901
00
E747
5A06
00
E747
5A02
00
E747
5A01
00
Item
7-102
Description
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
5C00
00
E747
5D00
00
E747
5F00
00
E747
5F01
00
E747
5F02
00
Item
Description
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
7-102
7
Ecode Detail Location
Code
E747
5F03
00
E747
5F04
00
E747
5F05
00
E747
5F06
00
E747
5F07
00
Item
7-103
Description
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
6000
00
E747
621F
00
E747
621E
00
E747
621D
00
E747
621C
00
Item
Description
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
7-103
7
Ecode Detail Location
Code
E747
621B
00
E747
621A
00
E747
6219
00
E747
6218
00
E747
6217
00
Item
7-104
Description
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
6216
00
E747
6215
00
E747
6214
00
E747
6213
00
E747
6212
00
Item
Description
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
7-104
7
Ecode Detail Location
Code
E747
651F
00
E747
651D
00
E747
651C
00
E747
6A1F
00
E747
6B1F
00
Item
7-105
Description
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
6B1D
00
E747
6B1A
00
E747
6B19
00
E747
6B17
00
E747
6C1F
00
Item
Description
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
7-105
7
Ecode Detail Location
Code
E747
6C1E
00
E747
6F1F
00
E747
711F
00
E747
721F
00
E747
741F
00
Item
7-106
Description
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
741E
00
E747
751F
00
E747
751C
00
E747
751B
00
E747
7C00
00
Item
Description
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
7-106
7
Ecode Detail Location
Code
E747
7D00
00
E747
8000
00
E747
851F
00
E747
851D
00
E747
851C
00
Item
7-107
Description
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
9118
00
E747
9117
00
E747
9116
00
E747
9115
00
E747
9114
00
Item
Description
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
7-107
7
Ecode Detail Location
Code
E747
951B
00
E747
951A
00
E747
9C00
00
E747
A000
00
E747
A51F
00
Item
7-108
Description
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
A51D
00
E747
A51C
00
E747
B118
00
E747
B117
00
E747
B116
00
Item
Description
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
7-108
7
Ecode Detail Location
Code
E747
B115
00
E747
B114
00
E747
B51B
00
E747
B51A
00
E747
BC00
00
Item
7-109
Description
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
C000
00
E747
C51F
00
E747
C51D
00
E747
C51C
00
E747
C51B
00
Item
Description
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
7-109
7
Ecode Detail Location
Code
E747
C51A
00
E747
C519
00
E747
C706
00
E747
C702
00
E747
C701
00
Item
7-110
Description
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
D619
00
E747
D618
00
E747
D717
00
E747
D716
00
E747
D715
00
Item
Description
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
7-110
7
Ecode Detail Location
Code
E747
E747
DC00
DF01
00
00
E748
2010
00
E748
2011
00
E748
2012
00
E748
2021
00
E748
2022
00
Item
7-111
Description
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
Title
Error in Main Controller PCB2
Description Error in Main Controller PCB2
Remedy
1. Check contact of ScanI/F cable. Check contact of the
Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB.Check contact of SDRAM at
Main Controller PCB2.
2. Replace the Bypass PCB or Open I/F PCB
3. Replace the SDRAM at Main Controller PCB2
4. Replace the Main Controller PCB2
5. Replace the HDD (replace the new encryption board)
Title
Error in Flash PCB
Description Unable to find the IPL (startup program).
Remedy
Replace the Flash PCB.
Title
Error in Flash PCB
Description Unable to find the kernel.
Remedy
Replace the Flash PCB.
Title
Error in Flash PCB
Description Unable to mount the Linux system at starting service mode,
or there is no system start script.
Remedy
Replace the Flash PCB.
Title
Error in access of Main Controller PCB 2
Description Necessary H/W on the Main Controller PCB 2 is not found.
Remedy
1. Clean the terminal of the Main Controller PCB 2, and
disconnect and then connect it.
2. Clean the terminal of the Main Controller PCB 1, and
disconnect and then connect it.
3. Replace the Main Controller PCB 2.
Title
Error in access of Main Controller PCB 2
Description Necessary H/W on the Main Controller PCB 2 is not found.
Remedy
1. Remove and then insert the Main Controller PCB 1 and
the Main Controller PCB 2 .
2. Replace the Main Controller PCB 1 and the Main
Controller PCB 2.
2023
00
E748
2024
00
E748
9000
00
E753
0001
00
E804
0000
00
Item
Description
Title
Error in access of Main Controller PCB 2
Description Unable to initialize the memory DDR2-SDRAM on the Main
Controller PCB 2.
Remedy
1. Clean the terminal of the DDR2-SDRAM , and disconnect
and then connect it.
2. Replace the DDR2-SDRAM.
Title
Error in access of Main Controller PCB 2
Description CPU on the Main Controller PCB 2 fails to complete the
initialization.
Remedy
1. Clean the terminal of the DDR2-SDRAM , and disconnect
and then connect it.
2. Replace the DDR2-SDRAM.
Title
System error
Description System error
Remedy
Contact to the sales companies.
Title
Download Error
Description System Software Update Error
Error occurs when updating system software of uninstalled
options
Remedy
1. Check the log to find where the download error has been
occurred.
FIN_C1 Staple Finisher-C1/Booklet Finisher-C1
IFN_A1 Inner Finisher-A1
G3CCB Super G3 FAX Board-AE1
G3CCM Super G3 FAX Board-AE1
When any of the above system software is displayed, check
if the target option has been installed.
When the target option has not been installed:
Turn OFF and then ON the main power supply to restore
(since there is no system software to be updated.).
When the target option has been installed:
Check if the accessory is correctly installed and if the target
system software to be downloaded is for the installed
option. Then download the appropriate system software
again.
Title
Error in Power Supply Fan
Description Lock of the Power Supply Fan was detected
Remedy
1. Check power distribution to the Fan.
2. Replace the Fan.
7-111
7
Ecode Detail Location
Code
E805
E805
E806
E806
0000
0001
0000
0001
05
05
05
05
Item
7-112
Description
Title
Error in Fixing Heat Exhaust Fan 1
Description 1. After the power of the Host Machine has been turned
ON, rotation of the Fixing Heat Exhaust Fan 1 (FM1) was
detected before turning ON the fan.
2. There is no rotation signal while the Fixing Heat Exhaust
Fan 1 (FM1) is rotating.
Remedy
1. Check the Fixing Heat Exhaust Fan 1 (FM1) harness
(to see if the harness is caught, disconnected or physically
removed).
2. Check the fuse of the Pickup Feed Driver PCB (UN2).
3. Replace the Pickup Feed Driver PCB (UN2).
4. Replace the Fixing Heat Exhaust Fan 1 (FM1).
Title
Error in Fixing Heat Exhaust Fan 2
Description 1. After the power of the Host Machine has been turned
ON, rotation of the Fixing Heat Exhaust Fan 2 (FM2) was
detected before turning ON the fan.
2. There is no rotation signal while the Fixing Heat Exhaust
Fan 2 (FM2) is rotating.
Remedy
1. Check the Fixing Heat Exhaust Fan 2 (FM2) harness
(to see if the harness is caught, disconnected or physically
removed).
2. Replace the Feed Driver PCB.
3. Replace the Fixing Heat Exhaust Fan 2 (FM2).
Title
Error in Delivery fan 1
Description 1. Failure in the Connect signal when the fan was turned
OFF.
2. Failure detected while the fan is rotating.
Remedy
1. Check the fan harness (to see if the harness is caught,
disconnected or physically removed).
2. Replace the Pickup Feed Driver PCB (UN2).
3. Replace the Delivery Fan (FM7).
Title
Error in Delivery fan 2
Description 1. After the power of the Host Machine has been turned ON,
rotation of the fan was detected before turning ON the fan.
2. There is no rotation signal while the fan is rotating.
Remedy
1. Check the fan harness (to see if the harness is caught,
disconnected or physically removed).
2. Replace the Pickup Feed Driver PCB (UN2).
3. Replace the Delivery Fan 2 (FM9).
0002
05
E807
0000
05
E807
0001
05
E808
0000
05
E811
0000
05
E811
0001
05
Item
Description
Title
Error in Secondary Transfer Exhaust Fan
Description 1. After the power of the Host Machine has been turned ON,
rotation of the fan was detected before turning ON the fan.
2. There is no rotation signal while the fan is rotating.
Remedy
1. Check the fan harness (to see if the harness is caught,
disconnected or physically removed).
2. Replace the Pickup Feed Driver PCB (UN2).
3. Replace the Secondary Transfer Exhaust Fan (FM8).
Title
Error in Process cartridge fan (front)
Description 1. After the power of the Host Machine has been turned ON,
rotation of the fan was detected before turning ON the fan.
2. There is no rotation signal while the fan is rotating.
Remedy
1. Check the fan harness (to see if the harness is caught,
disconnected or physically removed).
2. Replace the Relay Board.
3. Replace the fan.
Title
Error in Process cartridge fan (rear)
Description 1. After the power of the Host Machine has been turned ON,
rotation of the fan was detected before turning ON the fan.
2. There is no rotation signal while the fan is rotating.
Remedy
1. Check the fan harness (to see if the harness is caught,
disconnected or physically removed).
2. Replace the Pickup Feed Driver PCB (UN2).
3. Replace the fan.
Title
Error in Zero Cross
Description Zero Cross failed to be detected for 50ms or more while the
fixing relay was ON.
Remedy
1. Replace the AC Driver (UN6).
2. Check the cycle of the input voltage (failure in powerperipheral area of the customer. Ask the customer to
perform the power supply work).
Title
Fuse cutoff error in Process Cartridge
Description Fuse cannot be cut off (disconnect) although it is tried to be
cut off.
Remedy
1. Turn OFF and then ON the power.
2. Check the resistance value of the Fuse on Drum.
3. Replace the Drum.
Title
Error in 24V of the drum new/old detection.
Description Error in 24V of the drum new/old detection.
Remedy
1. Check the FUSE_5 on the Pickup Feed Driver PCB (UN2).
2. Replace the Pickup Feed Driver PCB (UN2).
7-112
7
Ecode Detail Location
Code
E840
0000
05
Item
Title
Description
Remedy
E880
0001
00
Title
Description
Remedy
E880
0003
00
Title
Description
Remedy
E880
0004
00
Title
Description
Remedy
E880
0005
00
Title
Description
Remedy
7-113
Description
Error in shutter for Fixing Edge Cooling Fan (if the HP failed
to be detected when the error occurred).
Failed to detect that the fan shutter has moved to the
specified position when moving the fan shutter from
anywhere other than the HP.
1. Check the harness of the Shutter Motor (M27), the
Shutter HP Sensor (PS31) and the Shutter Position Sensor
(PS32) (to see if the harness is caught, disconnected or
physically removed).
2. Replace the Pickup Feed Driver PCB (UN2).
3. Replace the Shutter Motor, the Shutter HP Sensor or the
Shutter Position Sensor.
Error in Controller Fan
Fan lock of the Controller CPU cooling fan was detected
Check if the connector is connected.
If the connection was found OK, replace the Controller Fan
3 (FM13).
Error in Controller Fan
Riser PCB Fan was detected to be locked.
Check if the connector is connected.
If the connection was found OK, replace the Controller Fan
1 (FM11).
Error in Controller Fan
Riser PCB Fan was detected to be locked.
Check if the connector is connected.
If the connection was found OK, replace the Controller Fan
2 (FM12).
Error in Controller Fan
Fan lock of the HDD Cooling Fan was detected
Check if the connector is connected.
It the connection is OK, replace the HDD Cooling Fan
(FM14).
T-7-7
7-113
7-114
Jam Code
PS8
PS9
[PS40]
[PS43]
[PS41]
[PS37]
F-7-3
[PS47]
[PS55]
[PS56]
F-7-1
[PS1D]
[PS6D]
F-7-2
ACC
ID
Jam
Code
Type
00
0B00
Door open
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
0105
0205
0A05
FF05
0106
0206
0A06
FF06
0107
0207
0A07
FF07
010D
020D
0A0D
FF0D
010A
020A
0A0A
FF0A
010C
020C
0A0C
FF0C
0108
0208
Delay jam
Stationary jam
POWER ON
Sequence jam *2
Delay jam
Stationary jam
POWER ON
Sequence jam *2
Delay jam
Stationary jam
POWER ON
Sequence jam *2
Delay jam
Stationary jam
POWER ON
Sequence jam *2
Delay jam
Stationary jam
POWER ON
Sequence jam *2
Delay jam
Stationary jam
POWER ON
Sequence jam *2
Delay jam
Stationary jam
Sensor Name
Front door sensor,Right lower door
sensor,Right door sensor
Registration sensor
Registration sensor
Registration sensor
Registration sensor
Fixing inlet sensor
Fixing inlet sensor
Fixing inlet sensor
Fixing inlet sensor
Inner delivery sensor
Inner delivery sensor
Inner delivery sensor
Inner delivery sensor
Duplex paper sensor
Duplex paper sensor
Duplex paper sensor
Duplex paper sensor
Reverse sensor
Reverse sensor
Reverse sensor
Reverse sensor
Duplex inlet sensor
Duplex inlet sensor
Duplex inlet sensor
Duplex inlet sensor
First delivery sensor
First delivery sensor
Sensor ID
PS18,PS19,PS20
PS33
PS33
PS33
PS33
PS34
PS34
PS34
PS34
PS37
PS37
PS37
PS37
PS38
PS38
PS38
PS38
PS39
PS39
PS39
PS39
PS40
PS40
PS40
PS40
PS41
PS41
7-114
7
ACC
ID
Jam
Code
Type
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
0A08
FF08
0109
0209
0A09
FF09
010B
020B
0A0B
FF0B
0A01
FF01
0102
0202
0A02
FF02
010F
0111
0112
020F
0211
0212
0A0F
0A11
0A12
FF0F
FF11
FF12
0103
0203
0A03
FF03
0104
0204
0A04
FF04
0CF1
POWER ON
Sequence jam *2
Delay jam
Stationary jam
POWER ON
Sequence jam *2
Delay jam
Stationary jam
POWER ON
Sequence jam *2
POWER ON
Sequence jam *2
Delay jam
Stationary jam
POWER ON
Sequence jam *2
Delay jam
Delay jam
Delay jam
Stationary jam
Stationary jam
Stationary jam
POWER ON
POWER ON
POWER ON
Sequence jam *2
Sequence jam *2
Sequence jam *2
Delay jam
Stationary jam
POWER ON
Sequence jam *2
Delay jam
Stationary jam
POWER ON
Sequence jam *2
Error *1
00
0CA1
Error *1
00
0CA2
Error *1
00
0CA3
Error *1
7-115
Sensor Name
First delivery sensor
First delivery sensor
Second delivery sensor
Second delivery sensor
Second delivery sensor
Second delivery sensor
Third delivery sensor
Third delivery sensor
Third delivery sensor
Third delivery sensor
Cassette 1 pre-registration sensor
Cassette 1 pre-registration sensor
Cassette 2 pre-registration sensor
Cassette 2 pre-registration sensor
Cassette 2 pre-registration sensor
Cassette 2 pre-registration sensor
Deck pickup sensor
Buffer pass entrance sensor
Buffer pass exit sensor
Deck pickup sensor
Buffer pass entrance sensor
Buffer pass exit sensor
Deck pickup sensor
Buffer pass entrancee sensor
Buffer pass exit sensor
Deck pickup sensor
Buffer pass entrance sensor
Buffer pass exit sensor
Cassette 3 pre-registration sensor
Cassette 3 pre-registration sensor
Cassette 3 pre-registration sensor
Cassette 3 pre-registration sensor
Cassette 4 pre-registration sensor
Cassette 4 pre-registration sensor
Cassette 4 pre-registration sensor
Cassette 4 pre-registration sensor
Recovered by opening and closing the
Door
Recovered by opening and closing the
Door
Recovered by opening and closing the
Door
Recovered by opening and closing the
Door
Sensor ID
PS41
PS41
PS42
PS42
PS42
PS42
PS43
PS43
PS43
PS43
PS55
PS55
PS56
PS56
PS56
PS56
PS6D
PS1
PS2
PS6D
PS1
PS2
PS6D
PS1
PS2
PS6D
PS1
PS2
PS8
PS8
PS8
PS8
PS9
PS9
PS9
PS9
-
ACC
ID
Jam
Code
00
0D91
00
00
00
00
00
00
0D92
0D93
0113
0213
FF13
FF90
Type
Different media
length
Incorrect paper
Incorrect paper
Delay jam
Stationary jam
Sequence jam *2
Sequence jam *3
Sensor Name
Sensor ID
Transparency sensor
Transparency sensor
Vertical path sensor
Vertical path sensor
Vertical path sensor
Communication sequence error with
Finisher
UN51
UN51
UN53
UN53
UN53
T-7-8
*1 The state is recovered by opening and closing the Door, or turning OFF and then ON the
power supply.
If the same jam is detected regardless of the operation above, the error code is displayed.
*2: The state is recovered by opening and closing the Door, or turning OFF and then ON the
power supply.
If it is not recovered by the above operation, it is considered an error near the target sensor.
Disconnect and then connect the connectors around the target sensor, check if the cable is
open circuit, and replace the sensor.
*3: The state is recovered by opening and closing the Door, or turning OFF and then ON the
power supply.
If it is not recovered by the above operation, operation failure of the Finisher (including error
in the harness) is suspected as a cause.
7-115
7-116
[PCB3]
[PCB4]
[SR5]
[SR15]
[SR16]
[SR1215]
[SR6]
[SR4]
[SR5]
[SR1]
0048
0009
0049
0010
0050
0011
0051
0012
0052
0090
0091
0092
0093
0094
0071
0073
0074
0075
Type
Stationary
delay
delay
Stationary
Stationary
delay
delay
Stationary
Stationary
Door open
Door open
Door open
Door open
Power ON
Sequence Error
Error
Error
Error
Sensor Name
Read sensor 1
Read sensor 2
Read sensor 2
Read sensor 2
Read sensor 2
Delivery sensor
Delivery sensor
Delivery sensor
Delivery sensor
Cover open/closed sensor
Cover open/closed sensor
Disengaging home position sensor 1
Disengaging home position sensor 2
Pickup unit lifter home position sensor
Sensor ID
PCB4
SR5
SR5
SR5
SR5
PCB5
PCB5
PCB5
PCB5
SR10
SR10
SR15
SR16
SR12
T-7-9
[VR1]
[SR10]
F-7-4
0001
0002
0042
0095
0003
0043
0004
0044
0005
0045
0006
0046
0007
0047
0008
Type
delay
Stationary
Stationary
Pickup Error
delay
delay
Stationary
Stationary
delay
delay
Stationary
Stationary
delay
delay
Stationary
Sensor Name
Post-separation sensor 3
Post-separation sensor 3
Post-separation sensor 3
Post-separation sensor 3
Delivery sensor
Delivery sensor
Delivery sensor
Delivery sensor
Registration sensor
Registration sensor
Registration sensor
Registration sensor
Read sensor 1
Read sensor 1
Read sensor 1
Sensor ID
PCB2
PCB2
PCB2
PCB2
SR4
SR4
SR4
SR4
PCB3
PCB3
PCB3
PCB3
PCB4
PCB4
PCB4
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
0001
0002
0042
0095
0003
0043
0004
0044
0009
0049
0010
0050
0013
0053
0014
0054
0090
0091
0092
0093
0094
Type
delay
Stationary
Stationary
Pickup Error
delay
delay
Stationary
Stationary
delay
delay
Stationary
Stationary
delay
delay
Stationary
Stationary
Door open
Door open
Door open
Door open
Power ON
Sensor Name
Timing sensor
Timing sensor
Timing sensor
Timing sensor
Registration sensor
Registration sensor
Registration sensor
Registration sensor
Read sensor
Read sensor
Read sensor
Read sensor
Delivery reversal sensor
Delivery reversal sensor
Delivery reversal sensor
Delivery reversal sensor
Cover open/closed sensor
Cover open/closed sensor
-
Sensor ID
SR4
SR4
SR4
SR4
SR1
SR1
SR1
SR1
SR2
SR2
SR2
SR2
SR3
SR3
SR3
SR3
SR6
SR6
-
7-116
7
ACC Jam Code
ID
01
01
0071
0073
Type
Sequence Error
Error
Sensor Name
Release motor HP sensor
7-117
Sensor ID
SR11
PI109
T-7-10
* The state is recovered by opening and closing the Door, or turning OFF and then ON the
power supply.
If the same jam is detected regardless of the operation above, the error code is displayed.
PI108
PI123
PI105
PI107
PI101
PI111
PI117
PI106
PI114
PI104
PI102
PI103
PI116
PI113
PI110
PI115
PI112
PI120
F-7-5
7-117
7-118
PI22
PI18
PI19
PI11
PI16
PI9
ACC
ID
Jam
Code
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
110F
1F8F
1002
1400
1F88
1102
1F92
1F87
Retry error *
Retry error *
Delay jam
Door open
Door open
Stationary jam
Delay jam
POWER ON
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
1001
1101
1200
1004
1104
1300
1FA2
1F91
1FA1
Delay jam
Stationary jam
Resijual jam
Delay jam
Stationary jam
Early jam
stationary jam
Delay jam
Stationary jam
02
02
02
02
02
02
1F93
1FA3
1604
1605
1F86
1500
Delay jam
Stationary jam
Punch jam
POWER ON
Staple jam
Staple jam
Type
PI20
PI21
PI6
PI14
PI15
PI5
PI12
PI17
PI4
PI13
PI1
PI7
PI8
Sensor Name
Punch pass sensor
Punch pass sensor
Delivery sensor
Paper pushing plate motor clock
sensor,Vertical pat paper sensor,No.1
paper sensor,No.2 paper sensor,No.3
paper sensor,Saddle inlet sensor
Inlet sensor
Inlet sensor
Inlet sensor
Feed path sensor
Feed path sensor
Feed path sensor
Delivery sensor, Vertical path sensor
No.1 paper sensor
No.1 paper sensor,No.2 paper
sensor,No.3 paper sensor
Saddle inlet sensor
Saddle inlet sensor
Side registration HP sensor
Punch pass sensor
Saddle staple
stapler
Sensor ID
PCB12
PCB12
PI11
PI1, PI17, PI18,
PI19, PI20, PI22
PI103
PI103
PI103
PI104
PI104
PI104
PI11,PI17
PI18
PI18,PI19,PI20
PI22
PI22
PI63
PCB12
SDL STP
STP
T-7-11
F-7-6
* The state is recovered by opening and closing the Door, or turning OFF and then ON the
power supply.
If the same jam is detected regardless of the operation above, the error code is displayed.
7-118
7-119
Inner Finisher-A1
S22
S2
S1
ACC
ID
Jam
Code
Type
Sensor Name
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
02
1C75
1C71
1C20
1C67
1C32
1C6F
1C40
1C42
1001
1101
1701
1102
1300
1F00
1500
1400
Error
Sensor error *
Sensor error *
Sensor error *
Sensor error *
Sensor error *
Sensor error *
Sensor error *
Delay jam
Stationary jam
Early jam
Stationary jam
POWER ON
Early jam
Staple jam
Door open
Sensor ID
S7
S13
S2
S3
S10
S5
S14
S23
S1
S1
S1
S6
S1,S6
S1
S18,S19
SW1
T-7-12
* The state is recovered by opening and closing the Door, or turning OFF and then ON the
S15
S16
power supply.
S6
If the same jam is detected regardless of the operation above, the error code is displayed.
F-7-7
S18
S19
S20
S10
S7
S13
S9
S12
S11
F-7-8
7-119
7-120
Alarm Code
Location Alarm
of Trouble Code
33
Alarm Code
Location Alarm
of Trouble Code
00
00
02
02
Description
02
- 0022
02
- 0023
04
09
09
09
09
10
10
- 0002
10
- 0003
10
- 0004
11
31
- 0001
- 0006
33
- 0010
0008
0001
0002
0003
0004
0001
Details
33
33
33
34
34
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
38
38
50
Description
Details
- 0011 Fixing exhaust fan alarm SET: In case the fan abnormality occurred during a
job.
RESET: In case the fan operates normally during a
job
- 0022 Read Motor Cooling Fan The fan rotation signal cannot be detected after 3
(FM1) alarm
seconds have passed since the Read Motor Cooling
Fan (FM1) is turned ON. Check the connector
connection -> Replace the Read Motor Cooling Fan
(FM1).
- 0023 Scanner Unit (DADF)
The fan rotation signal cannot be detected after
Cooling Fan (FM3)
3 seconds have passed since the Scanner Unit
alarm
(DADF) Cooling Fan (FM3) is turned ON. Check the
connector connection -> Replace the Scanner Unit
(DADF) Cooling Fan (FM3).
- 0025 Scanner Unit (Reader) The fan rotation signal cannot be detected after
Cooling Fan (FM1)
3 seconds have passed since the Scanner Unit
alarm
(Reader) Cooling Fan (FM1) is turned ON. Check
the connector connection -> Replace the Scanner
Unit (Reader) Cooling Fan (FM1).
- 0002 Auto registration
Abnormal data occurred on more or equal to 8 out of
adjustment
10 sets of auto registration pattern.
Dirt on the belt and scratches were wrongly detected
as a pattern and discrepancy in reading data
occurred as the result.
- 0003 Auto registration
Timeout occurred due to unsuccess in reading 10
adjustment
sets of auto registration pattern.
Registration detection sensor failure, Registration
detection sensor cleaning member covered the
registration detection sensor, or no image drew on
the belt.
- 0001 For R&D
For R&D
- 0002 For R&D
For R&D
- 0003 For R&D
For R&D
- 0004 For R&D
For R&D
- 0005 For R&D
For R&D
- 0006 For R&D
For R&D
- 0007 For R&D
For R&D
- 1000 For R&D
For R&D
- 2000 For R&D
For R&D
- 0001 For R&D
For R&D
- 0002 For R&D
For R&D
- 0007 Insufficient light intensity Clean the Post-separation Sensor 3 (PCB2) if light
in Post-separation
intensity is insufficient when adjusting output of the
Sensor 3 (PCB2)
sensor.
7-120
7
Location Alarm
of Trouble Code
50
50
50
50
- 0013
61
- 0001
62
- 0001
65
Description
- 0001
70
70
70
70
70
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
70
70
- 0006
- 0007
73
73
73
- 0004
- 0006
- 0007
7-121
Details
Location Alarm
of Trouble Code
73
73
73
73
73
73
73
73
73
73
73
73
73
73
73
73
73
73
0008
0009
0010
0011
0012
0013
0014
0015
0016
0017
0018
0019
0020
0021
0022
0023
0024
0025
73
75
75
- 0026
- 0001
- 0002
75
- 9101
75
- 9102
75
- 9103
75
- 9104
75
- 9105
75
- 9106
75
- 9107
75
- 9108
Description
Details
LIPS
LIPS
LIPS
LIPS
LIPS
LIPS
LIPS
LIPS
LIPS
LIPS
LIPS
LIPS
LIPS
LIPS
LIPS
LIPS
LIPS
LIPS
7-121
7
Location Alarm
of Trouble Code
75
75
75
75
75
75
75
75
75
75
75
75
75
75
75
Description
7-122
Details
Location Alarm
of Trouble Code
75
75
75
75
75
75
75
75
75
75
75
-
75
75
75
75
Description
Details
-
7-122
7
Location Alarm
of Trouble Code
75
75
75
75
75
75
75
75
75
75
75
75
75
75
75
Description
7-123
Details
Location Alarm
of Trouble Code
75
75
Description
75
76
76
76
76
76
76
76
75
75
75
75
-
75
75
75
75
-
0003
0004
0005
0006
0007
Font
Font
Font
Font
Font
Details
-
7-123
7
Location Alarm
of Trouble Code
Description
76
- 0008 Font
77
77
77
77
77
78
78
79
79
79
79
80
80
80
80
80
80
80
80
81
81
81
81
81
82
83
83
83
83
83
83
83
83
83
83
83
83
83
83
83
83
83
0001
0002
0003
0005
0006
0003
0005
0001
0002
0003
0004
0001
0003
0010
0011
0015
0016
0018
0019
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0001
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
0007
0008
0009
0010
0011
0012
0013
0014
0015
0016
0017
PDL
PDL
PDL
PDL
PDL
GL
GL
In-house developed PCL
In-house developed PCL
In-house developed PCL
In-house developed PCL
BDL
BDL
BDL
BDL
BDL
BDL
BDL
BDL
Imaging
Imaging
Imaging
Imaging
Imaging
RIP
CanonPDF
CanonPDF
CanonPDF
CanonPDF
CanonPDF
CanonPDF
CanonPDF
CanonPDF
CanonPDF
CanonPDF
CanonPDF
CanonPDF
CanonPDF
CanonPDF
CanonPDF
CanonPDF
CanonPDF
7-124
Details
Location Alarm
of Trouble Code
Description
83
- 0018 CanonPDF
84
84
84
84
0001
0002
0003
0004
84
84
84
84
0005
0006
0007
0008
84
- 0009
Details
PDF analysis error
Un-supported transparent object exists.
T-7-13
7-124
Service Mode
Overview
COPIER
FEEDER
SORTER
BOARD
8
Overview
8-2
Instructions on how to use service mode items can be found within the service mode itself.
The information explains what items have been added or changed from previous models.
Explanatory texts for the initial window, main items, sub items and minor items can be
displayed.
Select the desired initial window, main item, sub item or minor item, then pres [i] (Information
button) to display an explanatory text (hereafter, service mode contents) on the selected item.
TOP Screen
1) Press [i]
F-8-1
"MODELIST"
"MODELIST CLASSIC"
If " MODELIST " or " MODELIST CLASSIC " is pressed, the screen will switch to initial screen for
each mode.
F-8-2
8-2
8-3
On the COPIER > I/O, the mode to confirm input output signal of electrical parts used (sensor,
The detail description of each code can be viewed on the error code and alarm code
motor, fan, etc), makes it easier to look for the intended electrical part.
And the screen will also display the input output signal.
ERROR CODE : COPIER > DISPLAY >ERR
Device classification
Electrical parts
classification
[PS40]
[PS43]
[PS41]
[PS37]
[PS34] [PS35] [PS36]
[PS38]
[PS33]
[UN53]
[PS47]
[PS55]
[PS56]
F-8-3
F-8-5
8-3
8-4
Security features
On the current machine, there are extremely many items in the COPIER > OPTION > BODY (in
related to host machine specification), that it is difficult to reach the intended item.
In order to reach the intended item in shorter time, all items inside the BODY is classified to
15 categories.
Classification
Function switching
Name
FNC-SW
Description
Language, cassette, paper size type, NAVI/
DA connection, count-up spec., document size
detection, dirt detection level
DSPLY-SW
IMG-FIX
Fixing related
IMG-TR
IMG-DEV
Developer related
<Setting range>
0: No password (default)
1: Service engineer
2: System administrator and Service engineer.
COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > SM-PSWD (Level2)
Password for service engineer for transition to service mode.
<Setting range>
IMG-RDR
IMG-SPD
Cleaning
Environment settings
ENV-SET
FEED-SW
Noise reduction
SOUND
Noise related
Network
NETWORK
Customization
CUSTOM
Customization
T-8-1
8-4
8-5
1) Additional Functions > System Settings > System Manager Settings > enter System
Manager ID > enter System Password Settings > press OK button.
System
Manager
ID
System
Password
F-8-6
2) After entering the password for service technician (Service mode: COPIER > Option >
FNC-SW > SM-PSWD), press OK button.
SM-PSWD
F-8-7
MEMO :
If Service Engineers password is forgotten, password function is cancelable by using
Service Support Tool (SST).
F-8-8
8-5
8-6
Language switch
The language of the explanatory text displayed in the Service Mode can be switched by
In factory setting, adjustments are made for each machine, and adjustment values are written
The explanatory text can be displayed by installing the Service Mode Content (SCMNT) in
When you replaced the DC controller PCB, or executed the RAM clear function, adjustment
HDD.
values for ADJUST or OPTION return to default. Therefore, when you made adjustments and
changed values of the Service Mode in the field, be sure to write down the changed values in
the service label. When there is no relevant field in the service label, write down the values in
a blank field.
Service Label
F-8-10
F-8-9
MEMO :
If the Service Mode Content (SMCNT) of the concerned language is not installed,
English explanatory text will be displayed.
If English-language Service Mode Content (SMCNT) is not installed either, explanatory
text can't be displayed.
8-6
8
COPIER
COPIER>DISPLAY>VERSION
DISPLAY
VERSION
COPIER>DISPLAY>VERSION
DC-CON
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
R-CON
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
PANEL
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
ECO
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
FEEDER
SORTER
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
NIB
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
PS/PCL
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
SDL-STCH
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
OP-CON
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
8-7
MN-CONT
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
RUI
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
PUNCH
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
LANG-EN
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
LANG-FR
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
LANG-DE
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
LANG-IT
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
LANG-JP
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
LANG-CS
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
LANG-DA
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
LANG-EL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
8-7
8-8
COPIER>DISPLAY>VERSION
LANG-ES
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
LANG-ET
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
LANG-FI
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
LANG-HU
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
LANG-KO
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
LANG-NL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
LANG-NO
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
LANG-PL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
LANG-PT
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
LANG-RU
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
LANG-SL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
COPIER>DISPLAY>VERSION
LANG-SV
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
LANG-TW
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
LANG-ZH
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
ECO-ID
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
GDI-UFR
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
LANG-BU
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
LANG-CR
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
LANG-RM
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
LANG-SK
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
LANG-TK
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
MEAP
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
8-8
8-9
COPIER>DISPLAY>VERSION
OCR-CN
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
OCR-JP
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
OCR-KR
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
OCR-TW
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
BOOTROM
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
TTS-JA
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
TTS-EN
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
TTS-IT
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
TTS-FR
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
COPIER>DISPLAY>VERSION
TTS-ES
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
TTS-DE
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
WEB-BRWS
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
HELP
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Display/adj/set range
Supplement/memo
LANG-CA
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
WEBDAV
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
TIMESTMP
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
ASR-JA
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Supplement/memo
8-9
8-10
COPIER>DISPLAY>VERSION
ASR-EN
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Supplement/memo
MEDIA-JA
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
MEDIA-EN
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
MEDIA-DE
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
MEDIA-IT
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
MEDIA-FR
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
MEDIA-ZH
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
MEDIA-SK
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
MEDIA-TK
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
MEDIA-CS
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
COPIER>DISPLAY>VERSION
MEDIA-EL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
MEDIA-ES
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
MEDIA-ET
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
MEDIA-FI
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
MEDIA-HU
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
MEDIA-KO
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
MEDIA-NL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
MEDIA-NO
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
MEDIA-PL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
MEDIA-PT
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
MEDIA-RU
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
8-10
8-11
COPIER>DISPLAY>VERSION
MEDIA-SL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
MEDIA-SV
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
MEDIA-TW
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
MEDIA-BU
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
MEDIA-CR
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
MEDIA-RM
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
MEDIA-CA
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
ECO2
FAX1
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
FAX2/3/4
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
IOCS
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
COPIER>DISPLAY>VERSION
SYSTEM
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
ROOT
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
S-LNG-JP
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
S-LNG-EN
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
S-LNG-FR
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
S-LNG-IT
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
S-LNG-GR
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
S-LNG-SP
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
UI-RES
Lv.1 Details
8-11
8-12
COPIER>DISPLAY>VERSION
SEND-AP
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
BOX-AP
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
MOBPR-AP
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
RPTL-AP
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
INTRO-AP
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
TSP-JLK
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
COPY-FR
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
COPY-IT
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
COPY-DE
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
COPY-ES
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
COPIER>DISPLAY>VERSION
COPY-ZH
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
COPY-TW
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
COPY-KO
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
COPY-CS
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
COPY-DA
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
COPY-EL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
COPY-ET
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
COPY-FI
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
COPY-HU
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
8-12
8-13
COPIER>DISPLAY>VERSION
COPY-NL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
COPY-NO
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
COPY-PL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
COPY-PT
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
COPY-RU
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
COPY-SL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
COPY-SV
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
COPY-ID
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
COPY-BU
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
COPIER>DISPLAY>VERSION
COPY-CR
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
COPY-RM
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
COPY-SK
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
COPY-TK
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
COPY-CA
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
SEND-FR
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
SEND-IT
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
SEND-DE
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
SEND-ES
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
8-13
8-14
COPIER>DISPLAY>VERSION
SEND-ZH
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
SEND-TW
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
SEND-KO
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
SEND-CS
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
SEND-DA
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
SEND-EL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
SEND-ET
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
SEND-FI
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
SEND-HU
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
COPIER>DISPLAY>VERSION
SEND-NL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
SEND-NO
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
SEND-PL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
SEND-PT
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
SEND-RU
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
SEND-SL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
SEND-SV
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
SEND-ID
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
SEND-BU
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
8-14
8-15
COPIER>DISPLAY>VERSION
SEND-CR
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
SEND-RM
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
SEND-SK
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
SEND-TK
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
SEND-CA
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
INTRO-FR
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
INTRO-IT
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
INTRO-DE
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
INTRO-ES
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
COPIER>DISPLAY>VERSION
INTRO-ZH
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
INTRO-TW
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
INTRO-KO
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
INTRO-CS
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
INTRO-DA
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
INTRO-EL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
INTRO-ET
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
INTRO-FI
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
INTRO-HU
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
8-15
8-16
COPIER>DISPLAY>VERSION
INTRO-NL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
INTRO-NO
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
INTRO-PL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
INTRO-PT
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
INTRO-RU
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
INTRO-SL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
INTRO-SV
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
INTRO-ID
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
INTRO-BU
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
COPIER>DISPLAY>VERSION
INTRO-CR
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
INTRO-RM
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
INTRO-SK
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
INTRO-TK
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
INTRO-CA
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
CSTMN-FR
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
CSTMN-IT
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
CSTMN-DE
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
CSTMN-ES
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
8-16
8-17
COPIER>DISPLAY>VERSION
CSTMN-ZH
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
CSTMN-TW
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
CSTMN-KO
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
CSTMN-CS
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
CSTMN-DA
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
CSTMN-EL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
CSTMN-ET
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
CSTMN-FI
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
CSTMN-HU
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
COPIER>DISPLAY>VERSION
CSTMN-NL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
CSTMN-NO
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
CSTMN-PL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
CSTMN-PT
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
CSTMN-RU
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
CSTMN-SL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
CSTMN-SV
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
CSTMN-ID
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
CSTMN-BU
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
8-17
8-18
COPIER>DISPLAY>VERSION
CSTMN-CR
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
CSTMN-RM
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
CSTMN-SK
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
CSTMN-TK
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
CSTMN-CA
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
ACSBT-FR
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
ACSBT-IT
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
ACSBT-DE
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
ACSBT-ES
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
COPIER>DISPLAY>VERSION
ACSBT-ZH
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
ACSBT-TW
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
ACSBT-KO
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
ACSBT-CS
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
ACSBT-DA
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
ACSBT-EL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
ACSBT-ET
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
ACSBT-FI
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
ACSBT-HU
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
8-18
8-19
COPIER>DISPLAY>VERSION
ACSBT-NL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
ACSBT-NO
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
ACSBT-PL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
ACSBT-PT
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
ACSBT-RU
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
ACSBT-SL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
ACSBT-SV
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
ACSBT-ID
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
ACSBT-BU
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
COPIER>DISPLAY>VERSION
ACSBT-CR
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
ACSBT-RM
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
ACSBT-SK
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
ACSBT-TK
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
ACSBT-CA
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
ERS-FR
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Supplement/memo
ERS-IT
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Supplement/memo
ERS-DE
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Supplement/memo
ERS-ES
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Supplement/memo
8-19
8-20
COPIER>DISPLAY>VERSION
ERS-ZH
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Supplement/memo
ERS-TW
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Supplement/memo
ERS-KO
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Supplement/memo
ERS-CS
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Supplement/memo
ERS-DA
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Supplement/memo
ERS-EL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Supplement/memo
ERS-ET
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Supplement/memo
ERS-FI
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Supplement/memo
COPIER>DISPLAY>VERSION
ERS-HU
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Supplement/memo
ERS-NL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Supplement/memo
ERS-NO
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Supplement/memo
ERS-PL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Supplement/memo
ERS-PT
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Supplement/memo
ERS-RU
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Supplement/memo
ERS-SL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Supplement/memo
ERS-SV
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Supplement/memo
8-20
8-21
COPIER>DISPLAY>VERSION
ERS-ID
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Supplement/memo
ERS-BU
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Supplement/memo
ERS-CR
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Supplement/memo
ERS-RM
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Supplement/memo
ERS-SK
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Supplement/memo
ERS-TK
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Supplement/memo
ERS-CA
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Supplement/memo
UAC-FR
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Supplement/memo
COPIER>DISPLAY>VERSION
UAC-IT
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Supplement/memo
UAC-DE
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Supplement/memo
UAC-ES
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Supplement/memo
UAC-ZH
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Supplement/memo
UAC-TW
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Supplement/memo
UAC-KO
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Supplement/memo
UAC-CS
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Supplement/memo
UAC-DA
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Supplement/memo
8-21
8-22
COPIER>DISPLAY>VERSION
UAC-EL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Supplement/memo
UAC-ET
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Supplement/memo
UAC-FI
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Supplement/memo
UAC-HU
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Supplement/memo
UAC-NL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Supplement/memo
UAC-NO
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Supplement/memo
UAC-PL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Supplement/memo
UAC-PT
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Supplement/memo
COPIER>DISPLAY>VERSION
UAC-RU
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Supplement/memo
UAC-SL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Supplement/memo
UAC-SV
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Supplement/memo
UAC-ID
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Supplement/memo
UAC-BU
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Supplement/memo
UAC-CR
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Supplement/memo
UAC-RM
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Supplement/memo
UAC-SK
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Supplement/memo
8-22
8-23
COPIER>DISPLAY>VERSION
UAC-TK
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Supplement/memo
UAC-CA
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Supplement/memo
BCT
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
ASR-ES
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Supplement/memo
ASR-FR
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Supplement/memo
ASR-IT
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Supplement/memo
ASR-DE
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Supplement/memo
COPIER>DISPLAY>VERSION
BOX-FR
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
BOX-IT
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
BOX-DE
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
BOX-ES
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
BOX-ZH
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
BOX-TW
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
BOX-KO
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
BOX-CS
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
BOX-DA
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
8-23
8-24
COPIER>DISPLAY>VERSION
BOX-EL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
BOX-ET
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
BOX-FI
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
BOX-HU
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
BOX-NL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
BOX-NO
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
BOX-PL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
BOX-PT
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
BOX-RU
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
COPIER>DISPLAY>VERSION
BOX-SL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
BOX-SV
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
BOX-ID
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
BOX-BU
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
BOX-CR
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
BOX-RM
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
BOX-SK
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
BOX-TK
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
BOX-CA
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
8-24
8-25
USER
ACC-STS
COPIER>DISPLAY>USER
SPDTYPE
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
BRWS-STS
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Caution
Display/adj/set range
Related service mode
COPIER>DISPLAY>ACC-STS
FEEDER
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
SORTER
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
DECK
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
T-8-3
CARD
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
RAM
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
Default value
COINROBO
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
8-25
8-26
COPIER>DISPLAY>ACC-STS
NIB
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
NETWARE
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
SEND
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
PDL-FNC1
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
PDL-FNC2
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
COPIER>DISPLAY>ACC-STS
HDD
Lv.1 Details
Use case
PCI1
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
PCI2
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
PCI3
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
USBH-SPD
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
IA-RAM
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
Default value
8-26
8
ANALOG
COPIER>DISPLAY>ANALOG
COPIER>DISPLAY>ANALOG
TEMP
Lv.1 Details
8-27
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Appropriate target value
TEMP2
Lv.1 Details
8-27
8-28
CST-STS
HV-STS
COPIER>DISPLAY>CST-STS
WIDTH-MF
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Unit
COPIER>DISPLAY>HV-STS
1ATVC-Y
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Appropriate target value
Related service mode
1ATVC-M
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Appropriate target value
Related service mode
1ATVC-C
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Appropriate target value
Related service mode
1ATVC-K4
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Appropriate target value
Related service mode
8-28
8-29
COPIER>DISPLAY>HV-STS
2ATVC
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Appropriate target value
Related service mode
THCK-Y
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Appropriate target value
THCK-M
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Appropriate target value
THCK-C
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Appropriate target value
CCD
COPIER>DISPLAY>CCD
TARGET-B
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Appropriate target value
TARGET-G
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Appropriate target value
TARGET-R
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Appropriate target value
GAIN-OB
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Appropriate target value
GAIN-OG
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Appropriate target value
T-8-7
8-29
8-30
COPIER>DISPLAY>CCD
GAIN-OR
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Appropriate target value
GAIN-EB
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Appropriate target value
GAIN-EG
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Appropriate target value
GAIN-ER
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Appropriate target value
LAMP-BW
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Appropriate target value
Supplement/memo
COPIER>DISPLAY>CCD
LAMP-CL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Appropriate target value
Supplement/memo
LAMP2-BW
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Appropriate target value
Supplement/memo
LAMP2-CL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Appropriate target value
Supplement/memo
OFST-BW
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Appropriate target value
OFST-CL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Appropriate target value
OFST2-BW
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Appropriate target value
GAIN-BW1
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Appropriate target value
8-30
8-31
COPIER>DISPLAY>CCD
GAIN-BW2
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Appropriate target value
GAIN-BW3
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Appropriate target value
GAIN-BW4
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Appropriate target value
GAIN2BW1
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Appropriate target value
GAIN2BW2
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Appropriate target value
GAIN2BW3
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Appropriate target value
GAIN2BW4
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Appropriate target value
COPIER>DISPLAY>CCD
GAIN2-OR
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Appropriate target value
GAIN2-OG
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Appropriate target value
GAIN2-OB
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Appropriate target value
GAIN2-ER
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Appropriate target value
GAIN2-EG
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Appropriate target value
8-31
8-32
COPIER>DISPLAY>CCD
GAIN2-EB
Lv.2 Details
DPOT
COPIER>DISPLAY>DPOT
2TR-PPR
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Appropriate target value
2TR-BASE
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Appropriate target value
1TR-DC-Y
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Appropriate target value
1TR-DC-M
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Appropriate target value
1TR-DC-C
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Appropriate target value
1TR-DC-K
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Appropriate target value
8-32
8-33
COPIER>DISPLAY>DPOT
CHG-AC-Y
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Appropriate target value
CHG-AC-M
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Appropriate target value
CHG-AC-C
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Appropriate target value
CHG-AC-K
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Appropriate target value
LPWR-Y
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Appropriate target value
LPWR-M
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Appropriate target value
COPIER>DISPLAY>DPOT
LPWR-C
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Appropriate target value
LPWR-K
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Appropriate target value
PVCONT-Y
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Appropriate target value
PVCONT-M
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Appropriate target value
8-33
8-34
COPIER>DISPLAY>DPOT
PVCONT-C
Lv.2 Details
COPIER>DISPLAY>DPOT
LPGAIN-Y
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Appropriate target value
Related service mode
LPGAIN-M
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Appropriate target value
Related service mode
LPGAIN-C
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Appropriate target value
Related service mode
8-34
8
DENS
8-35
COPIER>DISPLAY>DENS
COPIER>DISPLAY>DENS
DENS-Y
Lv.1 Details
DENS-K
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Appropriate target value
Related service mode
DENS-S-Y
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Appropriate target value
DENS-S-M
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Appropriate target value
DENS-S-C
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Appropriate target value
DENS-S-K
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Appropriate target value
D-Y-TRGT
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Appropriate target value
D-M-TRGT
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Appropriate target value
8-35
8-36
COPIER>DISPLAY>DENS
D-C-TRGT
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Appropriate target value
REF-Y
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Appropriate target value
REF-M
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Appropriate target value
REF-C
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Appropriate target value
REF-K
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Appropriate target value
SGNL-Y
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Appropriate target value
Related service mode
SGNL-M
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Appropriate target value
Related service mode
COPIER>DISPLAY>DENS
SGNL-C
Lv.1 Details
8-36
8-37
COPIER>DISPLAY>DENS
DEV-DC-C
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Unit
DEV-DC-K
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Unit
CHG-DC-Y
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Appropriate target value
CHG-DC-M
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Appropriate target value
CHG-DC-C
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Appropriate target value
CHG-DC-K
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Appropriate target value
D-K-TRGT
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Appropriate target value
COPIER>DISPLAY>DENS
D-CRNT-P
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Appropriate target value
Supplement/memo
D-CRNT-S
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Appropriate target value
Supplement/memo
P-SENS-S
Lv.2 Details
8-37
8-38
COPIER>DISPLAY>DENS
DENS-C-H
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Appropriate target value
DS-S-Y-H
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Appropriate target value
DS-S-M-H
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Appropriate target value
DS-S-C-H
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Appropriate target value
COPIER>DISPLAY>DENS
DS-S-K-H
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Appropriate target value
P-LED-DA
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Related service mode
SPL-LG-Y
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Appropriate target value
SPL-LG-M
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Appropriate target value
SPL-LG-C
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Appropriate target value
8-38
8-39
COPIER>DISPLAY>DENS
DENS-K-H
Lv.2 Details
MISC
COPIER>DISPLAY>MISC
ENV-TR
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Appropriate target value
LPOWER-Y
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Appropriate target value
LPOWER-M
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Appropriate target value
LPOWER-C
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Appropriate target value
LPOWER-K
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Appropriate target value
ITB-POS
Lv.1 Details
Use case
8-39
8
HT-C
COPIER>DISPLAY>HT-C
COPIER>DISPLAY>HT-C
TGT-A-Y
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Appropriate target value
TGT-A-M
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Appropriate target value
Default value
TGT-A-C
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Appropriate target value
Default value
TGT-A-K
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Appropriate target value
Default value
TGT-B-Y
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Appropriate target value
Default value
8-40
TGT-B-M
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Appropriate target value
Default value
TGT-B-C
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Appropriate target value
Default value
TGT-B-K
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Appropriate target value
Default value
TGT-C-Y
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Appropriate target value
Default value
TGT-C-M
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Appropriate target value
Default value
8-40
8-41
COPIER>DISPLAY>HT-C
COPIER>DISPLAY>HT-C
TGT-C-C
Lv.2 Details
SUM-A-K
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Default value
SUM-B-Y
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Default value
SUM-B-M
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Default value
SUM-B-C
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Default value
SUM-B-K
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Default value
8-41
8-42
COPIER>DISPLAY>HT-C
SUM-C-Y
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Default value
SUM-C-M
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Default value
SUM-C-C
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Default value
SUM-C-K
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Default value
SGNL-A-Y
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Default value
COPIER>DISPLAY>HT-C
SGNL-A-M
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Default value
SGNL-A-C
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Default value
SGNL-A-K
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Default value
SGNL-B-Y
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Default value
SGNL-B-M
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Default value
SGNL-B-C
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Default value
8-42
8-43
COPIER>DISPLAY>HT-C
SGNL-B-K
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Default value
SGNL-C-Y
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Default value
SGNL-C-M
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Default value
SGNL-C-K
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Default value
SGNL-C-C
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Default value
DLTA-A-Y
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Default value
COPIER>DISPLAY>HT-C
DLTA-A-M
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Default value
DLTA-A-C
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Default value
DLTA-A-K
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Default value
DLTA-B-Y
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Default value
8-43
8-44
COPIER>DISPLAY>HT-C
DLTA-B-M
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Default value
DLTA-B-C
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Default value
DLTA-B-K
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Default value
DLTA-C-Y
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Default value
COPIER>DISPLAY>HT-C
DLTA-C-M
Lv.2 Details
8-44
8-45
COPIER>DISPLAY>HT-C
TGT-A-C2
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Appropriate target value
TGT-A-K2
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Appropriate target value
TGT-A-Y3
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Appropriate target value
TGT-A-M3
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Appropriate target value
TGT-A-C3
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Appropriate target value
TGT-A-K3
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Appropriate target value
TGT-B-Y3
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Appropriate target value
COPIER>DISPLAY>HT-C
TGT-B-M3
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Appropriate target value
TGT-B-C3
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Appropriate target value
TGT-B-K3
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Appropriate target value
TGT-B-Y2
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Appropriate target value
TGT-B-M2
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Appropriate target value
TGT-B-C2
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Appropriate target value
TGT-B-K2
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Appropriate target value
8-45
8-46
COPIER>DISPLAY>HT-C
TGT-C-Y2
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Appropriate target value
TGT-C-M2
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Appropriate target value
TGT-C-C2
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Appropriate target value
TGT-C-K2
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Appropriate target value
TGT-C-Y3
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Appropriate target value
TGT-C-M3
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Appropriate target value
TGT-C-C3
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Appropriate target value
COPIER>DISPLAY>HT-C
TGT-C-K3
Lv.2 Details
8-46
8-47
COPIER>DISPLAY>HT-C
SUM-B-Y2
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Default value
SUM-B-M2
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Default value
SUM-B-C2
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Default value
SUM-B-K2
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Default value
COPIER>DISPLAY>HT-C
SUM-C-Y2
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Default value
SUM-C-M2
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Default value
SUM-C-C2
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Default value
SUM-C-K2
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Default value
8-47
8-48
COPIER>DISPLAY>HT-C
DLT-A-Y2
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Default value
DLT-A-M2
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Default value
DLT-A-C2
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Default value
DLT-A-K2
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Default value
COPIER>DISPLAY>HT-C
DLT-B-Y2
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Default value
DLT-B-M2
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Default value
DLT-B-C2
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Default value
DLT-B-K2
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Default value
8-48
8-49
COPIER>DISPLAY>HT-C
DLT-C-Y2
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Default value
DLT-C-M2
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Default value
DLT-C-C2
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Default value
DLT-C-K2
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Default value
COPIER>DISPLAY>HT-C
SGL-A-Y2
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Default value
SGL-A-M2
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Default value
SGL-A-C2
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Default value
SGL-A-K2
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Default value
SGL-B-Y2
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Default value
8-49
8-50
COPIER>DISPLAY>HT-C
SGL-B-M2
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Default value
SGL-B-C2
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Default value
SGL-B-K2
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Default value
SGL-C-Y2
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Default value
SGL-C-M2
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Default value
COPIER>DISPLAY>HT-C
SGL-C-C2
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Default value
SGL-C-K2
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Default value
SUM-A-Y3
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Default value
SUM-A-M3
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Default value
SUM-A-C3
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Default value
8-50
8-51
COPIER>DISPLAY>HT-C
SUM-A-K3
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Default value
SUM-B-Y3
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Default value
SUM-B-M3
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Default value
SUM-B-C3
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Default value
SUM-B-K3
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Default value
COPIER>DISPLAY>HT-C
SUM-C-Y3
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Default value
SUM-C-M3
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Default value
SUM-C-C3
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Default value
SUM-C-K3
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Default value
DLT-A-Y3
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Default value
8-51
8-52
COPIER>DISPLAY>HT-C
DLT-A-M3
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Default value
DLT-A-C3
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Default value
DLT-A-K3
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Default value
DLT-B-Y3
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Default value
COPIER>DISPLAY>HT-C
DLT-B-M3
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Default value
DLT-B-C3
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Default value
DLT-B-K3
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Default value
DLT-C-Y3
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Default value
8-52
8-53
COPIER>DISPLAY>HT-C
DLT-C-M3
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Default value
DLT-C-C3
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Default value
DLT-C-K3
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Default value
SGL-A-Y3
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Default value
SGL-A-M3
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Default value
COPIER>DISPLAY>HT-C
SGL-A-C3
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Default value
SGL-A-K3
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Default value
SGL-B-Y3
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Default value
SGL-B-M3
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Default value
SGL-B-C3
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Default value
8-53
8-54
COPIER>DISPLAY>HT-C
SGL-B-K3
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Default value
SGL-C-Y3
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Default value
SGL-C-M3
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Default value
SGL-C-C3
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Default value
SGL-C-K3
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Default value
8-54
8-55
IO
Main Device (DCON > P004 to 029)
Address
bit
P004
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
P005
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
Mark
FM7
PS47
PS38
PS43
PS40
PS42
PS39
PS41
M28
M28
M28
SL5
SL6
SL4
bit
P006
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Remarks
0:connect
1:paper
1:paper
1:paper
1:paper
1:paper
1:paper
1:paper
0:CW1:CCW
[I1:I0]=(00)0.40A,(01)0.30A(
10)0.22A,(11)0.09A
1:ON
1:ON
1:ON
Address
P007
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
Mark
Remarks
SL7
FM10
FM1,FM2
1:ON
1:halfspeed
1:halfspeed
FM5,FM6
FM8
1:ON
1:fullspeed
FM8
1:halfspeed
FM10
1:fullspeed
M22
[I1:I0]=(00)0.88A,(01)0.62A(
10)0.51A,(11)0.09A
M22
M27
Shutter motor_I1
M27
M27
FM1,FM2
0:CW=OPEN,
1:CCW=CLOSE
[I1:I0]=(00)0.40A,(01)0.30A(
10)0.22A,(11)0.09A
1:fullspeed
8-55
8
Address
bit
P008
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
P009
3
2
1
0
Name
Mark
UN21
UN59
UN58
UN57
UN56
SW3,SW4
PS45
PS44
PS29
PS18
PS33
UN53
UN51
PS21
PS20
PS37
PS32
PS31
PS30
PS19
8-56
Remarks
1:bottle
0:new
0:new
0:new
0:new
1:DOOROPEN
0:full
0:full
1:HP
0:DOOROPEN
1:detect
1:detect
1:detect
0:DOOROPEN
0:DOOROPEN
1:paper
1:A4,K8,B4/B5,A4-R
0:LTR/LGL,EXE,LTR-R
1:HP
1:engage
0:DOOROPEN
Address
bit
P010
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
P011
0
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
Mark
FM9
FM9
M26
CL1
M16
M16
M17
M17
M19
Multi-purpose motor_I1
M19
M18
M18
M20
M20
Remarks
1:fullspeed
1:halfspeed
1:ON
1:ON
[I1:I0]=(00)1.01A,(01)0.79A(
10)0.51A,(11)0.09A
[I1:I0]=(00)1.01A,(01)0.79A(
10)0.51A,(11)0.09A
[I1:I0]=(00)1.10A,(01)0.84A(
10)0.62A,(11)0.09A
[I1:I0]=(00)1.10A,(01)0.84A(
10)0.62A,(11)0.09A
[I1:I0]=(00)1.10A,(01)0.84A(
10)0.62A,(11)0.09A
8-56
8
Address
bit
Name
P012
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P013
8-57
Mark
PS36
PS35
PS34
-
Remarks
1:paper
1:paper
1:paper
-
Address
bit
P014
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P015
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
Mark
Remarks
FM4
0:halfspeed
M21
M21
FM4
M23
0:CW1:CCW
-
M23
M25
M25
M24
M24
M24
-
0:OFF
1:OFF
0:fullspeed
[I1:I0]=(00)1.16A,(01)0.89A(
10)0.66A,(11)0.09A
[I1:I0]=(00)0.93A,(01)0.74A(
10)0.44A,(11)0.09A
[I1:I0]=(00)0.72A,(01)0.51A(
10)0.39A,(11)0.09A
0:CW1:CCW
-
8-57
8
Address
bit
Name
P016
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P017
Mark
SW2
SW2
SW2
SW2
SW1
SW1
SW1
SW1
SW4
SW4
SW4
SW4
SW3
SW3
SW3
SW3
PS2
PS4
PS5
PS8
PS3
PS6
PS7
PS9
PS1
-
8-58
Remarks
0:detect
0:detect
0:detect
0:detect
0:detect
0:detect
0:detect
0:detect
0:detect
0:detect
0:detect
0:detect
0:detect
0:detect
0:detect
0:detect
0:paper
0:paper
0:paper
1:paper
0:paper
0:paper
0:paper
1:paper
0:DOOROPEN
-
Address
bit
P018
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
P019
4
3
2
1
0
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
Mark
M1
M1
M2
M2
SL2
SL1
M1
M2
-
Remarks
(I1:I0)=(00)1.01A,(01)0.79A
(10)0.51A,(11)0.09A
(I1:I0)=(00)1.01A,(01)0.79A
(10)0.51A,(11)0.09A
1:ON
1:ON
Hi:CCW/Low:CW
Hi:CCW/Low:CW
-
8-58
8
Address
bit
Name
P020
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P021
8-59
Mark
SW6
SW6
SW6
SW6
SW7
SW7
SW7
SW7
SW8
SW8
SW8
SW8
SW9
SW9
SW9
SW9
PS49
PS51
PS52
PS55
PS50
PS53
PS54
PS56
-
Remarks
0:detect
0:detect
0:detect
0:detect
0:detect
0:detect
0:detect
0:detect
0:detect
0:detect
0:detect
0:detect
0:detect
0:detect
0:detect
0:detect
0:paper
0:paper
0:paper
1:paper
0:paper
0:paper
0:paper
1:paper
-
Address
bit
P022
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
P023
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
ITB steering sensor
ITB displacement sensor 1
ITB displacement sensor 2
ITB displacement sensor 3
ITB displacement sensor 4
Primary transfer detachment
sensor 1
Primary transfer detachment
sensor 2
Cassette 2 pickup solenoid
Cassette 1 pickup solenoid
-
Mark
Remarks
PS24
PS25
PS26
PS27
PS28
PS22
1:ON
1:ON
1:ON
1:ON
1:ON
0:engage
PS23
1:engage
SL3
SL2
-
1:ON
1:ON
-
8-59
8
Address
bit
Name
P024
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
P025
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
8-60
Mark
Remarks
Address
bit
Name
P026
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
M15
M14
M14
0:CW1:CCW
PS17
PS16
1:close
1:close
PS15
1:close
PS14
1:close
PS13
1:close
PS8
1:HP
PS7
PS6
PS5
TS4
TS3
TS2
TS1
-
1:HP
1:HP
1:HP
1:toner
1:toner
1:toner
1:toner
-
7
6
3
2
1
0
P027
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Mark
Remarks
[I1:I0]=(00)1.06A,(01)0.87A(
10)0.69A,(11)0.09A
M15
M15
0:CW1:CCW
M14
[I1:I0]=(00)0.74A,(01)0.66A(
10)0.24A,(11)0.09A
8-60
8
Address
bit
Name
P028
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
15
14
13
P029
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Mark
8-61
Remarks
SL2D
M2D
M2D
CL2D
SL1D
LE100D
M1D
SW2D
1:ON
1:ON
1:ON
1:ON
1:ON
1:ON
1:ON
1:lowerlimit
PS3D
PS4D
PS1D
PS9D
SW1D
PS7D
PS2D
PS6D
PS5D
-
1:upperlimit
1:ON
1:paper
1:CLOSE
0:CLOSE
1:paper
0:nopaper
1:paper
1:conect
-
Address
bit
P030
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
Baffer path delivery sensor
Baffer path open/close sensor
Baffer path entrance sensor
Mark
PS2
PS3
PS1-
Remarks
1:paper
1:paper
1:paper
T-8-13
8-61
8-62
bit
P001
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P002
Name
Original size sensor 1
-
Mark
CF1
-
Remarks
0:paper
-
Address
bit
P003
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
P004
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
Scanner unit cooling fan lock
Scanner unit exhaust fan lock
DADF open/closed sensor 2
DADF open/closed sensor 1
Original size sensor 2
Scanner motor_I0
Mark
FM2
FM1
SR3
SR1
CF2
M1
Remarks
1:error
1:error
0:OPEN1:CLOSE
0:OPEN1:CLOSE
0:paper
(I0:I1)=(0,0)100%(0,1)75
%(1,0)50%(1,1)25%
-
8-62
8
Address
bit
P005
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
Scanner motor_derection
Fan drive
Scanner motor
Scanner motor_I1
Mark
M1
FM2
M1
M1
8-63
Duplex Color Image Reader Unit-B1 (FEEDER > P001 to 007)
Remarks
0:scan1:backscan
1:ON
1:enable
-
Address
bit
P001
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
T-8-14
P002
2
1
0
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
Mark
SR6
SR13
SR9
SR7
SR8
FM2
FM3
SR12
SR2
SR3
SR1
SR10
Remarks
1:upperlimit
1:HP(lowerlimit)
0:OPEN
0:LGL(LTRR),A5R1:A4R(A5
),STMTR,B6
0:A4Randsmaller,
1:LargerthanA4R
0:error
0:error
1:HP
0:paper
0:paper
1:paper
0:OPEN
8-63
8
Address
bit
Name
P003
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P004
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
8-64
Mark
Remarks
SR17
SR18
SR19
SR20
SR15
1:paper
1:paper
1:paper
1:paper
1:HP
SR22
SR16
1:paper
1:HP
PCB2
0:paper
SR4
SR11
0:paper
0:HP
PCB3
PCB4
SR5
PCB5
0:paper
0:paper
1:paper
0:paper
Address
bit
P005
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
P006
3
2
1
0
Name
Disengagement motor 2
Disengagement motor 1
Tray lifter motor
stamp solenoid
Tray lifter motor_direction
Feed motor_direction
Read motor
Registration motor
Feed motor
Pickup motor_direction
Pickup roller unit lifter motor_
direction
Read motor cooling fan
Glass shift motor_direction
Glass shift motor
Mark
Remarks
M7
M6
M8
M8
M2
M4
M3
M2
M1
M10
1:enable
1:enable
1:enable
1:ON
0:down1:up
0:nouse1:CW
1:enable
1:enable
1:enable
0:nouse1:CW
0:nouse1:CW
FM2
M9
M9
1:ON
0:HP1:
1:enable
8-64
8
Address
bit
P007
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
Delivery motor_direction
Delivery motor
Scanner unit cooling fan
Pickup roller unit lifter motor
Mark
M5
M5
FM3
M10
8-65
Color Image Reader Unit-B2 (FEEDER > P001 to 006)
Remarks
0:CW1:CCW
1:enable
1:ON
1:enable
Address
bit
P001
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
T-8-15
P002
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
Mark
SR10
SR9
SR4
SR13
SR14
SR15
SR3
SR11
SR7
SR8
Remarks
0:A4R and smaller,1:Larger
than A4R
1:paper
1:paper
1:paper
1:paper
1:paper
1:paper
1:HP
1:paper
1:paper
8-65
8
Address
bit
P003
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P004
Name
Document set sensor
Cover open/closed sensor
Document width sensor1
-
8-66
Mark
SR5
SR6
SR12
-
Remarks
0:papeer
1:OPEN
1:paper
-
Address
bit
P005
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
P006
2
1
0
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
Mark
Fan
Pickup clutch
Registration clutch
release motor_I0
FM1
CL2
CL1
M2
release motor_I1
M2
release motor
Stamp solenoid
ADF motor_I0
M2
SL2
M1
ADF motor_I1
M1
ADF motor
ADF motor_direction
-
M1
M1
-
Remarks
1:ON
1:ON
1:ON
(I0:I1)Ampere
large(0,0)->(0,1)->(1,0)->
(I0:I1)Ampere
large(0,0)->(0,1)->(1,0)->
1:enable
1:ON
(I0:I1)Ampere
large(0,0)->(0,1)->(1,0)->
(I0:I1)Ampere
large(0,0)->(0,1)->(1,0)->
1:enable
0:separate 1:pickup
T-8-16
8-66
8-67
bit
P001
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P002
Name
Entrance sensor
Gripper unit HP sensor
Gripper unit move motor_CW
Paper lever drive solenoid
Shift motor
shift roller release motor
stopper motor
Gripper open/close motor
Mark
S1
S7
M2
SOL1
M4
M5
M6
M7
Remarks
0:ON1:OFF
0:ON1:OFF
0:CW1:CCW
0:OFF1:ON
0:OFF1:ON
0:OFF1:ON
0:OFF1:ON
0:OFF1:ON
Address
bit
P003
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P004
Name
Feed motor_CW
Feed motor_clock
STPmove motor_clock
STPmove motor_PWM
Feed motor_PWM
Gripper unit move motor_PWM
Additional tray clock sensor
stack tray clock sensor
stapler move HP sensor
stapler HP sensor
Mark
M3
M3
M1
M1
M3
M2
S23
S14
S10
S18
Remarks
0:CW1:CCW
1:output
1:output
0:OFF1:ON
0:OFF1:ON
0:OFF1:ON
0:ON1:OFF
0:ON1:OFF
0:ON1:OFF
0:ON1:OFF
8-67
8
Address
bit
Name
P005
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
P006
4
3
2
1
0
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
8-68
Mark
Remarks
S5
0:ON1:OFF
S3
S2
S21
0:ON1:OFF
0:ON1:OFF
0:OFF1:ON
Address
bit
P007
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P008
Name
Additional tray paper sensor
-
Mark
S22
-
Remarks
0:ON1:OFF
-
8-68
8
Address
bit
P009
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P010
Name
stack tray paper sensor
stack tray middle sensor
-
Mark
S15
S16
-
8-69
Remarks
0:nopaper1:paper
1:mid/lowlevel
-
Address
bit
Name
P011
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P012
Mark
S6
SW2
M9
M8
S12
S11
S19
S20
S9
SW1
Remarks
0:nopaper1:paper
0:OFF1:ON
0:OFF1:ON
0:OFF1:ON
0:OFF1:ON
0:OFF1:ON
0:OFF1:ON
0:ON1:OFF
0:OFF1:ON
0:OFF1:ON
8-69
8
Address
bit
P013
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P014
Name
stapler motor
Tray lift motor
-
Mark
M10
M11
-
8-70
Staple Finisher-C1/Booklet Finisher-C1(SORTER>P001, P007
Remarks
0::ENABLE1:DISABLE
0::ENABLE1:DISABLE
-
to P031)
bit
P001
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P007
T-8-17
Address
Name
Tray 2 paper surface sensor 2
Front cover sensor
Tray 1 shift motor_lock
Front cover sensor
Mark
PI120
PI102
M107
PI102
Remarks
0:paper1:nopaper
0:CLOSE1:OPEN
0:OFF1:lock
0:CLOSE1:OPEN
8-70
8
Address
bit
Name
P008
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Inlet sensor
Swing guide home position sensor
Tray 1 paper surface sensor
Tray 2 shift motor_lock
Tray 1 paper sensor
P009
Mark
PI103
PI105
PI111
M108
PI112
8-71
Remarks
0:paper1:nopaper
1:HP
0:paper1:nopaper
0:OFF1:lock
0:paper1:nopaper
Address
bit
P010
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P011
Name
-
Mark
-
Remarks
-
8-71
8-72
Address
bit
Name
P012
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
PI123
PI117
PI101
PI109
0:CLOSE1:OPEN
0:HP
0:CLOSE1:OPEN
0:HP
PI108
PI107
0:paper1:nopaper
0:HP
PI106
0:HP
M108
M108
SL101
M101
0:OFF1:ON
0:CW1:CCW
0:OFF1:ON
[P013>1:P013>0][0:0]:Low,
[0:1]:MID,[1:0]:High,[1:1]:M
ax
M101
4
3
2
1
P013
0
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Mark
Remarks
Address
bit
P014
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
P015
2
1
0
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
Mark
M107
M107
M107
M109
M109
M109
M109
M105
M102
M106
M106
Remarks
0:standby1:enable
0:CW1:CCW
0:OFF1:ON
0:standby1:enable
[P014>3:P014>2][0:0]:Low,
[0:1]:MID,[1:0]:High,[1:1]:M
ax
0:CW1:CCW
0:standby1:enable
0:CW1:CCW
0:High1:Low
0:CW1:CCW
8-72
8
Address
bit
Name
P016
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
P017
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Mark
8-73
Remarks
M104
M104
M103
M103
PI115
0:CW1:CCW
0:High1:Low
0:High1:Low
0:CW1:CCW
0:paper1:nopaper
PI114
PI113
PI110
PI116
-
0:paper1:nopaper
0:HP
0:HP
0:Interference
-
Address
bit
P018
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
P019
0
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
Mark
Remarks
M105
SL102
CL101
CL102
SL104
SL103
0:CCW1:CW
0:OFF1:ON
0:OFF1:ON
0:OFF1:ON
0:OFF1:ON
0:OFF1:ON
M105
[P018>1:P018>0][0:0]:Low,
[0:1]:MID,[1:0]:High,[1:1]:M
ax
M105
PI104
SW5
SW7
-
0:paper1:nopaper
1:HP
1:HP
-
8-73
8
Address
bit
Name
P020
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
P021
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
8-74
Mark
Remarks
PI5
1:HP
PI17
PI15
0:nopaper1:paper
0:edge
PI14
1:HP
Address
bit
P022
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P023
Name
Feed motor_CW
-
Mark
M1
-
Remarks
0:CCW1:CW
-
8-74
8
Address
bit
Name
P024
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P025
Mark
SL2
SL1
SL5
PI21
M1
-
8-75
Remarks
0:OFF1:ON
0:OFF1:ON
0:OFF1:ON
0:OFF1:ON
0:ON1:OFF
-
Address
bit
P026
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
P027
2
1
0
Name
Stitcher motor (rear)_CW
Staple sensor (rear)
Feed plate contact solenoid
Paper folding motor_RV
Paper positioning
plate paper sensor
Paper positioning plate home
position sensor
Tray paper sensor
Mark
Remarks
M6
SW4
SL4
M2
PI8
0:ON1:OFF
0:OFF1:ON
0:OFF1:ON
0:OFF1:ON
0:paper1:nopaper
PI7
0:HP
PI6
0:paper1:nopaper
8-75
8
Address
bit
P028
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P029
Name
Paper pushing plate motor_EN
Paper pushing plate motor_FWM
Paper pushing plate motor_RV
Paper folding motor_FWD
Stitcher motor (rear)_CCW
Stitcher motor (front)_CW
Stitcher motor (front)_CCW
Staple sensor (front)
-
Mark
M8
M8
M8
M2
M6
M7
M7
SW6
-
8-76
Remarks
0:ON1:OFF
0:OFF1:ON
0:OFF1:ON
0:OFF1:ON
0:ON1:OFF
0:ON1:OFF
0:ON1:OFF
1:enable
-
Address
bit
P030
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P031
Name
Saddle inlet sensor
Guide home position sensor
Crescent roller phase sensor
Delivery sensor
Inlet cover sensor
-
Mark
PI22
PI13
PI12
PI11
PI9
-
Remarks
0:nopaper1:paper
1:HP
1:HP
0:paper1:nopaper
0:CLOSE1:OPEN
T-8-18
8-76
8-77
bit
P013
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
P032
2
1
0
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
Mark
M63
M63
M63
PI63
-
bit
P033
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Remarks
0:standby1:enable
[P013>3:P013>2][0:0]=Low
,[0:1]=MID,[1:0]=High,[1:1]=
Max
0:HP
-
Address
P034
Name
Punch motor_CW
Punch motor_CCW
LED PCB (Rear edge direction)
Horizontal registration HP sensor
-
Mark
M61
M61
PCB3
PI61
-
Remarks
0:ON
0:ON
0:nopaper1:paper
1:HP
-
8-77
8
Address
bit
P035
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P036
Name
Side registration motor_ampere
Side registration motor_B
Side registration motor_A
-
Mark
M62
M62
M62
-
8-78
Remarks
0:active1:keep
1:ON
1:ON
-
Address
bit
P039
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Name
Side registration sensor1
Scrap full detector PCB
Upper door switch
Front door switch
Side registration sensor2
Side registration sensor3
Side registration sensor4
-
Mark
PCB2
PCB4
MSW61
MSW62
PCB2
PCB3
PCB3
-
Remarks
0:paper
0:paper
0:OPEN1:CLOSE
0:OPEN1:CLOSE
0:paper
0:paper
0:paper
T-8-19
8-78
8
ADJUST
8-79
COPIER>ADJUST>ADJ-XY
ADJ-Y-DF
Lv.1 Details
ADJ-XY
COPIER>ADJUST>ADJ-XY
ADJ-X
Lv.1 Details
8-79
8-80
COPIER>ADJUST>ADJ-XY
ADJY-DF2
Lv.1 Details
CCD
COPIER>ADJUST>CCD
W-PLT-X
Lv.1 Details
8-80
8-81
COPIER>ADJUST>CCD
COPIER>ADJUST>CCD
SH-TRGT
Lv.1 Details
Use case
DFTAR-R
Lv.1 Details
8-81
8-82
COPIER>ADJUST>CCD
MTF2-M1
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
Related service mode
MTF2-M2
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
Related service mode
MTF2-M3
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
Related service mode
MTF2-M4
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
Related service mode
MTF2-M5
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
Related service mode
COPIER>ADJUST>CCD
MTF2-M6
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
Related service mode
MTF2-M7
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
Related service mode
MTF2-M8
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
Related service mode
MTF2-M9
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
Related service mode
MTF2-S1
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
Related service mode
8-82
8-83
COPIER>ADJUST>CCD
MTF2-S2
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
Related service mode
MTF2-S3
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
Related service mode
MTF2-S4
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
Related service mode
MTF2-S5
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
Related service mode
MTF2-S6
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
Related service mode
COPIER>ADJUST>CCD
MTF2-S7
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
Related service mode
MTF2-S8
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
Related service mode
MTF2-S9
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
Related service mode
100DF2GB
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Default value
8-83
8-84
COPIER>ADJUST>CCD
100DF2RG
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Default value
DFCH2R2
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
DFCH2R10
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
DFCH2B2
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
COPIER>ADJUST>CCD
DFCH2B10
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
DFCH2G2
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
DFCH2G10
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
CCD-CHNG
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
Related service mode
8-84
8-85
COPIER>ADJUST>CCD
MTF-M1
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
Related service mode
MTF-M2
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
Related service mode
MTF-M3
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
Related service mode
MTF-M4
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
Related service mode
MTF-M5
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
Related service mode
COPIER>ADJUST>CCD
MTF-M6
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
Related service mode
MTF-M7
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
Related service mode
MTF-M8
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
Related service mode
MTF-M9
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
Related service mode
MTF-S1
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
Related service mode
8-85
8-86
COPIER>ADJUST>CCD
MTF-S2
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
Related service mode
MTF-S3
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
Related service mode
MTF-S4
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
Related service mode
MTF-S5
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
Related service mode
MTF-S6
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
Related service mode
COPIER>ADJUST>CCD
MTF-S7
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
Related service mode
MTF-S8
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
Related service mode
MTF-S9
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
Related service mode
DFCH-R2
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
Related service mode
8-86
8-87
COPIER>ADJUST>CCD
COPIER>ADJUST>CCD
DFCH-R10
Lv.1 Details
DFCH-G2
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
Related service mode
DFCH-G10
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
Related service mode
MTF2-M10
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
Related service mode
MTF2-M11
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
Related service mode
8-87
8-88
COPIER>ADJUST>CCD
MTF2-M12
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
Related service mode
MTF2-S10
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
Related service mode
MTF2-S11
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
Related service mode
MTF2-S12
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
Related service mode
MTF-M10
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
Related service mode
COPIER>ADJUST>CCD
MTF-M11
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
Related service mode
MTF-M12
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
Related service mode
MTF-S10
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
Related service mode
MTF-S11
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
Related service mode
MTF-S12
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
Related service mode
8-88
8-89
COPIER>ADJUST>CCD
DFCH2K2
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
DFCH2K10
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
DFCH-K2
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
Related service mode
DFCH-K10
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
Related service mode
COPIER>ADJUST>CCD
DFTAR-BW
Lv.1 Details
8-89
8-90
COPIER>ADJUST>CCD
DFTBK-R
Lv.1 Details
IMG-REG
COPIER>ADJUST>IMG-REG
REG-H-Y
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Default value
REG-H-C
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Default value
REG-H-K
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Default value
REG-HS-Y
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Default value
8-90
8-91
COPIER>ADJUST>IMG-REG
REG-HS-C
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Default value
REG-HS-K
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Default value
REG-V-Y
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Default value
REG-V-C
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Default value
COPIER>ADJUST>IMG-REG
REG-V-K
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Default value
REG-H-M
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Default value
REG-V-M
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Default value
REG-HS-M
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Default value
8-91
8-92
COPIER>ADJUST>IMG-REG
MAG-H
Lv.1 Details
8-92
8
DENS
COPIER>ADJUST>DENS
COPIER>ADJUST>DENS
SGNL-Y
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Appropriate target value
Default value
SGNL-M
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Appropriate target value
Default value
SGNL-C
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Appropriate target value
Default value
REF-Y
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
Default value
8-93
REF-M
Lv.1 Details
8-93
8-94
COPIER>ADJUST>DENS
COPIER>ADJUST>DENS
SIGG-C
Lv.1 Details
T-SPLY-M
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Default value
T-SPLY-C
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Default value
T-SPLY-K
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Default value
DMAX-Y
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
Default value
8-94
8-95
COPIER>ADJUST>DENS
COPIER>ADJUST>DENS
DMAX-M
Lv.2 Details
P-TG-M
Lv.2 Details
8-95
8-96
COPIER>ADJUST>DENS
P-TG-K
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
Default value
Related user mode
DMAX-K
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
Default value
P-ALPHA
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Appropriate target value
Related service mode
Supplement/memo
COPIER>ADJUST>DENS
REF-K
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
Default value
DMLMT-HY
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Related user mode
DMLMT-HM
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Related user mode
DMLMT-HC
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Related user mode
8-96
8-97
COPIER>ADJUST>DENS
DMLMT-HK
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Related user mode
DMLMT-LY
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Related user mode
DMLMT-LM
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Related user mode
DMLMT-LC
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Related user mode
COPIER>ADJUST>DENS
DMLMT-LK
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Related user mode
CONT-Y
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Appropriate target value
Related service mode
CONT-M
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Appropriate target value
Related service mode
8-97
8-98
COPIER>ADJUST>DENS
CONT-C
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Appropriate target value
Related service mode
CONT-K
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Appropriate target value
Related service mode
BLANK
COPIER>ADJUST>BLANK
BLANK-T
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Default value
BLANK-L
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Default value
BLANK-R
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Default value
BLANK-B
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Default value
8-98
8
V-CONT
8-99
COPIER>ADJUST>V-CONT
COPIER>ADJUST>V-CONT
VCONT-Y
Lv.2 Details
VCONT-M
Lv.2 Details
8-99
8-100
COPIER>ADJUST>V-CONT
VCONT-C
Lv.2 Details
COPIER>ADJUST>V-CONT
VCONT-K
Lv.2 Details
8-100
8-101
COPIER>ADJUST>V-CONT
VBACK-Y
Lv.2 Details
COPIER>ADJUST>V-CONT
VBACK-M
Lv.2 Details
8-101
8-102
COPIER>ADJUST>V-CONT
VBACK-C
Lv.2 Details
COPIER>ADJUST>V-CONT
VBACK-K
Lv.2 Details
8-102
8-103
COPIER>ADJUST>V-CONT
PT-VCT-M
Lv.2 Details
COPIER>ADJUST>V-CONT
PT-VCT-K
Lv.2 Details
8-103
8
PASCAL
8-104
COPIER>ADJUST>PASCAL
COPIER>ADJUST>PASCAL
OFST-P-Y
Lv.1 Details
OFST-P-K
Lv.1 Details
8-104
8
COLOR
8-105
COPIER>ADJUST>COLOR
COPIER>ADJUST>COLOR
ADJ-Y
Lv.1 Details
ADJ-K
Lv.1 Details
8-105
8-106
COPIER>ADJUST>COLOR
OFST-M
Lv.1 Details
COPIER>ADJUST>COLOR
OFST-K
Lv.1 Details
8-106
8-107
COPIER>ADJUST>COLOR
LD-OFS-C
Lv.2 Details
COPIER>ADJUST>COLOR
MD-OFS-M
Lv.2 Details
8-107
8-108
COPIER>ADJUST>COLOR
HD-OFS-Y
Lv.2 Details
COPIER>ADJUST>COLOR
HD-OFS-K
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
Related user mode
PL-OFS-Y
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
PL-OFS-M
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
PL-OFS-C
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
8-108
8-109
COPIER>ADJUST>COLOR
PL-OFS-K
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
PM-OFS-Y
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
PM-OFS-M
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
PM-OFS-C
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
COPIER>ADJUST>COLOR
PM-OFS-K
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
PH-OFS-Y
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
PH-OFS-M
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
PH-OFS-C
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
8-109
8-110
COPIER>ADJUST>COLOR
PH-OFS-K
Lv.2 Details
HV-PRI
COPIER>ADJUST>HV-PRI
DIS-TGY
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Appropriate target value
Default value
DIS-TGM
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Appropriate target value
Default value
DIS-TGC
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Appropriate target value
Default value
8-110
8-111
COPIER>ADJUST>HV-PRI
DIS-TGK
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Appropriate target value
Default value
DIS-TGY2
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Appropriate target value
Default value
DIS-TGM2
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Appropriate target value
Default value
COPIER>ADJUST>HV-PRI
DIS-TGC2
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Appropriate target value
Default value
DIS-TGK2
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Appropriate target value
Default value
OFSTAC-Y
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Appropriate target value
Default value
Required time
Related service mode
8-111
8-112
COPIER>ADJUST>HV-PRI
OFSTAC-M
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Appropriate target value
Default value
Required time
Related service mode
OFSTAC-C
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Appropriate target value
Default value
Required time
Related service mode
COPIER>ADJUST>HV-PRI
OFSTAC-K
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Appropriate target value
Default value
Required time
Related service mode
OFSTACY2
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Appropriate target value
Default value
Related service mode
OFSTACM2
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Appropriate target value
Default value
Related service mode
8-112
8-113
COPIER>ADJUST>HV-PRI
OFSTACC2
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Appropriate target value
Default value
Related service mode
OFSTACK2
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Appropriate target value
Default value
Related service mode
8-113
8
HV-TR
COPIER>ADJUST>HV-TR
COPIER>ADJUST>HV-TR
1TR-TGY
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Appropriate target value
Default value
1TR-TGM
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Appropriate target value
Default value
1TR-TGC
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Appropriate target value
Default value
8-114
1TR-TGK1
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Appropriate target value
Default value
2TR-N1
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Appropriate target value
Default value
2TR-N2
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Appropriate target value
Default value
8-114
8-115
COPIER>ADJUST>HV-TR
2TR-P1
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Appropriate target value
Default value
2TR-P2
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Appropriate target value
Default value
2TR-H1
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Appropriate target value
Default value
2TR-H2
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Appropriate target value
Default value
COPIER>ADJUST>HV-TR
2TR-UH1
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Appropriate target value
Default value
2TR-UH2
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Appropriate target value
Default value
2TR-N12
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Appropriate target value
Default value
2TR-N22
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Appropriate target value
Default value
8-115
8-116
COPIER>ADJUST>HV-TR
2TR-H12
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Appropriate target value
Default value
2TR-H22
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Appropriate target value
Default value
2TR-UH12
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Appropriate target value
Default value
2TR-UH22
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Appropriate target value
Default value
COPIER>ADJUST>HV-TR
2TR-P12
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Appropriate target value
Default value
2TR-P22
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Appropriate target value
Default value
2TR-N13
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Appropriate target value
Default value
8-116
8-117
COPIER>ADJUST>HV-TR
2TR-N23
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Appropriate target value
Default value
2TR-H13
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Appropriate target value
Default value
2TR-H23
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Appropriate target value
Default value
2TR-UH13
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Appropriate target value
Default value
COPIER>ADJUST>HV-TR
2TR-UH23
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Appropriate target value
Default value
2TR-P13
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Appropriate target value
Default value
2TR-P23
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Appropriate target value
Default value
2TR-O1
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Appropriate target value
Default value
8-117
8-118
COPIER>ADJUST>HV-TR
2TR-O12
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Appropriate target value
Default value
2TR-O13
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Appropriate target value
Default value
2TR-HN2
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Appropriate target value
Default value
Related service mode
COPIER>ADJUST>HV-TR
1TR-TGKT
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Appropriate target value
Default value
Related service mode
2TR-T1
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Appropriate target value
Default value
Related service mode
8-118
8-119
COPIER>ADJUST>HV-TR
2TR-T2
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Appropriate target value
Default value
Related service mode
2TR-T12
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Appropriate target value
Default value
Related service mode
COPIER>ADJUST>HV-TR
2TR-T22
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Appropriate target value
Default value
Related service mode
2TR-T13
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Appropriate target value
Default value
Related service mode
8-119
8-120
COPIER>ADJUST>HV-TR
2TR-T23
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Appropriate target value
Default value
Related service mode
2TR-R1
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Appropriate target value
Default value
Related service mode
COPIER>ADJUST>HV-TR
2TR-R2
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Appropriate target value
Default value
Related service mode
2TR-R12
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Appropriate target value
Default value
Related service mode
2TR-R22
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Appropriate target value
Default value
Related service mode
8-120
8-121
COPIER>ADJUST>HV-TR
2TR-R13
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Appropriate target value
Default value
Related service mode
2TR-R23
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Appropriate target value
Default value
Related service mode
2TR-HN1
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Appropriate target value
Default value
Related service mode
COPIER>ADJUST>HV-TR
2TR-HN12
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Appropriate target value
Default value
Related service mode
2TR-HN22
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Appropriate target value
Default value
Related service mode
8-121
8-122
COPIER>ADJUST>HV-TR
2TR-HN13
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Appropriate target value
Default value
Related service mode
2TR-HN23
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Appropriate target value
Default value
Related service mode
COPIER>ADJUST>HV-TR
2TR-SH1
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Appropriate target value
Default value
Related service mode
2TR-SH2
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Appropriate target value
Default value
Related service mode
2TR-SH12
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Appropriate target value
Default value
Related service mode
8-122
8-123
COPIER>ADJUST>HV-TR
2TR-SH22
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Appropriate target value
Default value
Related service mode
2TR-SH13
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Appropriate target value
Default value
Related service mode
2TR-E1
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Appropriate target value
Default value
Related service mode
COPIER>ADJUST>HV-TR
2TR-E2
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Appropriate target value
Default value
Related service mode
2TR-E12
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Appropriate target value
Default value
Related service mode
2TR-E22
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Appropriate target value
Default value
Related service mode
8-123
8-124
COPIER>ADJUST>HV-TR
2TR-E13
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Appropriate target value
Default value
Related service mode
2TR-E23
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Appropriate target value
Default value
Related service mode
2TR-SH23
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Appropriate target value
Default value
Related service mode
COPIER>ADJUST>HV-TR
2TR-OFF
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Appropriate target value
Default value
Related service mode
1TR-TGY2
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
1TR-TGM2
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
8-124
8-125
COPIER>ADJUST>HV-TR
COPIER>ADJUST>HV-TR
1TR-TGC2
Lv.2 Details
1TR-TGM3
Lv.2 Details
8-125
8-126
COPIER>ADJUST>HV-TR
1TR-TK42
Lv.2 Details
FEED-ADJ
COPIER>ADJUST>FEED-ADJ
REGIST
Lv.1 Details
8-126
8-127
COPIER>ADJUST>FEED-ADJ
ADJ-C2
Lv.1 Details
COPIER>ADJUST>FEED-ADJ
ADJ-C4
Lv.1 Details
8-127
8-128
COPIER>ADJUST>FEED-ADJ
ADJ-DK
Lv.1 Details
COPIER>ADJUST>FEED-ADJ
ADJ-C3RE
Lv.1 Details
8-128
8-129
COPIER>ADJUST>FEED-ADJ
ADJ-MFRE
Lv.1 Details
COPIER>ADJUST>FEED-ADJ
REG-DUP1
Lv.1 Details
8-129
8-130
COPIER>ADJUST>FEED-ADJ
LP-MULT1
Lv.1 Details
COPIER>ADJUST>FEED-ADJ
TBLT-SPD
Lv.1 Details
8-130
8-131
CST-ADJ
MISC
COPIER>ADJUST>CST-ADJ
COPIER>ADJUST>MISC
MF-A4R
Lv.1 Details
SEG-ADJ
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
Default value
K-ADJ
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
ACS-ADJ
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
ACS-EN
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
T-8-31
8-131
8-132
COPIER>ADJUST>MISC
ACS-CNT
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
ACS-EN2
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
ACS-CNT2
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
REOS-PG
Lv.2 Details
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
Related service mode
COPIER>ADJUST>MISC
SEG-ADJ3
Lv.1 Details
8-132
8-133
COPIER>ADJUST>MISC
ACS-EN3
Lv.2 Details
COPIER>ADJUST>MISC
Use case
When adjusting the judgment area in ACS mode (back side at duplex
reading with 1 path)
Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and
press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/adj/set range
-2 to 2
Default value
1
ACS-CNT3
ACS mode jdgmt pixel count area: back
Lv.2 Details
To set the area which counts the pixel to judge the color presence in
ACS mode (back side at duplex reading with 1 path).
As the greater value is set, the judgment area is widen.
Use case
When adjusting the area which counts the pixel to judge the color
presence in ACS mode (back side at duplex reading with 1 path)
Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and
press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/adj/set range
-2 to 2
Default value
0
SH-ADJ
Adjustment of sharpness
Lv.1 Details
To adjust the sharpness of the following images which are set in the
user mode:
- Image to be read in the copyboard reading mode
- Image on the first side of a document to be read in the reversepath duplex stream reading mode
- Image on the first side of a document to be read in the 1-path
duplex stream reading mode
As the greater value is set, the image gets sharper.
If the value is too large, moire is likely to occur in an output image of
COPY and SEND.
To match the image quality with that of the second side in the 1-path
duplex stream reading mode, decrease the value when moire on the
first side is stronger than the second side and increase the value
when it is weaker.
Use case
When moire frequently occurs on images of COPY and SEND output
Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value (switch negative/positive by -/+ key) and
press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/adj/set range
-3 to 3
Default value
0
Related service mode
COPIER> ADJUST> MISC> SH-ADJ2
Related user mode
Settings/Registration> Adjustment/Maintenance> Adjust Image
Quality> Sharpness
SH-ADJ2
Lv.1 Details
8-133
8
EXP-LED
COPIER>ADJUST>EXP-LED
COPIER>ADJUST>EXP-LED
PR-EXP-Y
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Appropriate target value
Default value
PR-EXP-M
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Appropriate target value
Default value
PR-EXP-C
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Appropriate target value
Default value
8-134
PR-EXP-K
Lv.2 Details
8-134
8
FUNCTION
COPIER>FUNCTION>INSTALL
STIR-4
Lv.1 Details
INSTALL
COPIER>FUNCTION>INSTALL
STIR-Y
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Required time
Related service mode
STIR-M
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Required time
Related service mode
STIR-C
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Required time
Related service mode
STIR-K
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Required time
Related service mode
8-135
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Required time
Related service mode
INIT-Y
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Related service mode
INIT-M
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Related service mode
INIT-C
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Related service mode
8-135
8-136
COPIER>FUNCTION>INSTALL
INIT-K
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Related service mode
STRD-POS
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
Required time
Related service mode
CARD
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
Default value
Related service mode
KEY
Lv.1 Details
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
COPIER>FUNCTION>INSTALL
INISET-Y
Lv.1 Details
8-136
8-137
COPIER>FUNCTION>INSTALL
INISET-M
Lv.1 Details
COPIER>FUNCTION>INSTALL
INISET-C
Lv.1 Details
8-137
8-138
COPIER>FUNCTION>INSTALL
E-RDS
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
COPIER>FUNCTION>INSTALL
COM-LOG
Lv.1 Details
8-138
8-139
COPIER>FUNCTION>INSTALL
CNT-INTV
Lv.1 Details
COPIER>FUNCTION>INSTALL
INISET-K
Lv.1 Details
8-139
8-140
COPIER>FUNCTION>INSTALL
CDS-CTL
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Default value
Related service mode
Supplement/memo
CCD
COPIER>FUNCTION>CCD
DF-WLVL1
Lv.1 Details
8-140
8-141
COPIER>FUNCTION>CCD
DF-LNR
Lv.1 Details
Use case
When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the value of the readers service label. (under COPIER>
ADJUST> CCD)
DFCH-R2, DFCH-G2, DFCH-B2, DFCH-K2,
DFCH-R10, DFCH-G10, DFCH-B10, DFCH-K10,
DFCH2R2, DFCH2G2, DFCH2B2, DFCH2K2,
DFCH2R10, DFCH2G10, DFCH2B10, DFCH2K10
2) Select the item, and then press OK key.
Display/adj/set range
During operation: ACTIVE, When operation finished normally: OK!
Related service mode
COPIER> ADJUST> CCD> DFCH-R2, DFCH-G2, DFCH-B2,
DFCH-K2, DFCH-R10, DFCH-G10, DFCH-B10, DFCH-K10,
DFCH2R2, DFCH2G2, DFCH2B2, DFCH2K2, DFCH2R10,
DFCH2G10, DFCH2B10, DFCH2K10
MTF-CLC
Deriving of MTF filter coefficient
Lv.1 Details
To derive the MTF filter coefficient to be set for ASIC based on the
MTF value of the DADF complex chart.
Use case
When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
Display/adj/set range
During operation: ACTIVE, When operation finished normally: OK!
Related service mode
COPIER> ADJUST> CCD> MTF-M1 to M12, MTF-S1 to S12,
MTF2-M1 to M12, MTF2-S1 to S12
Supplement/memo
The scanning data of the DADF complex chart is indicated in the
label of the Scanner Unit (DADF/Reader).
DF-WLVL3
White level adj in book mode (B&W)
Lv.1 Details
To adjust the white level for copyboard scanning automatically by
setting the paper which is usually used by the user on the Copyboard
Glass.
Use case
- When replacing the Copyboard Glass
- When replacing the Scanner Unit
- When replacing the Reader Controller PCB/clearing RAM data
Adj/set/operate method 1) Set paper on the Copyboard Glass.
2) Select the item, and then press OK key.
Caution
Be sure to execute DF-WLVL4 in a row.
Display/adj/set range
During operation: ACTIVE, When operation finished normally: OK!
Related service mode
COPIER> ADJUST> CCD> DFTBK-BW
COPIER>FUNCTION>CCD
DF-WLVL4
Lv.1 Details
8-141
8
LASER
8-142
COPIER>FUNCTION>LASER
COPIER>FUNCTION>LASER
LD-ADJ-Y
Lv.2 Details
LD-ADJ-K
Lv.2 Details
8-142
8
DPC
8-143
COPIER>FUNCTION>DPC
COPIER>FUNCTION>DPC
DRMRSETY
Lv.1 Details
DRMRSETM
Lv.1 Details
8-143
8-144
COPIER>FUNCTION>DPC
DRMRSETC
Lv.1 Details
COPIER>FUNCTION>DPC
DRMRSETK
Lv.1 Details
8-144
8-145
CST
CLEANING
COPIER>FUNCTION>CST
COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEANING
MF-A4R
Lv.1 Details
DEVL-CLN
Lv.1 Details
8-145
8-146
FIXING
COPIER>FUNCTION>FIXING
NIP-CHK
Lv.1 Details
8-146
8-147
PANEL
PART-CHK
COPIER>FUNCTION>PANEL
LCD-CHK
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
LED-CHK
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
TOUCHCHK
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
COPIER>FUNCTION>PART-CHK
CL
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
8-147
8-148
COPIER>FUNCTION>PART-CHK
FAN-ON
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Required time
Related service mode
COPIER>FUNCTION>PART-CHK
MTR
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
Default value
Related service mode
8-148
8-149
COPIER>FUNCTION>PART-CHK
MTR-ON
Lv.1 Details
CLEAR
COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR
ERR
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
DC-CON
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
8-149
8-150
COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR
ADRS-BK
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
CNT-MCON
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Related service mode
Supplement/memo
CNT-DCON
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
OPTION
Lv.1 Details
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR
MN-CON
Lv.1 Details
8-150
8-151
COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR
CA-KEY
Lv.2 Details
COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR
KEY-CLR
Lv.2 Details
8-151
8-152
COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR
1TR-CLR
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Related service mode
2TR-CLR
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Related service mode
JV-CACHE
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
FXTX-CLR
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR
LANG-CLR
Lv.2 Details
8-152
8
MISC-R
8-153
COPIER>FUNCTION>MISC-R
COPIER>FUNCTION>MISC-R
SCANLAMP
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Required time
1PSCLB-A
Lv.1 Details
1PCLBSET
Lv.1 Details
8-153
8-154
COPIER>FUNCTION>MISC-R
CLM-PLTN
Lv.1 Details
COPIER>FUNCTION>MISC-R
CLM-DF1
Lv.1 Details
8-154
8-155
COPIER>FUNCTION>MISC-R
CLM-DF2
Lv.1 Details
COPIER>FUNCTION>MISC-R
CLPLT-EN
Lv.1 Details
8-155
8-156
COPIER>FUNCTION>MISC-R
CLDF1-EN
Lv.1 Details
COPIER>FUNCTION>MISC-R
CLDF2-EN
Lv.1 Details
8-156
8-157
COPIER>FUNCTION>MISC-R
CLM-TGT
Lv.1 Details
COPIER>FUNCTION>MISC-R
RD-SHPOS
Lv.2 Details
8-157
8
MISC-P
8-158
COPIER>FUNCTION>MISC-P
COPIER>FUNCTION>MISC-P
P-PRINT
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Required time
Supplement/memo
KEY-HIST
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Required time
HIST-PRT
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Required time
TRS-DATA
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
USER-PRT
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Required time
Supplement/memo
LBL-PRNT
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
ENV-PRT
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Required time
PJH-P-1
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Supplement/memo
PJH-P-2
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Supplement/memo
AT-IMG-X
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Required time
USBH-PRT
Lv.1 Details
8-158
8-159
COPIER>FUNCTION>MISC-P
ITB-INIT
Lv.1 Details
SYSTEM
COPIER>FUNCTION>SYSTEM
DOWNLOAD
Lv.1 Details
8-159
8-160
COPIER>FUNCTION>SYSTEM
HD-CLEAR
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
COPIER>FUNCTION>SYSTEM
DSRAMBUP
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
8-160
8
OPTION
8-161
COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW
SENS-CNF
Lv.2 Details
FNC-SW
COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW
MODEL-SZ
Lv.1 Details
8-161
8-162
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
ORG-LGL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
ORG-LTR
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
ORG-LTRR
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
Default value
8-162
8-163
8-163
8-164
8-164
8-165
8-165
8-166
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
Supplement/memo
MIBCOUNT
Lv.2 Details
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
Related service mode
MEAP-PRI
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
CNTR-SW
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
8-166
8-167
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
PSWD-SW
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
SM-PSWD
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
Default value
Related service mode
RPT2SIDE
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
Related service mode
8-167
8-168
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
IMGCNTPR
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
CDS-FIRM
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
8-168
8-169
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
BXNUPLOG
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
BUSI-SW
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
SDLMTWRN
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
Related user mode
JLK-PWSC
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
8-169
8-170
DSPLY-SW
COPIER > OPTION > DSPLY-SW
UI-COPY
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
T-8-47
8-170
8-171
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Default value
Related service mode
NWERR-SW
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
UISW-DSP
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
T-CRG-SW
Lv.2 Details
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
Related user mode
Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/adj/set range
0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default value
0
Related service mode
COPIER> OPTION> FNC-SW> FXWRNLVL
COPIER> FUNCTION> CLEAR> CNT-DCON
MEAP-DSP
Screen switch set from MEAP to standard
Lv.2 Details
To set to enable/disable switching from MEAP screen to the standard
screen (COPY/SEND/Mail Box screen, etc). (Setting to display/hide
the arrow mark on MEAP screen)
In the case of an error/jam/alarm, the screen is switched to the
standard screen to display warning even if disabling this mode.
Use case
Upon users request
Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/adj/set range
0 to 1
0: Enabled, 1: Disabled
Default value
0
Related service mode
COPIER> OPTION> DSPLY-SW> ANIM-SW
Supplement/memo
If disabling the switch with ANIM-SW, the screen will not be switched
to the standard screen even in the case of an error/jam/alarm.
8-171
8-172
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
Related service mode
Supplement/memo
UI-PRINT
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
IMGC-ADJ
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
Related user mode
UI-RSCAN
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
Default value
TNR-WARN
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
Related service mode
8-172
8-173
8-173
8
NETWORK
RAW-DATA
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
Default value
RMT-LANG
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
IFAX-LIM
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
SMTPTXPN
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
8-174
SMTPRXPN
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
8-174
8-175
8-175
8-176
Display/adj/set range
Default value
Related service mode
Supplement/memo
CHNG-STS
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
Related service mode
CHNG-CMD
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
Related service mode
MEAP-SSL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
8-176
8-177
8-177
8-178
8-178
8-179
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Default value
IKERETRY
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
Supplement/memo
SPDALDEL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
Supplement/memo
NCONF-SW
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
Supplement/memo
8-179
8-180
8-180
8-181
8-181
8-182
SOUND
ENV-SET
COPIER > OPTION > SOUND
DRM-RTIM
Lv.2 Details
ENVP-INT
Lv.1 Details
8-182
8-183
CLEANING
FEED-SW
COPIER > OPTION > CLEANING
OHP-PTH
Lv.2 Details
EVLP-SPD
Lv.1 Details
8-183
8-184
IMG-SPD
COPIER > OPTION > IMG-SPD
FX-D-TMP
Lv.1 Details
8-184
8-185
Use case
When skew occurs at different width mixed print
Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/adj/set range
0 to 1
0: Image quality priority, 1: Speed priority
Default value
1
ARC-INT1
Set of ARCDAT interruption interval
Lv.2 Details
To set the number of sheets as the intervals at which ARCDAT
control is executed.
When the number of sheets reaches the specified value, ARCDAT
control is executed by interrupting an ongoing job.
If the value is too large, the density of image becomes different
before and after the interruption.
If the value is too small, the productivity is lowered.
Actual setting value is calculated by dividing the entry value by 0.9
and rounding up after the decimal points. (e.g.: If an entry value is
100, setting value will be 112.)
Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Display/adj/set range
5 to 1000
Unit
1 sheet
Appropriate target value 100
Default value
100
Related service mode
COPIER> OPTION> IMG-LSR> ARC-INT2
8-185
8
IMG-RDR
8-186
COPIER > OPTION > IMG-RDR
DF2DSTL1
Lv.1 Details
8-186
8
IMG-MCON
8-187
COPIER > OPTION > IMG-MCON
PRN-FLG
Lv.2 Details
8-187
8-188
8-188
8-189
8-189
8-190
8-190
8-191
8-191
8
IMG-DEV
8-192
COPIER > OPTION > IMG-DEV
DVTGT-K
Lv.2 Details
8-192
8-193
8-193
8-194
8-194
8-195
IMG-TR
COPIER > OPTION > IMG-TR
2TR-RVON
Lv.2 Details
T-8-57
8-195
8
IMG-FIX
8-196
COPIER > OPTION > IMG-FIX
TMP-TBL3
Lv.1 Details
8-196
8-197
8-197
8-198
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Default value
FXST2-UH
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Default value
FN-ENTMP
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Default value
FLYING
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
Default value
8-198
8-199
8-199
8-200
8-200
8
CUSTOM
8-201
COPIER > OPTION > CUSTOM
ABK-TOOL
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
Supplement/memo
DEV-SP1
Lv.2 Details
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Default value
DEV-SP2
Lv.2 Details
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Default value
DEV-SP3
Lv.2 Details
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Default value
DEV-SP4
Lv.2 Details
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Default value
8-201
8-202
8-202
8
USER
COPIER>OPTION>USER
COPIER>OPTION>USER
COPY-LIM
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
SLEEP
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
Supplement/memo
SIZE-DET
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
COUNTER1
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
Default value
COUNTER2
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
8-203
COUNTER3
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
COUNTER4
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
COUNTER5
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
COUNTER6
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
8-203
8-204
COPIER>OPTION>USER
DATE-DSP
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
Related user mode
MB-CCV
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
CONTROL
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
B4-L-CNT
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
Related service mode
COPIER>OPTION>USER
TRY-STP
Lv.2 Details
8-204
8-205
COPIER>OPTION>USER
COPIER>OPTION>USER
OP-SZ-DT
Lv.2 Details
JOB-INVL
Lv.2 Details
8-205
8-206
COPIER>OPTION>USER
PR-PSESW
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
IDPRN-SW
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
P-CRG-LF
Lv.2 Details
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
CPRT-DSP
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
Related user mode
COPIER>OPTION>USER
PCL-COPY
Lv.2 Details
8-206
8-207
COPIER>OPTION>USER
COPIER>OPTION>USER
TAB-ACC
Lv.1 Details
DFLT-CPY
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
8-207
8-208
COPIER>OPTION>USER
COPIER>OPTION>USER
RUI-RJT
Lv.2 Details
FREG-SW
Lv.2 Details
8-208
8-209
COPIER>OPTION>USER
COPIER>OPTION>USER
IFAX-PGD
Lv.2 Details
PRNT-POS
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
AFN-PSWD
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
PTJAM-RC
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
PDL-NCSW
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
8-209
8-210
COPIER>OPTION>USER
COPIER>OPTION>USER
SLP-SLCT
Lv.2 Details
CNCT-RLZ
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
Supplement/memo
COUNTER7
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
COUNTER8
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
2C-CT-SW
Lv.2 Details
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
8-210
8-211
COPIER>OPTION>USER
COPIER>OPTION>USER
JA-FUNC
ON/OFF of job archive function
Lv.2 Details
To set ON/OFF of job archive function.
Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Caution
Changing this mode is not available in service mode, but only
reference is available.
This mode can be set only with the MEAP program that supports job
archive.
Display/adj/set range
0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default value
0
JA-JOB
Setting of job archive target job
Lv.2 Details
To set the job type subject to job archive.
With the job archive function enabled, archive operation is executed
when executing the target job.
Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Caution
Changing this mode is not available in service mode, but only
reference is available.
This mode can be set only with the MEAP program that supports job
archive.
Display/adj/set range
0: N/A, 3: Limited to FAX/IFAX, 0xFFFFFFFF: All jobs
Default value
0
Related service mode
COPIER > OPTION > USER > JA-FUNC
JA-RESTR
Setting of job archive limit items
Lv.2 Details
To set restriction items for job archive specification.
With job archive function enabled, follow the setting to execute
operation to restrict specification.
Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Caution
Changing this mode is not available in Service Mode, but reference
is available (in Service mode).
This mode is available only with the MEAP program that supports job
archive.
Display/adj/set range
0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
32 specification restrictions with Bit definition
Bit0: Function to obtain image file (0: OFF, 1:ON)
Bit1: Function to compose form registration (0: OFF, 1: ON)
Bit2: Function to edit document (0:OFF, 1: ON)
Default value
0
Related service mode
COPIER > OPTION > USER > JA-FUNC
LDAP-SW
Lv.1 Details
Use case
8-211
8-212
COPIER>OPTION>USER
COPIER>OPTION>USER
SPEAKER
Lv.1 Details
MAIL-OF
Lv.1 Details
8-212
8-213
COPIER>OPTION>USER
COPIER>OPTION>USER
LDAP-DEF
Lv.1 Details
FREE-DSP
Lv.2 Details
8-213
8-214
COPIER>OPTION>USER
COPIER>OPTION>USER
JA-FORMT
Lv.2 Details
SNMP-COU
Lv.2 Details
8-214
8-215
COPIER>OPTION>USER
COPIER>OPTION>USER
USBK-DSP
Lv.2 Details
USBH-DSP
Lv.2 Details
8-215
8-216
COPIER>OPTION>USER
COPIER>OPTION>USER
CTCHKDSP
Lv.1 Details
JA-DFAX
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Default value
JA-REP
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Default value
JA-FREP
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Default value
JA-BOX
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Default value
JA-FORM
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Default value
JA-PREV
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Default value
8-216
8-217
COPIER>OPTION>USER
JA-PULL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Default value
JA-PDLB
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Default value
JA-JOBK
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Default value
JA-JDF
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Default value
JA-RUI
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Default value
COPIER>OPTION>USER
JA-WEB
Lv.2 Details
8-217
8-218
COPIER>OPTION>USER
COPIER>OPTION>USER
SLEEP1SW
Lv.1 Details
EZY-SCRP
Lv.1 Details
8-218
8
CST
COPIER>OPTION>CST
COPIER>OPTION>CST
U1-NAME
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
U2-NAME
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
U3-NAME
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
U4-NAME
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
ENV1
8-219
Lv.1 Details
To set the size for Envelope Cassette ENV1.
Use case
When specifying the size for Envelope Cassette
Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/adj/set range
21 to 25
21: ISO-C5, 22: COM10, 23: MONARCH, 24: DL, 25: ISO-B5
Default value
23
8-219
8
COPIER>OPTION>CST
ENV2
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
CST1-P1
Lv.1 Details
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
Related user mode
CST1-P2
Lv.1 Details
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
Related user mode
CST2-P1
Lv.1 Details
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
Related user mode
CST2-P2
Lv.1 Details
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
Related user mode
8-220
COPIER>OPTION>CST
CST3-P1
Setting of Cassette 3 paper size
Lv.1 Details
To set the paper size used in Cassette 3.
Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/adj/set range
0 to 1
0: A5R, 1: STMTR
Default value
USA: 1, Countries other than USA: 0
Related user mode
Preferences> Paper Settings> A5R/STMTR Paper Selection
CST3-P2
Setting of Cassette 3 paper size
Lv.1 Details
To set the paper size used in Cassette 3.
Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/adj/set range
0 to 1
0: B5, 1: EXEC
Default value
USA: 1, Countries other than USA: 0
Related user mode
Preferences> Paper Settings> B5/EXEC Paper Selection
CST4-P1
Setting of Cassette 4 paper size
Lv.1 Details
To set the paper size used in Cassette 4.
Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/adj/set range
0 to 1
0: A5R, 1: STMTR
Default value
USA: 1, Countries other than USA: 0
Related user mode
Preferences> Paper Settings> A5R/STMTR Paper Selection
CST4-P2
Setting of Cassette 4 paper size
Lv.1 Details
To set the paper size used in Cassette 4.
Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/adj/set range
0 to 1
0: B5, 1: EXEC
Default value
USA: 1, Countries other than USA: 0
Related user mode
Preferences> Paper Settings> B5/EXEC Paper Selection
CST1-U1
Set cst 1 oversea special ppr category 1
Lv.1 Details
To set the overseas special paper category 1 used in Cassette 1.
Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/adj/set range
0 to 43
0: A4-R/LTR-R, 1 to 23: Not used, 24: FLSC, 25: A-FLS, 36: Not
used, 27: E-OFI, 28 to 29: Not used, 30: A-LTRR, 31 to 32: Not used,
33: A-LGL, 34: G-LGL, 35: Not used, 36: A-OFI, 37: M-OFI, 38 to 41:
Not used, 42: FA4, 43: Not used
Default value
0
8-220
8-221
COPIER>OPTION>CST
COPIER>OPTION>CST
CST1-U2
Set cst 1 oversea special ppr category 2
Lv.1 Details
To set the overseas special paper category 2 used in Cassette 1.
Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/adj/set range
0 to 34
0: 16K-R, 1 to 22: Not used, 23: K-LGL-R, 24 to 31: Not used, 32:
G-LTRR, 33 to 34: Not used
Default value
0
CST1-U3
Set cst 1 oversea special ppr category 3
Lv.1 Details
To set the overseas special paper category 3 used in Cassette 1.
Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/adj/set range
0 to 31
0: B4/B5/LTR/16K, 1 to 21: Not used, 22: K-LGL, 23 to 28: Not used,
29: A-LTR, 30: Not used, 31: G-LTR
Default value
0
CST1-U4
Set cst 1 oversea special ppr category 4
Lv.1 Details
To set the overseas special paper category 4 used in Cassette 1.
Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/adj/set range
0 to 28
0: LGL, 1 to 27: Not used, 28: B-OFI
Default value
0
CST2-U1
Set cst 2 oversea special ppr category 1
Lv.1 Details
To set the overseas special paper category 1 used in Cassette 2.
Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/adj/set range
0 to 43
0: A4-R/LTR-R, 1 to 23: Not used, 24: FLSC, 25: A-FLS, 36: Not
used, 27: E-OFI, 28 to 29: Not used, 30: A-LTRR, 31 to 32: Not used,
33: A-LGL, 34: G-LGL, 35: Not used, 36: A-OFI, 37: M-OFI, 38 to 41:
Not used, 42: FA4, 43: Not used
Default value
0
CST2-U2
Set cst 2 oversea special ppr category 2
Lv.1 Details
To set the overseas special paper category 2 used in Cassette 2.
Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/adj/set range
0 to 34
0: 16K-R, 1 to 22: Not used, 23: K-LGL-R, 24 to 31: Not used, 32:
G-LTRR, 33 to 34: Not used
Default value
0
CST2-U3
Set cst 2 oversea special ppr category 3
Lv.1 Details
To set the overseas special paper category 3 used in Cassette 2.
Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/adj/set range
0 to 31
0: B4/B5/LTR/16K, 1 to 21: Not used, 22: K-LGL, 23 to 28: Not used,
29: A-LTR, 30: Not used, 31: G-LTR
Default value
0
CST2-U4
Set cst 2 oversea special ppr category 4
Lv.1 Details
To set the overseas special paper category 4 used in Cassette 2.
Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/adj/set range
0 to 28
0: LGL, 1 to 27: Not used, 28: B-OFI
Default value
0
CST3-U1
Set cst 3 oversea special ppr category 1
Lv.1 Details
To set the overseas special paper category 1 used in Cassette 3.
Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/adj/set range
0 to 43
0: A4-R/LTR-R, 1 to 23: Not used, 24: FLSC, 25: A-FLS, 36: Not
used, 27: E-OFI, 28 to 29: Not used, 30: A-LTRR, 31 to 32: Not used,
33: A-LGL, 34: G-LGL, 35: Not used, 36: A-OFI, 37: M-OFI, 38 to 41:
Not used, 42: FA4, 43: Not used
Default value
0
CST3-U2
Set cst3 overseas special ppr category 2
Lv.1 Details
To set the overseas special paper category 2 used in Cassette 3.
Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/adj/set range
0 to 34
0: 16K-R, 1 to 22: Not used, 23: K-LGL-R, 24 to 31: Not used, 32:
G-LTRR, 33 to 34: Not used
Default value
0
CST3-U3
Set cst3 overseas special ppr category 3
Lv.1 Details
To set the overseas special paper category 3 used in Cassette 3.
Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/adj/set range
0 to 31
0: B4/B5/LTR/16K, 1 to 21: Not used, 22: K-LGL, 23 to 28: Not used,
29: A-LTR, 30: Not used, 31: G-LTR
Default value
0
8-221
8-222
COPIER>OPTION>CST
CST3-U4
Set cst3 overseas special ppr category 4
Lv.1 Details
To set the overseas special paper category 4 used in Cassette 3.
Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/adj/set range
0 to 28
0: LGL, 1 to 27: Not used, 28: B-OFI
Default value
0
CST4-U1
Set cst4 overseas special ppr category 1
Lv.1 Details
To set the overseas special paper category 1 used in Cassette 4.
Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/adj/set range
0 to 43
0: A4-R/LTR-R, 1 to 23: Not used, 24: FLSC, 25: A-FLS, 36: Not
used, 27: E-OFI, 28 to 29: Not used, 30: A-LTRR, 31 to 32: Not used,
33: A-LGL, 34: G-LGL, 35: Not used, 36: A-OFI, 37: M-OFI, 38 to 41:
Not used, 42: FA4, 43: Not used
Default value
0
CST4-U2
Set cst4 overseas special ppr category 2
Lv.1 Details
To set the overseas special paper category 2 used in Cassette 4.
Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/adj/set range
0 to 34
0: 16K-R, 1 to 22: Not used, 23: K-LGL-R, 24 to 31: Not used, 32:
G-LTRR, 33 to 34: Not used
Default value
0
CST4-U3
Set cst4 overseas special ppr category 3
Lv.1 Details
To set the overseas special paper category 3 used in Cassette 4.
Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/adj/set range
0 to 31
0: B4/B5/LTR/16K, 1 to 21: Not used, 22: K-LGL, 23 to 28: Not used,
29: A-LTR, 30: Not used, 31: G-LTR
Default value
0
CST4-U4
Set cst4 overseas special ppr category 4
Lv.1 Details
To set the overseas special paper category 4 used in Cassette 4.
Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/adj/set range
0 to 28
0: LGL, 1 to 27: Not used, 28: B-OFI
Default value
0
ACC
COPIER>OPTION>ACC
COIN
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
T-8-62
Default value
8-222
8-223
COPIER>OPTION>ACC
Related service mode
Supplement/memo
DK-P
Lv.1 Details
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
CARD-SW
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
STPL-LMT
Lv.2 Details
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
SC-TYPE
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
Default value
COPIER>OPTION>ACC
OUT-TRAY
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
CC-SPSW
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
Default value
USB-MSK
Lv.1 Details
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
UNIT-PRC
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
8-223
8-224
COPIER>OPTION>ACC
COPIER>OPTION>ACC
IN-TRAY
Lv.1 Details
MAX-PRC
Lv.1 Details
8-224
8-225
COPIER>OPTION>ACC
COPIER>OPTION>ACC
SRL-SPSW
Lv.1 Details
CR-TYPE
Lv.1 Details
8-225
8
INT-FACE
8-226
COPIER>OPTION>INT-FACE
COPIER>OPTION>INT-FACE
IMG-CONT
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
NWCT-TM
Lv.2 Details
8-226
8
LCNS-TR
COPIER>OPTION>LCNS-TR
COPIER>OPTION>LCNS-TR
ST-SEND
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
TR-SEND
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
ST-ENPDF
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
TR-ENPDF
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
8-227
ST-SPDF
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
TR-SPDF
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
ST-EXPDF
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
TR-EXPDF
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
8-227
8-228
COPIER>OPTION>LCNS-TR
ST-PDFDR
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
TR-PDFDR
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
ST-SCR
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
TR-SCR
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
ST-HDCLR
TR-HDCLR
COPIER>OPTION>LCNS-TR
ST-BRDIM
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
TR-BRDIM
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
ST-VNC
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
TR-VNC
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
8-228
8-229
COPIER>OPTION>LCNS-TR
ST-WEB
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
TR-WEB
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
ST-HRPDF
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
TR-HRPDF
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
COPIER>OPTION>LCNS-TR
ST-TRSND
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
TR-TRSND
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
ST-WTMRK
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
TR-WTMRK
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
8-229
8-230
COPIER>OPTION>LCNS-TR
ST-TSPDF
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
TR-TSPDF
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
ST-USPDF
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
TR-USPDF
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
COPIER>OPTION>LCNS-TR
ST-DVPDF
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
TR-DVPDF
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
ST-SCPDF
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
TR-SCPDF
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
8-230
8-231
COPIER>OPTION>LCNS-TR
ST-AMS
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
TR-AMS
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
ST-ERDS
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
Supplement/memo
TR-ERDS
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Supplement/memo
COPIER>OPTION>LCNS-TR
ST-PS
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
8-231
8-232
COPIER>OPTION>LCNS-TR
ST-PSLI5
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
TR-PSLI5
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
ST-LIPS5
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
TR-LIPS5
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
COPIER>OPTION>LCNS-TR
ST-LIPS4
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
TR-LIPS4
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
ST-PSPCL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
TR-PSPCL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
8-232
8-233
COPIER>OPTION>LCNS-TR
ST-PCLUF
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
TR-PCLUF
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
ST-PSLIP
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
TR-PSLIP
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
COPIER>OPTION>LCNS-TR
ST-PSPCU
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
TR-PSPCU
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
ST-LXUFR
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
TR-LXUFR
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
8-233
8-234
COPIER>OPTION>LCNS-TR
ST-HDCR2
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
TR-HDCR2
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
ST-USB-M
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
TR-USB-M
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
COPIER>OPTION>LCNS-TR
ST-MOBIL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
TR-MOBIL
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
ST-JBLK
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
TR-JBLK
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
8-234
8-235
COPIER>OPTION>LCNS-TR
ST-AFAX
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
COPIER>OPTION>LCNS-TR
ST-OOXML
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
TR-OOXML
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
ST-XPS
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
TR-XPS
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
8-235
8-236
COPIER>OPTION>LCNS-TR
ST-2600
Lv.2 Details
8-236
8
TEST
8-237
COPIER>TEST>PG
Lv.1 Details
PG
COPIER>TEST>PG
TYPE
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Test print
To execute the test print.
At trouble analysis
Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Test print is executed.
Caution
Be sure to return the value to 0 after the test print output.
Display/adj/set range
0 to 100
0: Image from CCD (normal print)
1 to 3: For R&D use
4: 16 gradations
5: Halftone for all areas
6: Grid
7 to 9: For R&D use
10: MCYBk horizontal line
11: For R&D use
12: YMCBk 64 gradations
13: For R&D use
14: Full color 16 gradations
15 to 100: For R&D use
Default value
0
Required time
Several seconds
TXPH
Setting of test print image mode
Lv.1 Details
To set the image mode at the time of test print output.
This mode is enabled for test print only.
Use case
At trouble analysis
Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Display/adj/set range
0 to 6
0: Error diffusion
1: Low screen ruling screen (approx. 133 to 190 lines)
2: High screen ruling screen (approx. 200 to 268 lines)
3: Copy screen (approx. 220 lines)
4: REOS screen (no screen structure)
5 to 6: Not used
THRU
Image correction table use at test print
Lv.1 Details
To set whether to use the image correction table at the time of test
print output.
Use case
At trouble analysis
Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Display/adj/set range
0 to 1
0: Used, 1: Not used
DENS-Y
Adj of Y color density at test print
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
DENS-M
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
DENS-C
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
DENS-K
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
COLOR-Y
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
COLOR-M
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
8-237
8-238
COPIER>TEST>PG
COLOR-C
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
COLOR-K
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
F/M-SW
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
PG-PICK
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
2-SIDE
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
COPIER>TEST>PG
PG-QTY
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Default value
FINISH
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
Related service mode
8-238
8
NETWORK
8-239
COPIER>TEST>NETWORK
COPIER>TEST>NETWORK
PING
Lv.1 Details
Use case
BML-DISP
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
IPV6-ADR
Lv.1 Details
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Adj/set/operate method
Related service mode
IPSECPOL
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Required time
IPSECINT
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Required time
8-239
8
COUNTER
COPIER>COUNTER>TOTAL
2-SIDE
Lv.1 Details
TOTAL
COPIER>COUNTER>TOTAL
SERVICE1
Lv.1 Details
Display/adj/set range
SERVICE2
Lv.1 Details
Display/adj/set range
COPY
Lv.1 Details
Display/adj/set range
PDL-PRT
Lv.1 Details
Display/adj/set range
FAX-PRT
Lv.1 Details
Display/adj/set range
BOX-PRT
Lv.1 Details
Display/adj/set range
RPT-PRT
Lv.1 Details
Display/adj/set range
8-240
0 to 99999999
8-240
8-241
PICK-UP
FEEDER
COPIER>COUNTER>PICK-UP
C1
Lv.1 Details
Unit
C2
Lv.1 Details
Unit
C3
Lv.1 Details
Unit
C4
Lv.1 Details
Unit
MF
Lv.1 Details
Unit
DK
Lv.1 Details
Unit
2-SIDE
Lv.1 Details
Unit
COPIER>COUNTER>FEEDER
FEED
Use case
Unit
DFOP-CNT
Use case
Unit
T-8-69
8-241
8-242
JAM
MISC
COPIER>COUNTER>JAM
TOTAL
Use case
Unit
FEEDER
Use case
Unit
SORTER
Use case
Unit
2-SIDE
Use case
Unit
MF
Use case
Unit
C1
Use case
Unit
C2
Use case
Unit
C3
Use case
Unit
C4
Use case
Unit
DK
Use case
Unit
COPIER>COUNTER>MISC
T-SPLY-Y
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
Default value
T-SPLY-M
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
Default value
T-SPLY-C
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
Default value
T-SPLY-K
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
Default value
ALLPW-ON
Lv.1 Details
T-8-71
Use case
Unit
HDD-ON
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Unit
ST-NDL
Lv.1 Details
Unit
ENT-PTH
Lv.1 Details
Unit
TRAY-CHA
Lv.1 Details
Unit
PUNCH
8-242
8-243
JOB
COPIER>COUNTER>MISC
PUN-CAB
Lv.1 Details
Unit
PUN-WST
Lv.1 Details
SADDLE
SDL-STPL
SDL-NDL
Lv.1 Details
Unit
ESC-PTH
SUC-A-Y
SUC-A-M
SUC-A-C
SUC-A-K
SUC-L-Y
SUC-L-M
SUC-L-C
SUC-L-K
COPIER>COUNTER>JOB
DVPAPLEN
Lv.1 Details
Display/adj/set range
Unit
DVRUNLEN
Lv.1 Details
Display/adj/set range
Unit
T-8-72
8-243
8
DRBL-1
COPIER>COUNTER>DRBL-1
COPIER>COUNTER>DRBL-1
T/S-UNIT
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
Default value
T-CLN-BD
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
Default value
TR-BLT
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
Default value
2TR-ROLL
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
Default value
Supplement/memo
8-244
PT-DRM
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
Default value
DV-UNT-C
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
DV-UNT-Y
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
DV-UNT-M
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
DV-UNT-K
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
8-244
8-245
COPIER>COUNTER>DRBL-1
C1-SP-RL
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
Default value
C1-FD-RL
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
Default value
C2-SP-RL
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
Default value
C2-FD-RL
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
Default value
COPIER>COUNTER>DRBL-1
M-SP-RL
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
Default value
M-FD-RL
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
Default value
FX-LW-RL
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
Default value
FX-UNIT
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
Default value
FX-UP-FR
8-245
8-246
COPIER>COUNTER>DRBL-1
FX-LW-BR
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
Default value
WST-TNR
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
Default value
TN-FIL1
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
Default value
PT-DR-Y
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
Default value
COPIER>COUNTER>DRBL-1
PT-DR-M
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
Default value
PT-DR-C
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
Default value
TR-ROLK
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
Default value
Related service mode
TR-ROLC
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
Default value
Related service mode
8-246
8
DRBL-2
8-247
COPIER>COUNTER>DRBL-2
COPIER>COUNTER>DRBL-2
DF-PU-RL
Lv.1 Details
DF-SP-RL
Lv.1 Details
8-247
8-248
COPIER>COUNTER>DRBL-2
STAMP
Lv.1 Details
COPIER>COUNTER>DRBL-2
PD-SP-RL
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Default value
PD-FD-RL
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Default value
C3-SP-RL
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
Default value
C3-FD-RL
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
Default value
8-248
8-249
COPIER>COUNTER>DRBL-2
C4-SP-RL
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
Default value
C4-FD-RL
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
Default value
SORT
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Default value
FIN-STPR
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Default value
COPIER>COUNTER>DRBL-2
SADDLE
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Default value
SDL-STPL
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Default value
PUNCH
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Default value
FN-BFFRL
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
Default value
8-249
8-250
COPIER>COUNTER>DRBL-2
ENT-STC
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
Default value
CENT-STC
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
Default value
BACK-ROL
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
Default value
DL-STC
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Caution
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Default value
COPIER>COUNTER>DRBL-2
OFST-RL
Lv.1 Details
8-250
8-251
T-CNTR
V-CNTR
COPIER>COUNTER>T-CNTR
YELLOW
Lv.1 Details
Use case
MAGENTA
Lv.1 Details
Use case
CYAN
Lv.1 Details
Use case
BLACK
Lv.1 Details
Use case
COPIER>COUNTER>V-CNTR
TOTAL
Lv.1 Details
Use case
YELLOW
Lv.1 Details
Use case
MAGENTA
Lv.1 Details
Use case
CYAN
Lv.1 Details
Use case
BLACK
Lv.1 Details
Use case
8-251
8-252
V2-CNTR
LF
COPIER>COUNTER>V2-CNTR
TOTAL
Lv.1 Details
Use case
YELLOW
Lv.1 Details
Use case
MAGENTA
Lv.1 Details
Use case
CYAN
Lv.1 Details
Use case
BLACK
Lv.1 Details
Use case
COPIER>COUNTER>LF
Y-DRM-LF
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Default value
M-DRM-LF
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Default value
C-DRM-LF
Lv.1 Details
T-8-78
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Default value
K-DRM-LF
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Default value
8-252
8
FEEDER
FEEDER>DISPLAY
RDSN-RCV
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
DISPLAY
FEEDER>DISPLAY
FEEDSIZE
Lv.1 Details
Adj/set/operate method
TRY-WIDE
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Unit
SPSN-LMN
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Appropriate target value
SPSN-RCV
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Appropriate target value
RDSN-LMN
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Appropriate target value
8-253
Display/adj/set range
Appropriate target value
DRSN-LMN
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Appropriate target value
DRSN-RCV
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Appropriate target value
8-253
8
ADJUST
8-254
FEEDER>ADJUST
LA-SPD2
Lv.1 Details
FEEDER>ADJUST
DOCST
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Default value
ADJMSCN1
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Default value
ADJMSCN2
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Default value
ADJSSCN1
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Default value
8-254
8-255
FEEDER>ADJUST
ADJSSCN2
Lv.1 Details
FUNCTION
FEEDER>FUNCTION
SENS-INT
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
MTR-CHK
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
8-255
8-256
FEEDER>FUNCTION
FEEDER>FUNCTION
FEED-CHK
Lv.1 Details
FAN-ON
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
8-256
8-257
FEEDER>FUNCTION
MTR-ON
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
8-257
8
SORTER
SORTER>ADJUST
STP-R1
Lv.1 Details
ADJUST
Use case
SORTER>ADJUST
PNCH-HLE
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Default value
STP-F1
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Appropriate target value
Default value
STP-F2
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Appropriate target value
Default value
8-258
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Appropriate target value
Default value
STP-R2
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Appropriate target value
Default value
STP-2P
Lv.1 Details
Use case
When the front/rear 2-staple position is displaced
Adj/set/operate method 1) Select the item, and then press OK key.
2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.
Display/adj/set range
-25 to 25
Unit
0.1 mm
SDL-STP
Adj of saddle staple position:Fin-C1
Lv.1 Details
To adjust the staple position for saddle stitching..
As the value is incremented by 1, the staple position moves
downward by 0.5 mm.
Use case
When misalignment occurs at the fold position and the staple
position for saddle stitching
Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Display/adj/set range
-3 to 3
Unit
0.5 mm
Appropriate target value 0
Default value
0
8-258
8-259
SORTER>ADJUST
SDL-ALG
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Appropriate target value
Default value
ST-ALG1
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Appropriate target value
Default value
ST-ALG2
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Appropriate target value
Default value
STP-F3
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Appropriate target value
Default value
SORTER>ADJUST
STP-F4
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Appropriate target value
Default value
STP-R3
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Appropriate target value
Default value
STP-R4
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Appropriate target value
Default value
SW-UP-RL
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Appropriate target value
Default value
8-259
8-260
SORTER>ADJUST
PUN-V-RG
PRCS-RET
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Appropriate target value
Default value
UP-CL
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
DW-CL
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
THC-CL
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
SORTER>ADJUST
[Not used]
Adj Process Tray return amount: Fin-C1
To adjust the pull-back amount of the paper on the Processing Tray.
As the value is incremented by 1, the pull-back amount is decreased
by 1.4mm.
When the paper is bent in the Processing Tray
Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
0 to 5
1.4 mm
0
0
Setting of upward curl prev mode: Fin-C1
Set 1 when upward curl occurs on the paper delivered to the Stack
Tray, and paper leaning due to the curl occurs.
When upward curl occurs on the paper delivered to the Stack Tray,
and paper leaning due to the curl occurs
Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
0
Setting downward curl prev mode: Fin-C1
Set 1 when downward curl occurs on the paper delivered to the
Stack Tray, and papers are not stacked accurately.
When downward curl occurs on the paper delivered to the Stack
Tray, and papers are not stacked accurately
Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
0
Setting heavy ppr curl prev mode:Fin-C1
Set 1 when upward curl occurs at the time of heavy paper delivery.
When 1 is set, the amount of Stack Tray descension for stack
delivery increases. The paper surface detection is performed for
every sheet, not for every 5 sheets.
When upward curl occurs at the time of heavy paper delivery
Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
0
THC-PUSH
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Display/adj/set range
0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default value
0
OFST-STC
Set poor offset stack prev mode:Fin-C1
Lv.1 Details
Set 1 when paper is not appropriately stacked in the small-size offset
mode.
When 1 is set, buffer operation is not performed in the small-size
offset mode.
Use case
When paper is not appropriately stacked in the small-size offset
mode
Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Display/adj/set range
0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default value
0
THN-STC
Set poor thin ppr stack prev mode:Fin-C1
Lv.1 Details
Set 1 when thin paper is not appropriately stacked.
When 1 is set, the stacking condition of thin paper improves.
Use case
When thin paper is not appropriately stacked
Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Display/adj/set range
0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default value
0
STP-P-CH
Set stpl stack displace prev mode:Fin-C1
Lv.1 Details
Set 1 when the paper on the top is misaligned in the staple delivery
mode.
When 1 is set, paper stack alignment operation is executed twice
immediately before stapling.
Use case
When the paper on the top is misaligned in the staple delivery mode
Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Display/adj/set range
0 to 1
0: OFF, 1: ON
Default value
0
8-260
8-261
SORTER>ADJUST
SORTER>ADJUST
TRY-NIS
Lv.1 Details
SDL-ALM
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
SFT-AMT1
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Appropriate target value
Default value
SFT-AMT2
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Appropriate target value
Default value
STP-NTN
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Appropriate target value
Default value
8-261
8-262
SORTER>ADJUST
INSTP-F1
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Appropriate target value
Default value
INSTP-R1
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Unit
Appropriate target value
Default value
FUNCTION
SORTER>FUNCTION
FIN-CON
Lv.1 Details
T-8-83
8-262
8-263
OPTION
SORTER>OPTION
BLNK-SW
Lv.1 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
8-263
8
BOARD
BOARD>OPTION
TR-DSP
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
OPTION
BOARD>OPTION
MENU-1
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
MENU-2
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
MENU-3
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
MENU-4
Lv.2 Details
Use case
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
Default value
SURF-OFF
Lv.1 Details
Adj/set/operate method
Display/adj/set range
8-264
Display/adj/set range
Default value
Supplement/memo
8-264
Installation
to Check this
How
Installation Procedure
to do Before
Things
Installation
to Note Before
Points
Installation
Table of
Combination
Accessory Installation
the Contents
Checking
Procedure
Installation
9-2
A symbol is described on the illustration in the case of using the parts included in the package
of this product.
Thus, it is desirable to go over the planned installing location before bringing the machine to
the user's site.
1) There must be a power outlet properly grounded and rated as indicated (+, -10%) for
exclusive use by the machine.
2) Environment of the installation site must be within the range indicated below. Avoid any
Packaged Item
area near the faucet, the water heater, the humidifier, or the refrigerator.
Operation/image assured range: temperature: 15.0 to 30.0 deg C, humidity: 5 to 80%
F-9-1
3) Keep the installation site away from the source of fire, a dusty place, or a place generating
ammonia gas. In the case of installing this equipment in a place subject to direct sunlight, it
Harness
Connector
Tighten
Remove
Connect
Disconnect
Secure
5) The foot of this equipment should be in contact with the floor. This equipment should be
Free
Claw
Plug in
Turn on
Checking instruction
Check
Visual Check
19 3/4
(500 mm)
or more
Remove
Sound Check
19 3/4
(500 mm)
or more
F-9-2
19 3/4
(500 mm)
or more
Insert
F-9-3
9-2
9-3
1) Moving this equipment from a low-temperature place to a warm plate can generate
19 3/4
(500 mm)
or more
condensation, resulting in image fault. Thus, when unpacking this equipment, leave it for 2
hours or more so that the equipment becomes comfortable with the room temperature.
(Condensation: formation of liquid drops from water vapor on metal surface, and usually
occurs when bringing a metal object from a low-temperature place to a warm place due to
rapidly-cooled surrounding moisture vapor.)
2) The host machine weighs maximum 175kg. It is recommended to lift it with 4 people or
19 3/4
(500 mm)
or more
19 3/4
(500 mm)
or more
more. However, if there is a standard to handle a heavy load in each sales company, follow
it for operation.
Also, make sure to lift the machine with keeping it level at operation.
Because the gravity center is in the rear, lift with care.
F-9-4
Duplex Color Image Reader Unit-B1+External 2/3 Hole Puncher-B1+Booklet FinisherC1+Buffer Pass Unit-G1+ Paper Deck Unit-B1
4 (100 mm) or more
19 3/4
(500 mm)
or more
19 3/4
(500 mm)
or more
19 3/4
(500 mm)
or more
F-9-5
7) Be sure to install this equipment in a well-ventilated place. Do not place this equipment
near the air vent in the room.
9-3
9-4
NOTE:
NOTE:
The following table shows the combination of accessories that are set at the right side of
the host machine.
When setting the accessories indicated in the table, refer to the table below and check the
combination before the setup.
When installing the USB Device Port-B1, install it before installing the following options.
Utility Tray
Voice Guidance
Kit
Voice Operation
Kit
Card Reader
yes: Available
Utility Tray
Card Reader
no
no
yes
no
no
yes
no
no
yes
yes
yes
yes
T-9-1
no: Unavailable
9-4
9-5
2 [12]
Power Cable X 1
1 [4]
*1 Use only in the case that the cassette pedestal is not installed.
F-9-6
*2 The connector has a different shape depending on locations. Other than USA
Use the correct power code to mach the location/area of installation. Make sure not to leave unused power code at the site.
*3 Included in the package in Asia general, Korea, and Taiwan regions
9-5
9-6
<CD/Guides>
Check the contents against the following
EUR
SPL/Taiwan
AUS
Korea
China
e-Manual
Users Guide
Quick Reference
Frequently Asked Questions
Getting Started
Registration for Purchase in USA
Drum Unit Warranty
Installation Check List
Users Guide
MEAP Administration Software CD *1
UFR II User Software CD
North America
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
PS User Software CD
Maintenance Guide
How to Use the Manuals
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
AMS Kit
1
(Only when Merchandise Code ends with
"005AA", "005AB"and 005AD.)
1
Only when Merchandise Code is
"3614B005AB" , "3615B005AB",
3614B005AD and 3615B005AD.
5
(UK, FRA, SPA, ITA, GER)
-
1
1
1
-
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
-
1
1
1
-
1
1
1
1
-
1
1
1
1
1
1
-
T-9-2
*2 Supplied with the Upgraded Machines. Mercury code : 3614B003AE, 3614B004AD, 3614B005AD, 3614B006AE, 3614B007AE, 3614B008AE, 3614B010AE, 3614B011AE,
3615B003AE, 3615B004AD, 3615B005AD, 3615B006AE, 3615B007AE, 3615B008AE, 3615B010AE, 3615B011AE
3616B003AE, 3616B004AD, 3616B005AD, 3616B006AE, 3616B007AE, 3616B010AE, 3616B011AE, 3616B008AE
3617B003AE, 3617B004AD, 3617B005AD, 3617B006AE, 3617B007AE, 3617B010AE, 3617B011AE, 3617B008AE
9-6
9-7
Unpacking
1) Unpack the host machine.
NOTE:
When installing the cassette pedestal,
be sure to place the host machine
on the cassette pedestal. (See the
Installation Procedure of the cassette
pedestal)
2) Hold the 4 grips on the left or right to lift the host machine up, and then put down the machine from the skid.
CAUTION:
The host machine weighs maximum 175kg. It
is recommended to lift it with 4 people or more.
However, if there is a standard to handle a heavy
load in each sales company, follow it for operation.
Also, make sure to lift the machine with keeping it
level at operation.
Because the gravity center is in the rear, lift with
care.
Grip
Grip
F-9-7
9-7
9-8
CAUTION:
Tapes on the Cassette area are peeled
off in later steps.
F-9-8
NOTE:
F-9-10
F-9-9
9-8
9
6) Peel off the Protection Paper.
9-9
7) Insert the protrusion in 1 place. While pushing down [A] claw, insert the claw in 2 places, and install the
Right Front Cover 2.
Protection Paper
F-9-11
F-9-12
8) Insert the protrusion in 1 place. While pushing down [A] claw, insert the claw in 3 places, and install the 9) Install the 2 Left Handle Covers.
Right Rear Cover 3.
1 protrusion each
1 claw each
x3
x2
[A]
F-9-13
F-9-14
9-9
9-10
Installation Procedure
Installing the Drum Unit
1) Remove the ITB Cover.
2 screws (to loosen)
2) Check that the ITB Sub Pressure Release Lever is positioned in the direction of the arrow and if not, turn it and adjust the
position.
direction
of the arrow
screw
F-9-15
F-9-16
3) Turn the ITB Pressure Release Lever in the direction of the arrow, and then fit the projection to the triangle mark on the
plate to release the pressure ITB.
9-10
9-11
x2
F-9-18
5) Hold the Developing Assembly with one hand. With the other hand, lift the dummy Drum up vertically and slowly to remove it. (If the dummy Drum is removed, the seal
can be removed simultaneously.)
CAUTION:
If diagonally pulled out, the seal
might be damaged. Be sure to pull
it out flatly in upper direction, and
carefully.
Likely, remove the Drum of each
color.
Dummy Drum
F-9-19
9-11
9-12
Seal
Seal
Front Side
F-9-20
6) Hold down the top surface of each Developing Assembly after removing Dummy Drums.
CAUTION:
F-9-21
CAUTION:
Be sure to pay attention to the below in
doing the next procedure.
NOTE:
Step 7) to 8) is to install the Drum Unit of
each color.
F-9-22
9-12
9-13
F-9-23
F-9-24
7) Unpack the Drum Unit, and remove the cover from the Drum Unit.
Claws 2pc
Cover
Dram Unit
CAUTION:
The cover might be stiff, so proceed
with extra care when removing the
cover from the Drum Unit.
x2
Claw
F-9-25
9-13
CAUTION:
9-14
NOTE:
Hold the handles at right and
left of the Drum Unit.
Grip
F-9-27
9-14
9-15
CAUTION:
If pushing it in the angle, the shutter may
breaks. Thus make sure to install it from
just above.
F-9-28
8) Fit the guide of the Process Unit to the guide of the Drum Unit to install the Drum Unit.
9-15
9-16
9) Check that the 8 LED light-receiving areas of the Drum Unit are not off from the base.
F-9-30
10) Put the Process Unit back to the host machine, and secure with the 2 screws.
CAUTION:
Check that there is no gap between the host machine and the Process Unit, and then secure with the screw.
[A]
[A]
F-9-31
9-16
9-17
CAUTION:
After closing the Process Unit, hold the
edge of each Drum Unit from above as
described below.
If the Drum Unit is not secured, it may
cause the color displacement.
F-9-32
CAUTION:
When pressuring the ITB Pressure
Release Lever, be sure that the Right
Lower Cover is opened first before
pressuring.
F-9-33
9-17
9
13) Release the Waste Toner Lock Lever.
9-18
14) Set the Waste Toner Container, and then put the Lever back.
F-9-34
F-9-35
F-9-36
9-18
9-19
CAUTION:
When removing the cover, do not insert
a screwdriver in the oval hole.
F-9-37
F-9-38
9-19
9-20
1) Connect the power plug of the host machine to the power outlet.
2) Remove the protection sheet on the control panel.
3) Open the switch cover and turn ON the main power switch.
NOTE:
When turning ON the main power, drum initialization and developing assembly initialization are automatically executed.
In case of the host machine with the Toner Container, toner refill is executed in a row.
Even turning OFF the main power during drum initialization, developing assembly initialization and toner refill, they will be re-executed when turning ON the power again.
4) After activation, follow the instruction in the Control Panel, and press the shut down key in the Control Panel.
5) Turn ON the main power switch.
6) Enter the following Service Mode, make sure that the setting value is "1".
COPIER > OPTION > FNC-SW > W/SCNR
7) Set the value of the following Service Mode.
COPIER > OPTION > CUSTOM > SCANTYPE
Setting Value "0" Color Image Reader Unit-B1/ B2
Setting Value "1" Duplex Color Image Reader Unit-B1
8) Exit the Service Mode.
NOTE:
In case of the host machine with the Toner Container, once the machine goes to standby state, drum initialization, developing assembly initialization and toner refill are completed.
In case of the host machine without the Toner Container, execute the following procedures.
9-20
9
9) Open the Toner Cover.
9-21
10) Add check marks to each color displayed on the operation screen, and press [Remove Toner Cartridges]
to open the Toner Replacement Cover.
F-9-39
NOTE:
Step 11) to 13) is to install the Toner Container
of each color.
F-9-40
11) Hold the Toner Container as the figure below, and shake it
approximately 10 times.
F-9-41
F-9-42
9-21
9-22
13) Insert the Toner Container all the way in, and close the Toner Exchange Cover.
NOTE:
F-9-43
9-22
9-23
Cassette Setting
1) Press the Cassette Release Button, and pull out the Cassette 1 and 2
toward the front.
4) Set papers.
5) Open the cover from which the Size Plate is pushed in.
Paper
Cover
F-9-47
F-9-46
9-23
9
7) Set the Size Plate in accordance with the size being set. (Lump the Size Plates not in use together
and store them at the rear.)
9-24
8) Close the cover from which the Size Plate is pushed in, and install the cassette.
9) Set the other cassette in the same way.
10) If the cassette pedestal is installed, do the same for the cassette of the cassette pedestal as well.
NOTE:
Paper size settings are automatically recognized.
F-9-48
9-24
9
Checking after the Installation
9-25
In the case that the floor surface is either warped or uneven, execute the following work.
Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > HV-STS > THCK-Y
MISC-P > ITB-INIT). This service mode will take approx. 2 to 3 minutes.
Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > HV-STS > THCK-M
3) Check that the value of the following service mode is "-300 to +450".
Service Mode > COPIER > DISPLAY > HV-STS > THCK-C
If the value is out of the range, be sure to perform the following procedure.
If the value is larger than "+450": lift the left front side of the main body.
If the value is smaller than "-300": lift the right front side of the main body.
Execute the ITB Equilibrium Position Detection Service Mode again, and check the value.
NOTE:
Change in equilibrium position per revolution of the adjuster: 80 to 100
Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > DENS > CONT-M
Service Mode > COPIER > ADJYST > DENS > CONT-C
Service Mode > COPIER > ADJYST > DENS > CONT-K
CAUTION:
When using paper type to which auto gradation adjustment is not executed, image
failure or damage on the hostmachine may occur.
Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > DENS > SGNL-C
Service Mode > COPIER > ADJUST > DENS > SGNL-K
NOTE:
Setting the ADF before executing Auto Adjust Gradation.
Refer to the " After installation setting" in the "the Duplex Color Image Reader Unit-B1,
Color Image Reader Unit-B1/B2 installation procedure".
9-25
9-26
9-26
9-27
NOTE:
Adjsutment method is same for both the
Cassette 1 and 2.
L1
image
F-9-49
F-9-50
F-9-51
9-27
9-28
NOTE:
When moving the scale, be sure that
the amount of the value to be moved
are the same for the 2 points.
F-9-52
9-28
9-29
NOTE:
When the cassette positions are uneven due to the mechanical adjustment, adjust them by loosening the screw at left side.
F-9-53
9-29
9-30
L1
1) Make 2-sided copy from cassette 1, and check 2) If the left margin is out of the specification, change the adjustment value for the left margin on the 2nd side in cassettte 1.
that the left margin is 2.5 -/+ 2.0mm.
COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ > ADJ-C1RE; 1 increment of the value reduces the left margin by 0.1mm
3) As for the adjustment value for side registration on the 2nd side in cassette 2, enter the same value as the adjustment value for the left margin on the
Feeding direction
2nd side in cassette 1.
of paper
COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ > ADJ-C2RE
4) To make the setting value effective, turn OFF/ON the main power of the Host Machine.
image
5) Make 2-sided copy from cassette 2, and check that the left margin is 2.5 -/+ 2.0mm.
6) If the margin is out of the specification, change the adjustment value for the left margin on the 2nd side in cassette 2.
COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ > ADJ-C2RE; 1 increment of the value reduces the left margin by 0.1mm.
7) Write down the new adjustment value on the service label.
ADJ-C1RE
F-9-54
ADJ-C2RE
8) Exit from Service Mode.
Margin Adjustment with Multi Purpose Tray (1st side; mechanical adjustment)
1) Place paper on the Multi Purpose Tray. See
the label on manual feed area to place paper.
2) Make copy from the Multi Purpose Tray, and
check that the left margin is 2.5 -/+ 1.5mm.
Feeding direction
of paper
L1
image
F-9-55
F-9-56
9-30
9-31
5) Loosen the fixing screw for the Multi Purpose Tray Upper Cover.
Screw
F-9-57
F-9-58
9-31
9-32
2) Select the following in Service Mode: COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ > REGIST
3) Change the setting value to make adjustment (1 increment of the setting value reduces the leadedge margin by 0.1mm)
4) To make the setting value effective, turn OFF/ON the main power of the Host Machine.
5) Write down the new adjustment value on the service label.
REGIST
Feeding direction
of paper
image
F-9-59
9-32
9-33
2) Select the following in Service Mode: COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ > REG-DUP1
3) Change the setting value to make adjustment (1 increment of the setting value reduces the leadedge margin by 0.1mm)
4) To make the setting value effective, turn OFF/ON the main power of the Host Machine.
5) Write down the new adjustment value on the service label.
REG-DUP1
Feeding direction
of paper
image
F-9-60
9-33
9-34
CAUTION: Do not attach the Service Book Case to the following location:
Inside the machine (inner side of the front cover)
Anywhere that blocks the louver area
Anywhere that blocks the grip area
NOTE:
In the case of machine confifuration without the cassette pedestal, attach
the Service Book Case to the Left Cover of this main unit.
F-9-61
F-9-62
9-34
9-35
<Stamp Cartridge in the case of Duplex Color Image Reader Unit-B1>
F-9-64
F-9-63
F-9-65
9-35
9-36
Feed Cover
Separation Guide
F-9-67
F-9-66
x2
F-9-68
9-36
9
Checking Network Connection
9-37
Ping Operation Procedure
Overview
CAUTION:
If the user network environment is TCP/IP, use Ping function to check that the network setting
is properly executed.
If the user network environment is IPX/SPX or Apple Talk, skip this procedure.
Ping command cannot be executed to Windows Vista PC from the Host Machine.
To execute Ping command to Windows Vista PC, disable the Fire Wall.Or, execute Ping
command to the Host Machine from Windows Vista PC.
1) Select [Settings/Registration] > [Preferences] > [Network] > [TCP/IP Settings] > [IPv4
Settings] > [PING Command].
2) Enter IP address with numeric keypad on the control panel and press "Start" key.
CAUTION:
Use the network cable of rank 5e or higher. In addition, use of shield type (STP cable)
is recommended.
When non-shield type (UTP cable) is used, the surrounding electronic equipments may
be interfered via the network cable.
"Response from the host" is displayed if Ping operation is successful. "No response from
the host" is displayed if Ping operation fails.
execute Ping.
Remote host address: IP address of PC terminal that is connected to/works with TCP/IP
network environment, which connects to this host machine.
1) Inform the system administrator to execute checking of network connection using Ping.
2) Check the remote host address with the system administrator.
3) Enter the remote host address to PING.
"Response from the host": The machine is properly connected to the network.
"No response from the host": Execute the following troubleshooting because the
machine is not connected to the network.
CAUTION:
Following setting needs to be ON to perform network setting:
[Settings/Registration] > [Preferences] > [Network] > [Confirm Network Connection
Set. Changes]
[Settings/Registration] > [Preferences] > [Network] > [TCP/IP Settings] > [IPv4
Settings] > [Use IPv4]
4) Turn OFF the main power switch.
5) Turn ON the main power switch.
9-37
9
Troubleshooting of Network
9-38
Checking Network Function on the Main Controller
Check with the loopback address:
Select: [Settings/Registration] > [Preferences] > [Network] > [TCP/IP Settings] > [IPv4
Settings] > [PING Command], and enter the IP address "127.0.0.1" with the numeric keypad
and press the Execute key.
If the display shows "Response from the host", the network of the main controller is properly
Ask the network administrator at the user's site to note the IP address of the PC that is
connected to the network.
Select: [Settings/Registration] > [Preferences] > [Network] > [TCP/IP Settings] > [IPv4
Settings] > [PING Command], and enter the IP address of PC with the numeric keypad, and
functioning.
If the display shows "No response from the host", the network function of the main controller
is faulty.
Replace with a main controller that works properly, and the check connection.
9-38
9-39
Installation Procedure
1) Move the Control Panel in the direction of the arrow.
2) Move the Control Panel Mount Cover in the direction of the arrow.
1 screw
F-9-69
F-9-70
3) Check the installing position of the 2 Joints (Right). Install them on the L marking side if they are on the H marking side.
F-9-71
9-39
9-40
F-9-72
CAUTION:
Align the screw in left side to the emboss
and tighten first.
x3
Stepped Screw
Embosses
F-9-73
9-40
9-41
x2
x2
Emboss
Reader Fixing
Hook A
Fixing Hook C
F-9-74
x6
Screw
(RS Tightening; M3x8.5)
Screw
(RS Tightening; M3x8.5)
9-41
9-42
F-9-76
Parts Number.
Q'ty
[1]
FK2-7164-000
1 pc
[2]
XA9-1956-000
4 pc
[3]
FC8-6060-000
1 sheet
T-9-3
9-42
9-43
Installation Procedure
1) Open the ADF or Copyboard Cover.
x2
x2
F-9-77
F-9-78
F-9-79
CAUTION:
When removing the Copyboard Glass, be
sure not to touch your finger to the white
plate in the surface and the backside of
the glass. If it is dirty, clean it with lintfree paper.
F-9-81
F-9-80
9-43
9-44
5) Align 3 sheets of heater sheet to the marking line, and adhere them.
Marking Line
Heater Sheet
F-9-82
CAUTION:
Do not scratch the surface of the Guide Shaft.
x4
Reader Heater
Guide Shaft
F-9-83
9-44
9-45
F-9-84
Wire
CAUTION:
Do not scratch surface of the wire and the Scanner Rail.
Scanner Rail
F-9-85
9-45
9-46
8) Loosen the screw, shift the Harness Guide in the direction of the arrow, pass the harness, and make space [A].
[A]
Screw
F-9-86
NOTE:
Make sure that the harnesses are securely fixed.
x4
F-9-87
9-46
9-47
10) Put the harness through the 2 edge saddles and connect the connector.
x2
x2
Edge Saddle
Edge Saddle
F-9-88
NOTE:
Make sure
that the
sheet is
placed on
the plate.
F-9-89
9-47
9-48
CAUTION:
When removing a
cover, do not insert
a screwdriver in the
slot.
F-9-90
F-9-91
F-9-92
9-48
9-49
[4] Screw
( Sems Round End; M3X6) x 1
F-9-93
NO.
Parts name
Parts Number
Q'ty
[1]
FM3-8915-000
1 pc.
[2]
XA9-1016-000
1 pc.
F-9-94
T-9-4
9-49
9-50
Installation Procedure
NOTE:
The installation procedure of this product is
not changed either in the host machine t or
the cassette pedestal.
Cassette 1
Cassette 3
Cassette 2
Cassette 4
Cassette Release
Button
Cassette Release
Button
F-9-95
Claw
Protrusions
F-9-96
9-50
9
3) Fit the claws (3 places) on the Cassette
Heater Unit into the holes on the Base Plate,
and then, move it toward the front.
3 claws
9-51
Caution:
Be sure that the claws are fit into the
holes of the Base Plate properly.
Base Plate
Base Plate
F-9-97
4) Tighten the removed screw (W sems round end; M3X6) with the stubby driver to connect the connector.
(The figure below shows an example of the Cassette Pedestal. Follow the same step as for the host machine.)
Connector
F-9-98
9-51
9-52
Caution:
When removing the cover, be
sure not to insert a screwdriver in
the elongate hole.
F-9-99
5) Check that the breaker switch in the back of the main unit is ON.
6) Turn ON, if it was OFF.
F-9-100
F-9-101
9-52
9-53
[6]
[5]
[1]
[8]
[4]
[5]
[11]
[2]
[7]
[10]
[9]
F-9-102
[1]
Heater unit
1pc.
[2]
AC input connector
1pc.
[3]
1pc.
[4]
AC cable
1pc.
[5]
2pcs.
[6]
1pc.
[7]
1pc.
[8]
RS tight screw(M4x8)
2pcs.
[9]
Wire saddle
[10]
Plug cover
1pc.
[11]
9-53
9-54
When installing the heater to the paper deck, take the following precautions:
a. The AC power plug of the host machine must have been removed from the outlet.
b. Install the heater after installing the host machine and paper deck.
c. Use correct screws (lengths and diameters) at correct positions.
Installation Procedure
1) Remove reusable band, and then disconnect the paper deck connector from the host 2) Release the paper deck from the host machine, and then press down the latch plate of the paper deck
machine.
housing with your finger to open the housing.
F-9-104
F-9-103
9-54
9-55
3) Remove three screws, and then detach the right cover of the paper deck in the
direction of the arrow shown.
4) Remove four screws and two other screw, and then detach the rear
cover of the paper deck.
x3
x6
F-9-105
F-9-106
5) Remove three screws and one connector, and then detach the front-upper cover.
x3
x2
x1
F-9-107
F-9-108
9-55
9-56
7) Attach the supplied cable protection bushing to the hole on 8) Place the heater unit under the top 9) Insert the two hooks of the heater unit into the holes on the top plate of the paper deck, and then
the top panel of the paper deck.
panel of the paper deck, and then
secure the heater unit to the main body of the paper deck using a screw with toothed washer.
take the connector out of the hole
on the top plate.
x1
F-9-109
F-9-110
11) Remove one screw to remove the blind plate from the power cord mount of the paper deck.
x1
F-9-112
F-9-111
9-56
9
12
12) Install the supplied AC input connector in two steps([A] > [B]).
Install the ground cable using a screw with toothed washer.
9-57
13) Install the relay harness unit to the rear side panel of the paper deck using the two screws (M4X8),
and then connect the connector.
[A]
[B]
x2
x1
F-9-113
F-9-114
14) Wind the relay harness (one and half turns) around the cable guides on the power
cord mount, and then connect the connector.
15) Reattach the exterior covers of the paper 16) Manually slide the paper deck to
deck in the following sequence:
the left to place it aside of the host
machine.
[1] Top cover (Take care not to have cables
caught.) (M4X8: 2 pcs.)
[2] Front-upper cover (Insert the connector.)
(M4X8: 3 pcs.)
[3] Rear cover (M3X8: 2 pcs., M4X8: 4 pcs.)
[4] Right cover (M4X8: 3 pcs.)
F-9-115
9-57
9-58
17) Attach reusable band, and then connect the connector of the paper deck to the back 18) Stick the power supply label to the rear panel of the paper deck.
of the host machine.
F-9-117
F-9-116
x1
F-9-118
9-58
9-59
20) Attach two wire saddles to the rear panel of the host machine, and then connect the AC cable connector to the power cord mount of the heater.
Route the AC cable as shown, and then connect the other connector (plug) to the receptacle on the rear panel of the host machine.
F-9-119
21) Fix the supplied plug cover at rear side of the host machine with 1 screw (bind
head;M4x4) removed at the step 19.
To ensure smooth connection of the heater power connectors, explain to the user that any obstacle that can
prevent the paper deck from opening should not be placed in the hatched area.
[1]: Host machine
[A]: Front
x1
[1]
[A]
F-9-120
[2]
F-9-121
9-59
9-60
Utility Tray-A1/A2
Checking the Contents
[1] Utility Tray Unit X 1
Included in A2 only
Included in A2 only
F-9-122
9-60
9-61
Installation Procedure
<In case of Utility Tray A1>
1) Loosen the 2 screws on the Utility Tray Unit to separate the Mounting Plate and the Utility Tray.
Screws
F-9-123
1-2) While pulling the [A] part of the Utility Tray, remove the Utility Tray Mounting Plate.
CAUTION:
[A]
F-9-125
F-9-126
9-61
9-62
x4
F-9-127
x2
F-9-128
9-62
9-63
Cap Cover
F-9-129
9-63
9-64
F-9-130
9-64
9-65
Installation Procedure
1) Open the Right Lower Cover. (Open also the Right
Upper Cover in the same time).
x3
F-9-131
Claw
F-9-132
x2
x5
Claw
F-9-133
9-65
9-66
x2
Claw
F-9-134
F-9-135
7) Remove the connector of the Cassette Pedestal.(If the Pedestal is not installed, this procedure is not needed.)
Harness Guide in 6 places
5 Connectors
Connector
x6
x5
Guide
F-9-136
9-66
9-67
2 Rubber caps
2 Screws
Claw in 2 places
Hook in 2 places
Hook
x2
Claw
x2
Claw
Hook
F-9-137
x3
Claw
x2
Claw
F-9-138
F-9-139
9-67
9
11) Remove the Key Switch Bracket.
2 Screws
9-68
12) Install the Key Switch Unit to the Key Switch Bracket.
1 Screw (Binding: M4x6)
x2
F-9-141
F-9-140
13) Install the Key Switch Bracket assembled in the previous procedure.
2 Screws (use the screw removed in step 11)
x2
x2
F-9-142
F-9-143
9-68
9-69
15) Connect the connector of the host machine with the connector of Key Switch Unit.
16) Put the Feed Driver PCB back in the original position.
F-9-144
17) Cut the [A] part of the removed Right Rear Cover 2 in step 10) with nipper, etc.
[A]
F-9-145
9-69
9-70
9-70
9-71
1 [9]
Screw(Binding; M3X20) X 1
1 [10]
Screw(Binding; M4X6) X 1
F-9-146
9-71
9-72
Installation Procedure
1) Open the Right Lower Cover (Open also the Right
Delivery Unit in the same time).
x3
Claw
F-9-147
F-9-148
9-72
9-73
x2
USB Cable
x2
Reader Power
Cable
x2
Cable Guide
Wire Saddles
Connectors
F-9-150
F-9-149
x2
Grips
F-9-151
9-73
9-74
7) Hold the grip in 2 places, remove the Main Controller PCB 1 while avoiding the removed harness.
8) Remove the Voice Operation Board Support Plate from the Main Controller Roller PCB 1.
(Do not use the removed Support Voice Operation Board.)
2 Screws (removed screw will be
used in step 9))
x2
F-9-152
F-9-153
9) Install the Voice Operation Board Unit in the Main Controller Roller PCB 1.
1 Connector
2 screws (2 Screws that removed in step 8))
2 Screws (TP; M3x6)
NOTE:
Make sure that the connector
is properly installed.
x4
Connector
F-9-154
9-74
9-75
CAUTION:
Lift the handle, insert the Main
Controller PCB 1 until it stops, tilt
the grip and install the 2 screws.
x2
Grip
F-9-155
NOTE:
Handle the Reader Power Cable
from the connector side and
make a slack at A part.
Bend the Reader Power Cable at
a right angle on B part.
x2
[A]
Cable Guide
Wire Saddles
[B]
Reader Power Cable
Connectors
F-9-156
9-75
9-76
13) Remove the Small Cover installed in the Right Rear Cover 1.
14) Cut the [A] part of the Right Rear Cover 1 with nipper, etc.
1 Screw
Claw in 2 places
[A]
x2
[A]
F-9-157
16) Close the Right Lower Cover and Right Upper Cover.
F-9-158
17) Remove the Rubber Cap, screw, the Cover Seal from the Reader Right Cover.
(Do not use the removed Rubber Cap, screw and Cover Seal.)
NOTE:
Do not close the Right Rear
Cover 1.
Cover Seal
Rubber Cap
F-9-159
9-76
9-77
18) Remove the Speaker Unit (Lower) from the Speaker Unit.
x2
x2
F-9-160
F-9-161
x2
F-9-163
F-9-162
9-77
9-78
22) Peel off the paper liner, and affix the Cord Guide.
23) Peel off the Cover Seal, and install the 2 Wire Saddles.
Cover Seal
Wire Saddles
Cord Guide
F-9-164
24) Install the Ring Core to both sides of the DVI Cable, and remove the cap.
Ring Core
DVI Cable
Cap
F-9-166
F-9-165
9-78
9-79
26) Pass the DVI Cable through the hole of the Right Rear Cover 1, and close the cover.
27) Pass DVI Cable to the Cord Guide, and install the cover.
28) Fix the DVI Cable to the Wire Saddle
F-9-167
F-9-168
9-79
9-80
Setting Check
1) Connect the power plug of the host machine to the power outlet.
2) Open the switch cover and turn ON the main power switch.
3) [Settings/Registration] > [Preferences] > [Accessibility] > [Voice Navigation Settings] > and make sure that [Use Voice Navigation] is [ON].
4) [Settings/Registration] > [Preferences] > [Accessibility] > [Voice Navigation Settings] > [Voice Navigation at Startup] and make sure that is [Select Mode at Startup] set.
5) [Settings/Registration] > [Preferences] > [Accessibility] > [Voice Navigation Settings] > and make sure that [Tune Microphone] is displayed.
Operation Check
When using
1) Press Reset Key and Voice Recognition Button for 3 secs or more.
2) In the operation screen [Voice Navigation], select one of the following: [Manual+Vocal Mode/Vocal Mode/Manual Mode], and press OK.
3) The display in Panel Screen, if the display in panel screen is boxed with red frame, Voice Guidance Kit is available.
NOTE:
If [Manual Mode] is selected in [Voice Navigation], nothing is going to happen even if Voice Recognition Button is pressed.
If Voice Guidance Kit doesnt properly operate, check the below.
Enter Service Mode > [COPIER] > [DISPLAY] > [VERSION], and check whether languages to be used for [TTS-JA/TTS-EN/TTS-IT/TTS-FR/TTS-DE] are properly installed.
Enter Service Mode > [COPIER] > [DISPLAY] > [VERSION], and check whether [ASR-JA/ASR-EN] is properly installed.
9-80
9-81
1 [5]
Cord Guide X 7
F-9-169
9-81
9-82
<CD/GUIDES>
Voice Guidance kit Users Guide
Voice Guidance Guide CD
Sheet: FCC/IC
9-82
9-83
Installation Procedure
1) Open the Right Lower Cover. (Open also the Right
Delivery Unit in the same time.)
x3
F-9-170
Claw
F-9-171
x2
USB Cable
x2
Reader Power
Cable
x2
Cable Guide
Wire Saddles
Connectors
F-9-173
F-9-172
9-83
9-84
x2
Grips
F-9-174
7) Hold the grip in 2 places, remove the Main Controller PCB 1 while avoiding the removed harness.
8) Remove the Voice Operation Board Support Plate from the Main Controller PCB 1. (Do not use the
removed Support Voice Operation Board.)
2 Screws (removed screw will be
used in step 9))
x2
F-9-175
F-9-176
9-84
9-85
9) Install the Voice Guidance Board Unit in the Main Controller PCB 1.
1 Connector
2 screws (2 Screws that removed in step 8))
2 Screws (TP; M36)
NOTE:
Make sure that the connector is
installed properly.
x4
Connector
F-9-177
CAUTION:
Lift the handle, insert the Main Controller
PCB 1 until it stops, tilt the grip and
install the 2 screws.
x2
Grip
F-9-178
9-85
9-86
11) Install the USB Cable and Control Panel Communication Cable.
12) If reader is installed, install the Reader Power Cable.
NOTE:
Handle the Reader Power Cable
from the connector side and make
a slack at A part.
Bend the Reader Power Cable at
a right angle on B part.
x2
[A]
Cable Guide
Wire Saddles
[B]
Reader Power Cable
Connectors
F-9-179
13) Remove the small cover installed in the Right Rear Cover 1.
14) Cut the [A] part of Right Rear Cover 1 with nipper, etc.
1 Screw
Claw in 2 places
[A]
x2
[A]
F-9-180
F-9-181
9-86
9
15) Install the Right Rear Cover 1.
9-87
17) Remove the Rubber Cap, screw, and Cover Seal from the Reader Right Cover. (Do not use the removed
Rubber Cap, screw and Cover Seal.)
NOTE:
Do not close the Right Rear
Cover 1.
Cover Seal
Rubber Cap
F-9-182
x2
F-9-184
F-9-183
9-87
9
20) Install the Ring Core to both sides of the Speaker Cable.
9-88
21) Remove the cover of the 3 Cord Guides.
50mm
F-9-186
F-9-185
22) Peel off the paper liner, and affix them in 3 places in the Cord Guide as shown in the figure.
NOTE:
If this is used together with the
Card Reader-C1.
Use the wire saddle enclosed with
the Card Reader Installation Kit-B1
to the [A] area.
[A]
F-9-187
F-9-188
9-88
9-89
24) Pass the Speaker Cable through the hole of the Right Rear Cover 1, and close the cover.
25) Pass the Speaker Cable to Cord Guide, and install the 3 Cord Guide covers.
F-9-189
F-9-190
9-89
9-90
Operation Check
<During use>
1) Press reset key 3 secs or more.
2) Press [Main Menu] in Control Panel.
3) If the display in panel screen is boxed with red frame, Voice Guidance Kit is available.
If Voice Guidance Kit doesnt properly operate, check the below.
Enter Service Mode > [COPIER] > [DISPLAY] > [VERSION], and check whether languages to be used for [TTS-JA/TTS-EN/TTS-IT/TTS-FR/TTS-DE] are properly
installed.
9-90
9-91
CAUTION:
To install the Card Reader-C1, the Card Reader Mounting Kit-B1 is required.
To install the Copy Card Reader-F1, the Card Reader Mounting Kit-B2 is required.
F-9-191
9-91
9-92
F-9-192
9-92
9-93
Use 4 of them
9-93
9-94
F-9-193
9-94
9-95
Installation Procedure
CAUTION:
When installing this equipment, refer to [Option Installation Combination List] and install it.
After installing the Card Reader-C1/Copy Card Reader-F1, input the card number to be used in service mode on this equipment: [COPIER] > [FUNCTION] > [INSTALL] > [CARD]; otherwise
the card cannot be recognized even though it is inserted.
F-9-194
x3
Claw
F-9-195
9-95
9-96
5) Remove the USB Cable and the Control Panel Communication Cable.
Control Panel
Communication Cable
x2
USB Cable
x2
Reader Power
Cable
x2
Cable Guide
Wire Saddles
Connectors
F-9-197
F-9-196
x2
Grips
F-9-198
9-96
9
7) Hold the 2 grips and remove the Main Controller PCB 1 while
avoiding the removed harness.
9-97
8) Remove the 2 screws and the upper screw of Blanking Cover from the Main
Controller PCB 1.(Removed screw is used in the procedure 10))
Blanking Cover
x3
F-9-199
F-9-200
9) Remove the screw and remove the PCB Spacer.(Removed screw is used in the procedure 12))
PCB Spacer
F-9-201
9-97
9-98
11) Install the connector of Card Reader External Relay Harness.
x3
F-9-203
F-9-202
CAUTION:
Install it in the position where the tie-wrap of
Card Reader External Relay Harness is inside
the Connector Cover..
F-9-204
9-98
9-99
CAUTION:
Lift the handle, insert the Main Controller PCB 1 until it
stops, tilt the grip and install the 2 screws.
x2
Grips
F-9-205
14) Install the USB Cable and the Control Panel Communication Cable.
15) When the Reader is installed, install the Reader Power Cable..
NOTE:
Handle the Reader Power Cable from the connector side and
make a slack at A part.
Bend the Reader Power Cable at a right angle on B part.
x2
[A]
Cable Guide
Wire Saddles
[B]
Reader Power Cable
Connectors
F-9-206
9-99
9-100
16) Pass the Card Reader External Relay Harness through the Right Rear Cover 1 and install it.
x3
Wire Saddle
F-9-207
17) Close the Right Rear Cover 1, Right Lower Cover and the Right Upper 18) Remove the Lower Cover of the Card Reader Unit, and change the position of the cable. (Copy
Card Reader-F1 only)
Cover.
1 Screws
19) Install the Lower Cover of the Card Reader Unit.
Lower Cover
F-9-208
9-100
9-101
21) Install the Card Reader Unit to the Card Reader Mounting Plate (front) Unit.
20) Remove the Jumper from the connector of Card Reader Unit.
(Removed Jumper will not be used.)
1 Toothed Washer
1 Screw (RS tight; M4X10)
1 Wire saddle
Wire Saddle
Toothed Washer
F-9-210
F-9-209
22) Remove the 2 Blanking Seal from the Reader Right Cover.
23) Install the Card Reader Installation Plate (rear) to the host machine.
2 Screws (TP;
M4X12)
Blanking Seal
x2
F-9-211
F-9-212
9-101
9-102
24) Connect the Card Reader External Relay Harness to the connector of Card Reader Unit.
1 Connector
1 Edge Saddle
Connector
Edge
Saddle
F-9-213
25) Install the Card Reader Mounting Plate (front) Unit to the Card Reader Mounting Plate (rear).
CAUTION:
Do not pinch the harness.
x4
6
F-9-215
F-9-214
9-102
9-103
27) Remove the backing paper of Cord Guide and put it in the 2 places indicated in the figure.
28) Remove the face seal, and install the wire saddle.
Wire saddle
Cord Guide
F-9-216
29) Put the Card Reader External Relay Harness through the 2 places of Cord Guide and install the cover.
30) Fix the Card Reader External Relay Harness with the Wire Saddle.
F-9-217
9-103
9-104
NOTE:
The number of card (number of
department) can be changed if a
request arises from a user. Make this
setting before the step 3).
Change the setting value in service
mode (level 2) > [COPIER] >
[OPTION] > [FNC-SW] > [CARDRNG].
To enable the setting value, turn
OFF/ON the main power switch.
After that, go through the procedure
from step 2).
NOTE:
After setting, if a request arises from
a user and changing the number of
card (number of department), make
a following setting. In that case,
the current counter information by
department will be reset.
9-104
9-105
Copy Tray-J1
Checking the contents
[1] Copy Tray x 1
F-9-218
9-105
9-106
Installation procedure
1) Remove the Right Delivery Frame Cover with flat-blade screwdriver.
2 Claws
claw
x2
F-9-219
F-9-220
9-106
9-107
9-107
9-108
F-9-221
9-108
9-109
Installation Procedure
1) Release the claw of the Inner 2way Tray Support using flat-blade screwdriver,
2) Turn over the Inner 2way Tray Support and install to the host machine.
and release the Inner 2way Tray from the host machine.
F-9-222
3) Insert the Inner 2way Tray to 2 slots of the Delivery Assembly, and hook
NOTE:
Insert the Inner 2way Tray to the
slot of the Delivery Assembly
and hook it to the Second Tray
Support so that boss is inserted
to the Inner Rear Cover 1.
CAUTION:
Check that the Inner 2way Tray
Unit is inserted to the Inner 2way
Tray Support.
F-9-223
9-109
9-110
4) Insert the insert pin into the hole of the In Tray, and fix to the Inner 2way Tray Support. 5) Select copy to the Tray B, and perform test Connect the Power Plug into the outlet.
6) Open the switch cover and turn ON the Main Power Switch.
F-9-224
9-110
9-111
F-9-225
Pre-Check
1) Check the memory capacity.
Service Mode > COPIER > DISAPLAY > ACC-STS > RAM
2) Exit the service mode.
9-111
9-112
Installation Procedure
1) Remove the Left Rear Cover.
2 Rubber Caps
2 Screws
5 Claws
x2
Claws
x5
Rubber Caps
F-9-226
F-9-227
Left Rear
Sub Cover
F-9-228
F-9-229
9-112
9-113
x2
Grip
F-9-230
F-9-231
9-113
9-114
CAUTION:
Lift the grip and insert the
Main Controller PCB 2.
When it touches the end,
tilt the grip and install it with
2 screws.
x2
Grip
F-9-232
9-114
9-115
9-115
9-116
Expansion Bus-F1/F2
9-116
9-117
1 [2]
F-9-233
IPSec Board-B2
[1] IPSec PCB 1
F-9-234
<CD/Guides>
FCC/IC Instruction Sheet for UAS only
9-117
9-118
1 [8] Antenna
Tape x 1Sheet
F-9-235
9-118
9-119
*1 Be sure to keep the remaining of the 3 sheets of tape, as it might be needed for later use.
*2 Not used.
*3 3 out of 5 screws are used.
<CD/Guides>
Users Manual
Wireless LAN User Manual CD
Sheet: FCC/IC (UAS only)
9-119
9-120
Installation Procedure
Removing the Main Controller PCB 1
1) Open the Right Lower Cover (Open also the Right
Delivery Unit in the same time).
x3
F-9-236
Claw
F-9-237
x2
USB Cable
x2
Reader Power
Cable
x2
Cable Guide
Wire Saddles
Connectors
F-9-239
F-9-238
9-120
9-121
x2
Grips
F-9-240
F-9-241
9-121
9-122
2) Remove the 3 screws of the Main Controller PCB 1, and install the 3 PCB Spacers.
3 Screws (removed screw will be used in step 3))
x3
x2
F-9-243
F-9-242
3) Install the PCI Bus Expansion PCB by inserting it to the connector of the Main Controller PCB 1.
3 Screws (screws removed in step 2)).
x3
4) Install the IPSec Security PCB by inserting it to the connector of the PCI Bus Expansion PCB.
2 Screws (TP; M3x6) (in the IPSec Board-B2 contents)
x2
F-9-244
F-9-245
9-122
9-123
CAUTION:
Lift the handle, insert the Main
Controller PCB 1 until it stops,
tilt the grip and install the 2
screws.
x2
NOTE:
Handle the Reader Power
Cable from the connector
side and make a slack at A
part.
Bend the Reader Power
Cable at a right angle on B
part.
x2
[A]
Cable Guide
Wire Saddles
[B]
Reader Power Cable
Connectors
F-9-247
9-123
9-124
To install the Expansion Bus-F1/F2, Cordless Wireless LAN Board-B1 and IPSec Board-B2 in the same time.
F-9-248
F-9-249
9-124
9
1) Install the Bulk Head Unit in the Wireless LAN Support Plate.
2 Screws (TP; M3x6) (in the Wireless LAN Board-B1 contents)).
9-125
2) Install the PCI Bus Expansion PCB (in the Expansion Bus-F1 contents) in the PCI Expansion Support Plate.
x2
x2
[A]
F-9-251
F-9-250
3) Insert the Wireless LAN Board to the connector of the PCI Bus Expansion PCB, and install it in PCI
Expansion Support Plate.
1 Screw (TP; M3x6) (in the Wireless LAN Board-B1 contents).
4) Remove the Cover Plate from the Main Controller Roller PCB 1 (The removed Cover Plate will not
be used anymore).
2 Screws (the removed screw will be used in step 7))
x2
F-9-252
F-9-253
9-125
9-126
5) Remove the 3 screws of the Main Controller PCB 1, and install the 3 PCB Spacers (in the PCI Bus Expansion Kit Content).
3 Screws (the removed screws will be used in step 6)).
x3
F-9-254
6) Install the PCI Expansion Support Plate assembled at step 3) in the Main Controller PCB 1.
x3
F-9-255
9-126
9-127
7) Install the Wireless LAN Support Plate assembled in step 1) in the Main Controller PCB 1.
x4
CAUTION:
Do not tuck the Fan Cable when
tightening the screw of Wireless
LAN Support Plate.
F-9-256
8) Insert the terminal of Bulk Head Unit into the indicated position.
NOTE:
To install the IPSec Security Board, perform step 9)
to 11). If IPSec Security Board is not to be installed,
perform from step 12.
NOTE:
Make sure that the terminal
is securely settled.
F-9-257
9-127
9
9) Remove the plate of the IPSec Security PCB. (Removed plate is not used anymore).
2 Screws (Removed screws will be used in step 10)).
9-128
10) Turn the IPSec Security PCB (in the IPSec Board-B2 contents) upside down, and install the Wireless LAN
Auxiliary Plate (in the Wireless LAN Board-B1 content)..
2 Screws (use the screws
removed in step 9)).
x2
x2
Wireless LAN
Auxiliary Plate
F-9-258
F-9-259
11) Install the IPSec Security PCB by inserting it to the connector of the PCI Bus Expansion PCB.
2 Screws (TP; M3x6) (in the
IPSec Board-B2 contents)
x2
F-9-260
9-128
9-129
CAUTION:
Lift the handle, insert the Main
Controller PCB 1 until it stops,
tilt the grip and install the 2
screws.
x2
13) Install the USB Cable and Control Panel Communication Cable.
14) If Reader is installed, install the Reader Power Cable.
NOTE:
Handle the Reader Power
Cable from the connector
side and make a slack at A
part.
Bend the Reader Power
Cable at a right angle on B
part.
x2
[A]
Cable Guide
Wire Saddles
[B]
Reader Power Cable
Connectors
F-9-262
9-129
9-130
18) Affix the Antenna Tape in MFP Antenna, and affix it in the Reader.
[B]
[A]
Antenna Tape
60mm
F-9-264
MFP Antenna
F-9-263
20) Peel off the paper liner, and install the Cord Guide.
25mm
F-9-265
F-9-266
9-130
9
21) Pass the MFP Antenna Cable to the Cord Guide, and
install the Cord Guide Cover.
9-131
22) Open the Right Rear Cover 1, insert the connector of MFP Antenna to the terminal of the Main Controller PCB 1.
1 Wire Saddle
Connector
Wire saddle
F-9-268
F-9-267
NOTE:
Be sure that the slack of the
MFP Antenna Cable is in the
backside lower part of the
Host Machine.
F-9-269
F-9-270
9-131
9-132
9-132
9-133
CAUTION:
When using the mirroring function, be sure to install 2 HDDs of the same capacity.
Combination of Product
Option HDD (250GB)
Removable HDD Kit
Option HDD (250GB) + Removable HDD Kit
Option HDD (80GB) + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit
2 Option HDDs (250GB) + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit
Option HDD (80GB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit
2 Option HDDs (250GB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit
HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit
Removable HDD Kit + HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit
Option HDD (250GB) + HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit
Option HDD (250GB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit
Reference Pages
p. 9-134 to p. 9-143
p. 9-144 to p. 9-159
p. 9-160 to p. 9-181
p. 9-282 to p. 9-304
p. 9-305 to p. 9-328
p. 9-329 to p. 9-360
p. 9-361 to p. 9-392
p. 9-182 to p. 9-201
p. 9-202 to p. 9-229
p. 9-230 to p. 9-252
p. 9-253 to p. 9-281
T-9-6
9-133
9-134
[2] HDD x 1
[3] Vibration-prevention
Dumper x 4
[8] Gasket x 1
<CD/GUIDS>
[4] Spacersx 4
F-9-271
9-134
9
Points to Note Regarding Data Backup/Export
Before performing work that will result in the loss of data, inform the system administrator of
the inevitable loss, asking him to make a backup or export of important data items.
Backup or export work must not be performed by the service person because of security
considerations.
In this Installation Procedure, a series of backup or export procedures are described for
reference.
9-135
List of Data to be Deleted
Data to be Deleted
Availability of Backup
Yes
Yes *1
Yes
Yes
No
Yes *2
No
Yes
Yes *3
No
No
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
No
No
Yes *4
No
Yes *5
Yes
Yes
T-9-7
9-135
9-136
Reference
The data items that have been backed up may be restored when this product has been
installed. These data items are property of the user, and the restoration work must be
performed by the system administrator.
The method of restoration is described in the Users Guide. See Table (Data to be backed up)
in Points to Note About Installation of the Installation Procedure.
If you have logged on to the machine using a login service, such as SSO-H (Single
Sign-On H) before using this product, you must select the login service again
using SMS (Service Management Service) after restarting the machine. For more
information on using SMS, see the "e-Manual > MEAP".
T-9-8
When you start using this product, passwords set for Mail Boxes are erased. Set
these passwords again.
1) Access the URL given below, and then access Remote UI.
5) Select the save format for Address list, and click [Start Export].
a distinctive name to an export file so that you can recognize it when importing it.
NOTE:
Exporting the device settings will export all contents of the address list. In other words,
there is no need for a backup unless it needs to be done individually.
9-136
9-137
1) Access the URL given below, and then access Remote UI.
When a MEAP application has been installed, the data and license that the MEAP application
retains will be deleted. If no MEAP application is installed, there is no need to make a backup.
If the system administrator ID and password are set, a dialog box to enter the user name
If a MEAP application has a backup function, make a backup of the data peculiar to the
and password appears. Enter the system administrator ID in User Name and the password
MEAP application using this function. With regard to the license, there is a need to stop all
applications from SMS (Service Management Service), invalidate the license, and download
2) Select [Settings/Registration] > [Management Settings] > [Data Management] > [Import/
Export].
3) Click [Settings/Registration].
Data that has been backed up using MEAP back of the SST before the use of this
product is started must not be written back to the host machine after the use of this
product is started. Similarly, even if the data that has been backed up after the use
of this product is started is written back to the host machine before the use of this
product is started, the machine does not operate. It is necessary to make sure that the
implementation conditions for this product are compatible before and after making a
backup of data, and the MEAP backup function does not permit making a backup of
data in the course of installing the kit.
5) Following the instructions on the window, specify the location to save the file.
4. Printer Settings Export Procedure
NOTE:
The following items to be exported are the same as the ones which are distributed by
device information distribution.
1) Access the URL given below, and then access Remote UI.
http://[IP address of the device]/
If the system administrator ID and password are set, a dialog box to enter the user name
and password appears. Enter the system administrator ID in User Name and the password
in Password, and then click [Administrator Login].
2) Select [Settings/Registration] > [Management Settings] > [Data Management] > [Import/
Export].
The overview of procedures for stop of MEAP applications, Disabling of the license, and
download of an Disabled license file is described below. For more information, see the
MEAPSMS Administrator Guide.
7. Stop of MEAP Applications, Disabling, Download of Disabled License Files and
Uninstallation
CAUTION:
The default password is MeapSmsLogin. If a user has changed the password, ask the
user to change the password again after the use of this product is started.
2) Click [MEAP Application Management].
3) Click [Stop] button of the application you want to stop on the MEAP Application
Management page.
4) Click the application of which license has been installed.
5) Click [License Control], and then click [Disable]. Click [Yes] in a confirmation window for
9-137
9
6) Click [Download] under Download/delete Disabled License File item. Following the
9-138
9. Backup of User inbox and Advanced Box document data
instructions on the window, specify the location to save the file. Set a distinctive name
for the disabled license file so that you can recognize it for which application. After you
download the disabled license file to your PC, click [Delete]. Click [Yes] in a confirmation
When setting a SMB server as a backup destination, Advanced Box data saved in a
large capacity HDD cannot be backed up. The Advanced Box data backed up from the
large capacity HDD cannot be restored to the standard HDD.
Depending on the system version of the machine, both backup and restoration might
not be performed.
The procedure of backup and restoration of a box document data is described below.
Specify the backup destination of a document data:
Backup to SMB server
Select SMB as a backup destination and specify an address, a user name, a password,
and a path to the SMB server to which saved data is backed up.
Backup to USB HDD
Select USB HDD as a backup destination and specify a path to the USB HDD folder to
CAUTION:
Password: password
3) Click [User Control].
4) Put a checkmark to Select All, and then click [Export].
5) Leave the file format and character code as defaults and click [Start Export].
6) Following the instructions on the window, specify the location to save the file and click [Save].
9-138
9-139
10. Quick Menu Information Export Procedure
CAUTION:
Regarding the method of inputting characters, see 'Basic Operations' in the
e-Manual.
A host address can be up to 128 characters in 1 byte or 64 characters in 2 bytes
using the 'Kana-Kanji,' 'Katakana,' 'alphanumeric character,' 'mark,' and 'code input'
modes.
A path to the folder can be up to 255 characters in 1 byte (127 characters in 2 bytes).
A user name can be up to 128 characters in 1 byte or 64 characters in 2 bytes
using the 'Kana-Kanji,', 'Katakana,' 'alphanumeric character,' 'mark,' and 'code input'
modes.
A password can be up to 7 to 48 characters using the 'alphanumeric character' and
'mark (1 byte)' modes.
The voice sound symbol and the semi-voice sound symbol entered in the 'Katakana (1
byte)' mode are counted up as one 1-byte character.
1) Access the URL given below, and then access Remote UI.
http://[IP address of the device]/
If the system administrator ID and password are set, a dialog box to enter the user name
and password appears. Enter the system administrator ID in User Name and the password
in Password, and then click [Administrator Login].
2) Select Basic Tools > [Quick Menu] > [Export].
3) If the file needs to be encrypted, enter the password after check [Encrypt file]. (The number
of characters for the password must be more than 4 but less than 16.)
4) Click [Export].
5) Following the instructions on the window, specify the location to save the file.
11. User Information of the Advanced Box Export Procedure
1) Access the URL given below, and then access Remote UI.
http://[IP address of the device]/
If the system administrator ID and password are set, a dialog box to enter the user name
and password appears. Enter the system administrator ID in User Name and the password
in Password, and then click [Administrator Login].
2) Select Basic Tools > [User Access Control for Advanced Box]. The dialog box to enter the
3) Click [Execute].
user name of administrator and password appears, enter the system administrator ID and
password, and then click [Log In].
CAUTION:
If any of the host IP address, user name, password, or path to the folder is not
correctly entered, a backup cannot be made.
If you select to encrypt the backup data, the backup process may take longer.
[Restoring the backup data of User inbox and Advanced Box document data]
1) Select [Settings/Registration] > [Management Settings] > [Data Management] > [Restore].
2) Click [Display Backup Data].
3) Select the backup data to restore from the list and then click [Execute].
CAUTION:
If you want to restore encrypted backup data, enter the same password used when
backing up the data.
2) Check that the display on the Control Panel and the Main Power Supply Lamp are turned
off before disconnecting the outlet.
Depending on the settings of the machine, the backup data may not be completely
restored, or some documents may be automatically printed.
Restoration is performed after all of the box data stored in the machine, or
documents that are being sent, received, or stored, are erased.
9-139
9-140
Installation Procedure
1) Assemble the option HDD (250GB).
1 Option HDD
1 HDD Support Pate
4 Dust-prevention Dumpers
4 spacers
4 screws (binding with flat washer; M3x14)
Option HDD
x4
Spacer
Vibration-prevention Dumpe
F-9-272
CAUTION:
Assembling the option HDD, be careful of the installation direction.
CAUTION:
Make sure that the label on the option HDD is facing up.
Be sure to place the gasket in contact with the label-free metal surface of the HDD
surface.
Make sure that [A] part of HDD Support Plate is placed at the opposite side of connector.
Label
HDD
Connector side
[A]
Connector
Gasket
Screw hole
F-9-273
F-9-274
9-140
9
3) Open the Right Rear Cover 1.
9-141
5) Remove the Signal Cable and the Power Cable from the HDD.
x2
Signal Cable
Power Cable
F-9-275
F-9-277
F-9-276
6) Put the Signal Cable and the Power Cable aside so that thay are not pinched
between the Controller Box and the HDD Unit.
x2
F-9-278
F-9-279
9-141
9
8) Remove the HDD (80GB) installed as standard from the
removed HDD Unit. (Removed HDD (80GB) will not be used.)
2 screws (Removed screw will be used in step 9).)
9-142
x2
x2
F-9-281
F-9-280
9-142
9
Installing the System Software Using the SST
9-143
The system data stored on the HDD and used to control the host machine will be lost when
When this product is installed, the machine initializes its HDD, resetting the data used for
It is important to install the system software used to control the host machine so that the
Therefore be sure to execute auto gradation adjustment (full adjust) after installing this kit.
9-143
9-144
[14] IV Cable
(FK2-8453) x 1
F-9-282
9-144
9
[16] HDD Drawer Unit x 1
[17] Screw
(R round head TP; M3 X 6) x 9
9-145
[18] Screw (P Tight ; M3 X 8) x 4
F-9-283
Installation Procedure
Removing the HDD Unit, Signal Cable and Power Supply Cable
1) Open the Right Lower Cover. (Open the Right Upper
Cover simultaneously.)
x3
Claw
F-9-284
F-9-285
9-145
9-146
5) Remove the USB Cable and the Control Panel Communication Cable.
x2
Control Panel
Communication Cable
Reader Power
Cable
USB Cable
x2
x2
Cable Guide
Wire Saddles
Connectors
F-9-286
F-9-287
7) Hold the 2 Grips, and pull out the Main Controller PCB 1
approximately 10mm toward front.
x2
Grips
F-9-288
F-9-289
9-146
9-147
9) When the Reader is installed, remove the Reader Communication Cable.
x2
claw
x5
F-9-291
F-9-290
Hook
x2
claw
Left Rear
Sub Cover
F-9-292
F-9-293
9-147
9-148
NOTE:
If the FAX Unit has been
installed, remove the 3 screws
and open the Controller Box
with the FAX Unit.
2 screws
x2
x3
Harness
Harness
F-9-295
F-9-294
CAUTION:
Do not remove
the Fan Cable.
1 edge saddle
3 wire saddles
1 cable retainer
Cable Retainer
Edge Saddle
x2
x4
Wire Saddles
Signal Cable
Fan Cable
Power Cable
F-9-297
F-9-296
9-148
9-149
2 dege saddles
5 wire saddles
2 connectors
x2
Wire Saddles
NOTE:
Connectors
x7
Edge Saddl
Signal
Cable
Power
Cable
Edge
Saddle
F-9-299
F-9-298
Wire
Saddle
x2
x2
F-9-301
F-9-300
9-149
9-150
2) Install the HDD Connector Plate first, and then HDD to the HDD Support Plate. (HDD and
screw are the ones removed in step 1).)
4 screws
HDD
x4
x4
HDD
HDD Support Plate
F-9-302
F-9-303
If there is no gasket with the HDD removed from the host machine, prepare the gasket with the following
part number and perform step 3).
KE8-1134-030
3) Affix the gasket to the place shown in the figure below.
CAUTION:
Assembling the option HDD, be careful of the installation direction.
Make sure that the label on the option HDD is facing up.
Install it in the position where the HDD connector is placed in the side with screw hole
of HDD Support Plate. (opposite direction compared to the fixed HDD)
CAUTION:
Be sure to place the gasket in contact with the label-free metal surface of the HDD surface.
Gasket
Screw hole
Screw hole
Connector
Label
Connector side
Screw hole
F-9-304
HDD
F-9-305
9-150
9-151
CAUTION:
Make sure
that there is
no opening
between the
Conversion
Connector and
part of HDD.
x2
Boss
CAUTION:
F-9-306
Hole
F-9-307
CAUTION:
Be sure to firmly hold the Connector Fixation Block when tightening the screws.
Be sure to follow the correct order to tighten the screws, otherwise the Conversion Connector may not be connected properly, resulting in poor contact.
F-9-308
9-151
9-152
CAUTION:
CAUTION:
x2
F-9-309
F-9-310
8) Affix the HDD No.1 Label to the handle of the Removable HDD.
9) Write down the serial number of the host machine to the label for recording the number, and affix it to the area indicated in
the figure.
HDD No.
Serial No.
XXXXXXXX
F-9-311
9-152
9-153
x2
Claws
F-9-312
CAUTION:
Be careful of the installation direction of HDD Lock Plate.
HDD Lock
Plate Shaft
HDD Lock
Plate Shaft
F-9-313
9-153
9
12) Adjust the 2 bosses to the hole
and install the HDD Lid Retainer.
1 screw (TP round end; M3X6)
9-154
Holes
Bosses
CAUTION:
Be sure to use the round
end screw included in the
Removable HDD Kit as the
TP screw.
F-9-315
13) Remove the HDD Rear Cover. (Removed HDD Rear Cover will not be used.)
2 screws (Removed screw will be used in step 18)
14) Place it in the position where the edge saddle of HDD Drawer Unit is facing up, remove the lower
Drawer Cable (Slot.2).
2 screws
2 springs
2 washers
(The removed springs and
washers will be used in step
17.)
x2
x2
Drawer Cable
Edge Saddle
Washer
Spring
Screw
F-9-316
F-9-317
9-154
9-155
x2
x2
F-9-318
F-9-319
x2
IV Cable
Washer
Spring
Screw
F-9-320
9-155
9-156
x2
F-9-321
NOTE:
x3
Wire saddles
[A]
[A]
F-9-322
9-156
9
20) Install the IV Cable.
1 edge saddle
3 wire saddles
2 connectors
1 cable retainer
9-157
21) Install the Conroller Cover.
Cable Retainer
Edge Saddle
Caution:
x2
x4
Wire Saddles
Signal Cable
Power Cable
Connectors
F-9-323
CAUTION:
Be sure to use the round
end screw included in the
Removable HDD Kit as the TP
screw.
x2
F-9-325
F-9-324
9-157
9
24) Close the HDD Lid.
25) Restore the Controller Box.
9-158
26) Affix the Shutdowm Warning Label in the appropriate language on the Right Rear
Cover 1.
F-9-326
CAUTION:
Lift the handle, insert the Main
x2
Grips
F-9-327
9-158
9-159
30) Install the Right Rear Cover 1.
31) Close the Right Rear Cover 1, Right Lower
Cover, and Right Upper Cover.
32) Insert the power plug into the socket and turn on
the main power of the host machine.
NOTE:
Handle the Reader Power Cable from the
connector side and make a slack at A part.
Bend the Reader Power Cable at a right
angle on B part.
x2
[A]
Cable Guide
Wire Saddles
[B]
Reader Power Cable
Connectors
F-9-328
9-159
9-160
[2] HDD x 1
[3] Vibration-prevention
Dumper x 4
[8] Gasket x 1
<CD/GUIDS>
[4] Spacersx 4
F-9-329
9-160
9-161
F-9-330
9-161
9
[16] HDD Drawer Unit x 1
[17] Screw
(R round head TP; M3 X 6) x 9
9-162
[18] Screw (P Tight ; M3 X 8) x 4
F-9-331
<CD/Guide>
HDD Mirroring Kit-D1 User Documentation
Notice for FCC/IC
China RoHS Notice 3
9-162
9
Points to Note Regarding Data Backup/Export
Before performing work that will result in the loss of data, inform the system administrator of
the inevitable loss, asking him to make a backup or export of important data items.
Backup or export work must not be performed by the service person because of security
considerations.
In this Installation Procedure, a series of backup or export procedures are described for
reference.
9-163
List of Data to be Deleted
Data to be Deleted
Availability of Backup
Yes
Yes *1
Yes
Yes
No
Yes *2
No
Yes
Yes *3
No
No
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
No
No
Yes *4
No
Yes *5
Yes
Yes
T-9-9
9-163
9-164
Reference
The data items that have been backed up may be restored when this product has been
installed. These data items are property of the user, and the restoration work must be
performed by the system administrator.
The method of restoration is described in the Users Guide. See Table (Data to be backed up)
in Points to Note About Installation of the Installation Procedure.
6) Following the instructions on the window, specify the location to save the file. Be sure to set
T-9-10
a distinctive name to an export file so that you can recognize it when importing it.
NOTE:
Exporting the device settings will export all contents of the address list. In other words,
there is no need for a backup unless it needs to be done individually.
9-164
9-165
1) Access the URL given below, and then access Remote UI.
When a MEAP application has been installed, the data and license that the MEAP application
retains will be deleted. If no MEAP application is installed, there is no need to make a backup.
If the system administrator ID and password are set, a dialog box to enter the user name
If a MEAP application has a backup function, make a backup of the data peculiar to the
and password appears. Enter the system administrator ID in User Name and the password
MEAP application using this function. With regard to the license, there is a need to stop all
applications from SMS (Service Management Service), invalidate the license, and download
2) Select [Settings/Registration] > [Management Settings] > [Data Management] > [Import/
Export].
3) Click [Settings/Registration].
Data that has been backed up using MEAP back of the SST before the use of this
product is started must not be written back to the host machine after the use of this
product is started. Similarly, even if the data that has been backed up after the use
of this product is started is written back to the host machine before the use of this
product is started, the machine does not operate. It is necessary to make sure that the
implementation conditions for this product are compatible before and after making a
backup of data, and the MEAP backup function does not permit making a backup of
data in the course of installing the kit.
5) Following the instructions on the window, specify the location to save the file.
4. Printer Settings Export Procedure
NOTE:
The following items to be exported are the same as the ones which are distributed by
device information distribution.
1) Access the URL given below, and then access Remote UI.
http://[IP address of the device]/
If the system administrator ID and password are set, a dialog box to enter the user name
and password appears. Enter the system administrator ID in User Name and the password
in Password, and then click [Administrator Login].
2) Select [Settings/Registration] > [Management Settings] > [Data Management] > [Import/
Export].
The overview of procedures for stop of MEAP applications, Disabling of the license, and
download of an Disabled license file is described below. For more information, see the
MEAPSMS Administrator Guide.
7. Stop of MEAP Applications, Disabling, Download of Disabled License Files and
Uninstallation
CAUTION:
The default password is MeapSmsLogin. If a user has changed the password, ask the
user to change the password again after the use of this product is started.
2) Click [MEAP Application Management].
3) Click [Stop] button of the application you want to stop on the MEAP Application
Management page.
4) Click the application of which license has been installed.
5) Click [License Control], and then click [Disable]. Click [Yes] in a confirmation window for
9-165
9
6) Click [Download] under Download/delete Disabled License File item. Following the
9-166
9. Backup of User inbox and Advanced Box document data
instructions on the window, specify the location to save the file. Set a distinctive name
for the disabled license file so that you can recognize it for which application. After you
download the disabled license file to your PC, click [Delete]. Click [Yes] in a confirmation
When setting a SMB server as a backup destination, Advanced Box data saved in a
large capacity HDD cannot be backed up. The Advanced Box data backed up from the
large capacity HDD cannot be restored to the standard HDD.
Depending on the system version of the machine, both backup and restoration might
not be performed.
The procedure of backup and restoration of a box document data is described below.
Specify the backup destination of a document data:
Backup to SMB server
Select SMB as a backup destination and specify an address, a user name, a password,
and a path to the SMB server to which saved data is backed up.
Backup to USB HDD
Select USB HDD as a backup destination and specify a path to the USB HDD folder to
CAUTION:
Password: password
3) Click [User Control].
4) Put a checkmark to Select All, and then click [Export].
5) Leave the file format and character code as defaults and click [Start Export].
6) Following the instructions on the window, specify the location to save the file and click [Save].
9-166
9-167
10. Quick Menu Information Export Procedure
CAUTION:
Regarding the method of inputting characters, see 'Basic Operations' in the
e-Manual.
A host address can be up to 128 characters in 1 byte or 64 characters in 2 bytes
using the 'Kana-Kanji,' 'Katakana,' 'alphanumeric character,' 'mark,' and 'code input'
modes.
A path to the folder can be up to 255 characters in 1 byte (127 characters in 2 bytes).
A user name can be up to 128 characters in 1 byte or 64 characters in 2 bytes
using the 'Kana-Kanji,', 'Katakana,' 'alphanumeric character,' 'mark,' and 'code input'
modes.
A password can be up to 7 to 48 characters using the 'alphanumeric character' and
'mark (1 byte)' modes.
The voice sound symbol and the semi-voice sound symbol entered in the 'Katakana (1
byte)' mode are counted up as one 1-byte character.
1) Access the URL given below, and then access Remote UI.
http://[IP address of the device]/
If the system administrator ID and password are set, a dialog box to enter the user name
and password appears. Enter the system administrator ID in User Name and the password
in Password, and then click [Administrator Login].
2) Select Basic Tools > [Quick Menu] > [Export].
3) If the file needs to be encrypted, enter the password after check [Encrypt file]. (The number
of characters for the password must be more than 4 but less than 16.)
4) Click [Export].
5) Following the instructions on the window, specify the location to save the file.
11. User Information of the Advanced Box Export Procedure
1) Access the URL given below, and then access Remote UI.
http://[IP address of the device]/
If the system administrator ID and password are set, a dialog box to enter the user name
and password appears. Enter the system administrator ID in User Name and the password
in Password, and then click [Administrator Login].
2) Select Basic Tools > [User Access Control for Advanced Box]. The dialog box to enter the
3) Click [Execute].
user name of administrator and password appears, enter the system administrator ID and
password, and then click [Log In].
CAUTION:
If any of the host IP address, user name, password, or path to the folder is not
correctly entered, a backup cannot be made.
If you select to encrypt the backup data, the backup process may take longer.
[Restoring the backup data of User inbox and Advanced Box document data]
1) Select [Settings/Registration] > [Management Settings] > [Data Management] > [Restore].
2) Click [Display Backup Data].
3) Select the backup data to restore from the list and then click [Execute].
CAUTION:
If you want to restore encrypted backup data, enter the same password used when
backing up the data.
2) Check that the display on the Control Panel and the Main Power Supply Lamp are turned
off before disconnecting the outlet.
Depending on the settings of the machine, the backup data may not be completely
restored, or some documents may be automatically printed.
Restoration is performed after all of the box data stored in the machine, or
documents that are being sent, received, or stored, are erased.
9-167
9-168
Installation Procedure
Removing the HDD Unit, Signal Cable and Power Supply Cable
1) Open the Right Lower Cover. (Open the Right Upper
Cover simultaneously.)
x3
Claw
F-9-332
F-9-333
5) Remove the USB Cable and the Control Panel Communication Cable.
x2
Control Panel
Communication Cable
Reader Power
Cable
USB Cable
x2
x2
Cable Guide
Wire Saddles
Connectors
F-9-334
F-9-335
9-168
9-169
7) Hold the 2 Grips, and pull out the Main Controller PCB 1
approximately 10mm toward front.
x2
Grips
F-9-336
F-9-337
x2
claw
x5
F-9-338
F-9-339
9-169
9-170
1 screw
1 hook
2 rubber caps
2 screws
1 claw
Hook
x2
claw
Left Rear
Sub Cover
F-9-341
F-9-340
NOTE:
If the FAX Unit has been
installed, remove the 3 screws
and open the Controller Box
with the FAX Unit.
2 screws
x2
x3
Harness
Harness
F-9-343
F-9-342
9-170
9
13) Remove the Controller Cover.
11 screws (loosen)
9-171
Cable Retainer
Edge Saddle
x2
CAUTION:
Do not remove
the Fan Cable.
1 edge saddle
3 wire saddles
1 cable retainer
x4
Wire Saddles
Signal Cable
Fan Cable
Power Cable
F-9-345
F-9-344
2 dege saddles
5 wire saddles
2 connectors
NOTE:
x2
Wire Saddles
Connectors
x7
Edge Saddl
Signal
Cable
F-9-346
Power
Cable
Edge
Saddle
Wire
Saddle
F-9-347
9-171
9
17) Remove the HDD Unit by
holding it as shown in the figure
below. (Removed HDD unit will
not be used.)
2 screws (Removed screw will
not be used.)
9-172
x2
F-9-348
9-172
9-173
x2
Claws
F-9-349
CAUTION:
Be careful of the installation direction of HDD Lock Plate.
HDD Lock
Plate Shaft
HDD Lock
Plate Shaft
F-9-350
9-173
9
3) Adjust the 2 bosses to the hole and
install the HDD Lid Retainer.
1 screw (TP round end; M3X6)
9-174
Holes
Bosses
CAUTION:
Be sure to use the round
end screw included in the
Removable HDD Kit as the TP
screw.
F-9-352
4) Remove the HDD Rear Cover. (Removed HDD Rear Cover will not be used.)
2 screws (Removed screw will be used in step 9).)
5) Place it in the position where the edge saddle of HDD Drawer Unit is facing up, remove the lower Drawer Cable
(Slot.2).
2 screws
2 springs
2 washers
(The removed springs and washers will be
used in step 8).)
x2
x2
Drawer Cable
Edge Saddle
Washer
Spring
Screw
F-9-353
F-9-354
9-174
9-175
x2
x2
F-9-355
F-9-356
x2
IV Cable
x2
Washer
Spring
Screw
F-9-357
F-9-358
9-175
9-176
x3
NOTE:
Wire saddles
[A]
[A]
F-9-359
Cable Retainer
Edge Saddle
Caution:
x2
x4
Wire Saddles
Signal Cable
Power Cable
Connectors
F-9-360
9-176
9-177
CAUTION:
Assembling the option HDD, be careful of the installation direction.
Option HDD
Make sure that the label on the option HDD is facing up.
Install it in the position where the HDD connector is placed in the side with screw
hole of HDD Support Plate. (opposite direction compared to the fixed HDD)
x4
Vibration-prevention Dumpe
Label
Connector
F-9-361
Screw hole
F-9-362
CAUTION:
Screw hole
CAUTION:
Make sure that there is
no opening between the
Conversion Connector and
part of HDD.
F-9-364
HDD
F-9-363
9-177
9-178
4) Fit the 2 bosses of Connector Fixing Block to the hole of Conversion Connector and install it.
2 screws (P Tight;
M3X8)
CAUTION:
CAUTION:
Be sure to firmly hold the Connector Fixation Block when tightening the screws.
Boss
x2
Be sure not
to tighten the
screws in wrong
order. Otherwise,
the Conversion
Connector will
not be secured
properly.
Be sure to follow the correct order to tighten the screws, otherwise the
Conversion Connector may not be connected properly, resulting in poor contact.
Hole
F-9-365
F-9-366
CAUTION:
CAUTION:
x2
F-9-367
F-9-368
9-178
9-179
7) Affix the HDD No.1 Label to the handle of the Removable HDD.
8) Write down the serial number of the host machine to the label for recording the
number, and affix it to the area indicated in the figure.
CAUTION:
Be sure to use the round
end screw included in
the Removable HDD Kit
as the TP screw.
HDD No.
Serial No.
x2
XXXXXXXX
F-9-370
F-9-369
F-9-371
F-9-372
9-179
9
14) Install the removed cover and the
cable.
Rear Cover
Left Rear Sub Cover
Reader Communication Cable (when
reader is installed)
Left Rear Cover
USB Cable and Control Panel
Communication Cable
9-180
CAUTION:
Lift the handle, insert the
x2
Grips
F-9-373
NOTE:
Handle the Reader Power Cable from the
connector side and make a slack at A part.
Bend the Reader Power Cable at a right
angle on B part.
x2
[A]
Cable Guide
Wire Saddles
[B]
Reader Power Cable
Connectors
F-9-374
9-180
9
Installing the System Software Using the SST
9-181
The system data stored on the HDD and used to control the host machine will be lost when
When this product is installed, the machine initializes its HDD, resetting the data used for
It is important to install the system software used to control the host machine so that the
Therefore be sure to execute auto gradation adjustment (full adjust) after installing this kit.
9-181
9-182
F-9-375
9-182
9-183
F-9-376
<CD/Guide>
HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit-C1 User Documentation
HDD Data Encryption Kit Notice Notice
Installation Procedure
Noticd for FCC/IC
9-183
9
Points to Note Regarding Data Backup/Export
Before performing work that will result in the loss of data, inform the system administrator of
the inevitable loss, asking him to make a backup or export of important data items.
Backup or export work must not be performed by the service person because of security
considerations.
In this Installation Procedure, a series of backup or export procedures are described for
reference.
9-184
List of Data to be Deleted
Data to be Deleted
Availability of Backup
Yes
Yes *1
Yes
Yes
No
Yes *2
No
Yes
Yes *3
No
No
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
No
No
Yes *4
No
Yes *5
Yes
Yes
T-9-11
9-184
9-185
Reference
The data items that have been backed up may be restored when this product has been
installed. These data items are property of the user, and the restoration work must be
performed by the system administrator.
The method of restoration is described in the Users Guide. See Table (Data to be backed up)
in Points to Note About Installation of the Installation Procedure.
6) Following the instructions on the window, specify the location to save the file. Be sure to set
T-9-12
a distinctive name to an export file so that you can recognize it when importing it.
NOTE:
Exporting the device settings will export all contents of the address list. In other words,
there is no need for a backup unless it needs to be done individually.
9-185
9-186
1) Access the URL given below, and then access Remote UI.
When a MEAP application has been installed, the data and license that the MEAP application
retains will be deleted. If no MEAP application is installed, there is no need to make a backup.
If the system administrator ID and password are set, a dialog box to enter the user name
If a MEAP application has a backup function, make a backup of the data peculiar to the
and password appears. Enter the system administrator ID in User Name and the password
MEAP application using this function. With regard to the license, there is a need to stop all
applications from SMS (Service Management Service), invalidate the license, and download
2) Select [Settings/Registration] > [Management Settings] > [Data Management] > [Import/
Export].
3) Click [Settings/Registration].
Data that has been backed up using MEAP back of the SST before the use of this
product is started must not be written back to the host machine after the use of this
product is started. Similarly, even if the data that has been backed up after the use
of this product is started is written back to the host machine before the use of this
product is started, the machine does not operate. It is necessary to make sure that the
implementation conditions for this product are compatible before and after making a
backup of data, and the MEAP backup function does not permit making a backup of
data in the course of installing the kit.
5) Following the instructions on the window, specify the location to save the file.
4. Printer Settings Export Procedure
NOTE:
The following items to be exported are the same as the ones which are distributed by
device information distribution.
1) Access the URL given below, and then access Remote UI.
http://[IP address of the device]/
If the system administrator ID and password are set, a dialog box to enter the user name
and password appears. Enter the system administrator ID in User Name and the password
in Password, and then click [Administrator Login].
2) Select [Settings/Registration] > [Management Settings] > [Data Management] > [Import/
Export].
The overview of procedures for stop of MEAP applications, Disabling of the license, and
download of an Disabled license file is described below. For more information, see the
MEAPSMS Administrator Guide.
7. Stop of MEAP Applications, Disabling, Download of Disabled License Files and
Uninstallation
CAUTION:
The default password is MeapSmsLogin. If a user has changed the password, ask the
user to change the password again after the use of this product is started.
2) Click [MEAP Application Management].
3) Click [Stop] button of the application you want to stop on the MEAP Application
Management page.
4) Click the application of which license has been installed.
5) Click [License Control], and then click [Disable]. Click [Yes] in a confirmation window for
9-186
9
6) Click [Download] under Download/delete Disabled License File item. Following the
9-187
9. Backup of User inbox and Advanced Box document data
instructions on the window, specify the location to save the file. Set a distinctive name
for the disabled license file so that you can recognize it for which application. After you
download the disabled license file to your PC, click [Delete]. Click [Yes] in a confirmation
When setting a SMB server as a backup destination, Advanced Box data saved in a
large capacity HDD cannot be backed up. The Advanced Box data backed up from the
large capacity HDD cannot be restored to the standard HDD.
Depending on the system version of the machine, both backup and restoration might
not be performed.
The procedure of backup and restoration of a box document data is described below.
Specify the backup destination of a document data:
Backup to SMB server
Select SMB as a backup destination and specify an address, a user name, a password,
and a path to the SMB server to which saved data is backed up.
Backup to USB HDD
Select USB HDD as a backup destination and specify a path to the USB HDD folder to
CAUTION:
Password: password
3) Click [User Control].
4) Put a checkmark to Select All, and then click [Export].
5) Leave the file format and character code as defaults and click [Start Export].
6) Following the instructions on the window, specify the location to save the file and click [Save].
9-187
9-188
10. Quick Menu Information Export Procedure
CAUTION:
Regarding the method of inputting characters, see 'Basic Operations' in the
e-Manual.
A host address can be up to 128 characters in 1 byte or 64 characters in 2 bytes
using the 'Kana-Kanji,' 'Katakana,' 'alphanumeric character,' 'mark,' and 'code input'
modes.
A path to the folder can be up to 255 characters in 1 byte (127 characters in 2 bytes).
A user name can be up to 128 characters in 1 byte or 64 characters in 2 bytes
using the 'Kana-Kanji,', 'Katakana,' 'alphanumeric character,' 'mark,' and 'code input'
modes.
A password can be up to 7 to 48 characters using the 'alphanumeric character' and
'mark (1 byte)' modes.
The voice sound symbol and the semi-voice sound symbol entered in the 'Katakana (1
byte)' mode are counted up as one 1-byte character.
1) Access the URL given below, and then access Remote UI.
http://[IP address of the device]/
If the system administrator ID and password are set, a dialog box to enter the user name
and password appears. Enter the system administrator ID in User Name and the password
in Password, and then click [Administrator Login].
2) Select Basic Tools > [Quick Menu] > [Export].
3) If the file needs to be encrypted, enter the password after check [Encrypt file]. (The number
of characters for the password must be more than 4 but less than 16.)
4) Click [Export].
5) Following the instructions on the window, specify the location to save the file.
11. User Information of the Advanced Box Export Procedure
1) Access the URL given below, and then access Remote UI.
http://[IP address of the device]/
If the system administrator ID and password are set, a dialog box to enter the user name
and password appears. Enter the system administrator ID in User Name and the password
in Password, and then click [Administrator Login].
2) Select Basic Tools > [User Access Control for Advanced Box]. The dialog box to enter the
3) Click [Execute].
user name of administrator and password appears, enter the system administrator ID and
password, and then click [Log In].
CAUTION:
If any of the host IP address, user name, password, or path to the folder is not
correctly entered, a backup cannot be made.
If you select to encrypt the backup data, the backup process may take longer.
[Restoring the backup data of User inbox and Advanced Box document data]
1) Select [Settings/Registration] > [Management Settings] > [Data Management] > [Restore].
2) Click [Display Backup Data].
3) Select the backup data to restore from the list and then click [Execute].
CAUTION:
If you want to restore encrypted backup data, enter the same password used when
backing up the data.
2) Check that the display on the Control Panel and the Main Power Supply Lamp are turned
off before disconnecting the outlet.
Depending on the settings of the machine, the backup data may not be completely
restored, or some documents may be automatically printed.
Restoration is performed after all of the box data stored in the machine, or
documents that are being sent, received, or stored, are erased.
9-188
9-189
Installation Procedure
Removing the Signal Cable and Power Supply Cable
1) Open the Right Lower Cover. (Open the Right Upper
Cover simultaneously.)
x3
Claw
F-9-377
F-9-378
5) Remove the USB Cable and the Control Panel Communication Cable.
x2
Control Panel
Communication Cable
Reader Power
Cable
USB Cable
x2
x2
Cable Guide
Wire Saddles
Connectors
F-9-379
F-9-380
9-189
9-190
7) Hold the 2 Grips, and pull out the Main Controller PCB 1
approximately 10mm toward front.
x2
Grips
F-9-381
F-9-382
x2
claw
x5
F-9-383
F-9-384
9-190
9
10) Remove the Left Rear Sub Cover.
1 screw
1 hook
9-191
11) Remove the Rear Cover.
2 rubber caps
2 screws
1 claw
hook
x2
claw
Left Rear
Sub Cover
F-9-386
F-9-385
NOTE:
If the FAX Unit has been
installed, remove the 3 screws
and open the Controller Box
with the FAX Unit.
2 screws
x2
x3
Harness
Harness
F-9-388
F-9-387
9-191
9
13) Remove the Controller Cover.
11 screws (loosen)
9-192
CAUTION:
Do not remove
the Fan Cable.
1 edge saddle
3 wire saddles
1 cable retainer
Cable Retainer
Edge Saddle
x2
x4
Wire Saddles
Signal Cable
Fan Cable
Power Cable
F-9-390
F-9-389
2 dege saddles
5 wire saddles
2 connectors
NOTE:
Removed Signal Cable
and Power Cable will
not be used.
x2
Wire Saddles
Connectors
x7
Edge Saddl
Signal
Cable
F-9-391
Power
Cable
Edge
Saddle
Wire
Saddle
F-9-392
9-192
9-193
x2
Edge Saddle
F-9-394
F-9-393
Wire Saddle
Cable Guide
Wire Saddle
(Top side of the Controller Box
x8
[A]
CAUTION:
[B]
Connector
Edge Saddle
Wire Saddle
LED Cable
(1200mm; 7 pin)
F-9-395
9-193
9-194
x4
CAUTION:
CHB
CHA
Direction of the HDD Slot
F-9-396
Cable Retainer
Edge Saddle
x3
Power Cable
x4
Wire Saddles
Signal Cable
STS Cable
F-9-397
9-194
9
4) Install the Controller Cover.
CAUTION:
Be sure that the gaskets on left/right side of
the Controller Cover are not protruded.
9-195
x4
Power Cable
Signal Cable
STS Cable
CAUTION:
The machine can operate even the
STS Cable and the LED Cable are
not connected. Therefore, when
installing the cables, be sure that
they are connected properly.
LED Cable
F-9-398
NOTE:
Be sure to close the unused
wire saddle [A].
Wire Saddles
x5
Edge Saddle
Wire Saddles
[A]
F-9-399
9-195
9-196
Slot.2 (Blank)
CAUTION:
Be sure to acknowledge the following caution before performing the next procedure.
Slot.1 (HDD1)
Combinations of connection between the HDDs and the Encryption Board are shown
below.
Signal Cable(Blue)
Power Cable
CH B
Keep Slot 2 in the condition where no HDD is installed, and only connect the cables.
CH A
Signal Cable(Red)
Power Cable
F-9-400
7) Install the Signal Cable (80mm (Red); FK2-8436) and the Power Cable (80mm; FK28461) to CHA on the Encryption Board.
8) Install the Signal Cable (80mm (Red); FK2-8436) and the Power Cable (80mm; FK2-8461) to the first HDD (Slot 1).
CAUTION:
Install the cables to
correct positions.
x2
x2
Signal Cable
Signal Ccable
Power Cable
Power Cable
F-9-401
F-9-402
9-196
9-197
9) Install the Signal Cable (80mm (Blue); FK2-8438) and the Power Cable (80mm; FK2-8461) to CHB
on the Encryption Board.
10) Place the Signal Cable (80mm (Blue); FK2-8438) and the Power Cable (80mm; FK2-8461) to the
empty space of the second HDD (Slot 2).
x2
Signal Cable
Ppower Cable
Signal Cable
Power Cable
F-9-404
F-9-403
CAUTION:
Wire Saddle
Tag
F-9-406
F-9-405
9-197
9
12) Close the HDD Lid.
13) Place the Controller Box to the
original position.
14) Install the removed cover and
the cable.
Rear Cover
Left Rear Sub Cover
Reader Communication Cable
(when reader is installed)
Left Rear Cover
USB Cable and Control Panel
Communication Cable
9-198
CAUTION:
Lift the handle, insert the Main
x2
Grips
F-9-407
NOTE:
Handle the Reader Power Cable from the
connector side and make a slack at A part.
Bend the Reader Power Cable at a right
angle on B part.
x2
[A]
Cable Guide
Wire Saddles
[B]
Reader Power Cable
Connectors
F-9-408
9-198
9-199
18) Affix the LED label so that it fits the edge of the Right Rear Cover 1.
LED Label
F-9-409
9-199
9
Installing the System Software Using the SST
The system data stored on the HDD and used to control the host machine will be lost when
the machine is first started up after installing this product.
It is important to install the system software used to control the host machine so that the
machine may start up properly after installation of this product.
9-200
Details follow.
1. Requirements
CAUTION:
1) PC
Service support tool in the version that supports this host machine must be installed.
2) Cross Ethernet Cable
The user will be able to make sure that the encryption board fitted with a security chip
of the correct version with CC authentication is functioning normally by referring to the
version information (2.00) indicated for Canon MFP Security Chip.
The user may check the security mark, appearing on the control panel when using the Host
operating correctly.
The Users Guide provides the following description in connection with the security mark:
<Confirming the Security Mark>
When the HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit is operating normally, a security mark(
is displayed on the lower left corner of a panel screen.
9-200
9-201
9-201
9-202
[TYPE-9] Removable HDD Kit + HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit
Points to Note when HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit has been Installed
A security sticker is attached to the kit package to indicate that the package has not been opened. Check to see that the package has not been opened in any way and the sticker is not torn.
If the package appears to have been opened or the sticker is torn, check to make sure that the user has done so intentionally.
F-9-410
9-202
9-203
[17] Screw
(R round head TP; M3 X 6) x 9
F-9-411
9-203
9-204
F-9-412
9-204
9-205
F-9-413
<CD/Guide>
HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit-C1 User Documentation
HDD Data Encryption Kit Notice Notice
Installation Procedure
Noticd for FCC/IC
9-205
9
Points to Note Regarding Data Backup/Export
Before performing work that will result in the loss of data, inform the system administrator of
the inevitable loss, asking him to make a backup or export of important data items.
Backup or export work must not be performed by the service person because of security
considerations.
In this Installation Procedure, a series of backup or export procedures are described for
reference.
9-206
List of Data to be Deleted
Data to be Deleted
Availability of Backup
Yes
Yes *1
Yes
Yes
No
Yes *2
No
Yes
Yes *3
No
No
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
No
No
Yes *4
No
Yes *5
Yes
Yes
T-9-13
9-206
9-207
Reference
The data items that have been backed up may be restored when this product has been
installed. These data items are property of the user, and the restoration work must be
performed by the system administrator.
The method of restoration is described in the Users Guide. See Table (Data to be backed up)
in Points to Note About Installation of the Installation Procedure.
6) Following the instructions on the window, specify the location to save the file. Be sure to set
T-9-14
a distinctive name to an export file so that you can recognize it when importing it.
NOTE:
Exporting the device settings will export all contents of the address list. In other words,
there is no need for a backup unless it needs to be done individually.
9-207
9-208
1) Access the URL given below, and then access Remote UI.
When a MEAP application has been installed, the data and license that the MEAP application
retains will be deleted. If no MEAP application is installed, there is no need to make a backup.
If the system administrator ID and password are set, a dialog box to enter the user name
If a MEAP application has a backup function, make a backup of the data peculiar to the
and password appears. Enter the system administrator ID in User Name and the password
MEAP application using this function. With regard to the license, there is a need to stop all
applications from SMS (Service Management Service), invalidate the license, and download
2) Select [Settings/Registration] > [Management Settings] > [Data Management] > [Import/
Export].
3) Click [Settings/Registration].
Data that has been backed up using MEAP back of the SST before the use of this
product is started must not be written back to the host machine after the use of this
product is started. Similarly, even if the data that has been backed up after the use
of this product is started is written back to the host machine before the use of this
product is started, the machine does not operate. It is necessary to make sure that the
implementation conditions for this product are compatible before and after making a
backup of data, and the MEAP backup function does not permit making a backup of
data in the course of installing the kit.
5) Following the instructions on the window, specify the location to save the file.
4. Printer Settings Export Procedure
NOTE:
The following items to be exported are the same as the ones which are distributed by
device information distribution.
1) Access the URL given below, and then access Remote UI.
http://[IP address of the device]/
If the system administrator ID and password are set, a dialog box to enter the user name
and password appears. Enter the system administrator ID in User Name and the password
in Password, and then click [Administrator Login].
2) Select [Settings/Registration] > [Management Settings] > [Data Management] > [Import/
Export].
The overview of procedures for stop of MEAP applications, Disabling of the license, and
download of an Disabled license file is described below. For more information, see the
MEAPSMS Administrator Guide.
7. Stop of MEAP Applications, Disabling, Download of Disabled License Files and
Uninstallation
CAUTION:
The default password is MeapSmsLogin. If a user has changed the password, ask the
user to change the password again after the use of this product is started.
2) Click [MEAP Application Management].
3) Click [Stop] button of the application you want to stop on the MEAP Application
Management page.
4) Click the application of which license has been installed.
5) Click [License Control], and then click [Disable]. Click [Yes] in a confirmation window for
9-208
9
6) Click [Download] under Download/delete Disabled License File item. Following the
9-209
9. Backup of User inbox and Advanced Box document data
instructions on the window, specify the location to save the file. Set a distinctive name
for the disabled license file so that you can recognize it for which application. After you
download the disabled license file to your PC, click [Delete]. Click [Yes] in a confirmation
When setting a SMB server as a backup destination, Advanced Box data saved in a
large capacity HDD cannot be backed up. The Advanced Box data backed up from the
large capacity HDD cannot be restored to the standard HDD.
Depending on the system version of the machine, both backup and restoration might
not be performed.
The procedure of backup and restoration of a box document data is described below.
Specify the backup destination of a document data:
Backup to SMB server
Select SMB as a backup destination and specify an address, a user name, a password,
and a path to the SMB server to which saved data is backed up.
Backup to USB HDD
Select USB HDD as a backup destination and specify a path to the USB HDD folder to
CAUTION:
Password: password
3) Click [User Control].
4) Put a checkmark to Select All, and then click [Export].
5) Leave the file format and character code as defaults and click [Start Export].
6) Following the instructions on the window, specify the location to save the file and click [Save].
9-209
9-210
10. Quick Menu Information Export Procedure
CAUTION:
1) Access the URL given below, and then access Remote UI.
and password appears. Enter the system administrator ID in User Name and the password
2) Select Basic Tools > [Quick Menu] > [Export].
A path to the folder can be up to 255 characters in 1 byte (127 characters in 2 bytes).
3) If the file needs to be encrypted, enter the password after check [Encrypt file]. (The number
If the system administrator ID and password are set, a dialog box to enter the user name
in Password, and then click [Administrator Login].
of characters for the password must be more than 4 but less than 16.)
4) Click [Export].
5) Following the instructions on the window, specify the location to save the file.
11. User Information of the Advanced Box Export Procedure
1) Access the URL given below, and then access Remote UI.
http://[IP address of the device]/
If the system administrator ID and password are set, a dialog box to enter the user name
and password appears. Enter the system administrator ID in User Name and the password
in Password, and then click [Administrator Login].
2) Select Basic Tools > [User Access Control for Advanced Box]. The dialog box to enter the
3) Click [Execute].
user name of administrator and password appears, enter the system administrator ID and
password, and then click [Log In].
CAUTION:
If any of the host IP address, user name, password, or path to the folder is not
correctly entered, a backup cannot be made.
If you select to encrypt the backup data, the backup process may take longer.
[Restoring the backup data of User inbox and Advanced Box document data]
1) Select [Settings/Registration] > [Management Settings] > [Data Management] > [Restore].
2) Click [Display Backup Data].
3) Select the backup data to restore from the list and then click [Execute].
CAUTION:
If you want to restore encrypted backup data, enter the same password used when
backing up the data.
2) Check that the display on the Control Panel and the Main Power Supply Lamp are turned
off before disconnecting the outlet.
Depending on the settings of the machine, the backup data may not be completely
restored, or some documents may be automatically printed.
Restoration is performed after all of the box data stored in the machine, or
documents that are being sent, received, or stored, are erased.
9-210
9-211
Installation Procedure
Removing the Signal Cable and Power Supply Cable
1) Open the Right Lower Cover. (Open the Right Upper
Cover simultaneously.)
x3
Claw
F-9-414
F-9-415
5) Remove the USB Cable and the Control Panel Communication Cable.
x2
Control Panel
Communication Cable
Reader Power
Cable
USB Cable
x2
x2
Cable Guide
Wire Saddles
Connectors
F-9-416
F-9-417
9-211
9-212
7) Hold the 2 Grips, and pull out the Main Controller PCB 1
approximately 10mm toward front.
x2
Grips
F-9-418
F-9-419
x2
claw
x5
F-9-420
F-9-421
9-212
9
10) Remove the Left Rear Sub Cover.
1 screw
1 hook
9-213
11) Remove the Rear Cover.
2 rubber caps
2 screws
1 claw
hook
x2
claw
Left Rear
Sub Cover
F-9-423
F-9-422
NOTE:
If the FAX Unit has been
installed, remove the 3 screws
and open the Controller Box
with the FAX Unit.
2 screws
x2
x3
Harness
Harness
F-9-425
F-9-424
9-213
9
13) Remove the Controller Cover.
11 screws (loosen)
9-214
CAUTION:
Do not remove the
Cable Retainer
Edge Saddle
x1
Fan Cable.
1 edge saddle
3 wire saddles
1 cable retainer
x4
Wire Saddle
Signal Cable
Fan Cable
Power Cable
F-9-427
F-9-426
2 dege saddles
5 wire saddles
1 connectors
NOTE:
x1
Wire Saddle
x7
Connector
Edge Saddl
Power
Cable
Edge
Saddle
Wire
Saddle
F-9-429
F-9-428
9-214
9
17) Remove the HDD Unit by
holding it as shown in the
figure below.
2 screws (Removed screw
will not be used.)
9-215
18) Remove the HDD (80GB)
installed as standard from the
removed HDD Unit. (The removed
HDD Fixation Plate and the screws
will not be used. The HDD (80GB)
installed as standard will be used
in Assembling and Installing the
Removable HDD step1).)
2 screws
x2
x2
F-9-431
F-9-430
x2
Claws
F-9-432
9-215
9-216
2) Install the HDD Lock Plate.
2 HDD Lock Plate Shafts
2 Hinge Shaft Stoppers
CAUTION:
Be careful of the installation direction of HDD Lock Plate.
HDD Lock
Plate Shaft
HDD Lock
Plate Shaft
F-9-433
3) Adjust the 2 bosses to the hole and install the HDD Lid
Retainer.
1 screw (TP round end; M3X6)
Bosses
Holes
CAUTION:
Be sure to use the round end screw included in
the Removable HDD Kit as the TP screw.
F-9-435
9-216
9-217
4) Remove the HDD Rear Cover. (Removed HDD Rear Cover will not be used.)
2 screws (Removed screw will be used in step 5).)
x2
x2
F-9-436
F-9-437
2) Install the HDD Connector Plate first, and then HDD to the HDD Support Plate. (HDD and
screw are the ones removed in step 1).)
4 screws
HDD
x4
x4
HDD
HDD Support Plate
F-9-438
9-217
9-218
If there is no gasket with the HDD removed from the host machine, prepare the gasket with the following
part number and perform step 3).
KE8-1134-030
3) Affix the gasket to the place shown in the figure below.
CAUTION:
Assembling the option HDD, be careful of the installation direction.
Make sure that the label on the option HDD is facing up.
Install it in the position where the HDD connector is placed in the side with screw hole
of HDD Support Plate. (opposite direction compared to the fixed HDD)
CAUTION:
Be sure to place the gasket in contact with the label-free metal surface of the HDD surface.
Gasket
Screw hole
Screw hole
Connector
Label
Connector side
Screw hole
HDD
F-9-440
F-9-441
CAUTION:
Make sure
that there is
no opening
between the
Conversion
Connector and
part of HDD.
x2
Boss
CAUTION:
F-9-442
Hole
F-9-443
9-218
9-219
CAUTION:
Be sure to firmly hold the Connector Fixation Block when tightening the screws.
Be sure to follow the correct order to tighten the screws, otherwise the Conversion Connector may not be connected properly, resulting in poor contact.
F-9-444
CAUTION:
CAUTION:
x2
F-9-445
F-9-446
9-219
9-220
8) Affix the HDD No.1 Label to the handle of the Removable HDD.
9) Write down the serial number of the host machine to the label for recording the number, and affix it to the
area indicated in the figure.
x2
HDD No.
Serial No.
XXXXXXXX
F-9-448
F-9-447
12) Close the Edge Saddle, and close the HDD Lid
F-9-449
9-220
9-221
x2
Edge Saddle
F-9-451
F-9-450
Wire Saddle
Cable Guide
Wire Saddle
(Top side of the Controller Box
x8
[A]
CAUTION:
[B]
Connector
Edge Saddle
Wire Saddle
LED Cable
(1200mm; 7 pin)
F-9-452
9-221
9-222
x4
CAUTION:
CHA
CHB
F-9-453
Cable Retainer
x2
x4
Edge Saddle
Power Cable
Wire Saddles
STS Cable
F-9-454
9-222
9-223
5) Install the 2 wire saddles.
CAUTION:
Be sure that the gaskets on left/right side of the Controller
Cover are not protruded.
F-9-455
LED Cable
x4
STS Cable
Signal Cable
Power Cable
CAUTION:
The machine can operate even the STS Cable and the LED
Cable are not connected. Therefore, when installing the cables,
be sure that they are connected properly.
F-9-456
9-223
9
7) Fix the cables.
7 wire saddles
2 edge saddles
x9
Wire
Saddles
9-224
Edge Saddle
Wire Saddles
CAUTION:
When fixing the cables with wire saddles, be sure to take up
slack of them at [A] part, and slack off them at [B] part.
If slacking off the cables at [A] part, they may interefer the fan
on the host machine when returing the Controller Box.
[A]
[B]
Wire Saddles
F-9-458
9-224
9-225
Power Cable
CAUTION:
Be sure to acknowledge the following caution before performing the next
procedure.
Combinations of connection between the HDDs and the Encryption
Board are shown below.
Signal Cable(Blue)
Slot.2 (HDD1)
Power Cable
Slot.1 (Blank)
CH A
Keep Slot 1 in the condition where no HDD is installed, and only connect
the cables.
CH B
Signal Cable(Red)
F-9-459
8) Install the cable of the HDD Drawer Unit to the Encryption Board.
x4
Power Cable
from front side
Signal Cable(Blue)
Signal Cable(Red)
Power Cable
from rear side
F-9-460
9-225
9-226
11) Install the removed cover and the cable.
Rear Cover
Left Rear Sub Cover
Reader Communication Cable (when reader is
installed)
Left Rear Cover
USB Cable and Control Panel Communication Cable
F-9-461
CAUTION:
Lift the handle, insert the Main Controller PCB 1 until it stops, tilt
the grip and install the 2 screws.
x2
Grips
F-9-462
9-226
9-227
14) Install the Right Rear Cover 1.
NOTE:
Handle the Reader Power Cable from the
connector side and make a slack at A part.
Bend the Reader Power Cable at a right
angle on B part.
x2
[A]
Cable Guide
Wire Saddles
[B]
Reader Power Cable
Connectors
F-9-463
15) Affix the LED label so that it fits the edge of the Right Rear Cover 1.
LED Label
F-9-464
9-227
9
Installing the System Software Using the SST
9-228
The system data stored on the HDD and used to control the host machine will be lost when
1) Press the Counter key (123 key) [1] on the control panel.
2) Press the [Check Device Configuration] key appearing on the control panel.
It is important to install the system software used to control the host machine so that the
3) Make sure that 2.00 is displayed in Canon MFP Security Chip as version information of
Details follow.
When several Encryption Boards are installed, multiple version information is displayed.
1. Requirements
CAUTION:
1) PC
Service support tool in the version that supports this host machine must be installed.
2) Cross Ethernet Cable
The user will be able to make sure that the encryption board fitted with a security chip
of the correct version with CC authentication is functioning normally by referring to the
version information (2.00) indicated for Canon MFP Security Chip.
The user may check the security mark, appearing on the control panel when using the Host
operating correctly.
The Users Guide provides the following description in connection with the security mark:
<Confirming the Security Mark>
When the HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit is operating normally, a security mark(
is displayed on the lower left corner of a panel screen.
9-228
9-229
9-229
9-230
[TYPE-10] Option HDD (250GB) + HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit
Points to Note when HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit has been Installed
A security sticker is attached to the kit package to indicate that the package has not been opened. Check to see that the package has not been opened in any way and the sticker is not torn.
If the package appears to have been opened or the sticker is torn, check to make sure that the user has done so intentionally.
[2] HDD x 1
[3] Vibration-prevention
Dumper x 4
[8] Gasket x 1
<CD/GUIDS>
[4] Spacersx 4
F-9-465
9-230
9-231
F-9-466
9-231
9-232
F-9-467
<CD/Guide>
HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit-C1 User Documentation
HDD Data Encryption Kit Notice Notice
Installation Procedure
Noticd for FCC/IC
9-232
9
Points to Note Regarding Data Backup/Export
Before performing work that will result in the loss of data, inform the system administrator of
the inevitable loss, asking him to make a backup or export of important data items.
Backup or export work must not be performed by the service person because of security
considerations.
In this Installation Procedure, a series of backup or export procedures are described for
reference.
9-233
List of Data to be Deleted
Data to be Deleted
Availability of Backup
Yes
Yes *1
Yes
Yes
No
Yes *2
No
Yes
Yes *3
No
No
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
No
No
Yes *4
No
Yes *5
Yes
Yes
T-9-15
9-233
9-234
Reference
The data items that have been backed up may be restored when this product has been
installed. These data items are property of the user, and the restoration work must be
performed by the system administrator.
The method of restoration is described in the Users Guide. See Table (Data to be backed up)
in Points to Note About Installation of the Installation Procedure.
6) Following the instructions on the window, specify the location to save the file. Be sure to set
T-9-16
a distinctive name to an export file so that you can recognize it when importing it.
NOTE:
Exporting the device settings will export all contents of the address list. In other words,
there is no need for a backup unless it needs to be done individually.
9-234
9-235
1) Access the URL given below, and then access Remote UI.
When a MEAP application has been installed, the data and license that the MEAP application
retains will be deleted. If no MEAP application is installed, there is no need to make a backup.
If the system administrator ID and password are set, a dialog box to enter the user name
If a MEAP application has a backup function, make a backup of the data peculiar to the
and password appears. Enter the system administrator ID in User Name and the password
MEAP application using this function. With regard to the license, there is a need to stop all
applications from SMS (Service Management Service), invalidate the license, and download
2) Select [Settings/Registration] > [Management Settings] > [Data Management] > [Import/
Export].
3) Click [Settings/Registration].
Data that has been backed up using MEAP back of the SST before the use of this
product is started must not be written back to the host machine after the use of this
product is started. Similarly, even if the data that has been backed up after the use
of this product is started is written back to the host machine before the use of this
product is started, the machine does not operate. It is necessary to make sure that the
implementation conditions for this product are compatible before and after making a
backup of data, and the MEAP backup function does not permit making a backup of
data in the course of installing the kit.
5) Following the instructions on the window, specify the location to save the file.
4. Printer Settings Export Procedure
NOTE:
The following items to be exported are the same as the ones which are distributed by
device information distribution.
1) Access the URL given below, and then access Remote UI.
http://[IP address of the device]/
If the system administrator ID and password are set, a dialog box to enter the user name
and password appears. Enter the system administrator ID in User Name and the password
in Password, and then click [Administrator Login].
2) Select [Settings/Registration] > [Management Settings] > [Data Management] > [Import/
Export].
The overview of procedures for stop of MEAP applications, Disabling of the license, and
download of an Disabled license file is described below. For more information, see the
MEAPSMS Administrator Guide.
7. Stop of MEAP Applications, Disabling, Download of Disabled License Files and
Uninstallation
CAUTION:
The default password is MeapSmsLogin. If a user has changed the password, ask the
user to change the password again after the use of this product is started.
2) Click [MEAP Application Management].
3) Click [Stop] button of the application you want to stop on the MEAP Application
Management page.
4) Click the application of which license has been installed.
5) Click [License Control], and then click [Disable]. Click [Yes] in a confirmation window for
9-235
9
6) Click [Download] under Download/delete Disabled License File item. Following the
9-236
9. Backup of User inbox and Advanced Box document data
instructions on the window, specify the location to save the file. Set a distinctive name
for the disabled license file so that you can recognize it for which application. After you
download the disabled license file to your PC, click [Delete]. Click [Yes] in a confirmation
When setting a SMB server as a backup destination, Advanced Box data saved in a
large capacity HDD cannot be backed up. The Advanced Box data backed up from the
large capacity HDD cannot be restored to the standard HDD.
Depending on the system version of the machine, both backup and restoration might
not be performed.
The procedure of backup and restoration of a box document data is described below.
Specify the backup destination of a document data:
Backup to SMB server
Select SMB as a backup destination and specify an address, a user name, a password,
and a path to the SMB server to which saved data is backed up.
Backup to USB HDD
Select USB HDD as a backup destination and specify a path to the USB HDD folder to
CAUTION:
Password: password
3) Click [User Control].
4) Put a checkmark to Select All, and then click [Export].
5) Leave the file format and character code as defaults and click [Start Export].
6) Following the instructions on the window, specify the location to save the file and click [Save].
9-236
9-237
10. Quick Menu Information Export Procedure
CAUTION:
Regarding the method of inputting characters, see 'Basic Operations' in the
e-Manual.
A host address can be up to 128 characters in 1 byte or 64 characters in 2 bytes
using the 'Kana-Kanji,' 'Katakana,' 'alphanumeric character,' 'mark,' and 'code input'
modes.
A path to the folder can be up to 255 characters in 1 byte (127 characters in 2 bytes).
A user name can be up to 128 characters in 1 byte or 64 characters in 2 bytes
using the 'Kana-Kanji,', 'Katakana,' 'alphanumeric character,' 'mark,' and 'code input'
modes.
A password can be up to 7 to 48 characters using the 'alphanumeric character' and
'mark (1 byte)' modes.
The voice sound symbol and the semi-voice sound symbol entered in the 'Katakana (1
byte)' mode are counted up as one 1-byte character.
1) Access the URL given below, and then access Remote UI.
http://[IP address of the device]/
If the system administrator ID and password are set, a dialog box to enter the user name
and password appears. Enter the system administrator ID in User Name and the password
in Password, and then click [Administrator Login].
2) Select Basic Tools > [Quick Menu] > [Export].
3) If the file needs to be encrypted, enter the password after check [Encrypt file]. (The number
of characters for the password must be more than 4 but less than 16.)
4) Click [Export].
5) Following the instructions on the window, specify the location to save the file.
11. User Information of the Advanced Box Export Procedure
1) Access the URL given below, and then access Remote UI.
http://[IP address of the device]/
If the system administrator ID and password are set, a dialog box to enter the user name
and password appears. Enter the system administrator ID in User Name and the password
in Password, and then click [Administrator Login].
2) Select Basic Tools > [User Access Control for Advanced Box]. The dialog box to enter the
3) Click [Execute].
user name of administrator and password appears, enter the system administrator ID and
password, and then click [Log In].
CAUTION:
If any of the host IP address, user name, password, or path to the folder is not
correctly entered, a backup cannot be made.
If you select to encrypt the backup data, the backup process may take longer.
[Restoring the backup data of User inbox and Advanced Box document data]
1) Select [Settings/Registration] > [Management Settings] > [Data Management] > [Restore].
2) Click [Display Backup Data].
3) Select the backup data to restore from the list and then click [Execute].
CAUTION:
If you want to restore encrypted backup data, enter the same password used when
backing up the data.
2) Check that the display on the Control Panel and the Main Power Supply Lamp are turned
off before disconnecting the outlet.
Depending on the settings of the machine, the backup data may not be completely
restored, or some documents may be automatically printed.
Restoration is performed after all of the box data stored in the machine, or
documents that are being sent, received, or stored, are erased.
9-237
9-238
Installation Procedure
Assembling and Installing the Option HDD
1) Assemble the option HDD (250GB).
1 Option HDD
1 HDD Support Pate
4 Dust-prevention Dumpers
4 spacers
4 screws (binding with flat washer; M3x14)
Option HDD
x4
Spacer
Vibration-prevention Dumpe
F-9-468
CAUTION:
Assembling the option HDD, be careful of the installation direction.
CAUTION:
Make sure that the label on the option HDD is facing up.
Be sure to place the gasket in contact with the label-free metal surface of the HDD
surface.
Make sure that [A] part of HDD Support Plate is placed at the opposite side of connector.
Label
HDD
Connector side
[A]
Connector
F-9-469
Gasket
Screw hole
F-9-470
9-238
9-239
x3
Claw
F-9-471
F-9-472
5) Remove the USB Cable and the Control Panel Communication Cable.
x2
Control Panel
Communication Cable
Reader Power
Cable
USB Cable
x2
x2
Cable Guide
Wire Saddles
Connectors
F-9-473
F-9-474
9-239
9-240
7) Hold the 2 Grips, and pull out the Main Controller PCB 1
approximately 10mm toward front.
x2
Grips
F-9-475
F-9-476
x2
claw
x5
F-9-477
F-9-478
9-240
9
10) Remove the Left Rear Sub Cover.
1 screw
1 hook
9-241
11) Remove the Rear Cover.
2 rubber caps
2 screws
1 claw
hook
x2
claw
Left Rear
Sub Cover
F-9-480
F-9-479
NOTE:
If the FAX Unit has been
installed, remove the 3 screws
and open the Controller Box
with the FAX Unit.
2 screws
x2
x3
Harness
Harness
F-9-482
F-9-481
9-241
9
13) Remove the Controller Cover.
11 screws (loosen)
9-242
CAUTION:
Do not remove
the Fan Cable.
1 edge saddle
3 wire saddles
1 cable retainer
Cable Retainer
Edge Saddle
x2
x4
Wire Saddles
Signal Cable
Fan Cable
Power Cable
F-9-484
F-9-483
2 dege saddles
5 wire saddles
2 connectors
NOTE:
Removed Signal Cable
and Power Cable will
not be used.
x2
Wire Saddles
Connectors
x7
Edge Saddl
Signal
Cable
F-9-485
Power
Cable
Edge
Saddle
Wire
Saddle
F-9-486
9-242
9-243
17) Remove the HDD Unit by holding it as shown in the figure below.
2 screws
18) Remove the HDD (80GB) installed as standard from the removed HDD
Unit. (Removed HDD (80GB) will not be used.)
2 screws (Removed screw will be used in step 19).)
x2
x2
F-9-488
F-9-487
x2
F-9-489
9-243
9-244
x2
Edge Saddle
F-9-491
F-9-490
Wire Saddle
Cable Guide
Wire Saddle
(Top side of the Controller Box
x8
[A]
CAUTION:
[B]
Connector
Edge Saddle
Wire Saddle
LED Cable
(1200mm; 7 pin)
F-9-492
9-244
9-245
x4
CAUTION:
CHB
CHA
Direction of the HDD Slot
F-9-493
Cable Retainer
Edge Saddle
x3
Power Cable
x4
Wire Saddles
Signal Cable
STS Cable
F-9-494
9-245
9
4) Install the Controller Cover.
CAUTION:
Be sure that the gaskets on left/right side of
the Controller Cover are not protruded.
9-246
x4
Power Cable
Signal Cable
STS Cable
CAUTION:
The machine can operate even the
STS Cable and the LED Cable are
not connected. Therefore, when
installing the cables, be sure that
they are connected properly.
LED Cable
F-9-495
NOTE:
Be sure to close the unused
wire saddle [A].
Wire Saddles
x5
Edge Saddle
Wire Saddles
[A]
F-9-496
9-246
9-247
Slot.2 (Blank)
CAUTION:
Be sure to acknowledge the following caution before performing the next procedure.
Slot.1 (HDD1)
Combinations of connection between the HDDs and the Encryption Board are shown
below.
Signal Cable(Blue)
Power Cable
CH B
Keep Slot 2 in the condition where no HDD is installed, and only connect the cables.
CH A
Signal Cable(Red)
Power Cable
F-9-497
7) Install the Signal Cable (80mm (Red); FK2-8436) and the Power Cable (80mm; FK28461) to CHA on the Encryption Board.
8) Install the Signal Cable (80mm (Red); FK2-8436) and the Power Cable (80mm; FK2-8461) to the first HDD (Slot 1).
CAUTION:
Install the cables to
correct positions.
x2
x2
Signal Cable
Signal Ccable
Power Cable
Power Cable
F-9-498
F-9-499
9-247
9-248
9) Install the Signal Cable (80mm (Blue); FK2-8438) and the Power Cable (80mm; FK2-8461) to CHB on 10) Place the Signal Cable (80mm (Blue); FK2-8438) and the Power Cable (80mm; FK2-8461) to the
empty space of the second HDD (Slot 2).
the Encryption Board.
x2
Signal Cable
Ppower Cable
Signal Cable
Power Cable
F-9-501
F-9-500
CAUTION:
Wire Saddle
Tag
F-9-503
F-9-502
9-248
9
12) Close the HDD Lid.
13) Place the Controller Box to the
original position.
14) Install the removed cover and
the cable.
Rear Cover
Left Rear Sub Cover
Reader Communication Cable
(when reader is installed)
Left Rear Cover
USB Cable and Control Panel
Communication Cable
9-249
CAUTION:
Lift the handle, insert the Main
x2
Grips
F-9-504
NOTE:
Handle the Reader Power Cable from the
connector side and make a slack at A part.
Bend the Reader Power Cable at a right
angle on B part.
x2
[A]
Cable Guide
Wire Saddles
[B]
Reader Power Cable
Connectors
F-9-505
9-249
9-250
18) Affix the LED label so that it fits the edge of the Right Rear Cover 1.
LED Label
F-9-506
9-250
9
Installing the System Software Using the SST
9-251
The system data stored on the HDD and used to control the host machine will be lost when
1) Press the Counter key (123 key) [1] on the control panel.
2) Press the [Check Device Configuration] key appearing on the control panel.
It is important to install the system software used to control the host machine so that the
3) Make sure that 2.00 is displayed in Canon MFP Security Chip as version information of
Details follow.
When several Encryption Boards are installed, multiple version information is displayed.
1. Requirements
CAUTION:
1) PC
Service support tool in the version that supports this host machine must be installed.
2) Cross Ethernet Cable
The user will be able to make sure that the encryption board fitted with a security chip
of the correct version with CC authentication is functioning normally by referring to the
version information (2.00) indicated for Canon MFP Security Chip.
The user may check the security mark, appearing on the control panel when using the Host
operating correctly.
The Users Guide provides the following description in connection with the security mark:
<Confirming the Security Mark>
When the HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit is operating normally, a security mark(
is displayed on the lower left corner of a panel screen.
9-251
9-252
9-252
9-253
[TYPE-11] Option HDD (250GB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit
Points to Note when HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit has been Installed
A security sticker is attached to the kit package to indicate that the package has not been opened. Check to see that the package has not been opened in any way and the sticker is not torn.
If the package appears to have been opened or the sticker is torn, check to make sure that the user has done so intentionally.
[2] HDD x 1
[3] Vibration-prevention
Dumper x 4
[8] Gasket x 1
<CD/GUIDS>
[4] Spacersx 4
F-9-507
9-253
9-254
F-9-508
9-254
9
[16] HDD Drawer Unit x 1
[17] Screw
(R round head TP; M3 X 6) x 9
9-255
[18] Screw (P Tight ; M3 X 8) x 4
F-9-509
9-255
9-256
F-9-510
9-256
9-257
F-9-511
<CD/Guide>
HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit-C1 User Documentation
HDD Data Encryption Kit Notice Notice
Installation Procedure
Noticd for FCC/IC
9-257
9
Points to Note Regarding Data Backup/Export
Before performing work that will result in the loss of data, inform the system administrator of
the inevitable loss, asking him to make a backup or export of important data items.
Backup or export work must not be performed by the service person because of security
considerations.
In this Installation Procedure, a series of backup or export procedures are described for
reference.
9-258
List of Data to be Deleted
Data to be Deleted
Availability of Backup
Yes
Yes *1
Yes
Yes
No
Yes *2
No
Yes
Yes *3
No
No
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
No
No
Yes *4
No
Yes *5
Yes
Yes
T-9-17
9-258
9-259
Reference
The data items that have been backed up may be restored when this product has been
installed. These data items are property of the user, and the restoration work must be
performed by the system administrator.
The method of restoration is described in the Users Guide. See Table (Data to be backed up)
in Points to Note About Installation of the Installation Procedure.
6) Following the instructions on the window, specify the location to save the file. Be sure to set
T-9-18
a distinctive name to an export file so that you can recognize it when importing it.
NOTE:
Exporting the device settings will export all contents of the address list. In other words,
there is no need for a backup unless it needs to be done individually.
9-259
9-260
1) Access the URL given below, and then access Remote UI.
When a MEAP application has been installed, the data and license that the MEAP application
retains will be deleted. If no MEAP application is installed, there is no need to make a backup.
If the system administrator ID and password are set, a dialog box to enter the user name
If a MEAP application has a backup function, make a backup of the data peculiar to the
and password appears. Enter the system administrator ID in User Name and the password
MEAP application using this function. With regard to the license, there is a need to stop all
applications from SMS (Service Management Service), invalidate the license, and download
2) Select [Settings/Registration] > [Management Settings] > [Data Management] > [Import/
Export].
3) Click [Settings/Registration].
Data that has been backed up using MEAP back of the SST before the use of this
product is started must not be written back to the host machine after the use of this
product is started. Similarly, even if the data that has been backed up after the use
of this product is started is written back to the host machine before the use of this
product is started, the machine does not operate. It is necessary to make sure that the
implementation conditions for this product are compatible before and after making a
backup of data, and the MEAP backup function does not permit making a backup of
data in the course of installing the kit.
5) Following the instructions on the window, specify the location to save the file.
4. Printer Settings Export Procedure
NOTE:
The following items to be exported are the same as the ones which are distributed by
device information distribution.
1) Access the URL given below, and then access Remote UI.
http://[IP address of the device]/
If the system administrator ID and password are set, a dialog box to enter the user name
and password appears. Enter the system administrator ID in User Name and the password
in Password, and then click [Administrator Login].
2) Select [Settings/Registration] > [Management Settings] > [Data Management] > [Import/
Export].
The overview of procedures for stop of MEAP applications, Disabling of the license, and
download of an Disabled license file is described below. For more information, see the
MEAPSMS Administrator Guide.
7. Stop of MEAP Applications, Disabling, Download of Disabled License Files and
Uninstallation
CAUTION:
The default password is MeapSmsLogin. If a user has changed the password, ask the
user to change the password again after the use of this product is started.
2) Click [MEAP Application Management].
3) Click [Stop] button of the application you want to stop on the MEAP Application
Management page.
4) Click the application of which license has been installed.
5) Click [License Control], and then click [Disable]. Click [Yes] in a confirmation window for
9-260
9
6) Click [Download] under Download/delete Disabled License File item. Following the
9-261
9. Backup of User inbox and Advanced Box document data
instructions on the window, specify the location to save the file. Set a distinctive name
for the disabled license file so that you can recognize it for which application. After you
download the disabled license file to your PC, click [Delete]. Click [Yes] in a confirmation
When setting a SMB server as a backup destination, Advanced Box data saved in a
large capacity HDD cannot be backed up. The Advanced Box data backed up from the
large capacity HDD cannot be restored to the standard HDD.
Depending on the system version of the machine, both backup and restoration might
not be performed.
The procedure of backup and restoration of a box document data is described below.
Specify the backup destination of a document data:
Backup to SMB server
Select SMB as a backup destination and specify an address, a user name, a password,
and a path to the SMB server to which saved data is backed up.
Backup to USB HDD
Select USB HDD as a backup destination and specify a path to the USB HDD folder to
CAUTION:
Password: password
3) Click [User Control].
4) Put a checkmark to Select All, and then click [Export].
5) Leave the file format and character code as defaults and click [Start Export].
6) Following the instructions on the window, specify the location to save the file and click [Save].
9-261
9-262
10. Quick Menu Information Export Procedure
CAUTION:
Regarding the method of inputting characters, see 'Basic Operations' in the
e-Manual.
A host address can be up to 128 characters in 1 byte or 64 characters in 2 bytes
using the 'Kana-Kanji,' 'Katakana,' 'alphanumeric character,' 'mark,' and 'code input'
modes.
A path to the folder can be up to 255 characters in 1 byte (127 characters in 2 bytes).
A user name can be up to 128 characters in 1 byte or 64 characters in 2 bytes
using the 'Kana-Kanji,', 'Katakana,' 'alphanumeric character,' 'mark,' and 'code input'
modes.
A password can be up to 7 to 48 characters using the 'alphanumeric character' and
'mark (1 byte)' modes.
The voice sound symbol and the semi-voice sound symbol entered in the 'Katakana (1
byte)' mode are counted up as one 1-byte character.
1) Access the URL given below, and then access Remote UI.
http://[IP address of the device]/
If the system administrator ID and password are set, a dialog box to enter the user name
and password appears. Enter the system administrator ID in User Name and the password
in Password, and then click [Administrator Login].
2) Select Basic Tools > [Quick Menu] > [Export].
3) If the file needs to be encrypted, enter the password after check [Encrypt file]. (The number
of characters for the password must be more than 4 but less than 16.)
4) Click [Export].
5) Following the instructions on the window, specify the location to save the file.
11. User Information of the Advanced Box Export Procedure
1) Access the URL given below, and then access Remote UI.
http://[IP address of the device]/
If the system administrator ID and password are set, a dialog box to enter the user name
and password appears. Enter the system administrator ID in User Name and the password
in Password, and then click [Administrator Login].
2) Select Basic Tools > [User Access Control for Advanced Box]. The dialog box to enter the
3) Click [Execute].
user name of administrator and password appears, enter the system administrator ID and
password, and then click [Log In].
CAUTION:
If any of the host IP address, user name, password, or path to the folder is not
correctly entered, a backup cannot be made.
If you select to encrypt the backup data, the backup process may take longer.
[Restoring the backup data of User inbox and Advanced Box document data]
1) Select [Settings/Registration] > [Management Settings] > [Data Management] > [Restore].
2) Click [Display Backup Data].
3) Select the backup data to restore from the list and then click [Execute].
CAUTION:
If you want to restore encrypted backup data, enter the same password used when
backing up the data.
2) Check that the display on the Control Panel and the Main Power Supply Lamp are turned
off before disconnecting the outlet.
Depending on the settings of the machine, the backup data may not be completely
restored, or some documents may be automatically printed.
Restoration is performed after all of the box data stored in the machine, or
documents that are being sent, received, or stored, are erased.
9-262
9-263
Installation Procedure
Removing the Signal Cable and Power Supply Cable
1) Open the Right Lower Cover. (Open the Right Upper
Cover simultaneously.)
x3
Claw
F-9-512
F-9-513
5) Remove the USB Cable and the Control Panel Communication Cable.
x2
Control Panel
Communication Cable
Reader Power
Cable
USB Cable
x2
x2
Cable Guide
Wire Saddles
Connectors
F-9-514
F-9-515
9-263
9-264
7) Hold the 2 Grips, and pull out the Main Controller PCB 1
approximately 10mm toward front.
x2
Grips
F-9-516
F-9-517
x2
claw
x5
F-9-518
F-9-519
9-264
9
10) Remove the Left Rear Sub Cover.
1 screw
1 hook
9-265
11) Remove the Rear Cover.
2 rubber caps
2 screws
1 claw
hook
x2
claw
Left Rear
Sub Cover
F-9-521
F-9-520
NOTE:
If the FAX Unit has been
installed, remove the 3 screws
and open the Controller Box
with the FAX Unit.
2 screws
x2
x3
Harness
Harness
F-9-523
F-9-522
9-265
9
13) Remove the Controller Cover.
11 screws (loosen)
9-266
CAUTION:
Do not remove the
Cable Retainer
Edge Saddle
x1
Fan Cable.
1 edge saddle
3 wire saddles
1 cable retainer
x4
Wire Saddle
Signal Cable
Fan Cable
Power Cable
F-9-525
F-9-524
2 dege saddles
5 wire saddles
1 connectors
NOTE:
x1
Wire Saddle
x7
Connector
Edge Saddl
Power
Cable
Edge
Saddle
Wire
Saddle
F-9-527
F-9-526
9-266
9
17) Remove the HDD Unit by
holding it as shown in the
figure below. (Removed
HDD unit will not be used.)
2 screws (Removed screw
will not be used.)
9-267
x2
F-9-528
x2
Claws
F-9-529
9-267
9-268
2) Install the HDD Lock Plate.
2 HDD Lock Plate Shafts
2 Hinge Shaft Stoppers
CAUTION:
Be careful of the installation direction of HDD Lock Plate.
HDD Lock
Plate Shaft
HDD Lock
Plate Shaft
F-9-530
3) Adjust the 2 bosses to the hole and install the HDD Lid
Retainer.
1 screw (TP round end; M3X6)
Bosses
Holes
CAUTION:
Be sure to use the round end screw included in
the Removable HDD Kit as the TP screw.
F-9-532
9-268
9-269
4) Remove the HDD Rear Cover. (Removed HDD Rear Cover will not be used.)
2 screws (Removed screw will be used in step 5).)
x2
x2
F-9-533
F-9-534
Option HDD
x4
Spacer
Vibration-prevention Dumpe
F-9-535
9-269
9-270
2) Affix the gasket to the place shown in the figure below.
CAUTION:
Assembling the option HDD, be careful of the installation direction.
CAUTION:
Make sure that the label on the option HDD is facing up.
Be sure to place the gasket in contact with the label-free metal surface of the HDD surface.
Install it in the position where the HDD connector is placed in the side with screw hole
of HDD Support Plate. (opposite direction compared to the fixed HDD)
Gasket
Screw hole
Screw hole
Connector side
Connector
Label
HDD
Screw hole
F-9-537
F-9-536
CAUTION:
Make sure
that there is
no opening
between the
Conversion
Connector and
part of HDD.
x2
Boss
CAUTION:
F-9-538
Hole
F-9-539
9-270
9-271
CAUTION:
Be sure to firmly hold the Connector Fixation Block when tightening the screws.
Be sure to follow the correct order to tighten the screws, otherwise the Conversion Connector may not be connected properly, resulting in poor contact.
F-9-540
CAUTION:
CAUTION:
x2
F-9-541
F-9-542
9-271
9-272
7) Affix the HDD No.1 Label to the handle of the Removable HDD.
8) Write down the serial number of the host machine to the label for recording the
number, and affix it to the area indicated in the figure.
CAUTION:
Be sure to use the round
end screw included in
the Removable HDD Kit
as the TP screw.
HDD No.
Serial No.
x2
XXXXXXXX
F-9-544
F-9-543
11) Close the Edge Saddle, and close the HDD Lid.
F-9-545
9-272
9-273
x2
Edge Saddle
F-9-547
F-9-546
Wire Saddle
Cable Guide
Wire Saddle
(Top side of the Controller Box
x8
[A]
CAUTION:
[B]
Connector
Edge Saddle
Wire Saddle
LED Cable
(1200mm; 7 pin)
F-9-548
9-273
9-274
x4
CAUTION:
CHA
CHB
F-9-549
Cable Retainer
x2
x4
Edge Saddle
Power Cable
Wire Saddles
STS Cable
F-9-550
9-274
9-275
5) Install the 2 wire saddles.
CAUTION:
Be sure that the gaskets on left/right side of the Controller
Cover are not protruded.
F-9-551
LED Cable
x4
STS Cable
Signal Cable
Power Cable
CAUTION:
The machine can operate even the STS Cable and the LED
Cable are not connected. Therefore, when installing the cables,
be sure that they are connected properly.
F-9-552
9-275
9
7) Fix the cables.
7 wire saddles
2 edge saddles
x9
Wire
Saddles
9-276
Edge Saddle
Wire Saddles
CAUTION:
When fixing the cables with wire saddles, be sure to take up
slack of them at [A] part, and slack off them at [B] part.
If slacking off the cables at [A] part, they may interefer the fan
on the host machine when returing the Controller Box.
[A]
[B]
Wire Saddles
F-9-554
9-276
9-277
Power Cable
CAUTION:
Be sure to acknowledge the following caution before performing the next
procedure.
Combinations of connection between the HDDs and the Encryption
Board are shown below.
Signal Cable(Blue)
Slot.2 (HDD1)
Power Cable
Slot.1 (Blank)
CH A
Keep Slot 1 in the condition where no HDD is installed, and only connect
the cables.
CH B
Signal Cable(Red)
F-9-555
8) Install the cable of the HDD Drawer Unit to the Encryption Board.
x4
Power Cable
from front side
Signal Cable(Blue)
Signal Cable(Red)
Power Cable
from rear side
F-9-556
9-277
9-278
11) Install the removed cover and the cable.
Rear Cover
Left Rear Sub Cover
Reader Communication Cable (when reader is
installed)
Left Rear Cover
USB Cable and Control Panel Communication Cable
F-9-557
CAUTION:
Lift the handle, insert the Main Controller PCB 1 until it stops, tilt
the grip and install the 2 screws.
x2
Grips
F-9-558
9-278
9-279
14) Install the Right Rear Cover 1.
NOTE:
Handle the Reader Power Cable from the
connector side and make a slack at A part.
Bend the Reader Power Cable at a right
angle on B part.
x2
[A]
Cable Guide
Wire Saddles
[B]
Reader Power Cable
Connectors
F-9-559
15) Affix the LED label so that it fits the edge of the Right Rear Cover 1.
LED Label
F-9-560
9-279
9
Installing the System Software Using the SST
9-280
The system data stored on the HDD and used to control the host machine will be lost when
1) Press the Counter key (123 key) [1] on the control panel.
2) Press the [Check Device Configuration] key appearing on the control panel.
It is important to install the system software used to control the host machine so that the
3) Make sure that 2.00 is displayed in Canon MFP Security Chip as version information of
Details follow.
When several Encryption Boards are installed, multiple version information is displayed.
1. Requirements
CAUTION:
1) PC
Service support tool in the version that supports this host machine must be installed.
2) Cross Ethernet Cable
The user will be able to make sure that the encryption board fitted with a security chip
of the correct version with CC authentication is functioning normally by referring to the
version information (2.00) indicated for Canon MFP Security Chip.
The user may check the security mark, appearing on the control panel when using the Host
operating correctly.
The Users Guide provides the following description in connection with the security mark:
<Confirming the Security Mark>
When the HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit is operating normally, a security mark(
is displayed on the lower left corner of a panel screen.
9-280
9-281
9-281
9-282
[TYPE-4] Option HDD (80GB) + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit
Points to Note when HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit has been Installed
A security sticker is attached to the kit package to indicate that the package has not been opened. Check to see that the package has not been opened in any way and the sticker is not torn.
If the package appears to have been opened or the sticker is torn, check to make sure that the user has done so intentionally.
[2] HDD x 1
[8] Gasket x 1
<CD/GUIDS>
[4] Spacer x 4
F-9-561
9-282
9-283
F-9-562
9-283
9
[16] LED Label (Small) x 1
9-284
F-9-563
9-284
9
Points to Note Regarding Data Backup/Export
Before performing work that will result in the loss of data, inform the system administrator of
the inevitable loss, asking him to make a backup or export of important data items.
Backup or export work must not be performed by the service person because of security
considerations.
In this Installation Procedure, a series of backup or export procedures are described for
reference.
9-285
List of Data to be Deleted
Data to be Deleted
Availability of Backup
Yes
Yes *1
Yes
Yes
No
Yes *2
No
Yes
Yes *3
No
No
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
No
No
Yes *4
No
Yes *5
Yes
Yes
T-9-19
9-285
9-286
Reference
The data items that have been backed up may be restored when this product has been
installed. These data items are property of the user, and the restoration work must be
performed by the system administrator.
The method of restoration is described in the Users Guide. See Table (Data to be backed up)
in Points to Note About Installation of the Installation Procedure.
6) Following the instructions on the window, specify the location to save the file. Be sure to set
T-9-20
a distinctive name to an export file so that you can recognize it when importing it.
NOTE:
Exporting the device settings will export all contents of the address list. In other words,
there is no need for a backup unless it needs to be done individually.
9-286
9-287
1) Access the URL given below, and then access Remote UI.
When a MEAP application has been installed, the data and license that the MEAP application
retains will be deleted. If no MEAP application is installed, there is no need to make a backup.
If the system administrator ID and password are set, a dialog box to enter the user name
If a MEAP application has a backup function, make a backup of the data peculiar to the
and password appears. Enter the system administrator ID in User Name and the password
MEAP application using this function. With regard to the license, there is a need to stop all
applications from SMS (Service Management Service), invalidate the license, and download
2) Select [Settings/Registration] > [Management Settings] > [Data Management] > [Import/
Export].
3) Click [Settings/Registration].
Data that has been backed up using MEAP back of the SST before the use of this
product is started must not be written back to the host machine after the use of this
product is started. Similarly, even if the data that has been backed up after the use
of this product is started is written back to the host machine before the use of this
product is started, the machine does not operate. It is necessary to make sure that the
implementation conditions for this product are compatible before and after making a
backup of data, and the MEAP backup function does not permit making a backup of
data in the course of installing the kit.
5) Following the instructions on the window, specify the location to save the file.
4. Printer Settings Export Procedure
NOTE:
The following items to be exported are the same as the ones which are distributed by
device information distribution.
1) Access the URL given below, and then access Remote UI.
http://[IP address of the device]/
If the system administrator ID and password are set, a dialog box to enter the user name
and password appears. Enter the system administrator ID in User Name and the password
in Password, and then click [Administrator Login].
2) Select [Settings/Registration] > [Management Settings] > [Data Management] > [Import/
Export].
The overview of procedures for stop of MEAP applications, Disabling of the license, and
download of an Disabled license file is described below. For more information, see the
MEAPSMS Administrator Guide.
7. Stop of MEAP Applications, Disabling, Download of Disabled License Files and
Uninstallation
CAUTION:
The default password is MeapSmsLogin. If a user has changed the password, ask the
user to change the password again after the use of this product is started.
2) Click [MEAP Application Management].
3) Click [Stop] button of the application you want to stop on the MEAP Application
Management page.
4) Click the application of which license has been installed.
5) Click [License Control], and then click [Disable]. Click [Yes] in a confirmation window for
9-287
9
6) Click [Download] under Download/delete Disabled License File item. Following the
9-288
9. Backup of User inbox and Advanced Box document data
instructions on the window, specify the location to save the file. Set a distinctive name
for the disabled license file so that you can recognize it for which application. After you
download the disabled license file to your PC, click [Delete]. Click [Yes] in a confirmation
When setting a SMB server as a backup destination, Advanced Box data saved in a
large capacity HDD cannot be backed up. The Advanced Box data backed up from the
large capacity HDD cannot be restored to the standard HDD.
Depending on the system version of the machine, both backup and restoration might
not be performed.
The procedure of backup and restoration of a box document data is described below.
Specify the backup destination of a document data:
Backup to SMB server
Select SMB as a backup destination and specify an address, a user name, a password,
and a path to the SMB server to which saved data is backed up.
Backup to USB HDD
Select USB HDD as a backup destination and specify a path to the USB HDD folder to
CAUTION:
Password: password
3) Click [User Control].
4) Put a checkmark to Select All, and then click [Export].
5) Leave the file format and character code as defaults and click [Start Export].
6) Following the instructions on the window, specify the location to save the file and click [Save].
9-288
9-289
10. Quick Menu Information Export Procedure
CAUTION:
Regarding the method of inputting characters, see 'Basic Operations' in the
e-Manual.
A host address can be up to 128 characters in 1 byte or 64 characters in 2 bytes
using the 'Kana-Kanji,' 'Katakana,' 'alphanumeric character,' 'mark,' and 'code input'
modes.
A path to the folder can be up to 255 characters in 1 byte (127 characters in 2 bytes).
A user name can be up to 128 characters in 1 byte or 64 characters in 2 bytes
using the 'Kana-Kanji,', 'Katakana,' 'alphanumeric character,' 'mark,' and 'code input'
modes.
A password can be up to 7 to 48 characters using the 'alphanumeric character' and
'mark (1 byte)' modes.
The voice sound symbol and the semi-voice sound symbol entered in the 'Katakana (1
byte)' mode are counted up as one 1-byte character.
1) Access the URL given below, and then access Remote UI.
http://[IP address of the device]/
If the system administrator ID and password are set, a dialog box to enter the user name
and password appears. Enter the system administrator ID in User Name and the password
in Password, and then click [Administrator Login].
2) Select Basic Tools > [Quick Menu] > [Export].
3) If the file needs to be encrypted, enter the password after check [Encrypt file]. (The number
of characters for the password must be more than 4 but less than 16.)
4) Click [Export].
5) Following the instructions on the window, specify the location to save the file.
11. User Information of the Advanced Box Export Procedure
1) Access the URL given below, and then access Remote UI.
http://[IP address of the device]/
If the system administrator ID and password are set, a dialog box to enter the user name
and password appears. Enter the system administrator ID in User Name and the password
in Password, and then click [Administrator Login].
2) Select Basic Tools > [User Access Control for Advanced Box]. The dialog box to enter the
3) Click [Execute].
user name of administrator and password appears, enter the system administrator ID and
password, and then click [Log In].
CAUTION:
If any of the host IP address, user name, password, or path to the folder is not
correctly entered, a backup cannot be made.
If you select to encrypt the backup data, the backup process may take longer.
[Restoring the backup data of User inbox and Advanced Box document data]
1) Select [Settings/Registration] > [Management Settings] > [Data Management] > [Restore].
2) Click [Display Backup Data].
3) Select the backup data to restore from the list and then click [Execute].
CAUTION:
If you want to restore encrypted backup data, enter the same password used when
backing up the data.
2) Check that the display on the Control Panel and the Main Power Supply Lamp are turned
off before disconnecting the outlet.
Depending on the settings of the machine, the backup data may not be completely
restored, or some documents may be automatically printed.
Restoration is performed after all of the box data stored in the machine, or
documents that are being sent, received, or stored, are erased.
9-289
9-290
Installation Procedure
Assembling the Option HDD
1) Assemble the option HDD (250GB).
1 Option HDD
1 HDD Support Pate
4 Dust-prevention Dumpers
4 spacers
4 screws (binding with flat washer; M3x14)
Option HDD
x4
Spacer
Vibration-prevention Dumpe
F-9-564
CAUTION:
Assembling the option HDD, be careful of the installation direction.
CAUTION:
Make sure that the label on the option HDD is facing up.
Be sure to place the gasket in contact with the label-free metal surface of the HDD
surface.
Make sure that [A] part of HDD Support Plate is placed at the opposite side of connector.
Label
HDD
Connector side
[A]
Connector
F-9-565
Gasket
Screw hole
F-9-566
9-290
9-291
x3
Claw
F-9-567
F-9-568
5) Remove the USB Cable and the Control Panel Communication Cable.
x2
Control Panel
Communication Cable
Reader Power
Cable
USB Cable
x2
x2
Cable Guide
Wire Saddles
Connectors
F-9-569
F-9-570
9-291
9-292
7) Hold the 2 Grips, and pull out the Main Controller PCB 1
approximately 10mm toward front.
x2
Grips
F-9-571
F-9-572
x2
claw
x5
F-9-573
F-9-574
9-292
9
10) Remove the Left Rear Sub Cover.
1 screw
1 hook
9-293
11) Remove the Rear Cover.
2 rubber caps
2 screws
1 claw
hook
x2
claw
Left Rear
Sub Cover
F-9-576
F-9-575
NOTE:
If the FAX Unit has been
installed, remove the 3 screws
and open the Controller Box
with the FAX Unit.
2 screws
x2
x3
Harness
Harness
F-9-578
F-9-577
9-293
9
13) Remove the Controller Cover.
11 screws (loosen)
9-294
CAUTION:
Do not remove
the Fan Cable.
1 edge saddle
3 wire saddles
1 cable retainer
Cable Retainer
Edge Saddle
x2
x4
Wire Saddles
Signal Cable
Fan Cable
Power Cable
F-9-580
F-9-579
16) Remove the Signal Cable and the Power Cable. (Removed cables will not be used.)
2 dege saddles
5 wire saddles
2 connectors
NOTE:
Removed Signal Cable
and Power Cable will
not be used.
x2
Wire Saddles
Connectors
x7
Edge Saddl
Signal
Cable
F-9-581
Power
Cable
Edge
Saddle
Wire
Saddle
F-9-582
9-294
9-295
17) Remove the HDD Unit by holding it as shown in the figure below.
2 screws
18) Install the assembled Option HDD to the removed HDD Unit.
2 screws (TP; M3X6)
x2
x2
F-9-584
F-9-583
19) Install the enclosed HDD Connection Plate to the HDD Mirroring Kit.
4 screws (TP; M3X6) (enclosed with HDD Mirroring Kit)
x4
F-9-585
9-295
9-296
x2
Edge Saddle
F-9-587
F-9-586
Wire Saddle
Cable Guide
Wire Saddle
(Top side of the Controller Box
x8
[A]
CAUTION:
[B]
Connector
Edge Saddle
Wire Saddle
LED Cable
(1200mm; 7 pin)
F-9-588
9-296
9-297
x4
CAUTION:
CHB
CHA
Direction of the HDD Slot
F-9-589
Cable Retainer
Edge Saddle
x3
Power Cable
x4
Wire Saddles
Signal Cable
STS Cable
F-9-590
9-297
9
4) Install the Controller Cover.
CAUTION:
Be sure that the gaskets on left/right side of
the Controller Cover are not protruded.
9-298
x4
Power Cable
Signal Cable
STS Cable
CAUTION:
The machine can operate even the
STS Cable and the LED Cable are
not connected. Therefore, when
installing the cables, be sure that
they are connected properly.
LED Cable
F-9-591
NOTE:
Be sure to close the unused
wire saddle [A].
Wire Saddles
x5
Edge Saddle
Wire Saddles
[A]
F-9-592
9-298
9-299
Slot.2 (HDD2)
CAUTION:
Be sure to acknowledge the following caution before performing the next procedure.
Slot.1 (HDD1)
Combinations of connection between the HDDs and the Mirroring Board or Encryption
Board are shown below.
Signal Cable(Blue)
Power Cable
CH B
Signal Cable(Red)
CH A
Power Cable
F-9-593
7) Install the Signal Cable (80mm (Red); FK2-8436) and the Power Cable (80mm; FK28461) to CHA on the Mirroring Board or Encryption Board.
8) Install the Signal Cable (80mm (Red); FK2-8436) and the Power Cable (80mm; FK2-8461) to the first HDD (Slot 1).
CAUTION:
Install the cables to
correct positions.
x2
x2
Signal Cable
Signal Ccable
Power Cable
Power Cable
F-9-594
F-9-595
9-299
9-300
9) Install the Signal Cable (80mm (Blue); FK2-8438) and the Power Cable (80mm; FK28461) to CHB on the Mirroring Board or Encryption Board.
10) Install the Signal Cable (80mm (Blue); FK2-8438) and the Power Cable (80mm; FK2-8461) to the second HDD (Slot
2).
CAUTION:
Install the cables to
correct positions.
x2
x2
Signal Cable
Signal Cable
Ppower Cable
Power Cable
F-9-596
F-9-597
CAUTION:
Wire Saddle
Tag
F-9-599
F-9-598
9-300
9
12) Close the HDD Lid.
13) Place the Controller Box to the
original position.
14) Install the removed cover and
the cable.
Rear Cover
Left Rear Sub Cover
Reader Communication Cable
(when reader is installed)
Left Rear Cover
USB Cable and Control Panel
Communication Cable
9-301
CAUTION:
Lift the handle, insert the Main
x2
Grips
F-9-600
NOTE:
Handle the Reader Power Cable from the
connector side and make a slack at A part.
Bend the Reader Power Cable at a right
angle on B part.
x2
[A]
Cable Guide
Wire Saddles
[B]
Reader Power Cable
Connectors
F-9-601
9-301
9-302
18) Affix the LED label so that it fits the edge of the Right Rear Cover 1.
LED Label
F-9-602
9-302
9
Installing the System Software Using the SST (Only
when installing HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit)
9-303
The system data stored on the HDD and used to control the host machine will be lost when
1) Press the Counter key (123 key) [1] on the control panel.
2) Press the [Check Device Configuration] key appearing on the control panel.
It is important to install the system software used to control the host machine so that the
3) Make sure that 2.00 is displayed in Canon MFP Security Chip as version information of
Details follow.
When several Encryption Boards are installed, multiple version information is displayed.
1. Requirements
CAUTION:
1) PC
Service support tool in the version that supports this host machine must be installed.
2) Cross Ethernet Cable
2. Preparing for the Installation of the System Software of Host machine
The user will be able to make sure that the encryption board fitted with a security chip
of the correct version with CC authentication is functioning normally by referring to the
version information (2.00) indicated for Canon MFP Security Chip.
The user may check the security mark, appearing on the control panel when using the Host
1) Set the CD containing the latest system software in the PC on which the SST is used.
The mark appears when the machine is equipped with an encryption board and the board is
operating correctly.
4) Select the drive in which the System Software CD has been set, and click search.
The Users Guide provides the following description in connection with the security mark:
5) Click REGISTER.
6) Click OK.
When the HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit is operating normally, a security mark(
is displayed on the lower left corner of a panel screen.
1) Click CONNECT.
9-303
9
Setting the Mirroring
1) Insert the power plug into the socket and turn on the main power of the host machine.
2) Make a setting of mirroring.
Specify 1 under Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > FNCSW > W/RAID.
3) Turn OFF/ON the main power of the host machine to enable the setting value.
4) Make sure that the UI screen is activated correctly.
5) Make sure that the LED blinks.
HDD1 (Slot 1): The green LED blinks.
HDD2 (Slot 2): The green and red LEDs blink.
9-304
CAUTION:
becomes uncontrolled, the system administrator can immediately detect the problem and
Rebuild process starts after setting 1 for W/RAID. If an error occurs during the rebuild
process at the initial installation The hard disk needs to be replaced. (Call service rep.),
reexecute the process with the following procedure.
Ask the system administrator to make sure that 2.00 is indicated for Canon MFP Security
Chip as the version information of the security chip by referring to the description of
Checking the Security Version.
Maintenance of the Security Functions:
Ask the system administrator to check the security mark to make sure that the security
functions are maintained each time the machine is started up by referring to the description
of Checking the Security Mark.
The foregoing procedure is limited to the rebuild process at the initial installation.
An error during the rebuild process that is executed during operation is not included in
the consideration.
9-304
9-305
[TYPE-5] 2 Option HDDs (250GB) + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit
Points to Note when HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit has been Installed
A security sticker is attached to the kit package to indicate that the package has not been opened. Check to see that the package has not been opened in any way and the sticker is not torn.
If the package appears to have been opened or the sticker is torn, check to make sure that the user has done so intentionally.
[2] HDD x 1
[8] Gasket x 1
<CD/GUIDS>
[4] Spacer x 4
F-9-603
9-305
9-306
F-9-604
9-306
9
[16] LED Label (Small) x 1
9-307
F-9-605
9-307
9
Points to Note Regarding Data Backup/Export
Before performing work that will result in the loss of data, inform the system administrator of
the inevitable loss, asking him to make a backup or export of important data items.
Backup or export work must not be performed by the service person because of security
considerations.
In this Installation Procedure, a series of backup or export procedures are described for
reference.
9-308
List of Data to be Deleted
Data to be Deleted
Availability of Backup
Yes
Yes *1
Yes
Yes
No
Yes *2
No
Yes
Yes *3
No
No
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
No
No
Yes *4
No
Yes *5
Yes
Yes
T-9-21
9-308
9-309
Reference
The data items that have been backed up may be restored when this product has been
installed. These data items are property of the user, and the restoration work must be
performed by the system administrator.
The method of restoration is described in the Users Guide. See Table (Data to be backed up)
in Points to Note About Installation of the Installation Procedure.
6) Following the instructions on the window, specify the location to save the file. Be sure to set
T-9-22
a distinctive name to an export file so that you can recognize it when importing it.
NOTE:
Exporting the device settings will export all contents of the address list. In other words,
there is no need for a backup unless it needs to be done individually.
9-309
9-310
1) Access the URL given below, and then access Remote UI.
When a MEAP application has been installed, the data and license that the MEAP application
retains will be deleted. If no MEAP application is installed, there is no need to make a backup.
If the system administrator ID and password are set, a dialog box to enter the user name
If a MEAP application has a backup function, make a backup of the data peculiar to the
and password appears. Enter the system administrator ID in User Name and the password
MEAP application using this function. With regard to the license, there is a need to stop all
applications from SMS (Service Management Service), invalidate the license, and download
2) Select [Settings/Registration] > [Management Settings] > [Data Management] > [Import/
Export].
3) Click [Settings/Registration].
Data that has been backed up using MEAP back of the SST before the use of this
product is started must not be written back to the host machine after the use of this
product is started. Similarly, even if the data that has been backed up after the use
of this product is started is written back to the host machine before the use of this
product is started, the machine does not operate. It is necessary to make sure that the
implementation conditions for this product are compatible before and after making a
backup of data, and the MEAP backup function does not permit making a backup of
data in the course of installing the kit.
5) Following the instructions on the window, specify the location to save the file.
4. Printer Settings Export Procedure
NOTE:
The following items to be exported are the same as the ones which are distributed by
device information distribution.
1) Access the URL given below, and then access Remote UI.
http://[IP address of the device]/
If the system administrator ID and password are set, a dialog box to enter the user name
and password appears. Enter the system administrator ID in User Name and the password
in Password, and then click [Administrator Login].
2) Select [Settings/Registration] > [Management Settings] > [Data Management] > [Import/
Export].
The overview of procedures for stop of MEAP applications, Disabling of the license, and
download of an Disabled license file is described below. For more information, see the
MEAPSMS Administrator Guide.
7. Stop of MEAP Applications, Disabling, Download of Disabled License Files and
Uninstallation
CAUTION:
The default password is MeapSmsLogin. If a user has changed the password, ask the
user to change the password again after the use of this product is started.
2) Click [MEAP Application Management].
3) Click [Stop] button of the application you want to stop on the MEAP Application
Management page.
4) Click the application of which license has been installed.
5) Click [License Control], and then click [Disable]. Click [Yes] in a confirmation window for
9-310
9
6) Click [Download] under Download/delete Disabled License File item. Following the
9-311
9. Backup of User inbox and Advanced Box document data
instructions on the window, specify the location to save the file. Set a distinctive name
for the disabled license file so that you can recognize it for which application. After you
download the disabled license file to your PC, click [Delete]. Click [Yes] in a confirmation
When setting a SMB server as a backup destination, Advanced Box data saved in a
large capacity HDD cannot be backed up. The Advanced Box data backed up from the
large capacity HDD cannot be restored to the standard HDD.
Depending on the system version of the machine, both backup and restoration might
not be performed.
The procedure of backup and restoration of a box document data is described below.
Specify the backup destination of a document data:
Backup to SMB server
Select SMB as a backup destination and specify an address, a user name, a password,
and a path to the SMB server to which saved data is backed up.
Backup to USB HDD
Select USB HDD as a backup destination and specify a path to the USB HDD folder to
CAUTION:
Password: password
3) Click [User Control].
4) Put a checkmark to Select All, and then click [Export].
5) Leave the file format and character code as defaults and click [Start Export].
6) Following the instructions on the window, specify the location to save the file and click [Save].
9-311
9-312
10. Quick Menu Information Export Procedure
CAUTION:
Regarding the method of inputting characters, see 'Basic Operations' in the
e-Manual.
A host address can be up to 128 characters in 1 byte or 64 characters in 2 bytes
using the 'Kana-Kanji,' 'Katakana,' 'alphanumeric character,' 'mark,' and 'code input'
modes.
A path to the folder can be up to 255 characters in 1 byte (127 characters in 2 bytes).
A user name can be up to 128 characters in 1 byte or 64 characters in 2 bytes
using the 'Kana-Kanji,', 'Katakana,' 'alphanumeric character,' 'mark,' and 'code input'
modes.
A password can be up to 7 to 48 characters using the 'alphanumeric character' and
'mark (1 byte)' modes.
The voice sound symbol and the semi-voice sound symbol entered in the 'Katakana (1
byte)' mode are counted up as one 1-byte character.
1) Access the URL given below, and then access Remote UI.
http://[IP address of the device]/
If the system administrator ID and password are set, a dialog box to enter the user name
and password appears. Enter the system administrator ID in User Name and the password
in Password, and then click [Administrator Login].
2) Select Basic Tools > [Quick Menu] > [Export].
3) If the file needs to be encrypted, enter the password after check [Encrypt file]. (The number
of characters for the password must be more than 4 but less than 16.)
4) Click [Export].
5) Following the instructions on the window, specify the location to save the file.
11. User Information of the Advanced Box Export Procedure
1) Access the URL given below, and then access Remote UI.
http://[IP address of the device]/
If the system administrator ID and password are set, a dialog box to enter the user name
and password appears. Enter the system administrator ID in User Name and the password
in Password, and then click [Administrator Login].
2) Select Basic Tools > [User Access Control for Advanced Box]. The dialog box to enter the
3) Click [Execute].
user name of administrator and password appears, enter the system administrator ID and
password, and then click [Log In].
CAUTION:
If any of the host IP address, user name, password, or path to the folder is not
correctly entered, a backup cannot be made.
If you select to encrypt the backup data, the backup process may take longer.
[Restoring the backup data of User inbox and Advanced Box document data]
1) Select [Settings/Registration] > [Management Settings] > [Data Management] > [Restore].
2) Click [Display Backup Data].
3) Select the backup data to restore from the list and then click [Execute].
CAUTION:
If you want to restore encrypted backup data, enter the same password used when
backing up the data.
2) Check that the display on the Control Panel and the Main Power Supply Lamp are turned
off before disconnecting the outlet.
Depending on the settings of the machine, the backup data may not be completely
restored, or some documents may be automatically printed.
Restoration is performed after all of the box data stored in the machine, or
documents that are being sent, received, or stored, are erased.
9-312
9-313
Installation Procedure
Assembling the Option HDD
1) Assemble the option HDD (250GB).
1 Option HDD
1 HDD Support Pate
4 Dust-prevention Dumpers
4 spacers
4 screws (binding with flat washer; M3x14)
Option HDD
x4
Spacer
Vibration-prevention Dumpe
F-9-606
CAUTION:
Assembling the option HDD, be careful of the installation direction.
CAUTION:
Make sure that the label on the option HDD is facing up.
Make sure that [A] part of HDD Support Plate is placed at the
opposite side of connector.
HDD
Label
Connector side
Gasket
[A]
Connector
F-9-607
Screw hole
F-9-608
9-313
9-314
x3
Claw
F-9-609
F-9-610
5) Remove the USB Cable and the Control Panel Communication Cable.
x2
Control Panel
Communication Cable
Reader Power
Cable
USB Cable
x2
x2
Cable Guide
Wire Saddles
Connectors
F-9-611
F-9-612
9-314
9-315
7) Hold the 2 Grips, and pull out the Main Controller PCB 1
approximately 10mm toward front.
x2
Grips
F-9-613
F-9-614
x2
claw
x5
F-9-615
F-9-616
9-315
9
10) Remove the Left Rear Sub Cover.
1 screw
1 hook
9-316
11) Remove the Rear Cover.
2 rubber caps
2 screws
1 claw
hook
x2
claw
Left Rear
Sub Cover
F-9-618
F-9-617
NOTE:
If the FAX Unit has been
installed, remove the 3 screws
and open the Controller Box
with the FAX Unit.
2 screws
x2
x3
Harness
Harness
F-9-620
F-9-619
9-316
9
13) Remove the Controller Cover.
11 screws (loosen)
9-317
CAUTION:
Do not remove
the Fan Cable.
1 edge saddle
3 wire saddles
1 cable retainer
Cable Retainer
Edge Saddle
x2
x4
Wire Saddles
Signal Cable
Fan Cable
Power Cable
F-9-622
F-9-621
2 dege saddles
5 wire saddles
2 connectors
NOTE:
Removed Signal Cable
and Power Cable will
not be used.
x2
Wire Saddles
Connectors
x7
Edge Saddl
Signal
Cable
F-9-623
Power
Cable
Edge
Saddle
Wire
Saddle
F-9-624
9-317
9-318
17) Remove the HDD Unit by holding it as shown in the figure below.
2 screws
18) Remove the HDD (80GB) installed as standard from the removed HDD
Unit. (Removed HDD (80GB) will not be used.)
2 screws (Removed screw will be used in step 19).)
x2
x2
F-9-626
F-9-625
x2
x2
F-9-627
F-9-628
9-318
9
21) Install the enclosed HDD Connection Plate to the HDD Mirroring Kit.
4 screws (TP; M3X6) (enclosed with HDD Mirroring Kit)
9-319
22) Install the HDD Unit to the host machine.
x4
F-9-629
9-319
9-320
x2
Edge Saddle
F-9-631
F-9-630
Wire Saddle
Cable Guide
Wire Saddle
(Top side of the Controller Box
x8
[A]
CAUTION:
[B]
Connector
Edge Saddle
Wire Saddle
LED Cable
(1200mm; 7 pin)
F-9-632
9-320
9-321
x4
CAUTION:
CHB
CHA
Direction of the HDD Slot
F-9-633
Cable Retainer
Edge Saddle
x3
Power Cable
x4
Wire Saddles
Signal Cable
STS Cable
F-9-634
9-321
9
4) Install the Controller Cover.
CAUTION:
Be sure that the gaskets on left/right side of
the Controller Cover are not protruded.
9-322
x4
Power Cable
Signal Cable
STS Cable
CAUTION:
The machine can operate even the
STS Cable and the LED Cable are
not connected. Therefore, when
installing the cables, be sure that
they are connected properly.
LED Cable
F-9-635
NOTE:
Be sure to close the unused
wire saddle [A].
Wire Saddles
x5
Edge Saddle
Wire Saddles
[A]
F-9-636
9-322
9-323
Slot.2 (HDD2)
CAUTION:
Be sure to acknowledge the following caution before performing the next procedure.
Slot.1 (HDD1)
Combinations of connection between the HDDs and the Mirroring Board or Encryption
Board are shown below.
Signal Cable(Blue)
Power Cable
CH B
Signal Cable(Red)
CH A
Power Cable
F-9-637
7) Install the Signal Cable (80mm (Red); FK2-8436) and the Power Cable (80mm; FK28461) to CHA on the Mirroring Board or Encryption Board.
8) Install the Signal Cable (80mm (Red); FK2-8436) and the Power Cable (80mm; FK2-8461) to the first HDD (Slot 1).
CAUTION:
Install the cables to
correct positions.
x2
x2
Signal Cable
Signal Ccable
Power Cable
Power Cable
F-9-638
F-9-639
9-323
9-324
9) Install the Signal Cable (80mm (Blue); FK2-8438) and the Power Cable (80mm; FK28461) to CHB on the Mirroring Board or Encryption Board.
10) Install the Signal Cable (80mm (Blue); FK2-8438) and the Power Cable (80mm; FK2-8461) to the second HDD (Slot
2).
CAUTION:
Install the cables to
correct positions.
x2
x2
Signal Cable
Signal Cable
Ppower Cable
Power Cable
F-9-640
F-9-641
CAUTION:
Wire Saddle
Tag
F-9-643
F-9-642
9-324
9
12) Close the HDD Lid.
13) Place the Controller Box to the
original position.
14) Install the removed cover and
the cable.
Rear Cover
Left Rear Sub Cover
Reader Communication Cable
(when reader is installed)
Left Rear Cover
USB Cable and Control Panel
Communication Cable
9-325
CAUTION:
Lift the handle, insert the Main
x2
Grips
F-9-644
NOTE:
Handle the Reader Power Cable from the
connector side and make a slack at A part.
Bend the Reader Power Cable at a right
angle on B part.
x2
[A]
Cable Guide
Wire Saddles
[B]
Reader Power Cable
Connectors
F-9-645
9-325
9-326
18) Affix the LED label so that it fits the edge of the Right Rear Cover 1.
LED Label
F-9-646
9-326
9
Installing the System Software Using the SST
The system data stored on the HDD and used to control the host machine will be lost when
the machine is first started up after installing this product.
It is important to install the system software used to control the host machine so that the
machine may start up properly after installation of this product.
9-327
Details follow.
1. Requirements
When several Encryption Boards are installed, multiple version information is displayed.
1) PC
Service support tool in the version that supports this host machine must be installed.
2) Cross Ethernet Cable
2. Preparing for the Installation of the System Software of Host machine
1) If both PC and the machine are on, turn them off.
CAUTION:
The user will be able to make sure that the encryption board fitted with a security chip
of the correct version with CC authentication is functioning normally by referring to the
version information (2.00) indicated for Canon MFP Security Chip.
The mark appears when the machine is equipped with an encryption board and the board is
operating correctly.
The Users Guide provides the following description in connection with the security mark:
6) Click OK.
4. Downloading the System Software
1) Click CONNECT.
When the HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit is operating normally, a security mark(
is displayed on the lower left corner of a panel screen.
9-327
9
Setting the Mirroring
1) Insert the power plug into the socket and turn on the main power of the host machine.
2) Make a setting of mirroring.
Specify 1 under Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > FNCSW > W/RAID.
3) Turn OFF/ON the main power of the host machine to enable the setting value.
4) Make sure that the UI screen is activated correctly.
5) Make sure that the LED blinks.
HDD1 (Slot 1): The green LED blinks.
HDD2 (Slot 2): The green and red LEDs blink.
9-328
CAUTION:
becomes uncontrolled, the system administrator can immediately detect the problem and
Rebuild process starts after setting 1 for W/RAID. If an error occurs during the rebuild
process at the initial installation The hard disk needs to be replaced. (Call service rep.),
reexecute the process with the following procedure.
Ask the system administrator to make sure that 2.00 is indicated for Canon MFP Security
Chip as the version information of the security chip by referring to the description of
Checking the Security Version.
Maintenance of the Security Functions:
Ask the system administrator to check the security mark to make sure that the security
functions are maintained each time the machine is started up by referring to the description
of Checking the Security Mark.
The foregoing procedure is limited to the rebuild process at the initial installation.
An error during the rebuild process that is executed during operation is not included in
the consideration.
9-328
9-329
[TYPE-6] Option HDD (80GB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring
Kit
Points to Note when HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit has been Installed
A security sticker is attached to the kit package to indicate that the package has not been opened. Check to see that the package has not been opened in any way and the sticker is not torn.
If the package appears to have been opened or the sticker is torn, check to make sure that the user has done so intentionally.
[2] HDD x 1
[3] Vibration-prevention
Dumper x 4
[8] Gasket x 1
<CD/GUIDS>
[4] Spacersx 4
F-9-647
9-329
9-330
F-9-648
9-330
9
[16] HDD Drawer Unit x 1
[17] Screw
(R round head TP; M3 X 6) x 9
9-331
[18] Screw (P Tight ; M3 X 8) x 4
F-9-649
9-331
9-332
F-9-650
9-332
9-333
F-9-651
9-333
9
Points to Note Regarding Data Backup/Export
Before performing work that will result in the loss of data, inform the system administrator of
the inevitable loss, asking him to make a backup or export of important data items.
Backup or export work must not be performed by the service person because of security
considerations.
In this Installation Procedure, a series of backup or export procedures are described for
reference.
9-334
List of Data to be Deleted
Data to be Deleted
Availability of Backup
Yes
Yes *1
Yes
Yes
No
Yes *2
No
Yes
Yes *3
No
No
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
No
No
Yes *4
No
Yes *5
Yes
Yes
T-9-23
9-334
9-335
Reference
The data items that have been backed up may be restored when this product has been
installed. These data items are property of the user, and the restoration work must be
performed by the system administrator.
The method of restoration is described in the Users Guide. See Table (Data to be backed up)
in Points to Note About Installation of the Installation Procedure.
6) Following the instructions on the window, specify the location to save the file. Be sure to set
T-9-24
a distinctive name to an export file so that you can recognize it when importing it.
NOTE:
Exporting the device settings will export all contents of the address list. In other words,
there is no need for a backup unless it needs to be done individually.
9-335
9-336
1) Access the URL given below, and then access Remote UI.
When a MEAP application has been installed, the data and license that the MEAP application
retains will be deleted. If no MEAP application is installed, there is no need to make a backup.
If the system administrator ID and password are set, a dialog box to enter the user name
If a MEAP application has a backup function, make a backup of the data peculiar to the
and password appears. Enter the system administrator ID in User Name and the password
MEAP application using this function. With regard to the license, there is a need to stop all
applications from SMS (Service Management Service), invalidate the license, and download
2) Select [Settings/Registration] > [Management Settings] > [Data Management] > [Import/
Export].
3) Click [Settings/Registration].
Data that has been backed up using MEAP back of the SST before the use of this
product is started must not be written back to the host machine after the use of this
product is started. Similarly, even if the data that has been backed up after the use
of this product is started is written back to the host machine before the use of this
product is started, the machine does not operate. It is necessary to make sure that the
implementation conditions for this product are compatible before and after making a
backup of data, and the MEAP backup function does not permit making a backup of
data in the course of installing the kit.
5) Following the instructions on the window, specify the location to save the file.
4. Printer Settings Export Procedure
NOTE:
The following items to be exported are the same as the ones which are distributed by
device information distribution.
1) Access the URL given below, and then access Remote UI.
http://[IP address of the device]/
If the system administrator ID and password are set, a dialog box to enter the user name
and password appears. Enter the system administrator ID in User Name and the password
in Password, and then click [Administrator Login].
2) Select [Settings/Registration] > [Management Settings] > [Data Management] > [Import/
Export].
The overview of procedures for stop of MEAP applications, Disabling of the license, and
download of an Disabled license file is described below. For more information, see the
MEAPSMS Administrator Guide.
7. Stop of MEAP Applications, Disabling, Download of Disabled License Files and
Uninstallation
CAUTION:
The default password is MeapSmsLogin. If a user has changed the password, ask the
user to change the password again after the use of this product is started.
2) Click [MEAP Application Management].
3) Click [Stop] button of the application you want to stop on the MEAP Application
Management page.
4) Click the application of which license has been installed.
5) Click [License Control], and then click [Disable]. Click [Yes] in a confirmation window for
9-336
9
6) Click [Download] under Download/delete Disabled License File item. Following the
9-337
9. Backup of User inbox and Advanced Box document data
instructions on the window, specify the location to save the file. Set a distinctive name
for the disabled license file so that you can recognize it for which application. After you
download the disabled license file to your PC, click [Delete]. Click [Yes] in a confirmation
When setting a SMB server as a backup destination, Advanced Box data saved in a
large capacity HDD cannot be backed up. The Advanced Box data backed up from the
large capacity HDD cannot be restored to the standard HDD.
Depending on the system version of the machine, both backup and restoration might
not be performed.
The procedure of backup and restoration of a box document data is described below.
Specify the backup destination of a document data:
Backup to SMB server
Select SMB as a backup destination and specify an address, a user name, a password,
and a path to the SMB server to which saved data is backed up.
Backup to USB HDD
Select USB HDD as a backup destination and specify a path to the USB HDD folder to
CAUTION:
Password: password
3) Click [User Control].
4) Put a checkmark to Select All, and then click [Export].
5) Leave the file format and character code as defaults and click [Start Export].
6) Following the instructions on the window, specify the location to save the file and click [Save].
9-337
9-338
10. Quick Menu Information Export Procedure
CAUTION:
Regarding the method of inputting characters, see 'Basic Operations' in the
e-Manual.
A host address can be up to 128 characters in 1 byte or 64 characters in 2 bytes
using the 'Kana-Kanji,' 'Katakana,' 'alphanumeric character,' 'mark,' and 'code input'
modes.
A path to the folder can be up to 255 characters in 1 byte (127 characters in 2 bytes).
A user name can be up to 128 characters in 1 byte or 64 characters in 2 bytes
using the 'Kana-Kanji,', 'Katakana,' 'alphanumeric character,' 'mark,' and 'code input'
modes.
A password can be up to 7 to 48 characters using the 'alphanumeric character' and
'mark (1 byte)' modes.
The voice sound symbol and the semi-voice sound symbol entered in the 'Katakana (1
byte)' mode are counted up as one 1-byte character.
1) Access the URL given below, and then access Remote UI.
http://[IP address of the device]/
If the system administrator ID and password are set, a dialog box to enter the user name
and password appears. Enter the system administrator ID in User Name and the password
in Password, and then click [Administrator Login].
2) Select Basic Tools > [Quick Menu] > [Export].
3) If the file needs to be encrypted, enter the password after check [Encrypt file]. (The number
of characters for the password must be more than 4 but less than 16.)
4) Click [Export].
5) Following the instructions on the window, specify the location to save the file.
11. User Information of the Advanced Box Export Procedure
1) Access the URL given below, and then access Remote UI.
http://[IP address of the device]/
If the system administrator ID and password are set, a dialog box to enter the user name
and password appears. Enter the system administrator ID in User Name and the password
in Password, and then click [Administrator Login].
2) Select Basic Tools > [User Access Control for Advanced Box]. The dialog box to enter the
3) Click [Execute].
user name of administrator and password appears, enter the system administrator ID and
password, and then click [Log In].
CAUTION:
If any of the host IP address, user name, password, or path to the folder is not
correctly entered, a backup cannot be made.
If you select to encrypt the backup data, the backup process may take longer.
[Restoring the backup data of User inbox and Advanced Box document data]
1) Select [Settings/Registration] > [Management Settings] > [Data Management] > [Restore].
2) Click [Display Backup Data].
3) Select the backup data to restore from the list and then click [Execute].
CAUTION:
If you want to restore encrypted backup data, enter the same password used when
backing up the data.
2) Check that the display on the Control Panel and the Main Power Supply Lamp are turned
off before disconnecting the outlet.
Depending on the settings of the machine, the backup data may not be completely
restored, or some documents may be automatically printed.
Restoration is performed after all of the box data stored in the machine, or
documents that are being sent, received, or stored, are erased.
9-338
9-339
Installation Procedure
Removing the HDD Unit, Signal Cable and Power Supply Cable
1) Open the Right Lower Cover. (Open the Right Upper
Cover simultaneously.)
x3
Claw
F-9-652
F-9-653
5) Remove the USB Cable and the Control Panel Communication Cable.
x2
Control Panel
Communication Cable
Reader Power
Cable
USB Cable
x2
x2
Cable Guide
Wire Saddles
Connectors
F-9-654
F-9-655
9-339
9-340
7) Hold the 2 Grips, and pull out the Main Controller PCB 1
approximately 10mm toward front.
x2
Grips
F-9-656
F-9-657
x2
claw
x5
F-9-658
F-9-659
9-340
9-341
1 screw
1 hook
2 rubber caps
2 screws
1 claw
Hook
x2
claw
Left Rear
Sub Cover
F-9-661
F-9-660
NOTE:
If the FAX Unit has been
installed, remove the 3 screws
and open the Controller Box
with the FAX Unit.
2 screws
x2
x3
Harness
Harness
F-9-663
F-9-662
9-341
9
13) Remove the Controller Cover.
11 screws (loosen)
9-342
CAUTION:
Do not remove the
Cable Retainer
Edge Saddle
x1
Fan Cable.
1 edge saddle
3 wire saddles
1 cable retainer
x4
Wire Saddle
Signal Cable
Fan Cable
Power Cable
F-9-665
F-9-664
2 dege saddles
5 wire saddles
1 connectors
NOTE:
x1
Wire Saddle
x7
Connector
Edge Saddl
Power
Cable
Edge
Saddle
Wire
Saddle
F-9-667
F-9-666
9-342
9
17) Remove the HDD Unit by
holding it as shown in the
figure below.
2 screws (Removed screw
will not be used.)
9-343
18) Remove the HDD (80GB)
installed as standard from the
removed HDD Unit. (The removed
HDD Fixation Plate and the screws
will not be used. The HDD (80GB)
installed as standard will be used
in "Disassembling/Assembling and
Installing the HDD Removed from
the Host Machine (First HDD)"
step1).)
2 screws
x2
x2
F-9-669
F-9-668
9-343
9-344
x2
Claws
F-9-670
CAUTION:
Be careful of the installation direction of HDD Lock Plate.
HDD Lock
Plate Shaft
HDD Lock
Plate Shaft
F-9-671
9-344
9
3) Adjust the 2 bosses to the hole and install the
HDD Lid Retainer.
1 screw (TP round end; M3X6)
9-345
Holes
Bosses
CAUTION:
Be sure to use the round end screw
included in the Removable HDD Kit
as the TP screw.
F-9-673
4) Remove the HDD Rear Cover. (Removed HDD Rear Cover will not be used.)
2 screws (Removed screw will be used in step 5)
x2
x2
c
F-9-674
F-9-675
9-345
9-346
Disassembling/Assembling and Installing the HDD Removed from the Host Machine (First HDD)
1) Remove the HDD from the HDD Support Plate. (Use the HDD (80GB) removed in "Removing the HDD
Unit, Signal Cable and Power Supply Cable" step 18.)
2) Install the HDD Connector Plate first, and then HDD to the HDD Support Plate. (Use the HDD and
screws removed in previous step.)
4 screws
HDD
x4
x4
HDD
HDD Support Plate
F-9-676
F-9-677
If there is no gasket with the HDD removed from the host machine, prepare the gasket with the following part
number and perform step 3).
KE8-1134-030
CAUTION:
Assembling the option HDD, be careful of the installation direction.
Make sure that the label on the option HDD is facing up.
Install it in the position where the HDD connector is placed in the side with screw
hole of HDD Support Plate. (opposite direction compared to the fixed HDD)
Gasket
Screw hole
CAUTION:
Screw hole
Label
Connector side
Connector
HDD
Screw hole
F-9-679
F-9-678
9-346
9-347
CAUTION:
Make sure that
there is no
opening between
the Conversion
Connector and
part of HDD.
x2
Boss
CAUTION:
F-9-680
Hole
F-9-681
CAUTION:
Be sure to firmly hold the Connector Fixation Block when tightening the screws.
Be sure to follow the correct order to tighten the screws, otherwise the Conversion Connector may not be connected properly, resulting in poor contact.
F-9-682
9-347
9-348
CAUTION:
CAUTION:
x2
F-9-683
F-9-684
8) Affix the HDD No.1 Label to the handle of the Removable HDD.
9) Write down the serial number of the host machine to the label for recording the number,
and affix it to the area indicated in the figure.
HDD No.
Serial No.
XXXXXXXX
F-9-686
F-9-685
9-348
9-349
Option HDD
x4
Spacer
Vibration-prevention Dumpe
F-9-687
CAUTION:
Install it in the position where the HDD connector is placed in the side with
screw hole of HDD Support Plate. (opposite direction compared to the
fixed HDD)
Gasket
Screw hole
CAUTION:
Be sure to place the gasket in
contact with the label-free metal
surface of the HDD surface.
Connector side
Screw hole
Label
Connector
HDD
F-9-689
Screw hole
F-9-688
9-349
9-350
CAUTION:
Make sure that
there is no
opening between
the Conversion
Connector and
part of HDD.
x2
Boss
CAUTION:
F-9-690
Hole
F-9-691
CAUTION:
Be sure to firmly hold the Connector Fixation Block when tightening the screws.
Be sure to follow the correct order to tighten the screws, otherwise the Conversion Connector may not be connected properly, resulting in poor contact.
F-9-692
9-350
9-351
x2
CAUTION:
CAUTION:
F-9-693
F-9-694
7) Affix the HDD No.2 Label to the handle of the Removable HDD.
8) Write down the serial number of the host machine to the label for recording the number,
and affix it to the area indicated in the figure.
HDD No.
Serial No.
XXXXXXXX
F-9-696
F-9-695
9-351
9-352
x2
Edge Saddle
F-9-698
F-9-697
Wire Saddle
Cable Guide
Wire Saddle
(Top side of the Controller Box
x8
[A]
CAUTION:
[B]
Connector
Edge Saddle
Wire Saddle
LED Cable
(1200mm; 7 pin)
F-9-699
9-352
9-353
x4
CAUTION:
CHA
CHB
F-9-700
Cable Retainer
x2
x4
Edge Saddle
Power Cable
Wire Saddles
STS Cable
F-9-701
9-353
9-354
5) Install the 2 wire saddles.
CAUTION:
Be sure that the gaskets on left/right side of the Controller Cover are not
protruded.
F-9-702
LED Cable
x4
STS Cable
Signal Cable
Power Cable
CAUTION:
The machine can operate even the STS Cable and the LED
Cable are not connected. Therefore, when installing the cables,
be sure that they are connected properly.
F-9-703
9-354
9
7) Fix the cables.
7 wire saddles
2 edge saddles
x9
Wire
Saddles
9-355
Edge Saddle
Wire Saddles
CAUTION:
When fixing the cables with wire saddles, be sure to take up
slack of them at [A] part, and slack off them at [B] part.
If slacking off the cables at [A] part, they may interefer the fan
on the host machine when returing the Controller Box.
[A]
[B]
Wire Saddles
F-9-705
9-355
9-356
Signal Cable(Blue)
CAUTION:
Be sure to acknowledge the following caution before
performing the next procedure.
Combinations of connection between the HDDs and
the Mirroring Board or Encryption Board are shown
below.
Slot.2 (HDD2)
Power Cable
Slot.1 (HDD1)
Signal Cable(Red)
CH A
CH B
Power Cable
F-9-706
8) Install the cable of the HDD Drawer Unit to the Mirroring Board or Encryption Board.
x4
Power Cable
from front side
Signal Cable(Red)
Signal Cable(Blue)
Power Cable
from rear side
F-9-707
9-356
9-357
11) Install the removed cover and the cable.
Rear Cover
Left Rear Sub Cover
Reader Communication Cable (when reader is
installed)
Left Rear Cover
USB Cable and Control Panel Communication Cable
F-9-708
112)
CAUTION:
Lift the handle, insert the Main Controller PCB 1 until it stops, tilt the
grip and install the 2 screws.
x2
Grips
F-9-709
9-357
9-358
14) Install the Right Rear Cover 1.
NOTE:
Handle the Reader Power Cable from the
connector side and make a slack at A part.
Bend the Reader Power Cable at a right
angle on B part.
x2
[A]
Cable Guide
Wire Saddles
[B]
Reader Power Cable
Connectors
F-9-710
15) Affix the LED label so that it fits the edge of the Right Rear Cover 1.
LED Label
F-9-711
9-358
9
Installing the System Software Using the SST (Only
when installing HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit)
9-359
The system data stored on the HDD and used to control the host machine will be lost when
1) Press the Counter key (123 key) [1] on the control panel.
2) Press the [Check Device Configuration] key appearing on the control panel.
It is important to install the system software used to control the host machine so that the
3) Make sure that 2.00 is displayed in Canon MFP Security Chip as version information of
Details follow.
When several Encryption Boards are installed, multiple version information is displayed.
1. Requirements
CAUTION:
1) PC
Service support tool in the version that supports this host machine must be installed.
2) Cross Ethernet Cable
2. Preparing for the Installation of the System Software of Host machine
The user will be able to make sure that the encryption board fitted with a security chip
of the correct version with CC authentication is functioning normally by referring to the
version information (2.00) indicated for Canon MFP Security Chip.
The user may check the security mark, appearing on the control panel when using the Host
1) Set the CD containing the latest system software in the PC on which the SST is used.
The mark appears when the machine is equipped with an encryption board and the board is
operating correctly.
4) Select the drive in which the System Software CD has been set, and click search.
The Users Guide provides the following description in connection with the security mark:
5) Click REGISTER.
6) Click OK.
When the HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit is operating normally, a security mark(
is displayed on the lower left corner of a panel screen.
1) Click CONNECT.
9-359
9
Setting the Mirroring
1) Insert the power plug into the socket and turn on the main power of the host machine.
2) Make a setting of mirroring.
Specify 1 under Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > FNCSW > W/RAID.
3) Turn OFF/ON the main power of the host machine to enable the setting value.
4) Make sure that the UI screen is activated correctly.
5) Make sure that the LED blinks.
HDD1 (Slot 1): The green LED blinks.
HDD2 (Slot 2): The green and red LEDs blink.
9-360
CAUTION:
becomes uncontrolled, the system administrator can immediately detect the problem and
Rebuild process starts after setting 1 for W/RAID. If an error occurs during the rebuild
process at the initial installation The hard disk needs to be replaced. (Call service rep.),
reexecute the process with the following procedure.
Ask the system administrator to make sure that 2.00 is indicated for Canon MFP Security
Chip as the version information of the security chip by referring to the description of
Checking the Security Version.
Maintenance of the Security Functions:
Ask the system administrator to check the security mark to make sure that the security
functions are maintained each time the machine is started up by referring to the description
of Checking the Security Mark.
The foregoing procedure is limited to the rebuild process at the initial installation.
An error during the rebuild process that is executed during operation is not included in
the consideration.
9-360
9-361
[TYPE-7] 2 Option HDDs (250GB) + Removable HDD Kit + HDD Mirroring Kit or HDD Data Encryption &
Mirroring Kit
Points to Note when HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit has been Installed
A security sticker is attached to the kit package to indicate that the package has not been opened. Check to see that the package has not been opened in any way and the sticker is not torn.
If the package appears to have been opened or the sticker is torn, check to make sure that the user has done so intentionally.
[2] HDD x 1
[3] Vibration-prevention
Dumper x 4
[8] Gasket x 1
<CD/GUIDS>
[4] Spacersx 4
F-9-712
9-361
9-362
F-9-713
9-362
9
[16] HDD Drawer Unit x 1
[17] Screw
(R round head TP; M3 X 6) x 9
9-363
[18] Screw (P Tight ; M3 X 8) x 4
F-9-714
9-363
9-364
F-9-715
9-364
9-365
F-9-716
9-365
9
Points to Note Regarding Data Backup/Export
Before performing work that will result in the loss of data, inform the system administrator of
the inevitable loss, asking him to make a backup or export of important data items.
Backup or export work must not be performed by the service person because of security
considerations.
In this Installation Procedure, a series of backup or export procedures are described for
reference.
9-366
List of Data to be Deleted
Data to be Deleted
Availability of Backup
Yes
Yes *1
Yes
Yes
No
Yes *2
No
Yes
Yes *3
No
No
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
No
No
Yes *4
No
Yes *5
Yes
Yes
T-9-25
9-366
9-367
Reference
The data items that have been backed up may be restored when this product has been
installed. These data items are property of the user, and the restoration work must be
performed by the system administrator.
The method of restoration is described in the Users Guide. See Table (Data to be backed up)
in Points to Note About Installation of the Installation Procedure.
6) Following the instructions on the window, specify the location to save the file. Be sure to set
T-9-26
a distinctive name to an export file so that you can recognize it when importing it.
NOTE:
Exporting the device settings will export all contents of the address list. In other words,
there is no need for a backup unless it needs to be done individually.
9-367
9-368
1) Access the URL given below, and then access Remote UI.
When a MEAP application has been installed, the data and license that the MEAP application
retains will be deleted. If no MEAP application is installed, there is no need to make a backup.
If the system administrator ID and password are set, a dialog box to enter the user name
If a MEAP application has a backup function, make a backup of the data peculiar to the
and password appears. Enter the system administrator ID in User Name and the password
MEAP application using this function. With regard to the license, there is a need to stop all
applications from SMS (Service Management Service), invalidate the license, and download
2) Select [Settings/Registration] > [Management Settings] > [Data Management] > [Import/
Export].
3) Click [Settings/Registration].
Data that has been backed up using MEAP back of the SST before the use of this
product is started must not be written back to the host machine after the use of this
product is started. Similarly, even if the data that has been backed up after the use
of this product is started is written back to the host machine before the use of this
product is started, the machine does not operate. It is necessary to make sure that the
implementation conditions for this product are compatible before and after making a
backup of data, and the MEAP backup function does not permit making a backup of
data in the course of installing the kit.
5) Following the instructions on the window, specify the location to save the file.
4. Printer Settings Export Procedure
NOTE:
The following items to be exported are the same as the ones which are distributed by
device information distribution.
1) Access the URL given below, and then access Remote UI.
http://[IP address of the device]/
If the system administrator ID and password are set, a dialog box to enter the user name
and password appears. Enter the system administrator ID in User Name and the password
in Password, and then click [Administrator Login].
2) Select [Settings/Registration] > [Management Settings] > [Data Management] > [Import/
Export].
The overview of procedures for stop of MEAP applications, Disabling of the license, and
download of an Disabled license file is described below. For more information, see the
MEAPSMS Administrator Guide.
7. Stop of MEAP Applications, Disabling, Download of Disabled License Files and
Uninstallation
CAUTION:
The default password is MeapSmsLogin. If a user has changed the password, ask the
user to change the password again after the use of this product is started.
2) Click [MEAP Application Management].
3) Click [Stop] button of the application you want to stop on the MEAP Application
Management page.
4) Click the application of which license has been installed.
5) Click [License Control], and then click [Disable]. Click [Yes] in a confirmation window for
9-368
9
6) Click [Download] under Download/delete Disabled License File item. Following the
9-369
9. Backup of User inbox and Advanced Box document data
instructions on the window, specify the location to save the file. Set a distinctive name
for the disabled license file so that you can recognize it for which application. After you
download the disabled license file to your PC, click [Delete]. Click [Yes] in a confirmation
When setting a SMB server as a backup destination, Advanced Box data saved in a
large capacity HDD cannot be backed up. The Advanced Box data backed up from the
large capacity HDD cannot be restored to the standard HDD.
Depending on the system version of the machine, both backup and restoration might
not be performed.
The procedure of backup and restoration of a box document data is described below.
Specify the backup destination of a document data:
Backup to SMB server
Select SMB as a backup destination and specify an address, a user name, a password,
and a path to the SMB server to which saved data is backed up.
Backup to USB HDD
Select USB HDD as a backup destination and specify a path to the USB HDD folder to
CAUTION:
Password: password
3) Click [User Control].
4) Put a checkmark to Select All, and then click [Export].
5) Leave the file format and character code as defaults and click [Start Export].
6) Following the instructions on the window, specify the location to save the file and click [Save].
9-369
9-370
10. Quick Menu Information Export Procedure
CAUTION:
Regarding the method of inputting characters, see 'Basic Operations' in the
e-Manual.
A host address can be up to 128 characters in 1 byte or 64 characters in 2 bytes
using the 'Kana-Kanji,' 'Katakana,' 'alphanumeric character,' 'mark,' and 'code input'
modes.
A path to the folder can be up to 255 characters in 1 byte (127 characters in 2 bytes).
A user name can be up to 128 characters in 1 byte or 64 characters in 2 bytes
using the 'Kana-Kanji,', 'Katakana,' 'alphanumeric character,' 'mark,' and 'code input'
modes.
A password can be up to 7 to 48 characters using the 'alphanumeric character' and
'mark (1 byte)' modes.
The voice sound symbol and the semi-voice sound symbol entered in the 'Katakana (1
byte)' mode are counted up as one 1-byte character.
1) Access the URL given below, and then access Remote UI.
http://[IP address of the device]/
If the system administrator ID and password are set, a dialog box to enter the user name
and password appears. Enter the system administrator ID in User Name and the password
in Password, and then click [Administrator Login].
2) Select Basic Tools > [Quick Menu] > [Export].
3) If the file needs to be encrypted, enter the password after check [Encrypt file]. (The number
of characters for the password must be more than 4 but less than 16.)
4) Click [Export].
5) Following the instructions on the window, specify the location to save the file.
11. User Information of the Advanced Box Export Procedure
1) Access the URL given below, and then access Remote UI.
http://[IP address of the device]/
If the system administrator ID and password are set, a dialog box to enter the user name
and password appears. Enter the system administrator ID in User Name and the password
in Password, and then click [Administrator Login].
2) Select Basic Tools > [User Access Control for Advanced Box]. The dialog box to enter the
3) Click [Execute].
user name of administrator and password appears, enter the system administrator ID and
password, and then click [Log In].
CAUTION:
If any of the host IP address, user name, password, or path to the folder is not
correctly entered, a backup cannot be made.
If you select to encrypt the backup data, the backup process may take longer.
[Restoring the backup data of User inbox and Advanced Box document data]
1) Select [Settings/Registration] > [Management Settings] > [Data Management] > [Restore].
2) Click [Display Backup Data].
3) Select the backup data to restore from the list and then click [Execute].
CAUTION:
If you want to restore encrypted backup data, enter the same password used when
backing up the data.
2) Check that the display on the Control Panel and the Main Power Supply Lamp are turned
off before disconnecting the outlet.
Depending on the settings of the machine, the backup data may not be completely
restored, or some documents may be automatically printed.
Restoration is performed after all of the box data stored in the machine, or
documents that are being sent, received, or stored, are erased.
9-370
9-371
Installation Procedure
Removing the HDD Unit, Signal Cable and Power Supply Cable
1) Open the Right Lower Cover. (Open the Right Upper
Cover simultaneously.)
x3
Claw
F-9-717
F-9-718
x2
Control Panel
Communication Cable
Reader Power
Cable
USB Cable
x2
x2
Cable Guide
Wire Saddles
Connectors
F-9-719
F-9-720
9-371
9-372
7) Hold the 2 Grips, and pull out the Main Controller PCB 1
approximately 10mm toward front.
x2
Grips
F-9-721
F-9-722
x2
claw
x5
F-9-723
F-9-724
9-372
9-373
1 screw
1 hook
2 rubber caps
2 screws
1 claw
Hook
x2
claw
Left Rear
Sub Cover
F-9-726
F-9-725
NOTE:
If the FAX Unit has been
installed, remove the 3 screws
and open the Controller Box
with the FAX Unit.
2 screws
x2
x3
Harness
Harness
F-9-728
F-9-727
9-373
9
13) Remove the Controller Cover.
11 screws (loosen)
9-374
CAUTION:
Do not remove the
Cable Retainer
Edge Saddle
x1
Fan Cable.
1 edge saddle
3 wire saddles
1 cable retainer
x4
Wire Saddle
Signal Cable
Fan Cable
Power Cable
F-9-730
F-9-729
2 dege saddles
5 wire saddles
1 connectors
NOTE:
x1
Wire Saddle
x7
Connector
Edge Saddl
Power
Cable
Edge
Saddle
Wire
Saddle
F-9-732
F-9-731
9-374
9
17) Remove the HDD Unit
by holding it as shown in
the figure below.(Removed
HDD unit will not be used.)
2 screws (Removed screw
will not be used.)
9-375
x2
F-9-733
9-375
9-376
x2
Claws
F-9-734
CAUTION:
Be careful of the installation direction of HDD Lock Plate.
HDD Lock
Plate Shaft
HDD Lock
Plate Shaft
F-9-735
9-376
9
3) Adjust the 2 bosses to the hole and
install the HDD Lid Retainer.
1 screw (TP round end; M3X6)
9-377
Holes
Bosses
CAUTION:
Be sure to use the round
end screw included in the
Removable HDD Kit as the
TP screw.
F-9-737
4) Remove the HDD Rear Cover. (Removed HDD Rear Cover will not be used.)
2 screws (Removed screw will be used in step 5)
x2
x2
c
F-9-738
F-9-739
9-377
9-378
Option HDD
x4
Spacer
Vibration-prevention Dumpe
F-9-740
CAUTION:
Assembling the option HDD, be careful of the installation direction.
CAUTION:
Make sure that the label on the option HDD is facing up.
Be sure to place the gasket in contact with the label-free metal surface of the HDD surface.
Install it in the position where the HDD connector is placed in the side with screw hole
of HDD Support Plate. (opposite direction compared to the fixed HDD)
Gasket
Screw hole
Screw hole
Connector side
Connector
Label
HDD
Screw hole
F-9-741
F-9-742
9-378
9-379
CAUTION:
Make sure that
there is no
opening between
the Conversion
Connector and
part of HDD.
x2
Boss
CAUTION:
F-9-743
Hole
F-9-744
CAUTION:
Be sure to firmly hold the Connector Fixation Block when tightening the screws.
Be sure to follow the correct order to tighten the screws, otherwise the Conversion Connector may not be connected properly, resulting in poor contact.
F-9-745
9-379
9-380
CAUTION:
CAUTION:
x2
F-9-746
F-9-747
7) Affix the HDD No.1 Label to the handle of the Removable HDD.
8) Write down the serial number of the host machine to the label for recording the number,
and affix it to the area indicated in the figure.
HDD No.
Serial No.
XXXXXXXX
F-9-749
F-9-748
9-380
9-381
Option HDD
x4
Spacer
Vibration-prevention Dumpe
F-9-750
CAUTION:
Assembling the option HDD, be careful of the installation direction.
CAUTION:
Make sure that the label on the option HDD is facing up.
Be sure to place the gasket in contact with the label-free metal surface of the HDD surface.
Install it in the position where the HDD connector is placed in the side with screw hole
of HDD Support Plate. (opposite direction compared to the fixed HDD)
Gasket
Screw hole
Screw hole
Connector side
Connector
Label
HDD
Screw hole
F-9-751
F-9-752
9-381
9-382
CAUTION:
Make sure that
there is no
opening between
the Conversion
Connector and part
of HDD.
x2
Boss
CAUTION:
F-9-753
Hole
F-9-754
CAUTION:
Be sure to firmly hold the Connector Fixation Block when tightening the screws.
Be sure to follow the correct order to tighten the screws, otherwise the Conversion Connector may not be connected properly, resulting in poor contact.
F-9-755
9-382
9-383
x2
CAUTION:
CAUTION:
F-9-756
F-9-757
7) Affix the HDD No.2 Label to the handle of the Removable HDD.
8) Write down the serial number of the host machine to the label for recording the number,
and affix it to the area indicated in the figure.
HDD No.
Serial No.
XXXXXXXX
F-9-759
F-9-758
9-383
9-384
x2
Edge Saddle
F-9-761
F-9-760
Wire Saddle
Cable Guide
Wire Saddle
(Top side of the Controller Box
x8
[A]
CAUTION:
[B]
Connector
Edge Saddle
Wire Saddle
LED Cable
(1200mm; 7 pin)
F-9-762
9-384
9-385
x4
CAUTION:
CHA
CHB
F-9-763
Cable Retainer
x2
x4
Edge Saddle
Power Cable
Wire Saddles
STS Cable
F-9-764
9-385
9-386
5) Install the 2 wire saddles.
CAUTION:
Be sure that the gaskets on left/right side of the Controller Cover are not
protruded.
F-9-765
LED Cable
x4
STS Cable
Signal Cable
Power Cable
CAUTION:
The machine can operate even the STS Cable and the LED
Cable are not connected. Therefore, when installing the cables,
be sure that they are connected properly.
F-9-766
9-386
9
7) Fix the cables.
7 wire saddles
2 edge saddles
x9
Wire
Saddles
9-387
Edge Saddle
Wire Saddles
CAUTION:
When fixing the cables with wire saddles, be sure to take up
slack of them at [A] part, and slack off them at [B] part.
If slacking off the cables at [A] part, they may interefer the fan
on the host machine when returing the Controller Box.
[A]
[B]
Wire Saddles
F-9-768
9-387
9-388
Signal Cable(Blue)
CAUTION:
Be sure to acknowledge the following caution before
performing the next procedure.
Combinations of connection between the HDDs and
the Mirroring Board or Encryption Board are shown
below.
Slot.2 (HDD2)
Power Cable
Slot.1 (HDD1)
Signal Cable(Red)
CH A
CH B
Power Cable
F-9-769
8) Install the cable of the HDD Drawer Unit to the Mirroring Board or Encryption Board.
x4
Power Cable
from front side
Signal Cable(Red)
Signal Cable(Blue)
Power Cable
from rear side
F-9-770
9-388
9-389
11) Install the removed cover and the cable.
Rear Cover
Left Rear Sub Cover
Reader Communication Cable (when reader is
installed)
Left Rear Cover
USB Cable and Control Panel Communication Cable
F-9-771
CAUTION:
Lift the handle, insert the Main Controller PCB 1 until it stops,
x2
Grips
F-9-772
9-389
9-390
14) Install the Right Rear Cover 1.
NOTE:
Handle the Reader Power Cable from the
connector side and make a slack at A part.
Bend the Reader Power Cable at a right
angle on B part.
x2
[A]
Cable Guide
Wire Saddles
[B]
Reader Power Cable
Connectors
F-9-773
15) Affix the LED label so that it fits the edge of the Right Rear Cover 1.
LED Label
F-9-774
9-390
9
Installing the System Software Using the SST
The system data stored on the HDD and used to control the host machine will be lost when
the machine is first started up after installing this product.
It is important to install the system software used to control the host machine so that the
machine may start up properly after installation of this product.
9-391
Details follow.
1. Requirements
When several Encryption Boards are installed, multiple version information is displayed.
1) PC
Service support tool in the version that supports this host machine must be installed.
2) Cross Ethernet Cable
2. Preparing for the Installation of the System Software of Host machine
1) If both PC and the machine are on, turn them off.
CAUTION:
The user will be able to make sure that the encryption board fitted with a security chip
of the correct version with CC authentication is functioning normally by referring to the
version information (2.00) indicated for Canon MFP Security Chip.
The mark appears when the machine is equipped with an encryption board and the board is
operating correctly.
The Users Guide provides the following description in connection with the security mark:
6) Click OK.
4. Downloading the System Software
1) Click CONNECT.
When the HDD Data Encryption & Mirroring Kit is operating normally, a security mark(
is displayed on the lower left corner of a panel screen.
9-391
9
Setting the Mirroring
1) Insert the power plug into the socket and turn on the main power of the host machine.
2) Make a setting of mirroring.
Specify 1 under Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > FNCSW > W/RAID.
3) Turn OFF/ON the main power of the host machine to enable the setting value.
4) Make sure that the UI screen is activated correctly.
5) Make sure that the LED blinks.
HDD1 (Slot 1): The green LED blinks.
HDD2 (Slot 2): The green and red LEDs blink.
9-392
CAUTION:
becomes uncontrolled, the system administrator can immediately detect the problem and
Rebuild process starts after setting 1 for W/RAID. If an error occurs during the rebuild
process at the initial installation The hard disk needs to be replaced. (Call service rep.),
reexecute the process with the following procedure.
Ask the system administrator to make sure that 2.00 is indicated for Canon MFP Security
Chip as the version information of the security chip by referring to the description of
Checking the Security Version.
Maintenance of the Security Functions:
Ask the system administrator to check the security mark to make sure that the security
functions are maintained each time the machine is started up by referring to the description
of Checking the Security Mark.
The foregoing procedure is limited to the rebuild process at the initial installation.
An error during the rebuild process that is executed during operation is not included in
the consideration.
9-392
Appendix
Tools
Service
Circuit Diagram
General
Timing Chart
General
Mode
User
Data
Backup
II
Service Tools
Special Tools
In addition to the standard tools set, the following special tools are required when servicing the machine:
Tool No.
Ctgr
Digital multimeter
Tool name
FY9-2002
Door Switch
TKN-0093
FY9-3038
FY9-3039
Appearance
Remarks
Used as a probe extension when making electrical checks.
II
III
Tool No.
Ctgr
Tool name
FY9-9323
Appearance
Remarks
Loupe
CK-0056
Cleaning tool
To clean the feed guide- This is not a service tool.- 1 of this are
enclosed at shipment of the host machine.
Tospearl 240
FY9-6007-000
III
Tool name
Mirror positioning tool
Tool No.
Ctgr
FY9-3040-040
Appearance
IV
Remarks
Used for positioning mirror mounts.
Reference: Category
T-10-1
Uses
Composition
Remarks
Alcohol
Cleaning; e.g.,
glass, plastic, rubber; external covers.
Fluoride-family hydrocarbon
Alcohol
Surface activating
Water
Solvent
Cleaning; e.g.,
metal; oil or toner stain.
Fluoride-family hydrocarbon
Chlorine-family hydrocarbon
Alcohol
Heat-resisting grease
MO-138S
Tool No: CK-0427 (500 g/can)
Lubricating oil
Silicone oil
Lubricating oil
(EM-50L)
Special oil
Special solid lubricating agent
Lithium soap
Lubricating oil
Silicone oil
Conducting grease
Lubrication; e.g., edge of secondary transfer roller, drum heater sliding area.
Lubricating oil
T-10-2
IV
Appendix > General Timing Chart > General Timing Chart > A4 single-sided 2 prints full color
Start key ON
Printer unit
PSTBY
PINTR
LSTR
PSTBY
Appendix > General Timing Chart > General Timing Chart > A4 single-sided 2 prints full color
Laser(M)
Laser(C)
Laser(Bk)
Y1
Y2
M1
M2
C1
C2
Bk1
Bk2
Developing AC bias(Y)
Developing AC bias(M)
Developing AC bias(C)
Developing AC bias(Bk)
Developing DC bias(Y)
Developing DC bias(M)
Developing DC bias(C)
Developing DC bias(Bk)
Developing motor(Y)
Developing motor(M)
Developing motor(C)
Developing motor(Bk)
Primary transfer bias(Y)
Primary transfer bias(M)
Primary transfer bias(C)
Primary transfer bias(Bk)
Secondary transfer bias
Scanner motor(YM),(CBk)
First & Second delivery motor
First delivery sensor
Cassette 1 pickup motor
Fixing motor
Fixing heater
F-10-1
VI
A4 single-sided 2 prints Bk color
PINTR
LSTR
PSTBY
Pickup/feed system
Appendix > General Timing Chart > General Timing Chart > A4 single-sided 2 prints Bk color
PSTBY
Appendix > General Timing Chart > General Timing Chart > A4 single-sided 2 prints Bk color
Start key ON
Printer unit
Fixing motor
Fixing heater
F-10-2
VI
J432
J104
J106
Jack. No.
J107
Signal Name
ZEROX IN
Relay ON 2
Relay ON 1
Heater ON 2
Heater ON 1
J109
J110
VII
Signal Name
Pickup feed driver PCB ready
CPU reset
Pickup feed driver PCB high speed clock 2
Pickup feed driver PCB serial slave 2
Pickup feed driver PCB serial master 2
Pickup feed driver PCB high speed clock 1
Pickup feed driver PCB serial slave 1
Pickup feed driver PCB serial master 1
CPU reset
ITB displacement control motor clock
Primary transfer separation motor clock
Drum driver PCB ready
Drum driver PCB clock(Differential -)
Drum driver PCB clock(Differential +)
Drum driver PCB master (Differential +)
Drum driver PCB master (Differential -)
Drum driver PCB slave (Differential -)
Drum driver PCB slave (Differential +)
Primary Charging AC (C) PWM
Primary Charging DC (C) PWM
Developing AC (C) remote
Developing DC (C) remote
Primary Charging AC (M) PWM
Primary Charging DC (M) PWM
Developing AC (M) remote
Developing DC (M) remote
Primary Charging AC (Y) PWM
Primary Charging DC (Y) PWM
Developing AC (Y) remote
Developing DC (Y) remote
HVT 1 PCB analog 2
HVT 1 PCB analog 1
HVT 1 PCB MUX 2
HVT 1 PCB MUX 1
HVT 1 PCB MUX 0
Developing AC PWM
Developing AC PWM
Primary
Developing AC clock 1
Developing AC clock 2
VII
Jack. No.
J111
J102
J103
Signal Name
Primary Charging AC (Bk) clock 2
Primary Charging AC (Bk) PWM
Primary Charging DC (Bk) PWM
Developing AC (Bk) Remote
Developing AC PWM
Developing AC PWM
Developing AC clock 3
Developing AC clock 4
Developing DC (bk) PWM
Primary transfer (Bk) PWM
Primary transfer (Y) PWM
Primary transfer (M) PWM
Primary transfer (C) PWM
HVT 2 PCB analog 2
HVT 2 PCB analog 1
HVT 2 PCB MUX 2
HVT 2 PCB MUX 1
HVT 2 PCB MUX 0
ECO-ID degital OUT
ECO-ID degital IN
ECO-ID 1
ECO-ID 2
ECO-ID 3
Pickup feed driver PCB connect
Door open
Patch control
Bk toner control
C toner control
M toner control
Y toner control
Patch sensor reflection
Patch sensor diffused reflection
Registration sensor (rear)
Registration sensor (front)
Bk toner analog
C toner analog
M toner analog
Y toner analog
Multi-purpose size sensor
Transparency sensor analog
Jack. No.
J112
J123
J124
J125
VIII
Signal Name
12V Interlock for HVT PCB
HVT 3 PCB DC 1
HVT 3 PCB DC 2
Secondary transfer PWM 1
Secondary transfer PWM 2
Thermistor connect
Main thermistor 1
Main thermistor 2
Sub thermistor 1
Sub thermistor 2
Main power supply switch
Fixing arch sensor 1
Fixing arch sensor 2
Fixing inlet sensor
Fixing motor BRAKE
Fixing motor ON
Fixing motor LOCK
Fixing motor GAIN
Fixing motor CLOCK
Fixing motor DIR
Recycle toner stirring motor FG
Registration shutter solenoid PWM
Delivery fan 1 PWM
Bk pre-exposure LED PCB PWM
C pre-exposure LED PCB PWM
M pre-exposure LED PCB PWM
Y pre-exposure LED PCB PWM
Cassette 1 pickup motor clock
Cassette 2 pickup motor clock
Fixing delivery motor clock
Duplex feed motor clock
Shutter motor clock
Multi-purpose motor clock
Registration motor clock
Laser shutter motor clock
Pickup feed driver PCB connect
VIII
Jack. No.
J126
J127
J132
J138
Signal Name
Buffer pass serial clock
Buffer pass serial TXEND
Buffer pass serial TXD
Buffer pass serial RXLOAD
Buffer pass serial RXD
Buffer pass serial ENB
Inner finisher serial TXD
Inner finisher serial RXD
Finisher download mode
Finisher reset
Inner finisher download end
Inner finisher detect
Deck serial clock
Deck serial TXEND
Deck serial TXD
Deck serial RXLOAD
Deck serial RXD
Deck serial ENB
Finisher serial TXD
Finisher serial RXD
Finisher connect
Finisher download mode
Finisher reset
Finisher download end
Key switch
First & Second delivery motor A
First & Second delivery motor A*
First & Second delivery motor B*
First & Second delivery motor B
Reverse roller motor A
Reverse roller motor A*
Reverse roller motor B*
Reverse roller motor B
Third delivery motor A
Third delivery motor A*
Third delivery motor B*
Third delivery motor B
Jack. No.
J204
J205
J207
IX
Signal Name
Delivery fan 2 ON
Delivery fan 2 LOCK
Second & third delivery door sensor
First delivery sensor
First delivery tray full sensor
Fixing delivery motor A
Fixing delivery motor A*
Fixing delivery motor B*
Fixing delivery motor B
Recycle toner box detect
Recycle toner sensor detect
Recycle toner sensor LED ON
Recycle toner stirring motor FG
Recycle toner stirring motor ON
Bk pre-exposure LED PCB LED ON
C pre-exposure LED PCB LED ON
M pre-exposure LED PCB LED ON
Y pre-exposure LED PCB LED ON
New/old detection fuse (Y)
ATR sensor (Y) control
ATR sensor (Y) analog
New/old detection fuse (M)
ATR sensor (M) control
ATR sensor (M) analog
New/old detection fuse (C)
ATR sensor (C) control
ATR sensor (C) analog
New/old detection fuse (Bk)
ATR sensor (Bk) control
ATR sensor (Bk) analog
Registration sensor (front)
Patch sensor (front) LED ON
Patch sensor (front) gain 1
Patch sensor (front) gain 2
Registration sensor (rear)
Patch sensor (rear) LED ON
Patch sensor (rear) gain 1
Patch sensor (rear) gain 2
Patch sensor (center) LED ON
AD reflection
AD diffused reflection
Patch sensor (center) control
IX
Jack. No.
J210
J212
J213
J214
Signal Name
Second delivery tray full sensor
Reverse sensor
Second delivery sensor ON
First delivery flapper solenoid ON
Second delivery flapper solenoid ON
Third delivery flapper solenoid ON
Third delivery sensor
Duplex inlet sensor
Right lower door sensor
Multi-purpose paper sensor
Multi-purpose size sensor
Duplex paper sensor
Multi-purpose pickup clutch ON
Multi-purpose motor A
Multi-purpose motor A*
Multi-purpose motor B*
Multi-purpose motor B
Multi-purpose tray lifting solenoid
Registration motor A
Registration motor A*
Registration motor B
Registration motor B*
Duplex feed motor A
Duplex feed motor A*
Duplex feed motor B
Duplex feed motor B*
Fixing heat exhaust fan 1 ON
Fixing heat exhaust fan 1 LOCK
Fixing heat exhaust fan 2 ON
Fixing heat exhaust fan 2 LOCK
Right door sensor
Laser shutter motor A
Laser shutter motor A*
Laser shutter motor B
Laser shutter motor B*
Process cartridge fan (front) ON
Process cartridge fan (front) LOCK
Laser shutter sensor
Jack. No.
J215
J216
J217
J218
Signal Name
Cassette 1 pickup motor A
Cassette 1 pickup motor A*
Cassette 1 pickup motor B
Cassette 1 pickup motor B*
Cassette 2 pickup motor A
Cassette 2 pickup motor A*
Cassette 2 pickup motor B
Cassette 2 pickup motor B*
Inner delivery sensor
Fixing pressure sensor
Shutter position sensor
Shutter HP sensor
Registration shutter solenoid PWM
Transparency sensor LED ON
Transparency sensor analog
Vertical path sensor
Registration sensor
Front door sensor
Multi-purpose size sensor
Shutter motor A
Shutter motor A*
Shutter motor B
Shutter motor B*
Delivery fan 1 PWM
Fixing cooling fan (front) ON
Fixing cooling fan (front) Lock
Fixing cooling fan (rear) ON
Fixing cooling fan (rear) Lock
Secondary transfer exhaust fan ON
Secondary transfer exhaust fan Lock
Jack. No.
J234
J235
J237
J303
Signal Name
Cassette 1 size switch A_0
Cassette 1 size switch A_1
Cassette 1 size switch A_2
Cassette 1 size switch A_3
Cassette 1 size switch B_4
Cassette 1 size switch B_5
Cassette 1 size switch B_6
Cassette 1 size switch B_7
Cassette 2 size switch A_0
Cassette 2 size switch A_1
Cassette 2 size switch A_2
Cassette 2 size switch A_3
Cassette 2 size switch B_4
Cassette 2 size switch B_5
Cassette 2 size switch B_6
Cassette 2 size switch B_7
Cassette 1 paper sensor
Cassette 1 paper level sensor A
Cassette 1 paper level sensor B
Cassette 1 pre-registration sensor
Cassette 1 pickup solenoid
Cassette 2 paper sensor
Cassette 2 paper level sensor A
Cassette 2 paper level sensor B
Cassette 2 pre-registration sensor
Cassette 2 pickup solenoid
ITB steering sensor
ITB displacement sensor 1
ITB displacement sensor 2
ITB displacement sensor 3
ITB displacement sensor 4
Primary transfer detachment sensor 1
Primary transfer detachment sensor 2
Toner supply clutch (Y) ON
Toner supply clutch (M) ON
Toner supply clutch (C) ON
Toner supply clutch (Bk) ON
Jack. No.
J304
J305
J306
J307
XI
Signal Name
ITB motor Break
ITB motor ON
ITB motor Lock
ITB motor Gain
ITB motor Clock
ITB motor FG
ITB displacement control motor A
ITB displacement control motor A*
ITB displacement control motor B
ITB displacement control motor B*
Primary transfer separation motor A
Primary transfer separation motor A*
Primary transfer separation motor B
Primary transfer separation motor B*
Developing motor (Bk) Deceleration
Developing motor (Bk) Accelerationration
Developing motor (Bk) FG
Developing motor (C) Deceleration
Developing motor (C) Acceleration
Developing motor (C) FG
Developing motor (M) Deceleration
Developing motor (M) Acceleration
Developing motor (M) FG
Developing motor (Y) Deceleration
Developing motor (Y) Acceleration
Developing motor (Y) FG
Bk drum rotation sensor 2
Bk drum rotation sensor 1
C drum rotation sensor 2
C drum rotation sensor 1
M drum rotation sensor 2
M drum rotation sensor 1
Y drum rotation sensor 2
Y drum rotation sensor 1
Drum Motor (Y) DIR
Drum Motor (Y) ON
Drum Motor (Y) BREAK
Drum Motor (Y) FG
Drum Motor (Y) PWM
XI
Jack. No.
J308
J309
J310
J312
XII
Signal Name
Drum Motor (Bk) DIR
Drum Motor (Bk) ON
Drum Motor (Bk) BREAK
Drum Motor (Bk) FG
Drum Motor (Bk) PWM
Drum Motor (C) DIR
Drum Motor (C) ON
Drum Motor (C) BREAK
Drum Motor (C) FG
Drum Motor (C) PWM
Drum Motor (M) DIR
Drum Motor (M) ON
Drum Motor (M) BREAK
Drum Motor (M) FG
Drum Motor (M) PWM
Toner container outer cover sensor
Toner container inner cover sensor (Y)
Toner container inner cover sensor (M)
Toner container inner cover sensor (C)
Toner container inner cover sensor (Bk)
Piezo sensor (Y)
Toner supply sensor (Y)
Toner cap position sensor (Y)
Toner container cam HP sensor (Y)
Piezo sensor (M)
Toner supply sensor (M)
Toner cap position sensor (M)
Toner container cam HP sensor (M)
Piezo sensor (C)
Toner supply sensor (C)
Toner cap position sensor (C)
Toner container cam HP sensor (C)
Piezo sensor (Bk)
Toner supply sensor (Bk)
Toner cap position sensor (Bk)
Toner container cam HP sensor (Bk)
Toner container motor (Y) Clockwise
Toner container motor (Y) Counter Clockwise
Toner container motor (M) Clockwise
Toner container motor (M) Counter Clockwise
Toner container motor (C) Clockwise
Toner container motor (C) Counter Clockwise
Toner container motor (Bk) Clockwise
Toner container motor (Bk) Counter Clockwise
T-10-3
XII
XIII
H1
2
1
2
1
TP
J5007M
TP1
J5012L
MT1
FT13
W W
5
1
J5010F
SOLD5
J5005F
1
FT6
Temperature fuse
1
FT8
FT7
UL11023 AWG16
J5039
BK
FT14
J5007F
J681
MT7
MT5
Environment switch
1
N (W)
J5014L
FT2
FT5
N (W)
H (BK)
FT1
J5013D
1
1
J5012D
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
J5010M
J5005M
J5087M
J5006M
J5006F
W W
SW5
N (W)
N (W)
J5087F
H (BK)
SOLD6
J833
FT31
N.C .
N.C .
J866
MT2
GND
FT33
FT10
FT35
FT12
Cassette heater
H2
SW2
FT9
UN9
100V
15A
FT11
H4
W
W
SW1
Fixing heater
J5014D
MT6
H (BK)
H (BK)
10
Appendix > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram (1/16)
J1009
J1005
J1002
J1011
J1003
N (W)
N (W)
2
H (BK)
H (BK)
N.C .
N.C .
J1007
FT32
N.C .
1
J1001
N.C .
FT36
FT34
AC interlock switch
J1006
UN6
AC driver PCB
J1004
J2003
J2001
J2002
J1010
J1008
J1012
GN D
TEST_RL_3.3V_POW ER1
TEST_RL_3.3V_POW ER2
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
17
10
18
19
20
21
22
23
+3.3VR(TEST_GND)
16
GN D
15
TEST_RL_3.3V_POW ER1
14
TEST_RL_3.3V_POW ER2
13
TEST_RL_ON_24V_POWER
12
UN5
J426
J411
GN D
BL
GND
BL
BL
BL
OR
OR
OR
BL
BL
BL
BL
BL
24V R
GND
BL
10
2
1
(J102)
J1102
Deck Heater
UN10
10
J2012M
J5001F
1
11
12
UN11
J5077F
J835
J5008M
J834
J5008F
12V OR
GN D
24V R
BL
J5002DH
MT3
GND
J2012F
12V
12V
GN D
N.C .
J1022
6
J2020
UN7
12V
GN D
RMT_12V
GN D
10
GN D
GN D
24V
24V
24V
GN D
RMT_24V
J1021
Option Cassette
Relay PCB
B
1
J5002D
J412
J1020
RMT_SYS
21
11
3.3VR
22
10
RMT_QUIC K
23
J431
SEESA
W
GN D
3.3VR
SEESA
W
GN D
SHUTOFF
RMT_SYS
GN D
DRM_RD_HEAT_OFF*
VO L_S
CST_HEAT_OFF
CRNT_S
VINJDG 1
FSR_C RNT_S
3.3V
GN D
VINJDG 2
HEAT1_ON
HEAT2_ON
RELAY1_ON
RELAY2_ON
12V
GN D
ZEROX_IN
23CSR-8PK(N)
1
J1101
(J101)
5
6
J5077M
Appendix > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram (1/16)
10
P.1
F-10-3
XIII
XIV
Appendix > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram (2/16)
10
UN2
UN1
DC controller PCB
J211
1
J129
2
Controller
UN16
UN17
UN18
UN8
HVT 1 PCB
HVT 2 PCB
HVT 2 PCB
J301
J808
2
UN4
Drum driver PCB
10
11
J650
J302
1
J651
J652
J662
2
BL
BL
BL
+24V
GND
OR
GND
OR
BL
GND
12V
BL
GND
J425
12V
24V_IL
BL
J424
GND
J5043F
R
1
24V_IL
10
J5043M
GND
24V_IL
BL
BL
GND
GND
GND
J421
24V
BL
BL
GND
UL1007 #20
OR
BL
12V
24V_IL
OR
12V
GND
OR
12V
BL
OR
12V
BL
PK
BL
+24V
3.3R
BL
GND
GND
OR
R
+24V_IL
J422
J423
GND
BL
GND
BL
OR
R
+12V
BL
GND
GND
OR
24V
+12V_IL
BL
GND
12V
R
24V_IL
24V_IL
GND
J451
FAX
UN5
Relay PCB
J700
2
GND
DCP_FAN_LOCK
GND
GND
24V
DCP_FAN_ON
GND
J432
P_CRG_FAN_ON
24V
P_CRG_FAN_LOCK
12V
GND
12V
GND
24V
GND
BL
GND
GND
BL
+3.3R
+3.3R
PK
J427
J428
J413
PK
Appendix > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram (2/16)
C
J5082DH
J5081F
J5080M
1
J5080F
J5082D
2
1
J5082L
J5081M
1
2
MT21
J701DH
1
J803F
J691
J801
J805
J804
J802
To P.4
Finisher C1
J6124L
Finisher A1
UI
J6122LH
1
J701L
J6122L
USB
1 2 3
UN9
J701D
J6122D
J6124LH
F-4
J6124D
SP1
1 2 3
Speaker
FM4
Option
Process
cartridge fan
(rear)
FM3
Power supply
cooling fan
10
P.2
F-10-4
XIV
10
15
14
13
SOLD11
9
12
1
1
11
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
HV_CHG_DC_PWM_M
HV_DEV_AC_RMT_M
29
HV_DEV_DC_PWM_M
HV_CHG_AC_PWM_Y
HV_CHG_DC_PWM_Y
10
28
27
4
26
SOLD12
5
25
6
6
24
7
7
23
8
8
22
4
3
9
21
10
SOLD13
20
11
2
12
13
19
12
18
1
13
14
17
14
16
15
17
15
16
17
18
15
16
14
16
17
8
13
15
14
CN6
SOLD14
19
18
12
13
1
19
11
20
12
2
10
11
3
21
10
20
21
22
22
8
5
23
7
24
SOLD15
7
7
6
25
8
5
26
9
4
27
10
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
28
2
J653
3
11
29
2
1
13
12
11
10
9
1
2
3
4
5
J654
8
HVT 1 PCB
UN16
6
7
6
5
6
7
8
4
3
2
10
11
12
13
15
14
13
12
14
15
16
17
11
18
19
10
9
20
J655
21
22
6
5
4
3
23
24
25
J656
HVT 2 PCB
UN17
J5044L
J5044LH
Environment
sensor 2
UN50
4
3
2
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
J5076LH
J810
1
7
2
6
3
5
4
4
5
J5066LH
J111
3
6
2
J5066L
1
2
3
4
5
J5066D
J107
6
7
15
8
9
14
13
10
12
4
5
6
7
11
12
11
10
7
8
13
8
9
10
14
15
16
7
6
F
UN4
F
J109
17
18
19
20
J3002D
3
2
SOLD16
Appendix > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram (3/16)
GND
DRUM_HOB_S2M-
DRUM_HOB_S2M+
GND
DRUM_HOB_M2S-
DRUM_HOB_M2S+
GND
DRUM_HOB_CLK-
25
+5V
16
GND
15
PEDE_DETECT
14
PEDE_EX_M2S
13
PEDE_EX_S2M
12
GND
GND
11
PEDE_EX_CLK
10
GND
PEDE_CST1M_CLK
GND
PEDE_CST2M_CLK
10
GND
11
DRUM_HOB_CLK+
J311
PEDE_RESET*
GND
DRUM_READY
RIKANM_CLK
ITB_YORIM_CLK
GND
CPU_RESET
GND
GND
+3.3V
+5V
10
GND
11
GND
HANSO1_EX_M2S
12
+3.3V
HANSO1_EX_S2M
HNASO1_EX_CLK
GND
J201
GND
15
HANSO2_EX_M2S
PEDE_READY
14
HANSO2_EX_S2M
TEMP1
13
HANSO2_EX_CLK
UN2
I2C_SCL
12
13
GND
GND
UN3
3.3V
11
GND
J106
HANSO_READY
J231
CPU_RESET
GND
GND
+24V
10
GND
+3.3V
+3.3V
I2C_SDA
+5V
KYUSHI_EX_M2S
HVSEL_HV2_MUX0
GND
HVSEL_HV2_MUX1
HV2_ANALOG1
J110
1
HVSEL_HV2_MUX2
27
GND
26
+12_IL_HV
25
GND
HV2_ANALOG2
24
10
HV_TR1_PWM_Y
23
11
HV_TR1_PWM_M
22
12
HV_TR1_PWM_C
21
13
HV_TR1_PWM_K
J122
14
GND
20
15
GND
19
HV_DEV_AC_CLK4
18
HV_DEV_AC_CLK3
UN5
HV_DEV_DC_PWM_K
17
GND
KYUSHI_EX_S2M
CPU_RESET
KYUSHI_EX_CLK
KYUSHI_READY
ITB_HP_SNS
GND
10
GND
11
RELAY2_ON
RELAY1_ON
12
ZEROX_IN
HEAT2_ON
16
HEAT1_ON
15
GND
14
3.3V
13
VINJDG
J402
HV_DEV_AC_PWM_P2
12
13
FSR_CRNT_S
Relay PCB
HV_DEV_AC_PWM_M2
11
CRNT_S
HV_DEV_AC_RMT_K
10
14
GND
15
HV_CHG_DC_PWM_K
16
120V_DET
17
VOL_S
E
DRM_RD_HEAT_OFF
18
GND
19
HV_CHG_AC_CLK2
20
GND
21
CST_HEAT_OFF
HV_CHG_AC_PWM_K
GND
GND
GND
PCRG_FAN_LOCK*
SIG_RMT_24VDCP
PCRG_FAN_12V
SHUKUTAI_MODE
PCRG_FAN_24V
15
DCP_FAN_LOCK*
14
HV_DEV_AC_CLK2
13
HV_DEV_AC_CLK1
12
22
HV_CHG_AC_CLK1
11
23
HV_DEV_AC_PWM_P1
10
24
HV_DEV_AC_PWM_M1
25
GND
J121
26
HVSEL_HV1_MUX0
27
GND
HVSEL_HV1_MUX1
J401
HVSEL_HV1_MUX2
GND
DCP_FAN_12V
DCP_FAN_24V
HV1_ANALOG1
GND
HV1_ANALOG2
GND
GND
RMT_CONT
+12V_IL_HV
SEESAW
SHUTOFF
GND
10
GND
RMT_RCON
RMT_ENG
11
HV_DEV_DC_PWM_Y
HV_CHG_AC_PWM_M
RMT_SYS
12
GND
13
HV_DEV_AC_RMT_Y
HV_DEV_DC_PWM_C
RMT_RESERVE
HV_DEV_AC_RMT_C
GND
14
HV_CHG_DC_PWM_C
15
HV_CHG_AC_PWM_C
GND
10
GND
+3.3R
R_PW_MONI*
Appendix > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram (3/16)
XV
UN1
D
DC controller PCB
J104
21
J5076D
7
1
J5076L
J3002DH
J1300
Environment
sensor 1
UN22
CN5
P.3
F-10-5
XV
11
11
9
10
3
9
4
8
5
7
6
6
7
5
8
M21
4
9
Fixing motor
3
10
2
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
8
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
EX3M_OUT_A
EX3M_OUT_B
13
12
2
11
3
4
10
9
6
7
7
6
8
5
9
4
10
3
11
2
12
J5045LH
J6142
4
3
2
1
4
3
2
1
4
3
2
1
4
3
2
1
4
3
2
1
4
3
2
1
M
M
M
M23
M24
M25
Reverse roller
motor
J6141
J138
13
J5042L
J5042D
1
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
J5031D
SOLD8
J132
SOLD9
17
18
19
20
21
1
2
1
2
3
9
8
J6084
J6140
7
6
5
4
J125
5
6
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
13
EHO-ID
J5031L
GND
12
FIN_DL_EN
11
FIN_RESET
10
FIN_DL_MODE
FIN_CNNT
SOLD4
2
SW3
J102
J5042DH
J5053F
J5053M
J2111M
J2111F
DC interlock
switch 1
SOLD3
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
13
14
15
16
17
18
SOLD2
2
J127
19
4
23
3
22
1
2
21
5
20
19
7
18
3
4
5
6
17
9
16
10
15
11
14
12
13
7
8
9
10
11
13
12
14
11
15
10
16
12
13
14
15
17
8
18
16
17
18
3
2
Buffer pass
19
5
20
21
J809
Finisher C1
J803M
To P.2
B-8
MT24
J815
Finisher A1
J813
3
5
22
2
19
20
21
22
23
3
2
1
J816H
J816
J5037LH
J5037L
23
J5071L
J5071D
J5071DH
J126
Third delivery
motor
Appendix > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram (4/16)
GND
Z3_DETECT
1
10
FIN_DL_EN
11
FIN_RESET
GND
1
2
GND
2
3
FIN_DL_MODE
3
10
4
GND
4
9
5
UART_RXD
5
8
6
BUF_CHOUHI_ENB
6
7
7
GND
7
6
BUF_CHOUHI_RXD
8
5
8
UART_TXD
9
4
9
BUF_CHOUHI_RXLOAD
10
3
10
BUF_CHOUHI_TXD
J5037D
2
11
GND
1
12
BUF_CHOUHI_CLK
BUF_CHOUHI_TXEND
13
GND
GND
J203
12V
E
J809B_[0:8]
24V
J809B
GND
GND
GND
GND
UART_TXD
DECK_CHOUHI_ENB
UART_RXD
DECK_CHOUHI_RXD
J813H
DECK_CHOUHI_TXD
DECK_CHOUHI_TXEND
DECK_CHOUHI_RXLOAD
GND
DECK_CHOUHI_CLK
GND
LS_SHUTM_CLK
REGIM_CLK
HANSO_CNNT1
MULTIM_CLK
10
GND
11
+12V
12
+12V_IL
SHUTM_CLK
DUPM_CLK
GND
FUEXM_CLK
GND
CST2M_CLK
PRE_EXP_LED_Y_PWM
CST1M_CLK
PRE_EXP_LED_M_PWM
PRE_EXP_LED_C_PWM
25
PRE_EXP_LED_K_PWM
24
EX_PAPER_FAN_PWM
23
13
GND
22
14
ECO_POW
21
15
GND
20
16
ECO_CS
19
17
ECO_DIN
18
18
ECO_SCK
17
19
ECO_DOUT
J103
20
N.C.
16
21
N.C.
15
KEY
14
N.C.
13
SHUT_SL_PWM
GND
3.3V
WASTE_TNR_FG
GND
EX3M_OUT_B*
GND
GND
10
3.3V
11
EX3M_OUT_A*
12
12
TURNM_OUT_B
11
+5V
10
GND
13
TURNM_OUT_B*
J124
14
TURNM_OUT_A*
OHP_ANALOG
MULTI_SIZE
TNR_ANLG_Y
REG_R
TNR_ANLG_M
PCH_S
TNR_ANLG_C
PCH_P
REG_F
GND
TNR_ANLG_K
TNR_CTRL_Y
GND
TNR_CTRL_M
15
TURNM_OUT_A
11
FUSERM_DIR
TNR_CTRL_C
16
EX12M_OUT_B
10
FUSERM_CLK
TNR_CTRL_K
17
EX12M_OUT_B*
FUSERM_GAIN
PATCH_CTRL
18
EX12M_OUT_A*
FUSERM_LOCK
GND
19
EX12M_OUT_A
FUSERM_ON
GND
6
*FUSERM_BRAKE
20
4
21
11
22
3
23
J809A_[0:7]
J5045D
24
2.5K Paperdeck
1
DOOR_OPEN
J809A
GND
UN2
7
HANSO_CNNT0
10
3
+5V
J5045L
2
+24V_IL
J202
25
C
1
+24V_IL
10
Appendix > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram (4/16)
XVI
DC controller PCB
UN1
J136
2
J822
J5031DH
DC interlock
switch 2
SW4
SOLD1
P.4
F-10-6
XVI
XVII
Appendix > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram (5/16)
10
F
UN1
DC controller PCB
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
GND
+5V_LS
+1.5V
+3.3V_YukkyIO
GND
CK_GBD
GND
CK_EHOB_CLK-
CK_EHOB_CLK+
CK_EHOB_M2S-
CK_EHOB_S2M-
CK_EHOB_M2S+
K_BD-
K_BD+
CK_EHOB_S2M+
GND
GND
51
50
49
48
47
46
45
44
43
42
41
40
39
38
37
N.C.
21
20
19
K_LDD_P
18
16
17
K_LDD_N*
15
K_LDC_P
13
14
K_LDC_N*
12
K_LDB_P
10
11
K_LDB_N*
9
K_LDA_P
7
K_LDA_N*
5
36
35
34
33
32
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
CK_24V
C_LDD_P
C_LDD_N*
C_LDC_P
C_LDC_N*
C_LDB_P
C_LDB_N*
C_LDA_P
C_LDA_N*
M_LDD_P
M_LDD_N*
M_LDC_P
M_LDC_N*
M_LDB_P
M_LDB_N*
M_LDA_P
13
Y_LDD_P
Y_LDD_N*
Y_LDC_P
Y_LDC_N*
Y_LDB_P
Y_LDB_N*
Y_LDA_P
Y_LDA_N*
M_LDA_N*
12
11
10
GND
3
+1.5V
+5V_LS
J875_BUS[0:51]
+3.3U_YukkyIO
GND
GND
RESET*
YM_GBD
10
YM_EHOB_CLK-
11
YM_EHOB_CLK+
12
YM_EHOB_M2S-
13
YM_EHOB_S2M-
14
YM_EHOB_M2S+
15
M_BD+
M_BD-
16
YM_EHOB_S2M+
GND
J119
J114
17
GND
18
RESET*
J118
19
YM_24V
J823D
J825D
1
J825L
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
21
20
19
18
17
20
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
J823LH
J823L
J825LH
1
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
J863_BUS[0:21]
J854_BUS[0:21]
J853_BUS[0:21]
1
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
J864_BUS[0:21]
C
1
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
J853
17
UN13
UN14
( J205)
M32
Image skew
correction
motor (M)
M31
J862B
(J202)
J871
10
J872
( J204)
M29
11
10
UN15
M33
J6167
J6166
M34
( J205)
J6165
J6161
10
J6160
J6159
J862A
J851B
(J202)
3
12
(J102)
(J103)
13
J860A
14
J860WH
J860A_BUS[1:17]
[17:1]
J860B_BUS[1:17]
[17:1]
J868
( J204)
J852A
J852WH
J867
10
(J103)
[17:1]
J851A_BUS[1:17]
15
J860B
J852B
[17:1]
J851B_BUS[1:17]
16
J862
J864
(J201)
(J101)
(J101)
UN12
Laser driver PCB (M)
J861 (J203)
J854
(J102)
J863
(J201)
J830 (J203)
J851A
Appendix > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram (5/16)
M30
Scanner motor
(CBk)
P.5
F-10-7
XVII
XVIII
M1
M4
M3
J6010
M2
M
9
9
J6009
M8
J6014
M7
J6016
J6011
J6012
6
6
M5
M6
Appendix > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram (6/16)
10
J6013
J6015
15
+24V_IL
14
16
17
18
19
20
21
TNR_CL_ON_C
13
DEV_MTR_FG_Y
12
+24V
11
+24V
10
TNR_CL_ON_M
GND
*DEV_MTR_ACC_Y
*DEV_MTR_DEC_Y
+24V_IL
DEV_MTR_FG_M
GND
*DEV_MTR_ACC_M
*DEV_MTR_DEC_M
+24V_IL
27
DEV_MTR_FG_C
26
GND
25
*DEV_MTR_ACC_C
24
*DEV_MTR_DEC_C
23
+24V_IL
22
DEV_MTR_FG_K
21
*DEV_MTR_ACC_K
20
*DEV_MTR_DEC_K
19
J308
J307
GND
18
+24V_IL
17
GND
16
DRM_MTR_PWM_M
15
+5V
14
GND
13
DRM_MTR_ON_M
12
DRM_MTR_FG_M
11
DRM_MTR_BRK_M
DRM_MTR_DIR_M
10
+24V_IL
GND
+5V
GND
DRM_MTR_PWM_C
DRM_MTR_ON_C
DRM_MTR_FG_C
DRM_MTR_BRK_C
+24V_IL
DRM_MTR_DIR_C
GND
DRM_MTR_PWM_K
+5V
+24V_IL
GND
GND
DRM_MTR_ON_K
+5V
DRM_MTR_FG_K
GND
DRM_MTR_BRK_K
DRM_MTR_PWM_Y
DRM_MTR_DIR_K
DRM_MTR_ON_Y
DRM_MTR_FG_Y
DRM_MTR_BRK_Y
DRM_MTR_DIR_Y
J305
UN4
J303
(CSR)
22
23
24
GND
DRM_ENC_Y1
+3.3V
25
+24V
21
TNR_CL_ON_Y
20
+24V
19
GND
18
+3.3V
17
DRM_ENC_Y2
16
GND
15
+3.3V
14
DRM_ENC_M1
13
+3.3V
12
GND
11
DRM_ENC_M2
GND
10
GND
+3.3V
DRM_ENC_C1
+3.3V
DRM_ENC_C2
GND
GND
+3.3V
DRM_ENC_K1
+3.3V
11CSR-8PK(N)
1
10
11
TNR_CL_ON_K
J306
DRM_ENC_K2
Appendix > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram (6/16)
END26
END25
J6005D
J6006D
J6005DH
2
1
J6006L
J6005L
CL2
J6018
J6020
J6021
J6022
J6023
UN38
UN37
UN36
Bk drum rotation
C drum rotation
detection sensor 1 detection sensor 2
UN35
UN34
UN33
J6007DH
J6007L
CL3
J6008DH
J6008L
CL
CL4
2
1
1
2
B
1
CL
CL5
Toner supply clutch (M) Toner supply clutch (C) Toner supply clutch (Bk)
J6024
3
3
Bk drum rotation
detection sensor 2
10
J6019
CL
CL
J6008D
J6007D
J6006DH
UN32
UN31
C drum rotation
M drum rotation
M drum rotation
Y drum rotation
Y drum rotation
detection sensor 1 detection sensor 2 detection sensor 1 detection sensor 2 detection sensor 1
P.6
F-10-8
XVIII
XIX
Appendix > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram (7/16)
10
UN4
25
26
+5V
24
27
28
29
GND
23
TNR_BTL_OPEN_HP_K
22
TNR_SNS_K
21
TNR_COUNT_K
20
TNR_BTL_OPEN_K
19
+5V_PIEZO_CK
18
+5V
17
GND
16
TNR_BTL_OPEN_HP_C
15
TNR_SNS_C
14
TNR_BTL_OPEN_C
13
+5V_PIEZO_CK
TNR_SNS_M
12
TNR_COUNT_C
11
+5V
10
GND
TNR_BTL_OPEN_HP_M
TNR_BTL_OPEN_M
+5V_PIEZO_YM
TNR_COUNT_M
+5V
GND
TNR_BTL_OPEN_HP_Y
TNR_SNS_Y
TNR_COUNT_Y
TNR_BTL_OPEN_Y
J310
+5V_PIEZO_YM
Appendix > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram (7/16)
J5015D
J5018D
J5015LH
J5021D
J5018LH
J5021LH
J5018L
J5015L
J5024D
7
J5024L
J5022DH
J5016DH
J5024LH
J5021L
J5025DH
J5019DH
7
J5016D
J5016L
J5019D
J5019L
J5022D
J5022L
J5025D
J5025L
C
J5017
7
J5020
7
UN39
12
11
10
12
J659
11
10
UN41
J5035
J5023
UN40
J660
12
11
10
UN42
J661
12
11
10
B
J6033
J6035
J6034
1
2
3
3
2
PS1
TS1
J6154
1
Toner supply
sensor (Y)
2
3
3
2
2
3
PS9
3
2
J6038
1
Toner
container
cam HP
sensor (Y)
J6037
1
PS5
Toner cap
position
sensor (Y)
10
J6036
1
2
3
3
2
PS2
TS2
J6151
1
Toner supply
sensor (M)
2
3
3
2
J6039
1
2
3
PS10
Toner
container
cam HP
sensor (M)
PS6
Toner cap
position
sensor (M)
J6040
1
J6041
1
2
3
TS3
3
2
PS3
Toner supply
Piezo sensor (C) sensor (C)
2
3
3
2
1
1
2
3
PS11
Toner cap
position
sensor (C)
J6043
J6042
J6152
1
3
2
PS7
Toner
container
cam HP
sensor (C)
J6044
1
2
3
TS4
3
2
J6153
1
PS4
Toner supply
sensor (Bk)
2
3
3
2
1
1
2
3
PS12
Toner cap
position
sensor (Bk)
3
2
PS8
Toner
container
cam HP
sensor (Bk)
P.7
F-10-9
XIX
XX
Appendix > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram (8/16)
10
F
UN4
10
11
12
13
14
15
+5V
+5V
GND
TNR_DOOR_Y
+5V
GND
BTL_MTR_ROT_K_CW
BTL_MTR_OPEN_K_CCW
TNR_DOOR_M
BTL_MTR_ROT_C_CW
BTL_MTR_OPEN_C_CCW
+5V
GND
TNR_DOOR_C
+5V
GND
TNR_DOOR_K
GND
17
J309
BTL_MTR_OPEN_M_CCW
16
BTL_MTR_ROT_Y_CW
15
BTL_MTR_ROT_M_CW
14
BTL_MTR_OPEN_Y_CCW
13
N.C.
12
1tr B
ITB_MTR_FG
11
1tr*B
ITB_MTR_CLK
10
1tr A
ITB_MTR_GAIN
1tr*A
YORI B
YORI*B
YORI A
YORI*A
ITB_MTR_LOCK
GND
ITB_MTR_ON
J312
2
+24V_IL
TNR_FRONT_DOOR
J304
*ITB_MTR_BRK
Appendix > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram (8/16)
E
J5079D
J5078D
19
18
17
3
16
4
15
5
14
6
13
7
12
8
11
9
10
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
J5079LH
J5078LH
J5079L
J5078L
15
14
13
12
11
10
J5029D
J5027D
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
J5029LH
J5027LH
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
10
11
12
13
14
15
J5029L
J5027L
J5070D
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
J1184D
J5070DH
J1181D
J1184DH
J1184L
J5070L
J1181DH
J1181L
13
12
11
10
10
11
12
13
J5030D
J5030LH
J5030L
C
J5
J3
M10
J1180DH
J6004DH
J6025
J6003D
J6003LH
ITB motor
M14
J1182L
J1182D
J6004L
J2
M12
Toner container
motor (Bk)
J1182DH
J6004D
1
4
J6003L
1
M13
4
1
J1180L
Toner container
motor (M)
J1180D
J4
J6046
2
M15
Primary transfer
separation motor
M9
M11
J6048
J6052
J6053
PS17
J6050
Toner container
outer cover
sensor (Y)
PS16
Toner container
inner cover
sensor (Bk)
PS15
PS14
PS13
10
P.8
F-10-10
XX
XXI
Appendix > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram (9/16)
10
F
UN2
J217
+5V
19
20
21
+5V
18
GND
17
DUP_ENT_SNS
16
GND
15
EX3_SNS
14
+24V
13
FLAP3_SL
12
+24V
11
FLAP2_SL
10
+5V
+24V
FLAP1_SL
+5V
GND
EX2_SNS
+5V
GND
GND
TURN_SNS
17
EX_TRAY2_FULL
16
+5V
15
+5V
14
GND
13
MULTI_AFTER_SNS
12
+5V
11
GND
10
F_DOOR_SNS
GND
+5V
GND
REGIMAE_SNS
KYUSHI_V_PASS_SNS
GND
+24V_IL
OHP_ANALOG
J210
3
OHP_LED_ON
REG_SHUT_SL_PWM
Appendix > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram (9/16)
J5032D
J5055D
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
21
17
J5055LH
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
10
11
11
10
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
J5032DH
21
J5032L
J5055L
J5106D
7
J5106L
J5097D
J5058DH
J5056DH
J5106LH
J5056D
J5056L
J5041D
J5041LH
J5114D
J5114LH
2
3
J5057D
J5057LH
J5114L
J5041L
J5058D
J5097L
1
J5058L
J5083D
J5057L
4
5
2
J6064D
J6092
J6064L
J6094
J6093
3
J6095
1
2
SL
SL1
Registration
shutter solenoid
UN51
Transparency sensor
UN53
Vertical path
sensor
PS33
J5108LH
J6065L
1
2
J6074D
J6073DH
1
J6073L
1
2
J6074DH
J6074L
J6089
J6090
J6075
J6076
J6096
PS18
Registration
sensor
J6073D
J6065DH
SL
1
J5083L
1
5
J6065D
J5108L
J5038DH
J6064DH
J5108D
J5097LH
PS45
Second delivery
tray full sensor
PS39
Reverse
sensor
PS42
Second delivery
sensor
SL5
First delivery
flapper
solenoid
SL
SL
SL6
SL7
Second delivery
flapper
solenoid
Third delivery
flapper
solenoid
PS43
Third delivery
sensor
PS40
Duplex inlet
sensor
10
P.9
F-10-11
XXI
XXII
UN2
Appendix > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram (10/16)
10
15
16
17
18
19
FUEXM_B
14
FUEXM_B*
13
+5V
12
FUEXM_A
11
FUEXM_A*
YOBI
10
+5V
YOBI
GND
GND
YOBI
+5V
GND
EX1_SNS
EX_TRAY1_FULL
2_3EX_DOOR_SNS
+5V
+5V
GND
+5V
GND
LOOP2_SNS
J123
GND
DC controller PCB
GND
EX_PAPER_FAN2_ON
UN1
EX_PAPER_FAN2_LOCK
15
FUSER_ENT_SNS
14
LOOP1_SNS
13
+5V
12
GND
11
DUP_SNS
10
+5V
MULTI_SIZE_ANALOG
GND
+5V
GND
MULTI_PAPER_SNS
+5V
GND
MULTI_LAST_SNS
GND
+3.3V
J204
1
FEED_DOOR_SNS
Appendix > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram (10/16)
J5003D
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
J5003LH
1
J5028D
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
J5003L
J5028DH
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
10
15
11
14
12
13
13
12
14
11
10
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
J5028L
J6062D
J6088
J6070
J6091
J5109D
J5110D
3
J5110LH
J6062DH
1
1
J5099D
J6062L
J5054L
J5099L
PS41
1 2 3
J5068L
J5109LH
FM9
Delivery fan 2
J5109L
First delivery
sensor
J5110L
J5068DH
J5054D
J5068D
J5054DH
J5099DH
9
PS44
First delivery
tray full sensor
J6099
4
4
J6058
J6080D
3
2
2
PS21
J6080L
M22
J6080LH
J5100
3
PS19
PS47
Right lower
door sensor
Multi-purpose
paper sensor
UN52
Multi-purpose
size sensor
10
J6077
J6081
J6171
3
J6085
J6086
J6087
PS38
PS35
PS36
Duplex paper
sensor
Fixing arch
sensor 1
Fixing arch
sensor 2
PS34
Fixing inlet
sensor
P.10
F-10-12
XXII
XXIII
UN2
16
17
18
19
3.3V
15
20
21
+3.3R
14
SEESAW
13
GND
12
SUB_THRM3
11
GND
10
SUB_THRM2
GND
SUB_THRM1
MAIN_THRM
GND
GND
THRM_CNNT
GND
GND
HV3_DC_VS
13
HV3_DC_CS
12
GND
11
+5V
10
+5V
GND
FM_SHUT_HP_SNS
+5V
GND
FM_SHUT_POS_SNS
+5V
+12V_IL_HV
J112
4
GND
FUSER_KAIJYO_SNS
GND
DC controller PCB
J216
1
UN1
J657
UN18
J5026D
HVT3 PCB
13
12
11
10
7
7
6
8
5
9
4
10
3
11
2
12
1
13
J5026DH
J5026L
J5036D
25
24
23
22
21
20
Appendix > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram (11/16)
HV_TR2_CV_PWM
HV_TR2_REV_PWM
10
INNER_EX_SNS
19
18
17
16
10
15
11
14
12
13
13
12
14
11
15
10
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
J5036LH
J5061DH
J5036L
J5075D
23
1
J5075L
22
21
20
4
19
5
18
6
17
7
16
8
15
9
14
10
13
11
12
12
11
13
10
14
9
15
8
16
7
17
6
18
5
19
4
20
3
21
2
22
1
23
J5075LH
J5061D
J5012DB_[0:12]
J5012DA
J5061L
10
11
12
10
11
12
J5012DA_[0:12]
J5012DB
J5012DWH
J5012LA
FT3
J5012LB
FT4
12
11
10
12
11
10
J5012LB_[0:12]
J5012LA_[0:12]
SW1
J5012LWH
Appendix > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram (11/16)
J5060D
6
J42D
J5060DH
J42DH
10
J6101
J6104
2
1
1
Inner delivery
sensor
10
PS30
Fixing pressure
sensor
PS32
Shutter
position
sensor
10
J42L
J6103
J6102
PS37
J5060L
PS31
TH1
Shutter
HP sensor
Main thermistor
P.11
F-10-13
XXIII
XXIV
M28
Process cartridge
fan (front)
2
4
3
3
J6123LH
3
J6060D
CL1
J6123D
3
3
J6060DH
2
2
M
2
J6082
J6083
1 2 3
M16
M17
Cassette 1 pickup
motor
PS20
Cassette 2 pickup
motor
M
1 2 3
J6072L
2
2
FM2
Fixing heat
exhaust fan 2
J6158
J6157
J6155
J6156
J6072D
J6072DH
J6056L
J6056DH
J6056D
CL
J6097
Fixing heat
exhaust fan 1
Duplex feed
motor
Registration motor
SL
FM1
M20
M19
Multi-purpose tray
lifting solenoid
Multi-purpose
M18
pickup clutch Multi-purpose motor
J6123L
J6060L
4
2
1 2 3
SL4
PS29
M
3
FM10
Appendix > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram (12/16)
10
J6066L
J6057L
J6067L
J6067DH
J6066DH
J6057DH
J6066D
J6067D
J5004
J6057D
J5049LH
J5049L
1
11
J5049D
10
10
J5086LH
11
J5086L
22
23
24
25
CST2M_B*
21
CST2M_B
20
CST1M_B*
19
CST2M_A*
18
CST1M_B
17
CST2M_A
16
CST1M_A*
15
CST1M_A
14
GND
13
+5V
12
R_DOOR_SNS
11
GND
10
FUSER_EX_B_FA N _O N
FUSER_EX_B_FAN_LOCK
FUSER_EX_A_FAN_LOCK
FUSER_EX_A_FAN_ON
GND
DUPM_B*
DUPM_B
DUPM_A*
DUPM_A
REGIM_B*
11
REGIM_B
10
MULTI_AUTO_SL
REGIM_A*
+5V
+24V_IL
LS_SHUTM_HP_SNS1
REGIM_A
GND
MULTIM_OUT_B
PCRG_FAN_F_LOCK
MULTIM_OUT_B*
GND
MULTIM_OUT_A*
PCRG_FAN_F_ON
+24V_IL
LS_SHUTM_B*
MULTIM_OUT_A
LS_SHUTM_B
J214
MULTI_CL_ON
LS_SHUTM_A*
LS_SHUTM_A
J5086D
J215
J213
UN2
J207
10
11
12
13
COOL_R_FAN_LOCK
2ND_TR_EX_FAN_ON
14
15
2N D _TR_EX_FA N _LO C K
GND
GND
COOL_R_FAN_ON
COOL_F_FAN_LOCK
GND
COOL_F_FAN_ON
EX_PAPER_FAN1_PWM
24V
GND
19
FM_SHUTM_B*
+5V
18
FM_SHUTM_B
17
FM_SHUTM_A*
16
FM_SHUTM_A
15
GND
14
PATCH_CTRL
13
AD_S
REGI_R_GAIN0
12
AD_P
11
PATCH_LEDON
10
GND
REGI_R_GAIN1
+5V
REGI_R_LEDON
REGI_F_GAIN0
GND
REG_R_S
REGI_F_GAIN1
+5V
REG_F_S
J218
2
REGI_F_LEDON
Appendix > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram (12/16)
J5048D
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
J5048L
19
J5034D
J5048LH
15
14
13
12
11
10
10
11
12
13
14
15
J5034LH
J5034L
J5046D
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
J5046DH
19
J5046L
J6061D
J6059D
J6059DH
2
1
3
1
J6059L
J6068D
J6061DH
2
2
2
2
J6071D
J6069DH
J6068L
J6061L
J6069D
J6068DH
3
1
2
2
J6069L
1 2 3
1 2 3
J6071DH
J6071L
1 2 3
M
6
J6106
J6107
J6108
M27
Shutter motor
UN47
Patch sensor
(front)
10
UN48
Patch sensor
(rear)
FM7
FM5
Delivery fan 1
Fixing cooling
fan (front)
UN49
FM6
Fixing cooling
fan (rear)
FM8
Secondary transfer
exhaust fan
Patch sensor
(center)
P.12
F-10-14
XXIV
XXV
PIN1
GND
SIN-21T-1.8S
MT18
UN2
J5096L
J205
J905
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
+24V_IL
31
TNR_DET_K
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
J5051L
24V_IL
1
2
3
5
1
2
3
1
4
SOLD20
TNR_SNS_CNT_Y
+24V_IL
TNR_DET_Y
3
2
GND
J601LH
GND
J900
MT31
TS5
ATR sensor
(Y)
SOLD21
1
1
11
10
12
13
14
15
16
10
11
12
13
14
15
1
2
2
2
3
1
2
1
2
J6150
2
J6111D
+24V
UN20
WTNR_MTR_GND
WTNR_MTR_ON
WTNR_MTR_FG
CNNT
(CZ)
+24V
+24V
CNNT
+24V
CNNT
CNNT
WTNR_DET_LEDON
WTNR_DET
P5V
J6149
J6148
Y pre-exposure
LED PCB
(front)
UN21
J6147
M pre-exposure
LED PCB
(front)
UN25
GND
PEXP_LEDON_Y
WTNR_BOX_DET
J6110
CNNT
C pre-exposure
LED PCB
(front)
UN23
J6115
J602
J6111DH
J601
3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
+12V
PEXP_LEDON_M
PEXP_LEDON_BK
GND
J6117
CNNT
PEXP_LEDON_C
J603
3
PEXP_LEDON_M
15
14
13
12
11
10
J600
GND
PEXP_LEDON_Y
UN27
J755LB_[0:15]
PEXP_LEDON_C
J6119
CNNT
J604
J755LA_[0:16]
J755LA
J755L
Bk pre-exposure
LED PCB
(front)
2
2
PEXP_LEDON_K
UN29
J755LB
Drum
J6121
CNNT
J606
J755DA
J755D
New/old
detection
fuse (Y)
Developing
assembly(Y)
J755DA_[0:16]
J755DB
UN56
PIN6
Developing assembly
J755DB_[0:15]
New/old
detection
fuse (M)
Developing
assembly(M)
UN43
MT32
UN57
PIN5
J6114
J5093LH
New/old
detection
fuse (C)
UN44
ATR sensor
(M)
MT28
J5093L
J5093D
J902
J601L
TS6
J6116
GND
J5094LH
PCRG_NEW_Y
TNR_SNS_CNT_Y
TNR_DET_Y
PCRG_NEW_M
21
22
23
24
25
GND
1
26
GND
2
27
TNR_DET_M
3
28
29
30
TNR_SNS_CNT_M
J5051DH
31
TNR_DET_M
+24V_IL
UN58
PIN4
MT27
J5094D
TNR_SNS_CNT_M
J5094L
J903
5
PCRG_NEW_C
J5051D
TNR_SNS_CNT_C
TNR_DET_C
10
PCRG_NEW_BK
11
10
TNR_SNS_CNT_BK
12
11
TNR_DET_BK
13
12
14
13
J5050LH
14
J5050L
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
SOLD19
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
UN19
14
13
12
11
10
ATR sensor
(C)
J6118
UN45
TS7
15
24V_IL
16
15
16
GND
J5095LH
10
11
10
12
11
13
12
14
13
15
14
16
15
17
16
18
17
19
MT29
20
21
22
23
24
GND
New/old
detection
fuse (Bk)
Developing
assembly(Bk)
MT26
24V_IL
GND
TNR_CTRL_K
TNR_ANLG_K
TNR_CTRL_C
TNR_ANLG_C
PCRG_NEW_BK
TNR_CTRL_M
TNR_ANLG_M
PCRG_NEW_C
TNR_CTRL_Y
TNR_ANLG_Y
GND
PCRG_NEW_M
PCRG_NEW_DET_Y
GND
24V_IL
PRE_EXP_LED_Y
PRE_EXP_LED_K
PRE_EXP_LED_C
PRE_EXP_LED_M
GND
GND
+12V
WASTE_TNRM_FG
WASTE_TNRM_ON
5V
WASTE_TNR_LED_ON
WASTE_TNR_DET_SNS
WASTE_BOX_SET_SNS
25
TNR_DET_C
26
27
+24V_IL
3
J601D
GND
TNR_SNS_CNT_C
28
J901
J6120
J5095D
J904
UN59
J5095L
29
UN46
SOLD18
J5096LH
J5050D
30
GND
E
31
TS8
ATR sensor
(Bk)
GND
GND
MT25
J5096D
TNR_SNS_CNT_K
Appendix > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram (13/16)
10
17
Appendix > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram (13/16)
J605
UN24
Y pre-exposure
LED PCB
(rear)
UN26
M pre-exposure
LED PCB
(rear)
UN28
C pre-exposure
LED PCB
(rear)
UN30
Bk pre-exposure
LED PCB
(rear)
J6111L
M26
10
P.13
F-10-15
XXV
XXVI
SW7
SW6
Cassette 1 size
switch (B)
SW9
Cassette 1 size
switch (A)
J6125
J6126
SW8
Cassette 2 size
switch (B)
Appendix > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram (14/16)
10
Cassette 2 size
switch (A)
J6127
J6128
J5073L
J5074L
J5074LH
11
J5074D
10
10
11
10
11
11
10
J5073LH
J5073D
16
17
GND
15
GND
14
CST2_SIZE_0
13
CST2_SIZE_1
12
CST2_SIZE_4
11
CST2_SIZE_2
10
CST2_SIZE_3
CST2_SIZE_6
CST2_SIZE_5
CST2_SIZE_7
GND
CST1_SIZE_0
CST1_SIZE_1
CST1_SIZE_2
CST1_SIZE_3
GND
CST1_SIZE_4
CST1_SIZE_6
CST1_SIZE_5
CST1_SIZE_7
GND
18
19
20
21
J234
UN3
21
22
23
24
25
+5V
20
GND
19
+5V
18
GND
17
ITB_HP_SNS
16
+5V
15
GND
14
1TR_ON_POSI_SNS
13
+5V
12
GND
11
1TR_OFF_POSI_SNS
10
+5V
GND
ITB_YORI_SNS4
+5V
GND
ITB_YORI_SNS3
+5V
+5V
GND
ITB_YORI_SNS2
GND
29
ITB_YORI_SNS1
28
GND
27
GND
+5V
26
+24V
25
CST2_PICKUP_SL
24
CST2_RETRY_SNS
23
+5V
22
GND
21
GND
20
CST2_LEVEL_B_SNS
19
+5V
18
+5V
16
CST2_LEVEL_A_SNS
17
GND
15
GND
14
CST2_PAPER_SNS
13
+24V
12
CST1_PICKUP_SL
11
+5V
10
+5V
CST1_RETRY_SNS
GND
GND
CST1_LEVEL_B_SNS
+5V
+5V
CST1_LEVEL_A_SNS
GND
GND
J237
ITB_STR_HP_SNS
CST1_PAPER_SNS
Appendix > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram (14/16)
J5011D
25
J5040D
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
13
12
11
10
10
11
12
13
14
14
13
12
11
10
10
11
12
13
J6131
J6133D
J6132
10
PS51
PS52
Cassette 1
paper level
sensor B
24
23
22
21
12
2
1
J6134
J6133DH
J6133L
J6135
J6136
PS55
Cassette 1
pre-registration
sensor
SL2
Cassette 1
pickup solenoid
J6138D
J6137
SL
Cassette 1
paper level
sensor A
16
15
14
13
12
10
11
12
13
14
20
19
18
17
16
10
15
11
14
12
13
13
11
15
12
14
11
10
10
10
16
11
15
11
J5065L
PS49
17
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
10
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
J5052DH
25
J5052L
J5065LH
14
J6026
Cassette 1
paper sensor
18
J5062DH
J5064L
19
J5052D
J5065D
14
J6130
20
J5062D
J5064D
J6129
21
J5040L
25
22
J5011LH
1
J5064LH
23
J5040DH
J5011L
1
24
J6138DH
J6138L
J6027
12
J5062L
J6029
J6028
J6030
PS24
ITB steering
sensor
PS25
PS26
ITB
ITB
displacement displacement
sensor 1
sensor 2
PS27
PS50
PS53
Cassette 2
paper level
sensor A
PS54
PS56
PS28
ITB
ITB
displacement displacement
sensor 3
sensor 4
SL
Cassette 2
paper sensor
J6031
3
SL3
PS22
J6032
3
PS23
Primary
Primary
transfer
transfer
detachment detachment
sensor 1
sensor 2
Cassette 2
Cassette 2
Cassette 2
paper level pre-registration pickup solenoid
sensor B
sensor
P.14
F-10-16
XXVI
XXVII
Appendix > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram (15/16)
10
TEN_KEY
E
2
TTP
(J3002)
J8302
1
J3001
10
10
11
12
13
D
9
J8308
12
11
10
J8309
( J1008)
( J1009)
1
J8006
J8202
7
10
(J2002)
(J1006)
4
4
HUB
19
19
18
18
16
16
17
17
15
15
14
14
9
8
6
SUBKEY UNIT
5
4
J8007
J1
(J1007)
(J1003)
CPU
J4001
12
11
10
J8003
11
12
10
13
13
LCD
9
1
10
11
12
13
14
15
J9001
J811
J4002
1
16
17
(J5001)
Inverter PCB
2
1
(J1002)
VOLUME_KEY
GND
J8002
12V
Relay Board
GND
CN1M
Appendix > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram (15/16)
10
P.15
F-10-17
XXVII
XXVIII
G4FAX board-G1
Appendix > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram (16/16)
10
UI
Invertor
(Option C)
(CMJ only)
Coinvender
Copy card
reader
(option B)
or
IPSEC
(Option)
YONRIZER
(PCI-Bridge)
(option)
or
(no use)
J5006
J2014
J5010
J5013
J5005
CC-VI
USB-FLASH
PCI-ex I/F
USB(H)
SC kit(TBD)
J5003
USB(D)
USB
Ethernet
J2045
J2041
KEY
Device
Port Hub
(option)
FM13
Controller
fan 3
or
SATAFLASH
E
Large
Capacity
HDD
(option)
RSConv
Touch
Panel
CPU
(USA only)
W-LAN
(Option A)
LCD
(option A)
CCM10/3S
E
J2043
J5000
J5004
Serial I/F
ISOLDE-A(IA-L)
J5001
J2031
J2032
J5019
J5012
or
FM11
J105
J107
HDD
mirroring
(option A)
SATA
J109
J111
FM12
Controller fan 2
DC controller PCB
POSTPONE I/F
TPM
(dealer only)
KEY
J6172
DDR2
DIMM0
ECO-ID
UN1
J102
J6173D
DDR2
DIMM1
(option)
Controller fan 1
IRIGOLETTO-A
FM14
LED
(option)
J103
HDD 1
(option)
HDD 1
J108
SATA
HDD 0
(standerd)
Appendix > General Circuit Diagram > General Circuit Diagram (16/16)
J104
J110
J6174DH
J14
CARMEN-A(CL4)
J1xxx
J1000
J16
J18
J17
J11
J13
DDR2
DIMM
DDR2
DIMM
J12
J1010
J3003
image PRESS A
or
12V
3.3R
Debug SRAM
MINERVA
(MDS)
FRAM
Counter
DDR2
DIMM
GIOVANNI-A
(GU-short)
EFI
controller
(option)
ORFO-A
(00)
(option)
(debug only)
R-CON
EMU
(EFI F-Link)
Connection Exsample
EFI I/F
12V
Cable
(option A)
Cardedge
Board to
Board
(option B)
1
2
EFI controller
(embedded)
AC
or
EFI controller
(server)
AC
Ethernet
Ethernet
12V
10
P.16
F-10-18
XXVIII
Appendix > List of User Mode > Environment Settings > Display Settings
XXIX
Setting Description
Plain*, Recycled, Color, Pre-punched
A5R,STMTR*
B5,EXEC*
Details/Edit
Name, Category, Basis Weight, Type, Finish, Creep
(Displacement) Correction Adjustment, Color
Duplicate, Delete
ENV.1: COM10*, ISO-B5, Monarch, ISO-C5, DL
ENV.2: COM10*, ISO-B5, Monarch, ISO-C5, DL
On,Off*
Register/Edit, Delete, Register Name
Envelope Cassette
Multi-Purpose Tray Defaults
Register Custom Size
Device Information
Delivery Available
No
No
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
T-10-4
Display Settings
* Default Settings
Item
Screen at Startup
Setting Description
Main Menu*, Quick Menu, Copy, Scan and Send, Send &Fax,
Fax, Scan and Store, Access Stored Files, Fax/Ifax Inbox,
Secured Print, Web Browser, Workflow Composer, Remote
Scanner, Print Server, Mobile Print,Scan Lock Analyzer,
Introduction to Useful Features
Open Status Monitor/Cancel: On, Off*
Default Status Type: Copy/Print*, Send, Receive,
Store,Consumables
Status/Log: Job Status*, Log
Details: Print Jobs, Send Jobs, Receive Jobs, Copy, Fax,
Forward, Local Print, Printer, RX Print, Print Report
Regular Copy*, Express Copy
On*, Off
Enable Fax in Scan and Send Function: On*, Off
Mail Box: On*, Off
Advanced Box/Network: On*, Off
Memory Media: On, Off*
On, Off*
Device Information
DeliveryAvailable
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Appendix > List of User Mode > Environment Settings > Display Settings
XXIX
Appendix > List of User Mode > Environment Settings > Network
Item
Language/Keyboard Switch
Display Remaining Paper Message
No. of Copies/Job Duration Status
Display Original Scanning Cleaning Area*1
Select Paper Screen Priority
mm/Inch Entry Switch
ID/User Name Display On/Off
Display Remaining Toner Error Message
Clear Remaining Toner Error
Setting Description
Language, Keyboard Layout
On*, Off
On*, Off
On*, Off
Simple*, Detailed
mm, inch*
On*, Off
On, Off*
Delete
XXX
Device Information
DeliveryAvailable
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
No
No
No
T-10-5
Timer/Energy Settings
* Default Settings
Item
Adjust Time
Date/Time Settings
Setting Description
00: 00 to 23: 59, in one minute increments (00: 00*)
Date and Time Setting (12 digit number)
Time Zone: GMT -12: 00 to GMT +12: 00 (GMT -05:00*)
Daylight Saving Time: On, Off*
24 Hour, 12 Hour*
0 (Off) to 9 minutes, in one minute increments (2minutes*)
Initial Function*, Selected Function
5*, 10, 15, 20, 30, 40, 50 min., 1 hour, 90 min.,
2, 3, 4 hours
Low*, High
Sunday to Saturday, 00: 00 to 23: 59, in one minute increments
00: 00 to 23: 59, in one minute increments
Time Format
Auto Reset Time
Function After Auto Reset
Auto Sleep Time
Sleep Mode Energy Use
Weekly Timer Settings
Sleep Mode Exit Time Settings
Device Information
Delivery Available
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
T-10-6
Network
If you are configuring the settings for the first time in "Interface Settings," "TCP/IPv4 Settings," "TCP/IPv6 Settings," or "Settings Common to TCP/IPv4 and TCP/IPv6," use the control panel of the
machine. After configuring the TCP/IP settings, you can change them using the Remote UI.
In the NetWare or AppleTalk network, the TCP/IP protocol must be used to specify the settings with software other than the control panel of the machine. The setting items are shown below.
Some items can be set using the Remote UI. Use the control panel of the device to set items which cannot be set using the Remote UI.
* Default Settings
*1 Indicates items that appear only when the appropriate optional equipment is attached.
Item
User Data List
Confirm Network Connection Set. Changes
TCP/IP Settings
Setting Description
Plint List
On, Off*
Appendix > List of User Mode > Environment Settings > Network
XXX
Appendix > List of User Mode > Environment Settings > Network
Item
IPv4 Settings
Use IPv4
IP Address Settings
PING Command
IPv6 Settings
Use IPv6
Stateless Address Settings
Manual Address Settings
Use DHCPv6
PING Command
Host Name
DNS Settings
DNS Server Address Settings
IPv4
IPv6
DNS Host/Domain Name Settings
IPv4
IPv6
DNS Dynamic Update Settings
IPv4
IPv6
WINS Settings
WINS Resolution
WINS Server Address
Node Type
Scope ID
LPD Print Settings
LPD Print Settings
LPD Banner Page*1
Setting Description
XXXI
On*, Off
IP Address:0.0.0.0*
Subnet Mask:0.0.0.0*
Gateway Address:0.0.0.0*
DHCP:On, Off*
RARP:On, Off*
BOOTP:On, Off*
IP Adress:0.0.0.0*
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
On, Off*
Use Stateless Address:On*, Off
Use Manual Address:On, Off*
Manual Address:IPv6 Address(39characters maximum)
Prefix Length:0 to 128(64*)
Default Router Address(39 characters maximum)
On, Off*
IPv6 Address:(39characters maximum)
48 characters maximum
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
On, Off*
IP Address:0.0.0.0*
Auto Set, display only
63 characters maximum
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
On*, Off
On, Off*
Yes
Yes
Appendix > List of User Mode > Environment Settings > Network
XXXI
Appendix > List of User Mode > Environment Settings > Network
Item
RAW Print Settings
RAW Print Settings
Bidirectional Communication
SNTP Settings
Use SNTP
Polling Interval
NTP Server Address
Check NTP Server
FTP Print Settings
Use FTP Print
User
Password
WSD Print Settings
Use WSD Print
Use WSD Browsing
Use Multicast Discovery
Use FTP PASV Mode
Use FTP PASV Mode
IPP Print Settings
IPP Print Settings
Use SSL
Use Authentication
User
Password
Multicast Discovery Settings
Response
Scope name
Use HTTP
Use Web DAV Server
SSL Settings
Key and Certificate
Set as the Default Key
Certificate Details
Setting Description
XXXII
On*, Off
On, Off*
Yes
Yes
On, Off*
Interval for performing time synchronization (1 to 48 hours)
(24hours*)
IP address or host name
-
Yes
Yes
Yes
On, Off*
User name for FTP server login (24 characters maximum)
Password for FTP server login (24 characters maximum)
Yes
Yes
Yes
On*, Off
On*, Off
On*, Off
Yes
Yes
Yes
On, Off*
Yes
On* Off
On, Off*
On, Off*
User name for FTP server login (24 characters maximum)
Password for FTP server login (24 characters maximum)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
On* Off
Scope name to be used for a multicast discovery
(32 characters maximum)
On* Off
On, Off*
Functions using SSL encrypted communications
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
On, Off*
IP address or FQDN(128 characters maximum)
1to 65535(80*)
On, Off*
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Appendix > List of User Mode > Environment Settings > Network
XXXII
Appendix > List of User Mode > Environment Settings > Network
XXXIII
Item
Use Proxy Auth.
User
Password
Confirm Dept. ID PIN
IPSec Settings
Use IPSec
Receive Non-policy Packets
Edit
Delete
Policy On, Off
Register
Policy Name
Register: Selector Settings
IKE Settings
NetWareSettings
Use NetWare
Frame Type
IPX External Network Number
Node Number
Print Service
Packet Signature
Bindery Pserver Settings
Print Server Name
File Server Name
Print Server Password
Printer Number
Polling Interval
Printer Form
Buffer Size
Setting Description
On, Off*
24 characters maximum
24 characters maximum
On*, Off
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
On, Off*
Allow/Reject
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
24 characters maximum
Local Address:
All IP Addresses*/IPv4 Address/IPv6 Address/IPv4 Manual
Settings/IPv6 Manual Settings
Remort Address:
All IP Addresses*,All IPv4Address,All IPv6Address,IPv4Manual
Settings,IPv6 Manual Settings
Port: Specify by Port Number*/Specify by Service Name
IKE mode : Main*/Aggressive
Authentication Method : Pre-Shared Key Method*/Digital sig.
Method
Auth./Encryption Algorithm : Auto*/Manual Settings
Validity : Time(1to65535minuites)(480minuites*)
Validity : Size(1to65535 MB)(65535 MB*)
PFS : On, Off*
Auth./Encryption Algorithm : Auto*/Manual Settings
Connect. Mode : Transport, display only
Yes
On, Off*
Auto Detect*/Ethernet II/Ethernet 802.2/Ethernet 802.3/
Ethernet SNAP
Auto Set, display only
Auto Set, display only
Bindery PServer,R Printer,NDS Pserver*,Nprinter
Auto Set, display only
47 characters maximum
47 characters maximum
20 characters maximum
0to15(0*)
1to15seconds(5sedonds*)
0to255(0*)
1to20KB(20KB*)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
XXXIII
Appendix > List of User Mode > Environment Settings > Network
Appendix > List of User Mode > Environment Settings > Network
XXXIV
Setting Description
Yes
47 characters maximum
47 characters maximum
0to15(0*)
Yes
Yes
Yes
64 characters maximum
32 characters maximum
256 characters maximum
20 characters maximum
0to254(0*)
1to255seconds(5seconds*)
0to255(0*)
3to20KB(20KB*)
Service only currently mounted form/Change forms as needed/
Minimize form changes across print queues/Minimize form
changes within print queues*
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Item
Service Mode
Rprinter Settings
Print ServerName
File ServerName
Printer Number
NDS PServer Settings
Print ServerName
Tree Name
Context
Print ServerPassword
Printer Number
Polling Interval
Printer Form
Buffer Size
Service Mode
NPrinter Settings
Print ServerName
Tree Name
Context
Printer Number
AppleTalkSettings
Use Apple Talk
Phase
Service Name
Zone
Print Mode
SMB Server Settings
Use SMB Server
ServerName
Workgroup
Comment
LM Announce
SMB Printer Settings
Use SMB Print
Printer Name
SMB Auth. Settings
Use SMB Authentication
Authentication Type
SNMP Settings
Yes
64 characters maximum
32 characters maximum
256 characters maximum
0to254(0*)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
On, Off*
Phase 2(fixing)
32 characters maximum
32 characters maximum
Both*, Spool, Direct
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
On, Off*
15 characters maximum(Canon+represents the
last six digits of a MAC address)
15 characters maximum(WORKGROUP*)
48 characters maximum
On, Off*
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
On, Off*
13 characters maximum(PRINTER)
Yes
Yes
On, Off*
NTLMv1*,NTLMv2*
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
XXXIV
Appendix > List of User Mode > Environment Settings > Network
Appendix > List of User Mode > Environment Settings > Network
XXXV
Item
Get Printer Mgmt Info from Host
Use SNMPv1
Community Name1Settings
Community Name1
MIB Access Permission
Community Name
Community Name2 Settings
Community Name2
MIB Access Permission
Community Name
Use SNMPv3
User Settings
User On, Off
Register
Details/Edit
Delete
Context Settings
Register
Edit
Delete
Dedicated Port Settings
Dedicated Port Settings
Use Spool Function
Use Spool Function
Startup Settings
Startup Settings
Ethernet Driver Settings
Auto Detect
Communication Mode
Ethernet Type
MAC Address
IEEE802.1X Settings
Use IEEE802.1X
User
Password
TLS Settings
Use TLS
Key and Certificate
Setting Description
On, Off*
On*, Off
Yes
Yes
On*, Off
Read/Write/Read Only*
Community Name(32 characters maximum)(public*)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
On, Off*
Read/Write/Read Only*
Community Name(32 characters maximum)(public2*)
On, Off*
User/MIB Access Permission/Security Settings/Authent.
Algorithm/Authent.Password/Encryption Algorithm/Encryption
Password
User/MIB Access Permission/Security Settings/Authent.
Algorithm/Authent.Password/Encryption Algorithm/Encryption
Password
Context Name(32 characters maximum)
Context Name(32 characters maximum)
-
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
On*, Off
Yes
On, Off*
Yes
0to300seconds(0*)
Yes
On*, Off
Half Duplex*/Full Duplex
10 Base-T*,100 Base-TX,1000 Base-T
Display only
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
On, Off*
Name of the user to be authenticated with IEEE802.1X
authentication
Password of the user to be authenticated with
IEEE802.1X authentication
Yes
On, Off*
Yes
Yes
Yes
XXXV
Appendix > List of User Mode > Environment Settings > Network
Appendix > List of User Mode > Environment Settings > Network
XXXVI
Item
Set as the Default Key
Certificate Details
Setting Description
Yes
Yes
On, Off*
MSCHAPv2*,PAP
Yes
Yes
On, Off*
24 characters maximum
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
On, Off*
Allow/Reject
Up to 16 IPv4 addresses can be stored.
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
On, Off*
Allow/Reject
Up to 16 IPv4 addresses can be stored.
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
On, Off*
Allow/Reject
Up to 16 IPv4 addresses can be stored.
Yes
Yes
Yes
On, Off*
Allow/Reject
Up to 16 IPv4 addresses can be stored.
Yes
Yes
Yes
On, Off*
Allow/Reject
Up to 100 IPv4 addresses can be stored.
Yes
Yes
Yes
On, Off*
Allow/Reject
Up to 100 IPv4 addresses can be stored.
Yes
Yes
Yes
T-10-7
XXXVI
Appendix > List of User Mode > Environment Settings > Network
Appendix > List of User Mode > Adjustment/Maintenance > Adjust Image Quality
XXXVII
External Interface
* Default Settings
Item
Device Information
Delivery Available
Setting Description
USB Settings
Use USB Device
Use MEAP Driver for USB Device
Use MEAP Driver for USB External Drive
On*, Off
On, Off*
On, Off*
Yes
Yes
Yes
T-10-8
Accessibility
* Default Settings
Item
Key Repetition Settings
Reversed Display (Color)
Setting Description
Device Information
Delivery Available
No
No
T-10-9
Adjustment/Maintenance
Adjust Image Quality
* Default Setting
Item
Auto Adjust Gradation
Correct Density
Correct Shading
Correct Color Mismatch
Zoom Fine Adjustment
Setting Description
Quick Adjust: Press [Start]
Full Adjust: Automatic after the machine prints and scans four sets of test pages
Copy/Scan and Store (Mail Box), Black Send/Scan and Store (other than Mail Box), Color Send/Scan and Store (Other
Than Mail Box)Light, Dark: 1 to 9 levels(5levels*)
Shading Correction: Visual Correction, Shading Correction: Print Server Correction
Press [Start]
X:- 1.0 % to+ 1.0 %(0.1 % increments)(0%*)
Y:- 1.0 % to+ 1.0 %(0.1 % increments)(0%*)
Device Information
Delivery Available
No
No
No
No
No
T-10-10
XXXVII
Appendix > List of User Mode > Adjustment/Maintenance > Adjust Image Quality
Appendix > List of User Mode > Function Settings > Common
XXXVIII
Adjust Action
* Default Setting
*1 Indicates items that appear only when the appropriate optional equipment is attached.
Item
Saddle Stitcher Staple Repositioning
Adjust Stitching Position*
Setting Description
Press [Start]
2.0 mm to +2.0 mm, in 0.25 mm increments(0mm)
Device Information
Delivery Available
No
No
T-10-11
Maintenance
* Default Setting
Item
Clean Inside Main Unit
Clean Feeder*1
Original Scanning Area Cleaning Method*1
Setting Description
Press [Start]
Press [Start]
Press [Done]
Device Information
Delivery Available
No
No
No
T-10-12
Function Settings
Common
* Default Settings
*1 Indicates items that appear only when the appropriate optional equipment is attached.
*2 Indicates information that is delivered only if the number of output trays in the host machine and client machines is the same.
*3 Indicates items that cannot be used with the default setting. Also, the Adobe LiveCycle Rights Management ES is necessary. Contact your local authorized Canon dealer.
Item
Paper Feed Settings
Paper Drawer Auto Selection On/Off
Multi-Purpose Tray
Other
Copy
Feed Method Switch
Suspended Job Timeout On,
Paper Output Settings
Output Tray Settings*1
If the Inner 2 Way Tray-F1 Is Attached
Tray A
Tray B
If the Inner 2 Way Tray-F1 and Copy Tray-J1 Are Attached
Tray A
Setting Description
Device information
DeliveryAvailable
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
No*3
No*3
No*3
XXXVIII
Appendix > List of User Mode > Function Settings > Common
Appendix > List of User Mode > Function Settings > Common
XXXIX
Item
Setting Description
Tray B
Copy, Mail Box, Printer*, Receive, Fax, Other
Tray C
Copy, Mail Box, Printer, Receive*, Fax*, Other*
If the Inner Finisher-A1 and Inner Finisher Additional Tray- A1 Are Attached
Tray A
Copy*, Mail Box*, Printer, Receive, Fax, Other
Tray B
Copy, Mail Box, Printer*, Receive*, Fax*, Other*
If the Inner Finisher-A1 and Copy Tray-J1 Are Attached
Tray A
Copy*, Mail Box*, Printer, Receive, Fax, Other
Tray B
Copy, Mail Box, Printer*, Receive*, Fax*, Other*
If the Inner Finisher-A1, Inner Finisher Additional Tray-A1 and Copy Tray-J1 Are Attached
Tray A
Copy*, Mail Box*, Printer, Receive, Fax, Other
Tray B
Copy, Mail Box, Printer*, Receive, Fax, Other
Tray C
Copy, Mail Box, Printer, Receive*, Fax*, Other*
If the Staple Finisher-C1 or Booklet Finisher-C1, Buffer Pass Unit-G1, and External 2/3 Hole Puncher-B1 Are Attached
Tray A
Copy*, Mail Box*, Printer, Receive, Fax, Other
Tray B
Copy, Mail Box, Printer*, Receive, Fax, Other
Tray C
Copy, Mail Box, Printer, Receive*, Fax*, Other*
Tray Home Position
Tray A*,Tray B,Off
Offset Jobs*1
On*, Off
Job Separator Between Jobs
On, Off*
Job Separator Between Copies
On, Off*
Different Paper Sizes for the Output Tray
On*, Off
Unfinished Tab Paper Forced Output
On, Off*
Print Settings
Print Priority
Copy
1*,2,3
Printer
1,2*,3
Access Stored File, Receive, Fax, Other
1,2,3*
Text/Photo Priority When ACS Is Set to Black
Text Priority*, Photo Priority
Local Print Default Settings
Select Paper
All Paper Sources, Auto*
No. of Prints
1 to 9,999 sets(1set*)
Finishing
If No Finisher Is Attached or Only the Inner 2 Way Tray- F1 is Attached
Do Not Collate, Collate (Page Order)*, Rotate Collate,Group
(Same Pages), Rotate Group
If the Inner Finisher-A1 Is Attached
Do Not Collate, Collate (Page Order), Offset*, Group(Same
Pages), Offset Group, Staple (Corner)
If the Inner Finisher-A1 and Inner Finisher Additional Tray- A1 Are Attached
Do Not Collate, Collate (Page Order), Offset*, Group(Same
Pages), Offset Group, Staple (Corner)
If the Staple Finisher-C1 or Booklet Finisher-C1, and Buffer Pass Unit-G1 Are Attached Do Not Collate, Collate (Page Order), Offset*, Group
(Same Pages), Offset Group, Staple (Corner: Top
Left, Bottom Left, Top Right, Bottom Right), (Double:
Left, Right)
Device information
DeliveryAvailable
No*3
No*3
No*3
No*3
No*3
No*3
No*3
No*3
No*3
No*3
No*3
No*3
No*3
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
XXXIX
Appendix > List of User Mode > Function Settings > Common
Appendix > List of User Mode > Function Settings > Common
Item
If the Staple Finisher-C1 or Booklet Finisher-C1, Buffer Pass Unit-G1, and External 2/3
Hole Puncher-B1 Are Attached
2-Sided Printing
Delete File After Printing
Merge and Print
Output Report Default Settings
2-Sided Printing
Register Form
Superimpose Image Quality Priority
Register Characters for Page No./Watermark
Copy Set Numbering Option Settings
Number Option ON
ID/User Name
Date
Text
Secure Watermark/Document Scan Lock*1
Forced Secure Watermark/Doc. Scan Lock
Copy
Mail Box
Printer
Printer Driver Watermark/Doc. Scan Lock
Adjust Background/Character Contrast
Standard Value Settings
Relative Contrast
Standard Value Settings
Latent Area Density:
Scan Settings
Timing to Raise Feeder Tray*1
Feeder Jam Recovery Method*1
Scanner Noise Settings*1
Streak Prevention
Black Scan Speed/Image Quality Priority
LTRR/STMT Original Detection
Remote Scan Data Compression Ratio
Remote Scan Gamma Value
Auto Online
Auto Online
Generate File
Setting Description
Device information
DeliveryAvailable
No
No
No
On, Off*
Register, Delete, Check Print, Details
Auto*, Original Priority, Form Priority
Register,Edit, Delete
On, Off*
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
On, Off*
On, Off*
On, Off*
Yes
Yes
Yes
XL
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Appendix > List of User Mode > Function Settings > Common
XL
Appendix > List of User Mode > Function Settings > Copy
Item
Setting Description
XLI
Device information
DeliveryAvailable
Yes
Yes
On*, Off
1 to 24*
Yes
Yes
On, Off
Normal, Moderate, High
Data Size Priority, Normal, Image Quality Priority
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
T-10-13
Copy
* Default Settings
Item
Register/Edit Favorite Settings
Change Default Settings
Register [Options] Shortcuts
Shortcut 1
Shortcut 2
Shortcut 3
Shortcut 4
Shortcut 5
Set Express Copy Shortcuts
Shortcut 1
Shortcut 2
Shortcut 3
Shortcut 4
Shortcut 5
Shortcut 6
Auto Collate
Auto Orientation
Select Color Settings for Copy
Use [Auto(Color/Black)]
Setting Description
Device Information
Delivery Available
No
No
Finishing*, No Settings
2-Sided*, No Settings
Density* No Settings
Original Type*, No Settings
No Settings*
No
No
No
No
No
No Settings*
No
No Settings*
No Settings*
No Settings*
No Settings*
No Settings*
On* Off
On* Off
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
On* Off
Yes
Appendix > List of User Mode > Function Settings > Copy
XLI
Appendix > List of User Mode > Function Settings > Send
Item
Device Information
Delivery Available
Setting Description
XLII
On* Off
Yes
T-10-14
Printer
* Default Settings
*1 Indicates items that appear only when the appropriate optional equipment is attached.
Item
Device Information
Delivery Available
Setting Description
Print Report
PCL
Configuration Page
Font List
PS
RGB Test Print
CMY Test Print
RGB Color Chart
CMYK Color Chart
Restricting Printer Jobs
PDL Selection (Plug-nplay)*1
Print
Print
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
No
Print
Print
Print
Print
On, Off*
UFR II,PCL5e, PCL5c, PCL6, PS3, FAX
T-10-15
Send
* Default Setting
*1 Indicates items that appear only when the appropriate optional equipment is attached.
*4 Indicates item that appears only if the Super G3 2nd Line Fax Board is installed in addition to installing the Super G3 FAX Board.
*5 Indicates item that appears only if the Super G3 3rd/4th Line Fax Board is installed in addition to installing the Super G3 FAX Board.
Item
Print Report
TX/RX User Data List
Fax User Data List*1
Print
Common Settings
Register Favorite Settings Edit Favorite Settings
Show Comment
Display Confirmation for Favorite Settings
Change Default Screen
Change Default Settings
Register [Options] Shortcuts
Shortcut 1
Shortcut 2
Setting Description
Device Information
Delivery Available
No
No
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
2-Sided*, No Settings
Different Size Originals*, No Settings
No
No
Appendix > List of User Mode > Function Settings > Send
XLII
Appendix > List of User Mode > Function Settings > Send
Item
TX Report
Report with TX Image
Report with Color TX Image
Communication Activity Report
Auto Print (100 Transmissions)
Specify Print Time
Timer Setting
Send/Receive Separate
TX Terminal ID
Setting Description
XLIII
Device Information
Delivery Available
Yes
Yes
Yes
On*, Off
On, Off*
00 : 00 to 23 : 59(00 : 00*)
On, Off*
On*, Off
TX Terminal ID: On
Printing Position: Outside
Display Destination Unit Name: On
Telephone # Mark*1: FAX
On*, Off
0 to 5times(3times*)
Compact, Normal*, Low Ratio
Gamma 1.0, Gamma 1.4, Gamma 1.8*, Gamma 2.2
On*, Off
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
On, Off*
On, Off*
On, Off*
On, Off*
On, Off*
On, Off*
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
24 characters maximum
No
On*, Off
On* Off
Server name or IP Address(48characters maximum)
64 characters maximum
Server name or IP Address(48characters maximum)
32 characters maximum
32 characters maximum
0* to 99(If the interval is set to 0, the incoming e-mail is not
checked automatically.)
Standard*/APOP/POP AUTH
On, Off*
On, Off*
User name for SMTP authentication(64 characters maximum)
Password for SMTP authentication(32 characters maximum)
On, Off*
On, Off*
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
Appendix > List of User Mode > Function Settings > Send
XLIII
Appendix > List of User Mode > Function Settings > Send
Item
Display Auth. Screen When Send
Allow SSL(SMTP Receive)
Maximum Data Size for Sending
Default Subject
Use SMTP Authentication for Each User
Specify Authentication User Dest. to Reply
Set Authorized User Destination to Sender
Allow Sending to Unregistered Destinations
Full Mode TX Timeout
Print MDN/DSN upon Receipt
Use Send via Server
Allow MDN Not via Server
Restrict TX Destination Domain
Restrict TX Destination Domains
Permitted Domains
Change Default Screen
Change Default Settings
Register [Options] Shortcuts
Shortcut 1
Shortcut 2
Shortcut 3
Shortcut 4
Register Sender Name (TTI)
ECM TX
Set Pause Time
Auto Redial
Redial Times
Redial Interval
Redial When TX Error
Check Dial Tone Before Sending
Fax TX Report
Report with TX Image
Fax Activity Report
Auto Print (40 Transmissions)
Specify Print Time
Timer Setting
Send/Receive Separate
Set Line
Register User Telephone No.
Register Unit Name
Select Line Type
Setting Description
XLIV
Device Information
Delivery Available
On*, Off
Always SSL,On, Off*
0=(Off)/1 to 99 MB(3MB*)
40 characters maximum(Attached Image*)
On*, Off
On, Off*
On*, Off
On, Off*
1 to 99hours(24hours*)
On, Off*
On, Off*
On*, Off
No
No
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
On, Off*
Register, Details/Edit, Delete
Standard*, Address Book
Register, Initialize
Yes
No
No
No
Density*, No Settings
Original Type*, No Settings
2-Sided Original*, No Settings
Different Size Originals*, No Settings
01 to 99 : Register/Edit, Delete
On, Off
1 to 15seconds(2seconds*)
On, Off
1 to 15times(2times*)
2 to 99minutes(2minutes*)
Error and 1st page*, All pages, Off
On*, Off
For Error Only*,On, Off
On*, Off
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
On*, Off
On, Off*
00 : 00 to 23 : 59(00 : 00*)
On, Off*
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
20 digits maximum
24 characters maximum
Pulse, Tone*
No
No
No
Appendix > List of User Mode > Function Settings > Send
XLIV
Appendix > List of User Mode > Function Settings > Send
Item
Line (2 to 8)
Select TX Line
TX Start Speed
PIN Code Access
Line1
Line2*8
Line3*9
Line4*9
Confirm Entered Fax Numbers
Allow Fax Driver TX
Remote Fax TX Settings
Remote Fax Server Address
TX Timeout
Select TX Line
Select Priority Line
Remote Fax Settings
Use Remote Fax
Setting Description
XLV
Device Information
Delivery Available
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
No
No
On*, Off
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
T-10-16
Appendix > List of User Mode > Function Settings > Send
XLV
Appendix > List of User Mode > Function Settings > Receive/Forward
XLVI
Receive/Forward
* Default Setting
*1 Indicates items that appear only when the appropriate optional equipment is attached.
*7 Indicates item that is not delivered as device information.
Receive Type, Details/Edit, Delete, Print List, E-Mail Priority
Item
Print Report
TX/RX User Data List
Fax User Data List*1
Common Settings
Print on Both Side
Select Drawer
SwitchA
SwitchB
SwitchC
SwitchD
Reduce Fax RX Size
2 On 1 Log
Received Page Footer
YCbCr RX Gamma Value
Handle Files with Forwarding Errors
Forwarding Settings
Setting Description
Device Information
Delivery Available
Print
Print
No
No
On, Off*
Yes
On*, Off
On*, Off
On*, Off
On*, Off
On*, Off
On
Reduction Mode: Auto
Reduction %: 90%
Reduction Direction: Vertical Only
On, Off*
On, Off*
Gamma 1.0, Gamma 1.4, Gamma 1.8*, Gamma 2.2
Always Print, Store/Print, Off*
Receive Type, Validate/Invalidate, Register (Registered
Forwarding Settings), Forward w/o Conditions, E-Mail Priority,
Details/Edit, Delete, Print List
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
00 to 49
24 characters maximum
Seven digits maximum
Seven digit number
On, Off*
On, Off*
Everyday, Select Days, Off*
Everyday, Select Days, Off*
0 to 99 hours(24hours*)
*On, Off
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes*11
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Appendix > List of User Mode > Function Settings > Receive/Forward
XLVI
Appendix > List of User Mode > Function Settings > Store/Access Files
Item
ECM RX
Fax RX Report
Confidential Fax Inbox RX Report
Receive Start Speed
Receive Password
Setting Description
Device Information
Delivery Available
*On, Off
For Error Only,On, Off*
On*, Off
33600 bps*,14400 bps,9600 bps,7200 bps,4800 bps,2400 bps
20 digits maximum
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
XLVII
T-10-17
Store/Access Files
* Default Setting
Item
Common Settings
Scan and Store Settings
Register/Edit Favorite Settings
Change Default Settings
Settings of Access Stored File
Register/Edit Favorite Settings
Change Default Settings
Mail Box Settings
Mail Box Settings
Mail Box No.
Register Box Name
PIN
Time Until Document Auto Delete
URL Send Settings
Print upon Storing from Printer Driver
Initialize
Settings for All Mail Boxes
Time Until Document Auto Delete
Print upon Storing from Printer Driver
Advanced Box Settings
Open to Public
Allow to Create Personal Space
WebDAV ServerSettings
Authentication Type
Use SSL
Delete All Personal Spaces
Initialize Shared Space
Prohibit Writing from External
Authentication Management
File Formats Allowed for Storing
Network Settings
Network Place Settings
Setting Description
Device Information
Delivery Available
No
No
No
No
00 to 99
24 characters maximum
Seven digits
0 (Off), 1, 2, 3*, 6, 12 hours, 1, 2, 3, 7, 30 days
On, Off*
-
No
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Basic,Off*
On, Off*
Delete
Initialize
On*, Off
On, Off*
Printable Formats Only, Common Office Formats, All
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Appendix > List of User Mode > Function Settings > Store/Access Files
XLVII
Appendix > List of User Mode > Set Destination > Set Destination
XLVIII
Item
Protocol for External Reference
SMB
WebDAB
Setting Description
On*, Off
On*, Off
Device Information
Delivery Available
Yes
Yes
T-10-18
Device Information
Delivery Available
Setting Description
On, Off*
Yes
T-10-19
Set Destination
Set Destination
* Default Setting
*1 Indicates items that appear only when the appropriate optional equipment is attached.
Item
Address List
Register Destinations
Register Address List Name
Register One-touch
Change Default Display of Address Book
Address Book PIN
Manage Address Book Access Number
Register LDAP Server
Auto Search When Using LDAP Server
Acquire Remote Address Book
Remote Address Book Server Address
Communication Timeout
Fax TX Line Auto Select Adjustment
Make Remote Address Book Open
Make Remote Address Book Open
Setting Description
Device Information
Delivery Available
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
On, Off*
Yes
No
T-10-20
XLVIII
Appendix > List of User Mode > Set Destination > Set Destination
Appendix > List of User Mode > Management Settings > Device Management
XLIX
Management Settings
User Management
* Default Settings
*1 Indicates items that appear only when the appropriate optional equipment is attached.
Item
Setting Description
Device Information
Delivery Available
Contact Information
Comment
Department ID Management
Department ID Management
Register PIN
Page Totals
Allow Printer Jobs With Unknown IDs
Allow Remote Scan Jobs With Unknown IDs
Allow Black Copy/ Mail Box Print Jobs
Allow Black Printer Jobs
32 characters maximum
32 characters maximum
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
On, Off*
Register, Edit, Delete, Limit Functions
Clear, Print List, Clear All Totals, Large2 Count Management
On*, Off
On*, Off
On, Off*
On, Off*
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
T-10-21
Device Management
* Default Settings
*1 Indicates items that appear only when the appropriate optional equipment is attached.
Item
Device Information Settings
Device Name
Location
Device Information Delivery Settings
Register Destinations
Setting Description
32 characters maximum
32 characters maximum
Device Information
Delivery Available
No
No
Appendix > List of User Mode > Management Settings > Device Management
XLIX
Appendix > List of User Mode > Management Settings > Device Management
Item
Address Book
Printer Settings
Paper Information
Manual Delivery
Settings/Registration Value
Dept. ID
Address Book
Printer Settings
Paper Information
Restrictions for Receiving Device Info.
Restore Data
Receive Restriction for Each Function
Settings/Registration Value
Dept. ID
Address Book
Printer Settings
Paper Information
Communication Log
Setting Description
Device Information
Delivery Available
On, Off*
On, Off*
On, Off*
On, Off*
Network Settings: Include,Exclude
On, Off*
On, Off*
On, Off*
On, Off*
On*, Off
Settings/Registration Value,Dept. ID,Address Book,Printer Settings,Paper Information
On*, Off
On*, Off
On*, Off
On*, Off
On*, Off
Details, Print List, Report Settings
Report Settings
Auto Print (100 transmissions): On*, Off
Specify Print Time: On, Off*
00: 00* to 23:59
Separate Report Type: On, Off*
On, Off*
Partial Functions*, All Functions
Certificate Details: Certificate
Certificate Details: Certificate
No
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Appendix > List of User Mode > Management Settings > Device Management
Appendix > List of User Mode > Management Settings > License/Other
Item
Certificate Details
Delete
Display Use Location
Certificate Settings: Key and Certificate List: Key and Certificate List for Users*
Certificate Details
Delete
Certificate Settings: CA Certificate List
Certificate Details
Delete
Certificate Settings:Register Key and Certificate
Register
Delete
Certificate Settings:Register CA Certificate
Register
Delete
Display Asterisks For Confidential Info.
Display Status Before Authentication
Job Log Display
Setting Description
Version/Serial Number/Signature Algorithm/Issue
Destination/Start Date of Validity/End Date of Validity/Issuer/
Public Key/Cert. Thumbprint/Certificate
Displays what the key pair is being used for
Version/Serial Number/Signature Algorithm/Issue Destination/
Start Date of Validity/End Date of Validity/Issuer/Public Key/
Cert. Thumbprint/Certificate
Version/Serial Number/Signature Algorithm/Issue Destination/
Start Date of Validity/End Date of Validity/Issuer/Public Key/
Cert. Thumbprint/Certificate
Key Name (24 characters maximum)
Password (24 characters maximum)
On*, Off
On*, Off
On*, Off
On
Obtain Job Log From Management Software: Permit,
Do Not Allow*
LI
Device Information
Delivery Available
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
No
No
No
T-10-22
License/Other
* Default Settings
*1 Indicates items that appear only when the appropriate optional equipment is attached.
Item
Register License
MEAP Settings
Print System Information
Use SSL
Remote UI
Setting Description
Device Information
Delivery Available
24 characters maximum
No
Print
On, Off*
On
Use SSL:On, Off*
On*, Off
No
No
No
Yes
Appendix > List of User Mode > Management Settings > License/Other
LI
Appendix > List of User Mode > Management Settings > Data Management
Item
Use SSL
Device Information
Delivery Available
Setting Description
On, Off*
On
Use SSL:On, Off*
On, Off*
Clear
LII
No
No
Yes
No
T-10-23
Data Management
* Default Settings
*1 Indicates items that appear only when the appropriate optional equipment is attached.
Item
HDD Data Complete Deletion*
Timing of Deletion
Deletion Mode
Setting Description
During Job*, After Job
Overwrite Once With 0 (Null) Data*, Overwrite 1 Time With
Random Data, Overwrite 3 Times With Random Data,DOD
Standard
License cannot be reused
Backup TPM Key, Restore TPM Key
Device Information
Delivery Available
No
No
No
No
T-10-24
Appendix > List of User Mode > Management Settings > Data Management
LII
LIII
Data
Location
When
Replacing
HDD /
Executing
All
Format
When
Replacing
Main PCB
1
Main PCB
When
Replacing
Main PCB
2
When
Replacing
TPM PCB
User mode
Initialize
All
Data/
Settings
Function
> CLEAR
> MNCONT
Function
> CLEAR
> DC-CON
Function
> CLEAR
> R-CON
User Backup
Function
Function
Function
> CLEAR
> CLEAR > CLEAR
> JV> ADRS-BK
> MMI
CASHE
Can Data
Be
Backed
up?
Method
Location to
Be
Stored
Can Data
Be
Backed
up?
PC
No
---
---
PC
Yes
SST
(Sramimg)
PC
Method
Location
to Be
Stored
Address Book
HDD
Clear
---
---
---
Clear
---
---
---
---
Clear
---
Yes
Forwarding Settings
HDD/
Clear
SRAM
(M-CON2)
---
Clear
---
Clear
Clear
---
---
Clear
---
---
Yes
SRAM
--(M-CON2/
D-CON)
---
Clear
---
Clear
Clear
Clear*1 ---
Clear
---
---
Yes*2
Remote UI
(Export/Import)
PC
Yes
SST
(Sramimg)
PC
SRAM
--(M-CON2)
SRAM
--(M-CON2/
D-CON)
---
Clear
---
Clear
Clear
---
Clear
---
---
Yes
PC
Yes
Clear
---
Clear
Clear
---
---
Yes*3
PC
Yes
SST
(Sramimg)
SST
(Sramimg)
PC
---
Remote UI
(Export/Import)
Remote UI
(Export/Import)
---
Clear
---
Clear
Clear
---
---
Clear
---
---
Yes
PC
Yes
---
Clear
---
Clear
Clear
---
---
Clear
---
---
Yes*
PC
Yes
---
Clear
---
Clear
Clear
---
---
Clear
---
---
Yes
PC
Yes
---
---
---
Clear
---
---
---
---
---
---
Yes
PC
No
Setting items for each menu in Main Menu (Copy, Scan and Send, Fax, Scan and Store, Access Stored Files, Fax/I-Fax Inbox)
Favorite Settings
HDD
Clear
------Clear
---------
---
Clear
Yes*1
Remote UI
(Export/Import)
PC
Yes*2
SST
(Sramimg)
PC
Default Settings
HDD
Clear
---
---
---
Clear
---
---
---
---
---
Clear
No
---
---
Yes*
PC
HDD
Clear
---
---
---
Clear
---
---
---
---
---
Clear
No
---
---
Yes*
Previous Settings
HDD
Clear
---
---
---
Clear
---
---
---
---
---
Clear
No
---
---
Yes*
SST
(Sramimg)
SST
(Sramimg)
SST
(Sramimg)
HDD
Clear
---
---
---
Clear
---
---
---
---
---
Clear
Yes
PC
Yes*
Wallpaper Setting
HDD
Clear
---
---
---
Clear
---
---
---
---
---
Clear
Yes
PC
Yes*
HDD
Clear
---
---
---
Clear
---
---
---
---
---
Clear
Yes
PC
Yes*
HDD
Clear
---
---
---
Clear
---
---
---
---
---
Clear
Yes
Remote UI
(Export/Import)
Remote UI
(Export/Import)
Remote UI
(Export/Import)
Remote UI
(Export/Import)
PC
Yes*
HDD
HDD
Clear
Clear
-----
-----
-----
Clear
Clear
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
No
No
-----
-----
HDD
HDD
Clear
Clear
-----
-----
-----
Clear
Clear
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
No
No
-----
-----
Settings/Registration
Preferences
Adjustment/Maintenance
Function Settings
Set Destination
Management Settings
Printer Settings
Paper Information Settings
SRAM
--(M-CON2)
SRAM
--(M-CON2)
SRAM
--(M-CON2)
HDD
Clear
---
Remote UI
(Export/Import)
Remote UI
(Export/Import)
Service Backup
Remote UI
(Export/Import)
Remote UI
(Export/Import)
Remote UI
(Export/Import)
Remote UI
(Export/Import)
SST
(Sramimg)
SST
(Sramimg)
SST
(Sramimg)
---
PC
Backup Data
Remarks
PC
PC
PC
---
PC
PC
SST
(Sramimg)
SST
(Sramimg)
SST
(Sramimg)
SST
(Sramimg)
PC
No
No
-----
-----
No
No
-----
-----
PC
PC
*: If the machine can be activated with download mode in safe mode at the time of
HDD failure, backup of Meapback may be possible in some cases. In this case, install
the system after replacing the HDD, and check that the machine starts normally. Then,
active the download mode in safe mode, and restore the backup data so that data can
be restored while retaining Meapback information.
PC
LIII
LIV
Data to Be Stored
Data
Location
When
Replacing
Main PCB
1
Main PCB
When
Replacing
Main PCB
2
When
Replacing
TPM PCB
User mode
Initialize
All
Data/
Settings
Function
> CLEAR
> MNCONT
Function
> CLEAR
> DC-CON
Function
> CLEAR
> R-CON
User Backup
Function
Function
Function
> CLEAR
> CLEAR > CLEAR
> JV> ADRS-BK
> MMI
CASHE
Can Data
Be
Backed
up?
Method
Service Backup
Location to
Be
Stored
Can Data
Be
Backed
up?
Method
Location
to Be
Stored
Clear
---
---
---
Clear
---
---
---
---
---
---
Yes*
Remote UI
PC
(Backup/Restore)
Yes*
SST
(Sramimg)
PC
Clear
---
---
---
Clear
---
---
---
---
---
---
Yes
Remote UI
PC
(Backup/Restore)
Yes*
SST
(Sramimg)
PC
HDD
Clear
---
---
---
Clear
---
---
---
---
---
---
Yes
Remote UI
PC
(Backup/Restore)
No
---
---
Clear
---
---
---
Clear
---
---
---
---
---
Clear
Yes
Remote UI
(Advanced Box)
PC
Yes*2
SST
(Sramimg)
PC
---
No
---
---
HDD
Clear
---
---
---
Clear
---
---
---
---
---
Clear
No
---
HDD
Clear
---
Clear
---
Clear
Clear
---
---
---
---
---
Yes
Remote UI
PC
(Backup/Restore)
Yes
SST
(Sramimg)
PC
HDD
Clear
---
---
---
Clear
---
---
---
---
---
---
Yes*
Remote UI
(Export/Import)
Yes
SST
(Sramimg)
PC
PC
Remarks
*: If the machine can be activated with download mode in safe mode at the time of HDD
failure, backup of Sramimg may be possible in some cases. In this case, install the
system after replacing the HDD, and check that the machine starts safe mode. Then,
active the download mode in safe mode, and restore the backup data so that data can
be restored while retaining Box information in HDD.
*: If the machine can be activated with download mode in safe mode at the time of HDD
failure, backup of Sramimg may be possible in some cases. In this case, install the
system after replacing the HDD, and check that the machine starts safe mode. Then,
active the download mode in safe mode, and restore the backup data so that data can
be restored while retaining Box information in HDD.
LIV
LV
Data to Be Stored
Data
Location
When
Replacing
Main PCB
1
Main PCB
When
Replacing
Main PCB
2
When
Replacing
TPM PCB
User mode
Initialize
All
Data/
Settings
Function
> CLEAR
> MNCONT
Function
> CLEAR
> DC-CON
Function
> CLEAR
> R-CON
User Backup
Function
Function
Function
> CLEAR
> CLEAR > CLEAR
> JV> ADRS-BK
> MMI
CASHE
Can Data
Be
Backed
up?
Method
Service Backup
Location to
Be
Stored
Can Data
Be
Backed
up?
Method
Location
to Be
Stored
HDD
Clear
---
---
---
Clear
---
---
---
---
---
Clear
No
---
---
Yes
HDD
Clear
---
---
---
Clear
---
---
---
---
---
Clear
Yes
SMS
PC
Yes
HDD
Clear
---
---
---
Clear
---
---
---
---
---
Clear
Yes
SMS
PC
Yes
HDD
Clear
---
---
---
Clear
---
---
---
---
---
Clear
Yes*
---
---
Yes
HDD
Clear
---
---
---
Clear
---
---
---
---
---
Clear
No
---
---
Yes
HDD
Clear
---
---
---
Clear
---
---
---
---
---
---
No
---
---
No
---
---
HDD
HDD
Clear
Clear
-----
-----
-----
Clear
Clear
-----
---
-----
-----
-----
-----
No
No
-----
-----
No
No
-----
-----
Clear
---
Clear
Clear
---
---
---
---
---
No
---
Yes
SST
(Sramimg)
PC
----Clear *2 ---
Clear
Clear
----Clear *2 ---
-----
----Clear *2 ---
-----
No
No *3
-----
-----
No
Yes
--SST
(Sramimg)
--PC
Clear *2 Clear
---
Clear *2 ---
---
Yes *4
Settings/
Registration
mode
(Management
Settings> Data
Management>
TPM Settings)
USB
Yes
memory
SST
(Sramimg)
PC
SRAM
--(M-CON2)
SRAM
--(DC-CON)
---
Clear
---
---
Clear
---
---
---
---
---
No
---
---
Yes
---
---
---
---
---
Clear
---
---
---
---
No
---
---
Yes
EEPROM --(R-CON)
---
---
---
---
---
---
Clear
---
---
---
No
---
---
Yes
SST
PC
(Sramimg)
Service
HDD
mode
COPIER >
FUNCTION
> SYSTEM >
DSRAMBUP
Service
HDD
mode
COPIER >
FUNCTION
> SYSTEM >
RSRAMBUP
PS font
Key information to be used for
encryption when TPM is OFF
HDD
Clear
--(Partially,
SRAM(MCON2))
HDD
Clear
--SRAM
Clear *1 --(M-CON2)
SST
(Meapback)
SST
(Meapback)
SST
(Meapback)
SST
(Meapback)
SST
(Meapback)
Remarks
PC
PC
PC
PC
Data can be backed up only when MEAP application has a backup function.
PC
*1: After clearing the backup key information in the HDD, it is automatically restored from
the key in the SRAM. (M-CON2)
*2: After clearing the key information in the SRAM, it is automatically restored from the
backup key in the HDD.
*1, 2: When replacing the HDD and Main Controller PCB 2 simultaneously, restoring the
key information is not executed automatically.
*3: There is no method to back up to the external devices.
*1: When the TPM setting is "ON", the error code is displayed. After restart and
initialization of all data/settings, it is restored from the error state by setting the TPM
setting to "ON" again.
*2: After executing each CLEAR operation, the key information in the SRAM(M-CON2)
can be automatically restored from the common backup key in the HDD, and the TPM
setting becomes "ON". However, only the UI display is "OFF", so it is required to change
the TPM setting to "ON" manually.
*3: By initializing all data/settings, the TPM setting is changed to "OFF".
*4 :Only the backup for TPM PCB trouble is enabled. Data cannot be restored to the
other devices whose TPM setting is "ON".
T-10-25
LV
LVI
Partition name
CHK-TYPE
FSTDEV
IMG-MNG
FSTCDEV
THUMDEV
APL_GEN
TMP_GEN
TMP_FAX
TMP_PSS
PDLDEV
BOOTDEV
APL_MEAP
APL_SEND
APL_KEEP
APL_LOG
CRBDEV
APL_CDS
Description
HDD Format
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
enable
(CHK-TYPE= 10 is also formatted at same time)
Enabled
Disabled
Enabled
Disabled
Disabled
Enabled
Enabled (CHK-TYPE=1 is also formatted at same time)
Enabled (CHK-TYPE=2 is also formatted at same time)
T-10-26
Data
Preferences
Adjustment/Maintenance
Function Settings
Set Destination
Management Settings
Printer Settings
Paper Information Settings
Favorite Settings
Default Settings
Shortcut settings for Options
Previous Settings
Category
Setting for Advance Box
Setting for Web Access
Setting for Universal Data
Data
User information of Advanced Box
Registration information of Network Place
Web Access Setting information
Unsent document (which is set timer transmission or reservation transmission)
Job log information
Key and server certificate which are registered in Management Settings>Device
Settings>Certificate Setting
Auto Adjust Gradation setting values
PS font
T-10-27
LVI
No.
Counter Details
Remote copy
Total
Copy
Print
Copy and print
Scan
Box
Reception print
Report print
Transmission
T-10-28
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
009
010
011
012
013
014
015
016
017
018
019
020
021
022
023
071
072
073
074
081
082
083
084
091
092
093
094
101
102
103
104
105
106
108
109
110
111
112
LVII
Counter Details
Remote copy (full color 1)
Remote copy (full color 2)
Remote copy (mono color 1)
Remote copy (mono color 2)
Remote copy (black and white 1)
Remote copy (black and white 2)
Remote copy (full color / large)
Remote copy (full color / small)
Remote copy (mono color / large)
Remote copy (mono color / small)
Remote copy (black and white / large)
Remote copy(black and white / small)
Remote copy (full color + mono color / large)
Remote copy(full color + mono color / small)
Remote copy (full color + mono color 2)
Remote copy(full color + mono color 1)
Remote copy (full color / large / double sided)
Remote copy (full color / small / double sided)
Remote copy (mono color / large / double sided)
Remote copy (mono color / small / double sided)
Remote copy (black and white / large / double sided)
Remote copy (black and white / small / double sided)
Toner bottle black
Toner bottle yellow
Toner bottle magenta
Toner bottle cyan
Toner bottle black + Remove the toner bottle black
Toner bottle yellow + Remove the toner bottle yellow
Toner bottle magenta + Remove the toner bottle magenta
Toner bottle cyan + Remove the toner bottle cyan
1/10 Toner bottle black
1/10 Toner bottle yellow
1/10 Toner bottle magenta
1/10 Toner bottle cyan
Total 1
Total 2
Total(large)
Total (small)
Total (full color2)
Total (full color2)
Total (black and white 1)
Total (black and white 2)
Total (mono color /large)
Total (mono color /small)
Total (black and white /large)
LVII
No.
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
Counter Details
Total (black and white /small)
Total 1(double sided)
Total 2(double sided)
large (double sided)
small (double sided)
Total (mono color 1)
Total (mono color 2)
Total (full color /large )
Total (full color /small)
Total (full color +mono color /large )
Total (full color +mono color /small)
Total (full color +mono color 2)
Total (full color +mono color 1)
Total A1
Total A2
Total A (large)
Total A (small)
Total A (full color 1)
Total A (full color 2)
Total A (black and white 1)
Total A (black and white 2)
Total A (mono color /large)
Total A (mono color /small)
Total A (black and white /large)
Total A (black and white /small)
Total A 1(double sided)
Total A 2(double sided)
large A (double sided)
small A (double sided)
Total A (mono color 1)
Total A (mono color 2)
Total A (full color /large )
Total A (full color /small)
Total A (full color +mono color /large )
Total A (full color +mono color /small)
Total A (full color +mono color 2)
Total A (full color +mono color 1)
Total B1
Total B2
Total B (large)
Total B (small)
Total B (full color 1)
Total B (full color 2)
Total B (black and white 1)
Total B (black and white 2)
No.
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
LVIII
Counter Details
Total B (mono color /large)
Total B (mono color /small)
Total B (black and white /large)
Total B (black and white /small)
Total B1 (double sided)
Total B2 (double sided)
largeB (double sided)
smallB (double sided)
Total B (mono color 1)
Total B (mono color 2)
Total B (full color /large )
Total B (full color /small)
Total B (full color +mono color /large )
Total B (full color +mono color /small)
Total B (full color +mono color 2)
Total B (full color +mono color 1)
Copy (Total 1)
Copy (Total 2)
Copy (large)
Copy (small)
Copy A (Total 1)
Copy A (Total 2)
Copy A (large)
Copy A (small)
Local copy (Total 1)
Local copy (Total 2)
Local copy (large)
Local copy (small)
Remote copy (Total 1)
Remote copy (Total 2)
Remote copy (large)
Remote copy (small)
Copy (full color 1)
Copy (full color 2)
Copy (mono color 1)
Copy (mono color 2)
Copy (black and white 1)
Copy (black and white 2)
Copy (full color /large)
Copy (full color /small)
Copy (mono color /large)
Copy (mono color /small)
Copy (black and white /large)
Copy (black and white /small)
Copy (full color +mono color /large)
LVIII
No.
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
252
253
254
255
256
257
258
259
260
261
262
263
264
265
266
273
274
275
276
277
278
279
280
281
282
283
284
285
286
Counter Details
Copy (full color +mono color /small)
Copy (full color +mono color /2)
Copy (full color +mono color /1)
Copy (full color /large/double sided )
Copy (full color /small/double sided )
Copy (mono color /large/double sided )
Copy (mono color /small/double sided )
Copy (black and white /large/double sided )
Copy (black and white /small/double sided )
Copy A (full color 1)
Copy A (full color 2)
Copy A (mono color 1)
Copy A (mono color 2)
Copy A (black and white 1)
Copy A (black and white 2)
Copy A (full color /large)
Copy A (full color /small)
Copy A (mono color /large)
Copy A (mono color /small)
Copy A (black and white /large)
Copy A (black and white /small)
Copy A (full color +mono color /large)
Copy A (full color +mono color /small)
Copy A (full color +mono color 2)
Copy A (full color +mono color 1)
Copy A (full color /large/double sided )
Copy A (full color /small/double sided )
Copy A (mono color /large/double sided )
Copy A (mono color /small/double sided )
Copy A (black and white /large/double sided )
Copy A (black and white /small/double sided )
Local copy (full color 1)
Local copy (full color 2)
Local copy (mono color 1)
Local copy (mono color 2)
Local copy (black and white 1)
Local copy (black and white 2)
Local copy (full color /large)
Local copy (full color /small)
Local copy (mono color /large)
Local copy (mono color /small)
Local copy (black and white /large)
Local copy (black and white /small)
Local copy (full color +mono color /large)
Local copy (full color +mono color /small)
No.
287
288
289
290
291
292
293
294
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
308
309
310
311
312
313
314
315
316
317
318
319
320
321
322
323
324
325
326
327
328
329
330
331
332
333
334
335
336
339
LIX
Counter Details
Local copy (full color +mono color 2)
Local copy (full color +mono color 1)
Local copy (full color /large/double sided )
Local copy (full color /small/double sided )
Local copy (mono color /large/double sided )
Local copy (mono color /small/double sided )
Local copy (black and white /large/double sided )
Local copy (black and white /small/double sided )
Print (Total 1)
Print (Total 2)
Print (large )
Print (small)
Print A(Total 1)
Print A(Total 2)
Print A(large )
Print A(small)
Print (full color 1)
Print (full color 2)
Print (mono color 1)
Print (mono color 2)
Print (black and white 1)
Print (black and white 2)
Print (full color /large )
Print (full color /small)
Print (mono color /large )
Print (mono color /small)
Print (black and white /large )
Print (black and white /small)
Print (full color +mono color /large )
Print (full color +mono color /small)
Print (full color +mono color /2)
Print (full color +mono color /1)
Print (full color /large /double sided)
Print (full color /small/double sided)
Print (mono color /large /double sided)
Print (mono color /small/double sided)
Print (black and white /large /double sided)
Print (black and white /small/double sided)
PDLPrint (Total 1)
PDLPrint (Total 2)
PDLPrint (large )
PDLPrint (small)
PDLPrint (full color 1)
PDLPrint (full color 2)
PDLPrint (black and white 1)
LIX
No.
340
341
342
345
346
351
352
355
356
401
402
403
404
405
406
407
408
409
410
411
412
413
414
415
416
417
418
419
420
421
422
501
502
503
504
505
506
507
508
509
510
511
512
601
602
Counter Details
PDLPrint (black and white 2)
PDLPrint (full color /large )
PDLPrint (full color /small)
PDLPrint (black and white /large )
PDLPrint (black and white /small)
PDLPrint (full color /large /double sided)
DLPrint (full color /small/double sided)
PDLPrint (black and white /large /double sided)
PDLPrint (black and white /small/double sided)
Copy + print (full color /large)
Copy + print (full color /small)
Copy + print (black and white/large)
Copy + print (black and white/small)
Copy + print (black and white2)
Copy + print (black and white1)
Copy + print (full color +mono color /large)
Copy + print (full color +mono color /small)
Copy + print (full color +mono color /2)
Copy + print (full color +mono color /1)
Copy + print (large)
Copy + print (small)
Copy + print (2)
Copy + print (1)
Copy + print (mono color /large)
Copy + print (mono color /small)
Copy + print (full color /large/double sided)
Copy + print (full color /small/double sided)
Copy + print (mono color /large/double sided)
Copy + print (mono color /small/double sided)
Copy + print (black and white/large/double sided)
Copy + print (black and white/small/double sided
Scan (Total 1)
Scan (Total 2)
Scan (large)
Scan (small )
Black and white Scan (Total 1)
Black and white Scan (Total 2)
Black and white Scan (large)
Black and white Scan (small )
Color scan (Total 1)
Color scan (Total 2)
Color scan (large)
Color scan (small )
Box print (Total 1)
Box print (Total 2)
No.
603
604
605
606
607
608
609
610
611
612
613
614
615
616
617
618
619
620
621
622
623
624
625
626
701
702
703
704
705
706
709
710
711
712
715
716
721
722
725
726
727
728
729
730
731
LX
Counter Details
Box print (large)
Box print (small)
Box print (full color 1)
Box print (full color 2)
Box print (mono color 1)
Box print (mono color 2)
Box print (black and white 1)
Box print (black and white 2)
Box print (full color /large)
Box print (full color /small)
Box print (mono color /large)
Box print (mono color /small)
Box print (black and white /large)
Box print (black and white /small)
Box print (full color +mono color /large)
Box print (full color +mono color /small)
Box print (full color +mono color 2)
Box print (full color +mono color 1)
Box print (full color /large/double sided )
Box print (full color /small/double sided )
Box print (mono color /large/double sided )
Box print (mono color /small/double sided )
Box print (black and white /large/double sided )
Box print (black and white /small/double sided )
Reception print (Total 1)
Reception print (Total 2)
Reception print (large)
Reception print (small)
Reception print (full color 1)
Reception print (full color 2)
Reception print (black and white 1)
Reception print (black and white 2)
Reception print (full color /large)
Reception print (full color /small)
Reception print (black and white /large)
Reception print (black and white /small)
Reception print (full color /large/double sided)
Reception print (full color /small/double sided)
Reception print (black and white /large/double sided)
Reception print (black and white /small/double sided)
Advanced Box Print (Total 1)
Advanced Box Print (Total 2)
Advanced Box Print(large)
Advanced Box Print(small)
Advanced Box Print (full color 1)
LX
No.
732
733
734
735
736
737
738
739
740
741
742
743
744
745
746
747
748
749
750
751
752
753
754
755
756
757
758
759
760
761
762
763
764
765
766
767
768
769
770
771
772
773
774
801
802
Counter Details
Advanced Box Print (full color 2)
Advanced Box Print(black and white 1)
Advanced Box Print(black and white 2)
Advanced Box Print(full color/large)
Advanced Box Print(full color/small)
Advanced Box Print(mono color /large)
Advanced Box Print(mono color /small)
Advanced Box Print(full color /large/double sided)
Advanced Box Print(full color /small/double sided)
Advanced Box Print(black and white /large/double sided)
Advanced Box Print(black and white /small/double sided)
Network Print(Total 1)
Network Print(Total 2)
Network Print(large)
Network Print(small)
Network Print(full color 1)
Network Print(full color 2)
Network Print(black and white 1)
Network Print(black and white 2)
Network Print(full color/large)
Network Print(full color/small)
Network Print(mono color /large)
Network Print(black and white/small)
Network Print(full color /large/double sided)
Network Print(full color /small/double sided)
Network Print(black and white /large/double sided)
Network Print(black and white /small/double sided)
Mobile Print(Total 1)
Mobile Print(Total 2)
Mobile Print(large)
Mobile Print(small)
Mobile Print(full color 1)
Mobile Print(full color 2)
Mobile Print(black and white 1)
Mobile Print(black and white 2)
Mobile Print(full color/large)
Mobile Print(full color/small)
Mobile Print(black and white /large)
Mobile Print(black and white/small)
Mobile Print(full color /large/double sided)
Mobile Print(full color /small/double sided)
Mobile Print(black and white /large/double sided)
Mobile Print(black and white /small/double sided)
Report print (Total 1)
Report print (Total 2)
No.
Counter Details
803
804
805
806
809
810
811
812
815
816
821
822
825
826
915
916
917
918
921
922
929
930
937
938
939
940
945
946
959
960
961
962
963
964
965
LXI
T-10-29
LXI